diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2019-07-25 22:32:37 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2019-07-25 22:32:37 +0000 |
| commit | 40540b1196d9c22b71c7452ea1f0a248ced459b0 (patch) | |
| tree | 7b0cc60a6457ef8f8240ec4334d320ef027891e4 /Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev | |
| parent | 5836409b7166d9802798637bd301368113a1c64f (diff) | |
latex-dev formats: latex-base-dev (including latex-doc-dev), latex-graphics-dev, and corresponding texmf.cnf/fmtutil.cmf updates
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@51730 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev')
90 files changed, 37944 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README-doc.md b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README-doc.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..aaf48be9188 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README-doc.md @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +Documentation for the LaTeX kernel +================================== + +Release 2019-10-01 pre-release 2 + +Overview +-------- + +This bundle provides the core documentation supporting the LaTeX kernel. + +For historical reasons, the base distribution and the core documentation +are bundled separately. Documentation is found in the `doc` bundle. In an +installed TeX system, `base` and `doc` should be placed within the same +location; the distinction is therefore primarily of importance when looking +at the development code. + +License +------- + +The contents of this bundle are distributed under the [LaTeX Project +Public License](https://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c/), +version 1.3c or later. + +----- + +<p>Copyright (C) 2019 The LaTeX3 Project <br /> +<a href="http://latex-project.org/">http://latex-project.org/</a> <br /> +All rights reserved.</p> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README.md b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fc5e0b50801 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +The LaTeX kernel +================ + +Release 2019-10-01 pre-release 2 + +Overview +-------- + +This bundle provides the core LaTeX kernel. In addition to this bundle, +a minimal LaTeX system also needs the files contained in the + +- LaTeX team documentation (`doc`) +- Packages which must be available (`required`). These are + - Essential tools (`tools`) + - Core graphics and color support (`graphics`) + - Key mathematics support (`amsmath`) + +This file contains a small set of pointers to other more complete +documentation on installing and using a LaTeX system. + +Documentation +------------- + +Full documentation of the LaTeX system is provided by + +- _LaTeX: A Document Preparation System_; Lamport, Addison-Wesley +- _The LaTeX Companion_, 2ed; Mittelbach and Goossens with Braams, Carlisle + and Rowley, Addison-Wesley +- _Guide to LaTeX_, 4ed; Kopka and Daly, Addison-Wesley + +The distribution is described in files ending `.txt` or `.md`; briefly, +the most significant of these files are + +- `README.md` is this file +- `manifest.txt` lists all the files in this LaTeX distribution, + with one line of information about the contents +- `unpacked.txt` lists all the files in the unpacked LaTeX distribution +- `legal.txt` and `lppl.txt` (LaTeX Project Public License) describe the + LaTeX copyright, warranty and copying restrictions. +- `patches.txt` describes the how important changes will be distributed + between releases +- `texpert.txt` contains information about the system that may still be + useful for TeX experts +- `tex2.txt` contains important information for users of extremely + old versions of TeX (pre 1990) +- `autoload.txt` describes a variant of LaTeX that is no longer supported +- `bugs.txt` describes how to submit a bug report for LaTeX + +Other documentation files include files with names of the form: + + <xxx>guide.tex + +You will probably need to update your system before you can typeset +these files. Each file needs three LaTeX runs. Some of these are +also available as PDF files on [CTAN](https://www.ctan.org). + +The following files contain further information: + +- `ltx3info.tex` gives you some historical information about the LaTeX3 + project +- `manual.err` lists errata in _LaTeX: A Document Preparation System_ (Lamport) +- `tlc2.err` lists errata in _The LaTeX Companion_ (Mittelbach et al.) + +The files `ltnews*.tex` (part of the `doc` bundle) contain the LaTeX +newsletters, the highest number being the most recent. + +For historical reasons, the base distribution and the core documentation +are bundled separately. Documentation is found in the `doc` bundle. In an +installed TeX system, `base` and `doc` should be placed within the same +location; the distinction is therefore primarily of importance when looking +at the development code. + +Installation +------------ + +We no longer distribute installation instructions for the various TeX +implementations. All modern TeX systems include LaTeX as-standard, and end +users should in general use the release versions supplied in this way. + +Release distribution is carried out only through the CTAN archives. + +Requirements +------------ + +The LaTeX kernel requires the e-TeX extensions to TeX, which were finalised +in the late 1990s and are available in modern TeX-derived engines. Some new +features require `\ifincsname`, which is currently available in release +versions of pdfTeX, XeTeX and LuaTeX, and is being introduced shortly in +e-pTeX and e-upTeX. + +License +------- + +The contents of this bundle are distributed under the [LaTeX Project +Public License](https://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c/), +version 1.3c or later. + +----- + +<p>Copyright (C) 1989-2019 The LaTeX Project <br /> +<a href="http://latex-project.org/">http://latex-project.org/</a> <br /> +All rights reserved.</p> + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/TEMPLATE-IncludeInRelease.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/TEMPLATE-IncludeInRelease.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ae509a90f7d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/TEMPLATE-IncludeInRelease.txt @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +%</2ekernel> +%<*2ekernel|latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{2019/10/01}% +%<latexrelease> {\XXX}{Info}% + + + + + + +%</2ekernel|latexrelease> +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<latexrelease>\IncludeInRelease{0000/00/00}% +%<latexrelease> {\XXX}{Info}% + +%<latexrelease> + +%<latexrelease>\EndIncludeInRelease +%<*2ekernel> diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/alltt.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/alltt.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..021c5fb92d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/alltt.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/bugs.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/bugs.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..86bdb734c8a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/bugs.txt @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + LaTeX Error Reports + + January 2017 + +ERROR REPORTS + +Before you report an error, please check that: + + * Your LaTeX system is not too old, i.e., your version is the + current or the previous release. Information about the latest + release can be found at + https://www.latex-project.org/news/latex2e-news/ + + * The error is not already mentioned in the documentation of the + distribution, e.g. in a .dtx file (in this case it is a feature :-). + + * The error has not already been reported. If you have WWW + access, you can search the LaTeX bugs database using this URL: + + https://www.latex-project.org/bugs.html + + * The error is not caused by software other than the core LaTeX + software that is produced and maintained by the LaTeX3 project + team. Please report problems with other software to the authors + or suppliers of that software, and not to us! + + Thus you should check that the problem is not caused by, for + example, the viewer or printing software you use. + + Also, the test file demonstrating the error should not use any + classes or packages other than those authored and supported by the + LaTeX3 team. The files for the package or class will tell you how + it is supported. The test file should use the package latexbug to + check that all packages in the file are supported by the LaTeX3 + Project (see the discussion on the website why this is important). + + * The error is not caused by using an obsolete version of any file or + of other software. + + * You are using the original version of all files, not one that has + been modified elsewhere. + +If you think you have found a genuine bug in a recent version of the +core LaTeX software, please report it in the following way: + + * Prepare a *short* test file, as described above, that clearly + demonstrates your problem; see below for a discussion of `short'. + + * Run this file through latex to obtain the transcript file + (often .log) since you will need to submit this file also. + + + Submit the test and transcript files through the Web interface at: + + https://www.latex-project.org/bugs/bugs-upload.html + + Please fill in all required fields; in particular, make sure + that your name, email address, and the summary description + are correct (the email address will not be shared or made public). + + + + + +DOCUMENTATION ERRORS + +If you find an error in one of the following books: + + TITLE Author Errata File + + The LaTeX Manual, 2ed Lamport manual.err + The LaTeX Companion, 2ed Mittelbach, Goossens, et al tlc2.err + The LaTeX Graphics + Companion Goossens, Mittelbach, Rahtz grphcomp.err + Der LaTeX Begleiter, 2ed Mittelbach, Goossens, et al lb2.err + The LaTeX Web Companion Goossens, Rahtz webcomp.err + + +then please check first whether it is already mentioned in the errata +file for that book (these files are part of the LaTeX distribution). +If this is not the case then please report the error to the address +given in that corresponding errata file. + +Please *do not* send such reports to the latex-bugs address. + + +--- Copyright 1997,1998,2006,2008,2017 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved --- + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9568b6fac11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7ac0208ba4c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cfgguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,561 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: cfgguide.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] + +\newcommand{\filesection}[1]{\subsection{\sffamily{#1}}} +\newcommand{\iniTeX}{ini\TeX} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} + +\title{Configuration options for \LaTeXe} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 1998, 2001, 2003 \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{14 February 2003} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\newpage + +\section{Configuring \LaTeX} + +Since one of the main aims of the new standard \LaTeX{} is to give all +users the freedom provided by a reliable document processing system +linked to a highly portable document format, the number of +configuration possibilities is strictly limited. The reasons for this +are explained in more detail in the article +\textit{Modifying \LaTeX{}} in the file \texttt{modguide.tex}. +An important consequence of this is that any document that relies on +any extension package must declare this package within the document +file; this helps to ensure that the document will work at a different +site, where the \LaTeX{} system may be configured differently. + +Local configuration options are, by convention, placed in +`configuration files', which have extension |.cfg|. This document +describes the possibilities for configuration in this release of +\LaTeX; it also explains how to configure the font definition files to +take advantage of the available fonts. + +The last section considers briefly how to proceed if you require +further customisation of the formatter. + + +\section{System configuration} + +\filesection{texsys.cfg} + +This is the only configuration file that \emph{must} be present. +During installation, if \LaTeX\ cannot find a file with this name +then a default file |texsys.cfg|, consisting entirely of comments, is +written out and used. Note that, until this file has been read, +\LaTeX{} is not able to test reliably whether a given file exists on +the system. + +The contents of the file |texsys.cfg| allow \LaTeX{} to cope with +various differences between the behaviours of different \TeX{} systems, +mainly in relation to file handling. The default version of this file +contains, in its comments, possible settings that may be needed for a +range of \TeX{} systems. For more information, typeset the file +|ltdirchk.dtx|. + +If you have copied your \LaTeX{} installation from a computer that +used a different operating system then you may well have a version of +|texsys.cfg| that will make it difficult to install \LaTeX{} on your +system. If this happens then start the process again with an empty +|texsys.cfg| file; this will produce an installation that should, at +least, allow you to typeset the documentation. However, it is +possible that \LaTeX{} can still find only those files that are in the +current directory; in this case you must set the macro |\input@path| +correctly for your system. + + +\section{Configuring the \LaTeX\ format} + +There are four configuration files that enable personal preferences to +be incorporated into the \LaTeX{} format file |latex.fmt|. The range +of preferences that can be configured by these files is strictly +limited as this helps to ensure document portability. + +All four files work in the same way: if the file \m{file}|.cfg| is +found, it will be input by \iniTeX; otherwise a default file +\m{file}|.ltx| will be input; this is sometimes done via a +minimal \m{file}|.cfg| that simply inputs \m{file}|.ltx|. Thus, +providing your own version of any of these |.cfg| files can completely +override any settings in the corresponding default standard |.ltx| +file. + + +\subsection{Font configuration} + +Before you even think about configuring the font declarations by +producing a file |fontmath.cfg| or |fonttext.cfg|, you should +read the documented file |fontdef.dtx|. This is the source file from +which the default files |fonttext.ltx| and |fontmath.ltx| are +produced; it contains information concerning the +contents of the default files and what sort of customisation is +possible. In particular, it describes in detail the effects of +individual customisations on document portability including: which +customisations can be made without endangering the ability to exchange +documents with other sites (even if the formatting differs); and which +things should be left untouched because they will make your system so +different from others that the documents it produces will be +non-portable. + +\textbf{WARNING } Please note that use of either of these font +configuration files has the following consequences. + \begin{itemize} + \item Since the content of the file |fontdef.dtx| \emph{might} + change in the future, anyone writing a font configuration file + must be prepared to update it for use with future releases. + \item Documents produced on your system are likely, at best, to be + portable only in the sense of being processable at a different + site---the actual formatting will not be the same if different + fonts are used. + \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in + diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format + that does not use any configuration files. + \end{itemize} + +\filesection{fonttext.cfg} + +The file |fonttext.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use +of fonts in text modes. + +If it exists, it defines which font shapes, families and encodings are +normally used in text mode, as well as the behavior of font attribute +commands such as |\textbf| etc. + +It could be used, for example, to produce a \LaTeX\ format that, by +default, typesets documents using Times fonts. Be warned, however, +that such customisation can have unfortunate consequences; so please +read carefully this section and the file |fontdef.dtx| below if you +are thinking of doing this. + +Please note carefully the above \textbf{warning}. + +\filesection{fontmath.cfg} + +The file |fontmath.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use +of fonts in math mode. + +If it exists, it defines which fonts in which sizes are used in math +mode, and how they are used. It also defines all the math mode +commands that `are likely to' depend on the choice of math fonts used +(e.g.~commands that depend on the position of a glyph in a math font). + +The main reason for the existence of this file is to provide for future +updates when a standard math font encoding is available. Right now we +do \emph{not} encourage the use of this configuration file other than +for special applications. Writing a proper configuration file for math +mode needs expert knowledge! + +Please note carefully the above \textbf{warning}. + +\filesection{preload.cfg} + +The contents of the file |preload.cfg| can control the preloading of +commonly used fonts. Preloading fonts speeds up the processing of +documents but, because fonts cannot be `unloaded', you should not +preload too many; otherwise you may be unable to process documents +requiring unusual font families. + +The default file |preload.ltx| is produced from |preload.dtx|. It +loads only a few fonts and these are a good choice if you normally use +documents at the default, 10\,pt, size. If you normally use 11\,pt +or~12\,pt then the time for \LaTeX\ to startup may be noticeably +decreased if you preload the corresponding fonts for the sizes you +use. Similarly, if you normally use a different font family, for +example Times Roman (|ptm|) then you may want to preload fonts in this +family rather than the default Computer Modern fonts. + +\subsection{Hyphenation configuration} + +\filesection{hyphen.cfg} + +In order to hyphenate text, \TeX{} must have hyphenation patterns and, +since these patterns can be loaded only by \iniTeX, the choice of +which patterns to load must be made when the format is created. + +The hyphenation patterns for American English are stored in the file +named |hyphen.tex|; \LaTeX~2.09 always loaded this file when its +format was made. + +With \LaTeXe{} it is possible to configure which hyphenation patterns +are to be loaded into the format. When \iniTeX{} is processing +|latex.ltx|, it looks for a file called |hyphen.cfg|; this file can +be used to control which hyphenation patterns are loaded. If a file +|hyphen.cfg| cannot be found then \iniTeX{} will load the file +|hyphen.ltx|. + +The file |hyphen.ltx| loads the file |hyphen.tex| if it can find it; +otherwise it stops with an error since a format with no hyphenation +patterns is not very useful. It then sets |\language=0| and it sets +the values |\lefthyphenmin=2| and |\righthyphenmin=3|, which are +needed for American English. + +Thus, if you want any other patterns to be loaded then you should +create a file |hyphen.cfg|. For each language for which you wish to +load hyphenation patterns this file should: +\begin{itemize} +\item set |\language=|\m{number}; +\item load the file which contains the hyphenation patterns for that + language. +\end{itemize} +If the patterns you use require some definitions or assignments then +a group should be used to keep such changes local to their file. + +\textbf{Note.} The hyphenation files that are read in should \emph{only} +set the hyphenation tables for the language, using the commands +|\hyphenation| and |\patterns|. In particular they should make no +assignments to the lowercase/uppercase tables (|\lccode| and +|\uccode|) and should not make any global command definitions to be +used after the file has been read. Unfortunately some older +hyphenation files do contain such settings; thus they are +\emph{incompatible} with the mechanisms \LaTeX\ uses to ensure +independence of input and output encodings. + +After this the file |hyphen.cfg| should: +\begin{itemize} +\item set |\language| to its default value; +\item set |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| to the correct values + for this default language. +\end{itemize} + +There are packages available, such as `french', that can help you with +this configuration. The `babel' collection contains many examples of +setting up a multi-lingual \LaTeX{} format. The documentation in +|lthyphen.dtx| (the source file for |hyphen.ltx|) also contains some +useful examples. + +[We intend in a future release of \LaTeX{} to provide a set of +standard commands for use in configuring hyphenation.] + + +\section{Configuring the font definition files} + +If you have special fonts available (or if some fonts are unavailable) +at your site then you may need to produce customised versions of the +font definition files; these have extension \texttt{.fd} and are read +by \LaTeX{} to obtain information about the font files installed at your +system and when to load them. + +Although we do not encourage such customisation, you will find +information about the content of these files and its syntax in the +documented source file \texttt{cmfonts.fdd} and +\textit{\LaTeXe{} font selection} in the file \texttt{fntguide.tex}. +[We hope to be able to provide further information and examples on +this subject at some time in the future.] + +Please note that the use of customised font definition files has the +following consequences. + \begin{itemize} + \item Documents produced on your system will, at best, to be + portable only in the sense of being processable at a different + site---the actual formatting will not be the same if different + fonts are used. + \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in + diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format + that does not use any customised font definition files. + \end{itemize} + +Please also note that the whilst licence conditions on the standard +font definition files allow you to produce a customised version for +your own use, they do not allow you to distribute such a customised +font definition file under the original file name! + + +\subsection*{Note to system administrators} + +If you install a version of \LaTeX{} with a locally configured font +set-up then this system is likely to produce documents that are no +longer `formatting compatible'; for example, the use of different +default fonts will most likely produce different line and page breaks. +If you do install, on a multi-user system, a system that is configured +in such a way that it is not `formatting compatible' then you should +consider carefully the needs of users who need to create portable +documents. A good way to provide for their needs is to make +available, in addition, a standard form of \LaTeX{} without any +`formatting incompatible' customisations. + + +\section{Configuring compatibility mode} + +When processing documents that begin with |\documentstyle|, \LaTeXe{} +tries to emulate the old \LaTeX~2.09 system as far as possible. + +\filesection{latex209.cfg} + +Whenever a \LaTeX{} document starts with |\documentstyle|, rather than +with |\documentclass|, \LaTeX{} assumes that it is a \LaTeX~2.09 +document and therefore processes it in `compatibility mode'. This +does the following: +\begin{itemize} +\item sets the flag |\@compatibilitytrue|; +\item inputs the file |latex209.def|; +\item inputs the file |latex209.cfg| if it exists. +\end{itemize} + +The \LaTeX~2.09 set-up allowed the format itself to be customised. +When making the format with \iniTeX, the process ended with this +request: +\begin{quote}\tt + Input any local modifications here. +\end{quote} + +If your site did input any modifications at that point then the +\LaTeXe{} `compatibility mode' will not fully emulate \LaTeX~2.09 +\emph{as installed at your site}. In this case you should put all +these `local modifications' into a file called |latex209.cfg| and put +this file in the default input path at your site. These `local +modifications', although not stored in the format, will then be loaded +before any old-style document is processed. This should ensure that +you can continue to process any old documents that made use of this +local customisation. + + +\section[Configuration files for standard packages and classes]% + {Configuration files for standard packages\\ and classes} + +Most of the packages in the distribution do not have any associated +configuration files. The exceptions are listed here. + +\filesection{sfonts.cfg} + +The file |sfonts.cfg| can contain declarations relating to the use of +fonts in the slides class. +If it exists, it is read instead of the file |sfonts.def|. + +Please note that use of this configuration file has the following +consequences. + \begin{itemize} + \item Since the font set-up for slides has not yet been revised to + fit modern usage, the content of this file should be completely + updated sometime. Thus anyone writing such a configuration + file must be prepared to update it for use with future releases. + \item Documents are portable only in the sense of being processable + at a different site---the actual formatting will not be the same + if different fonts are used. + \item The \LaTeX3 project team will not be able to support you in + diagnosing problems if these cannot be reproduced with a format + that does not use this configuration file. + \end{itemize} + + +\filesection{ltnews.cfg} + +The file |ltnews.cfg| can be used to customise some aspects of the +behaviour of the \textsf{ltnews} class; this class is used to typeset +the the one page newsletter accompanying every \LaTeX{} distribution. +If this file is present then it is read in at the beginning of the +file |ltnews.cls|. + + +\filesection{ltxdoc.cfg} + +The file |ltxdoc.cfg| can be used to customise some aspects of the +behaviour of the \textsf{ltxdoc} class; this class is used to typeset +the documented code in the |.dtx| files. If this file is present then +it is read in at the beginning of the file |ltxdoc.cls|. + +As this file is read before the \textsf{article} class is loaded, you +may pass options to \textsf{article}. For example the following line +might be added to |ltxdoc.cfg| to format the documentation for A4 paper +instead of the default US letter paper size. +\begin{quote} +|\PassOptionsToClass{a4paper}{article}| +\end{quote} +You should note however, that even if paper size options are specified, +the \textsf{ltxdoc} class always sets the |\textwidth| parameter to +355\,pt, to enable 72 columns of text to appear in the verbatim code +listings. If you really need to over-ride this you could use: +\begin{quote} +|\AtEndOfClass{\setlength{\textwidth}{ ...}}| +\end{quote} +To set the |\textwidth| to your desired value at the end of the +\textsf{ltxdoc} class. + +By default, most of the |.dtx| documented code files in the +distribution will produce a `description' section followed by full +source listing of the package. If you wish to suppress the source +listings you may add the following line to |ltxdoc.cfg|: +\begin{quote} +|\AtBeginDocument{\OnlyDescription}| +\end{quote} + +The documentation of the \textsf{ltxdoc} package, which may be typeset +from the file |ltxdoc.dtx|, contains more examples of the use of this +configuration file. + +\filesection{ltxguide.cfg} + +The class \textsf{ltxguide} is used by the `guide' documents, such as +this document, in the \LaTeX\ distribution. A configuration file +|ltxguide.cfg| may be used with this class in a way very similar to +the customisation of the \textsf{ltxdoc} class described in the +previous section. + +\section{Configuration for other supported packages} + +The `graphics' bundle of packages needs two configuration files, +primarily to specify the driver used to process the |.dvi| file that +\LaTeX{} produces. More documentation on these files comes with the +graphics bundle but we mention them here for completeness. + +\filesection{graphics.cfg} + Normally this file just specifies a default option, by calling + |\ExecuteOptions|, for example |\ExecuteOptions{dvips}| or + |\ExecuteOptions{textures}|. + + This file is read by the \textsf{graphics} package, and so affects + all the packages in the bundle that are based on \textsf{graphics}: + \textsf{graphicx}, \textsf{epsfig}, \textsf{lscape}. + +\filesection{color.cfg} + Normally this file is identical to |graphics.cfg|. It specifies the + default driver option for the \textsf{color} package. + +\section{Non-standard versions} + +If you feel the need to make a version of \LaTeX{} that differs from +the standard version in ways that are not possible using the above +configuration possibilities, then you should first read +\textit{Modifying \LaTeX{}} in the file |modguide.tex|; this +will probably make you realise that you do not have any such need. + +Thus we are sure that you will never need to create a non-standard +version and, even if you do create one, we hope that you will not +distribute such a version. Nevertheless, you are permitted to do this +provided you take great care to do the following: +\begin{itemize} +\item +respect the conditions in legal.txt and individual files regarding +modification of files and changing the name; + +\item +change all the relevant `|\typeout| banners': i.e.~those produced by +all the non-standard files in your version and by the format; + +\item + ensure that the method used to run your version is clearly + distinguished from that used to run standard \LaTeX{}; e.g.~by using + a command name or menu entry that is clearly different from + \texttt{latex} (or \texttt{LaTeX} etc). +\end{itemize} + +\subsection{Examples} + +Since we have been prompted, despite our misgivings, to document how +to do this by members of the League for Programming Freedom, it seems +appropriate to describe here a possible modification of \LaTeX{} to +produce a system called fsf\TeX. + +To do this, you should create a file called \texttt{fsftex.tex} and +then run it using \iniTeX{} and the standard \LaTeX{} format. + +The contents of the file \texttt{fsftex.tex} should be as shown on +page \pageref{fsfcode}. The particular changes to the \LaTeX{} kernel +that you wish to make need to be added to the file at the position +indicated. You can also choose the extensions you want to use for the +class and package files in your system. + +\newpage +\label{fsfcode} + +\begin{footnotesize} +\begin{verbatim} +% fsftex.tex +% +% iniTEX Source code to make a `fsftex' format. +% +% To make this format on Unix: +% +% initex \&latex fsftex +% +% Then to run the format on file.tex: +% +% tex &fsftex file +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% *** VERY IMPORTANT!!! *** +% Change the typeout banner so users know that they +% are NOT running Standard LaTeX. +\everyjob{\typeout{fsfTeX 1.0 based on LaTeX2e \fmtversion}} +\makeatletter + +% fsfTeX changes some LaTeX internals: +% ... put what you like here ... +\def \fsf@xxxx {Some arbitrary \emph{freely modifiable} code goes here} + +% fsfTeX class files have extension .fcl (this week): +\def \@clsextension {fcl} + +% fsfTeX package files have extension .fsy: +\def \@pkgextension {fsy} + +% Change the file handling so that when a fsfTeX package or class +% is not available, the standard LaTeX file will be read. +% +% For example, \documentclass{article} will load article.fcl if such +% a file exists, but article.cls otherwise. This allows arbitrary +% processing on `article' documents without changing the standard +% article.cls file. + +\let\fsf@missingfileerror\@missingfileerror + +\def\@missingfileerror#1#2{% + \ifx #2\@clsextension + \InputIfFileExists {#1.cls}% + {\wlog {fsfTeX: loading #1.cls rather than #1.#2.}}% + {\fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}}% + \else + \ifx #2\@pkgextension + \InputIfFileExists {#1.sty}% + {\wlog {fsfTeX: loading #1.sty rather than #1.#2.}}% + {\fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}}% + \else + \fsf@missingfileerror {#1}{#2}% + \fi + \fi +} + +\makeatother +\dump +\end{verbatim} +\end{footnotesize} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes-doc.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes-doc.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cd70fad506b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes-doc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ +This file lists changes to the LaTeX2e files in reverse chronological order. +It is provided for convenience only. It therefore makes no claims to +completeness or accuracy and it contains some references to files that +are not part of the distribution. +======================================================================= + +2016-03-31 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexchanges.tex: Bring up to date to 2016/03/31 + +2016-02-01 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexchanges.tex: Bring up to date to 2016/02/01 + +2015-10-27 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexchanges.tex: Bring up to date to 2015/10/01 PL2 + +2015-07-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexchanges.tex: describe the patch level system + +2015-04-05 Joseph Wright <joseph.wright@morningstar2.co.uk> + * Clarify reason for \typein change in LuaTeX + +2015-04-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews22.tex: set date back to Jan + +2015-03-31 Joseph Wright <joseph.wright@morningstar2.co.uk> + * New changes.txt file for LaTeX2e core documentation + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes.old.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes.old.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b764e8da16c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes.old.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1271 @@ + +This is from pr/3051 (internal-latex) from Ulrik Vieth, +submitted Wed Jun 23 00:51:06 +0200 1999. +Ulrik's message is attached in full below. + +-- + +After having moved house recently, I found a pile of old +floppies containing various ancient LaTeX2e releases. +Looking through the original 1994/06/01 release I happened +to find a few changes.txt entries that somehow got lost +during conversion to GNU ChangeLog format. Enclosed is +a patch to recover this intersting part of the history. +It is based on the 9906 test release of changes.txt + +Cheers, Ulrik. + +P.S. From the historical point-of-view, it is interesting +to note that files like ltherest.dtx are first mentioned +in mid-1991. That's way _before_ the last official releases +of 2.09 (in December 1991 and March 1992). + + +--- changes.txt.orig Fri May 28 00:00:00 1999 ++++ changes.txt Wed Jun 23 00:14:30 1999 +@@ -7696,29 +7696,29 @@ + +1994-03-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * ltfiles.dtx v1.0c \document (DPC) directly add file list ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v1.0c \document (DPC) directly add file list + settings + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3f \listfiles Move this code directly into ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3f \listfiles Move this code directly into + \document + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3f "General" Add pkgindoc package ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3f "General" Add pkgindoc package + +1994-03-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0c "General" Add \NeedsTeXFormat ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 1.0c "General" Add \NeedsTeXFormat + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3e \@missingfileerror Quit on x or X just like ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3e \@missingfileerror Quit on x or X just like + a real error + +- * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Removed defs of short-forms and ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.2a "General" Removed defs of short-forms and + all sizes except \normalize + +- * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Removed \@renewfontswitch ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.2a "General" Removed \@renewfontswitch + +- * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Changed \/ to \@@italiccorr ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.2a "General" Changed \/ to \@@italiccorr + +- * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Adapted to mass formatting ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.2a "General" Adapted to mass formatting + +1994-03-15 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +@@ -7728,30 +7728,30 @@ + +1994-03-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \end@float (DPC) Use \color@endgroup ++ * ltherest.dtx: v1.0c \end@float (DPC) Use \color@endgroup + +- * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@xfloat (DPC) Use \color@begingroup ++ * ltherest.dtx: v1.0c \@xfloat (DPC) Use \color@begingroup + +- * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@savemarbox (DPC) Use \color@begingroup ++ * ltherest.dtx: v1.0c \@savemarbox (DPC) Use \color@begingroup + +- * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@footnotetext (DPC) Use ++ * ltherest.dtx: v1.0c \@footnotetext (DPC) Use + \color@begingroup, add \endgraf + +- * ltherest.dtx 1.0c \@xympar (DPC) Use \color@begingroup ++ * ltherest.dtx: 1.0c \@xympar (DPC) Use \color@begingroup + +- * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \sbox Use \color@begingroup ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 1.0b \sbox Use \color@begingroup + +- * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \lrbox Use \color@begingroup ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 1.0b \lrbox Use \color@begingroup + +- * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \color@endgroup macro added for colour ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 1.0b \color@endgroup macro added for colour + support + +- * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \color@begingroup macro added for colour ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 1.0b \color@begingroup macro added for colour + support + +- * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \@isavepicbox Use \color@begingroup ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 1.0b \@isavepicbox Use \color@begingroup + +- * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \@isavebox Use \color@begingroup ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 1.0b \@isavebox Use \color@begingroup + +1994-03-14 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +@@ -7766,16 +7766,16 @@ + +1994-03-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * ltinit.dtx v1.0c \@tfor (DPC) Add \@tf@r so a single group is ++ * ltinit.dtx: v1.0c \@tfor (DPC) Add \@tf@r so a single group is + correctly treated. + +- * ltfiles.dtx 0.3b \InputIfFileExists Use new cmd ++ * ltfiles.dtx: 0.3b \InputIfFileExists Use new cmd + \@addtofilelist + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3d \listfiles Reset \@addtofilelist at begin ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3d \listfiles Reset \@addtofilelist at begin + document + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3d \@addtofilelist Macro added ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3d \@addtofilelist Macro added + +1994-03-13 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +@@ -7823,32 +7823,32 @@ + +1994-03-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * ltplain.dtx v1.0b "General" Name changed from lplain. The end ++ * ltplain.dtx: v1.0b "General" Name changed from lplain. The end + of an era + +- * ltinit.dtx v1.0b \@yargdef Name changed from \XXX@Argdef ++ * ltinit.dtx: v1.0b \@yargdef Name changed from \XXX@Argdef + +- * ltinit.dtx v1.0b \@reargdef New defn, in terms of \@yargdef ++ * ltinit.dtx: v1.0b \@reargdef New defn, in terms of \@yargdef + +- * ltherest.dtx v0.1b \@xympar (DPC) Extra bgroup for colour ++ * ltherest.dtx: v0.1b \@xympar (DPC) Extra bgroup for colour + +- * ltherest.dtx v0.1b \@savemarbox (DPC) Extra group for colour ++ * ltherest.dtx: v0.1b \@savemarbox (DPC) Extra group for colour + +- * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0b "General" Minor edits to the typeouts in ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 1.0b "General" Minor edits to the typeouts in + ltxcheck + +- * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0b "General" Change name from dircheck.dtx ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 1.0b "General" Change name from dircheck.dtx + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesPackage use \@gtempa ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3c \ProvidesPackage use \@gtempa + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesPackage Add \wlog ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3c \ProvidesPackage Add \wlog + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesFile Add \wlog ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3c \ProvidesFile Add \wlog + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3c "General" Change name from docclass to ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3c "General" Change name from docclass to + ltclass + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \@fileswithoptions Do not use ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3c \@fileswithoptions Do not use + \@pr@videpackage to avoid typeout + +1994-03-12 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> +@@ -7897,12 +7897,12 @@ + +1994-03-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * ltplain.dtx v1.0a "General" Remove need for a driver file. ++ * ltplain.dtx: v1.0a "General" Remove need for a driver file. + +- * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0a "General" Reorganise driver module into `new ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 1.0a "General" Reorganise driver module into `new + style' + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3b "General" Modify driver code into `new style' ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3b "General" Modify driver code into `new style' + +1994-03-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +@@ -8031,60 +8031,60 @@ + +1994-03-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * lttab.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns ++ * lttab.dtx: v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + +- * ltpictur.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns ++ * ltpictur.dtx: v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + +- * ltpictur.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from ++ * ltpictur.dtx: v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + +- * ltlists.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns ++ * ltlists.dtx: v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + +- * ltinit.dtx v1.0a "General" (DPC) Removed input of nfsscode.ltx ++ * ltinit.dtx: v1.0a "General" (DPC) Removed input of nfsscode.ltx + +- * ltinit.dtx v1.0a \@@italiccorr Macro added ++ * ltinit.dtx: v1.0a \@@italiccorr Macro added + +- * ltinit.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns ++ * ltinit.dtx: v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + +- * ltinit.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from ++ * ltinit.dtx: v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + +- * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \end@float (DPC) Extra group for colour ++ * ltherest.dtx: v0.1a \end@float (DPC) Extra group for colour + +- * ltherest.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns ++ * ltherest.dtx: v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + +- * ltherest.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from ++ * ltherest.dtx: v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + +- * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@xfloat (DPC) Extra group for colour ++ * ltherest.dtx: v0.1a \@xfloat (DPC) Extra group for colour + +- * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@settodim (DPC) Extra group for colour ++ * ltherest.dtx: v0.1a \@settodim (DPC) Extra group for colour + +- * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@hangfrom (DPC)Extra groups for colour ++ * ltherest.dtx: v0.1a \@hangfrom (DPC)Extra groups for colour + +- * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@footnotetext (DPC) Extra group for colour ++ * ltherest.dtx: v0.1a \@footnotetext (DPC) Extra group for colour + +- * ltfinal.dtx v0.1a "General" Remove oldcomments environment ++ * ltfinal.dtx: v0.1a "General" Remove oldcomments environment + +- * ltfinal.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from ++ * ltfinal.dtx: v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + +- * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" use \InputIfFileExists not ++ * ltfinal.dtx: 0.1a "General" use \InputIfFileExists not + \IfFileExists + +- * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" move code here from lhyphen.dtx ++ * ltfinal.dtx: 0.1a "General" move code here from lhyphen.dtx + +- * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" Add code from the old dump.dtx ++ * ltfinal.dtx: 0.1a "General" Add code from the old dump.dtx + +- * ltfiles.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + +- * ltfiles.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + +- * ltboxes.dtx v1.0a "General" Unify format with other Kernel ++ * ltboxes.dtx: v1.0a "General" Unify format with other Kernel + files + +- * ltboxes.dtx v0.1a \@mpfootnotetext (DPC) Extra group for ++ * ltboxes.dtx: v0.1a \@mpfootnotetext (DPC) Extra group for + colour + +1994-03-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> +@@ -8110,13 +8110,13 @@ + +1994-03-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * ltvers.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from ++ * ltvers.dtx: v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + +- * lttab.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from ++ * lttab.dtx: v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + +- * ltlists.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from ++ * ltlists.dtx: v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + +1994-03-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> +@@ -8127,7 +8127,7 @@ + +1994-03-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * ltboxes.dtx 0.1f \@irsbox Replaced a missing \else ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1f \@irsbox Replaced a missing \else + +1994-03-03 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +@@ -8139,11 +8139,11 @@ + +1994-03-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * ltclass.dtx 0.3a "General" Remove need for driver file ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.3a "General" Remove need for driver file + +- * ltboxes.dtx v0.1e "General" Remove need for drv file ++ * ltboxes.dtx: v0.1e "General" Remove need for drv file + +- * ltboxes.dtx v0.1e "General" Add 2ekernel module ++ * ltboxes.dtx: v0.1e "General" Add 2ekernel module + +1994-03-02 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +@@ -8191,9 +8191,10 @@ + makeidx class option, as it is now a proper package. Changed + leqno class option t oread leqno.clo. Added fleqn class + option (reads fleqn.clo). ++ +1994-03-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +- * ltdirchk.dtx 0.2k "General" Add unstripped module, so that ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2k "General" Add unstripped module, so that + dircheck.dtx may be used with initex + +1994-03-01 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> +@@ -8284,6 +8285,13 @@ + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + ++1994-02-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx 0.2j "General" \noboundaryis \relax not undef in ++ TeX2 (initialised in 2e format) ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx 0.2j "General" Remove need for drv file ++ +1994-02-24 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): +@@ -8291,4 +8299,931 @@ + \DeclareFontShape and placed them into a separate macro called + \nfss@catcodes so that it is easier to maintain special + requirements for packages that make certain characters active. ++ ++1994-02-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2z \@fileswithoptions Renamed \@compatibility to ++ \@documentclasshook. ASAJ. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2z \@documentclasshook Changed the name from ++ \@compatibility to \@documentclasshook, and added the check ++ for whether \@normalsize has been defined. ASAJ. ++ ++1994-02-07 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2y \ProcessOptions* Add extra ,s so `two' is not ++ matched with `twocolumn' ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2y \ProcessOptions* Add extra ,s so `two' is not ++ matched with `twocolumn' ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2y \@ifclasswith Add extra ,s so `two' is not ++ matched with `twocolumn' ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2y \@fileswithoptions Run \@compatibility on the ++ first class to start (not the first to finish) ++ ++1994-02-03 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e "General" correct mistakes in the ++ documentation ++ ++1994-02-02 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2x \@fileswithoptions Only run the hook and ++ options check if the file was loaded. ++ ++1994-02-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \thispagestyle (DPC) Modify to get nicer ++ error message ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \pagestyle (DPC) Modify to get nicer ++ error message ++ ++1994-01-31 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e "General" use \@normalsize instead of ++ \normalsizeinternally ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9t \document set `@normalsize or `normalsize if ++ necessary ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2w \g@addto@macro Use toks register to avoid ++ `hash' problems ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.1b "General" `@normalsize no longer defined ++ ++1994-01-29 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2v \@fileswithoptions All options raise error if ++ no \ProcessOptions\ appears ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2v \@@unprocessedoptions Macro added. ++ ++1994-01-28 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e "General" Let \fmtversion point to current ++ file date. ++ ++1994-01-27 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.1a \nocorrlist Only ., used as default for cm ++ fonts ++ ++1994-01-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltplain.dtx: LaTeX2e \bordermatrix Removed \p@renwd. ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2i "General" Protect against looping on ++ \@@input and \@@end ++ ++1994-01-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \pagestyle (DPC) Complain if pagestyle is ++ undefined. ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2h \IfFileExists Stop testing once texsys.aux ++ has been found ++ ++1994-01-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9s \verbatim@font Removed unnecessary category ++ code hackery. ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \@xfloat Added missing percent ++ characters. ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2g \today Name changeed from \stamp, to save ++ memory ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2g \filename@parse Minor changes, and add Mac ++ version (:) ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2g "General" Improve documentation, reorganise ++ docstrip module ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2u \documentstyle compatibility file now ++ latex209.def. ++ ++1994-01-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2f \IfFileExists \@copytexsys removed ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2f "General" \@copytexsys and the texsys.new ++ file removed ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2f "General" Modify all of ltxcheck ++ ++1994-01-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2e \strip@prefix name changed from ++ \strip@meaning, to match NFSS ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2e \input@path No longer check that an empty ++ group is in the path ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2e \IfFileExists name changed from \test ++ ++1994-01-18 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9p \@verbatim Only add \penaltyif in hmode ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \bibliography Use \@input@ so include ++ files are listed. ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9p \include Use \@input@ so include files are ++ listed. ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9p \InputIfFileExists New Definition ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9p \IfFileExists New Definition ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9p \@input@ Macro added ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9p \@input do not use a different definition ++ for \input@path ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9p \@iffileonpath Macro added ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9p \@break@loop Macro added ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2t \@ifclassloaded Fix typo \@pkgetension ++ ++1994-01-17 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2s \listfiles New Version, adds `.tex' if ++ needed, and lines up columns ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2s "General" Wrapped long lines to column 72 ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2s "General" Added many more \@onlypreamble ++ commands ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2s \@fileswithoptions Modify to reduce parameter ++ stack usage ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2s \@fileswithoptions Modify to reduce parameter ++ stack usage ++ ++1994-01-15 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9o \document move `@preamblecmds after document ++ hook ++ ++1994-01-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2d \IfFileExists Close the texsys.aux output ++ stream ++ ++1993-12-20 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@reargdef Kept old version of \@reargdef, ++ for array.sty ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: 0.9m \@obsoletefile Added this command, removed ++ @oldfilewarning ++ ++1993-12-19 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@esphack There seem to be problems with ++ selfmade birthday presents ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2r \endfilecontents Different message when ++ ignoring a file ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0b "General" Untidying added, so this is now a ++ TEMPORARY version. ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0b "General" Some more tidying done. ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0b "General" Other tidying ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0b "General" @pdef comand added ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0b \@protecteddef Command added ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0b \@newtextcmd Corrected and tidied ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0b \@newfontswitch Corrected and tidied ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: 3.0b "General" Wording changes by CAR. ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: 3.0b "General" Made \@newfontswitch produce an ++ error if the command already exists, and added ++ \@renewfontswitch. ASAJ. ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: 3.0b "General" Added by ASAJ. ++ ++1993-12-17 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0j \@tracemessage tracefloatvals made a ++ document command ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0j \@topnewpage check for vsize too small ++ added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0j \@startpagehook Hook removed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0j \@opcol Hook removed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: 1.0j \@topnewpage Page room test added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: 1.0j \@specialoutput Page room test added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: 1.0j \@addtocurcol Extra space test added ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \mark Removed init \mark at begin ++ document, since it doesn't work. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2q \documentstyle Match Alan's new code. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2q \@fileswithoptions Add \ompatibility hook ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2q \@documentclasshook Macro added ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9i \literal Macro added ++ ++1993-12-16 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \LaTeXe Extended logo by DPC ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@esphack Corrected optimisation :-) ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \mark Init \mark at begin document ++ ++1993-12-15 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2p "General" Removed extra \.'s from \@@warnings ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1d \parbox Changed default from `c' to `s' ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1d \minipage extra space removed. ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1d \minipage Changed default from `c' to `s' ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1d \@iparbox Changed default from `c' to `s' ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1d \@iminipage Changed default from `c' to `s' ++ ++1993-12-14 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0i "General" Section added to declare all ++ parameters ++ ++1993-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltlists.dtx: LaTeX2e Initialised \@itemlabel ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9h \@verbatim Removed optional argument of ++ \item ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9h \@verbatim Readded \@noligs ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9h \@noligs Readded \@noligs ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2a \strip@prefix modified, name changed from ++ \stripmeaning ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2a \IfFileExists Removed interactive prompting ++ for current directory syntax ++ ++ * ltdirchk.dtx: 0.2a "General" on the `docstrip' pass, do not ++ check openin path ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2o \usepackage Fixed error handling ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2o \documentstyle compatibility file now ++ latex209.sty. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2o "General" Removed setting \errcontextlines\ ++ (now in latex.tex) ++ ++1993-12-12 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@tracemessage Commands changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@testfp defs changed to lets ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@startdblcolumn defs changed to lets ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@startcolumn defs changed to lets ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@resethfps Warnings added: minimal ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@makecol defs changed to lets ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@doclearpage defs changed to lets ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@doclearpage defs changed to lets ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@doclearpage defs changed to lets ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@cflt name changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@ccflb defs changed to lets ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0h \@ccflb boxmaxdepth setting moved ++ ++1993-12-11 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9g \ref Macro reimplemented ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9g \pageref Macro reimplemented ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9g \frac Added group around first arg ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9g \@setref Macro added ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \@title Added default ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \@author Added default ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a \textup Macros changed ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a \sw@slant Macro changed ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a \maybe@ic@ Macro and name changed ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a \maybe@ic Macro name changed ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a \fix@penalty Macro added ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a \emph Macro changed ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a "General" newfontswitch command corrected ++ and changed ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a "General" newcommands replaced by defs ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a "General" italic correction now put in ++ front of penalty before glue ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a "General" Complete reworking of all text ++ commands, using just one creator function ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v3.0a \@newtextcmd Macro changed ++ ++1993-12-09 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9e \enddocument Hook added ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9e \document Hook added ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2n \documentstyle input 209 compatibility file. ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1c \@irsbox fix another typo ++ ++1993-12-08 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltlists.dtx: LaTeX2e \@item use \sboxto support colour ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@vbsphack Command added ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@esphack Command reimplemented ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@bsphack Command reimplemented; late ++ birthday present for Chris ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1b \lrbox move \@endpefalse out of the inner ++ group ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1b \@irsbox fix typo ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1b \@iiiparbox \endgraf added due to extra group ++ in \@begin@tempboxa ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1b \@begin@tempboxa Extra braces for color ++ support (braces removed from other macros) ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: 2.1b "General" Macros \rm, \bf and \sf moved to ++ classes.dtx: ++ ++1993-12-07 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2m \@fileswithoptions Reset \CurrentOption ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2l \ProvidesFile Macro added ++ ++1993-12-06 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0g \@topnewpage \@floatplacement placement bug ++ fixed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@specialoutput Unboxing of 255 added to ++ rescue writes ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2k \ExecuteOptions Preserve \CurrentOption ++ ++1993-12-05 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \output Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f @\getfpsbit Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f @\boxfpsbit Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@topnewpage Commands changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@textfloatsheight Commands added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@testfp Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@testfp Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@startpagehook Hook added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@startdblcolumn Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@startcolumn Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@shipoutsetup Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@setfpsbit Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@setfloattypecounts Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@resethfps Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@outputpage Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@opcol Hook added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@opcol Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@fpsadddefault Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@flupdates Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@flstop Commands added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@flsettextmin Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@flsetnum Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@flcheckspace Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@addtotoporbot Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@addtonextcol Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@addtodblcol Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@addtocurcol Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0f \@addtobot Command changed ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \@xfloat Command changed ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \@dblfloatplacement Command changed ++ ++1993-12-04 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9b \input Macro reimplemented ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9b \InputIfFileExists Macro added ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9b \IfFileExists Macro added ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9b \@input Macro reimplemented ++ ++ * ltfiles.dtx: v0.9b \@iinput Macro reimplemented ++ ++1993-12-03 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: v0.9b \@latexerr Set \c@errorcontextlines to -1 ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2i "General" \@onlypreamble: Many commands ++ declared. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2i "General" Removed obsolete \@documentclass ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2i \@cls@pkg Name changed to avoid clash with ++ output routine. ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \set@color macro added ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \set@color color support ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \sbox extra group ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \sbox color support ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \raisebox redefined to support \height ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \parbox Redefined to support extra optional ++ arguments ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \newsavebox Pass the whole of arg 1 to ++ \@ifdefinable ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \minipage Redefined to support extra optional ++ arguments ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \mbox extra group ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \makebox modified ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \lrbox macro added ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \lrbox color support ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \fbox extra group ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \endlrbox macro added ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \bm@b macros added ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@savebox default c not x ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@makepicbox macro modified ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@makebox default changed from x to c ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@isavepicbox extra group ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@isavebox extra group ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@isavebox color support ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@irsbox redefined to support \height ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@imakebox macro modified ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@iirsbox redefined to support \height ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@end@tempboxa macro added ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@begin@tempboxa macro added ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: 0.1a \@argrsbox macro removed ++ ++1993-12-01 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0e \@reinserts Command added ++ ++1993-11-30 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0c \@tracemessage Commands added ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: LaTeX2e \eqnarray initialised everycr to {} ++ ++1993-11-29 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltplain.dtx: ??? "General" All accents in decimals; suggested ++ by Paul Taylor ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0b \@makespecialcolbox Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v1.0b \@makecol \@makespecialcolbox added ++ ++1993-11-28 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2h \endfilecontents Don't globally allocate a ++ write stream (always use 15) ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2h "General" Primitive filenames now terminated ++ by space not \relax. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2h "General" Directory syntax checing moved to ++ dircheck.dtx: ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2h "General" Assorted commands now in the kernel ++ removed. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2h \@twoclasseserror Macro added ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2h \@missingfileerror Use filename parser from ++ dircheck ++ ++1993-11-24 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \P@LaTeX Macro changed ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v2.1a \test@next Macro added ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v2.1a \maybe@ic@ Use \test@next ++ ++1993-11-23 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v0.1c \enlargethispage* Commands added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v0.1c \@specialoutput Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v0.1c \@makecol Command changed ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v0.1c \@kludgeins Insert added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v0.1c \@enlargepage Command added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v0.1a \paperwidth Register added ++ ++ * ltoutput.dtx: v0.1a \paperheight Register added ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \two@digits Macro added ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \renewenvironment Macro reimplemented and ++ extended ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \renewcommand Macro reimplemented and ++ extended ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \newcommand Macro reimplemented and ++ extended ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e "General" replaced plus by \@plus if ++ appropriate ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@yargdef Macro interface changed ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@yargdef Avoid \@?@? token ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@xargdef Macro interface changed ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@xargdef Macro added ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@newenv Macro interface changed ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@newcommand Macro added ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@ifundefined Redefined to remove a ++ trailing \fi ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2g "General" Warnings and errors now directly ++ coded. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2g "General" Various macros now moved to ++ latex.tex. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2g \@use@ption Name changed from \@executeoption ++ ++1993-11-22 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \providecommand Macro added ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \c@errorcontextlines Macro added ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \LaTeXe Macro added ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@plus Macro added ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@minus Macro added ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e \@checkcommand Macro added ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \settoheight Macro added ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \settodepth Macro added ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \@settopoint Macro added ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2e \@settodim Macro added ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2f \listfiles Removed checking for ++ \@unknownversion ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2f \@unknownversion Macro removed ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2f \@ifclasslater Added //00 so parsing never ++ produces a runaway argument. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2f \@fileswithoptions Made the initial version ++ [] not [\@unknownversion] ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2f \@fileswithoptions Made the default [] not ++ [\@unknownversion] ++ ++1993-11-21 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9a \verbatim@font Macro added ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9a \verb use \verbatim@font instead of \tt ++ ++1993-11-21 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: v0.9a \@verbatim use \verbatim@font instead of ++ \tt ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e "General" replaced \tt by \ttfamily if ++ appropriate ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e "General" replaced \sf by \sffamily if ++ appropriate ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e "General" replaced \sc by \scshape if ++ appropriate ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e "General" replaced \rm by \rmfamily if ++ appropriate ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e "General" replaced \it by \itshape if ++ appropriate ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2e "General" replaced \bf by \bfseries if ++ appropriate ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2e \@missingfileerror Stop infinite looping on ++ \@er@ext ++ ++1993-11-18 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2d \documentstyle Modified \RequirePackage stuff. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2d \NeedsTeXFormat \fmtname \fmtversion not ++ \@\pldots ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2d \ExecuteOptions Use \CurrentOption not \@tempa ++ ++1993-11-17 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2c \ProcessOptions* restoring \@fileswith@pti@ns ++ added. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2c \NeedsTeXFormat Name changed from ++ \NeedsFormat ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2c \DeclareOption* Error checking added ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2c \CurrentOption Name changed from \@curroption ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2c \@twoloadclasserror Macro added ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2c \@fileswithoptions Added trap for two ++ \LoadClass commands. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2c \@badrequireerror Macro added ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2c \@@fileswith@pti@ns Macro added ++ ++1993-11-15 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2b \documentstyle Modified to match ++ \ProcessOption* ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2b \ProcessOptions* Star form added. ++ ++1993-11-14 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2a \g@addto@macro Made global ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2a \documentstyle Added \RequirePackage ++ \@unusedoptionlist stuff. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2a \ProcessOptions* Stop adding the global ++ option list inside class files. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2a \ProcessOptions* Optimise `empty option' ++ code. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2a \NeedsTeXFormat made more robust for ++ alternative syntax for other formats. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2a \AtEndDocument Included extension in the ++ generated macro name for package and class hooks. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2a \@reset@ptions macro added ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2a \@fileswithoptions Moved reseting of ++ \default@ds, \ds@ and \@declaredoptions here, from the end of ++ \ProcessOptions. ++ ++ * ltclass.dtx: 0.2a \@currext Name changed from \@currextension ++ ++1993-11-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltpictur.dtx: LaTeX2.09 "General" (RmS) changed \halign to ++ \ialignto initialize \tabskip and \everycr ++ ++1993-09-08 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \enddocument Added warning in case of ++ undefined references. ++ ++1993-09-07 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: LaTeX2.09 Changed definition of \verb so that ++ it detects a missing second delimiter. ++ ++1993-09-03 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \verbatim@nolig@list Replaced \@noligs ++ by extensible list ++ ++1993-08-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@sect (RmS) Made sure that ++ \protectworks correctly in expansion of \the<counter> ++ ++1993-08-03 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \enddocument Changed redefinition of ++ \global to redefinition of \@setckpt. ++ ++1993-05-05 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * fontcmds.dtx: v2.0b "General" Removed all LaTeX related cmds ++ ++1992-11-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \footnote (RmS) Changed all to ++ \def\protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand} ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@footnotetext (RmS) added protection ++ for \edef ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@mpfootnotetext (RmS) added protection ++ for \edef ++ ++1992-08-25 Frank Mittelbach <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@sect (FMi) replaced explicit setting ++ of \@svsec by call to \@seccntformat ++ ++1992-08-24 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \verb Changed \verband \@sverb to work ++ correctly in math mode ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@ifnextchar Changed so first argument ++ can be `='. ++ ++1992-08-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@othm (RmS) Changed error message to ++ complain about undefined counter ++ ++1992-03-18 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \end@float (RmS) changed \@esphack to ++ \@Esphack ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@xympar (RmS) added ++ \global\@ignorefalse ++ ++1992-01-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@othm (RmS) Check for existence of ++ theorem environment ++ ++1991-11-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltlists.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@item (RmS) Changed second call to ++ \makelabelto \unhbox\@tempboxa. Avoids problems with side ++ effects in \makelabeland is more efficient. ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \footnote (RmS) Added ++ \let\protect\noexpandin \@xfootnote, \@xfootnotemark, and ++ \@xfootnotetext ++ ++1991-11-06 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \end@float (RmS) added warning message ++ perhaps we should use an error message ++ ++1991-11-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltlists.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \makelabel (RmS) added default ++ definition for \makelabel, to produce an error message. ++ ++1991-11-01 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \footnote (RmS) Added ++ \let\protect\noexpandin \footnote, \footnotemark, and ++ \footnotetext, since \xdef is used ++ ++1991-10-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltinit.dtx: LaTeX209 \@tfor (Rms) \xdef replaced by \def (See ++ FMi's array.doc) ++ ++1991-09-29 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@footnotetext (RmS) added \reset@font ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@dottedtocline (RmS) added ++ \reset@font for page number ++ ++ * ltboxes.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@mpfootnotetext (RmS) added ++ \reset@font ++ ++1991-08-26 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@verbatim \@@par added ++ ++1991-08-14 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltplain.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \cases (RmS) inserted extra braces ++ around entry for NFSS ++ ++ * ltpictur.dtx: LaTeX2.09 "General" (RmS) inserted extra braces ++ around entry for NFSS ++ ++ * ltherest.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@endtheorem Moved \itshapeafter \item ++ to make it work with NFSS ++ ++1991-07-24 N.N. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> ++ ++ * ltmiscen.dtx: LaTeX2.09 \@verbatim Added ++ \penalty\interlinepenalty to definition of \par so that ++ \samepage works
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..11ad40cf3fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/changes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10436 @@ +This file lists changes to the LaTeX2e files in reverse chronological order. +It is provided for convenience only. It therefore makes no claims to +completeness or accuracy and it contains some references to files that +are not part of the distribution. +======================================================================= + +2019-07-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx (subsection{The mapping table}): + Accept typical f-ligatures and st in utf8 encoding (github/154) + +2019-07-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx (subsection{Housekeeping}): + Temp rollback fix for e-pTeX as that engines doesn't yet know + \ifincsname (so now features are unavailable there) + + * ltfssbas.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + Don't set any \f@... macros in \DeclareErrorFont as this side + effect is wrong! (pr/4399) + + * ltfssini.dtx (subsection{Miscellaneous}): + Explicitly set some defaults for NFSS + (because of change to \DeclareErrorFont) + + * slifonts.fdd: Explicitly set some defaults for NFSS + (because of change to \DeclareErrorFont) + +2019-07-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx (section{File Handling}): + Support UTF-8 in \includeonly + (subsection{Safe Input Macros}): + Support UTF-8 and spaces in \IfFileExists and \InputIfFileExists + + * ltclass.dtx (subsection{Providing shipment}): + Support UTF-8 and spaces in filecontents environment file name. + +2019-04-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: adjustment for extended UTF-8 support in pdftex, + supporting UTF-8 in labels and refs and in filenames and typeouts. + + * ltfinal.dtx: adjustment for extened UTF-8 support in pdftex + +2019-03-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * nfssfont.dtx (section{The code}): Added a default action + "\table\bye" which is the most common case, so one can now simply + hit enter and doesn't need to type something in. + +2019-02-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx (subsection{The mapping table}): + Added 27E8 and 27E9 (github/110) + +2019-02-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + Changed wording of warning (github/107) + +2019-02-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx (subsection{Safe Input Macros}): + Expand \@filef@und before executing second argument (github/109) + +2019-02-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx (subsection{The mapping table}): + Fixed U+012F which should have an i not a dotless i (github/122) + +2018-12-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx (subsection{array and tabular environments}): + Add extra \hskip1sp to guard against an \unskip at the start of + a c-column cell (gh/102) + +######################### +# 2018-12-01 Release +######################### + +2018-11-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): Unbox \@outputbox to preserve boxing + level (github/94) + +2018-11-18 Enrico Gregorio <Enrico.Gregorio@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + Added \Hwithstroke and \hwithstroke + +2018-11-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx (section{Bibliography Generation}): + Zap spaces in the argument of \bibliography + as BibTeX doesn't support them (github/88) + +2018-10-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Verbatim}): + Provide visible space in \verb* also for XeTeX and LuaTeX (github/69) + Provide \verbvisiblespace such that it is usable in normal text (github/70) + +2018-10-10 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx: prevent space hacks adding breakpoints (github/81) + +2018-10-05 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: Use hex in invalid byte error (suggested in PR 82 from mirabilos) + +2018-09-30 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: Fix display of codepoints in error messages (PR 63 from mirabilos) + +2018-09-28 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: Fix to handling of 4-octet UTF-8. Mostly from github PR 60 + +2018-09-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}): + * ltsect.dtx (section| or |\caption|): + Sometimes mask the endline char when writing to files (github/73) + +2018-09-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx (subsection{Command definitions}): + In the error messages always explicitly generate a space + after the csname and not rely on \noexpand to save tokens (github/41) + +2018-09-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (section*{Index}): + Guard against following \unskip (github/23) also fixes (github/75) + +2018-09-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx (subsection{Horizontal space (and breaks)}): + Start LR-mode for \thinspace and friends if necessary (github/49) + + * ltmath.dtx (subsubsection{The UNSORTED Rest}): + Start LR-mode for \smash \phantom and variants if necessary (github/49) + + * exscale.dtx (section{Implementation}): + * fontdef.dtx (subsubsection{Biggggg}): + Start LR-mode for \big and friends if necessary (github/49) + +2018-09-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx + Prevent protrusion in TOC lines (https://tex.stackexchange.com/q/172785/10109) + +2018-09-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx (section| or |\caption|): + Prevent protrusion in TOC lines (https://tex.stackexchange.com/q/172785/10109) + +2018-08-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx (subsection{Hyphenation}): Added + \document@default@language to latexrelease mechanism (github/68) + +2018-08-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx Use \guillemetleft and \guillemetright + instead of old Adobe names in all encoding files (github/65) + + * ltoutenc.dtx Provide \guillemetleft and \guillemetright (github/65) + + * latex209.dtx Allow \guillemetleft and \guillemetright to be + (re)defined. (github/65) + +2018-07-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: added missing declarations for \j (0237), \SS (1E9E), + \k{} (02DB) and \.{} {02D9) + +2018-05-29 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: use \csname test rather than \@ifundefined to get \relax side effect. + +######################### +# 2018-04-01 PL 5 Release +######################### + +2018-05-11 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Make \UTFviii@undefined@err and \UTFviii@invalid@err + also safe for initial file name for invalid UTF-8 and non-UTF-8 filesystems. + issue #48 + +2018-05-08 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: + Update to suspicious rollback code for issue #43 + + Make the suspicious rollback message a warning not error. + + Make the current and latest options to latexrelease set the + default rollback request to 0 so package rollback is disabled. + +######################### +# 2018-04-01 PL 4 Release +######################### + +2018-05-03 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Reset catcodes for non ASCII .ins files + +######################### +# 2018-04-01 PL 3 Release +######################### + +2018-04-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltcounts.dtx: added missing '.' in default for \the<counter> + when using \counterwithin (issue/38) + +2018-04-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx (subsection{Batchfile commands}): Read 8bit input + raw to leave high bits in the code to unchanged without utf8 + handling (issue 34) + Without this change a dtx file with 8bit chars in the code need to + have \UseRawInputEncoding in the .ins file to work. + +######################### +# 2018-04-01 PL 2 Release +######################### + +2018-04-08 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Guard against spaces in \providesPackage (for issue 33) + * ltfinal.dtx: adjust UTF-8 handling in \everyjob (for issue 32) + +######################### +# 2018-04-01 PL 1 Release +######################### + +2018-04-07 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Reset \inputencodingname in \UseRawInputEncoding + + +######################### +# 2018-04-01 Release +######################### + +2018-04-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx (subsection{Input encoding}): + * inputenc.dtx: + Handle special case of utf8x incompatibility + +2018-04-05 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: add BOM default definition + +2018-03-30 David Carlisle <David.Carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: add \UseRawInputEncoding and further + adjustments to the input encoding setup. + + +2018-03-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx (subsection{Providing shipment}): ensure that + chars in the range of 128-255 are not active during filecontents + writing. + +2018-03-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: Add \UTFviii@invalid + + * inputenc.dtx: Make \inputencoding{..} do nothing if it + specified the current encoding. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Default to UTF-8 input encoding + +2018-03-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Package/class rollback mechanism: use full file + name to specify old release + +2018-03-15 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Set up \protect in index entries + +2018-03-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltcounts.dtx: added \@removefromreset, \counterwithin and + \counterwithout + +2018-02-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: add rollback concept for packages and classes + +2018-02-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + * doc.dtx: Only use\DocStyleParms if defined + (previously the test defined it but this will change in the kernel) + +2018-01-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: Modify \IncludeInRelease code to check matching \EndIncluderelease + * ldefns.dtx ltfiles.dtx ltoutput.dtx ltclass.dtx fixes to \EndIncludeInRelease + * tlb-latexrelease.lvt check \IncludeInRelease markup + +2018-01-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: possible 2018-02-01 release + + * ltdefns.dtx: new \@ifundefined definitions to avoid setting + csname to \relax + +2017-12-17 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latexrelease.dtx: Add \latexreleaseversion info + to \ProvidesPackage output so that different versions announce + themselves properly + +2017-04-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: possible PL1 + + * ltluatex.dtx: glyph_stream_provider is back in luatex 1.04 + +######################### +# 2017-04-15 Release +######################### + + +2017-04-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: add a test on the value of \prevdepth + so that the depth of the last line is preserved in forced page breaks. + +2017-04-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: fix code to skip write18 for luatex. + +2017-04-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: If a composite is declared with an undeclared + comand, declare it first as an encoding specific command that + generates an error. This allows the declared composite to + work as expected. + +2017-03-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: reset \lineskiplimit to \normallineskiplimit + in \@arrayparboxrestore. https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/359934 + +2017-03-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx: luatex 1.04 primitives + +2017-03-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: move the definition of \@dischyph to be after that + of \- again. + +2017-03-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx: Adjust the documentation of + \@afterheading and \@xsect, to document that + \clubpenalty is set locally not globally. + +2017-03-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Update the definition of \- pr/3855 + +2017-03-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Reset \language in Output Routine + To protect hyphenation in page head. + + * ltfiles.dtx: Save \document@default@language + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Use \language to prevent hypenenation in \verb + Do same, replacing setting of \hyphenchar in verbatim. + +2017-03-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx, latexrelease.ins: support yyyy-mm-dd format + in addition to yyyy/mm/dd + +2017-03-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx: remove 2017-01-20 hack for luaotfload issue + as no longer needed. + +2017-02-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: \DeclareTextCompositeCommand check that + the accent command has been declared. + Make TU accents fall back to combining character if precomposed + character is not in the font. + +######################### +# 2017/01/01 PL 3 Release +######################### + +2017-02-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Correction to test for empty argument in TU + accents. + +######################### +# 2017/01/01 PL 2 Release +######################### + +2017-02-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Guard against empty base in + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand, and \add@unicode@accent. + Declare \^{} and \~{} in tuenc.def. + Declare \textquotesingle, \textasciigrave and + \textquotedbl for TU encoding (\remove@tlig version) + +2017-02-18 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx: parametrise Lua access to register + allocation count data + +2017-02-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: add fallback code for \textasteriskcentered + in TU encoding (https://tex.stackexchange.com/q/353425/) + +2017-01-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * build.lua bugs.txt, manifest.txt: drop latexbug.tex from the + distribution + + * ltoutenc.dtx, utf8ienc.dtx: add \= for YyGg + U+0232, U+0233, U+1E20, U+1E21 + +2017-01-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: add new banner suggesting to use latexbug.sty + instead. + + * tulm.fdd: New file tu*fd file sources, including tulmssq, + tulmvtt and tulmdh (all based on eu1*fd files from fontspec). + +######################### +# 2017/01/01 PL 1 Release +######################### + + +2017-01-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tulmtt.fd: force fontdimens 3 and 4 of lmtt to zero (for xetex) + + * ltoutenc.dtx: add composites for i and j duplicating those for + \i and \j + +2017-01-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: the TeX ligature syntax for xetex and luatex was + reversed in tuenc.def + Change \textasteriskcentered from U+204E to U+2217 + as the former is not available in common fonts (Latin + Modern, TeX Gyre Pagella,LinLibertine...) + +2017-01-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: PL1 + + * ltoutenc.dtx: add commands for ascii symbols pr/4500 + + +######################### +# 2017/01/01 Release +######################### + + +2017-01-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx: work around luaotfload issues 382 and 387 + +2017-01-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Add version of \showhyphens that works in XeTeX. + +2016-12-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx: build_page_insert callback and documentation updates. + +2016-12-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexrelease.dtx: re-instate the old 2014 version of + fixltx2e.sty protected by \IncludeInRelease guards + + * ltboxes.dtx, ltmath.dtx: undefine internal MakeRobust commands + for latexrelease + +2016-12-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: add TU encoding + +2016-12-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx, fontdef.dtx: Add support for defaulting to TU encoding + +2016-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: 2017/01/01 + +2016-11-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx call_edit callback added + +2016-11-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: modify \ifx tests in \@onefilewithoptions + (latex/4497) + +2016-11-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: Give a bit more space for section numbers + in the toc (eg 19.10, 74.17.2) + +2016-10-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: luatex allows \language up to 16383, + and unlike pdftex gives an error for \language16384 + (rather than treating it as 0) + +2016-10-15 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Require e-TeX + +2016-10-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Avoid deadcycles error building float pages + with negative sized floats + +2016-10-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: update to ignore spaces between options in + \ExecuteOptions and in the option clash checking. + + * ltvers.dtx: 2016/12/01 release (perhaps) + +2016-09-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx: documentation update, default section depth + is chapter=0. + +######################### +# 2016/03/31 PL 3 Release +######################### + +2016-07-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: Patch level 3 + + * ltplain.dtx: out by one error when \newinsert switches to + \extrafloats (tlb-newinsert-001, Maïeul Rouquette) + add \global to \chardefs in \extrafloats in case used in a group + Done as patch level as recent code so no need for \IncludeInRelease + +2016-07-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx: Typos in \IncludeInRelease guards (Hironobu Yamashita) + + * latexrelease.dtx: use \latexreleaseversion not \fmtversion + in old latexrelease package warning (Hironobu Yamashita) + + +######################### +# 2016/03/31 PL 2 Release +######################### + +2016-06-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: Patch level 2 + + * ltvers.dtx: define \@currname to be empty here (done again in ltfinal) + in case \IncludeInRelease used in a .def or .cfg file input in the format. + + * ltclass.dtx: allow \@parse@version after \begin{document} + +2016-06-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: fix \c{g} in OT1 (erroneously specified as T1 in ot1enc.def) + Adjust latexrelease to undo comma accents for old format dates + (Hironobu Yamashita) + + +######################### +# 2016/03/31 PL 1 Release +######################### + +2016-05-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: Pick up patch level from ltvers (not ltfinal) + (Hironobu Yamashita) + +2016-04-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx, ltfinal.dtx: 4096 character classes in latest xetex. + +######################### +# 2016/03/31 Release +######################### + + +2016-03-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx, slides.dtx: Add tests to avoid leaders of + almost zero length (latex/4452) + +2016-03-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx: new insert_local_par callback in luatex 0.89.4 + and contribute_filter from luatex 0.89.5 + +2016-02-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: added approximations to additional dashes + U+2010, U+2011, U+2102, U+2015 + +2016-02-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Modify checks in \DeclareMathSymbol and related + commands so they do not give errors for \U... required for luatex + 0.87 which reports \mathchardef tokens as \Umathchar. + +2016-02-15 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: Fix \changes when used inside the environment env. + Use a sort of raggedright in the change history + +2016-02-12 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: Suppress \CheckSum check if no checksum is given in the file. + +2016-02-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Lose \CharacterTable and \CheckSum from various documentation files. + +2016-02-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx: adjust callback list to luatex 0.89 + + * ltvers.dtx: TL 2016 edition + +######################### +# 2016/02/01 Release +######################### + +2016-01-04 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Drop loading XeTeX character class data, + adjust \newXeTeXintercharclass to allocate from 1 not 4. + +2015-12-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: add \textcommaabove (Enrico Gregorio) + and several overloads in T1 encoding + for \c to \textcommabelow or \textcommasbove + https://tex.stackexchange.com/questions/282900 + Add overload for (just) \c{g} in OT1 encoding. + +2015-12-10 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Load Unicode settings via new common system + (generic package "unicode-data"). + +2015-12-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: Additional accents that may be constructed in T1 + encoding + +2015-11-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx: test for undefined callback list latex/4445 + +2015-11-14 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx: Updates for luatex 0.85 + +2015-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: Support extended \newwrite and \newread in luatex + +2015-11-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: It's 2016 already. + +######################### +# 2015/10/01 PL 2 Release +######################### + + +2015-10-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: globally assign the count to 256/266 + when switching to extended range. + +2015-10-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * build.lua, manifest.txt ltpatch.ltx patches.txt bugs.txt + lose ltpatch.ltx + (which has not been used since the mechanism changed at + 2015/01/01 patch level 1) + +2015-10-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx (luatexbase): write lua allocation messages to the log (only) + +######################### +# 2015/10/01 PL 1 Release +######################### + +2015-10-02 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: PL1 + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Allow for full reversal of LuaTeX support + * ltluatex.dtx + +######################### +# 2015/10/01 Release +######################### + + +2015-09-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: \^W \^w \^Y \^y U+0174-0177 + +2015-09-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexrelease.sty: increase default float list from 18 to 52 + registers. + +2015-09-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltluatex.dtx (luatexbase): Adjust lua code for module messages. + +2015-08-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: Add extended \newinsert, taking inserts from float + list. + +2015-08-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: add A0 (no break space) and AD (\-), add Romanian + comma below accent for SsTt. Display U+<hex number> notation + in error message. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Add \textcommabelow accent + +2015-08-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: Allow negative patch levels for pre-release + + * ltdirchk.dtx, ltluatex.dtx: Do not prefix luatex primitives + * (was in ltluatex.dtx) + +2015-08-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: bump date and reset patch level + + * ltplain.dtx: add \string to allocation checking + * ltluatex.dtx: add luatex allocation support + * format.ins: add luatex allocation support + +2015-08-06 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Store Unicode data more efficiently + +2015-07-30 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * README.txt: Retain extension when releasing + (CTAN policy change) + + +######################### +# 2015/01/01 PL 2 Release +######################### + +2015-07-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: PL2 + + * ltoutput.dtx: fix docstrip guard for latexrelease latex/4434 + +######################### +# 2015/01/01 PL 1 Release +######################### + +2015-06-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: fix accents for 0403,0453,040C,045C + see https://tex.stackexchange.com/q/252521/1090 + +2015-06-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: set version to 2015/01/01 PL 1, and remove ltpatch.ltx system. + + * ltfsscmp.dtx: use 0000/00/00 date for old version. + +2015-06-20 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltunicode.dtx: Include first token in a range in + catcode settings. + +2015-06-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: date + + * ltplain.dtx: remove duplicated (old) definition of \newtoks and + use -1 for the first upper bound on register types that need a + contiguous range so that the allocation is never restarted at 256. + +2015-06-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexrelease.ins: add ltcounts.dtx to the latexrelease.sty sources + +###################### +# 2015/01/01 Release +###################### + +2015-05-11 Joseph Wright <joseph.wright@morningstar2.co.uk> + + * ltunicode.dtx: Apply East Asian catcode settings to LuaTeX + +2015-05-10 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx: explicitly reset \clubpenalty to default in + \@doendpe so that a change done by a heading doesn't survive + forever + +2015-05-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx, latexrelease.dtx: add the old definition of \newXeTeXintercharclass + when emulating old releases. + +2015-04-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: define \xe@alloc@intercharclass for compatibility with older xelatex.ini + +2015-04-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Try loading fd file if family has changed + +2015-04-03 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Update file manifest + +2015-03-31 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latexrelease.dtx: give fixltx2e its own version number + +2015-03-26 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltunicode.dtx: Rename data file to unicode-letters.def + +2015-03-25 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltunicode.dtx: Add version and MD5 information to generated file + +2015-03-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: add \MaintainedByLaTeXTeam + +2015-03-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Allow math alphabets in full range 0-255 + Restrict symbol fonts 0-15 (no change with classic tex) + +2015-03-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: save catcode of % for latex/4420 + +2015-03-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: Add \hideoutput and \tracingnone, reorganise + \tracingall (as sugested by GL on c.t.t) + +2015-03-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: Allocate mathgroups up to 255 in xetex and luatex + +2015-02-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: \EndIncludeRelease version (multiple files affected) + +2015-02-22 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Dropped \@no@font@optfalse in various places + - no longer provided by ltfsscmp.dtx. + +2015-02-22 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfsscmp.dtx: Moved all code into latexrelease - obsolete commands are no + longer automatically part of the kernel + +2015-02-21 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx, ltfloat.dtx: Fixed code for fltrace.sty and + flafter.sty that got incorporated from fixltx2e into the kernel. + +2015-02-21 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx, lterror.dtx, ltfiles.dtx, ltfssbas.dtx, ltfsscmp.dtx, + ltfssdcl.dtx, ltfsstrc.dtx, ltoutenc.dtx, ltoutput.dtx, ltpictur.dtx, + ltplain.dtx, lttab.dtx, ltvers.dtx, manifest.txt: + Removed all autoloading code as this is not any longer functional. + +2015-02-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fix-cm.dtx: rename from fixltx2e.dtx + +2015-02-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: add lmtt for latex/4415 + +2015-01-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx, ltfinal.dtx: reserve counts 256-255 + +2015-01-22 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: Allow \everyjob to be set before latex.ltx + +2015-01-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: etex \tracingall if available + + * ltoutput.dtx: Reset \IncludeInRelease flags so flafter can be loaded twice. + +2015-01-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexrelease.dtx: Optional argument for \IncludeInRelease + + * ltvers.dtx: Optional argument for \IncludeInRelease + +2015-01-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: Add \@currname so \IncludeInRelese tests are package-local + +2015-01-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexrelease.dtx: add "current" option + +2015-01-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx: Modify \addpenalty so it doesn't add redundant + skips (+ and - the same value) + + * fixltx2e.dtx: remove code from fixltx2e, add a stub package warning. + + * ltfloat.dtx: 2 column float order (latexrelease) + + * ltoutput.dtx: 2 column float order, merge with fltrace (latexrelease) + +2015-01-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: fleqn version of robust \[\] + + * ltcounts.dtx: Use \TextOrMath switch in \@fnsymbol (latexrelease) + + * ltspace.dtx: Allow hyphenation after space hacks (latexrelease) + + * ltfloat.dtx: check float options (latexrelease) + +2015-01-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcounts.dtx: Reset all within counter levels (latexrelease) + +2015-01-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx: \eminnershape from fixltx2e + + * ltspace.dtx: update \addpenalty from fixltx2e + +2015-01-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: \MakeRobust from fixltx2e + + * ltboxes.dtx: make \makebox \parbox etc robust + + * ltmath.dtx: make \( \) and \[ \] robust + + * ltlength.dtx: add = to setlength (latexrelease) + +2015-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexversion.dtx: New option handling + + * ltvers.dtx: define \IncludeInRelease and latexvesrsion date + docstrip guards + +2015-01-03 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Load information derived from Unicode Consortium + data to set \catcode, \lccode, \uccode, \sfcode information when + using a Unicode-based engine (XeTeX/LuaTeX), and initialise + XeTeX features for line breaking between character classes. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Enable extended primitives for LuaTeX + +2015-01-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexrelease.dtx: rename from patchltx2e + + * ltdefns.dtx: Use luatex compatible definition of \typein + if luatex is being used. + +2014-12-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patchltx2e.dtx: + * patchltx2e.ins: + * unpack.ins: + * manifest.txt New patchltx2e package added + + * ltfssbas.dtx: move allocation definition to ltplain + + * ltplain.dtx: Add new allocation code for extended registers + and \extrafloats command. + + * ltfinal.dtx: add \newmarks if e-tex marks are defined + + * ltfinal.dtx: add \newXeTeXintercharclass in xetex + + * ltfloat.dtx: \textsubscript from fixltx2e + + * ltspace.dtx: definition of \@ from fixltx2e + +2014-11-07 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Rename 00readme.txt to README (named README.txt in the development + repository) + +###################### +# 2014/05/01 Release +###################### + +2014-09-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * nfssfont.dtx Typo in definition of \encoding (no change to processing) + +2014-09-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx Typo in \Ask argument fixed + +2014-09-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd, ltoutput.dtx, letter.dtx, ltoutenc.stx, lterror.dtx, + * ltfssbas.dtx, ltsect.dtx, proc.dtx, fixltx2e.dtx, docstrip.dtx, + * oldlfont.dtx, ltclass.dtx, ltplain.dtx, classes.dtx, ltmiscen.dtx, + * utf8ienc.dtx, ltfntcmd.dtx, ltxdoc.dtx, encguide.tex, ltspace.dtx, + * lttab.dtx, ltdirchk.dtx, slides.dtx, ltfssdcl.dtx, ifthen.dtx, + * ltxref.dtx, ltfsstrc.dtx, source2e.tex, tlc2.err, latexbug.el, + * makeindx.dtx, lb2.err, ltlists.dtx, ltdefns.dtx, ltfinal.dtx, + * doc.dtx, ltboxes.dtx, exscale.dtx, ltfssini.dtx, ltthm.dtx, + * fontdef.dtx, usrguide.tex, ltfloat.dtx, preload.dtx, nfssfont.dtx + Typos in documentation found by Karl Berry - thanks + (date but not version number changed) + +2014-08-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Reset all within counters in one go (pr/4393) + +2014-06-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: add missing \fi reported by Ulrike Fischer + +2014-05-13 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: missing dostrip guard added to prevent some float + code ending up in fix-cm + +2014-04-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Allow (x-)ascii and utf8x aliases for utf8 in + xetex/luatex + +2014-04-27 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: change to allow for (slightly) better compatibility + with packages that change float handling but are not aware of the + modification in the core algorithm done in fixltx2e + + * syntonly.dtx: fix to work together with fixltx2e + +2014-04-23 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fltrace.ins: extract fltrace.sty from sources + +2014-04-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: allow \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} with luatex and xetex + +2014-04-18 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Handle infinite glue from \enlargethispage in + twocolumn mode (pr/4023) + +2013-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Check float optional argument for incorrect values + +2012-06-06 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Save and restore catcode of @ when reading a .def file + instead of setting it always to \makeatother afterwards (pr/4192) + +2011-09-03 Will Robertson <will.robertson@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Remove \global before \newcount in definition of + \new@mathversion; the \global is redundant and caused a rare error + in conjunction with etex.sty when the lower level register pool + was exhaused. + +2011-08-19 Will Robertson <will.robertson@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Update \@if@pti@ns to match new definition + of \in@ (pr/4166) + +###################### +# 2011/06/27 Release +###################### + +2011-05-08 Will Robertson <will.robertson@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Bruno's improvement to \in@ + +2011-02-25 Will Robertson <will.robertson@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: Bug fix for 2009-12 change to address pr/4092 + +2011-02-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lppl.tex: removed spurious \null from the source that generates + an empty line. + +2010-08-17 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Use braces around \input arg (pr/4124) + * ltmiscen.dtx: Change of plan: Use \@@input instead (pr/4124) + +2010-02-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: Added mathcodes for +,-,:, and = (pr/4096) + +2009-12-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: Use private switch to avoid issue (pr/4092) + +2009-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added Latin Modern and TeX Gyre subsets + +2009-10-20 Will Robertson <will.robertson@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Improve the definition of \in@ thanks to Heiko + +###################### +# 2009/09/24 Release +###################### + +2008-04-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: Ensure we don't lose spaces in the log (pr/4016) + +2008-03-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: added documentation on UTF8 handling and error + messages (pr/4002) + +2007-11-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: Many more updates (and comments) to the Cyrillic + code points, largely due to work by Matthias Noe -- thanks + + * <various>.err: changed internally generated class file name from + errata.cls -> ttcterrata.cls + +2007-11-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: Added a few new unicode decls in cyrillic (pr/3988) + +2007-10-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * exscale.dtx: Use box 0 within group to avoid changing this + scratch register (some bug reported on ctt) + +2007-10-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: Explain why \@mkboth is insde the heading + arg for \tableofcontents (pr/3285 and pr/3984) + +2007-08-31 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: changed font encoding changed warning in + \SetSymbolfont from screen warning to log info (pr/3975) + +2006-11-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added missing \ProvidesFile line for cp1257 (pr/3892) + +2006-10-21 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: corrected documentation for \@startsection (pr/3891) + +2006-09-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.ins: changed \usedir declaration for makeindex files as + requested by Karl Berry + +2006-09-13 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Ensure that vrule is in \normalcolor in output + routine + +###################### +# 2005/12/01 Release +###################### + +2006-05-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lppl.tex: 1.3c clarification that the license text can not + be changed. + + * lppl.txt: 1.3c clarification that the license text can not + be changed. + +2006-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.ins: put a correct \usedir declaration in for + generating the makeindex files (pr/3863) + + * ltboxes.dtx: Ensure \@parboxto holds the value of \@tempdimb + not the register itself (pr/3867) + +2006-03-24 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Added \MakeRobust and made several kernel macros + robust (pr/3816). + +2006-03-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: large number of corrections for a number of + input encodings (pr/3849) + Number of normalisations in the LICR representation (pr/3849) + Avoid displaying warning about empty encoding file for "ascii" + encoding. + + * utf8ienc.dtx: omsenc.dfu contained an incorrect ref from + 02D9 to \textperiodcentered (should have been 00B7) + +2006-02-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cleanup of .txt files: obsolete installation instructions + removed + +2006-02-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: added \inputencodingname and the two hooks + \newtoks\inpenc@prehook \newtoks\inpenc@posthook + to run code before and after an encoding change (suggested by + Philipp Lehman) + +2006-02-14 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: added \ij and \IJ mappings (beta test) + +2006-01-12 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lppl.tex: Created from lppl.txt + +2006-01-08 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Changed \@fnsymbol to use the new robust + \TextOrMath command instead (pr/3752). + +2006-01-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * nfssfont.dtx: fixing bug pr/3789 + +2005-11-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lppl.txt: small update, fixing typo and clarifying the term + "Base Interpreter" (found by Karl Berry) + +2005-11-10 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Make sure \addpenalty ultimately adds the correct + skip (pr/3073). + + * ltmath.dtx: Fixed potential problem in \[ (pr/3399) + + documentation fix (pr/3802). + +2005-11-08 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added \ij and \IJ from babel (pr/3771). + +2005-09-29 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Fixed blank lines (editor problem). + +2005-09-27 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Fixed a few oversights when making the + commands robust. + +2005-09-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: Added \ltx@sh@ft (pr/3469) + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Replace \sh@ft by \ltx@sh@ft (pr/3469) + + * utf8ienc.dtx: Fixed error messages not showing spaces. + Added ``else'' clause that got deleted by mistake. + +2005-09-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: small docu update + +2005-07-29 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Added \kernel@ifnextchar. + +2005-07-27 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Changed \mathbf etc. to be naturally robust. + +2005-07-13 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Added \textsuperscript and made + \DeclareMathSizes allow dimensions in all arguments. + +2005-01-14 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx ( \fnsymbol should use text symbols ): + that change made \@fnsymbol too robust (pr/3752) + +2004-10-31 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * vtexfree.txt: added info about *.dfu files (pr/3652) + + * install.txt: added info about *.dfu files (pr/3652) + +2004-10-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Removed dead code in \@makecol + +2004-09-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: \textasciitilde mapping changed (pr/3721) + +2004-09-02 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * sample2e.tex: fixed small glitches in the text (pr/3703) + +2004-07-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: environment names incorrectly sorted in + index (pr/3615) + +2004-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: explicitly set catcode of space within utf8.def + +2004-05-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * tlc2.err: LaTeX Companion 2ed errata added to distribution + + * inputenc.ins: split utf8 file generation into two parts for OSes + with a small limit on open output files + + * utf8ienc.dtx: fixed typo in \ProvidesFile line for ly1enc.dfu + +2004-05-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: properly allow \inputencoding in horizontal mode + (forgotten to set \catcode of space) (pr/3273) + +2004-05-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Typo in \textquotedblleft (pr/3673) + + +###################### +# 2003/12/01 Release +###################### + +2004-02-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: added \loggingall and \loggingoutput as variant of + \tracingall and \showoutput (write only to transcript) + + * manifest.txt: added lppl-1.2.txt to the distribution since we + are now at version 1.3 + +2004-02-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: changed warning text for oldstyle digits + +2004-02-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: docu fix (pr/3620) + +2004-02-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (section*{\indexname}]): Moved setting of \columnsep and + \columnseprule later to avoid affecting the wrong page (pr/3616) + +2004-02-15 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx + + Added better \nobreakdashes + +2004-02-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: fix for \@Esphack forgotten (pr/3498) + +2004-02-11 Rainer Sch�pf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pict2e.inx/.dtx: Removed. + +2004-02-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}): + environment names incorrectly sorted in index (pr/3615) + +2004-02-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * utf8ienc.dtx: no newlines in error messages allowed + (due to inputenc) + space in the wrong place "\count @64" + added commands already defined in the kernel (found by BG) + added test file pr/3480 + +2004-02-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: coding change, to follow bug fix by DEK in + plain.tex in OT4 (pr/3469) + + * inputenc.dtx: Added ISO 8859-16 Latin10 (pr/3568) + +2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx + + Small fix for \enlargethispage, pr/3528 + +2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx + + Tidied up a bit more of the code + +2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx + + Many math things made robust + + Added two `bigtriangle synonyms' for compatibility with the + stmaryrd symbols package + +2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Added \textbigcircle to OMS + + Fixed bad bug in \DeclareTextSymbol as per Heiko + in pr/3563 + +2004-02-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefiles + + Lots of minor fixes + +2004-01-31 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx (section{Implementation}): internal kernel version + of \@ifnextchar used in some places, see next entry (pr/3501) + + * ltdefns.dtx: internal kernel version for \@ifnextchar added + to prevent the amsmath package to highjack this command in random + places, this is really a bug in amsmath which should finally be + fixed there (pr/3501) + +2004-01-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: warning for old latex 5 years grace (pr/3601) + + * latexbug.tex: warning for old latex 5 years grace (pr/3601) + +2004-01-23 Rainer Sch�pf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: Replace the double dangerous bend sign by a + huge double exclamation mark. This is to mark important + bits in the documentation. + +2004-01-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: Changed error message for \nocite + +2004-01-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \ooalign for \k (pr/3532) + Added \textogonekcentered (pr/3532) + Added composites \k{o} and \k{O} (pr/3532) + +2003-12-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx: issue warning if circle size can't be met + + * nfssfont.ins: support for nfssfont.dtx + +2003-12-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: fixing a typo in \DeclareInputText recently + introduced. + +2003-12-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Ensure that \@elt has a defined + state in \@makecol (pr/3586) + +2003-12-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: added support for \MakeShortVerb* as suggested by + Hubert Gaesslein <hubertjg@open.mind.de> + +2003-12-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: changed typeout message + +2003-11-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: docu changes for latin 4 (pr/3585) + + * ltplain.dtx: docu fixes (pr/3584) + +2003-10-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Added extra \lccode for \- and \textcompwordmark + to allow hyphenation in the remainder of the word + +2003-10-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: docu fixes (pr/3575) + +2003-09-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: No hyphenation in first word after float + environmentb (pr/3498) + Allow \emph to produce small caps + +2003-09-14 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: removed surplus dot from error message + +2003-08-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx (section{Picture Mode}): + check for \cs{@linechar} being empty (pr/3570) + (subsection{Curves}): added missing displacement (pr/3566) + +2003-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: raise an error is \nocite is used before begin + document (until now it simply failed) + +2003-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: new implementation of textcomp with options and + subencodings + +2003-05-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: incorporated new definition for \@fnsymbol to use + text symbols if available (pr/3400) + +2003-04-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: incorporated fix-cm.sty by Walter Schmidt + +2003-02-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added a number of options to textcomp to enable + only some characters since most of the chars are ont generally + available. + +2003-01-12 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * nfssfont.dtx: added interactive support to allow font spec via + nfss classification. + +2002-12-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx (section{Bibliography Generation}): + Added \leavevmode in case citation is at start of paragraph (pr/3486) + +2002-11-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added cp858 (cp850 with euro symbol) (pr/3464) + +2002-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: coding change for \r{A} in OT1 to follow bug fix + by DEK in plain.tex, but it is still a hack! + (better solution: do not use OT1 encoded fonts) (pr/3469) + + * ltlists.dtx: Check for math mode when ending a list to + give a better error message than "perhaps a missing item" (pr/3437) + First change to this part of LaTeX since 1997! + +2002-10-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added cp1257 (Baltic) + +2002-10-02 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx (section{Macros for setting up the tables}): Adding + \LastDeclaredEncoding introduced a bug in + \DeclareFontSubstitution. Instead of the real encoding name the + token \LastDeclaredEncoding got into the internal lists causing + havoc. (pr/3459) + +2002-10-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: Use braces around \itshape to keep font change + local in \thempfootnote; bug introduced 7 years earlier + (pr/3460) + +2002-07-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added code 128 (texteuro) for cp1250 + +2002-07-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: added \texteuro for ansinew (pr/3423) + +2002-06-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: actually complained when format are older than 18 + months (now we accept 30) + + * ltvers.dtx: error message still talked about 1 year old sources + being too old (though in fact it is 30 months) + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Corrected \cs{c} for T1 (pr/3442) + Added \cs{textbardbl} (pr/3400) + Definition of \textexclamdown changed (pr/3368) + Definition of \textquestiondown changed (pr/3368) + Changed def for \textregistered to avoid small caps (pr/3420) + +2002-06-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: added macce (pr/3433) + added code points to 1252 (pr/3441) + +2002-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * oztex.txt: new version added + + +###################### +# 2001/06/01 Release +###################### + +2001-08-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: readded lost catcode setting for space in + ProvidesFile (pr/3353) + +2001-07-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: + + Added latin9.def (from Karsten Tinnefeld) + +2001-07-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews.cls: + + Added eTeX logo + +2001-06-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: check for old format disabled --- perhaps we have + reached the last release of 2e already? + + * inputenc.dtx: Added \textkra, \texttstroke and + \textTstroke to latin4 (pr/3336) + + * ltpictur.dtx: Don't warn if \line or \vector command + has zero length argument pr/3318 + + * fontdef.dtx (subsubsection{Arrows}): Guard against math active + = and math active | in \Relbar and \models (pr/3333) + +2001-06-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * format.ins: added default cfg files that are simple + wrappers for fonttext.ltx, fontmath.ltx, and preload.ltx (pr/3264) + + * fontdef.dtx: added default cfg files that are simple + wrappers for fonttext.ltx, fontmath.ltx, and preload.ltx (pr/3264) + +2001-06-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx: some docu changes + +2001-05-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Added \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2000/06/01] to .def + files, pr/3255 + + Made compatible T1 and OT1 accents (on i and \i), pr/3295 + +2001-05-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex + + Described short-form for guillemets in T1 encoding, pr/3192 + +2001-05-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: + + Added some definitions + +2001-05-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: extended NEXT encoding (pr/3281) + suppress all spaces for horizontal mode (pr/3273) + + * minimal.cls: added \pagenumbering{arabic} to define \thepage + (pr/3275) + + * ifthen.dtx: Added \AND, \OR and \NOT as boolean operators as + alternative to the lower case versions (pr/3297) + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Explicitly set \endlinechar to 10 (pr/3334) + + * ltclass.dtx: Explicitly set \endlinechar to 10 (pr/3334) + + * classes.dtx: Replaced all tilde chars used with \nobreakspace + (pr/3310) + +2001-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: partly support docstrip's ``verbatim'' + directive, at least ensure that it can be processed without and + error message (pr/3331) + +2001-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added missing \section to docu + +2001-04-21 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (section*{\contentsname): initialize \@tempdima + within \l@part so that \numberline can be used pr/3327 + +2001-04-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews14.tex: added + +2001-02-16 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxref.dtx (subsection{Cross Referencing}): Added an extra level + of grouping to \@newl@bel as suggested in PR3250 by + Harald Hanche-Olsen <hanche@math.ntnu.no> + +2001-01-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): reset @newlist flag in output + routine (pr/3286). This was done before (pr3231) but the code + ended up in the wrong place by mistake. + +2001-01-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: Moved \@mkboth out of heading args for + thebibliography and \listof... command as this can fail with the + slightly strange definition for \chapter in twocolumn mode (pr/3285) + +2000-09-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: for some unknown reason the version of fix2col + integrated was not the latest one --- so a number of bugs already + corrected crept up again (1.1d fixes those) + + Don't change \setlength if it isn't the kernel default any longer + + \addpenalty fix proposed in 3073 was not sufficient if the command + was used when \prevdepth=-1000pt (ie after \nointerlineskip) + +2000-09-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: finally moved emptying \errhelp to a place + after its last use (pr/449) + + +###################### +# 2000/06/01 Release +###################### + +2000-08-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Much editing but no code changes + +2000-08-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: + + Fixed typo in warning message + +2000-07-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Changed handling of space above footnotes. + +2000-07-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: complain about old LaTeX only after 18 months + + * ltvers.dtx: changed distribution check to yearly distribution + +2000-07-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: locally reset \if@newlist so that + list structures in head/foot don't interfere with + lists in the MVL. internal/3231 + +2000-07-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews13.tex: update to ltnews13 + +2000-07-12 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Ensure that rule between column is in \normalcolor + (it did depend on the color in the text at the column break!) + +2000-07-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: fix typo in warning message + +2000-07-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: ... and another fix for (pr/3170), sigh + +2000-07-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: incorporating latin4.def contributed by + Hana Skoumalov\'a + + * inputenc.ins: incorporating latin4.def contributed by + Hana Skoumalov\'a + +2000-06-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): extending (or say + fixing?) change for (pr/3170) + +2000-06-01 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpage.dtx: + + Changed grouping method in \markboth and \markright + (see also pr/3203) + + Less expansion by using token register in \markboth + and \markright + +2000-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsubsection{Declaration commands}): + reimplemented \UseTextSymbol and \UseTextAccent to support + reference over more than one level (pr/3160) + +2000-05-22 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: + + Less obscure wording at start of index? (pr/3202) + + * inputenc.dtx: + + Added latin2 option for textdegree (pr/3207) + Updated documantaion + + * ltpage.dtx: reimplementation of \markboth and \markright to + avoid problem with expanion at wrong point in time in some cases + (pr/3203) + +2000-05-21 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): new implementation + for \meta command (pr/3170) + +2000-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Parts}): Only add empty page after + part if twoside and openright (pr/3155) + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Reset \AtEndDocument for latex/3060 + +2000-04-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: ltnews13.tex added + +2000-01-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added \hmode@bgroup as shorthand for + \leavevmode\bgroup use \hmode@bgroup...\egroup instead of + \leavevmode{...} where applicable in most cases \leavevmode was + missing before (pr/3160) + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: use \hmode@bgroup...\egroup instead of \leavevmode{...} + +2000-01-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: allow \inputencoding also in hoizontal mode (or rather + make it do something there --- it was allowed before (pr/2888)) + +2000-01-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: fix error message for undefined code points + (pr/3158) + +###################### +# 1999/12/01 Release +###################### + +2000-01-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Disable hyphenation in verbatim even if the font + allows it. + +1999-12-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews12.tex: final adjustments + +1999-12-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews.cls: fixed a curious bug lurking in the class since its + beginning: putting a list directly after a paragraph would make the + paragraph before(!) the list justified (while the rest of the document + was set ragged right) + + * ltnews12.tex: added fixltx2e section + +1999-12-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}): + Changed \cs{CYRRHOOK} and \cs{cyrrhook} to + \cs{CYRRHK} and \cs{cyrrhk} as name changed in the cyrillic + bundle for naming consistency with other ``hook'' glyphs. + +1999-12-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews12.tex (section{Outcome of TUG '99 (Vancouver)}): + added text on TUG 99 and other bits + +1999-11-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltx3info.tex: Typo corrected. + + * emtex.txt: Correct name of file ltxcheck.tex. + +1999-11-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltx3info.tex: fixed typo + +1999-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsubsection{Declaration commands}): + Give \accent@spacefactor a default definition to prevent horrible + death in case or incorrect input (pr/3084) + +1999-10-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fixltx2e.dtx: added first version + + * manifest.txt: added draft ltnews12.tex + + * inputenc.dtx: removed left over beta test message + +1999-10-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Reset definition of active math ' to + \active@math@prime within the output routine. + + * ltmath.dtx: Introduce macro \active@math@prime for the active + prime character in math mode. + +1999-09-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex (subsection{Definitions}): show syntax of all + declaration commands (pr/3102) + +1999-09-17 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: removed extra change entry. + + * classes.dtx: found two changes entries claiming to have been done + in 1955 (exactly 40 years too early :-) + + * makeindx.dtx: fixed two changes entries (arg order wrong) + + * syntonly.dtx: updated changes entry to have four digits years + + * classes.dtx: update of label names in docu + + * ifthen.dtx: make this a proper LaTeXable package + + * pict2e.dtx: make this a proper LaTeXable package (even if not containing code) + + * ltxdoc.dtx: also accept .fdd files in DocInclude (code by M Schroeder) + +1999-09-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: renamed a few labels to support production of general docu + + * ifthen.dtx: changed driver file + +1999-09-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: did some spellchecking of docu after noticing + a few glaring typos + +1999-09-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lppl-1-1.txt: added LPPL 1.1 under this name to the distribution. + + * DEFAULT.pre: updated for LPPL 1.2 + + * DEFAULT.hea: updated for LPPL 1.2 + + * copyfd.pre: updated for LPPL 1.2 + + * copycfg.pre: updated for LPPL 1.2 + + * copyins.hea: updated for LPPL 1.2 + +1999-08-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lppl.txt: fixed minor glitches found by Matt and Eberhard + This is probably going to be LPPL 1.2 + + +###################### +# 1999/06/01 Release +###################### + +1999-07-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lppl.txt: final changes to LPPL 1.1 + +1999-07-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * updated headers to reflect LPPL 1.1 + updated legal.txt to say that use of LaTeX is unrestricted + +1999-06-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews11.tex (section{Fontenc package peculiarities}): + document the special behaviour of fontenc + + * ltclass.dtx: document that fontenc pretends it wasn't loaded + +1999-06-12 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}): + ensure that \@uclclist is extended only once (if at all) + +1999-06-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: ensure that fontenc doesn't load encodings from + previous calls again (pr/2888) + +1999-05-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: Added reference to webcomp.err. + + * readme.txt: Added reference to webcomp.err. + + * manifest.txt: Added reference to webcomp.err. + +1999-05-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * webcomp.err: file added + +1999-05-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews11.tex: updates + +1999-05-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.ins: removed "fd" guard since never used these days + +1999-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: docstrip `nowarn' guard was the wrong way around + for font OT1/cmr/bx/ui (pr/3036) + +1999-04-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: fixed typo in documentation (pr2973) + +1999-04-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx + + Corrected cp852 for pr/2992 + + * ltboxex.dtx + + Made robust the flag in \@iiiparbox: pr/2975} + + * ltdefns.dtx + + Fixed new version of \@yargdef: pr/3013 + + * usrguide.tex + + Added to documentation of uc/lc list + +1999-03-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: Correct last change. + +1999-03-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex + + Added to documentation of options + + * cyrguide.tex: + + Further editing + +1999-03-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cyrguide.tex: Use \URL command. + + * ltxguide.cls: Added \URL command. + +1999-03-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: Refer to cyrguide.tex. + + * ltxguide.cls: Added \cyrguide. + + * All copyright headers and preambles: updated for lppl.txt. + + * 00readme.txt: Refer to lppl.txt, add new LaTeX books. + +1999-03-03 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: + + Added some definitions + +1999-03-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Remove change from 1999-01-08 internal/2967 + + * lppl.txt: minor rewordings after comments from + Arnoud Engelfriet and John Hasler. + +1999-03-01 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * handbuch.err: Added. + + * install.txt: Add link to truetex.txt and vtex.txt. Remove + timings for slow computers. + +1999-02-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: temp fix for pr/2968 + +1999-02-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{The fontenc package}): + + Corrected cyrillic uc/lc list + +1999-02-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews.cls: + + Added some definitions + +1999-02-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * legal.txt: refer to LPPL + + * lppl.txt: more fiddling + +1999-02-12 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx: changed \oldstylenums to use \rmdefault instead of + cmm hardwired. This doesn't change much in standard cases but allows + other font sets to work without redefining \oldstylenums as long as + the right .fd files are available (pr/2954) + + * truetex.txt: Updated version. + +1999-02-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: Reset footnote counter for every new letter (PR + 2957). + +1999-02-09 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cyrguide.tex: + + Major editing (new file) + + * usrguide.tex (section{Commands}): + + Updated + + * minimal.cls: + + Small reordering to better support the documented method of use + + * cfgguide.tex (section{System configuration}): + + Clarification and emphasis changed re fontdef.dtx cfgs + +1999-02-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: catch \newcommand[10] or \newcommand[X] + +1999-02-05 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cyrguide.tex: small updates + +1999-01-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: new go faster \newcommand implementation /2942. + +1999-01-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex (subsection{Selection commands}): added documentation + for \linespread (pr/2891) + + * ltnews10.tex: updates + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Simplified solution for pr/2930 + +1999-01-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: two more \long in \@ifnextchar for latex/2902 + +1999-01-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex (subsection{Encoding definition file commands}): + Added documentation about \LastDeclaredEncoding + +1999-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ifthen.dtx: \isundefined for /2824 + + * latexbug.tex: cyrillic + + * latexbug.el: cyrillic + +1999-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: add extra braces and \long declartions so + [{]}] and [\par] work. latex/2896. + +1999-01-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: Added description how to follow up a problem report. + + * latexbugs.tex: Added description how to follow up a problem + report. + + * classes.dtx: Added check of @noskipsec switch in \part for + article class. + +1999-01-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Hackery to support reading in fontenc.sty several + times (really the wrong interface and needs changing) + + Hackery to support cyrillic uc/lc update --- that will definitely go + somewhere else in a later release + +1999-01-06 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * emtextds.txt: Added to distribution. Installation procedure for + Walter Schmidt's emTeX/TDS for OS/2. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Minor documentation fix (PR 2939). + +1999-01-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Added \LastDeclaredEncoding to support cyrillic + integration (pr/2988) + + * ltoutput.dtx: Added negative vskip, as when processing outputbox + as suggested by Fred Bartlett pr/2892 + + * classes.dtx: Check \if@noskipsec in \part see pr/2889 + + * ltoutenc.dtx: New impl of \@text@composite and \@text@composite@x + (pr/2930) + +1999-01-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: Need special protection for character + \texttt{\char62} in \cs{changes} entry, as this is the makeindex + actualchar. + +1998-12-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: The case-changing trick in the definition of + \short@macro didn't work, as the category code was changed inside + the macro replacement text, not during the definition. + +1998-12-27 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}): Use + \string, not \protect in argument of \special@index. + +1998-12-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}): + Correctly handle second index entry for \SpecialMainEnvIndex + by using \special@index not \index (pr/2928) + +1998-12-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * nfssfont.dtx: cosmetic change: \documentstyle -> \documentclass + Program still would need a major user interface upgrade + ... one day (pr/2915) + +1998-11-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: prevent an endless loop from incorrect input like + \begin{tabular}{l|l{11.5cm}} (pr/2884) + +1998-09-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added \string to definition of \a so that \a' + works even if ' is active at that time (pr/2878) + + * classes.dtx: redefine \thesection, \thechapter and \@chapapp + globally (using \gdef) in \appendix so that these redefinitions + survive even if \appendix is used within an environment such as + multicols + +1998-09-17 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cfgguide.tex (section Configuration files for + standard packages and classes]): + added info about ltnews.cfg (pr/2875) + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Explicitly set \spacefactor after \accent in + OT1 type accents like \`A (pr/2877) + +1998-08-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: Correction for PR 2563: doc.dtx produces incorrect + index entries for some single character control sequences + (like <). + +1998-08-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * (Various source files): Replaced old form `commandname by + \cs{commandname} in changes entries. + + * (Various source files): Replaced \cmd{\commandname} by + \cs{commandname} in changes entries. + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Corrected documentation glitch in changes entry. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Corrected documentation glitch in changes entry. + + * latexsym.dtx: Corrected documentation glitch in changes entry. + +1998-08-01 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx (section{Announcing the files}): + + Corrected version number + +1998-07-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: give better error message if source document contains + a character which is not defined by current input encoding (pr/2845) + +###################### +# 1998/06/01 Release +###################### + +1998-06-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex (subsection{Identification}): Explicitly warn that + the optional date argument of \Provides... must be in the format + yyyy/mm/dd and will produce low-level errors otherwise + +1998-06-17 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: + + Spanish ords changed to text chars, pr/2579 + + Fixed typo in `next' + + * lttab.dtx: + + Enhanced documentation + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + + Fixed \textcircled + Fixed wrong code in \t + Added masc/fem ords defaults + Swapped acutedbl and gravedbl in TS1 + Renamed macron in TS1 + + * pict2e.dtx: + + Wording changed, and "documentation" + +1998-06-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slifonts.fdd: fix provides files for T1* (Bernard Gaulle) + +1998-06-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: support calc expressions in \rule command + (that one was forgotten or so it seems) + +1998-05-26 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: + + Set-up lccodes (and uccodes) before reading in + hyphenation files + +1998-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (section{The Description of Macros}): + reinit ^^A as comment char at beginning of document to allow use + of inputenc with doc since inputenc disables ^^A (pr2581) + +1998-05-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews09.tex more text + +1998-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}): + small change that defers freezing of \MacroFont until after the + preamble so that people can change its definition in the preamble. + As we have been on 1.9z this is now 2.0a but it isn't really + something exciting ... :-) + + * ltxref.dtx: added documentation about extending the + \ref mechanism as suggested in pr2801 + + * ltcounts.dtx: small documentation updates + +1998-05-13 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx: + + Documented lots of bugs and problems with the present code, + and even some solutions + + * latex209.dtx: + + Added experimental long typeout about abuse of + compatibility mode to possibly avoid prs like 2807 + +1998-05-13 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx Use \setlength to set size of p-column and for + argument of tabular* environment, so that the benefits of the + calc package apply. + +1998-05-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: removed space at the right of address (pr2794) + +1998-05-09 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: + + Reverted openany change to \mainmatter + +1998-05-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Modify option clash error help message. latex/2805 + +1998-04-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx (IMPORTANT NOTICE): renamed \orginaldefault to + \originaldefault + +1998-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: some fixes for pr2662 + +1998-04-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: explain new \DeclareMathDelimiter syntax (pr2662) + +1998-04-15 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: use new \DeclareMathDelimiter syntax (pr2662) + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: allow \DeclareMathDelimiter to always use 6 args + (pr2662) + +1998-04-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: added \mathring accent (pr2785) + +1998-04-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * distrib.txt: Update from 1994 version with a view to adding + to june release, better late than never. + + * docstrip.dtx: CHANGE to default header placed on extracted + files, to allow extracted files to be distributed as long as + sources also distributed. This does not affect any .ins files that + explicitly set a preamble with the docstrip \preamble or + \usepreamble commands. If you currently distribute a package and + want to keep the old preamble, add \usepackage\originalpreamble + to your .ins files. Note that the old text forbids inclusion of + the package on `ready to run' TeX distributions such as TeXLive + or tetex. + + + +1998-04-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * distrib.txt: Update from 1994 version with a view to adding + to june release, better late than never. + + * docstrip.dtx: CHANGE to default header placed on extracted + files, to allow extracted files to be distributed as long as + sources also distributed. This does not affect any .ins files that + explicitly set a preamble with the docstrip \preamble or + \usepreamble commands. If you currently distribute a package and + want to keep the old preamble, add \usepackage\originalpreamble + to your .ins files. Note that the old text forbids inclusion of + the package on `ready to run' TeX distributions such as TeXLive + or tetex. + +1998-03-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +1998-03-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +1998-03-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: added substiution for cmss/bx/sc to produce + cmr/m/sc; much better would be to have the real thing --- + anybody cares to contribute those to the ec fonts? (pr2586) + +1998-03-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: say that reports have to be in English + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Documentation added about removing declaration + of encoding specific commands (pr/2783) + Command \UndeclareTextCommand added (pr/2783) + Added \UndeclareTextCommand declarations to textcomp.sty (pr/2783) + + * ltdefns.dtx: \@thirdofthree added for \UndeclareTextCommand + +1998-03-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added documentation about the best order of + declarations for encoding specific commands. + Also moved loading ofts1enc.def after declaring the defaults + for such reasons. + +1998-03-15 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: added info about not changing established (mis)behavior + +1998-03-11 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * miktex.txt: Added to distribution. + +1998-02-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: fixed typo iso-8859-5 should have been iso-8859-9 + (pr/2748) + +1998-01-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltx3info.tex: + + Updated + +1998-01-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * install.txt: small updates such as isbn numbers + +1998-01-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: adding \nopreamble and \nopostamble + and making sure that \usepreamble\empty really doesn't write + anything to the stripped file (pr/2726) + + * ltclass.dtx: make \& locally safe in \ProvidesFile /2702 + fix up pkgindoc.sty which probably hasn't worked since + {v1.0p}{1995/05/25}{Delete \cs{filec@ntents} after preamble} + +1998-01-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fix \t for latex/2734. + + * ltclass.dtx: make \& locally safe in \ProvidesFile /2702 + fix up pkgindoc.sty which probably hasn't worked since + {v1.0p}{1995/05/25}{Delete \cs{filec@ntents} after preamble} + +1998-01-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fix \t for latex/2734. + +1998-01-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * multitex.txt: New version from Markus Kohm latex/2721 + +1998-01-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * multitex.txt: New version from Markus Kohm latex/2721 + +1998-01-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: + + Added large sizes for ec fonts only + Removed long lines + +###################### +# 1997/12/01 Release +###################### + +1998-01-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added missing braces and \upshape for \textcircled + +1998-01-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * emtex.txt: small clarification as suggested by Heinz + +1997-12-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: + + Corrections to math font declarations + Tidying + Added new encoding information + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + + Documentation correction + +1997-12-31 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * grphcomp.err: added further errate entries, updated cls file + +1997-12-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: fixed header info for textcomp.sty + (missing \ProvidesPackage) + +1997-12-22 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Added textcomp package + Corrections and additions to documentation + Removed all octal and hex codes + Added \textperthousand and \textpertenthousand to T1 + Added \leavevmode at start of \c in T1 + + * inputenc.dtx + + Made next encoding consistent with others + Consistently used math-or-text command when + available: THIS MAY CHANGE + Changed \mathdegree to \textdegree + \inputencoding now works only in vmode + Temporarily fixed \IeC + Merged latin1 code with ansinew/cp1252 + Changed `\k{}' to `\k\ ' + Added textcomp package + Corrections and additions to documentation + + * fontdef.dtx + + Added documentation + + * ltnews08.tex + + Added stuff + +1997-12-18 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: Fix small documentation glitch. + + * ltpatch.ltx: Replace reference to ,,June'' release by ,,last'' + release. + +1997-12-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: expl3 + + * latexbug.el (ltxbug-categories): expl3 + +1997-12-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: Removed obsolete \setbox construct. + +1997-12-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex (section{Upgrading \LaTeX~2.09 classes and + packages}): Added documentation for \if@compatibility switch + (supplied by Barbara Beeton). + +1997-12-11 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex (subsection{\LaTeXe---The new \LaTeX~release}): + Improved the sentence about formerly separate formats. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Documentation fixes. + + * ltlogos.dtx: Documentation fix. + +1997-12-06 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): + + Removed incorrect error code in \output + + * ltnews08.tex: + + Revised text + + * ltnews.cls: + + Added definition environment + +1997-11-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Use \textperthousand not \textpermill. /2673 + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \textperthousand, \textpertenthousand and + \textfractionsolidus not \textpermill, \textpertenmill and + \textfraction. /2673 + +1997-11-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: inline \stepcounter /2669/2661 + +1997-11-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: reindent \@xtryfc and friends (no code change). + + * ltfloat.dtx: missing percent in @footnotetext. /2670 + +1997-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: ltnews08 + + * ltnews08.tex: first attempt. + + * source2e.tex: ltcounts and ltlength before NFSS /2669/2661 + + * format.ins: ltcounts and ltlength before NFSS /2669/2661 + +1997-11-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * compan.err: rewrote that file to be processable by LaTeX + + * grphcomp.err: rewrote that file to be processable by LaTeX + +1997-11-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Fix \DeclareSymbolFont so it updates \group@list + for latex/2661. + Remove duplicate (unused) definition of \stepcounter. + Add a few macro envs to the documentation. + +1997-11-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ifthen.dtx: Documentation fix. + +1997-10-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: Minor documentation fixes. + +1997-10-23 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.ins: Unpack ts1enc.def. + +1997-10-21 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Added \makeatletter to \nfss@catcodes (and removed + it from \try@load@font@shape). + + * ltdefns.dtx: Change \renew@command to use \begingroup/\endgroup + for grouping, to avoid generation of empty math atoms. + +1997-10-20 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Removed \aa and \AA from \@uclclist as these are + macros. + + * slifonts.fdd(ullasy.fd): Removed superfluous pair of braces at + end of \DeclareFontFamily command. + +1997-10-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: Moved check for vertical mode from + \DeclareTextFontCommand to \check@nocorr@. + +1997-10-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: back out \today change. + + * install.txt: --release--date--goes--here-- + + * ltpatch.ltx: --release--date--goes--here-- + + * patches.txt: --release--date--goes--here-- + + * Makefile: install.txt patches.txt ltpatch.ltx + --release--date--goes--here-- + +1997-10-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Check for text before or after \end{filecontents} + latex/2636 + +1997-10-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx(\l@part): Removed setting of \@tempdima as + this macro does not use \numberline to set the toc line. + +1997-10-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: renamed \perthousand to \textpermill as this is the + TS1 name (and it wasn't available before) (pr/2622) + added code page 1250 (pr/2515) + +1997-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: Move expansion of \today here from document class + files. latex/2620 + + * classes.dtx: use \def not \edef for \today. latex/2620 + +1997-10-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlogos.dtx: Simplified macro \LaTeX: use only \check@mathfonts + to force loading of fonts suitable for the letter `A'. + +1997-10-06 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcounts.dtx: Replaced \@Roman by a new version that is fully + expandable, so that the correct sequence of letters is written to + files. + +1997-09-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Date}): Use \edef to define to + in order to save space; following change to classes.dtx, dated + 1995/08/16. + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Date}): Use \edef to define to + in order to save space; following change to classes.dtx, dated + 1995/08/16. + +1997-09-15 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx: warn if \line etc is too small to get printed. + (pr/2524) + +1997-09-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Use \begingroup \endgroup instead of { ... } + to avoid generating math ords if used in math mode. (pr/2573) + +1997-09-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: added decmulti input encoding for DEC Multinational + Character Set (pr/2599) + +1997-08-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx(latin2.def,cp852.def): Replaced \dh and \DH by \dj + and \DJ. + + * inputenc.dtx(ansinew.def): Exchanged codes for \textendash and + \textemdash. + + * inputenc.dtx: Enclosed all encoding definition files by + \makeatletter/\makeatother. + +1997-08-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: Added initialization of \leftmargin to \@listi + (obviously forgotten and never noticed before). + +1997-08-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Corrected order of arguments in \UseTextSymbol + example (PR latex/2572). + +1997-07-31 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cfgguide.tex: Put braces around argument of \sffamily, + to keep latex2html happy. + +1997-07-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: support compiling docstrip without statistics + (pr/2429) + + * fntguide.tex: documentation updates (pr/2550) + +1997-07-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el: Use default name and address from user-... + and make current directory setting more robust. + Both fixes from Andreas Schwab, latex/2547. + +1997-07-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: Replaced slides.fdd by slifonts.fdd. + + * ec.ins: Replaced slides.fdd by slifonts.fdd. + + * slides.ins: Replaced slides.fdd by slifonts.fdd. + + * slides.fdd: Renamed to slifonts.fdd, there is a name clash with + slides.dtx when run through LaTeX. + + * truetex.txt: New version by Richard Kinch. + +1997-07-09 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * doc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * exscale.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * fontdef.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ifthen.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * inputenc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * latex209.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * latexsym.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * letter.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltclass.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * lterror.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfloat.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfssini.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltlists.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltmath.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltpictur.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltplain.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltsect.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * makeindx.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * newlfont.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * oldlfont.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * slides.dtx: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * cmextra.ins: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * clsguide.tex: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + + * lablst.tex: Documentation fixes by Andreas Schwab + <schwab@issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de>. + +###################### +# 1997/06/01 Release +###################### + +1997-06-17 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: + + Changed information about fontname + .fd filenames to lowercase + Removed long lines, and a few typos + +1997-06-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * emtex.txt: Updated by Heinz Kusnier. + + * web2ctex.txt: Updated by David Outteridge. + + * manifest.txt: Added truetex.txt. + + * truetex.txt: New file by Richard Kinch. + +1997-06-16 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{Introduction}): Documentation fix. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Documentation fixes. + + * exscale.dtx: Documentation fix. + + * classes.dtx: Documentation fixes. + + * ltfloat.dtx: Documentation fix. + + * alltt.dtx: Documentation fixes. + +1997-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * readme.txt: + + Added information re ltnews files + + * usrguide.tex: + + Updating information: fonts, addresses, CD-ROMs + + * clsguide.tex: + + Added information: normalsfcodes, policy on chnages + to standard styles + +1997-06-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxcheck.tex: Change texts referring to dc/ec fonts. + internal/2513 + + * latexbug.tex: Fix save stack problem, internal/2514, and + other minor improvements. + +1997-06-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: add bold sc fonts for latex/2497 + +1997-05-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.fdd: Removed spaces in and around arguments to + \DeclareFontShape. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Removed spaces in and around arguments to + \DeclareFontShape and \EC@family. + +1997-05-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlogos.dtx: Added \m@th to definition of \LaTeXe so that + the logo works with non-zero values of \mathsurround. + + * ltfsstrc.dtx (section{Handling Options}): Replaced \\ by + \MessageBreak in Option `pausing' (suggested by Donald Arseneau). + +1997-05-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: + + Corrected typo in cp852.def + +1997-05-08 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.ins: + + Split up \generate for PC + +1997-05-07 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: + + Added latin3.def + Some rearrangments + Removed long lines + + * ltspace.dtx + + Made \newline robust + + * ltoutenc.dtx + +1997-04-30 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.ins: Added generation of latin5.def. + + * inputenc.dtx: Latin5 encoding added. + +1997-04-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: add \@empty to \@citex for latex/2432. + +1997-04-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmextra.ins: Remove concrete fd file generation. + +1997-04-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: bm package. + +1997-04-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: remove hidden math from itemize labels latex/2419 + + * ltnews07.tex: first draft. + +1997-04-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * texpert.txt: default install uses ec. + + * install.txt: default install uses ec. + + * readme.txt: 1997/06/01 + + * unpack2e.ins: include ec.ins not newdc.ins by default. + + * ltpatch.ltx: 1997/06/01 + + * patches.txt: 1997/06/01 + + * Makefile: 1997/06/01 + +1997-04-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: normalsfcodes latex/2404 (from patch file) + + * ltfiles.dtx: \normalsfcodes latex/2404 (from patch file) + +1997-03-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * amiweb2c.txt: update from Andreas Scherer. + +1997-03-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcounts.dtx: Use \mathsection and \mathparagraph in \fnsymbol + latex/2445 + + * inputenc.dtx: Use decimal rather than hex to avoid active + character problems. latex/2451 + +1997-02-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: typo fixed in ot1cmvtt \ProvidesFile latex/2394 + + * slides.fdd: typo fixed in cccsc10 latex/2395 + +1997-02-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: patch level 1 + + * ltpatch.ltx: /2414 fix. + + * ltlists.dtx: Support \noindent after \item. latex/2414 + +1997-02-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{GetFileInfo}): missing % latex/2404. + + * ltpatch.ltx: had to happen. + + * ltclass.dtx: missing % in last g@addto@macro change. + +###################### +# 1996/12/01 Release +###################### + +1997-01-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.txt: ec fonts. + + * ltnews06.tex: ec fonts. + + * ec.ins: add slitex fonts + + * slides.fdd: ec fonts. + lowercase fd file \input. + + * ltxcheck.tex: ec fonts. + +1997-01-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: ec.ins. + + * Makefile: ec.ins. + + * ec.ins: new file. Alternative to newdc.ins + + * cmfonts.fdd: Add ec fonts + +1997-01-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: Use \DeclareMathDelimiter and \DeclareMathSymbol + On remaining cases using primitive assignments. + + * ltfiles.dtx: reset \deadcycles in \include for latex/2365. + + * ltmath.dtx: Remove spurious space tokens from \root. + General cleanup of the docs, lots of macro envs added. + +1997-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: modify \\ in \startbreaks for /2341. + +1997-01-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews06.tex: minor edits. + +1996-12-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx: \nobreak added to \@dottedtocline for latex/2343 + +1996-12-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * modguide.tex: Fix spelling for latex/2345 + +1996-12-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Use \begingroup so \g@addto@macro does not make + a \mathord. + +1996-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Fix for /2340 (From Marcin). + +1996-12-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: Call \@setminpage if needed. latex/2318. + General doc improvements (add macro envs, indent code, etc). + +1996-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: *** + + * ltfssini.dtx: *** + + * ltvers.dtx: ***. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Remove *** from messages. internal/2338. + +1996-11-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: documentation changes. + + * ltvers.dtx: Check for old format modified again. /2319 + +1996-11-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews06.tex: document fd file change. + +1996-11-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: change documentation of release schedule /2319 + + * ltvers.dtx: Check for old format modified. /2319 + + * ltxcheck.tex: lowercase fd and *enc.def filenames. /1044 + + * fontdef.dtx: lowercase fd and *enc.def filenames. /1044 + + * slides.fdd: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * latexsym.dtx: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * latexsym.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * slides.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * cmfonts.fdd: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * cmextra.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * newdc.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * olddc.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * cmfonts.ins: lowercase fd file names. /1044 + + * ltoutenc.ins: lowercase fd and *enc.def file names. /1044 + + * ltoutenc.dtx: lowercase fd and *enc.def file names. /1044 + + * ltfssbas.dtx: lowercase fd file names. internal/1044 + +1996-11-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: Reinstate \ensuremath as \long /2104. + +1996-11-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: resend patch from Sept 11 + + Added ts1enc.def (but it is not unpacked) + Changed copyright, underscore (\_) and registered + Added \leavevmode to compwordmark + Added hex index tabs (experimental) + +1996-11-05 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx + + Added standard nobreak check to the write used for \nofiles case + +1996-11-04 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx + + Added test for no \item between an inner and + outer list + + * ltplain.dtx: + + Use \hbox to in \dotfill + + +1996-11-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lterror.dtx (autoload version): Move \@nodocument into kernel, + so that it can be \let to \relax in \begin{document}. + +1996-11-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Change MW address. + + * cmfonts.ins: split up \generate (again) for PC. + +1996-10-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx + + Added \lccode for \oe in OT1 + + * classes.dtx: + + Changed numbering of figures, tables and equations outside chapters + in book and report (pr/2178) + + Removed math-mode from itemize labels + + * ltspace.dtx + + Reimplemented \(no)linebreak + Reimplemented \\ and \newline + + * ltsect.dtx: + + Documentation changes + +1996-10-28 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Removed defs of \aa \AA + Removed \@strip@args (no longer used) + Corrected documentation + + * inputenc.dtx + + Added cp865.def + Added \textasteriskcentered + Removed \aa \AA as internal forms + Other minor additions and corrections to .def files + + * ltplain.dtx + + Removed math from \dotfill + Added \aa and \AA + Updated and corrected documention + +1996-10-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx: + + Added explicit flag resetting to \endtrivlist + + * ltoutput.dtx + + Added documentation + +1996-10-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: + + Added local settings of flags in + \@arrayparboxrestore: dangerous! + Used \@setminipage in minipages + + * ltfloat.dtx: + + Prevent floats in preamble + \@setnobreak no longer used in resets (but see above) + + * ltoutput.dtx + + Changes when nobreak is true + Prevent \twocolumn in preamble + Added error code to \newpage + +1996-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Remove redefinion of \Ask and add \askonceonly + (which is the same thing, but looks nicer). + + * docstrip.dtx: Change MDW's address. Add \askonceonly. + +1996-10-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx + + Use \setboz\z@ to remove parindent in \@item + Set \clubpenalty correctly in \@item + Do not reset \@nobreak unconditionally + Added documentation + + * ltsect.dtx + + Use \setboz\z@ to remove parindent in \@xsect + Added documentation + +1996-10-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Delay setting the `current directory syntax' + commands so that a configuration file can reset them if + necessary. + +1996-10-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * autoload.ins: add \usedir + +1996-10-21 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx + + Small change in tabbing to make the later change in items + (see pr/2211) work properly + + Moved some code \@array, to make this environment more robust + (pr/2183), uncovering an interesting feature of the original + code; changed to use \set@typeset@protect + + Made \multicolumn \long + +1996-10-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile (DSTS): add format.ins + + * manifest.txt: add format.ins + +1996-10-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ds/docstrip.dtx: merge in Marcin's latest. + More DPC changes: + Make missing batchfile an error + Change name of config file to docstrip.cfg. + Add \endbatchfile. + Change all the .ins files for new style. + +1996-10-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ds/docstrip.dtx: Add initex support, and + auto setting of \batchfile from \jobname to the new + `TDS' version from Marcin. + +1996-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: Add ltxcheck.tex + +1996-10-08 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx + + Fixed bug in \text.. commands (pr/2157) + +1996-10-05 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx + + Added setting of \@clubpenalty + + * classes.dtx (chapter*{\bibname): + + Added setting of \@clubpenalty + +1996-10-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: remove testdist.dtx, add ltxcheck.tex + + * unpack2e.ins: Remove \testdistribution. internal/2251 + + * ltxcheck.tex: New version independent of ltdirchk + Add checking for files `unpacked; during LaTeX install. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Remove ltxcheck.tex. internal/2251 + + * Makefile: 1996/12/01. + + * ltclass.dtx: Reset \@unprocessedoptions in + \RequirePackageWithOptions for internal/2269. + +1996-09-29 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx + + Added documentation + + * ltfiles.dtx + + Added disabling of \@nodocument to \document + Tidied up documentation + + * ltoutput.dtx + + Checks for noskipsec and inlabel added to \newpage + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + + Moved \@xobeysp to ltspace.dtxx + + * ltspace.dtx + + Added \@xobeysp linked to \nobreakspace + +1996-09-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.ins: Added guard `nowarn' to generation of OT1cmtt.fd + file, to avoid annoying substitution messages if a bold typewriter + font is selected (as, for example, in section headings). + + * newdc.ins: Added guard `nowarn' to generation of T1cmtt.fd file, + to avoid annoying substitution messages if a bold typewriter font + is selected (as, for example, in section headings). + + * cmfonts.fdd (subsubsection{Computer Modern Typewriter}), Added + silent substitutions for T1 bold extended typewriter fonts (new + version). + +1996-09-21 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Change to using \@parboxrestore in \@outputpage + +1996-09-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: Quote > in changes entry (from 1994/10/29:-) + as it is special due to setting in gglo.ist. + +1996-09-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Fix loop for latex/2257 + +1996-09-09 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx, letter.dtx, slides.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): + replace \endash with \textendash (stupid typo) + +1996-08-25 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): Replaced -- with \endash + in the definition of \labelitemii. (saves a token) + + * slides.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): Replaced -- with \endash + in the definition of \labelitemii. (saves a token) + + * ltpatch.ltx: Add the characters ', `, and " to \nfss@catcodes as + they might be active while LaTeX processes an .fd file. + + * ltfssbas.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): Added the + characters ', `, and " to \nfss@catcodes as they might be active + while LaTeX processes an .fd file. + +1996-08-24 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): Replaced -- with \endash + in the definition of \labelitemii. (saves a token) + +1996-08-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: swap mathordxxx in cp850. latex/2203 + +1996-07-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + definition of if@inmath switch removed (see below) + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: + removed if@inmath switch and replaced with inline code + \init@restore@glb@settings saving space macro names and + execution time + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: + removed ifrestore@version switch and replaced with inline + code \init@restore@version + +1996-07-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: + make third arg of \@reargdef implicit + replace {} args by \relax + use \noexpand instead of \string in error message + + * ltoutput.dtx: + set if@test always globally + add some missing percent signs in \clearpage + + * ltboxes.dtx: + set if@minipage always globally + + * ltmath.dtx: + set if@ignore always globally + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + set if@ignore always globally + add user command \ignorespacesafterend to be used in env defs + + * ltfloat.dtx: + set if@nobreak always globally + set if@minipage always globally + + * ltspace.dtx: + fix typo in doc. + set if@nobreak always globally + + * ltlists.dtx: + set if@nobreak always globally + set if@minipage always globally + + * ltsect.dtx: + set if@nobreak always globally + + * ltclass.dtx: + made \@classoptionslist and \@unusedoptionlist only preamble + to save space + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + removed unnecessary \relax (6 times) in \nfss@catcodes + use faster \if$#3$ test in \@DeclareMathsizes + + * ltalloc.dtx: + don't set a default for @tempswa -- nobody can rely on that + + * ltplain.dtx: + removed setting of \vsize and \hsize (done later) + changed \dimen\z@ to \dimen@ to save space (and time) + +1996-07-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: latex/2197 + + * ltpatch.ltx: Use char0 not @ for \lowercase trick: latex/2197 + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Use char0 not @ for \lowercase trick: latex/2197 + + * patches.txt: add ltxcheck.tex to list of changed files. + + * ltpatch.ltx: add ltxcheck.tex to list of changed files. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Check for unauthorised cmr10 changes. + +1996-07-18 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx: + + Added commentary on some known problems + +1996-07-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Add vtex.txt + + * manifest.txt: Add vtex.txt + + * ltpatch.ltx: pl1 + + * patches.txt: pl1 + + * ltfinal.dtx: Free up token registers /2213 + +1996-07-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pastex.txt: Update (Lars Hecking/Christian Bauernfeind) + +1996-06-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Fix to give correct error with plain TeX. + +1996-06-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews05.tex: (Barbara Beeton) Wrong attribution for IPA fonts + +###################### +# 1996/06/01 Release +###################### + +1996-06-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: spelling... J"org Knappen /2176 + +1996-06-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: Change \hskip\z@skip to \hskip1sp in for /2160 + + * syntonly.dtx: Fix \GetFileInfo usage in documentation /2174 + +1996-06-13 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: + + Updated for new release + General minor edits + +1996-06-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: doc improvements, mainly from /2174 again. + + * ltdefns.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174 + + * ltcounts.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174 + + * ltalloc.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174 + + * inputenc.dtx: doc improvements J"org Knappen /2174 + +1996-06-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Fix Checksum Ulrik Vieth /2171 + +1996-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Added resetting of \everypar in the output routine + +1996-06-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews04.tex: typo: \ProcessOptions not \ProcessOption. + + * ltnews05.tex: Advertise Mainz copy of GNATS. + + * ltnews.cls: Add extra line in lw35fonts option. + Make font scaling messages `s'. + + * ltboxes.dtx: use \@@par not \endgraf. + + * ltsect.dtx: use \@@par not \endgraf. + +1996-06-07 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews05.tex: + + Revised text + + * ltnews.cls: + + Changed fonts for lw35 option, for logical and aesthetic + reasons + Added support for T1 encoding with lw35 option + Corrected grammar in footer + + * fntguide.tex: + + Updated for new release + +1996-06-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx: doc improvements Donald Arseneau /2166 + + * ltpage.dtx: doc improvements Donald Arseneau /2166 + + * latex209.dtx: doc improvements Donald Arseneau /2166 + + * bugs.txt: remove duplicate line J"org Knappen/2165 + +1996-06-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: modify vms suggestion slightly (J"org Knappen) + +1996-06-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: \verbatim@noligs@list now processed after + \dospecials (PR 2138). + +1996-06-03 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.txt: + + Changed reference from texpert.txt to cfgguide.tex + +1996-06-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Look for dcfonts release 1.3 in ltxcheck + +1996-05-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews05.tex: more changes. + +1996-05-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx : Make the commands \frontmatter, \mainmatter and + \part react to [openany] in the same way as \backmatter and + \chapter do. (PR 2106) + +1996-05-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Redid \(@)normalsize checks. internal/2153 + Reinstated old definition of \nofiles. latex/2146 + +1996-05-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Extra documentation + + * ltoutput.dtx + + Changed test for a text page full of floats + Tidied documentation + +1996-05-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Preset accent arguments in a box to stop font + loading interfering with accent position. latex/2133. + +1996-05-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews05.tex: needs more work, but... + +1996-05-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx: CHANGE: Allow commands with arguments (eg + \MakeUppercase) to be used in the `style' argument of + \@startsection. The section heading text including any number + etc will be supplied as the argument of this + command. internal/2148 + +1996-05-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * minimal.cls: Documentation improvements. + +1996-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: + Added Computer Modern Variable Typewriter family. + +1996-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + Produce better error message when encoding is misspelled. pr/2054 + +1996-05-17 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx + + Removed \@@sqrt + + * slides.dtx + + Removed \@@sqrt + +1996-05-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.fdd: Force \hyphenchar of OT1 fonts to 45, in case + \defaulthyphenchar has changed. + Remove some spurious extra empty arguments to \DeclareFontFamily + + * cmfonts.fdd: Force \hyphenchar of OT1 fonts to 45, in case + \defaulthyphenchar has changed. + Remove some spurious extra empty arguments to \DeclareFontFamily + + * ltfiles.dtx: Add \write\m@ne{} to \nofiles so that + \label (and other things) don't change the vertical spacing when + \nofiles is used. latex/2146 + +1996-05-09 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx + + Made more robust to errors + + * slides.dtx + + Made \include mechanism work + +1996-05-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Enable activation of codes below 32. latex/2071 + Add warning if nothing defined by the encoding file latex/2136 + +1996-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * unpacked.txt: + added cp852.def. pr/2081 + +1996-05-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * legal.txt: Modify `rename changed files' clause to explicitly + forbid `double renaming' back to the original names. + +1996-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: + Changed \begingroup to \bgroup to match a change to the kernel + done in 1994!!! It took a long time to find that one. pr/2100 + + * inputenc.dtx: + Added encoding definitions for cp852 contributed by Petr Sojka. + pr/2081 + +1996-05-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews05.tex: make a start at this .... + +1996-04-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: reset \AtBeginDocument inside \begin{document} + for latex/1297. Small documentation improvements. + +1996-04-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Documentation improvements. + + * ltcounts.dtx: Documentation improvements. + +1996-04-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: perl -p -e s#--release--date--goes--here--#1996/06/01# + spring is in the air.... + + * ltspace.dtx: documentation improvements. + + * lttab.dtx: add extra \hskip to preserve tabcolsep in empty + l columns. latex/2122. + Small documentation improvements. + +1996-04-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpage.dtx: Minor documentation improvements. + +1996-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (section*{Index}%): + Definition of \printindex removed because no longer needed. + pr/2095 + +1996-04-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: ansinew 09f is \"Y not \"y, latex/2119 + +1996-03-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: Modify \ensuremath for amslatex/2104 + +1996-03-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ifthen.dtx: latex/2105 fix: dont leave mathord {} groups. + +1996-02-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * multitex.txt: Update from Markus Kohm, latex/2051 + +1996-02-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Cedilla (\c\ ) rather than (\c{}) latex/2077 + 0F0 corrected in cp850 latex/2080 + 0B2 corrected in latin2 latex/2079 + +1996-01-31 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: fixed \cline which wasn't updated after internal + interface change pr/2067 + +1996-01-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}): + support doc files also in compatibility mode (so far doc did typeset + the code in cmr instead of cmtt in compat mode) + +1996-01-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltidxglo.dtx: + turn \makeindex and \makeglossary into noops after use to avoid + problems with combinations of \PageIndex \makeindex etc. pr/2048 + + * letter.dtx: + Made redefinition of \vspace robust. pr/2049 + Nevertheless, they syntax used in the pr is considered + incorrect! + + * ltspace.dtx: + Made \vspace robust. Enhancement suggested by pr/2049 + +1996-01-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: + Changed default text preceding the index so that it depends on + the use of code line numbering. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: + Removed \star since useless. pr/2039 + +1996-01-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: latex/2024 ensure setting \input@path does not + change behaviour of ##1 in \IfFileExists. + +1996-01-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: + Added a comment about where to send errata entries for the books. + +1995-12-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): + Added \AlsoImplementation as a counterpart to \OnlyDescription + pr/2040. + + * texpert.txt: + clarified info about warnings happening when using makeindex. + + * doc.dtx (section*{Index}%): + Turn \PrintIndex into noop after use. pr/2038 + (section*{{Change History}}%): + Turn \PrintChanges into noop after use. pr/2038 + +1995-12-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: + Corrected printout of index. pr/2028 + + * ltmath.dtx: + Corrected printout of documentation. pr/2030 + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + Corrected changes entry. pr/2029 + +1995-12-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: Ulrik Vieth /2017: fix up T1cmfib.fd file. + +1995-12-13 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * copypre.txt + + New version, removing long lines + + * copyins.txt + + New version, removing long lines + + * copyhead.txt + + New version, removing long lines + + * bugs.txt + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * autoload.txt + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * texpert.txt + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * ltnews.cls + + Removed long lines + Changed capitalisation + + * cmfonts.fdd + + Removed long lines + + * slides.fdd + + Removed long lines + + * olddc.dst + + New preambles + + * newdc.dst + + New preambles + + * cmextra.dst + + New preambles + + * cmfonts.dst + + New preambles + + * latexsym.dst + + New preambles + + * autoload.dst + + New preambles + + * unpack2e.ins + + New preambles + + * slides.dst + + New preambles + + * legal.txt + + New version + + * readme.txt + + New version + + * ltclass.dtx + + Documentation added + + * fontdef.dtx + + Documentation added + + * latex209.dst + + Smaller batches for old emtex + + * modguide.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * cfgguide.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * clsguide.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * fntguide.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * ltx3info.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * usrguide.tex + + Additions, updates and corrections + + * ltxguide.cls + + Corrected cfg loading + + * inputenc.dtx + + Detailed corrections + + * ltdefns.dtx + + Added documentation + +###################### +# 1995/12/01 Release +###################### + +1995-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.txt (NOTE): add info to run olddc.ins. + +1995-12-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Modify \IeC and add missing % in + \DeclareInputText. + +1995-12-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: (Bernd Raichle) Check for dcfonts 1.2 patch + level 1. Latest TeX is now 3.14159. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: TEMPORARY \copyright fixes. + + * amiweb2c.txt: new version from Andreas Scherer. + +1995-12-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Switched off \@inmathwarn. + +1995-12-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: Move \m@th out of \ensuremath in \textsuperscript + + * ltbibl.dtx: restore \G@refundefinedtrue + + * ltxref.dtx: restore \G@refundefinedtrue + + * ltnews04.tex: new input encodings. + +1995-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dst: Remove writing of \@currdir by .ins file. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: reset catcode of ^ in fd files. + +1995-12-06 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * encguide.tex: Added examples of new \text* commands. + + * usrguide.tex: Added documentation for new \text* commands. + +1995-12-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cstex.txt: New file (from Markus Kohm) + + * multitex.txt: New file (from Markus Kohm) + + * ltfiles.dtx: add \ignorespaces to \begin{document} latex/1933 + + * ltdefns.dtx: Remove \@unexpandable@noexpand (never used) /1733 + + * ltfloat.dtx: \textsuperscript in math mode. latex/1984 + +1995-12-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Changed text of \TextSymbolUnavailable. + +1995-12-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lthyphen.dtx: minor doc edits for /1989 + + * preload.dtx: 12pt OMS and OML preloads added /1989. + + * fontdef.dtx: minor doc edits for /1989 + + * cmfonts.fdd: upright italic and tt small caps re-added. /1989. + + * modguide.tex: edits for /1989 + +1995-12-04 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dst: Added cp437de.def. + + * inputenc.dtx: Added \@tabacckludge commands to the Next encoding. + Replaced ~ by \nobreakspace. + Added a `test version' to the \ProvidesFile. + Made <pounds> and <uumlaut> text char in cp437. + Made <fraction> a math char in Next. + Made <cdot> and <bullet> text chars in all encodings. + Added cp437de (cp437 but with ss rather than beta). + +1995-12-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: Dont force \hyphenchar=127 on T1 fonts /1853 + Documentation changes and some font shapes modified + Ulrik Vieth /1989, + +1995-12-01 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Removed extraneous {} from the <superior> glyphs. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Made \SS a default command rather than making the + OT1 definition the default. + +1995-11-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * proc.dtx, classes.dtx (section{Identification}): Added the date + of the LaTeX format to the optional argument of \NeedsTeXformat in + order to signal newer class files being used with an old format + (PR1971). + +1995-11-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cfgguide.tex: dont change uc lc tables... + +1995-11-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: Minor edits. + + * cfgguide.tex: minor edits. + + * ltxguide.cls: modify verbatim slightly. + + * cmextra.dst: Use concurrent features for speed (/1985 again) + + * oldlfont.dtx: Remove duplicate driver code (/1985 again) + + * newlfont.dtx: Remove duplicate driver code (/1985 again) + + * ltoutput.dtx: add \ProvidesFile to flafter.sty (/1985 again) + +1995-11-29 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added \textless, \textgreater, et al. + + * inputenc.dtx: Replaced \textsterling with \pounds. + Added default error-message definitions for \textyen et al. + Added a \NeedsTeXFormat line. + Tidied up the Next encoding. + +1995-11-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: 2 (not 3) column index and modified script + Allow control names to hyphenate in the ChangeLog. + + * latexsym.dst: \input docstrip before using docstrip commands. + + * latexsym.dtx: Stop rogue %% comments apearing in generated + files. Another one from Ulrik Vieth's /1985. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Increase left margin and marginpar width + + * ltclass.dtx: minor improvements. + + * ltnews04.tex: minor improvements. + + * lterror.dtx: Typo in autoload \ClassError version. /1985 + + * ltmath.dtx: doc fixes for /1979. + + * ltsect.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltplain.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltlists.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + + * ltfloat.dtx: doc fixes for /1985. + +1995-11-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added test for math mode to text commands. + Renamed \@changed@x@err to \TextSymbolUnavailable. + +1995-11-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: reset catcode of # in fd files internal/1982 + + * exscale.dtx: add \ProvideFile to fd file for latex/1987 + +1995-11-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx + + \nobreakspace added + +1995-11-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: typo ltxdoc.cls for ltxguide.cls + +1995-11-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * texpert.txt: describe updated ltxcheck + + * manifest.txt: ltnews04 + + * Makefile (TEXS): ltnews04 + + * ltnews04.tex: New TUG Address, \LoadClassWithOptions + + * doc.dtx: Make \MakeShortVerb use an \PackageInfo rather + than \tyepout. internal/1938 + +1995-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Minor documentation cleanups. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: add `symbol' to the message. + +1995-11-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: Merge in Marcin's new code restoring + \inFileName functionality. + Remove generation date/version number from generated files + Add \AddGenerationDate batchfile command to put them back. + Force whole file through ispell!! + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \@wrong@font@char in \UseTextSymbol. /1676 + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Make missing fd file \typeout a Font Info + and add \@wrong@font@char for use in \UseTextSymbol. /1676 + Clean up many \changes entries. + +1995-11-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: Exchange order of ltdefns and ltalloc + (Matches code change of 24th May.) + Modify \changes def to match doc.sty 1.9u + +1995-11-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Dont make a ! BAD typeout if just the old (or new) + dc fonts are installed. + + * ltclass.dtx: Add \LoadClassWithOptions for latex/1556 + Add \RequirePackageWithOptions to match. + Stop \@unprocessedoptions complaining about empty options + noticed whilest debugging the above change... + + * inputenc.dtx: remove rogue \endinput. Wrap long lines. + +1995-11-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Check default font encoding/family etc. + +1995-11-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Made code in-line to remove pseudo-hooks + +1995-11-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * autoload.dst: fix order of files in autoerr for new docstrip. + + * ltnews04.tex: first draft + +1995-11-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx (subsection{Definitions for the OT1 encoding}): + Changed \char32 to \@xxxii (two tokens less). Replaced octal + number 27 by decimal number 23 to protect against the quote + character being active. Added \leavevmode at start of \c, + otherwise the output routine might be invoked within the macro + (suggested by Donald Arseneau). Replaced some 0's by \z@ + (faster). + + * ltlists.dtx (\@doendpe): Enclosed \setbox0 assignment by a + group so that it leaves the contents of box $0$ intact. + Discovered by Donald Arseneau. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Use decimal rather than octal character + specification for \hyphenchar and \skewchar so that there is + no problem with an active quote character. + +1995-11-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack.ins: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * ltoutenc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * newdc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * olddc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * proc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * autoload.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * latex209.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * inputenc.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * cmfonts.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * classes.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * slides.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * latexsym.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * makeindx.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * docstrip.dst: Updated for new concurrent docstrip. + + * docstrip.dtx: New concurrent docstrip by Marcin Woli\'nski. + +1995-11-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx + + Made \footnote always work in frontmatter + +1995-11-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Remove spurious space from NFSS font warning + latex/1676 + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Add silent font substitutions. + +1995-11-02 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added code for fleqn.sty, leqno.sty, + openbib.sty. + + * latex209.dst: Added generation of files fleqn.sty, leqno.sty, + openbib.sty for compatibility mode. + + * inputenc.dtx: Changed internal name \a to \@tabacckludge to + protect against redefinition by malicicous users. Wrapped long + lines. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Changed internal name \a to \@tabacckludge to + protect against redefinition by malicicous users. + +1995-11-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Only list `configuration' input files. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Modify \@addtofilelist during initex so only + non-standard (cfg) inputs listed. + + * ltfssini.dtx: Modify \@addtofilelist during initex so only + non-standard (cfg) inputs listed. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Modify \@addtofilelist during initex so only + non-standard (cfg) inputs listed. + + * Makefile: Add newdc/olddc + + * unpack2e.ins: Add newdc.ins. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Modify T1 and TS1 generation. + + * cmfonts.dst: remove dc font generation. + + * olddc.dst: NEW: Generate fd files for obsolete dcfonts 1.1 + and earlier. + + * newdc.dst: NEW: Generate fd files for dcfonts 1.2 + + * fontdef.dtx: Wrap fd inputs in \nfss@catcodes. internal/1932 + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Correct undefined font family test internal/1933 + +1995-10-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: CHANGE: Add \nobreak to \@finalstrut to allow + hyphenation of the last word of a p-column (and footnotes). + internal/1931 + + * ltdirchk.dtx: more robust checking of dc fonts. + +1995-10-31 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.fdd: Added extra substitutions for shape `ui' to make + \pounds work properly in the slides class (mostly). + +1995-10-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxcheck.tex: Check that if you have the old dc fonts, then the + initex run loaded a suitable old fd file. + + * fntguide.tex: Describe genb size function. + + * clsguide.tex: Mention minimal.cls is now in the distribution. + + * minimal.cls: Bring into line with version in clsguide.tex + +1995-10-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsection{The title}): empty \@date as well at the + end of \maketitle + (subsection{Paragraphing}): Added the setting of \...skipamount, + just a copy of the kernel values. (PR 1464) + +1995-10-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx: Initialise \@wholewidth in autoload kernel. + General doc cleanup. + + * usrguide.tex: Describe minimal.cls + +1995-10-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * minimal.cls: A masterpiece of typographical design. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Disable autofss2 for now. + +1995-10-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx + + Corrected bug in \end@dblfloat, made code more robust + +1995-10-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: modify docstrip guards so + \ProvidesFile{ltmath.dtx} seen by source2e.tex. + + * ltidxglo.dtx: General doc cleanup. + + * ltsect.dtx: Initilalise mark commands using \let to save space + + * ltalloc.dtx: General doc cleanup. + +1995-10-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx + + Removed one-way switches from \endocument + + * ltxref.dtx + + Removed one-way switches from \endocument + Tidying. + + * ltfssbas.dtx + + Removed one-way switches from \endocument + + * ltbibl.dtx + + Removed one-way switches from \endocument + + * ltmiscen.dtx + + Removed one-way switches from \endocument + Tidying. + +1995-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Make \@autoload files ignore EOL. + + * lterror.dtx: modify autoload \@preamerr. + Add % to some lines as \@autoload files now ignore line ends. + +1995-10-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx + + Made poptabs more robust + Tidied up documentation + +1995-10-23 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Abstract}): Added setting of + \cs{beginparpenalty} to discourage page break before abstract + heading. + +1995-10-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: Added support for new (version 1.2) DC fonts and + text companion fonts in encoding TS1. + + * inputenc.dst: Added generation of ansinew.def file. + + * inputenc.dtx: Added ansinew encoding (Windows 3.1 ANSI), as + contributed by Berthold K.P. Horn (bkph@ai.mit.edu). + +1995-10-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Clarify output format a bit. + + * ltclass.dtx: modify autoload support + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: Keep autofss2 code in kernel until + \begin{document}. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Keep autofss2 code in kernel until + \begin{document}. + use \@undefined not \undefined + + * ltfinal.dtx: \@filelist zapped too early. + +1995-10-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Replaced \' \` \= by \a' \a` \a in order to get + correct accents in a tabbing environment. + +1995-10-18 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx (subsection{Horizontal space}): Moved \changes + from \@ to \hspace where it belongs. + +1995-10-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Reset \ProvidesFile, Preserve initex file list in + \reserved@a + + * ltclass.dtx: Remove \ProvidesFile redefinition to ltfinal. + Reset \CurrentOption in \ProcessOptions for graphics/1873 + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Modify \ProvidesFile during initex to save + debugging info and not waste \ver@... csnames. + + * latexbug.tex: Show initex file list. + + * latexbug.el: use \@@input not \input + + * latex209.dtx: \supereject, \mscount, old style \@imakepicbox + + * ltplain.dtx: Move \supereject to latex209 + + * lttab.dtx: move \mscount to latex209 use \@multicnt instead. + +1995-10-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: make \cite robust /1808 + + * ltmath.dtx: Make \sqrt robust /1808 + Use \@testopt in eqnarray's \\ /1911. + + * ltspace.dtx: Use \@testopt in \[no]{line|page}preak (/1911) + + * ltdefns.dtx: new \@ifstar CHANGE: require ##1 in both arguments + not ####1 in one and ##1 in the other. (internal/1910) + Use \@testopt in \newcommand and \newenvironment (/1911) + + * ltboxes.dtx: Clarify \makebox(,)[b] description. + + * ltthm.dtx: Allow \newtheorem after \begin{document} again. + (LaTeX Book, page 57) + +1995-10-16 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx: Added \relax at the end of the definition of + \normalfont to prevent it and \textnormal from eating up leading + spaces. + +1995-10-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx + + New check in \clearpage. + +1995-10-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: autoload error message + + * ltthm.dtx: Make \newtheorem and its internals `only preamble' + to save memory. + + * ltplain.dtx: autoload tracing code + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Make \showhyphens colour safe and autoloadable. + +1995-10-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx (subsection{The title}): In \maketitle, move \par + inside the scope of \Large, to get even line spacing. + +1995-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: use \@@input to load autoload files. + + * lterror.dtx: more autoload mods. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Autoload \@changed@x@err (autoerr.sty) + +1995-10-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * autoload.dst: update autoerr generation. + + * ltfiles.dtx: autoload missing file error command + + * ltplain.dtx: autoload \new... error message. + + * ltdefns.dtx Use \aut@global in \DeclareRobustCommand + +1995-10-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + + * lttab.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + +1995-10-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: 1995/12/01 Christmas is nearly here... + + * Makefile: 1995/12/01 Christmas is nearly here... + + * ltdefns.dtx: Fix \@xtypein (from patch file) + + * fontdef.dtx: Define \@@sqrt (from patch file) + + * lterror.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + + * ltpictur.dtx: Use new \@autoload feature. + + * autoload.dst: autoload module in ltdefns.dtx. + +1995-10-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: Move \newif to ltdefns.dtx. + Use \sbox in \underbar (saves tokens, and works with colour) + + * ltdefns.dtx: \futurelet with \@let@token for internal/924 + New implementation of \@xargdef in terms of the new + \@protected@testopt. Saves tokens and makes user defined + commands with optional arguments robust. internal/1733 + Move \newif here from ltplain. + Autoload support. Add \aut@global and \@autoload. internal/1617. + +1995-09-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Check \filename parser in ltxcheck.tex + for latex/1624 latex/1754 and graphics/1336 + Check for dc fonts in ltxcheck.tex + +1995-09-27 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx, slides.fdd: Globally replaced scale factor 19.91 + by 19.907 in \DeclareFontShape, as this gives better rounded + font sizes at 600dpi (suggested by Denis Roegel). + + * docstrip.dtx: Changed address of Johannes Braams. + +1995-09-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Declare 2 count registers previously used + in \cline. /1723 + +1995-09-25 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * web2ctex.txt: Added some comments about using non-csh, index + style files and some other missing files. + +1995-09-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: \RequirePackage{shortvrb} for latex/1875 + + * latexbug.el (report-latex-bug): Rainer's fix for latex/1675 + +1995-09-21 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dst: Added generation of next.def file. + + * inputenc.dtx: Added next encoding, as contributed by + Stefan Ried <stef@theo-phys.uni-essen.de> and Holger Uhr + <huhr@uni-paderborn.de>. + +1995-09-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: Fix \hline for latex/1871. + +1995-09-20 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmextra.dst: Added generation of OMLccm.fd file, which had + previsouly been removed from cmfonts.dst. + + * slides.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. Wrap some long + lines and use \null instead of \hbox{} (by DPC). + +1995-09-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.fdd: Corrected names of .fd file names in argument to + \ProvidesFile commands. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Moved call to \@noligs macro after call to + \verbatim@font in \verb command, just as it is already in the + verbatim environment. + +1995-09-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssini.dtx: Modify TeX2 message. + +1995-09-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: New \cline implementation. No longer declare + counters \@cla \@clb. More macro envs in documentation. + + * ltplain.dtx: Move \multispan to lttab.dtx. Loads more macro + environments in the documentation. + +1995-09-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tex2.txt: typos... + + * ltplain.dtx: Minor space savings. Add a few more macro envs. + + * autoload.dst: add the l-terror. + + * lterror.dtx: Add autoload support. + +1995-08-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added 0 to the beginning of every number. + Changed the definition of "AD in latin1 and latin2 to be \-. + Swapped ordfeminine and ordmasculine around in latin1. + +1995-08-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: + Reimplemented openbib option to save space (hash and mem). + Disable \title \author \date \and after \maketitle. + Default for \newblock outside thebibliography env changed. + +1995-08-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + Added autoload code for autoout1.sty (\enlargethispage). + + * ltfsscmp.dtx: + Added \@preambleonly lines from ltfssdcl.dtx. + Moved compat code from ltfssbas.dtx to this file. + + * autoload.dst: + Added new autoload files. + +1995-08-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: + Moved most of the \@onlypreamble declarations to the right places. + Added forgotten \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet@ to \@preambleonly + (400 useless tokens)! + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + Added to the documentation. + +1995-08-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + Added autoload code for autofss1.sty. + Added autoload code for autofss2.sty. + + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: + Macro \gobble@font@spec eliminated. + Added autoload code for autofss1.sty. + Added autoload code for autofss2.sty. + +1995-08-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * encguide.tex: + First draft. + +1995-08-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tex2.txt: + + Clearer wordings + + * ltcntrl.dtx: + + Made most loop macros \long + Removed unnecessary \...noop macros + Tidied up documentation + +1995-08-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: + set \@maxdepth at begin document not in class file + add a couple of \global's + + * usrguide.tex: + typo corrections pr/1809 + + * ltmath.dtx: + fixed mistake added with last update + + * classes.dtx: + throw in a couple of forgotten percents + reprogram a couple of macros to save space or macro names + update the documentation + +1995-08-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlength.dtx: Fix doc typos for latex/753 + +1995-08-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: + updated \marg etc to use \meta, suggested by pr/1370 + added missing braces in definition of \star + +1995-08-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.fdd: + Fixed setup for OMScmr.fd as pointed out by Christian Spieler. pr/1804 + + * ltmath.dtx: + Added code for leqno.clo and fleqn.clo + + * classes.dtx: + Moved code for leqno and fleqn to kernel files. + +1995-08-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: + Implemented titlepage differently to support twoside,openight + options correctly. pr/1783. + + * docstrip.dst: + Removed part that might add non-standard setting of \@currdir + into docstrip.tex so that unpacked distribution stays portable. pr/1765 + +1995-08-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for the `documentation parts'}): + Fixed problem that \begin{macro}{\foo} doesn't suppress + index entries for \foo within its body. pr/343 + (subsection[Dealing with the change history]): + \changes entries on top-level now preceed themselves with + the expansion of \generalname rather than producing the + fixed string "General". + + * docstrip.dtx: + Clarified default "copying conditions" as suggested by + Richard Stallman + +1995-07-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: + + Added notices concerning use of `Standard LaTeX' + + * cfgguide.tex: + + Started major expansion and rewrite + + * modguide.tex: + + Rewrite adding section on modfying LaTeX + + * legal.txt: + + Further expansion and changes + + * ltxguide.cls: + + Changed configuration file messages + +1995-07-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: reduce save stack usage for latex/1742 + + * ltfssbas.dtx: reduce save stack usage for latex/1742 + + * ltpage.dtx: Save a few tokens in \sloppy and \fussy + + * ltboxes.dtx: Use \sbox in \@save(pic)box + + * ltlogos.dtx: Save a few tokens in logo defs. + +1995-07-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: tex2.txt + + * tex2.txt: TeX2 installation instructions first draft. + + * ltfssini.dtx: Test for TeX2 before reading fonttext.??? + +1995-07-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: PL3 Add proc and latex209 fixes missed yesterday. + + * ltpatch.ltx: PL3 Add proc and latex209 fixes missed yesterday. + + * proc.dtx: fix \thanks for /1735 + +1995-07-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: patch level 2. + + * ltpatch.ltx: Patch level 2 (accents)c ../mir + +1995-07-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + New version of \@outputpage + +1995-07-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: Remove \@onlypreamble from \bibcite + + * ltxref.dtx: Remove \@onlypreamble from \newlabel + +1995-07-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltidxglo.dtx: + Added \@preambleonly statements + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + Updates to documentation + Use macro rather than switch to flag default font + substitutions pr/1236 + + * ltfiles.dtx: + Updates to documentation + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Updates to documentation + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Removed surplus \@onlypreamble stuff + Updated documentation + Streamlined code in \enddocument + Streamlined code for \@xobeysp + +1995-07-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * autopict.sty: Allow 2e commands in the autoload file /1737 + +1995-07-12 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * syntonly.dtx: + Fix incorrect checksum. + +1995-07-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltthm.dtx: + Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734) + + * lttab.dtx: + Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734) + + * ltplain.dtx: + Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734) + + * ltoutput.dtx: + Updates to documentation pr/1734 + + * ltlists.dtx: + Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734) + + * ltfloat.dtx: + Updates to documentation pr/1734 + + * lterror.dtx: + Updates to documentation pr/1734 + + * ltbibl.dtx: + Updates to documentation (partly pr/1734) + +1995-07-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltcntrl.dtx: + Reimplemented loop structures using Kabelschacht method. + + * ltlists.dtx: + Some updates to the docu. + Shortend defs of enumerate and itemize by using \expandafter. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Removed a couple of surplus tokens, updated docu. + (subsection{Command definitions}): + Make \CheckCommand preambly only to save valuable space. + +1995-07-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: document /1722 fix. + + * latex209.dtx: Fudge \@textsuperscript for /1722. + +1995-07-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: documentation updates as suggested by Christian Spieler + pr/1721 + +1995-07-05 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltspace.dtx (section{Spacing}): + Reimplementation of \[no]pagebreak to save space. + Cleanup parts of the docu. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + Use proper interface to jump out of \@tfor loop. + Some docu update. + Renamed \test@next to \t@st@ic. + +1995-07-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latexsym.dtx: + Free space taking up by \not@base error message since + that one isn't any longer necessary. + Some documentation update. + +1995-07-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: + Small space changes in various places. + +1995-07-02 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Moved debugging code to ltplain. + + * ltfssini.dtx: + Fixing a mistake in shortening lines. + +1995-06-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: document patches. + + * ltpatch.ltx: Oh well. I suppose it had to happen. + + * latex209.dtx: \@fnsymbol added (without \ensuremath) for /1684 + +1995-06-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: fix \changes entries for /1677 + + * ltfssini.dtx: fix \changes entries for /1677 + +1995-06-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: + Fixed the definition for footnotemarks in \maketitle for article + which got corrupted in the june release. pr/1683 + +###################### +# 1995/06/01 Release +###################### + +1995-06-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: Modify \bibcite so a repeated key produces + LaTeX Warning: Label `aaa' multiply defined. + ... + LaTeX Warning: There were multiply-defined labels. + instead of + LaTeX Warning: Label(s) may have changed. + Rerun to get cross-references right. + + * ltxref.dtx: Modify \newlabel so \bibcite can share code. + + * ltclass.dtx: Stop \documentstyle re-enabling \usepackage + After it has been disabled by latex209.def (latex/1634) + +1995-06-18 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: + + Changed to use copypre.txt and copyhead.txt + + * cfgguide.tex: + + Configuration stuff transferred from texpert.txt + + * autoload.txt: + + Tidying, removed long lines + + * cm*.dst, docstrip.dst,latex*.dst,exscale.dst + + New preambles + + * inputenc.dst,ltoutenc.dst,slides.dst: + + New preambles + + * unpack2e.ins: + + New preambles + + * copyright.txt: + + No longer used + + * copyins.txt: + + New text + + * copypre.txt: + + New file + + * copyhead.txt: + + New file + + * copydisf.txt: + + New file + + * copydisg.tex: + + New file + +1995-06-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Minor documentation edits. + + * ltfsscmp.dtx: Minor documentation edits. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Minor documentation edits. + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: Take \ProvidesFile out of \iffalse clause + so it shows up in \listfiles in source2e.tex. + Wrap some long lines to 72. + +1995-06-15 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews03.tex: Added pointer to autoload.txt. + +1995-06-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: modify printing of patch level on page 1. + + * manifest.txt: autoload files. + + * autoload.txt: initial version + + * Makefile: add autoload files + + * autoload.dst: initial version of .ins file for autoload. + + * lttab.dtx: Add \ProvidesFile to autoload file. + +1995-06-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dst: Fixed typo cp850 -> cp437 + +1995-06-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dst: Fixed typo cp850 -> cp437 + +1995-06-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx: Add \ProvidesFile to autoload file. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Moddify method of adding patchlevel banner + Force format to be in errorstopmode, even if an installer + scrolled past an error during initex run. + +1995-06-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx: Add Auotoload banner + Check for old source files (older than a year). + +1995-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * legal.txt: + + Major changes + + * usrguide.tex: + + Added ltx3info.tex info + + * fntguide.tex: + + Added note re using non-cmr fonts in T1 + + * clsguide.tex: + + Hash marks in option declarations OK + Added Case cHANGING commands + + * cfgguide.tex: + + Configuration stuff transferred from texpert.txt + + * lablst.tex: + + Improved version: lists all bibitems separately + Changed internal commands + + * Makefile: + + Added modguide.tex + + * manifest.txt: + + Added ltnews03.tex and modguide.tex + + * install.txt: + + File name corrected + Added ltx3info.tex info + + * emtex.txt: + + Added info re batch file + + * texpert.txt: + + Configuration details transferred to cfgguide.tex + + * readme.txt: + + Added pointers to various other info files + + * ltspace.dtx: + + Added \relax to \obeycr + +1995-06-09 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Made composites declared with DeclareTextComposite + use no-argument macros rather than one-argument macros. + + * ltnews03.tex: Changed modify.tex to modguide.tex, updated + figures for space savings. + +1995-06-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews03.tex: New issue of LaTeX News. + +1995-06-06 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Made \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase grab their + argument and brace it. + +1995-06-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: Removed patch for latex/1240 (now in ltoutenc.dtx). + Removed patch for tools/1296 (now in ltoutenc.dtx). + Removed patch for latex/1322 (now in ltoutenc.dtx). + We now have an empty patch file again! + + * fontdef.dtx: Moved math commands from ltoutenc.dtx. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Redid protection in DeclareTextCommand so that it + uses \noexpand rather than \protect. This should stop the + problems with \'\i putting the acute on a \protect rather than + on the \i. Commented out the defaults for textless and + textgreater. Allow \ProvideTextCommandDefault after + \begin{document} so it can be used in inputenc.def files. + Save some tokens in \textvisiblespace and \textunderscore. + Moved math commands to fontdef.dtx. + + * classes.dtx: Replaced \uppercase with \MakeUppercase + + * ltfinal.dtx: Added \MakeUppercase and \MakeLowercase. + +1995-05-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Made hex numbers safe against active ". Added + docstrip commands to applemac.def. + +1995-05-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: + Made \filec@ntents preamble only to save space. + + * ltfssbas.dtx: + Added definition of \new@mathgroup again which got lost. + (should be moved to other file one day). + +1995-05-26 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx (section{Plain \TeX}): + + Made \loop long + Made \underbar use \box \tw@ + + * ltdefns.dtx (subsection{Command definitions}): + + Made \@gobble commands \long + +1995-05-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * proc.dtx (subsection{The page style}): Removed \rmfamily from + definition of \@oddfoot (PR 1578) + + * ltmath.dtx : Removed \rmfamily from definition of \@eqnnum + (PR 1578) + + * ltpage.dtx : Removed \rmfamily from definition of \ps@plain + (PR 1578) + +1995-05-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Remove generation of ltnfss.dtx + + * unpack2e.ins Add new NFSS files + + * manifest.txt: Add new NFSS files. + + * source2e.tex: Include new NFSS files + + * ltfssdcl.dtx: Initial version (latint.dtx) + + * ltfssini.dtx: Initial version (lfonts.dtx) + + * ltfsscmp.dtx: Initial version (fam.dtx) + + * ltfsstrc.dtx: Initial version (tracefnt.dtx) + + * ltfssbas.dtx: Initial version (fam.dtx) + +1995-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros surrounding the `definition parts'}): + Removed \math@fontsfalse in \MacroFont and \AltMacroFont because + this isn't any longer correct with the new math font setup in NFSS2. + pr/1622 (and some earlier one) + Use \GetFileInfo. + +1995-05-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: + + Changed float reset hooks to empty + + * ltfloat.dtx: + + Moved new resettings into hooks so that they can be removed in + latex209.dtx + + * ltspace.dtx/ltlists.dtx + + Moved \endtrivlist and friends to ltlists.dtx + + * ltfiles.dtx (section{File Handling}): + + Added check for zero \topskip to \begin{document} + Added some \longs + + * ltspace.dtx + + Made \vspace and \vspace* more efficient and more robust + + Commented out unused code + +1995-05-25 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): replace + \rmfamily with \normalfont (PR 1578) + + * classes.dtx : Replace \reset@font by \normalfont + (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): Replace + \hskip 1em\relax with \quad + Removed \rmfamily from definition of \@eqnnum (PR 1578, leqno) + +1995-05-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx: Documented form from Tobi. + +1995-05-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Exchange order of ltdefns and ltalloc + as latter now needs \@gobbletwo from former. + + * usrguide.tex (subsection{Setting text susperscripts}): + \textsuperscript now access the current font (except for size + attribute) + + * ltfloat.dtx: redefine \textsuperscript in terms of + \@textsuperscript + + * ltdefns.dtx: new \typein implementation + + * ltplain.dtx: New \newif implementation. + +1995-05-23 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dst: Added applemac.def. + + * inputenc.dtx: Added applemac.def. + Added test for whether definition of a text character ends in a + macro. + Corrected \mathordfeminine and \mathordmasculine. + + * inputenc.dst: Added applemac.def. + +1995-05-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: Add code and docstrip modules to support + autoloading of tabbing. + +1995-05-22 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx/ltfloat.dtx: Moved definitions of \footins and + \footnoterule from ltplain to ltfloat. + +1995-05-21 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latint.dtx: + Fix \DeclareMathRadical so that it does work (never did :-) + +1995-05-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: + Updated \mathhexbox to use \mbox. + + * ltmath.dtx: + Removed \mathhexbox from this file because it is essentially an + obsolete text command (despite the name). It is still in ltlain.dtx + Streamlined bits of code. + + * latint.dtx: + coded \set@mathradical inline to save space. + Also fixed bug in \DeclareMathRadical. + + * fontdef.dtx: defined \sqrtsign to be the square root symbol not + \sqrt since this is later overwritten by the kernel anyway. + + * fam.dtx: removed definition of \on@line since already in lterror.dtx + + * ltcounts.dtx: + Allow \fnsymbol in text and math now (neccessary for pr/1503). + Streamlined code for \@definecounter and \@arabic and friends. + + * latex209.dtx (subsection{Layout}): + Added old definition for \@makefnmark and \thempfootnote to + use math mode. pr/1503 + + * ltfloat.dtx: + Moved \normalfont to \textsuperscript. + +1995-05-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpictur.dtx: Add code and docstrip modules to support + autoloading feature. + +1995-05-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: + Moved some code from ltplain to this file. + + * ltspace.dtx: + Moved some code from ltplain to this file. + + * latint.dtx: + Added some commands from NFSS1 compat code to \@preambleonly + to save space. + + * fam.dtx: + Moved all compatibility code for NFSS1 interfaces to one place + to allow making them auto-loadable one day. + + * usrguide.tex (subsection{Setting text susperscripts}): + Added a description of \textsuperscript. pr/1503 + +1995-05-18 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: replaced all \hbox to with \hb@xt@; replaced all + constructs such as \arabic{enumi} with \@arabic\c@enumi + Cleaned up the \changes entries + removed some unnecessary braces + +1995-05-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: + Added \normalfont to the footnote mark (since it is now a text font). + For similar reason \thempfootnote needs \itshape to look like before. + +1995-05-17 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: replaced all \hbox to with \hb@xt@; replaced all + constructs such as \arabic{enumi} with \@arabic\c@enumi + Cleaned up the \changes entries + + * classes.dtx: replaced all \hbox to with \hb@xt@; replaced all + constructs such as \arabic{enumi} with \@arabic\c@enumi + (subsection{Footnotes}): Use \@width instead of width + (subsection{The title}): Use \cs{\@makefnmark} in definition of + \cs{@makefntext} + Cleaned up the \changes entries + +1995-05-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: make \g@addto@macro \long for latex/1522 + + * ltboxes.dtx: Removed surplus { } in \@irsbox + + * ltlists.dtx: Start of documented version from Tobi. + Removed surplus { } and used `\thr@@' not `3 ' to save tokens. + +1995-05-17 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Footnotes}): + Added command \textsuperscript to provide footnotes with digits + in the text font. pr/1503 + Streamlined bits of the code. + + * readme.txt: updated. + +1995-05-16 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: removed lots of unnecessary braces + +1995-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: added tracefnt.sty generattion. + + * ltsect.dtx: + Remove some surplus braces in \@startsection. + + * fam.dtx: + Streamline some of the compat code. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Streamline code of \@typein slightly. + + * fam.dtx: + Documentation update. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Further documentation. + +1995-05-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: Slightly re-word the `warning' in the\listfiles + description, for latex/1474. + +1995-05-14 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Updated the documentation. + +1995-05-13 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * alltt.dtx (section{The Implementation}): TeX goes into an + infinite loop when the alltt environment contains a construct such + as \( x' \); this can be prevented by restoring the original + definition of ' *inside* math mode. + Brought the definition of the alltt environment up-to-date with + the current definition of the verbatim environment. + +1995-05-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Updated \DeclareOption declarations to reflect ##1 -> #1 change. pr/1557 + +1995-05-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Use a token register in \DeclareOption(*) + So that # need not be written as ## + INCOMPATIBLE CHANGE: see latex/1557 + + * ltpictur.dtx: Modify \picture so a missing ( in the first + argument generates an error. latex/1355 + Add a few more macro environments. + + * latex209.dtx: Restore old definition of \@footnotemark + + * ltfloat.dtx: Add \nobreak to allow hyphenation before a + footnotemark. + Add loads of macro environments to the docs. + +1995-05-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: + Moved a number of commands to different files following suggestions by + Ulrik Vieth. pr/1180 + + * ltmath.dtx: + Updates to \displ@y \displaylines \bmod to reflect changes in plain.tex. + + * fontdef.dtx: + Upates to \skew \rightarrowfill \leftarrowfill \@vereq to reflect changes + in plain.tex. + +1995-05-09 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (\subsection{Bibliography}): Added a missing %-sign + +1995-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx: Use \@firstofone instead of \@iden. + * tracefnt.dtx: Use \@firstofone instead of \@iden. + * ltdefns.dtx: Use \@firstofone instead of \@iden. + +1995-05-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + Updated definitions of \d and \b because of changes in plain.tex + + * ltplain.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + * ltsect.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + * ltpictur.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + * ltoutput.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + * ltoutenc.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + * ltboxes.dtx: Use \hb@xt@. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Added \hb@xt@ as abbreviation for "\hbox to". + + * manifest.txt: + Added ltx3info.tex. Rearranged some bits. + + * ltx3info.tex: + Added this file. Information about the latex3 project. + + * cmfonts.dst: + Removed generation of OMLccm.fd file. + + * unpacked.txt: + Removed surplus OMLccm.fd file. All concrete font files are now in + mfnfss. + +1995-05-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx (paragraph{...}): + Use \quad instead of \hskip 1em in \@seccntformat. pr/1596 + Add \relax to prevent `plus/minus' problem with improper redefinition + of \@seccntformat. pr/1596 + +1995-05-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + +* ltsect.dtx: Documented version from Tobias Oetiker. + +1995-05-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * idx.tex: Added missing curly brace in \setlength command. + +1995-05-02 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx: + Surround the . in \@dottedcontextline by \hbox to typeset it in the text + font. pr/1503 + Don't reset to \rmfamily just to \normalfont in case the document font is + not the roman one. pr/1578 + +1995-05-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpar.dtx: Documentation reworked by Tobias Oetiker. + (Thanks to Tobi for volunteering.) + +1995-04-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx (subsection{Robust commands and protect}): + Moved the initialisation of \protect to this file. + + * ltcntrl.dtx: + Removed unused defs for \@setprotect and \@resetprotect. + Moved initialisation of \protect to ltdefns.dtx. + + * ltpar.dtx (subsection{Implementation}): + Made \@par default to \@@par. (shorter) + Tobi kindly updated the documentation for this file. + +1995-04-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: Move some \leavevmodes earlier, for graphics/1512 + + * latex209.dtx: Add \hang and \textindent + + * ltplain.dtx: Move \hang and \textindent to latex209.dtx + Remove some commands which are (re)defined later. + +1995-04-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + Add a number of \@onlypreamble commands to save space. pr/1240 + + * ltfiles.dtx (section{File Handling}): + Support for pr/1121. see below. + + * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}): + Limited support for \AtBeginDocument{\begin{foo}} + \AtEndDocument{\end{foo}}. + Be careful to get the order right if you do it more than once. pr/1121 + + * unpacked.txt: + Added names of new encodings. + +1995-04-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: remove \the\every@math@size from \document + for latex/1407 + 1420 (from patch file) + + * ltdefns.dtx: From patch file: make \@check@c \long + (latex/1346) \newenvironment argument handling /1507. + + * ifthen.dtx: Fix `driver' docstrip guard. Reported by + Martin Schr"oder. + +1995-04-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpage.dtx: Reset \emergencystretch in \fussy latex /1344 + (fom patch file). Clean up documentation slightly. + + * ltcntrl.dtx: fix for /1317 (internal) \@for expanding its + argument incorectly + + * ltxref.dtx:\newlabel \@onlypreamble for /1388 from patch file. + + * ltbibl.dtx: Add \mbox to \cite for latex/1239 from patch file. + Make \@onlypreamble\bibcite /1388 (from patch file) + Add some macro envs to documentation. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Modify docstrip guards to keep trace code out of + the kernel, unless `trace' specified. + 2 more fixes from patch file + latex/1451: newline command \\ in eqnarray and output routine + %%% latex/1392: AtBeginDvi broken + + * latex209.dtx: Add \proclaim and \ttraggedright + + * ltplain.dtx: Make \new... non outer: /1405 (from patch file) + Move \proclaim and \ttragedright to latex209.dtx + +1995-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx (section or \caption command.): + Implement \addcontentsline with \addtocontents to save space. + + * manifest.txt: + Added begleit.err (errata for the German translation of the + LaTeX Companion). + + * inputenc.dtx (section{The ISO Latin-1 encoding}): + \textonequarter and friends incorrectly declared as math chars. + (section{Default definitions for characters}): + Default values moved to own section. + (section{The ISO Latin-2 encoding}): + latin2 added. pr/1447. + (section{The IBM code page 850}): + cp850 added. pr/1330. + +1995-04-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Removed surplus definition of \@gobble. pr/1361 + + * ltfiles.dtx: + Allow blanks within \includeonly argument. pr/1514 + + * cmfonts.fdd: + Fixed typo in OMLcmr. pr/1485 + + * syntonly.dtx: + Removed surplus \typeout lines containing the now undefined commands + \filedate etc. pr/1471 + +1995-04-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: add \null to \k for latex/1274 (from patch file) + + * Makefile (cleanupsrc): set date to June 1995 + + * ltclass.dtx: Fix filecontents and \DeclareOption + pr's 1487 and 1498 . (moved from patch file.) + + * ltfinal.dtx: Modify to allow ltpatch.ltx (patch level 0) + For a full release. To solve problems of initial install picking + up old patch files. + +1995-04-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * makeindx.dtx: + Changed \see to use \emph as suggested by Mats Dahlgren. + +1995-04-14 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Margins}): Also take the + \marginparsep into account when calculating the width of the + margin paragraph. + +1995-04-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlists.dtx: Missing %%% identification. + +1995-04-03 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (Defining the page styles): Removed extra dot after + \thesection in article/twoside/headings case. (PR #1519) + +1995-04-02 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: A slight documentation fix (PR #1517) + + * alltt.dtx: A few documentation fixes (PR #1517) + +1995-04-02 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{The implementation}): + Fixed problem with $...\it\mbox...$ in compat mode. pr/1275 + + * latint.dtx: + Fixed problem with $...\it\mbox...$ in compat mode. pr/1275 + + * newlfont.dtx: Corrected bad error message if math alphabet is + misused. pr/1440 + + * lfonts.dtx: + Corrected bad error message if math alphabet is misused. pr/1440 + + * latint.dtx: + Fixed problem with "\abovewithdelims(\rfloor 1pt" + pr/1329 + +1995-03-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Fixes for latex/1460 (infinite looping on 2nd + \documentstyle command) and latex/1424 (\newcommand{\r}{}) + Also wrap some long lines to 72. + +1995-03-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: patch level 2 + + * patches.txt: patch level 2 + + * slides.dtx: Modify framebox redefinition for : graphics/1335 + +1995-03-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latexsym.dtx (section{The Implementation}): + Fixed lhd and friends which are supposed to be binary ops and not + relations. pr/1459 + +1995-03-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el (report-latex-bug): Support transient mark mode + Also use shell-command so that shell variables are initialised. + +1995-03-14 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx : Various documentation changes + (subsection{Customizing the labels}): Changed the width of the + labels slightly to prevent LaTeX stuffing two on each line + (PR #1375) + +1995-01-31 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Description}): made \descriptionlabel + a short command (PR #1399) + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Description}): made \descriptionlabel + a short command (PR #1399) + +1995-01-27 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * alltt.dtx (section{The Implementation}): Reset \dospecials to + its original value after the modified version has been + executed. This is to make \verb?\{}? work inside the altt + environment (PR 1369) + +1995-01-12 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Left equation numbering}): Added + \normalcolor to defintion of \@eqnnum (PR 1351) + +###################### +# 1994/12/01 Release +###################### + +1994-12-17 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews02.tex: Edited description of AMS-LaTeX to get everything + to fit onto one page. + +1994-12-16 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Macros for font handling}): Added the + declaration of the lasy font family. + Use \newcommand* for commands with arguments instead of + \newcommand. + * latexsym.dtx: Removed the former change by outdating the last + version. + +1994-12-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el: (Matt Swift) Support old emacs (tested with 18.57 + in addition to 19.28) + +1994-12-14 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx + + Corrected typo + + * usrguide.tex + + Removed some commands + + * cfgguide.tex + + Tidying + +1994-12-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: add \par to verbatim redefinition. + +1994-12-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added braces to \copyright so it works unbraced in + subscripts. + Added \ifmmode check to \@changed@cmd so that redefinitions aren't + made in math mode (which can also foul up unbraced subscripts). + Commented out \textasciicircum, + \textasciitilde, \textbackslash, \textbar, + \textgreater, \texthyphenchar, \texthyphen and + \textless to save memory. + +1994-12-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cfgguide.tex: A bit more detail re ltxdoc.cfg. + + * directex.txt: lthyphen.cfg now hyphen.cfg. + + * decustex.txt: lthyphen.cfg now hyphen.cfg. + +1994-12-12 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexsym.dtx (section{The Implementation}): Introduced the cs + \@fam@lasy to hold the name of the font family; this will either + be lasy or llasy, depending on whether the main class is slides or + not. This new cs is now also used to prevent loading the package + twice. + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): Define \cal and \mit using + \DeclareRobustCommand + (subsubsection{Enumerate}): Handle \labelenumi cs. like in + classes.dtx; using \theenumi in its definition + (subsection{Macros for font handling}): Made \familydefault point + to \sfdefault in slides.def (PR #1020) + +1994-12-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el: Add missing (defvar ltxbug-mail-headers + (Matt Swift: latex/1255) + + * ltxguide.cls: Stop \small in verbatim affecting previous para. + + * manifest.txt: cfgguide. + + * ltfloat.dtx: New version from Chris. + +1994-12-12 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Tidied up documentation. + +1994-12-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx + + * cfgguide.tex + + Major editing + +1994-12-11 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Customizing the labels}): Redefined + \mlabel to use the new \parbox syntax instead of using the + \setbox primitive. + (subsection{Font changing}): Define \cal and \mit using + \DeclareRobustCommand + (subsection{The generic letter commands}): Use + \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect instead of redefining it. + +1994-12-10 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{The implementation}): + Make arguments to \@fontswitch implicit, needed for \select@group + change. + Use \space command in \text@command directly for comparison. + + * latint.dtx: + Surround \select@group with {} so that it can be used after _ and ^. + + * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + Don't define \ifG@defaultsubs via \newif to save macro names + +1994-12-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Removed useless catcode setting of ~. + Made letters active and undefined by default, rather than illegal. + Added `beta test' message. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added documentation for the OML encoding, after + the last lot got lost by the server... + Replaced width with \@width in vrules. + +1994-12-09 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Captions}): Added the setting of + \if@minipage to false; floats now set it to true to prevent extra + white space from appearing when the float starts with a list; this + affected the spacing around a caption above a centered table. + +1994-12-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cfgguide.tex: Initial draft, Configuration docs. + + * ltbibl.dtx: Allow \bibliographystyle in the preamble. + +1994-12-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: \arraynewline RIP. + + * lttab.dtx: Make \tabularnewline work in array. + \arraynewline deleted. + + * latexbug.el: mention public database. + + * latexbug.tex: Call category 0 LaTeX not base + Add >Confidential no field to all messages by default. + Add message about public database to final typeout. + Compress messages to fit on 25-line screen. + + * usrguide.tex: mention list of packages in LaTeXBook. + +1994-12-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * bugs.txt: Added pointer to ltxbugs2html. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added \null and \sh@ft to \b and \d. + +1994-12-07 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: corrected checksum (PR #1243) + +1994-12-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: Document ltx3pub papers on ctan. + Other small corrections. + +1994-12-07 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tlb1042.lvt: Rewrote test file to avoid printing out internal + details of how \ENC-cmd is implemented. + + * tlb0552.lvt: Rewrote test file to do a showbox on $\_$ rather + than a \tracingall. + +1994-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex fix dates. + + * clsguide.tex: fix dates. + + * usrguide.tex: fix dates. + +1994-12-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Added <tab> to the ignored chars in \nfss@catcodes. pr/1064 + Use \nfss@catcodes in \DeclareFontEncoding. + (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + set \nfss@catcodes locally to \relax in \try@load@fontshape + so that it isn't executed several times when an .fd file is + read in. + + * updated various test files. + +1994-12-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add \pause so messages do not scroll off screen. + Suggested by Rosemary Bailey. + + * lablst.tex: Print labels verbatim, and input packages. + Fixing problems reported via c.t.t. + +1994-12-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added braces round the \ooalign in \textcircled. + + * tlb1233.lvt: Added test file for unbraced \ooalign's. + +1994-12-02 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: Commented out \ldots. + + * lfonts.dtx: Commented out \copyright. + + * tlb1214.lvt: Test file for symbols like \pounds. + + * tlb1217.lvt: Test file for \a. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed a bug with \a. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Added font substitutions for \pounds. + +1994-12-01 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx : Made the oneside option work for the book class + (PR #1195) + (section{Initial Code}): Moved the allocation of \if@mainmatter to + this section in order to let it be known when the pagestyles are + defined. The switch is used there and needs to be known then; + otherwise TeX finds the wrong \fi in an \if@twoside...\else...\fi + construct. + (subsection{Font changing}): Define \cal and \mit using + \DeclareRobustCommand + (the driver): use \newcommand* for shorthands with argument + (whole file): Use \newcommand* for commands with arguments + +1994-12-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: lthyphen.ltx|cfg now hyphen.ltx|cfg + + * ltfinal.dtx: lthyphen.ltx|cfg now hyphen.ltx|cfg + + * lthyphen.dtx: lthyphen.ltx|cfg now hyphen.ltx|cfg + + * texpert.txt: Document ltxcheck font checks. + lthyphen.cfg now (or soon will be) hyphen.cfg + + * ltplain.dtx: remove some {oldcomments} and other tidying up. + +1994-11-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Chapters}): Made chapter titles more + robust against pagebreaks in the middle of them. Added an extra + \nobreak and a \interlinepenalty\@M to \@makechapterhead and + \@makeschapterhead (PR #1016, #1135) + +1994-11-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx: Use new \@dofilelist. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Add new \@dofilelist to \enddocument + Move some of the warnings in \enddocument out of \if@filesw. + + * Makefile (TEXTS): add latexbug.el + + * unpack2e.ins: add pict2e and graphpap. + +1994-11-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: Set \FOO-cmd to \@current@cmd rather than \relax when + entering encoding FOO. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Made text commands expand (almost) entirely in the + mouth. + +1994-11-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcntrl.dtx: Doc improvements. + +1994-11-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * ltfiles.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * lterror.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * ltxref.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * ltsect.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * ltidxglo.dtx: Corrected \changes entries. + + * lttab.dtx: Corrected \changes entries (wrong format). + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added new definitions of \b, \c and \d. + Fixed bug with accents on commands which aren't allowed in + \csname. + + * inputenc.dtx: Moved a docstrip option to it's correct home. + + * latex209.dtx: Added hacks for space around floats. + + * tlb1184.lvt: Added check file for default accent and symbol + definitions. + +1994-11-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: Comment out lots of now obsolete code. + + * source2e.tex: Add source2e.ist, and other small improvements. + +1994-11-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.dst: Correct the preamble written to generated files. + + * ltdefns.dtx: modify \newenvironment so that a graf environment + is not allowed (Piet van Oostrum latex/1037). Previous attemt + to do this removed... + +1994-11-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: typos.. (Ulrik Vieth) + + * usrguide.tex: Small updates, and typos. Add xr.sty. + + * latexbug.el: Make completion case insensitive. + + * latexbug.tex: Prompt for >Class if no test file given. + +1994-11-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: typo in decls argument. + + * latint.dtx: wrap long lines. + + * source2e.tex: Make frontmatter \pagenumbering{roman} + So can be processed with only 2 latex runs. (Ulrik Vieth) + Add lthyphen.dtx. + +1994-11-22 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tlb0574.lvt: Added check file for empyt accents and accents in + tocs. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed `empty accent' bug. + + * inputenc.dtx: Fixed typo A1 -> A0. + +1994-11-21 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed \dots so that it has no extra space in a + monowidth font. + Corrected typo in the definition of \mathunderscore. + + * inputenc.dtx: Added \textregistered. + Added "A0 (nbs) to Latin-1. + +1994-11-20 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx + + * ltoutput.dtx + + * ltxguide.cls + + Tidied formatting + + * patches.txt + + Updated + + * bugs.txt + + Updated + + * install.txt + + Updated + + * template.txt + + Updated + + * texpert.txt + + Updated + + * usrguide.tex + + Major update + + * clsguide.tex + + Major update + + * fntguide.tex + + Major update + +1994-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: reallow 8-bit input. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Add \color@vbox + + * tracefnt.dtx: \next renamed to \reserved@f + + * fam.dtx: \next renamed to \reserved@f + + * latint.dtx: use \expandafter instead of \next in + \DeclareMathDelimiter. + + * ltplain.dtx: Remove \pt, now defined elsewhere. + + * ltmath.dtx Use \expandafter trick instead of \next + in a' \phantom and \smash. Colour support to \phantom and \smash + +1994-11-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: remove \phantom (now in ltmath) + + * fam.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * latint.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltclass.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltcntlen.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltcntrl.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * lterror.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltfiles.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltfloat.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltmath.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltpictur.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * ltsect.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * lttab.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + + * tracefnt.dtx: Replace \@tempa by \reserved@a. + +1994-11-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx + + Restored 2e logo + +1994-11-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: Remove \{ and \} + +1994-11-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ifthen.dtx: Use \@unexpandable@protect and modify + \@setref to fix bug /946 (/1023) \pageref breaking tests. + +1994-11-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: Add \tabularnewline and \arraynewline. + + * ltspace.dtx: Make \\ robust + +1994-11-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx + + Tidied \endtrivlists + + * ltspace.dtx + + Attempted to improve error messages + + * ltfntcmd.dtx + + Added line-break to error message + + * lablst.tex + + Simpler with better layout + +1994-11-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: replace sfcode settings. Remove \dag and friends. + +1994-11-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * makeindx.dtx: remove spurious \wlog. + +1994-11-10 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltbibl.dtx + + Patched \nocite{*} + + * ltplain.dtx + +1994-11-10 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Flush left equations}): Added the value + of \parskip to \abovedisplayskip to compensate for negative + \topsep settings. (PR #881) + (subsection{Single or double sided printing}): removed typo (PR + #881) + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): Removed two typos + +1994-11-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: use new definition of \loop + + * ltoutput.dtx: modify \protect setting. + + * newlfont.dtx: modify \ProvidesFile usage. + + * oldlfont.dtx: modify \ProvidesFile usage. + +1994-11-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lthyphen.dtx: Use \ProvidesFile. + + * lfonts.dtx: Use \ProvidesFile. + + * setsize.dtx: RIP + + * fam.dtx: Add definitions of \@vpt (from setsize.dtx). + + * fontdef.dtx: Add \DeclareMathSizes (from setsize.dtx). + + * Makefile: Generate new release date 1994/12/01 + Remove setfile.dtx from generation of ltfss.dtx + + * ltpatch.ltx: Change to patch 1994/12/01 release. + + * ltboxes.dtx: More colour changes. + Fix \@finalstrut (from ltpatch). + + * source2e.tex: Move ltoutenc. Add fontdef and preload. + +1994-11-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: Use GetFileInfo style doc header. + + * preload.dtx: Use GetFileInfo style doc header. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Move \newwrite's to ltfiles. + + * ltfiles.dtx: Move \newwrite's here from ltdefns. Remove + duplcate decalaration of \@mainaux. + +1994-11-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: + Added braces again that have been incorrectly removed. + + * test files: + Updated a large number of test files that had changed + due to protect handling changes and bug fix in font selection. + + * oldlfont.dtx: + Test for \protect being \@typeset@protect in \@setfontsize. + + * newlfont.dtx: + Test for \protect being \@typeset@protect in \@setfontsize. + + * lfonts.dtx: + Test for \protect being \@typeset@protect in \@setfontsize. + + * exscale.dtx: + Renamed \every@size to \every@math@size. + Update \big@size globally (new \every@math@size concept). + + * ltfiles.dtx: + Renamed \every@size to \every@math@size. + + * fam.dtx: + Renamed \every@size to \every@math@size. + Allow several encoding changes before running \selectfont. pr/1042 + + * tracefnt.dtx (section{Scaled font extraction}): + Changed the font size substitution to really select + the nearest size available. pr/747 + Fixed incorrect size selection if math fonts are not set up. pr/848 + Start cleaning up documentation. + Fix bug that produced extra "No math setup" message if + tracefont was loaded with default options. + + Patched \loop + +1994-11-05 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Floating Environments}): + + Introduced \color@hbox + Changed colour resetting for footnotes (again) + Introduced a simulacrum of compatibility to old \@xfloat + Changed float setup + + * ltboxes.dtx (section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}): + + Introduced \color@hbox + Changed colour resetting for minipage footnotes + Added to documentation + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): + + Introduced \color@hbox + New style protect settings in shipout + Tidied shipout and added to documentation + Added begindvi stuff + +1994-11-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added setting of \@typeset@protect to \patterns + and \hyphenation. + + * ltnews02.tex: First draft. + +1994-11-04 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: Added \protected@xdef to \footnote, \@footnotetext, + and \footnotemark. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added \_. + + * ltpage.dtx: Added \@unexpandable@protect to \markboth and + \markright. + + * lttab.dtx: Added \set@typeset@protect to \@array and + \multicolumn. + Added \@unexpandable@protect to \@mkpream. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Added \protected@edef to \@mpfootnotetext. + + * ltidxglo.dtx: Added \protected@write to \index and \glossary. + Removed \if@filesw from \makeindex and \makeglossary. + + * ltsect.dtx: Added \protected@write to \addtocontents and + \addcontentsline. + Added \protected@edef to \@sect. + Added \protected@xdef to \thanks. + + * ltxref.dtx: Added \protected@write to \label. + Added \protected@edef to \refstepcounter. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Removed setting of \protect from \@writefile. + + * lterror.dtx: Added \set@display@protect to messages. + + * ltfiles.dtx: Added \protected@write and a new definition of + \nofiles. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Added \x@protect and a new mechanism for protecting + short commands. + Added commands for safely performing edefs. + Added \set@display@protect to \typeout + +1994-11-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Check that latex.ltx is used with an initex with + no format preloaded. (VMS initex defaults to loading + plain.fmt) + + * ltdefns.dtx: rename \long@def to \l@ngrel@x + + * ltclass.dtx: move \@missingfileerror to ltfiles. + + * ltfiles.dtx: add \@missingfileerror + +1994-11-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el 2nd attempt. + + * latexbug.tex: more alterations to work with .el file. + +1994-11-02 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Wrapped long lines. + +1994-10-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add line count to discourage large test files. + +1994-10-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Added inputenc.dst and ltoutenc.dst, and inputenc.dtx. + + * fontdef.dtx: Added OMLenc.def. + + * unpack2e.ins: Added inputenc.ins. + + * unpacked.txt: Added inputenc.sty, font encoding and input + encoding files. + + * fntguide.tex: Added documentation on the new text declaration + commands. + + * usrguide.tex: Added documentation on the new text commands. + +1994-10-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Floating Environments}): + + In float handling: + major changes to parameter parsing, setting of local + variables, etc; + two-column and one-column cases merged; space hacks moved; + colour support improved and corrected, including extra boxes. + In marginpars: + colour support improved and corrected, including extra boxes. + In footnotes: + colour support improved. + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): + + Small changes to documentation + Added colour support to \@topnewpage + Added colour support for footnotes to \@makecol + Added warning to \@fpsadddefault + + * ltdefns.dtx (subsection{Internal defining commands}): + + Added \@onelevel@sanitize + +1994-10-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmfonts.dst: Added OMScmnr and OMLcmr. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Added OMScmr and OMLcmr. + + * ltxguide.cls: Added \NEWdescription, \NEWfeature and the + optional argument to desc. + + * ltoutenc.dst: Added OMLenc.def. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: added encoding-specific commands from ltmath. + Added OML encoding. + Added \textcircled and removed \textregistered. + Added \DeclareTextCompositeCommand. + Added \t. + + * ltmath.dtx: Removed encoding-specific commands to ltoutenc. + +1994-10-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Added the alltt package. + + * alltt.dtx (section{The Implementation}): Added a missing + \dospecials in the alltt environment code. + + * classes.dtx (section{Cross Referencing}): Fixed a typo in the + documentation of \@tocrmarg. (PR #904) + +1994-10-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile (INSTS): + Added ltoutenc.ins. + + * manifest.txt: + Added ltoutenc.ins. + +1994-10-29 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontsmpl.dtx: Added tests for \copyright, \dots and + \textregistered. + + * ltmath.dtx: Added \mathellipsis, \mathparagraph, etc. + Removed all of the oldcomments and generally tidied up. + Added \DeclareMathOperator. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added copyright and textregistered. + Renamed the text versions of \P, \S, etc. to \textparagraph, + \textsection, etc. + Added the definitions of \dots etc. which work in math and text. + +1994-10-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Added a numer of \noexpand's to \err@rel@i. pr/1088 + +1994-10-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Added OMSenc.def. + + * fontsmpl.dtx: Added the text commands defined in ltoutenc.dtx. + + * asajtest.ins: An installation file for asajtest.dtx. + + * asajtest.tex: A test file for ltoutenc.dtx. This should become + part of the test suite eventually. + + * asajtest.dtx: This is a scratch version of ltoutenc.dtx. + Rewrote the enc.def files to use the new default settings. + +1994-10-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.el: First attempt at emacs interface. + +1994-10-27 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Removed loading of enc.def files. + + * fontdef.dtx: Added OMSenc.def. + + * ltoutenc.dst: Added OMSenc.def. + +1994-10-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: Add ltmath. + +1994-10-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Add documentation of star form of \newcommand. + Remove all `oldcomments' environments. + Add lots of `macro' environments. + + * ltboxes.dtx: missing % in \@isavepicbox (was in ltpatch.ltx) + +1994-10-25 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Added default encodings. + Added \ProvideTextCommand and \ProvideTextCommandDefault. + Added the OMS encoding. + +1994-10-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: + + Removed a TAB + +1994-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: Add inner braces to fbox to keep inner settings + of \fboxsep local (latex/1061) + +1994-10-23 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmath.dtx: + + Added \normalcolor to \@eqnnum + Removed braces from \ensuremath + +1994-10-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Modify pkgindoc because of Tuesday's change. + +1994-10-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: + Put \changes cmd behind % :-) + +1994-10-20 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Split characters into text-only and math-only. + Reded some of the \providecommand's in latin1.def. + + * latex209.dtx: Corrected a typo---\mark{}{} should have been + \mark{{}{}}. + +1994-10-19 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Added missing \relax to \DeclareFontEncoding so the args can + contain newlines. pr/1026 + +1994-10-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdefns.dtx: Add *-forms to define non-long variants of + commands. + Add extra check so \newenvironment{graf} generates an error. + + * ltfiles.dtx: move \listfiles and \@addtofilelist here. + + * ltclass.dtx: move \listfiles and \@addtofilelist to ltfiles. + +1994-10-17 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added empty initial mark. + New method of switching off 2e commands. + Allow \newcommand on 2e commands. + +1994-10-16 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltsect.dtx: + + Added \normalcolor to page-numbers in toc + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + + Tidying, and typos fixed in documentation + Added check for empty text + Removed space from \nfss@text + Renamed \check@nocorr to \text@command: + to improve error messages + + * ltboxes.dtx (section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}): + + Added \long to \fbox, \mbox, \sbox (from ltpatch) + \leavevmode corrected for frame boxes (from ltpatch) + \@parboxto macro added to \@iiiparbox, + to remove misuse of \@empty + +1994-10-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: stop expansion occurring on synopsis and other + fields. + +1994-10-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * nfssfont.dtx: + Change \end to \stop in help message. pr/615 + +1994-10-15 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Warn, if math alphabet is used outside math (from patch) + + * fontdef.dtx (subsubsection{The log-like functions}): + Somehow lost \operator@font while moving code. + + * ltmath.dtx: + Comment out definition of \, is defined earlier as robust + + * fam.dtx: + Added [ and ] to the reset macro for .fd file loading pr/872 + +1994-10-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add latexbug.cfg system, so that personal + details do not need to be entered every time. + +1994-10-14 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx: + Separate text font and math font setup. Added a lot of math + font setup stuff from other files. + + * ltmath.dtx: + File added to the distribution. + + * manifest.txt: + Added new files. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Moved math enviornments to ltmath.dtx + + * unpack2e.ins: + Added fontmath.ltx and fonttext.ltx generation, + removed fontdef.ltx generation, + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Macros for generating index entries}): + Added missing percent and use \ttfamily not \texttt + +1994-10-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx (section{Plain \TeX}): + Moved math code to ltmath.dtx. + Removed old code that was commented out long time ago. + + * lfonts.dtx: + Moved log-like functions to ltmath.dtx. + Removed the unnecessary refernce to \tenex. + +1994-10-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add more GNATS fields. + + * ltsect.dtx: remove < > from a \changes entry (upset makeindex) + +1994-10-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Redo ltxcheck: more friendly messages, check + for TeX3.14, and missing fonts. + Add automatic detection of TeX3.14 (previously in ltpatch.ltx) + + * latexbug.tex: Modify to prompt for synopsis information. + +1994-10-07 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pastex.txt: Installation guide for PasTeX on the Amiga. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Moved ogonek accent. + +1994-09-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * idx.tex: + Add missing brace in \setlength. pr/589 + +1994-09-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latexsym.dtx (subsection{\LaTeX{} symbols fonts}): + Use silent substitution for the bold lasy fonts below 10pt + +1994-09-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: Fix \newcount typo (which caused `4pt' to appear + in the change log and index) + + * manifest.txt: added pctex.txt + + * Makefile (TEXTS): added pctex.txt + + * pctex.txt: New version from PCI + +1994-09-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: + patch for pr872 ([] with catcode active) + +1994-09-23 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added spaces to \@halfmag and friends. + + * ltxguide.cls: Replaced \PassOptionsToPackage{article} by + \PassOptionsToClass{article}. + +1994-09-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: add graphpap.{ins|dtx} + + * Makefile: add graphpap.{dst|ins|dtx} + + * manifest.txt: Add textures.txt, pict2e.{ins|dtx} + + * Makefile: Add textures.txt, pict2e.{dst|ins|dtx} + + * pict2e.dtx: Wrote pict2e.dtx (It just generates an error + message, saying the package has not been written) + +1994-09-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Modify printing of \everyjob so babel formats + work correctly. + +1994-09-04 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Added \cs{DeclareInputComposite} and the + \cs{ProvidesCommand}s to the encoding files. + Removed the definition of the accent slots in Latin-1. + +1994-08-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * oztex.txt: Checked in revised version from Andrew. + +1994-08-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * yandytex.txt: Checked in revised version from Berthold. + +1994-08-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): changed documentation to + mention \DeclareOldFontCommand instead of @renewfontswitch (PR #812) + + * letter.dtx (section{The documentation driver file}): added + missing comma in a \DoNotIndex entry (PR #857) + (subsection{Setting Paper Sizes}): Added the landscape option, + because Leslie Lamport wants to make landscape letters. + +1994-08-24 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tlb0143.lvt, tlb0162.lvt, tlb0380.lvt, tlb0498.lvt, tlb0642.lvt, + tlb0830.lvt: Checked in. + +1994-08-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphpap.dtx: add \leavevmode to \graphpaper. + + * textures.txt: Added file. Mainly written by Blue Sky Research. + +###################### +# 1994/06/01 PL3 Release +###################### + +1994-07-28 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Correct Checksum. + +1994-07-27 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews.cls: Replaced \PassOptionToClass by \PassOptionsToClass. + +1994-07-25 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * microtex.txt: Removed extraneous \dump. + +1994-07-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add definition of \@secondoftwo, so latexbug + may once again be used with initex. + +1994-07-18 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * microtex.txt: Added installation guide for MicroTeX. + +1994-07-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * inputenc.dtx: Replaced \Dh by \DH and \Th by \TH. + Added \ensuremath to the math commands. + Added \inputencoding. + +1994-07-13 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Margins}): Moved the rounding of + \topmargin into native mode only (PR #93) + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{The dimension of text}): The setting + of \textwidth and \textheight to a fixed value should only happen + in comnpatibility mode. (PR #714) + (subsubsection{Margins}): Added fixed values for \oddsidemargin, + \evensidemargin and \marginparwidth to compatibility mode + +1994-07-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: + Added description for additional patches. + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Added patches for: + \ensuremath + \LaTeXe not allowed in compat mode (exception) + + * usrguide.tex (subsection{Ensuring math mode}): + Corrected the description of \ensuremath so that it really does nothing + other than producing its argument in math mode. + + * cmfonts.fdd: + Added additional font shapes for Concrete Roman Fonts + +1994-07-13 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontsmpl.dtx: Added an \upshape. + +1994-07-11 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): \labelitemiii was + mistakenly called \labelitemiiii (bug report # 711) + +1994-07-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: added patch for latex/667, minipage and \parbox + failing if used with height argument before math setup. + +1994-07-05 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Added patches for: + empty p-column problem + figure* with color package problem + \^{\i} in toc problem (T1 encoding) + + * patches.txt: + Added description for additional patches. + +1994-07-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Extended patch for T1+german so that composite chars are used instead of + accents + +1994-07-02 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Added patches for: + \mathit in text mode + \loop could do one iteration too much in certain situations + T1 breaks german 2.4a (this is a german.sty problem actually) + + * patches.txt: + Added descritions of further patch level 3 patches. + + +1994-06-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex + + Warning about enc.def commands added + Stuff on font definition files and encoding definition files + changed + <cdp> removed, for consistency, use <encoding> throughout + Small edits + + * clsguide.tex + + Michael's amendments added + +1994-06-26 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex + + Minor edits + + * clsguide.tex + + Added stuff + Changed usage of <> + Reordered update stuff + Added Summary sheet + Removed draft status + + * ltxguide.cls + +1994-06-23 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Global Declarations}): Removed a typo + (#[] instead of [1]) + Ran letter.dtx through ispell. + +1994-06-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: + Added descritions of patch level 3 patches. + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Added patches for: + inefficient text encoding handling + \"\i problem + \"{} problem + \dag \ddag \P \S lost sometimes + \t problem + \test..{} problem + + Changed usage of <> + Changed definition of verbatim + +1994-06-22 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx (section{The implementation}): + + Removed space from \DeclareTextCommand + Improved error messages from \DeclareTextCommand + + * usrguide.tex + + Changed usage of <> + + * clsguide.tex + + Added stuff + Changed usage of <> + Rationalised encoding stuff + + * fntguide.tex + + Rationalised usage of cdp, ENC, encoding + Changed usage of <> + Fixed overfull box and long lines + +1994-06-22 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Flush left equations}): Defer the + setting of \mathindent to the end of the class instead of to + \begin{document}. This way it is possible for packages to change + its value (fixes bug report #577) + Refrased a few sentences to prevent overfull hbox messages. + +1994-06-19 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex + + Added stuff on project, money etc. + + * fntguide.tex + + Corrcted largesymbols stuff. + + * clsguide.tex + + Major revision and additons. + Spell checked. + Removed \typeouts. + Removed overfull boxes. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + + Experimental fixes to \nocorr stuff. + +1994-06-17 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): Added a + missing closing brace. Made a lot of small changes to the + documentation. + +1994-06-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * update.ins: modify for new distribution `ins' files. + +1994-06-12 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * template.txt + + Changed 2e to new. + + * fntguide.tex + + Tidying. + + * directex.txt + + Corrected layout. + +1994-06-12 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Split distrib directory into distrib/base and + distrib/unpacked. + + * ltpatch.dtx: Don't set catcodes of upper 128 characters in + TeX2. + + * manifest.txt: Added directex.txt. + + * Makefile (TEXTS): Added directex.txt. + +1994-06-11 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex + + Typography of tools list changed. + Added typeouts. + Added letter to list of standard packages. + Removed these typeouts: + \typeout{CONTENTS OF THE TOOLS BUNDLE: needs checking} + \typeout{Marion said: Perhaps the different uses of + `newcommand and `providecommand can be shown a bit clearer} + \typeout{List of stuff in mfnfss, psnfss, babel not done} + + * fntguide.tex + + Editorial changes. + Removed duplicated text. + Removed unwanted blank lines. + + * emtex.txt + + Added section on memory problems. + + * directex.txt + + New file added. + + * install.txt + + Added new file to list. + + * readme.txt + + Editorial changes. + Added patches.txt, etc. + + * patches.txt + + Editorial changes. + Removed references to lists. + Documented lack of lists. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx + + Corrected documentation, title etc. + Corrected dates in changes entries. + +1994-06-11 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * patches.txt: + Added descritions of patch level 2 patches. + + * ltpatch.ltx: + Added patches for: + 8bit chars problem + \nocite{*} problem + \_ in math mode (T1 encoding) + + * added tests for problem 549, 554, 557. + + +1994-06-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: Added ltpatch.ltx and patches.txt. + + * ltfinal.dtx (subsection{Input encoding}): Do not set codes for + higher half of character table for TeX2. + +1994-06-09 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile (LATEXS): Added ltpatch.ltx. + +1994-06-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): + Use new definitions for footnote macros within \maketitle. + Otherwise \thanks entries will overprint. + + * docstrip.dtx: + Corrected typo in documentation + +1994-06-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpatch.ltx: New file fixing bugs in the major release. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Add new feature input ltpatch.ltx if the file + exists. + + * latexbug.tex: Add babel. + Use \everyjob to print format info (for new patch system) + +1994-06-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: Fix bug introduced last week. Add \leavevmode to + \fbox, and make \long. At the same time make \sbox and \mbox + \long even though they were not \long in 2.09. + +1994-06-06 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile.dist: Changed mv to cp, added installation of *.ist + files, added target `clean'. + + * manifest.txt: Changed name of distributed Makefile from + Makefile to Makefile.unx. + + * Makefile: Changed name of distributed Makefile from Makefile + to Makefile.unx. + +1994-06-03 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex + + Changed preamble. + + * fntguide.tex + + Changed preamble. + + * clsguide.tex + + Changed preamble. + +1994-06-02 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (section{Identification}): Fixed bug in the driver, + the line with \ProvidesFile was not seen by LaTeX + (section{A driver for this document}): rearranged the \DoNotIndex + stuff + +###################### +# 1994/06/01 Release +###################### + +1994-06-02 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * copyright.txt and others: Changed copyright message. + +1994-06-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: Modify \framebox and \fbox so \width in the + optional argument of \framebox refers to the natural width + of the text, + + * latexbug.tex: add amslatex category. + + * ltlogos.dtx: add $\m@th$ to \LaTeX to force math size + calculations. + +1994-06-01 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx: Corrected driver code. + + * slides.dtx: Added definition of \SLiTeX. + + * Makefile: Don't add extra copyright headers to *.txt and *.err + files. + +1994-06-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: + Added description of \DeclareTextFontCommand. + Small updates and changes. + + * clsguide.tex: + Updates and corrections. + + * latint.dtx: + Corrected help info for \newmathalphabet error + in compat mode. + + * fntguide.tex: + Several small updates. + +1994-06-01 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews01.tex: Corrected grammar. + +1994-05-31 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Removed overfull boxes. + +1994-05-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Switch to new latex-bugs@uni-mainz.de + address. + +1994-05-31 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: Added clsguide.tex, fntguide.tex, usrguide.tex, + ltnews01.tex, ltxguide.cls, ltnews.cls. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Renamed lthyphen.* to lthyphen.*. + + * unpacked.txt: Renamed lthyphen.* to lthyphen.*. + + * unpack2e.ins: Renamed lthyphen.* to lthyphen.*. + + * manifest.txt: Renamed lthyphen.dtx to lthyphen.dtx, added + clsguide.tex, fntguide.tex, usrguide.tex, ltnews01.tex, + ltxguide.cls, ltnews.cls, ltnews01.ps, manual.err, compan.err. + +1994-05-31 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added SLiTeX logo again. + + * ltnews01.tex: Finished off. + + * ltnews.cls: Added downloaded PS fonts options. + Removed angle brackets from <...> since these were the last + remaining bitmaps! + Added variants of the LaTeX logo. + Added the ltnews.cfg file. + +1994-05-30 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * texpert.txt: Added the section about configuring hyphenation. + +1994-05-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Add interactive request for a `category' + Also add non-interactive field showing \@TeXversion. + +1994-05-30 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Moved pandora, oldgerm, amsfonts, euscript, + eufrak from main distribution to extra package directory.. + + * unpacked.txt: Moved pandora, oldgerm, amsfonts, euscript, + eufrak from main distribution to extra package directory.. + + * manifest.txt: Moved pandora, oldgerm, amsfonts, euscript, + eufrak from main distribution to extra package directory. + Removed features.tex from distribution. + +1994-05-30 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fntguide.tex: + Several updates and additions. + +1994-05-30 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: Removed the description of mfnfss and tools + packages. + Removed sections that were commented out. + Removed typeouts. + Wrapped long lines. + Rewrote to remove overfull hboxes. + Moved the stuff on \newmathalphabet to the section on LaTeX + errors. + Rewrote the stuff on latex209.cfg, and replaced + \PassOptionsToClass (which requires you to list all the + known classes) with \ds@oldlfont. + Added the `LaTeX2e command in LaTeX 2.09 document' error. + Added the SLiTeX logo to the list of unsupported commands. + Added the full list of \text..., \...family, \...series, \...shape + and \math... commands. + +1994-05-29 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Captions}): Make \@makecaption colour + safe by using \sbox\@tempboxa rather than \setbox\@temboxa\hbox. + +1994-05-29 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: + Small general updates. + Rewrote section on compatibility. + + * Makefile: + Removed vmstex.txt and textures.txt since currently empty. + + * copyins.txt: + Removed prelim message, say that files are mentioned in + manifest.txt. + + * copyright.txt: + Removed prelim message, say that files are mentioned in + manifest.txt. + + * manifest.txt: + Removed vmstex.txt and textures.txt since currently empty. + +1994-05-29 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: Added italic correction to <...>. + Added \sourcecode. + + * fntguide.tex: Corrected typos spotted by FMi. + Added the `math selection commands' section. + Replaced the notion of math font attributes with a description + closer to that in the Companion. + Moved stuff on declaring encodings into its own section + Moved stuff on font installation into its own section. + Moved stuff on initialization into its own section. + Moved stuff on naming conventions into its own section. + Moved DeclareFixedFont into text font selection. + Added text to the introduction. + Moved all of the enc.def file commands into one subsection. + Moved everything that's left without a home into the `miscellania' + section. + Generally tidied up. + +1994-05-28 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.cls: Made << and >> produce < and > inside verbatim. + Added ltxguide.cfg. + + * fntguide.tex: Created file out of features.tex. + Redid document structure to fit with usrguide and clsguide. + Removed stuff on old style digits. + Moved text font stuff before math font stuff. + Removed `utilities' section. + Removed the author font commands (covered by usrguide). + Added description of the text font attributes. + Redid the description of the \f@... commands. + Redid the description of the \...default commands. + Added the section on the \DeclareTextWidget commands. + Added the section on math attributes. + +1994-05-27 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * proc.dtx (section{Implementation}): Added a missiing docstrip + guard. + + * classes.dtx: Moved the identification and driver sections to + the beginning of the file. + (subsubsection{Table of Contents}): Wrapped a long line + + * letter.dtx: Added \CharacterTable + Moved identification and driver to the front of the file. + Removed references to the book class from the documentation + +1994-05-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Use sequence a,..,z,A,..,Z not aa,..az,ba,..,bz + As Makeindex is not keen on the latter. + + * source2e.tex: Modify printing of line numbers in index, + + * ifthen.dtx: Use new style error commands. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Add some more names in \author, so I don't get + all the blame. + +1994-05-27 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tlb0438.tlg: Line number change in exscale package. + + * Makefile: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and latex2e.ltx + to latex.ltx, renamed format file to latex.fmt. Added test + tlb0483. + + * manifest.txt: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and + latex2e.ltx to latex.ltx, rearranged a few lines. + + * unpack2e.ins: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and + latex2e.ltx to latex.ltx. + + * unpacked.txt: Renamed unpack2e.ins to unpack.ins and + latex2e.ltx to latex.ltx. + + * tracefnt.dtx: Changed copyright line. + + * pandora.dtx: Updated for new driver format, changed \wlog to + \ProvidesFile and \ProvidesPackage. + + * oldgerm.dtx: Updated for new driver format, changed \wlog to + \ProvidesFile and \ProvidesPackage. + + * oldgerm.dst: Changed copyright line, removed generation of + documentation driver. + + * pandora.dst: Changed copyright line, removed generation of + documentation driver. + + * latexsym.dst: Changed copyright line. + + * amsfonts.dst: Changed copyright line. + + * latexsym.dtx: Added \ProvidesPackage and \ProvidesFile + declaration. + + * euscript.dtx: Corrected \ProvidesPackage declaration. + + * vtl2e02.tlg: Removed test for \SLiTeX command. + + * vtl2e02.lvt: Removed test for \SLiTeX command. + +1994-05-27 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews01.tex: Corrected filenames of usrguie and clsguide. + Removed ltnews.cls from filecontents. + + * ltnews.cls: Checked this in. Added angle brackets to <...>. + Added AMS and SliTeX logos. + + * latex209.dtx: Added SliTeX logo. + + * ltxguide.cls: Added SliTeX logo. + +1994-05-26 Johannes Braams <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Single or double sided printing}): + wrapped a long line. + + * slides.dtx: + (subsection{The class code}): Use \input instead of \@@input. This + way it also works when \input@path is being used. Also changed + \IfFileExists to \InputIfFileExists for the same reason + + * slides.dtx: Wrapped two long lines + Moved the identification and driver to the front of the file. + + * proc.dtx (subsection{Identification}): + The second argument to \cmd\ProvidesFile wasn't closed in the + driver and the style file + + * ifthen.dtx: Wrapped a long line + Added a \ProvidesFile command to the driver + Added \CharacterTable + + * proc.dtx: + Added \CharacterTable + Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the + version number. + Moved the identification and driver sections to the front of the + file in order to make \GetFileInfo work. + (subsection{Identification}): + Removed \cmd\typeout from .sty file; changed description + (subsection{The page style}): + Changed \rm to \normalfont\rmfamily in the definition of + \@oddfoot. + +1994-05-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltlogos.dtx: remove \SLiTeX. + + * ltsect.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltfloat.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltclass.dtx: Modify format of \@missingfileerror message. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: remove \literal. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Add silent substitution for bold tt. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Fix bug in Mac parser. typo " should have been : + (reported by Andrew Trevorrow) + + * ltbibl.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltpageno.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltlength.dtx: Improve documetation. + + * ltidxglo.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltvers.dtx: Remove PRELIMINARY TEST RELEASE from + startup banner (spring is here) + + * ltthm.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + (long line added last night:-) + + * ltpage.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltcounts.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * ltpictur.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + + * lttab.dtx: Add initial documentation section. + +1994-05-26 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pandora.dtx: Folded a long line. + + * lablst.tex: Folded long lines. + + * copyright.txt: Removed remark about this release being + preliminary. + + * copyins.txt: Removed remark about this release being + preliminary. + + * Makefile: No list of files at end of 00readme.txt, check for + long lines added, make sure that small2e.tex and sample2e.tex + don't get a standard header. + + * testpage.tex: Folded long lines. + + * manifest.txt: Shortened long lines. + + * tnfss7.tlg: Removed blank lines around font warnings in log + file. + + * tnfss4.tlg: Removed blank lines around font warnings in log + file. + + * tnfss1.tlg: Removed blank lines around font warnings in log + file. + +1994-05-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * newlfont.dtx: + Wrapped long lines. + + * docstrip.dtx: + Wrapped long lines. + + * doc.dtx: + Wrapped long lines. + +1994-05-25 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + + Added task. + + Corrected processing of \nocorr. + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Fixed typos and checksum. + + Extra documentation. + +1994-05-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltthm.dtx: Move user level documentation earlier in the file. + + * ltxref.dtx: Move user level documentation earlier in the file. + + * tracefnt.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * fam.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltclass.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Increase \marginparwidth for long command names, + + * ltboxes.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltlists.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltxref.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltdefns.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltplain.dtx: wrap long lines to 72. + +1994-05-25 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.txt: Added changes.txt. + + * ltsect.dtx (\@dottedtocline): Put braces around argument 4 + (the actual toc entry) to avoid font (and possibly other) + changes leaking out to the leaders. + + * vlatex01.tlg: Updated for extra lines around warning + messages, removed trailing space in error help messages. + Change in strut for footnotes causes blank line to disappear. + + * tnfss7.tlg: Update for new \protect handling, updated for new + values of \sfcode and correct \hbar accent. + + * tnfss7.lvt: Added space after number to prevent too much + expansion. + + * tlcs01b.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlcs07b2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlxs01b.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlxs07b2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tltc001.tlg: Updated for extra lines around info and warning + messages, update for new \protect handling, update for change in + value of \errorcontextlines counter in tltc001.lvt. + + * tl2e1.tlg: Updated for extra lines around info messages. + + * vtl2e01.tlg: Updated for extra lines around warning messages, + removed trailing space in error help messages. + + * tlb0250.tlg: Omit printout from \documentclass command. + + * tlb0250.lvt: Omit printout from \documentclass command. + + * vlatex03.tlg: Updated for extra lines around warning messages. + +1994-05-25 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: Added introduction. + Added section on command naming. + Added section on docstrip. + Added details of option processing. + Added example of DeclareRobustCommand. + Checked the document in with the server. + +1994-05-24 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + + Tidied, fixed some typos in documentation. + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsection{Floats}): + + Changed outputpage. + + Changed warnings etc to new commands. + + Added \MessageBreak. + +1994-05-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lterror.dtx: Wrap long lines to 72. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Set \@TeXversion to `2' by default for TeX2. Add + info about setting \@TeXversion to ltxcheck.dtx. + + * lterror.dtx Add \@latex@info@no@line, remove some obsolete + code. + +1994-05-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * tltx003.tlg: + Regenerated because of message changes. + + * usrguide.tex: + Updates and additions. + + * tnfss5.lvt: + Updated because check for bug (40) no longer appropriate. + + * tnfss5.tlg: + Regenerated because of .lvt change. + + * vlatex07.tlg: + Regenerated to reflect new layout of error and warning messages. + + * tltx001.lvt: + Set errorcontextlines to -1 for better high-level checks. + + * tltx001.tlg: + Regenerated to reflect new layout of error and warning messages. + + * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}): + Changed outer default of \@currenvline to \@empty to avoid + double braces. + + * classes.dtx (section{Identification}): + Changed file information that appears in \listfiles. + +1994-05-24 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxguide.tex: Checked in document class. + + * clsguide.tex: Added sections on 2e font commands, defining \rm + etc., and obsolete commands. + Added stuff about \normalsize, \textheight and \textwidth being the + only mandatory commands. + Implemented Frank's suggestions for additions to the `loading other + files' section (which is now a subsection of `upgrading'). + Added stuff on why primitive \input is a bad idea. + Added stuff on boxes and colour. + Moved general style stuff to overview section rather than 2.09 + section. + Added newsletter example. + +1994-05-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Add coments describing \@TeXversion which must + be defined if a TeX older than 3.141 is being used. + + * lterror.dtx: Modify the definition of \GenericError slightly. + Also add completely new definition, using \typeout rather than + \errmessage. Used with TeX's older than 3.141, which have a + bug such that ^^J appears literally rather than breaking the + line in messages. + +1994-05-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: + Updates and additions. + + * copyright.txt: + Point to bugs.txt for error reports. + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Changed info in \ProvidesPackage. + + * latexsym.dtx: + Changed info in \ProvidesPackage. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Removed \MessageQuote since not used otherwise. + + * lterror.dtx: + Corrected documentation. + Removed definitions for \@font@... since they are defined + in tracefnt.dtx. + + * ltclass.dtx: + Added missing percents in filecontents definition :-( + Corrected several typos. + Cleaned up help texts. + Don't stop completely if \NeedsTeXFormat finds the wrong format, + just end inputting the current file. + + * unpack2e.ins: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * install.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * othertex.txt: + Remove bug address; mention bugs.txt instead. + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * readme.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + Removed test release info. + + * texpert.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + Correct LaTeX source file name. + + * web2ctex.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * yandytex.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * manifest.txt: + Changed .l2e extension to .txt. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Replaced ^^J by \MessageBreak. + + * ltclass.dtx: + Replaced many ^^J by \MessageBreak. + Reworded several help texts. + + * ltfinal.dtx: + Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak. + + * fam.dtx: + Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Removed definition of \f@warn@break. + Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak. + + * latint.dtx: + Replaced \f@warn@break with \MessageBreak. + + * tl2e5.lvt: + Changed test for bug (40) of NFSS1, old test no longer + appropriate. + + * vtl2e07.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * vtl2e03.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tnfss3.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlxs03r.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlxs03b.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlxs03a.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlcs03r.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlcs03b.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlcs03a.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlb0202.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tlb0073.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + + * tl2e5.tlg: + Regenerated because of lvt file change. + + * tl2e4.tlg: + Regenerated because of extra blank lines between warnings. + +1994-05-23 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * clsguide.tex: Redid document structure to be more like + usrguide. + Added section on class/package structure. + Restructured the commands list. + +1994-05-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + New \protect logic. + + * ltfloat.dtx: + Changed \@warning to \@latex@warning. + + * doc.dtx: + Added \PackageError commands. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Complete new definitions for \@fontwarning and + \@font@info. + + * lterror.dtx (subsection{Specific errors}): + Added \MessageBreak to various help messages. + Reset \protect to \relax for \@preamerr. + + * lttab.dtx: + New \protect logic in \@mkpream. + + * classes.dtx: + Use new warning message commands. + + * slides.dtx: + Use new warning commands for classes. + twocolumn option will produce warning (not error). + + * letter.dtx: + Use new warning and error commands. (we use \@latex@error + in compatibility mode) + Some documentation updates. + + * ltclass.dtx: + Use new warning and error commands. + + * ltdefns.dtx: + Removed surplus \space in error message + Use new warning and error commands. + + * proc.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr with \ClassError{proc}. + Replaced \@@warning with \ClassWarningNoLine{proc}. + Added \Finale in documentation. + + * ltpictur.dtx: + Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Use old spacing rules of font warnings so that test suite + isn't complaining. + +1994-05-22 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * usrguide.tex: Rewrote description of the new argument to + \newcommand. + Added section on classes and packages, on package options, and on + standard classes and packages. + Added some examples. + Added filecontents* and paragraph on what files can be sent. + Added section on latexsym in `old commands'. + Rewrote some stuff on 2.09 documents. + Added section on \frontmatter, \mainmatter and \backmatter. + Wrote `problems' section, including new error messages, stuff on + \tenrm and friends, old versions of files, and submitting a bug + report. + Added overview. + + * lterror.dtx: Replaced braces with begingroup, to stop mathords + from sneaking into math mode. + Replaced \@generic@message and \@generic@error by \GenericError, + \GenericWarning and \GenericInfo. + Made \GenericError, \GenericWarning and \GenericInfor robust. + Replaced \\ and ~ by \MessageBreak and \space. + Replaced \string by \protect in some messages. + +1994-05-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: new style \protect code in \changes. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Define \aalph as there are currently more than 26 + files included into source2e.tex. + New style \cmd and \cs so Alan can go \cmd\{ in ltoutenc. + +1994-05-21 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * doc.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * ltxref.dtx: + Don't produce line number when warning about multiple labels + (would be the line number from the aux file). + Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning. + + * ltbibl.dtx: + Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning. + + * lttab.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * ltsect.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + Replaced \@@warning by \@latex@warning@no@line. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * ltfiles.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + Replaced \@warning by \@latex@warning@no@line; again line numbers + do not make much sense in this file. + + * ltlists.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * lhyphen.dtx: + Fixed checksum. + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): + Fixed wrong \changes entry. + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): + Fixed wrong \changes entry. + +1994-05-21 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltnews01.tex: Wrote 1st draft of LaTeX News #1. + + * lterror.dtx: Made \@generic@message robust. + +1994-05-20 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * vtl2e06.tlg: Update for new \protect handling, change in + format of error messages, change in glue for framed boxes. + + * vlatex06.tlg: Update for new \protect handling, change in + format of error messages, change in glue for framed boxes. + + * ltpage.dtx (\marboth, \markright): Changed setting for + \protect. + + * tl2e7.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tl2e2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlb0427.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlb0027a.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlb0027b.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tlb0018.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vtl2e05.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vtl2e04.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vtl2e03.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vtl2e02.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vlatex05.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vlatex04.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vlatex03.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * vlatex02.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * tnfss2.tlg: Update for new \protect handling. + + * ltsect.dtx (\addtocontents): Correct setting of \protect. + + * ltsect.dtx (\addcontentsline): Correct setting of \protect. + + * ltmiscen.dtx (\@writefile): Added correct setting of \protect. + + * ltfloat.dtx (\@xfloat): Restore @nobreak switch inside float + to default value false. + + * ltoutput.dtx (\@outputpage): Added setting of \protect during + \shipout. + +1994-05-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx : + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + Replaced \@@warning by \@latex@warning@no@line. + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * newlfont.dtx: + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * lfonts.dtx: + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * latint.dtx: + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + Replaced \font@log by \@font@info. + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * fam.dtx: + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + Replaced \font@log by \@font@info. + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Replaced \font@warning by \@font@warning. + Replaced \font@log by \@font@info. + Replaced \@latexerr by \@latex@error. + Use new generic error commands. + +1994-05-20 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lterror.dtx: Fixed a bug with \@inmatherr. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Corrected checksum. + + * lterror.dtx: Added \@latex@info@no@line. + Added missing full stops. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Renamed @checkcommand to CheckCommand. + + * latex209.dst: Added t1enc.sty. + + * latex209.dtx: Changed \@finalstrut. + Added t1enc.sty. + +1994-05-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: use \maxdimen not 9999p in \showoutput. + + * test2e.tex: add test2e.cfg for customisation (suggested by + Rainer) + +1994-05-19 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tlb0109.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * tlb0063.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * vtl2e03.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * vtl2e02.tlg: Change in definition of \TeX logo. + + * vtl2e01.tlg: Change in format of error messages, change in + definition of \TeX logo. + + * tltx002.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * vlatex03.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * vlatex02.tlg: Change in definition of \TeX logo. + + * vlatex01.tlg: Change in format of error messages, change in + definition of \TeX logo. + + * tltc002.tlg: Change in format of error messages. + + * source2e.tex: Changed according to split in files. + + * manifest.l2e: Changed according to split in files. + + * unpack2e.ins: Changed according to split in files. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Added definitions for \@namedef and \@nameuse + again. + + * ltcntlen.dtx: Split into ltcounts.dtx (counters), ltpageno.dtx + (page numbering), ltxref.dtx (cross referencing), ltlength.dtx + (lengths). + + * ltidxbib.dtx: Split into ltidxglo.dtx (index and glossary) and + ltbibl.dtx (bibliography commands). + + * tlb0268.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlb0077.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * vtl2e01.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tl2e1.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlxs04a.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlxs02.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlxs01p.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tltx001.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * vlatex05.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for + compatibility mode. + + * vlatex04.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for + compatibility mode. + + * vlatex03.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for + compatibility mode. + + * vlatex02.tlg: Strut in footnotes back to old version for + compatibility mode. + + * vlatex01.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tnfss1.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlcs02.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tlcs01b.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear. + + * tltc001.tlg: Change in test2e setup causes box printout to + reappear, strut in footnotes back to old version for + compatibility mode. + +1994-05-18 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tnfss4.tlg: With new handling of changes to font size and + \baselinestretch the tracefnt messages are slightly different. + + * tl2e4.tlg: With new handling of changes to font size and + \baselinestretch the tracefnt messages are slightly different. + + * vtl2e02.tlg: New definitions for LaTeX and SLiTeX logos now + active, change in writing of robust commands, change in glue for + framed boxes. + + * vlatex02.tlg: New definitions for LaTeX and SLiTeX logos now + active, change in writing of robust commands, change in glue for + framed boxes. + + * tl2e7.tlg: Updated for new values of \sfcode and correct + \hbar accent. + + * tl2e7.lvt: Replace package t1enc by fontenc, added a space. + Added space after number to prevent too much expansion. + + * vtl2e01.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes causes blank + line to disappear. + +1994-05-18 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added \@finalstrut. + + * ltlogos.dtx: Added the TeX logo. + Made the LaTeX2e logo use the text font 2 rather than the math + font 2. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Fixed a typo with fontenc.sty... it's + \encodingdefault, not \defaultencoding! + + * ltfinal.dtx: Corrected the lccode for d-bar. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Made \.i produce i. + +1994-05-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Modify \@use@option so Alan can use + \OptionNotUsed within the code for a declared option. + +1994-05-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * tl2e7.lvt: Corrected: \documentstyle --> \documentclass. + + * tlb0039.tlg: Removed \usepage{t1ot1}. + + * tlb0039.lvt: Removed \usepage{t1ot1}. + + * latint.dtx: Added missing \let in \@no@font@optfalse, added + \ProvidesFile and \GetFileInfo. + + * tlb0438.tlg: Updated for \every@size now working correctly. + + * vlatex07.tlg: Change in strut for array/tabular parboxes and + footnotes. + + * vtl2e07.tlg: Change in strut for array/tabular parboxes and + footnotes. + + * vlatex05.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in + writing of robust commands, change in glue for framed boxes. + + * vtl2e05.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in + writing of robust commands, change in glue for framed boxes. + + * vlatex03.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in glue + for framed boxes. + + * vlatex04.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes. + + * tltx001.tlg: Change in glue for framed boxes, change in args + to \@ifstar, change in colorendbox. + + * tl2e3.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes. + + * vtl2e03.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes, change in glue + for framed boxes. + + * vtl2e04.tlg: Change in strut for footnotes. + + * tlb0202.tlg: Change in expansion of accent macros. + + * tltc001.tlg: Change in glue for framed boxes, change in args + to \@ifstar, change in colorendbox. + +1994-05-17 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: An underscore character with catcode 12 in math + mode produced an error since the active underscore was \let to + \_ before the latter was defined. \global\let replaced by \gdef. + +1994-05-17 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lfonts.dtx: + Added extra braces to \copyright. + Added extra braces to \nfss@text (allow direct use in subscript). + +1994-05-17 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lterror.dtx: Moved error commands from ltdefns.dtx. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Added section on \protect. Moved error commands to + lterror.dtx. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Removed braces from \$ since they're now in + nfss@text. + + * latex209.dtx: Fixed a bug with \ds@newlfont. + Removed extra spaces from the missing file error. + Commented out bezier with \iffalse...\fi rather than %% to avoid + bezier turning up in every file. + Corrected some documentation. + +1994-05-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Use \DeclareRobustCommand to define \ensuremath, + and add extra braces so a_\ensuremath{foo} works. + + * ltoutput.dtx: Add \color@begingroup to protect \normalcolor. + move \normalcolor out of the inner box. + +1994-05-16 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Added batch file ltoutenc.ins. + + * ltoutenc.dst: Capitalize encoding names. + +1994-05-16 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for the user}): + Removed surplus braces from robust command \linespread. + Pass \baselinestretch not \f@linespread in \fontsize. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: + \DeclareTextCommand now uses specified encoding again in + top-level part. + Encoding files now use mixed case names, eg OT1enc.def + (subsection{Definitions for the OT1 encoding}): + Added extra braces in def of \$. + + * ltplain.dtx: + Changed \loop ...\repeat to use Kabelschacht method (TUB 8#2) + Comment out encoding specific commands which are defined by + ltoutenc.dtx. + + * ltoutput.dtx: + Use \let to get original defs of accents back in output routine. + + * ltfinal.dtx: + Removed loading of ot1enc.sty (not longer available). + Moved definitions of \@acci and friends to lfonts.dtx. + + * lfonts.dtx (subsection{Miscellaneous}): + Define saved versions of accents (\@acci and friends) here. + + * fontdef.dtx (subsection{Encodings}): + Declare default encoding first. + Load encoding specific files for OT1 and T1. + +1994-05-16 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcntrl.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltcounts.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltdefns.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * lterror.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltlogos.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltpar.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltspace.dtx: Split file from ltinit.dtx. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Removed \P, since it's not in the T1 encoding. + Added \r and \k accents. + Added \NG, \ng, \TH, \th, \DH, \dh, \DJ and \dj. + + * latex209.dtx: Fixed a bug with \mediumseries. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Redid fontenc.sty to use the new mixed-case + encoding files. + Fixed a bug with \pounds. + + * latex209.dtx: Fixed a bug with the margid option. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Removed ot1enc.sty. + +1994-05-15 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lfonts.dtx: + \$ and \pdollar removed since now part of encoding cmds. + \pounds and \ppounds ditto. + + * fam.dtx: + Names of encoding commands changed to \<enc>-cmd. + +1994-05-15 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Added the nomargid and margid options. + +1994-05-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ifthen.dtx: Add \TE@repl, to make \or safe in \equal. + +1994-05-14 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fontdef.dtx (subsection{Encodings}): + Don't input .def files in encoding declarations. + + * fam.dtx (section{Macros for setting up the tables}): + Init the encoding change macro only for new \DeclareFontEncoding. + Log redeclarations of font encodings. + (subsection{Macros for the user}): + Added missing \noexpand to \enc@update. + Initialise all \f@... macros with \@empty. + (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + Don't change \f@encoding in \DeclareErrorFont. Removed + definitions for \makeatletter and \@input etc. since they are not + longer necessary. + + * lfonts.dtx (subsection{Miscellaneous}): + Removed surplus braces within \normalfont. + Added \DeclareErrorFont. + + * unpack2e.ins (IMPORTANT NOTICE): + Moved ltoutenc.dtx before ltfss.dtx since ltfss needs parts of the + code. + + * tracefnt.dtx (section{Macros common to \texttt{fam.tex} and + \texttt{tracefnt.sty}}): Added \enc@update to selectfont. + + * fam.dtx (section{Macros for setting up the tables}): + Initialise \<enc>@cmd in \DeclareFontEncoding. + (subsection{Macros for the user}): + Added \enc@update to \fontencoding. Thus now encoding updates are + deferred until the following \selectfont (as they should). One + action of \enc@update is to update \<enc>@cmd for the old and the + new encoding. + +1994-05-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Renamed \ENC@cmd to \ENC-cmd, to avoid collisions + with commands like \U@cmd. + + * ltoutenc.dst: Updated the dst file to match ltoutenc.dtx. + + * latex209.dtx: Redid the oldlfont and newlfont options to set the + \@no@font@optfalse flag. + + * fontsmpl.dtx: Split font sample document and package out of + ltoutenc. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Stopped commands declared with DeclareTextWidget + from going into an infinite loop if f@encoding isn't the current + encoding. + Added fontenc package. + Made ot1enc.def and t1enc.def files rather than packages. + + * latex209.dtx: Changed how 2e commands are switched off. + Removed the date from the announcement of 2.09 mode. + +1994-05-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lfonts.dtx: remove file identification typeout. + + * latint.dtx: remove file identification typeout. + + * setsize.dtx: remove file identification typeout. + + * tracefnt.dtx: remove file identification typeout. + + * fam.dtx: remove file identification typeout. + + * lttab.dtx: Remove definition of \a \a' etc. Now in + ltoutenc.dtx + + * ltboxes.dtx: New accent handling in parboxrestore. + + * newlfont.dtx: \DeclareProtectedCommand now + \DeclareRobustCommand + + * oldlfont.dtx: \DeclareProtectedCommand now + \DeclareRobustCommand + + * ltpictur.dtx: Removed unnecessary braces from \@ifnextchar and + \@ifstar constructions. + + * ltclass.dtx: Stop \listfiles being run twice, (A second + occurrence in the preamble is silently ignored) + + * lttab.dtx: Add colour support to tabbing macros. + Use \@finalstrut in @endpbox. + + * ltfloat.dtx: Add colour support (back again:-) to + \@footnotetext. Safe this time, using \normalcolor in an inner + group, leaving \reset@font\footnotesize in an outer group so + that \split... get set correctly. Also use \@finalstrut, and + remove some superfluous braces. + Add \normalcolor to \@xfloat, so floats do not pick up the + current colour. + +1994-05-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Use \@input@ for .fd files so that they show up with + \listfiles. + + * ltfntcmd.dtx: + Replaced \@protecteddef by \DeclareRobustCommand. + + * fontcmds.dtx: + File renamed to ltfntcmd.dtx. + + * unpack2e.ins: + Added Welcome message. + Update kernel generation. + + * ltsect.dtx: + Added file identification string. + + * ltpictur.dtx: + Added file identification string. + + * ltcntlen.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Removed \@Ialph and \@ialph since they neither save space + nor execution time. + + * ltfiles.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Execute \every@size hook at begin document. + + * ltvers.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Added \endinput at the end. This is necessary for running + unpack2e.ins. + Use \fmtname in \everyjob and welcome message. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Change \DeclareProtectedCommand to \DeclareRobustCommand. + + * lfonts.dtx: + Change \DeclareProtectedCommand to \DeclareRobustCommand. + + * fam.dtx: + Change \DeclareProtectedCommand to \DeclareRobustCommand. + +1994-05-13 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: Added \@backslashchar. + Improved coding of \@ifdefinable. + + * testdist.dtx: Improved documentation. + + * emtex.l2e: Created this file. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Loaded package ot1enc, and defined \@acci and + friends. + + * ltinit.dtx: Added logging to DeclareProtectedCommand. + + * ltoutenc.dtx: Renamed accents.dtx to ltoutenc.dtx. + After all these months It's now a real bit of kernel! :-) + + * accents.dtx: Replaces \space by ` ' in csname. + + * ltinit.dtx: Replaced \space by ` ' in \csname + + * accents.dtx: Added \{, \} and \$. + + * ltinit.dtx: Renamed DeclareProtectedCommand to + DeclareRobustCommand. + Moved DeclareRobustCommand after @gobble. + Removed @if@short@command. + Removed \{ and \}. + + * accents.dtx: Redid all the kernel commands. Made t1.def and + ot1.def into t1enc.sty and ot1enc.sty. + +1994-05-12 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: + Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the + version number. + (section{A driver for this document}): + A missing \begin{macrocode} line caused LaTeX to loop and complain + about \begin{document} only being allowed in the preamble. + Wrapped a number of long lines to prevent overfull hbox messages + and fixed improper nesting of macro and macrocode environments. + + * letter.dtx: + Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the + version number. + (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): + Made running heads the same for odd and even pages in twoside + mode. + +1994-05-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * amsfonts.dst: Remove generation of the drv file. + + * amsfonts.fdd: Add \ProvidesFile comments to all the files + generated. + + * slides.fdd: Add \ProvidesFile comments to all the files + generated. + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Add early definition of \ProvidesFile, + so fd files read at initex time work OK. + Add `v' to \changes entries. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Add \ProvidesFile comments to all the files + generated. + + * newlfont.dtx: \DeclareProtectedCommand to define \em. Remove + the definitions of \prm and friends. + + * oldlfont.dtx: use \DeclareProtectedCommand to define \rm and + friends. Also use \normalfont rather than \reset@font. + +1994-05-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx: Added \normalcolor to the output routine just + before the head and foot are placed. Needed now color.sty does + not redefine \reset@font. + + * ltboxes.dtx: merged \fbox and \framebox. + Defined \@finalstrut (used in \@mpfootnotetext) + Defined \normalcolor (\let to \relax) + +1994-05-12 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * tracefnt.dtx: + New \baselinestretch concept. + Added some tracing again that was incorrectly removed. + Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem + less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs. + Defined all robust commands vi \DeclareProtectedCommand. + + * lfonts.dtx: + Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem + less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs. + Defined all robust commands vi \DeclareProtectedCommand. + + * fam.dtx: + New \baselinestretch concept. + Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem + less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs. + Defined all robust commands vi \DeclareProtectedCommand. + + * latint.dtx: + Allow commands to be \let to \relax in the argument of + \DeclareMathSymbol, etc. So far only undefined commands + or commands of the right type (eg mathchars) were + allowed. + Ensure that ltfss can be processed with main mem + less than 65000 by adding macrocode envs. + +1994-05-12 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: Fixed a bug with DeclareProtectedCommand. + +1994-05-11 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx: + Changed some \changes entries to have a 'v' in front of the + version number. + +1994-05-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: Superfluous braces removed from several commands + + * ltclass.dtx: modify filecontents environment so that ctrl-L + and ctrl-I are written as a blank line and space respectively. + A warning is given if either of these translations takes + place, using a devious use of \@ifundefined. + +1994-05-11 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: Moved the logos to after \DeclareProtectedCommand. + Defined them using \DeclareProtectedCommand. + Made the SLiTeX logo use the TeX logo. + Made \, and \hspace use \DeclareProtectedCommand. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Added %%% ltfinal.dtx line. + + * ltinit.dtx: Added %%% ltinit.dtx line. + + * latex209.dst: Added dummy bezier.sty. + + * latex209.dtx: Added dummy bezier.sty. + +1994-05-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Slight change in text of error message for + \verb in command argument. + +1994-05-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: Added documentation sent by DPC. + Moved \makeatletter and \maketother into ltinit. + Added extra ^^Js to \@latexerr. + Removed a couple of spurious braces. + +1994-05-09 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontcmds.dtx: Temporary fix: Make sure that \next is not + dangerously \let to \relax. + + * exscale.dtx: + Added code for scaling of \big... delimiters. + +1994-05-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Changed error message to fit linewidth. + + * latint.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Added test to \newmathalphabet to produce an error if + used in old 209 sources without explicit newlfont or oldlfont + option. (New compatibility concept) + + * oldlfont.dtx (section{The Code}): + Setting of \math@bgroup and \math@egroup outside latex209 + part. (New compatibility concept) + + * fontcmds.dtx: + Replaced use of \next by \@let@token and undid temp fix 3.3e. + +1994-05-08 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fontcmds.dtx: + +1994-05-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * exscale.dtx: Changed to conform to new documentation + standard. + + * euscript.dtx: Changed to conform to new documentation + standard. + + * eufrak.dtx: Changed to conform to new documentation + standard. + + * eufrak.dst: Removed generation of .drv file. + +1994-05-08 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: + Moved definition of \GetFileInfo to doc.dtx. + + * doc.dtx (subsection{GetFileInfo}): + Moved definition of \GetFileInfo into this file. + + * ltthm.dtx: + Added file identification string. + +1994-05-08 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * somedefs.dtx: Produced v0.01. + + * rawfonts.dtx: Produced v0.01, using somedefs.dtx. + +1994-05-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx: + Added file identification string. + Changed \@firsttab and \@maxtab from counters to chardefs. + Removed surplus {} in \@ifnextchar and \@ifstar constructs. + Removed plain TeX definition of \+ + +1994-05-06 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (subsubsection{Itemize}): + Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in second level list label. + (subsubsection{Description}): + Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in \descriptionlabel + Modified the documentation to use doc's `environment' environment + when documenting new environments. + (subsubsection{Vertical spacing}): + Added the setting of \maxdepth and \@maxdepth. + + * slides.dtx: + Modified the documentation to use doc's `environment' environment + when documenting new environments. + (subsubsection{Vertical spacing}): + Added the setting of \maxdepth and \@maxdepth. + + * classes.dtx (subsection{The title}): + Now check whether we are in the first or second column in + twocolumn mode. + (subsubsection{Vertical spacing}): + Added the setting of \maxdepth and \@maxdepth. + (subsubsection{Itemize}): + Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in second level list label. + (subsubsection{Description}): + Inserted \normalfont before \bfseries in \descriptionlabel + +1994-05-05 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltidxbib.dtx: Do not write page number in \nocite warning + message. Set switch for warning and end of run. + +1994-05-05 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * preload.dtx: + Added some explanation about the need to have the encoding + predeclared as well. + +1994-05-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Added empty \errhelp. + +1994-05-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Changed the wording of the warning in + \NeedsTeXFormat. + + * ltinit.dtx: added patch (from Frank) + @badcrerr error message removed + +1994-05-04 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latint.dtx: + Renamed \@@DeclareMathDelimiter to \@xDeclareMathDelimiter + +1994-05-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: add \@break@tfor + Remove many superfluous braces around arguments of \@ifnextchar + and \@ifstar. + + * source2e.tex: allow full indexing on \@latexerr \@warning, and + \@tempboxa and friends. + + * ltfiles.dtx: add \@onlypreamble\@obsoletefile + remove some obsolete code which was previously commented out. + rename \@break@loop to \@break@tfor, and move its definition to + ltinit. + + * tlb0203.lvt: new test file for \@tfor bug. + +1994-05-03 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltidxbib.dtx: Make \nocite issue a warning for an undefined + citation key. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Corrected setting catcode for ctrl-j. + + * amsfonts.fdd: Removed definitions for AMS-supplied cm fonts. + + * cmfonts.fdd: Included definitions for AMS-supplied cm fonts. + +1994-05-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + \@badcrerr replaced by \@nolnerr. + + * ltinit.dtx: + \@badcrerr error message removed. + +1994-05-03 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Set the catcode of ^^J to other. + + Removed \@undefinedfonterror. + +1994-05-02 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltoutput.dtx (subsubsection{Float control}): + + Shortened code of \@resethfps. + + Corrected info message code. + + * fontcmds.dtx: + +1994-05-02 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Redid the method of switching off 2e commands. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Set all the catcodes before dumping. Made 127 + illegal. + + * install.l2e: Added yandytex.l2e + + * accents.dtx: Rewrote almost everything from scratch. + + * yandytex.l2e: Installed a file from Berthold + + Corrected \@fontswitch. + +1994-05-01 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx (subsection{Floating Environments}): + + Added \@largefloatcheck. + + Removed unnecessary braces from arguments of \@ifnextchar. + +1994-05-01 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dst: + Removed line left over from the driver generation. + + * slides.dtx (subsection{The class code}): + Removed the use of variables to store the version information. + Added \ProvidesFile to slides.def + + * letter.dtx (section{Identification}): + Removed the use of variables to store the version information. + + * classes.dtx (section{Identification}): + Removed the use of variables to store the version information. + + * proc.dtx (subsection{Identification}): + Removed the use of variables to store the version information. + + * makeindx.dtx (subsection{Identification}): + Removed the use of variables to store the version information. + +1994-04-30 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: + + Added latexinfo commands. + + * fontcmds.dtx: + + Changed prefix in \@protecteddef from frag@ to frag. + Changed warning therein to an info message. + + Removed long lines. + + Changed to, eg, v1.0l. + + * ltoutput.dtx: + + Rogue space removed. + + Cut-off points for adding \@emptycol changed. + + Empty column action added: \@emptycol. + + Full of floats action improved. + + Changed `active characters warning' to an info message. + + (subsection{Floats}): + + Changed wording of some error messages. + + Changed 9* to 199* in dates. + + Fixed bug from \dblfigrule with \@topnewpage. + + Removed long lines. + + Changed to, eg, v1.0l. +1994-04-29 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * letter.dtx (section{Identification}): + Use the generic name LaTeX instead of LaTeX2e in the arguments of + \ProvidesClass and removed typeout message. + +1994-04-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx: use `v' in \changes entries. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Update the documentation. (source2e now has an + index by default.) + + * ltclass.dtx: upgrade version to 1 (no other change, except + using `v' in \changes entries in to match the other kernel + files.) + + * test2e.tex: reset the original \showbox parameters. (As + ltplain now sets them to -1) + +1994-04-28 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Table of Contents}): + Changed the definitions of \l@part, \l@chapter and \l@section + (article only) to check the value of tocdepth. : + (section{Identification}): + Use the generic name LaTeX instead of LaTeX2e in the arguments of + \ProvidesClass and \ProvidesFile + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Two-side or one-side printing}): + Allow the twoside option in native mode; introduced oneside + option. + (subsubsection{Defining the page styles}): + Changed the definition of the pagestyles plain and empty to also + define the head and feet for even pages; Added different + definition for pagestyle headings when twoside is in effect. + (subsection{The generic letter commands}): + A letter has to start on a `right' page when in twosided mode. + +1994-04-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphpap.dtx: Leslie's \graphpaper macros, Converted to + ignore spaces between arguments, and documented using doc. + + * ltxdoc.dtx: add \parg for picture mode args. + + * ltpictur.dtx (subsection{Curves}): added \bezier and \qbezier + (section{Picture Mode}): Modified \picture \multiput and \bezier + so that they ignore spaces between arguments. + (section{Picture Mode}): made \circle use \@inmatherr + +1994-04-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx (section{Plain \TeX}): + Turn off overrfull box tracing in trancript file. + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Bells and whistles}): + Ignore \Finale without \StopEventually. + + * latint.dtx: + Removed \uppercase from all counter assignments dealing possibly + with hex numbers. That means that + \DeclareMathSymbol{m}{\mathord}{operators}{"6d} + doesn't work any longer (must be "6D now). + On the other hand + \DeclareMathSymbol{m}{\mathord}{operators}{`m} + although we would suggest to use at least `\m + + * ltlists.dtx: + Replaced the warning \@ltxnomath by \@inmatherr. + + * ltinit.dtx (section{Initex initialisations}): + Added error macro \@inmatherr#1 to be issued by commands + that will not work in math mode (like (\circle)) + + * doc.dtx (subsection{Redefining the \textsf{index} environment}): + Use \RequirePackage to input multicol. + +1994-04-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: Remove extra full stops from the ends of some + error messages. + +1994-04-25 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + message changed to "\verb ended by end of line" + +1994-04-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltpage.dtx: + Redefine \@leftmark and \@rightmark to use \@firstoftwo + and \@secondoftwo. + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): + We do warn now if \sl or \sc is found in math + (not that they should be used at all. + + * ltpictur.dtx: + Removed surplus spaces after "\hbox to " in several cases. + +1994-04-23 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx (subsection{Font loading}): + Checked the value of \font@submax. If greater 0pt issue a + bold warning and reset it to 0pt. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: + \verb error messages reworded. + +1994-04-22 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx: + Replaced width, height, depth by \@wifth, \@height, \@depth. + + * latint.dtx: + Replace the use of \@leftmark with \@firstoftwo. + Moved \@tempdimc to ltinit.dtx. + + * ltinit.dtx: + Moved all \@gobble... macros to this file. + + * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}): + Messages generated by \enddocument reworded. + +1994-04-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx (section{\LaTeX\ Box commands}): add colour + support to minipage. add comments throughout the file. + + * source2e.tex: modify to always print the index and change + history, no longer need to use ltxdoc.cfg to get the index. + +1994-04-21 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * newlfont.dtx: + Changed message "Don't use ..." to "Command \foo invalid in math mode". + + * lfonts.dtx: + Changed message "Don't use ..." to "Command \foo invalid in math mode". + + * fam.dtx: + Changed message "Don't use ..." to "Command \foo invalid in math mode". + Changed \errmessage's to \@latexerr's. + +1994-04-21 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.l2e: Corrected the wording of the bug report. + + * ltfinal.dtx: Added some documentation, incorporated ltcodes.dtx. + This now includes setting the catcodes of 128--255 to `illegal'. + +1994-04-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * features.tex: New name for dircheck. + Improve description of package option names. Modify + description of dtx extension (as they may now be directly + processed by LaTeX. + \@filename@parse typo corrected to \filename@parse. + +1994-04-20 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + Added the global flag \ifG@fontsubs. This will be set to true + when automatic font substitution happened. + + * ltmiscen.dtx (subsection{Environments}): + Moved the warning messages in \enddocument so that they will appear in + succession. Also ensure that the aux file is always read so that toc etc. + will be correctly produced even in case of multiple labels. + Query \ifG@fontsubs and issue a warning in \enddocument when set to true. + Also check if size substitution has happened and issue a warning if it + is greater than \fontsubfuzz. + +1994-04-20 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Redefined \verbatim@noligs@list. + +1994-04-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltpage.dtx Improve documentation. + +1994-04-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfinal.dtx: Use catcode15 not catcode13 for control chars. + Initialise \textwidth \textheight and page style. + + * ltfloat.dtx: removed colour support from \@footnotetext and + \@savemarbox. The `simple' extra groups that had been added + cause incorrect spacing. More complicated modifications + required for colour support will be done in color.sty. + +1994-04-18 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latint.dtx: + Removed surplus definition of \no@alphabet@error (see fam.dtx entry). + Corrected an error in \DeclareMathAlphabet M@#3 -> M@#2. + Added a missing % in \SetMathAlphabet@. + Changed two error message helps still containing \documentstyle. :-) + Changed all "Redeclaring something..." messages to log only infos. + Changed "Check substitution defaults ..." message to "Checking defaults ..." + + * fam.dtx: + Changed message "Calculating math sizes ..." to appear only in + transcript file. + \no@alphabet@error reimplemented to be LaTeX err message. + \no@alphabet@help removed. + + * tracefnt.dtx: + Changed line breaks and wording in some messages. + Removed surplus "." from some warning messages. + All warning/error messages changed to start "LaTeX Font Warning" etc. + Continuation lines are changed to "(Font)". + + * tracefnt.dtx (section{Scaled font extraction}): + Removed dimen regs \fontsubfuzz and \fontsubmax and replaced them + by macros \fontsubfuzz and \font@submax. + +1994-04-18 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * web2ctex.l2e: Changed name from unixtex.l2e. Changed the + example shell script to look for a LATEX209INPUTS environment + variable. + + * install.l2e: Changed name of unixtex.l2e to + web2ctex.l2e. + + * latint.dtx: Changed \font@warning to \font@log for redefining + math alphabets and symbol fonts. + +1994-04-17 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltcntlen.dtx: + Use new std counter error message \@nocounterr. + + * ltthm.dtx: + Use new std counter error message \@nocounterr. + + * ltinit.dtx: + Defined \@nocounterr to be the LaTeX2e error command with one + argument that announces unknown counters. Changed \@nocnterr + back to no-arg syntax for compatibility with old styles making + use of that error message. \@nocnterr should not be used by + new LaTeX2e applications. + +1994-04-15 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * proc.dtx: Adding missing guard /class, this produced + incorrect proc.sty. + + * ltboxes.dtx: Added missing % character in definition of + \@isavebox. + +1994-04-14 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): + \@renewfontswitch has gone; \@newfontswitch has become + \DeclareOldFontCommand + + * letter.dtx (subsection{Font changing}): + \@renewfontswitch has gone; \@newfontswitch has become + \DeclareOldFontCommand + + * classes.dtx (subsection{Fonts}): + The size changing commands are no longer defined in the + kernel. Use \newcommand instead of \renewcommand. + (subsection{Font changing}): + \@renewfontswitch has gone; \@newfontswitch has become + \DeclareOldFontCommand + + * oldgerm.dtx: + Renamed \@newtextcmd to \DeclareTextFontCommand + + * fontcmds.dtx: + Renamed \@newtextcmd to \DeclareTextFontCommand and + \@newfontswitch to \DeclareOldFontCommand as agreed in Warwick. + +1994-04-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: fix to pagestyle in change log. + +1994-04-14 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latexbug.tex: Changed the prompt for `a list of files' to a + prompt for a single filename. Made latexbug look to see if it + could find the file, and if it can, it includes the file and the + logfile in the latexbug.msg. + +1994-04-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx: Add definition of \@dischyph (was in ltboxes). + + * ltboxes.dtx: Remove redefinition \@acci-iii. (now defined in + ltplain). Remove definition of \@dischyph (now in ltinit). + + * ltplain.dtx: define \' \` \= in terms of \@acci-iii. + Use NFSS font commands in \ttraggedright and \proclaim. + +1994-04-12 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * manifest.l2e: Changes according to splitting of kernel. + + * ltvers.dtx: Have Expansion of \fmtversion (version info) + generated automatically. + + * accdefs.dtx: Removed definitions of accent macros \' \` \= + as these are in the kernel. + +1994-04-12 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * oztex.l2e: Added warning that lines are > 80 chars + +1994-04-11 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Titlepage}): + Removed bug introduced by inserting \cleardoublepage in the wrong + place. + + Checked the file for long lines and wrapped them. + + LL introduced options openright and openany fot the report and + book classes. + + LL introduced commands \frontmatter, \mainmatter and \backmatter + to the book class. + +1994-04-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx: add * form of filecontents environment. + Protect \ProvidesFile against space and / having strange + catcodes. + + * ltinit.dtx: remove setting of errorcontextlines in \@latexerr + remove old definition of the \LaTeX logo. + + * source2e.tex: minor improvements (mainly to the comments) + + * ltthm.dtx: use new style \@nocnterr (diff from Frank, dated + 1994/04/09) + +1994-04-11 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx: Added `defaultscriptratio and + `defaultscriptscriptratio. + + * latex209.dtx: Switched off `enlargethispage and the `!' float + option. + +1994-04-10 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * install.l2e: Split the installation guide into install.l2e, + texpert.l2e, and system-specific oztex.l2e and unixtex.l2e files. + + * template.l2e: Created a template for system.l2e files. + +1994-04-09 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltherest.dtx: + Use standard counter missing error message for \newtheorem. + + * ltcntlen.dtx: + Use \setcounter in \stepcounter to have counter name checked. + Change usage of \@nocnterr to have counter name as argument. + + * ltinit.dtx: + Change default err message to point to the LaTeX manual or + LaTeX companion. + +1994-04-05 Alan Jeffrey <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * latex209.dtx: Switched off `lrbox, `width, `height and `depth in + 2.09 mode. + + Removed optional arguments to `parbox, `minipage and `newcommand. + + Made `ProvidesPackage and `ProvidesClass produce log entries + rather than warnings. + + Removed `filedate. + +1994-03-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: Minor improvements. + + * manifest.l2e: update this file with all the new file names. + + * source2e.tex: update this file with all the new file names. + + * unpack2e.ins: update this file with all the new file names. + + * ltherest.dtx: The only thing left in this file is the old + definition of \documentstyle and \@options, which are + redefined in ltclass.dtx. This file is now removed. + + * ltpage.dtx: Create file. Page style + \raggedbottom \sloppy + etc. Taken from ltherest.dtx. + + * ltidxbib.dtx: create file. index and bibliography stuff from + ltherest.dtx. + +1994-03-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltcntlen.dtx: create file. Contains counter and length macros. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: remove counter macros. + +1994-03-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfloat.dtx: create file by removing sectioning commands from + ltherest.dtx + Use \normalsize in \@caption in place of \@normalsize. + + * ltsect.dtx: create file by removing sectioning commands from + ltherest.dtx. + + * ltthm.dtx: create file by removing theorem environment from + ltherest.dtx. + + * lttab.dtx: Improve documentation, mainly making sure that + \changes entries are not in the scope of `oldcomments'. + + * ltlists.dtx: Improve documentation, mainly making sure that + \changes entries are not in the scope of `oldcomments'. + + * ltmiscen.dtx: Improve documentation, mainly making sure that + \changes entries are not in the scope of `oldcomments'. + + * ltfiles.dtx: remove \@normalsize test from \document. Use + \normalsize instead of \@normalsize. + + * ltinit.dtx: Remove redefinition of \newcount and friends as + version in ltplain.dtx is no longer \outer. + Comment out the experimental version of \@bsphack. + + Remove test for \cs{inputlineno} undefined as it is + defined in ltplain.dtx + + * ltplain.dtx: remove \outer from \newskip \newdimen \newwrite + and \newfam. Also comment out the definition of the `log like' + operators. (This does not alter the format, as they were + previously redefined by later files.) + + * ltdirchk.dtx: Improve documentation. (Removal of comments + refering to obsolete versions of the file.) + +1994-03-25 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * source2e.tex: fix date to be \fmtversion, and add authors. + + * ltxdoc.dtx (section{DocInclude}): Use \part to separate the + individual file sections. + + * Started Keeping Change log in GNU format. All entries below + this point, have been converted from the LaTeX/doc \changes + log. + +1994-03-16 Braams J.L. <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * proc.dtx: + Removed the use of \wlog and included \fileversion in the optional + argument of \ProvidesClass + + * slides.dtx: + Removed the \typeout lines since they are no longer needed. + + * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}): + Inserted missing hash mark in the code for the spanish option. + +1994-03-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltfiles.dtx v1.0c \document (DPC) directly add file list + settings + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3f \listfiles Move this code directly into + \document + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3f "General" Add pkgindoc package + +1994-03-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0c "General" Add \NeedsTeXFormat + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3e \@missingfileerror Quit on x or X just like + a real error + + * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Removed defs of short-forms and + all sizes except \normalize + + * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Removed \@renewfontswitch + + * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Changed \/ to \@@italiccorr + + * fontcmds.dtx v3.2a "General" Adapted to mass formatting + +1994-03-15 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * varioref.dtx (subsection{Options}): + Text added for spanish default (Julio Sanchez). + Changed all \extra... to \extras... that was a bug + +1994-03-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \end@float (DPC) Use \color@endgroup + + * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@xfloat (DPC) Use \color@begingroup + + * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@savemarbox (DPC) Use \color@begingroup + + * ltherest.dtx v1.0c \@footnotetext (DPC) Use + \color@begingroup, add \endgraf + + * ltherest.dtx 1.0c \@xympar (DPC) Use \color@begingroup + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \sbox Use \color@begingroup + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \lrbox Use \color@begingroup + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \color@endgroup macro added for colour + support + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \color@begingroup macro added for colour + support + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \@isavepicbox Use \color@begingroup + + * ltboxes.dtx 1.0b \@isavebox Use \color@begingroup + +1994-03-14 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lablst.tex: Added. + + * idx.tex: Added. + +1994-03-14 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx (subsubsection{Margins}): + Shortened calculation for margins. + +1994-03-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltinit.dtx v1.0c \@tfor (DPC) Add \@tf@r so a single group is + correctly treated. + + * ltfiles.dtx 0.3b \InputIfFileExists Use new cmd + \@addtofilelist + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3d \listfiles Reset \@addtofilelist at begin + document + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3d \@addtofilelist Macro added + +1994-03-13 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * docstrip.dtx: + Replaced \if!#2! by \if>#2> in \from to allow negated modules + appearing in this place. + + * doc.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * eufrak.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * euscript.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * latexsym.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * exscale.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * oldgerm.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * varioref.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * pandora.dtx: + Removed \typeout's + + * docstrip.dst: + Corrected unpacking for ltxdoc.cls (change of docstrip module). + + * classes.dtx + (subsubsection{The dimension of text}): + Use same default values for native mode as in old styles. + + (section{Identification}): + Added file versions to the \Provides... commands + + (subsection{Footnotes}): + Use \@makefnmark rather than its expansion in the definition + of \@makefntext. + +1994-03-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx v1.0b "General" Name changed from lplain. The end + of an era + + * ltinit.dtx v1.0b \@yargdef Name changed from \XXX@Argdef + + * ltinit.dtx v1.0b \@reargdef New defn, in terms of \@yargdef + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1b \@xympar (DPC) Extra bgroup for colour + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1b \@savemarbox (DPC) Extra group for colour + + * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0b "General" Minor edits to the typeouts in + ltxcheck + + * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0b "General" Change name from dircheck.dtx + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesPackage use \@gtempa + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesPackage Add \wlog + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \ProvidesFile Add \wlog + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3c "General" Change name from docclass to + ltclass + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3c \@fileswithoptions Do not use + \@pr@videpackage to avoid typeout + +1994-03-12 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * classes.dtx + (section{Identification}): + Removed \typeout statements since this is now handled by + \Provide... + + (subsubsection{Margins}): + New algorithm for calculation \oddsidemargin. + New algorithm for calculating \marginparwidth. + + * unpack2e.ins: + Changed kernel generation using new file names. + +1994-03-11 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: Corrected \@oval, like previous change to + latex.dtx. + + * latint.dtx: \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet: Added check against + use of alphabet switch outside of math mode. + +1994-03-10 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * newlfont.dtx: Changed \math@bgroup/\math@egroup to use + \bgroup/\egroup, to follow the change in fam.dtx. + + * fam.dtx: Changed \math@bgroup/\math@egroup to use + \bgroup/\egroup rather than \begingroup/\endgroup to avoid + leaking out of style changes. Side effect: now always produce + mathord atoms. + + * tlb0320.lvt: Added \showoutput and \scrollmode. + + * manifest.l2e: Added syntonly.dtx, syntonly.ins and + nfssfont.tex. + + * l2extra.dst: Added generation of syntonly package. Removed + generation of .drv file for varioref. + + * syntonly.dst: Added to distribution. + + * syntonly.dtx: Added to distribution. + +1994-03-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltplain.dtx v1.0a "General" Remove need for a driver file. + + * ltdirchk.dtx 1.0a "General" Reorganise driver module into `new + style' + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3b "General" Modify driver code into `new style' + +1994-03-08 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * slides.dtx: Changed \@makefnmark to call \@makefntext rather + that \@thefnmark directly. + + * letter.dtx: Changed \@makefnmark to call \@makefntext rather + that \@thefnmark directly. Changed class to always write an + .aux file, so that, e.g., cross referencing commands work. + + * tl2e4.tlg: Update for new versions of packages latexsym, + newlfont, euscript. + + * tlxs05s.tlg: Update for removal of declared option `twoside' + in slides.dtx. + + * tlcs05s.tlg: Update for removal of declared option `twoside' + in slides.dtx. + + * tlcs01a.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs01b.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs01l.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs01p.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tltc001.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tltc002.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs01r.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs02.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs04a.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs04b.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs04r.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlcs08.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * slides.dtx: Corrected first argument of \IfFileExists for + reading sfonts.cfg: sfonts.def to sfonts.cfg. + + * tnfss1.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tnfss2.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tnfss3.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tnfss4.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tnfss5.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tnfss6.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tl2e5.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlb0014.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex01.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex02.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex03.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex04.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex06.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * vlatex07.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tl2e1.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tl2e2.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tl2e3.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlb0057.tlg: Updated for new filedate (\docdate taken up + from some file). + + * tlb0010.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlb0018.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlb0073.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * tlb0077.tlg: Updated for change in latexsym.dtx (v2.1a --> + v2.1b). + + * fontcmds.dtx: Corrected typo in documentation. + +1994-03-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lttab.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltpictur.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltpictur.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltlists.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltinit.dtx v1.0a "General" (DPC) Removed input of nfsscode.ltx + + * ltinit.dtx v1.0a \@@italiccorr Macro added + + * ltinit.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltinit.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \end@float (DPC) Extra group for colour + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@xfloat (DPC) Extra group for colour + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@settodim (DPC) Extra group for colour + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@hangfrom (DPC)Extra groups for colour + + * ltherest.dtx v0.1a \@footnotetext (DPC) Extra group for colour + + * ltfinal.dtx v0.1a "General" Remove oldcomments environment + + * ltfinal.dtx v0.1a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" use \InputIfFileExists not + \IfFileExists + + * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" move code here from lhyphen.dtx + + * ltfinal.dtx 0.1a "General" Add code from the old dump.dtx + + * ltfiles.dtx v1.0a "General" Long lines wrapped to 72 columns + + * ltfiles.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltboxes.dtx v1.0a "General" Unify format with other Kernel + files + + * ltboxes.dtx v0.1a \@mpfootnotetext (DPC) Extra group for + colour + +1994-03-07 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * cmextra.dst: Corrected `cyrilic' --> `cyrillic'. Changed + 1993 to 1994. + + * slides.dtx: Removed declared option `twoside' (Suggested by + Joachim Schrod). + +1994-03-07 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * makeindx.dtx (subsection{Makeidx}): + Changed \newcommand to \providecommand for \seename. + +1994-03-06 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latexsym.dtx: + Changed \typeout's to \wlog's + + * newlfont.dtx (section{The Code}): + Define \cal and \mit to behave as in NFSS1 + +1994-03-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltvers.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * lttab.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + + * ltlists.dtx v1.0a "General" Initial version, split from + latex.dtx + +1994-03-04 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * testpage.tex: Changed question asking for paper type so that + the answer must now include `paper'. Added question for + doublesided printing. + +1994-03-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltboxes.dtx 0.1f \@irsbox Replaced a missing \else + +1994-03-03 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * ltxdoc.dtx: + Added driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + Set counter StandardModuleDepth to 1, since all ltx documentation + needs that setting anyway. + +1994-03-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltclass.dtx 0.3a "General" Remove need for driver file + + * ltboxes.dtx v0.1e "General" Remove need for drv file + + * ltboxes.dtx v0.1e "General" Add 2ekernel module + +1994-03-02 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: Added 2ekernel conditional to generation of + ltboxes.ltx from ltboxes.dtx since this is now necessary + (cf. last change to ltboxes.dtx). + + * unpack2e.ins: Added 2ekernel conditional to generation of + latex2e.ltx from docclass.dtx since this is now necessary + (cf. last change to docclass.dtx). + + * unpack2e.ins: Removed generation of latex2e.drv and + dircheck.drv. + + * slides.dst: Renamed sfontdef.* to sfonts.*. + + * unpacked.l2e: Removed *.drv files (no longer generated) + Renamed slides .ltx files to .def. + + * slides.fdd: Removed extra pair of curly braces after + DeclareFontFamily. Corrected Documentation to refer to + sfonts.*, not to sfontdef.*. + + * slides.dtx: Renamed files sfontdef.* to sfonts.*. + + * letter.dtx: Moved documentation driver further up, so that + "latex2e letter.dtx" works. + + * letter.dst: Removed generation of .drv file, changed typeout + message that explains how to typeset the documentation. + + * slides.dtx: Added forgotten changes entry for last change. + + * slides.dtx: Renamed files slides.ltx and sfontdef.ltx to + slides.def and sfontdef.def. + + * slides.fdd: Moved driver further up so that no extra .drv + file is needed, but "latex2e slides.fdd" works. + + * slides.dst: Updated copyright message to show 1994. Removed + generation of .drv files. Renamed .ltx --> .def + + * slides.dtx: Moved driver further up so that no extra .drv + file is needed, but "latex2e slides.dtx" works. Removed + makeidx class option, as it is now a proper package. Changed + leqno class option t oread leqno.clo. Added fleqn class + option (reads fleqn.clo). +1994-03-01 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * ltdirchk.dtx 0.2k "General" Add unstripped module, so that + dircheck.dtx may be used with initex + +1994-03-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * unpack2e.ins: + Removed unnecessary .drv generation (some are still there) + Added the the WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY message to some preambles. + + * oldgerm.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + Removed extra pair of braces after \DeclareFontFamily which has + only three arguments not four. + + * oldlfont.dtx: + Removed surplus \ShortVerb setting. + + * lhyphen.dtx: + Corrected typo in documentation. + +1994-02-28 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * varioref.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + +1994-02-27 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * latint.dtx: + Removed decl of \@unused since defined earlier. + Removed decl of \typeout. + Removed decl of \@tempdima \@tempdimb. + +1994-02-26 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * eufrak.dtx: + Changed driver code slightly. + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * euscript.dtx: + Changed driver code slightly. + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * exscale.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * nfssfont.dtx: + Added to the distribution. + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * docstrip.dtx (section{Producing the documentation}): + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * oldlfont.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * latexsym.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * newlfont.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * pandora.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * preload.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * lhyphen.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * fontdef.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + + * fontcmds.dtx: + Moved the driver code in front so that the documentation can be + processed by simply running the file through LaTeX2e. + +1994-02-24 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * fam.dtx (subsection{Macros for loading fonts}): + Removed catcode settings from \try@load@fontshape and + \DeclareFontShape and placed them into a separate macro called + \nfss@catcodes so that it is easier to maintain special + requirements for packages that make certain characters active. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/classes.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/classes.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2decd1439d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/classes.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9becca05479 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..be77a5f244d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/clsguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1874 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: clsguide.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] + +\title{\LaTeXe~for class and package writers} + +\author{Copyright \copyright~1995--2006 The \LaTeX3 Project\\ + All rights reserved} + +\date{15 February 2006} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} + +This document is an introduction to writing classes and packages for +\LaTeX{}, with special attention given to upgrading existing +\LaTeX~2.09 packages to \LaTeXe{}. The latter subject is also +covered in an article by Johannes Braams published in TUGboat~15.3. + +\subsection{Writing classes and packages for \LaTeXe} + +\LaTeX{} is a document preparation system that enables the document +writer to concentrate on the contents of their text, without bothering +too much about the formatting of it. For example, chapters are +indicated by |\chapter{<title>}| rather than by selecting 18pt bold. + +The file that contains the information about how to turn logical +structure (like `|\chapter|') into formatting (like `18pt bold ragged +right') is a \emph{document class}. In addition, some features (such +as colour or included graphics) are independent of the document class +and these are contained in \emph{packages}. + +One of the largest differences between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is in +the commands used to write packages and classes. In \LaTeX~2.09, +there was very little support for writing |.sty| files, and so writers +had to resort to using low-level commands. + +\LaTeXe{} provides high-level commands for structuring packages. +It is also much easier to build classes and packages on top of each +other, for example writing a local technical report class |cetechr| +(for the Chemical Engineering department) based on |article|. + +\subsection{Overview} + +This document contains an overview of how to write classes and +packages for \LaTeX{}. It does \emph{not} introduce all of the +commands necessary to write packages: these can be found in either +\emph{\LaTeXbook} or \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. But it does describe the new +commands for structuring classes and packages. + +\begin{description} + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:general}] contains some general advice about + writing classes and packages. It describes the difference between + classes and packages, the command naming conventions, the use of + |doc| and |docstrip|, how \TeX's primitive file and box commands + interact with \LaTeX{}. It also contains some hints about general + \LaTeX{} style. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:structure}] describes the structure of classes + and packages. This includes building classes and packages on top of + other classes and packages, declaring options and declaring + commands. It also contains example classes. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:commands}] lists the new class and package + commands. + + \item[Section~\ref{Sec:upgrade}] gives detailed advice on how to + upgrade existing \LaTeX~2.09 classes and packages to \LaTeXe{}. + +\end{description} + +\subsection{Further information} + +For a general introduction to \LaTeX{}, including the new features of +\LaTeXe{}, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook} +by Leslie Lamport~\cite{A-W:LLa94}. + +A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX, including an +overview of more than 200 packages and nearly 1000 ready to run examples, is +to be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp\ second edition} by Frank Mittelbach and +Michel Goossens~\cite{A-W:MG2004}. + +The \LaTeX{} system is based on \TeX{}, which is +described in \emph{The \TeX book} by Donald E.~Knuth~\cite{A-W:DEK91}. + +There are a number of documentation files which accompany every copy +of \LaTeX{}. A copy of \emph{\LaTeX{} News} will come out with each +six-monthly release of \LaTeX{}, and is found in the files +|ltnews*.tex|. The author's guide \emph{\usrguide} describes the new +\LaTeX{} document features; it is in |usrguide.tex|. The guide +\emph{\fntguide} describes the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme for +class- and package-writers; it is in |fntguide.tex|. Configuring +\LaTeX{} is covered by the guide \emph{\cfgguide} in +\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on +modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in +\texttt{modguide.tex}. + +The documented source code (from the files used to produce the kernel +format via |latex.ltx|) is now available as +\emph{The \LaTeXe\ Sources}. +This very large document also includes an index of +\LaTeX{} commands. It can be typeset from the \LaTeX{} file +|source2e.tex| in the |base| directory, using the source files and +the class file |ltxdoc.cls| from this directory. + +For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your +local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group. +Addresses and other details can be found at: +\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs} + \texttt{http://www.tug.org/lugs.html} +\end{quote} + + +\subsection{Policy on standard classes} + +Many of the problem reports we receive concerning the standard classes +are not concerned with bugs but are suggesting, more or less politely, +that the design decisions embodied in them are `not optimal' and +asking us to modify them. + +There are several reasons why we should not make such changes to these +files. +\begin{itemize} +\item + However misguided, the current behaviour is clearly what was + intended when these classes were designed. +\item + It is not good practice to change such aspects of `standard classes' + because many people will be relying on them. +\end{itemize} + +We have therefore decided not to even consider making such +modifications, nor to spend time justifying that decision. This does +not mean that we do not agree that there are many deficiencies in the +design of these classes, but we have many tasks with higher priority +than continually explaining why the standard classes for \LaTeX{} +cannot be changed. + +We would, of course, welcome the production of better classes, or of +packages that can be used to enhance these classes. So your first +thought when you consider such a deficiency will, we hope, be ``what +can I do to improve this?'' + +Similar considerations apply to those parts of the kernel that are +implementing design decisions, many of which should be left to the +class file but are not in the current system. We realise that in such +cases it is much more difficult for you to rectify the problem +yourself but it is also the case that making such changes in the +kernel would probably be a major project for us; therefore such +enhancements will have to wait for \LaTeX3. + +\section{Writing classes and packages} +\label{Sec:writing} + +This section covers some general points concerned with writing +\LaTeX{} classes and packages. + + +\subsection{Old versions} + +If you are upgrading an existing \LaTeX~2.09 style file then we +recommend freezing the 2.09 version and no longer maintaining it. +Experience with the various dialects of \LaTeX{} which existed in the +early 1990's suggests that maintaining packages for different versions +of \LaTeX{} is almost impossible. It will, of course, be necessary +for some organisations to maintain both versions in parallel for some +time but this is not essential for those packages and classes +supported by individuals: they should support only the new standard +\LaTeXe{}, not obsolete versions of \LaTeX{}. + + +\subsection{Using `docstrip' and `doc'} + +If you are going to write a large class or package for \LaTeX{} then +you should consider using the |doc| software which comes with +\LaTeX{}. +\LaTeX{} classes and packages written using this can be +processed in two ways: they can be run through \LaTeX{}, to produce +documentation; and they can be processed with |docstrip|, to produce +the |.cls| or |.sty| file. + +The |doc| software can automatically generate indexes of definitions, +indexes of command use, and change-log lists. It is very useful for +maintaining and documenting large \TeX{} sources. + +The documented sources of the \LaTeX{} kernel itself, and of the +standard classes, etc, are |doc| documents; they are in the |.dtx| +files in the distribution. You can, in fact, typeset the source code +of the kernel as one long document, complete with index, by running +\LaTeX{} on |source2e.tex|. Typesetting these documents uses the +class file |ltxdoc.cls|. + +For more information on |doc| and |docstrip|, consult the files +|docstrip.dtx|, |doc.dtx|, and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. For examples of its +use, look at the |.dtx| files. + +\subsection{Is it a class or a package?} +\label{Sec:classorpkg} + +The first thing to do when you want to put some new \LaTeX{} commands +in a file is to decide whether it should be a \emph{document class} or a +\emph{package}. The rule of thumb is: +\begin{quote} + If the commands could be used with any document class, then make + them a package; and if not, then make them a class. +\end{quote} + +There are two major types of class: those like |article|, |report| or +|letter|, which are free-standing; and those which are extensions or +variations of other classes---for example, the |proc| document class, +which is built on the |article| document class. + +Thus, a company might have a local |ownlet| class for printing letters +with their own headed note-paper. Such a class would build on top of +the existing |letter| class but it cannot be used with any other +document class, so we have |ownlet.cls| rather than |ownlet.sty|. + +The |graphics| package, in contrast, provides commands for including +images into a \LaTeX{} document. Since these commands can be used +with any document class, we have |graphics.sty| rather than +|graphics.cls|. + + +\subsection{Command names} + +\LaTeX{} has three types of command. + +There are the author commands, such as |\section|, |\emph| and +|\times|: most of these have short names, all in lower case. + +There are also the class and package writer commands: +most of these have long mixed-case names such as the following. +\begin{verbatim} + \InputIfFileExists \RequirePackage \PassOptionsToClass +\end{verbatim} + +Finally, there are the internal commands used in the \LaTeX{} +implementation, such as |\@tempcnta|, |\@ifnextchar| and |\@eha|: +most of these commands contain |@| in their name, which means they +cannot be used in documents, only in class and package files. + +Unfortunately, for historical reasons the distinction between these +commands is often blurred. For example, |\hbox| is an internal +command which should only be used in the \LaTeX{} kernel, whereas +|\m@ne| is the constant $-1$ and could have been |\MinusOne|. + +However, this rule of thumb is still useful: if a command has |@| in +its name then it is not part of the supported \LaTeX{} language---and +its behaviour may change in future releases! If a command is +mixed-case, or is described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}, then you can rely on +future releases of \LaTeXe{} supporting the command. + +\subsection{Box commands and colour} +\label{Sec:colour} + +Even if you do not intend to use colour in your own documents, by +taking note of the points in this section you can ensure that your +class or package is compatible with the |color| package. This may +benefit people using your class or package who have access to colour +printers. + +The simplest way to ensure `colour safety' is to always use \LaTeX{} +box commands rather than \TeX{} primitives, that is use |\sbox| rather +than |\setbox|, |\mbox| rather than |\hbox| and |\parbox| or +the |minipage| environment rather than |\vbox|. +The \LaTeX{} box commands have new options which mean that they are now +as powerful as the \TeX{} primitives. + +As an example of what can go wrong, consider that in +|{\ttfamily <text>}| +the font is restored just \emph{before} the |}|, whereas in the +similar looking construction +|{\color{green} <text>}| +the colour is restored just \emph{after} the final |}|. Normally this +distinction does not matter at all; but consider a primitive \TeX{} +box assignment such as: +\begin{verbatim} + \setbox0=\hbox{\color{green} <text>} +\end{verbatim} +Now the colour-restore occurs after the |}| and so is \emph{not} +stored in the box. Exactly what bad effects this can have depends on +how colour is implemented: it can range from getting the wrong +colours in the rest of the document, to causing errors in the +dvi-driver used to print the document. + +Also of interest is the command |\normalcolor|. This is +normally just |\relax| (i.e., does nothing) +but you can use it rather like |\normalfont| to +set regions of the page such as captions or section headings to the +`main document colour'. + + +\subsection{Defining text and math characters} +\label{Sec:chars} + +Because \LaTeXe{} supports different encodings, definitions of commands +for producing symbols, accents, composite glyphs, etc.\ must be +defined using the commands provided for this purpose and described in +\emph{\fntguide}. This part of the system is still under development +so such tasks should be undertaken with great caution. + +Also, |\DeclareRobustCommand| should be used for encoding-independent +commands of this type. + +Note that it is no longer possible to refer to the math font set-up +outside math mode: for example, neither |\textfont 1| nor +|\scriptfont 2| are guaranteed to be defined in other modes. + + +\subsection{General style} +\label{Sec:general} + +The new system provides many commands designed to help you produce +well-structured class and package files that are both robust and +portable. This section outlines some ways to make intelligent use of +these. + +\subsubsection{Loading other files} +\label{Sec:loading} + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +\LaTeX{} provides these commands: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClass \LoadClassWithOptions + \RequirePackage \RequirePackageWithOptions +\end{verbatim} +for using classes or packages inside other classes or packages. We +recommend strongly that you use them, rather than the primitive +|\input| command, for a number of reasons. + +Files loaded with |\input <filename>| will not be listed in the +|\listfiles| list. + +If a package is always loaded with |\RequirePackage...| or |\usepackage| +then, even if its loading is requested several times, it will be +loaded only once. By contrast, if it is loaded with |\input| then it +can be loaded more than once; such an extra loading may waste time and +memory and it may produce strange results. + +If a package provides option-processing then, again, strange results +are possible if the package is |\input| rather than loaded by means of +|\usepackage| or |\RequirePackage...|. + +If the package |foo.sty| loads the package |baz.sty| by use of +|\input baz.sty| then the user will get a warning: +\begin{verbatim} + LaTeX Warning: You have requested package `foo', + but the package provides `baz'. +\end{verbatim} +Thus, for several reasons, using |\input| to load packages is not a +good idea. + +Unfortunately, if you are upgrading the file |myclass.sty| to a class +file then you have to make sure that any old files which contain +|\input myclass.sty| still work. + +This was also true for the standard classes (|article|, |book| and +|report|), since a lot of existing \LaTeX~2.09 document styles contain +|\input article.sty|. The approach which we use to solve this is +to provide minimal files |article.sty|, |book.sty| and |report.sty|, +which simply load the appropriate class files. + +For example, |article.sty| contains just the following lines: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \@obsoletefile{article.cls}{article.sty} + \LoadClass{article} +\end{verbatim} +You may wish to do the same or, if you think that it is safe to do so, +you may decide to just remove |myclass.sty|. + +\subsubsection{Make it robust} + +We consider it good practice, when writing packages and classes, to use +\LaTeX{} commands as much as possible. + +Thus, instead of using |\def...| we recommend using one of +|\newcommand|, |\renewcommand| or |\providecommand|; |\CheckCommand| is +also useful. Doing this makes +it less likely that you will inadvertently redefine a command, giving +unexpected results. + +When you define an environment, use |\newenvironment| or +|\renewenvironment| instead |\def\foo{...}| and |\def\endfoo{...}|. + +If you need to set or change the value of a \m{dimen} or \m{skip} +register, use |\setlength|. + +To manipulate boxes, use \LaTeX{} commands such as |\sbox|, +|\mbox| and |\parbox| rather than |\setbox|, |\hbox| and |\vbox|. + +Use |\PackageError|, |\PackageWarning| or |\PackageInfo| (or the +equivalent class commands) rather than |\@latexerr|, |\@warning| or +|\wlog|. + +It is still possible to declare options by defining |\ds@<option>| and +calling |\@options|; but we recommend the |\DeclareOption| and +|\ProcessOptions| commands instead. These are more powerful and use +less memory. So rather than using: +\begin{verbatim} + \def\ds@draft{\overfullrule 5pt} + \@options +\end{verbatim} +you should use: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{draft}{\setlength{\overfullrule}{5pt}} + \ProcessOptions\relax +\end{verbatim} + +The advantage of this kind of practice is that your code is more +readable and, more important, that it is less likely to break when +used with future versions of \LaTeX{}. + +\subsubsection{Make it portable} + +It is also sensible to make your files are as portable as possible. To +ensure this; they should contain only visible 7-bit text; and the +filenames should contain at most eight characters (plus the three +letter extension). Also, of course, it \textbf{must not} have the +same name as a file in the standard \LaTeX{} distribution, however +similar its contents may be to one of these files. + +It is also useful if local classes or packages have a common prefix, +for example the University of Nowhere classes might begin with |unw|. +This helps to avoid every University having its own thesis class, all +called |thesis.cls|. + +If you rely on some features of the \LaTeX{} kernel, or on a package, +please specify the release-date you need. For example, the package +error commands were introduced in the June 1994 release so, if you use +them then you should put: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\subsubsection{Useful hooks} + +Some packages and document styles had to redefine the command +|\document| or |\enddocument| to achieve their goal. This is no +longer necessary. You can now use the `hooks' |\AtBeginDocument| and +|\AtEndDocument| (see Section~\ref{Sec:delays}). Again, using these +hooks makes it less likely that your code breaks with future versions +of \LaTeX{}. It also makes it more likely that your package can work +together with someone else's. + +\NEWdescription{1996/12/01} +However, note that code in the |\AtBeginDocument| hook is part of the +preamble. Thus there are restrictions on what can be put there; in +particular, no typesetting can be done. + +\section{The structure of a class or package} +\label{Sec:structure} + +\LaTeXe{} classes and packages have more structure than \LaTeX~2.09 +style files did. The outline of a class or package file is: +\begin{description} +\item[Identification] The file says that it is a \LaTeXe{} package or + class, and gives a short description of itself. +\item[Preliminary declarations] + Here the file declares some commands and can also load + other files. Usually these commands will be just those needed for + the code used in the declared options. +\item[Options] The file declares and processes its options. +\item[More declarations] This is where the file does most of its work: + declaring new variables, commands and fonts; and loading other files. +\end{description} + +\subsection{Identification} + +The first thing a class or package file does is identify itself. +Package files do this as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesPackage{<package>}[<date> <other information>] +\end{verbatim} +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesPackage{latexsym}[1994/06/01 Standard LaTeX package] +\end{verbatim} +Class files do this as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesClass{<class-name>}[<date> <other information>] +\end{verbatim} +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesClass{article}[1994/06/01 Standard LaTeX class] +\end{verbatim} +\NEWdescription{1998/06/19} +The \m{date} should be given in the form `\textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}' and +must be present if the optional argument is used (this is also true +for the |\NeedsTeXFormat| command). +Any derivation from this syntax will result in low-level \TeX{} +errors---the commands expect a valid syntax to speed up the daily +usage of the package or class and make no provision for the case that +the developer made a mistake! + +This date is checked whenever a user specifies a date in their +|\documentclass| or |\usepackage| command. For example, if you wrote: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass{article}[1995/12/23] +\end{verbatim} +then users at a different location +would get a warning that their copy of |article| was out of +date. + +The description of a class is displayed when the class is used. The +description of a package is put into the log file. These descriptions +are also displayed by the |\listfiles| command. The phrase +\texttt{Standard LaTeX} \textbf{must not} be used in the identification +banner of any file other than those in the standard \LaTeX{} +distribution. + + +\subsection{Using classes and packages} + +The first major difference between \LaTeX~2.09 style files and +\LaTeXe{} packages and classes is that \LaTeXe{} supports +\emph{modularity}, in the sense of building files from small +building-blocks rather than using large single files. + +A \LaTeX{} package or class can load a package as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \RequirePackage[<options>]{<package>}[<date>] +\end{verbatim} +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \RequirePackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01] +\end{verbatim} +This command has the same syntax as the author command |\usepackage|. +It allows packages or classes to use features provided by other +packages. For example, by loading the |ifthen| package, a package +writer can use the `if\dots then\dots else\dots' commands provided +by that package. + +A \LaTeX{} class can load one other class as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClass[<options>]{<class-name>}[<date>] +\end{verbatim} +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClass[twocolumn]{article} +\end{verbatim} +This command has the same syntax as the author command |\documentclass|. +It allows classes to be based on the syntax and appearance of another +class. For example, by loading the |article| class, a class writer +only has to change the bits of |article| they don't like, rather than +writing a new class from scratch. + +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +The following commands can be used in the common case that you want to +simply load a class or package file with exactly those options that +are being used by the current class. +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClassWithOptions{<class-name>}[<date>] + \RequirePackageWithOptions{<package>}[<date>] +\end{verbatim} +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClassWithOptions{article} + \RequirePackageWithOptions{graphics}[1995/12/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Declaring options} + +\NEWdescription{1998/12/01} +The other major difference between \LaTeX~2.09 styles and \LaTeXe{} +packages and classes is in option handling. Packages and classes can +now declare options and these can be specified by authors; for +example, the |twocolumn| option is declared by the |article| class. +Note that the name of an option should contain only those characters +allowed in a `\LaTeX{} name'; in particular it must not contain any +control sequences. + +An option is declared as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{<option>}{<code>} +\end{verbatim} +For example, the |dvips| option (slightly simplified) +to the |graphics| package is implemented as: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{dvips}{\input{dvips.def}} +\end{verbatim} +This means that when an author writes |\usepackage[dvips]{graphics}|, +the file |dvips.def| is loaded. As another example, the |a4paper| +option is declared in the |article| class to set the |\paperheight| +and |\paperwidth| lengths: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{a4paper}{% + \setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% + \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% + } +\end{verbatim} +Sometimes a user will request an option which the class +or package has not explicitly declared. By default this will produce +a warning (for classes) or error (for packages); this behaviour +can be altered as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{<code>} +\end{verbatim} +For example, to make the package |fred| produce a warning rather than +an error for unknown options, you could specify: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{% + \PackageWarning{fred}{Unknown option `\CurrentOption'}% + } +\end{verbatim} +Then, if an author writes |\usepackage[foo]{fred}|, they will get a +warning \texttt{Package fred Warning: Unknown option `foo'.} As +another example, the |fontenc| package tries to load a file +|<ENC>enc.def| whenever the \m{ENC} option is used. This +can be done by writing: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{% + \input{\CurrentOption enc.def}% + } +\end{verbatim} +\NEWdescription{1998/12/01} +It is possible to pass options on to another package or class, using +the command |\PassOptionsToPackage| or |\PassOptionsToClass| (note +that this is a specialised operation that works only for option +names). For example, to pass every unknown option on to the |article| +class, you can use: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{% + \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}% + } +\end{verbatim} +If you do this then you should make sure you load the class at some +later point, otherwise the options will never be processed! + +So far, we have explained only how to declare options, not how to +execute them. To process the options with which the file was called, +you should use: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProcessOptions\relax +\end{verbatim} +This executes the \m{code} for each option that was both specified and +declared (see Section~\ref{Sec:commands.options} for details of how +this is done). + +For example, if the |jane| package file contains: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{foo}{\typeout{Saw foo.}} + \DeclareOption{baz}{\typeout{Saw baz.}} + \DeclareOption*{\typeout{What's \CurrentOption?}} + \ProcessOptions\relax +\end{verbatim} +and an author writes |\usepackage[foo,bar]{jane}|, then they will see +the messages \texttt{Saw foo.} and \texttt{What's bar?} + +\subsection{A minimal class file} + +Most of the work of a class or package is in defining new commands, or +changing the appearance of documents. This is done in the body of the +package, using commands such as |\newcommand| or |\setlength|. + +\LaTeXe{} provides several new commands to help class and package +writers; these are described in detail in Section~\ref{Sec:commands}. + +There are four things that every class file \emph{must} contain: these +are a definition of |\normalsize|, values for |\textwidth| and +|\textheight| and a specification for page-numbering. So a minimal +document class file\footnote {This class is now in the standard +distribution, as \texttt{minimal.cls}.} looks like this: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesClass{minimal}[1995/10/30 Standard LaTeX minimal class] + \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10pt}{12pt}\selectfont} + \setlength{\textwidth}{6.5in} + \setlength{\textheight}{8in} + \pagenumbering{arabic} % needed even though this class will + % not show page numbers +\end{verbatim} +However, this class file will not support footnotes, marginals, +floats, etc., nor will it provide any of the 2-letter font commands +such as |\rm|; thus most classes will contain more than this minimum! + +\subsection{Example: a local letter class} + +A company may have its own letter class, for setting letters in the +company style. This section shows a simple implementation of such a +class, although a real class would need more structure. + +The class begins by announcing itself as |neplet.cls|. +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesClass{neplet}[1995/04/01 NonExistent Press letter class] +\end{verbatim} +Then this next bit passes any options on to the |letter| class, which +is loaded with the |a4paper| option. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{letter}} + \ProcessOptions\relax + \LoadClass[a4paper]{letter} +\end{verbatim} +In order to use the company letter head, it redefines the +|firstpage| page style: this is the page style that is used on +the first page of letters. +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\ps@firstpage}{% + \renewcommand{\@oddhead}{<letterhead goes here>}% + \renewcommand{\@oddfoot}{<letterfoot goes here>}% + } +\end{verbatim} +And that's it! + +\subsection{Example: a newsletter class} + +A simple newsletter can be typeset with \LaTeX{}, using a variant of the +|article| class. +The class begins by announcing itself as |smplnews.cls|. +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + \ProvidesClass{smplnews}[1995/04/01 The Simple News newsletter class] + + \newcommand{\headlinecolor}{\normalcolor} +\end{verbatim} +It passes most specified options on to the |article| class: apart from +the |onecolumn| option, which is switched off, and the |green| option, +which sets the headline in green. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\OptionNotUsed} + \DeclareOption{green}{\renewcommand{\headlinecolor}{\color{green}}} + + \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}} + + \ProcessOptions\relax +\end{verbatim} +It then loads the class |article| with the option |twocolumn|. +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClass[twocolumn]{article} +\end{verbatim} +Since the newsletter is to be printed in colour, it now loads the +|color| package. The class does not specify a device driver option +since this should be specified by the user of the |smplnews| class. +\begin{verbatim} + \RequirePackage{color} +\end{verbatim} +The class then redefines |\maketitle| to produce the title in 72pt +Helvetica bold oblique, in the appropriate colour. +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\maketitle}{% + \twocolumn[% + \fontsize{72}{80}\fontfamily{phv}\fontseries{b}% + \fontshape{sl}\selectfont\headlinecolor + \@title + ]% + } +\end{verbatim} +It redefines |\section| and switches off section numbering. +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\section}{% + \@startsection + {section}{1}{0pt}{-1.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex}% + {1ex plus .2ex}{\large\sffamily\slshape\headlinecolor}% + } + + \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} +\end{verbatim} +It also sets the three essential things. +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{9}{10}\selectfont} + \setlength{\textwidth}{17.5cm} + \setlength{\textheight}{25cm} +\end{verbatim} +In practice, a class would need more than this: it would provide +commands for issue numbers, authors of articles, page styles and so +on; but this skeleton gives a start. The |ltnews| class file is not +much more complex than this one. + +\section{Commands for class and package writers} +\label{Sec:commands} + +This section describes briefly each of the new commands for class and +package writers. To find out about other aspects of the new system, +you should also read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, \emph{\LaTeXcomp} and +\emph{\usrguide}. + +\subsection{Identification} + +The first group of commands discussed here are those used +to identify your class or package file. + +\begin{decl} +|\NeedsTeXFormat| \arg{format-name} \oarg{release-date} +\end{decl} +This command tells \TeX{} that this file should be processed using a +format with name \m{format-name}. You can use the optional argument +\m{release-date} to further specify the earliest release date of the +format that is needed. When the release date of the format is older +than the one specified a warning will be generated. The standard +\m{format-name} is \texttt{LaTeX2e}. The date, if present, must be in +the form \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/06/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} +|\ProvidesClass| \arg{class-name} \oarg{release-info} \\ +|\ProvidesPackage| \arg{package-name} \oarg{release-info} +\end{decl} +This declares that the current file contains the definitions for the +document class \m{class-name} or package \m{package-name}. + +The optional \m{release-info}, if used, must contain: +\begin{itemize} + \item the release date of + this version of the file, in the form \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}; +\item optionally followed by a space and a short description, possibly + including a version number. +\end{itemize} +The above syntax must be followed exactly so that this information +can be used by |\LoadClass| or |\documentclass| (for classes) or +|\RequirePackage| or |\usepackage| (for packages) to test that the +release is not too old. + +The whole of this \m{release-info} information is displayed by +|\listfiles| and should therefore not be too long. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProvidesClass{article}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX class] + \ProvidesPackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX package] +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\ProvidesFile| \arg{file-name} \oarg{release-info} +\end{decl} +This is similar to the two previous commands except that here the full +filename, including the extension, must be given. It is used for +declaring any files other than main class and package files. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProvidesFile{T1enc.def}[1994/06/01 v1.0 Standard LaTeX file] +\end{verbatim} + +Note that the phrase \texttt{Standard LaTeX} \textbf{must not} be used +in the identification banner of any file other than those in the +standard \LaTeX{} distribution. + +\subsection{Loading files} +\label{Sec:loadf} + +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +This group of commands can be used to create your own document class or +package by building on existing classes or packages. +\begin{decl} + |\RequirePackage| \oarg{options-list} \arg{package-name} + \oarg{release-info}\\ + |\RequirePackageWithOptions| \arg{package-name} + \oarg{release-info} +\end{decl} +Packages and classes should use these commands to load other packages. + +The use of |\RequirePackage| is the same as the author command +|\usepackage|. + +Examples: +\begin{verbatim} + \RequirePackage{ifthen}[1994/06/01] + \RequirePackageWithOptions{graphics}[1995/12/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\LoadClass| \oarg{options-list} \arg{class-name} + \oarg{release-info}\\ + |\LoadClassWithOptions| \arg{class-name} + \oarg{release-info} +\end{decl} +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +These commands are for use \emph{only} in class files, they cannot be +used in packages files; +they can be used at most once within a class file. + +The use of |\LoadClass| is the same as +the use of |\documentclass| to load a class file. + +Examples: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClass{article}[1994/06/01] + \LoadClassWithOptions{article}[1995/12/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +The two |WithOptions| versions simply load the class (or package) file +with exactly those options that are being used by the current file +(class or package). See below, in \ref{Sec:opmove}, for further +discussion of their use. + + +\subsection{Option declaration} +\label{Sec:commands.options.dec} + +\NEWdescription{1998/12/01} +The following commands deal with the declaration and handling of +options to document classes and packages. Every option name must be a +`\LaTeX{} name'. + +There are some commands designed especially for use within the +\m{code} argument of these commands (see below). + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareOption| \arg{option-name} \arg{code} +\end{decl} +This makes \m{option-name} a `declared option' of the class or package +in which it is put. + +The \m{code} argument contains the code to be executed if that option +is specified for the class or package; it can contain any valid +\LaTeXe{} construct. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareOption*| \arg{code} +\end{decl} +This declares the \m{code} to be executed for every option which is +specified for, but otherwise not explicitly declared by, the class or +package; this code is called the `default option code' and it can +contain any valid \LaTeXe{} construct. + +If a class file contains no |\DeclareOption*| then, by default, all +specified but undeclared options for that class will be silently +passed to all packages (as will the specified and declared options for +that class). + +If a package file contains no |\DeclareOption*| then, by default, each +specified but undeclared option for that package will produce an error. + + +\subsection{Commands within option code} +\label{Sec:within.code} + +These two commands can be used only within the \m{code} argument of +either |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|. Other commands commonly +used within these arguments can be found in the next few subsections. + +\begin{decl} + |\CurrentOption| +\end{decl} +This expands to the name of the current option. + +\begin{decl} + |\OptionNotUsed| +\end{decl} +This causes the current option to +be added to the list of `unused options'. + +\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} + You can now include hash marks (\texttt{\#}) within these \m{code} + arguments without special treatment (formerly, it had been + necessary to double them). + +\subsection{Moving options around} +\label{Sec:opmove} + +These two commands are also very useful within the \m{code} argument +of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|: +\begin{decl} + |\PassOptionsToPackage| \arg{options-list} \arg{package-name}\\ + |\PassOptionsToClass| \arg{options-list} \arg{class-name} +\end{decl} +The command |\PassOptionsToPackage| passes the option names in +\m{options-list} to package \m{package-name}. +This means that it adds the \m{option-list} to the +list of options used by any future |\RequirePackage| or |\usepackage| +command for package \m{package-name}. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \PassOptionsToPackage{foo,bar}{fred} + \RequirePackage[baz]{fred} +\end{verbatim} +is the same as: +\begin{verbatim} + \RequirePackage[foo,bar,baz]{fred} +\end{verbatim} + +Similarly, |\PassOptionsToClass| may be used in a class file to pass +options to another class to be loaded with |\LoadClass|. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +The effects and use of these two commands should be contrasted with +those of the following two (documented above, in \ref{Sec:loadf}): +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClassWithOptions + \RequirePackageWithOptions +\end{verbatim} +The command |\RequirePackageWithOptions| is similar to +|\RequirePackage|, but it always loads the required package with +exactly the same option list as that being used by the current class +or package, rather than with any option explicitly supplied or passed +on by |\PassOptionsToPackage|. + +The main purpose of |\LoadClassWithOptions| is to allow one class to +simply build on another, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClassWithOptions{article} +\end{verbatim} +This should be compared with the slightly different construction +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}} + \ProcessOptions\relax + \LoadClass{article} +\end{verbatim} +As used above, the effects are more or less the same, but the first is +a lot less to type; also the |\LoadClassWithOptions| method runs +slightly quicker. + +If, however, the class declares options of its own then +the two constructions are different. Compare, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{landscape}{\@landscapetrue} + \ProcessOptions\relax + \LoadClassWithOptions{article} +\end{verbatim} +with: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{landscape}{\@landscapetrue} + \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}} + \ProcessOptions\relax + \LoadClass{article} +\end{verbatim} +In the first example, the \textsf{article} class will be loaded with +option |landscape| precisely when the current class is called with +this option. By contrast, in the second example it will never be +called with option \texttt{landscape} as in that case \textsf{article} +is passed options only by the default option handler, but this handler +is not used for |landscape| because that option is explicitly +declared. + +\subsection{Delaying code} +\label{Sec:delays} + +These first two commands are also intended primarily for use within +the \m{code} argument of |\DeclareOption| or |\DeclareOption*|. + +\begin{decl} + |\AtEndOfClass| \arg{code}\\ + |\AtEndOfPackage| \arg{code} +\end{decl} +These commands declare \m{code} that is saved away internally and then +executed after processing the whole of the current class or package +file. + +Repeated use of these commands is permitted: the code in the +arguments is stored (and later executed) in the order of their +declarations. + +\begin{decl} + |\AtBeginDocument| \arg{code}\\ + |\AtEndDocument| \arg{code} +\end{decl} +These commands declare \m{code} to be saved internally and executed +while \LaTeX{} is executing |\begin{document}| or |\end{document}|. + +The \m{code} specified in the argument to |\AtBeginDocument| is +executed near the end of the |\begin{document}| code, \emph{after} the +font selection tables have been set up. It is therefore a useful +place to put code which needs to be executed after everything has been +prepared for typesetting and when the normal font for the document is +the current font. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +The |\AtBeginDocument| hook should not be used for code that does any +typesetting since the typeset result would be unpredictable. + +The \m{code} specified in the argument to |\AtEndDocument| is +executed at the beginning of the |\end{document}| code, +\emph{before} the final page is finished and before any leftover +floating environments are processed. If some of the \m{code} is to be +executed after these two processes, you should include a |\clearpage| +at the appropriate point in \m{code}. + +Repeated use of these commands is permitted: the code in the +arguments is stored (and later executed) in the order of their +declarations. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\AtBeginDvi| \arg{specials} +\end{decl} +These commands save in a box register things which are written to the +|.dvi| file at the beginning of the `shipout' of the first page of the +document. + +This should not be used for anything that will add any typeset +material to the |.dvi| file. + +Repeated use of this command is permitted. + + +\subsection{Option processing} +\label{Sec:commands.options} + +\begin{decl} + |\ProcessOptions| +\end{decl} +This command executes the \m{code} for each selected option. + +We shall first describe how |\ProcessOptions| works in a package file, +and then how this differs in a class file. + +To understand in detail what |\ProcessOptions| does in a package file, +you have to know the difference between \emph{local} and \emph{global} +options. +\begin{itemize} +\item \textbf{Local options} are those which have been explicitly + specified for this particular package in the \m{options} argument of + any of these: +\begin{quote} + |\PassOptionsToPackage{<options>}| \ |\usepackage[<options>]|\\ + |\RequirePackage[<options>]| +\end{quote} +\item \textbf{Global options} are any other options that are specified + by the author in the \m{options} argument of + |\documentclass[<options>]|. +\end{itemize} +For example, suppose that a document begins: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[german,twocolumn]{article} + \usepackage{gerhardt} +\end{verbatim} +whilst package |gerhardt| calls package |fred| with: +\begin{verbatim} + \PassOptionsToPackage{german,dvips,a4paper}{fred} + \RequirePackage[errorshow]{fred} +\end{verbatim} +then: +\begin{itemize} +\item |fred|'s local options are |german|, |dvips|, |a4paper| + and |errorshow|; +\item |fred|'s only global option is |twocolumn|. +\end{itemize} + +When |\ProcessOptions| is called, the following happen. +\begin{itemize} +\item \emph{First}, for each option so far declared in |fred.sty| + by |\DeclareOption|, it looks to see if that option is either a + global or a local option for |fred|: if it is then the corresponding + code is executed. + + This is done in the order in which these options + were declared in |fred.sty|. +\item \emph{Then}, for each remaining \emph{local} option, the command + |\ds@<option>| is executed if it has been defined somewhere (other + than by a |\DeclareOption|); otherwise, the `default option code' is + executed. If no default option code has been declared then an error + message is produced. + + This is done in the order in which these + options were specified. +\end{itemize} +Throughout this process, the system ensures that the code declared for +an option is executed at most once. + +Returning to the example, if |fred.sty| contains: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOption{dvips}{\typeout{DVIPS}} + \DeclareOption{german}{\typeout{GERMAN}} + \DeclareOption{french}{\typeout{FRENCH}} + \DeclareOption*{\PackageWarning{fred}{Unknown `\CurrentOption'}} + \ProcessOptions\relax +\end{verbatim} +then the result of processing this document will be: +\begin{verbatim} + DVIPS + GERMAN + Package fred Warning: Unknown `a4paper'. + Package fred Warning: Unknown `errorshow'. +\end{verbatim} +Note the following: + +\begin{itemize} +\item the code for the |dvips| option is executed before that for the + |german| option, because that is the order in which they are declared + in |fred.sty|; +\item the code for the |german| option is executed only once, when the + declared options are being processed; +\item the |a4paper| and |errorshow| options produce the warning from + the code declared by |\DeclareOption*| (in the order in which they + were specified), whilst the |twocolumn| option does not: this is + because |twocolumn| is a global option. +\end{itemize} + +In a class file, |\ProcessOptions| works in the same way, except +that: \emph{all} options are local; and the default value for +|\DeclareOption*| is |\OptionNotUsed| rather than an error. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +Note that, because |\ProcessOptions| has a |*|-form, it is wise to +follow the non-star form with |\relax|, as in the previous examples, +since this prevents unnecessary look ahead and possibly misleading +error messages being issued. + +\begin{decl} + |\ProcessOptions*| \\ + |\@options| +\end{decl} +This is like |\ProcessOptions| but it executes the options in the +order specified in the calling commands, rather than in the order of +declaration in the class or package. For a package this means that the +global options are processed first. + +The |\@options| command from \LaTeX~2.09 has been made equivalent to +this in order to ease the task of updating old document styles to +\LaTeXe{} class files. + +\begin{decl} + |\ExecuteOptions| \arg{options-list} +\end{decl} + +For each option in the \m{options-list}, in order, +this command simply executes the command +|\ds@<option>| (if this command is not defined, then that option is +silently ignored). + +It can be used to provide a `default option list' just before +|\ProcessOptions|. For example, suppose that in a class file you want +to set up the default design to be: two-sided printing; 11pt fonts; +in two columns. Then it could specify: +\begin{verbatim} + \ExecuteOptions{11pt,twoside,twocolumn} +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Safe file commands} + +These commands deal with file input; they ensure that the non-existence +of a requested file can be handled in a user-friendly way. + +\begin{decl} +|\IfFileExists| \arg{file-name} \arg{true} \arg{false} +\end{decl} +If the file exists then the code specified in \m{true} is +executed. + +If the file does not exist then the code specified in \m{false} is +executed. + +This command does \emph{not} input the file. + +\begin{decl} + |\InputIfFileExists| \arg{file-name} \arg{true} \arg{false} +\end{decl} +This inputs the file \m{file-name} if it exists and, immediately +before the input, the code specified in \m{true} is executed. + +If the file does not exist then the code specified in \m{false} is +executed. + +It is implemented using |\IfFileExists|. + + +\subsection{Reporting errors, etc} + +These commands should be used by third party classes and packages to +report errors, or to provide information to authors. + +\begin{decl} + |\ClassError| \arg{class-name} \arg{error-text} \arg{help-text}\\ + |\PackageError| \arg{package-name} \arg{error-text} \arg{help-text} +\end{decl} +These produce an error message. The \m{error-text} is displayed and the +|?| error prompt is shown. If the user types |h|, they will be shown +the \m{help-text}. + +Within the \m{error-text} and \m{help-text}: |\protect| can be used to +stop a command from expanding; |\MessageBreak| causes a line-break; +and |\space| prints a space. + +Note that the \m{error-text} will have a full stop added to it, so do +not put one into the argument. + +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\foo}{FOO} + \PackageError{ethel}{% + Your hovercraft is full of eels,\MessageBreak + and \protect\foo\space is \foo + }{% + Oh dear! Something's gone wrong.\MessageBreak + \space \space Try typing \space <<return>> + \space to proceed, ignoring \protect\foo. + } +\end{verbatim} +produces this display: +\begin{verbatim} + ! Package ethel Error: Your hovercraft is full of eels, + (ethel) and \foo is FOO. + + See the ethel package documentation for explanation. +\end{verbatim} +If the user types |h|, this will be shown: +\begin{verbatim} + Oh dear! Something's gone wrong. + Try typing <<return>> to proceed, ignoring \foo. +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\ClassWarning| \arg{class-name} \arg{warning-text}\\ + |\PackageWarning| \arg{package-name} \arg{warning-text}\\ + |\ClassWarningNoLine| \arg{class-name} \arg{warning-text}\\ + |\PackageWarningNoLine| \arg{package-name} \arg{warning-text}\\ + |\ClassInfo| \arg{class-name} \arg{info-text}\\ + |\PackageInfo| \arg{package-name} \arg{info-text} +\end{decl} +The four |Warning| commands are similar to the error commands, except +that they produce only a warning on the screen, with no error prompt. + +The first two, |Warning| versions, also show the line number where the +warning occurred, whilst the second two, |WarningNoLine| versions, do +not. + +The two |Info| commands are similar except that they log the +information only in the transcript file, including the line number. +There are no |NoLine| versions of these two. + +Within the \m{warning-text} and \m{info-text}: |\protect| can be used to +stop a command from expanding; |\MessageBreak| causes a line-break; +and |\space| prints a space. +Also, these should not end with a full stop as one is +automatically added. + + +\subsection{Defining commands} +\label{Sec:commands.define} + +\LaTeXe{} provides some extra methods of (re)defining commands that are +intended for use in class and package files. + +\NEWfeature{1994/12/01} +The \texttt{*}-forms of these commands should be used to define +commands that are not, in \TeX{} terms, long. This can be useful for +error-trapping with commands whose arguments are not intended to +contain whole paragraphs of text. + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareRobustCommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} + \arg{definition}\\ + |\DeclareRobustCommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} + \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This command takes the same arguments as |\newcommand| but it declares +a robust command, even if some code within the \m{definition} is +fragile. You can use this command to define new robust commands, or +to redefine existing commands and make them robust. A log is put into +the transcript file if a command is redefined. + +For example, if |\seq| is defined as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareRobustCommand{\seq}[2][n]{% + \ifmmode + #1_{1}\ldots#1_{#2}% + \else + \PackageWarning{fred}{You can't use \protect\seq\space in text}% + \fi + } +\end{verbatim} +Then the command |\seq| can be used in moving arguments, even though +|\ifmmode| cannot, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \section{Stuff about sequences $\seq{x}$} +\end{verbatim} + +Note also that there is no need to put a |\relax| before the +|\ifmmode| at the beginning of the definition; this is because the +protection given by this |\relax| against expansion at the wrong time +will be provided internally. + +\begin{decl} + |\CheckCommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} + \arg{definition}\\ + |\CheckCommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} + \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This takes the same arguments as |\newcommand| but, rather than define +\m{cmd}, it just checks that the current definition of \m{cmd} is +exactly as given by \m{definition}. An error is raised if these +definitions differ. + +This command is useful for checking the state of the system before +your package starts altering the definitions of commands. It allows +you to check, in particular, that no other package has redefined the +same command. + +\subsection{Moving arguments} + +\NEWdescription{1994/12/01} +The setting of protect whilst processing (i.e.~moving) moving arguments +has been reimplemented, as has the method of writing information from +the |.aux| file to other files such as the |.toc| file. Details can +be found in the file |ltdefns.dtx|. + +We hope that these changes will not affect many packages. + +\section{Miscellaneous commands, etc} +\label{Sec:commands.misc} + +\subsection{Layout parameters} + +\begin{decl} +|\paperheight|\\ +|\paperwidth| +\end{decl} +These two parameters are usually set by the class to be the size of +the paper being used. This should be actual paper size, unlike +|\textwidth| and |\textheight| which are the size of the main text +body within the margins. + + +\subsection{Case changing} +\label{sec:case} + +\begin{decl} + |\MakeUppercase| \arg{text} \\ + |\MakeLowercase| \arg{text} +\end{decl} + +\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} +\TeX{} provides two primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| for +changing the case of text. These are sometimes used in document +classes, for example to set information in running heads in all +capitals. + +Unfortunately, these \TeX{} primitives do not change the case of +characters accessed by commands like |\ae| or |\aa|. To overcome this +problem, \LaTeX{} provides two new commands |\MakeUppercase| and +|\MakeLowercase| to do this. + +For example: +\begin{quotation} +\begin{tabular}{rl} + |\uppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \uppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\ + |\lowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \lowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\ + |\MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & + \MakeUppercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}\\ + |\MakeLowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE}| & \MakeLowercase{aBcD\ae\AA\ss\OE} +\end{tabular} +\end{quotation} + +The commands |\MakeUppercase| and |\MakeLowercase| themselves are +robust, but they have moving arguments. + +The commands use the \TeX{} primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase|, +and so have a number of unexpected `features'. In particular, they +change the case of everything (except characters in the names of +control-sequences) in their text argument: this includes mathematics, +environment names, and label names. + +For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \MakeUppercase{$x+y$ in \ref{foo}} +\end{verbatim} +produces $X+Y$ and the warning: +\begin{verbatim} + LaTeX Warning: Reference `FOO' on page ... undefined on ... +\end{verbatim} +In the long run, we would like to use all-caps fonts rather than any +command like |\MakeUppercase| but this is not possible at the moment +because such fonts do not exist. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +In order that upper/lower-casing will work reasonably well, and in +order to provide any correct hyphenation, \LaTeXe{} \emph{must} use, +throughout a document, the same fixed table for changing case. +The table used is designed for the font encoding |T1|; this works well +with the standard \TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but will cause +problems when using other alphabets. + +\subsection{The `openany' option in the `book' class} + +\NEWdescription{1996/06/01} +The |openany| option allows chapter and similar openings to +occur on left hand pages. Previously this option affected only +|\chapter| and |\backmatter|. It now also affects +|\part|, |\frontmatter| and |\mainmatter|. + +\subsection{Better user-defined math display environments} + +\begin{decl} + |\ignorespacesafterend| +\end{decl} + +\NEWfeature{1996/12/01} +\NEWdescription{2003/12/01} +Suppose that you want to define an environment for displaying text +that is numbered as an equation. A straightforward way to do this is +as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \newenvironment{texteqn} + {\begin{equation} + \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}} + {\end{minipage} + \end{equation}} +\end{verbatim} +However, if you have tried this then you will probably have noticed +that it does not work perfectly when used in the middle of a paragraph +because an inter-word space appears at the beginning of the first +line after the environment. + +There is now an extra command (with a very long name) available that +you can use to avoid this problem; it should be inserted as shown here: +\begin{verbatim} + \newenvironment{texteqn} + {\begin{equation} + \begin{minipage}{0.9\linewidth}} + {\end{minipage} + \end{equation} + \ignorespacesafterend} +\end{verbatim} + +This command may also have other uses. + +\subsection{Normalising spacing} + +\begin{decl} + |\normalsfcodes| +\end{decl} + +\NEWfeature{1997/06/01} +This command should be used to restore the normal settings of the +parameters that affect spacing between words, sentences, etc. + +An important use of this feature is to correct a problem, reported by +Donald Arseneau, that punctuation in page headers has always (in all +known \TeX{} formats) been potentially wrong whenever a page break +happens while a local setting of the space codes is in effect. These +space codes are changed by, for example, the command +\verb|\frenchspacing|) and the \textsf{verbatim} environment. + +It is normally given the correct definition automatically in +|\begin{document}| and so need not be explicitly set; however, if it +is explicitly made nonempty in a class file then automatic +default setting will be over-ridden. + + +\section{Upgrading \LaTeX~2.09 classes and packages} +\label{Sec:upgrade} + +This section describes the changes you may need to make when you +upgrade an existing \LaTeX{} style to a package or class but we shall +start in optimistic mode. + +Many existing style files will run with \LaTeXe{} without any +modification to the file itself. When everything is running OK, +please put a note in the newly created package or class file to record +that it runs with the new standard \LaTeX{}; then distribute it to +your users. + +\subsection{Try it first!} +\label{Sec:try-it} + +The first thing you should do is to test your style in `compatibility +mode'. The only change you need to make in order to do this is, +possibly, to change the extension of the file to |.cls|: you should +make this change only if your file was used as a main document style. +Now, without any other modifications, run \LaTeXe{} on a document that +uses your file. This assumes that you have a suitable collection of +files that tests all the functionality provided by your style file. +(If you haven't, now is the time to make one!) + +You now need to change the test document files so that they are +\LaTeXe{} documents: see \emph{\usrguide} for details of how to do +this and then try them again. You have now tried the test documents +in both \LaTeXe{} native mode and \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. + +\subsection{Troubleshooting} +\label{Sec:trouble} + +If your file does not work with \LaTeXe{}, there are two likely +reasons. +\begin{itemize} +\item \LaTeX{} now has a robust, well-defined designer's interface for + selecting fonts, which is very different from the \LaTeX~2.09 + internals. +\item Your style file may have used some \LaTeX~2.09 internal commands + which have changed, or which have been removed. +\end{itemize} + +When you are debugging your file, you will probably need more +information than is normally displayed by \LaTeXe. This is achieved +by resetting the counter |errorcontextlines| from its default value of +$-1$ to a much higher value, e.g.~999. + +\subsection{Accommodating compatibility mode} + +Sometimes an existing collection of \LaTeX~2.09 documents makes it +inconvenient or impossible to abandon the old commands entirely. +If this is the case, then it is possible to accommodate both conventions +by making special provision for documents processed in compatibility +mode. + +\begin{decl} +|\if@compatibility| +\end{decl} +This switch is set when a document begins with |\documentstyle| rather +than |\documentclass|. Appropriate code can be supplied for either +condition, as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \if@compatibility + <code emulating LaTeX 2.09 behavior> + \else + <code suitable for LaTeX2e> + \fi +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Font commands} + +Some font and size commands are now defined by the document class +rather than by the \LaTeX{} kernel. If you are upgrading a +\LaTeX~2.09 document style to a class that does not load one of the +standard classes, then you will probably need to add definitions for +these commands. + +\begin{decl} + |\rm| |\sf| |\tt| |\bf| |\it| |\sl| |\sc| +\end{decl} +None of these short-form font selection commands are defined in the +\LaTeXe{} kernel. They are defined by all the standard class files. + +If you want to define them in your class file, there are several +reasonable ways to do this. + +One possible definition is: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\rm}{\rmfamily} + ... + \newcommand{\sc}{\scshape} +\end{verbatim} +This would make the font commands orthogonal; for example +|{\bf\it text}| would produce bold italic, thus: \textbf{\textit{text}}. +It will also make them produce an error if used in math mode. + +Another possible definition is: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\rmfamily}{\mathrm} + ... + \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\scshape}{\mathsc} +\end{verbatim} +This will make |\rm| act like |\rmfamily| in text mode (see above) and +it will make |\rm| select the |\mathrm| math alphabet in math mode. + +Thus |${\rm math} = X + 1$| will produce `${\rm math} = X + 1$'. + +If you do not want font selection to be orthogonal then you can +follow the standard classes and define: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} + ... + \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\mathsc} +\end{verbatim} +This means, for example, that |{\bf\it text}| will produce medium +weight (rather than bold) italic, thus: \textit{text}. + +\begin{decl} + |\normalsize| \\ + |\@normalsize| +\end{decl} +The command |\@normalsize| is retained for compatibility with +\LaTeX~2.09 packages which may have used its value; but redefining it +in a class file will have no effect since it is always reset to have +the same meaning as |\normalsize|. + +This means that classes \emph{must} now redefine |\normalsize| rather +than redefining |\@normalsize|; for example (a rather incomplete one): +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont} +\end{verbatim} +Note that |\normalsize| is defined by the \LaTeX{} kernel to be an +error message. + +\begin{decl} + |\tiny| |\footnotesize| |\small| |\large|\\ + |\Large| |\LARGE| |\huge| |\Huge| +\end{decl} +None of these other `standard' size-changing commands are defined in +the kernel: each needs to be defined in a class file if you need it. +They are all defined by the standard classes. + +This means you should use |\renewcommand| for |\normalsize| and +|\newcommand| for the other size-changing commands. + + +\subsection{Obsolete commands} + +Some packages will not work with \LaTeXe{}, normally because they relied +on an internal \LaTeX{} command which was never supported and has now +changed, or been removed. + +In many cases there will now be a robust, high-level means of +achieving what previously required low-level commands. Please consult +Section~\ref{Sec:commands} to see if you can now use the \LaTeXe{} +class and package writers commands. + +Also, of course, if your package or class redefined any of the kernel +commands (i.e.~those defined in the files |latex.tex|, |slitex.tex|, +|lfonts.tex|, |sfonts.tex|) then you will need to check it very +carefully against the new kernel in case the implementation has +changed or the command no longer exists in the \LaTeX2e{} kernel. + +Too many of the internal commands of \LaTeX~2.09 have been +re-implemented or removed to be able to list them all here. You must +check any that you have used or changed. + +We shall, however, list some of the more important commands which are +no longer supported. + +\begin{decl} + |\tenrm| |\elvrm| |\twlrm| \dots\\ + |\tenbf| |\elvbf| |\twlbf| \dots\\ + |\tensf| |\elvsf| |\twlsf| \dots\\ + \qquad$\vdots$ +\end{decl} +The (approximately) seventy internal commands of this form are no longer +defined. If your class or package uses them then \emph{please} +replace them with new font commands described in \emph{\fntguide}. + +For example, the command |\twlsf| should be replaced by: +\begin{verbatim} + \fontsize{12}{14}\normalfont\sffamily\selectfont +\end{verbatim} + +Another possibility is to use the |rawfonts| package, described in +\emph{\usrguide}. + +Also, remember that many of the fonts preloaded by \LaTeX~2.09 +are no longer preloaded. + +\begin{decl} + |\vpt| |\vipt| |\viipt| \dots +\end{decl} +These were the internal size-selecting commands in \LaTeX~2.09. +(They can still be used in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode.) +Please use the command |\fontsize| instead: see \emph{\fntguide} for +details. + +For example, |\vpt| should be replaced by: +\begin{verbatim} + \fontsize{5}{6}\normalfont\selectfont +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\prm|, |\pbf|, |\ppounds|, |\pLaTeX| \dots +\end{decl} +\LaTeX~2.09 used several commands beginning with |\p| in order to +provide `protected' commands. For example, |\LaTeX| was defined to be +|\protect\pLaTeX|, and |\pLaTeX| was defined to produce the \LaTeX{} +logo. This made |\LaTeX| robust, even though |\pLaTeX| was not. + +These commands have now been reimplemented using +|\DeclareRobustCommand| +(described in Section~\ref{Sec:commands.define}). +If your package redefined one of the |\p|-commands then you must +remove the redefinition and use |\DeclareRobustCommand| to redefine the +non-|\p| command. + +\begin{decl} +|\footheight|\\ +|\@maxsep|\\ +|\@dblmaxsep| +\end{decl} +These parameters are not used by \LaTeXe{} so they have been removed, +except in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. Classes should no longer +set them. + +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{A-W:DEK91} +Donald~E. Knuth. +\newblock {\em The \TeX book}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986. +\newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991. + +\bibitem{A-W:LLa94} +Leslie Lamport. +\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994. + +\bibitem{A-W:MG2004} +Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion second edition}. +\newblock With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2004. + +\end{thebibliography} + +\newpage +\thispagestyle{empty} + +\section*{\LaTeXe{} Summary sheet: updating old styles} + +Section references below are to \emph{\clsguide}. + +\begin{enumerate} + +\item Should it become a class or a package? + See Section~\ref{Sec:classorpkg} for how to answer this question. + +\item If it uses another style file, then you will need to obtain an + updated version of this other file. Look at Section~\ref{Sec:loading} + for information on how to load other class and package files. + +\item Try it: see Section~\ref{Sec:try-it}. + +\item It worked? Excellent, but there are probably still some things + you should change in order to make your file into a well-structured + \LaTeXe{} file that is both robust and portable. So you should now + read Section~\ref{Sec:writing}, especially~\ref{Sec:general}. You + will also find some useful examples in Section~\ref{Sec:structure}. + + If your file sets up new fonts, font-changing commands or symbols, + you should also read \emph{\fntguide}. + +\item It did not work? There are three possibilities here: + \begin{itemize} + \item error messages are produced whilst reading your file; + \item error messages are produced whilst processing test documents; + \item there are no errors but the output is not as it should be. + \end{itemize} + Don't forget to check carefully for this last possibility. + + If you have got to this stage then you will need to read + Section~\ref{Sec:upgrade} to find the solutions that will make your + file work. +\end{enumerate} + +\end{document} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f475df54a90 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cmfonts.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..62d60378393 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4080fcb617d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/cyrguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,398 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1999/02/28] + +\title{Cyrillic languages support in \LaTeX} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 1998--1999,\\ Vladimir Volovich, + Werner Lemberg and \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ All rights reserved.} + +\date{12 March 1999} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle +\tableofcontents + +\begin{abstract} + This document contains basic information on the Cyrillic setup for + \LaTeX{}: how to get the fonts, how to set them up, how to use + the interface, its interaction with \babel{}, etc. This is only a first + draft of the document and it will probably be modified in future; so + please send in comments on it via the \texttt{latexbug} system + (see below). +\end{abstract} + + +\section{Introduction} + +Most Latin-based European languages were supported in \LaTeX{} by +introducing the~|T1|~font encoding and by using the \textsf{fontenc} +and \textsf{inputenc} packages; these use only standard \TeX{} means +to support any \mbox{8-bit} input encoding and this one standard font +encoding. The restriction to a single font encoding guarantees that +multiple languages can happily coexist in one document (\eg +hyphenation will be correct for all languages). + +Starting with the December~1998 Release, \LaTeX{} finally supports +Cyrillic languages. This support is based on the new standard +Cyrillic \TeX{} font encodings---|T2A|, |T2B|, |T2C|, and~|X2|. The +first three of these satisfy some basic requirements for +\LaTeX{}~|T*|~encodings, and thus can be used in multi-lingual documents +with other languages based on standard font encodings. + +The reason why we need four different Cyrillic font encodings is that +these font encodings support \emph{all} the Cyrillic languages that +have been used during the twentieth century (see +Section~\ref{fontencs})! The number of Cyrillic glyphs is large, so +they cannot be represented with 128~character slots; the other (lower) +128~slots are reserved for Latin letters and other invariant symbols +that are needed for the encoding to be a conformant +\LaTeX{}~\texttt{T}~encoding. + +There are some glyphs in the |T2*|~encodings which do not yet have +associated characters in \emph{Unicode}, the world-wide character +standard. Also, one more font encoding, |T2D|,~is planned for a +forthcoming release of \LaTeX{}. A lot of Cyrillic input encodings +are already supported (see Section~\ref{inputencs}), and additional +encodings could be added easily. + + +\subsection{Acknowledgments} +\label{sec:acks} + +The work on |T2*|~encodings was carried out by the T2~Team, led by +Alexander Berdnikov (other members are Mikhail Kolodin and Andrew +Janishewskii). The LH~fonts were produced by Olga Lapko (with +A.~Khodulev). The \textsf{T2} bundle and \textsf{ruhyphen} package +were written by Werner Lemberg and Vladimir Volovich (except that the +concrete hyphenation patterns which are part of \textsf{ruhyphen} came +from individual authors). The support for the Ukrainian language was +prepared by Andrij Shvaika. + + +\section{Installation} + +The \textsf{fontenc} and \textsf{inputenc} packages are installed +automatically in every base \LaTeX{} distribution. + +All the necessary extra files to use with these packages for Cyrillic +are in the \textsf{cyrillic} bundle, which at present contains the +following: four font encoding definition files (|t2aenc.def|, +|t2benc.def|, |t2cenc.def|, |x2enc.def|); several input encoding +definition files (all the other |*.def| files), and font definition +files (|*.fd|). +The installation of these is described here. + +\subsection{Fonts} + +The default font families in \LaTeX{} are the Computer Modern +families, namely the CM~fonts (|OT1|~encoded) and the EC~fonts +(|T1|~encoded). The LH~fonts, which are now available, provide +Computer Modern fonts for all Cyrillic font encodings. They are +designed to be compatible with the EC~fonts, and they provide the same +font shapes and sizes; they are available at |CTAN:fonts/cyrillic/lh| +(the latest version is 3.20). The installation instructions for the +fonts are in the file |INSTALL| in the font distribution. + +Other fonts, including Type~1 fonts, can also be used, provided that +their encoding (for \TeX{}) is \mbox{|T2|-compatible}. Some +ready-to-use packages supporting such fonts are also available, \eg at +\URL{ftp://ftp.vsu.ru/pub/tex} (they should soon be on \ctan). Currently, +you will find two packages there: \textsf{PsCyr}, which contains some +freely distributable Cyrillic Type~1 fonts with support for \LaTeX{}; +and \textsf{c1fonts}, which contains virtual fonts similar to the +\textsf{AE}~fonts package using the BlueSky and BaKoMa fonts +available from \ctan{} (see the |README| file in that package for +detailed information). Further font packages are expected soon. + +\subsection{Hyphenation patterns} + +You can find a collection of hyphenation patterns for the Russian +language in the \textsf{ruhyphen} package at +|CTAN:language/hyphenation/ruhyphen|. These patterns support the +|T2*|~encodings, as well as other popular font encodings used for +Russian typesetting (including the Omega internal encoding). +Patterns for other Cyrillic languages should be adapted to work with +the |T2*|~encodings. + +\subsection{\babel{} support for Russian and Ukrainian} +\label{bblrus} + +Version~3.6k of \babel{} includes support for the |T2*|~encodings and +for typesetting both Russian and Ukrainian texts using the Cyrillic +letters. The temporary fontencoding |LWN|, which was used in earlier +releases of \babel{}, will be withdrawn in the near future and replaced +by the |OT2| encoding. + +\subsection{Getting pre-built packages} + +Many of the major \TeX{} distributions, such as te\TeX{}, fp\TeX{} and +\TeX{}live, contain (or soon will) everything that is needed, +including the LH~fonts, \textsf{ruhyphen} and the latest version of +\babel{}. We hope that all \TeX{} distributions will soon include all +of these, so that the chances are that you will not need to install +this by yourself (but it is not difficult). + +If you are using em\TeX, Mik\TeX, or fp\TeX, you +can download the \textsf{ruemtex} package from +\URL{ftp://ftp.vsu.ru/pub/tex}. + +\section{Usage} + +Support for Cyrillic is based on these standard \LaTeX{} mechanisms: +the \textsf{fontenc} and \textsf{inputenc} packages (and on \babel{}). +Thus the basic principles for its use are similar to those for other +European languages: you simply add, to your document preamble, lines +like the following. + +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[T2A]{fontenc} +\usepackage[koi8-r]{inputenc} +\end{verbatim} + +Here you can put any desired input encoding instead of +\mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}}: for example, it would be \texttt{cp866} if you are +using a MS-DOS text editor with this Cyrillic code page to prepare your +documents, or \texttt{cp1251} if you are a MS~Windows user with Cyrillic +support. A full list of the available Cyrillic encodings can be found in +Section~\ref{inputencs} and in the file |cyinpenc.dtx|. + +Documents are, naturally, not restricted to a single font encoding; +this is essential for multi-lingual journals or documents. Such +changes can be made by using the |\fontencoding| command as part of a +font-change. However, it is best to access these font encodings via a +higher-level interface. + +Since such changes are often closely related to other +language-dependent settings, it is often sensible to use the \babel{} +system, which provides further useful `localisation' and standardised +multi-lingual interfaces (for further details, see +Section~\ref{bblrus}). Then you can use lines like the following in +your document: + +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage[koi8-r]{inputenc} +\usepackage[russian]{babel} +\end{verbatim} + +This will automatically choose the default font encoding for Russian, +which is |T2A|, if available. Documentation of the complete set of +font-encoding selection rules can be found in |cyrillic.dtx| which is +part of |rusbabel|. + +These \LaTeX{} interfaces are very convenient because they make your +documents completely portable, being based solely on standard \TeX{} +features. This will mean that your documents can be processed on any +\TeX{} system without any need for re-encoding to the `native' +encoding used on each platform; this is because the encoding of the +document is specified in the document itself. + +Moreover, if necessary, more than one input encoding can be used +within a document; this could be useful if, for example, you need to +combine articles prepared by authors on different machines. Each part +of the document is then identified by a |\inputencoding| command, +which can therefore only be used between paragraphs. + +Please note that you must always use the two standard \LaTeX{} +commands, |\MakeUppercase| and |\MakeLowercase| to produce uppercase +or lowercase text in your documents. This is because |\uppercase| and +|\lowercase| will not work at all for Cyrillic (note that these latter +two commands are not, and never have been, available for use directly +in \LaTeX{} documents). + + +\section{Font encodings for Cyrillic languages} +\label{fontencs} + +The Cyrillic font encodings support the following languages. Note +that some languages can be properly typeset with more than one +encoding. + +\begin{itemize} +\raggedright +\item[|T2A|:] + Abaza, Avar, Agul, Adyghei, Azerbaijani, Altai, Balkar, Bashkir, + Bulgarian, Buryat, Byelorussian, Gagauz, Dargin, Dungan, Ingush, + Kabardino-Cherkess, Kazakh, Kalmyk, Karakalpak, Karachaevskii, + Karelian, Kirghiz, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak, Kumyk, Lak, Lezghin, + Macedonian, Mari-Mountain, Mari-Valley, Moldavian, Mongolian, + Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nogai, Oroch, Osetin, Russian, Rutul, + Serbian, Tabasaran, Tadzhik, Tatar, Tati, Teleut, Tofalar, Tuva, + Turkmen, Udmurt, Uzbek, Ukrainian, Hanty-Obskii, Hanty-Surgut, + Gipsi, Chechen, Chuvash, Crimean-Tatar. +\item[|T2B|:] + Abaza, Avar, Agul, Adyghei, Aleut, Altai, Balkar, Byelorussian, + Bulgarian, Buryat, Gagauz, Dargin, Dolgan, Dungan, Ingush, Itelmen, + Kabardino-Cherkess, Kalmyk, Karakalpak, Karachaevskii, Karelian, + Ketskii, Kirghiz, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak, Koryak, Kumyk, Kurdian, + Lak, Lezghin, Mansi, Mari-Valley, Moldavian, Mongolian, + Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nanai, Nganasan, Negidal, Nenets, + Nivh, Nogai, Oroch, Russian, Rutul, Selkup, Tabasaran, Tadzhik, + Tatar, Tati, Teleut, Tofalar, Tuva, Turkmen, Udyghei, Uigur, Ulch, + Khakass, Hanty-Vahovskii, Hanty-Kazymskii, Hanty-Obskii, + Hanty-Surgut, Hanty-Shurysharskii, Gipsi, Chechen, Chukcha, Shor, + Evenk, Even, Enets, Eskimo, Yukagir, Crimean Tatar, Yakut. +\item[|T2C|:] + Abkhazian, Bulgarian, Gagauz, Karelian, Komi-Zyrian, Komi-Permyak, + Kumyk, Mansi, Moldavian, Mordvin-Moksha, Mordvin-Erzya, Nanai, + Orok (Uilta), Negidal, Nogai, Oroch, Russian, Saam, Old-Bulgarian, + Old-Russian, Tati, Teleut, Hanty-Obskii, Hanty-Surgut, Evenk, + Crimean Tatar. +\end{itemize} + +The |X2|~encoding was designed to support all the above languages. +Its name does not start with |T| because, for example, it contains no +Latin letters (it is purely a Cyrillic glyph container); it therefore +cannot be used in mixed-script documents along with the other |T*| +encodings. Please consult Section~6.4 \textit{Naming conventions} of +the file |fntguide.tex| in the base \LaTeX{} distribution for details +of the differences between \LaTeX{} font encodings and how they are +named. + +There are two other \LaTeX{} Cyrillic font encodings, |OT2| and |LCY|, +that are not included in the base \LaTeX{} distribution. The first is +a \mbox{7-bit} encoding (hence the |O|) developed by the AMS; it is +useful for typesetting relatively small fragments of text in Cyrillic, +using a Latin transliteration scheme. The other, |LCY|, is an +\mbox{8-bit} Cyrillic encoding which is not compatible with the +requirements for \LaTeX{} |T*|~encodings (hence the |L|); thus it is not +suitable for typesetting multi-lingual documents, but it can be used in +Plain \TeX{}-based macro packages because it is an extension of |OT1|. +These two encodings are supported by \babel{} and by \textsf{ot2cyr}. + + +\section{Input encodings} +\label{inputencs} + +Several Cyrillic code-pages are widely used. Currently, \LaTeX{} +contains support for 20~Cyrillic input encodings (some of which are +variants of each other). + +\begin{itemize} + +\item |cp855| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Cyrillic code-page. + +\item |cp866| --- the standard \mbox{MS-DOS} Russian code-page. + Several code-pages very similar to this are also supported + (the differences are all in the range 242--254). + \begin{itemize} + \item |cp866av| -- the `Cyrillic Alternative' code-page (an + alternative variant of cp866); + \item |cp866mav| -- the `Modified Alternative Variant'; + \item |cp866nav| -- the `New Alternative Variant'; + \item |cp866tat| -- an experimental Tatarian code-page. + \end{itemize} + +\item |cp1251| --- the standard MS Windows Cyrillic code-page. + +\item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}} --- a standard Cyrillic code-page widely + used in UNIX-like systems for Russian language support that is + specified in RFC~1489. The situation with \mbox{\texttt{koi8-r}} is + somewhat similar to that for |cp866|: there are several similar + code-pages which coincide for all Russian letters but add some other + Cyrillic letters. The following are supported: + \begin{itemize} + \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-u}} -- for Ukrainian; + \item \mbox{\texttt{koi8-ru}} -- this is described in a draft RFC + document specifying a widely used character set for mail and news + exchange in the Ukrainian internet community, as well as for + presenting WWW information resources in the Ukrainian language; + \item |isoir111| -- the \mbox{ISO-IR-111 ECMA} Cyrillic Code Page. + \end{itemize} + +\item |iso88595| --- the \mbox{ISO 8859-5} Cyrillic code-page (also called + \mbox{ISO-IR-144}). + +\item |maccyr| --- the Apple Macintosh Cyrillic code-page (also known + as Microsoft cp10007) and |macukr|, the Apple Macintosh Ukrainian + code-page, very similar to the Cyrillic code-page. + +\item The Mongolian code-pages: |ctt| |dbk| |mnk| |mos| |ncc| |mls|. + These code-pages were taken from Oliver Corff's `Mon\TeX' package + (available at |CTAN:language/mongolian/montex|). Since the |T2*| + encodings support the Mongolian Cyrillic script, it is convenient to + have support for Mongolian input encodings as well. Pointers to + documentation for these code-pages will be much appreciated. + +\end{itemize} + + +\section{Reporting bugs} + +In case you find a bug and want to report it, please follow the +guidelines given in the file |bugs.txt| in the base \LaTeX{} +distributions. Note that there is a category specifically for +reporting any bugs that occur only when using Cyrillic fonts or +support packages. + + +\section{Miscellanea in the \textsf{T2} bundle} +\label{t2m} + +The \textsf{T2}~bundle at |CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/supported/t2| +contains some other useful files, including support for Plain +\TeX{}-based macro packages, support for Bib\TeX{} and MakeIndex (see +also the \textsf{xindy} program and package---highly recommended for +making indices with Cyrillic), support for the \textsf{fontinst} +package, mapping tables relating these Cyrillic font encodings (and +input encodings) to the Unicode character names and slots (these are +in the subdirectory |enc-maps|), and more! + +To produce documented source listings of the \textsf{T2}~package, run +\LaTeX{} on the |*.dtx| and |*.fdd| files therein. + +When typesetting Cyrillic texts, there is a tradition of using +Cyrillic letters (in some situations) within math formul\ae, in +exactly the same way as most of the world uses Latin letters. +By default this does not work, because symbols declared with +|\DeclareTextSymbol| may not be used in math. + +If you need within math to `transparently' typeset glyphs declared in +font encoding definition files, then you could try using the +experimental \textsf{mathtext} package, which is also in the +\textsf{T2}~bundle. Note that this package uses up at least one +additional math alphabet per font encoding. For this and other +reasons, The \LaTeX3 Project Team considers that this experimental +extension to \LaTeX{}'s glyph-handling mechanisms should be used with +caution; but please try it out and send us your opinions and ideas. +Note that it is not included in the core of \LaTeX{} because both the +coding and the interfaces are likely to change at some point in the +future. + +Finally, here are some pointers to further information: + +\begin{quote} + \URL{http://www.cemi.rssi.ru/cyrtug}\\ + \URL{http://xtalk.price.ru/tex} +\end{quote} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/doc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/doc.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6067252d3bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/doc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/docstrip.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/docstrip.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0ab1ce18022 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/docstrip.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dd13622c48c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..96ed7edf6f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/encguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1481 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993-2016 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% + + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1994/11/20] + +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{} +\usepackage{textcomp} +\usepackage{url} +\usepackage{mflogo} + +\addtolength\textheight{6\baselineskip} +\addtolength\topmargin{-2\baselineskip} + + +\newcommand\ttverb[1]{\texttt{\string#1}} + + +% for encodings +\providecommand{\Enc}[1]{\texttt{#1}} + +% for packages +\providecommand{\Pkg}[1]{% + \textsf{#1}} + +% for files +\providecommand{\File}[1]{% + \texttt{#1}} + +% let's have meta values too +\providecommand{\meta}[1]{% + \ensuremath{\langle}\emph{#1}\ensuremath{\rangle}} + +\usepackage{tabularx} + +% eine Umgebung zur Darstellung von Kodierungen +% +% Argumente: +% #1: Name in LaTeX (z.B. OT1) +% #2: Name der Kodierung (z.B. TeX text) +% #3: Name des Autors (z.B. Don Knuth) +% #4: Bereich der benützten Glyphindizes +% #5: variable Positionen +% #6: Beispielzeichensatz +% #7: Referenz +% +% XXX add code to handle more than a single font example (e.g., larm1000, +% lbrm1000, and lcrm1000). +% +\newenvironment{encodinginfo}[7]% + {\noindent + \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{@{}l>{\raggedright\let\\\tabularnewline}X}% + \LaTeX{} name: & \texttt{#1}\\% + Public name: & #2\\% + Author: & #3\\% + Glyph slots used: & #4\\% + Variable slots: & #5\\% + Font example: & \def\@tempa{#6}\ifx\@tempa\@empty---% + \else\texttt{#6}\referenceftable{#6}\fi\\% + Further reference: & #7% + \end{tabularx}% + \par\nobreak + \vspace*{3pt}% + \quote + }% + {\endquote + \vspace{6pt}} + +\makeatletter +\def\referenceftable#1{ + \@ifundefined{r@fonttable:#1}% + \relax + {;\space encoding table on page~\pageref{fonttable:#1}}% +} + +% font table macros mainly lifted from manmac.tex +\def\oct#1{\hbox{\rm\'{}\kern-.2em\it#1\/\kern.05em}} +\def\hex#1{\hbox{\rm\H{}\tt#1}} + +\def\oddline#1{\cr\noalign{\nointerlineskip} + \multispan{19}\hrulefill& + \setbox0=\hbox{\lower 2.3pt\hbox{\hex{#1x}}}\smash{\box0}\cr + \noalign{\nointerlineskip}} +\def\evenline{\cr\noalign{\hrule}} +\def\chartstrut{\lower4.5pt\vbox to14pt{}} +\def\beginchart#1#2{$$\global\count@=0 #1 + \halign to\hsize\bgroup + \chartstrut##\tabskip0pt plus10pt& + &\hfil##\hfil&\vrule##\cr + \lower6.5pt\null + &&\oct0&&\oct1&&\oct2&&\oct3&&\oct4&&\oct5&&\oct6&&\oct7&\evenline} +\def\endchart{\raise11.5pt\null&&&\hex 8&&\hex 9&&\hex A&&\hex B& + &\hex C&&\hex D&&\hex E&&\hex F&\cr\egroup$$} +\def\:{\setbox0=\hbox{\noboundary\char\count@\noboundary}% + \ifdim\ht0>7.5pt\reposition + \else\ifdim\dp0>2.5pt\reposition\fi\fi + \box0\global\advance\count@ by1 } +\def\reposition{\setbox0=\hbox{$\vcenter{\kern2pt\box0\kern2pt}$}} +\def\normalchart{% + &\oct{00x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline0 + &\oct{01x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{02x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline1 + &\oct{03x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{04x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline2 + &\oct{05x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{06x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline3 + &\oct{07x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{10x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline4 + &\oct{11x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{12x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline5 + &\oct{13x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{14x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline6 + &\oct{15x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{16x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline7 + &\oct{17x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + \top} + +\def\notophalf{} +\def\tophalf{% +%\noalign{\vskip 5pt\hrule} + &\oct{20x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline8 + &\oct{21x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{22x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline9 + &\oct{23x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{24x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline A + &\oct{25x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{26x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline B + &\oct{27x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{30x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline C + &\oct{31x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{32x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline D + &\oct{33x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{34x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline E + &\oct{35x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline + &\oct{36x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\oddline F + &\oct{37x}&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&&\:&\evenline} + +\def\ftable#1#2{% + \batchmode + \font\X=#1% + \errorstopmode + \ifx\X\nullfont + \@warning{Font #1 not found, table omitted} + \else + \count@="80 + \setbox0=\hbox{\X + \loop\char\count@\advance\count@ by1 \ifnum\count@<"100 + \repeat}% + \ifdim\wd0>0pt \let\top\tophalf\else\let\top\notophalf\fi + \beginchart\X{\hfill\llap{\textbf{#1, \large#2}\label{fonttable:#1}}}\normalchart + \endchart\par\vfill + \fi} +\makeatother + + +\setcounter{tocdepth}{3} + +\title{\LaTeX{} font encodings} + +\author{Frank Mittelbach \and Robin + Fairbairns \and Werner Lemberg \and \LaTeX3 Project Team.} + +\date{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2016 \\[5pt] 18 February 2016} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} + +This document explains the ideas that underpin \LaTeX{} font +encodings and the constraints that apply when defining a new encoding; it +also lists the encodings that have already been defined. + +\subsection{Encodings in \TeX{}} + +\TeX{} (the program) implicitly recognises three sorts of encoding, +and all are (in a sense) discussed in the \TeX{}book~\cite{A-W:DKn86}: +\begin{itemize} +\item[1.] The input encoding, which specifies the meanings of characters + in files presented to \TeX{} for processing. The \TeX{}book + suggests that `your version of \TeX{} will recognise the characters + you type on your keyboard' (\TeX{} the program has provision for + static translations of input characters). +\end{itemize} +Such direct use of \TeX{}'s facilities is not the way modern +\LaTeX{} (or indeed any other \TeX{} macro package) is likely to deal +with input encodings. This document does not address the topic of +input encodings; the interested reader should examine the \LaTeX{} +base package \Pkg{inputenc} \cite[sec.~7.5.2, p.~357]{A-W:MG2004}. +\begin{itemize} +\item[2.] The token stream that \TeX{} processes internally. This stream + of \TeX{}'s consciousness is discussed in great detail in the + \TeX{}book. +\end{itemize} +Again, this document does not address the topic. \LaTeX's internal +character representation (\textsc{licr}) is well discussed in +\cite[sec.~7.11.2, p.~442]{A-W:MG2004}. +\begin{itemize} +\item[3.] The font encoding---i.e., the mapping of character codes to + glyphs in the fonts that are used to typeset \TeX{}'s output. + Again, a set of font encodings is enumerated in the \TeX{}book, but + that set has proved inadequate to the needs of modern multilingual + use of \LaTeX. +\end{itemize} +This document explains \emph{why} Knuth's original set of encodings is +inadequate to modern conditions, and discusses the issues that +surround the design and definition of new font encodings. + +Font encodings are important for more than their r\^{o}le in mapping the +glyphs of the fonts to be used for typesetting: their glyph tables are +also the context in which \TeX{}'s hyphenation algorithm operates. +There are constraints imposed by \TeX{} that affect the way in which +new font encodings, for use in a multi-lingual environment, may be +structured (see section~\ref{sec:restrictions} for details). + +\subsection{The history of \TeX{} font encodings} + +Little attention was paid to font encodings prior to the arrival of +\TeX{}\,3. Up to that time, one used Donald Knuth's fonts (the +Computer Modern family, using the encodings we now refer to as \Enc{OT1} and +the \Enc{OM} series), or one was on one's own. + +The Computer Modern text encoding raises problems in unmodified +\TeX{}, because hyphenation cannot break words containing +\verb"\accent" commands. Even in those Western European languages for +which the \Enc{OT1} encoding has symbols for the necessary +\verb"\accent"-based diacritics, this shortcoming ruins typesetting of +running text. + +With the advent of \TeX{}\,3, with its ability to switch between +hyphenation pattern sets, it was clear that the situation could not +continue. Thus a group at the TUG Annual General Meeting in Cork, +Ireland, specified a uniform encoding for 256-glyph fonts, that +contains accented letters and non-\textsc{ascii} letters necessary to +express most Western European languages (and some Eastern European ones) +without recourse to the \verb"\accent" command. + +This ``Cork'' encoding has since been realised in a series of fonts +designed with Metafont, in at least one font series that is available +both in Adobe Type 1 format and in OpenType format, % viz., Latin Modern +and in a number of virtual-font mappings of other font series. + +Since the time of the Cork meeting, much effort has been devoted to +the design of encodings for text fonts to use with \TeX{}, and the +Cork encoding influenced the design of many such encodings. + +Encodings for mathematical fonts have, in contrast, changed little +since Knuth's contributions. A TUG Technical Working Group was +established at the Cork meeting, whose aim was to define a set of +256-glyph encodings to regularise and extend Knuth's originals, using +ideas from several other fonts that had appeared since, and from the +known needs of researchers in mathematics and the mathematical sciences. + +Independently, a first proposal (the so-called \emph{Aston proposal}) was worked +out by Justin Ziegler together with Frank Mittelbach and other members of the +\LaTeX3 project team~\cite{ziegler}. A first implementation of +this propsal was realized by Matthias Clasen und Ulrik +Vieth~\cite{clasen,clasen-vieth}. + +However, the slow progress of these Mathematical encodings has been +overtaken by the addition (in the last decade or so) of a large number +of mathematical symbols to Unicode~\cite{beeton}; one can expect +further changes so that new public mathematical font encodings will +most likely be delayed still further. + + + +\subsection{Further information} + +For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of +\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, +Leslie Lamport, Addison Wesley, 2nd~ed, 1994. + +A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX, including an +overview of more than 200 packages and nearly 1000 ready to run examples, is +to be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp{} second edition} by Frank Mittelbach and +Michel Goossens~\cite{A-W:MG2004}. + +The \LaTeX{} project sponsored a report on Mathematical % spelt out in full +font encodings, which +is worth reading for its insight into the problems of defining the way +in which math is used: see~\cite{ziegler,clasen,clasen-vieth}. + +The \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is based on \TeX, which is described +by its developer in \emph{The \TeX book}, Donald E.~Knuth, Addison +Wesley, 1986, revised in 1991 to include the features of \TeX~3. + +For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX, please contact your local +\TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group +(\url{http://www.tug.org}). + + + +\section{Existing font encodings} + +This section lists the encodings currently assigned; for each +encoding, we list the registered (\LaTeX{}) name, the assigned purpose +of the encoding, and the author. Further details may list the code +positions used in the encoding, the \emph{variable slots} (see below), +an example font (for which a listing will be provided later in the +document if the relevant fonts are present), and a source for further +reference. + +While the characteristic feature of an encoding is that each font +encoded according to the encoding should have the same glyph set, +there are some encodings (notably \Enc{OT1} and its descendants) in +which a few glyph code slots differ in their contents in different +fonts. + +\subsection{Naming conventions} + +Names for encoding schemes are strings of up to three letters (all +upper case) plus digits. + +The \LaTeX3 project reserves the use of encoding names starting with the +following letters: |T| (standard 256-long text encodings), |TS| +(symbols that are designed to extend a corresponding |T| encoding), +|X| (text encodings that do not conform to the strict requirements for +|T| encodings), |M| (standard 256-long mathematical encodings), |S| (other +symbol encodings), |A| (other special applications), |OT| (standard +128-long text encodings), and |OM| (standard 128-long mathematical encodings). + +Please do not use the above starting letters for non-portable +encodings. If new standard encodings emerge then we shall add them in +a later release of \LaTeX. + +Encoding schemes which are local to a site or a system should start +with |L|, experimental encodings intended for wide distribution will +start with |E|, whilst |U| is for Unknown or Unclassified encodings. + +\begin{quote} + \itshape We recommend that new encoding names should not be + introduced unless careful consideration and discussion in the user + community has confirmed the need for the encoding. If encodings have to + change from font to font, a number of problems arise, so it is best to + develop encodings that can be used with a large number of fonts in parallel. + This allows documents to be typeset using different fonts without problems. + + The \Enc{TS1} encoding is a good example of a \emph{bad} encoding (even + though it was developed with the best intentions) as a huge number of fonts + can only implement parts of it. Similarly, the fact that the few sets of + available mathematical fonts (beside Computer Modern Math) nearly + all implement slightly different encodings is a huge source of + problems. Don't add to this if possible! +\end{quote} + + +\subsection{128$^+$ glyph encodings (text)} + +The `OT' series of font encodings start with Donald Knuth's original +text encoding, that used for the text fonts in the earliest releases +of \TeX{} itself. The `O' of the encoding designator may be taken as +signifying `original', or just `old'. + +\begin{encodinginfo}{OT1} + {\TeX{} text} + {Donald Ervin Knuth} + {0x00--0x7F} + {0x0B--0x0F, 0x24, 0x3C, 0x3E, 0x5C, 0x7B--0x7D} +% {0X--'177} +% {'13--'17, '44, '74, '76, '134, '173--'175} + {cmr10} + {\cite[p.427]{A-W:DKn86}} + + Donald Knuth designed his font encoding (and hence his fonts) in a + very different environment from that which now pervades the \TeX{} + world: his (mainframe) computer had very little memory, there was + little experience in (or demand for) for multilingual technical + typesetting, and as a result it was appropriate to sacrifice + uniformity for efficiency. + + Thus Knuth's original fonts differ slightly in some encoded slots: + for example, the glyphs \texttt{\string<}, \texttt{\string>}, + \verb=\=, \verb={=, and \verb=}= are only available in the + typewriter fonts and the \textdollar{} and \textsterling{} signs + share the same position (in different font shapes). + + This means that direct selection of these slots can produce + unpredictable results, e.g., typing \texttt{\string<} or + \verb=\symbol{'74}= in a document can yield `\textquestiondown'. +\end{encodinginfo} + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{OT2} + {UW cyrillic encoding} + {University of Washington} + {0x00--0x7F} + {---} + {wnr10} + {\cite{Beeton:TB6-3-124}} + Support for this encoding is available in the Cyrillic bundle although for + all practical purposes it is better to use one of the \Enc{T2} encodings. +\end{encodinginfo} + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{OT3} + {UW IPA encoding} + {University of Washington} + {0x00--0x7f} + {---} + {wsuipa10} + {\cite[p.149]{CorkGW:91}} + The \Enc{OT3} encoding was never really used with \LaTeXe{} + following the introduction of the TIPA system which offers much + better support for IPA. In particular, no \File{ot3enc.def} + file was ever produced. +\end{encodinginfo} + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{OT4} + {Polish text encoding} + {B.~Jackowski and M.~Ry\'cko} %% ? Marcin Woli\'nski + {0x00--0x7F, 0x81, 0x82, 0x86, 0x8A, 0x8B, 0x91, 0x99, 0x9B, 0xA1, + 0xA2, 0xA6, 0xAA, 0xAB, 0xAE, 0xAF, 0xB1, 0xB9, 0xBB, 0xD3, 0xF3, + 0xFF} + {0x0B--0x0F, 0x24, 0x3C, 0x3E, 0x5C, 0x7B--0x7D} + {plr10} + {---} + + While Knuth included the means of typesetting the `lost L' (\L) in + his \Enc{OT1} encoding, he omitted the ogonek (\,\,\k{}), a diacritic + mark that is also needed in Polish text; hence the appearance, well + before the \Enc{T1} encoding, of fonts using this encoding. +\end{encodinginfo} + +\begin{encodinginfo}{OT5} + {Not currently allocated} + {---} + {---} + {---} + {} + {---} + +\end{encodinginfo} + + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{OT6} + {Armenian text encoding} + {Serguei Dachian} + {0x03--0x0F, 0x13--0x7F} + {---} + {artmr10} + {---} + + This encoding was allocated to permit use of Dachian's + Armenian fonts in a standard \LaTeX{} environment. + + Because of license issues the \texttt{artmr} fonts are not necessarily + included in distributed \TeX{} installations (and for this reason the + corresponding encoding table is not shown below). However, the fonts + and the support macros can be found on the CTAN archives (look for + \texttt{armtex}). + +\end{encodinginfo} + + + +\subsection{256 glyph encodings (text)} + +\begin{encodinginfo}{T1} + {Cork encoding} + {Euro \TeX{} conference at Cork} + {0x00--0xFF} + {---} + {ecrm1000} + {\cite[p.514]{tub:MFe90}, \cite[p.99]{Knappen:TB17-2-96}} + + The Cork encoding was developed so that advantage could be taken of + the (then) new facilities of \TeX{}\,3, allowing hyphenation of + most Western European (and some Eastern European) languages in an + unmodified version of \TeX{}. + + The encoding was developed in the absence of any extant effort at + font design, but instances written in Metafont (the `EC' fonts), and + more recently Adobe Type 1 instances of the same fonts have become + available. + + Substantial (but incomplete) instances have also been developed, + which use virtual fonts. These latter instances map either Knuth's + original (OT1-encoded) fonts, or commercial fonts that contain the + Adobe `standard' set of 224 glyphs. +\end{encodinginfo} + +\begin{encodinginfo} + {T2A, T2B, T2C} + {Cyrillic encodings} + {The CyrTUG font team} + {0x00--0xFF} + {--- (within each encoding)} + {larm1000} + {\cite{Berdnikov:eurotex-98}} + + There are too many glyphs in the full Cyrillic complement of + languages for all of them to be covered by a single + \LaTeX{}-compliant encoding (the lower half of each + \Enc{T2}~encoding is identical to that of \Enc{T1}, in order that + each should be a conforming \LaTeX{} encoding~--- see + section~\ref{sec:restrictions}). The approach taken is + therefore to develop a single encoding, \Enc{X2} (see \ref{sec:extendedenc}) + which contains all the glyphs needed for the full set of + languages, and then to derive the three \LaTeX{}-complaint + \Enc{T2}-family encodings using the \Enc{X2} set together with that of + \Enc{T1}. + +\end{encodinginfo} + + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{T3} + {IPA encoding} + {FUKUI Rei, University of Tokyo} + {0x00--0xFF} + {---} + {tipa10} + {\cite[p.102]{Rei:TB17-2-102}} + + + The \Enc{T3} encoding (and associated macros) provides the glyphs required + in phonetic description according to current International Phonetic + Association recommendations \cite{ipa}. + + The \Enc{T3} encoding does \emph{not fulfil} the requirements for \Enc{T} + encodings---the name is a historical accident. The correct name would be + \Enc{X3}, but due to the fact that this font family has been used under its + current encoding name for a long time, the name will not change for + compatibility reasons. + +\end{encodinginfo} + + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{T4} + {African Latin (fc)} % public name + {J\"org Knappen} % author name + {0x00--0xFF} % range(s) of slots used for glyphs + {0x24} % range(s) of slots with variable glyphs if any + {fcr10} % name of an example font + {\cite{tub:JKn93}} + +The African Latin fonts contain in their lower half (0--127) the same +characters as the European Latin (T1-encoded) Fonts, while in their +upper half (128--255) they +contain letters and symbols for African languages that use extended +Latin alphabets. +Due to lack of space, J\"org had to play the unfortunate trick of +assigning \verb=\textdollar= and \verb=\textsterling= +the same position; users should take these characters +from the text companion font, if they are needed. Instead of defining +a lot of new control sequences for the single letters, there are three +accent-like control sequences with general purpose: +\verb=\m= (Modified-1), +\verb=\M= (Modified-2) and +\verb=\B= (Barred). +Most standard \LaTeX{} encoding-dependent commands +work. However, the Icelandic special letters are not available and `best +replacements' for \verb=\Th=, \verb=\th=, and \verb=\dh= +are used (barred T and d resp.). +\end{encodinginfo} + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{T5} + {Vietnamese encoding} + {Werner Lemberg and + Vladimir Volovich} + {0x00--0xFF} + {---} + {vnr10} + {\cite{vnr}} + + The \Enc{T5} encoding was developed for Vietnamese. Again, this encoding + \emph{does not} conform to the requirements for a \Enc{T}-encoding + because its large number of accented letters prevent the \verb=\lccode= and + \verb=\uccode= mapping requirements for \Enc{T} encodings from being + fulfilled. However, since the Vietnamese language does not + use word division in typesetting so that this requirement is + actually not important for this particular language. + Since every glyph used in Vietnamese text is internally + represented as \textsc{licr} macros, the commands \verb=\MakeUppercase= and + \verb=\MakeLowercase= still work as expected (as they change the case of the + \textsc{ascii} characters in \textsc{licr} definitions). + +\end{encodinginfo} + +\begin{encodinginfo} + {T6} + {Armenian} + {---} + {---} + {---} + {} + {---} + + This encoding is reserved to permit future expansion of Armenian + \TeX{} to use 256-character (hyphenatable) fonts. +\end{encodinginfo} + +\begin{encodinginfo}{T7} + {Greek encoding} + {---} + {---} + {---} + {} + {---} + +The name is already reserved for a 256 glyph greek encoding. The encoding +itself hasn't been defined so far. + +\end{encodinginfo} + + + +\subsection{256$^-$ glyph encodings (text symbols)} + +\begin{encodinginfo}{TS1} + {Text Companion encoding (Cork)} + {J\"org Knappen} + {0x00--0x0D, 0x12, 0x15, 0x16, 0x18--0x1D, 0x20, 0x24, 0x27, 0x2A, + 0x2C--0x3A, 0x3C--0x3E, 0x4D, 0x4F, 0x57, 0x5B, 0x5D--0x60, + 0x62--0x64, 0x6C--0x6E, 0x7E--0xBF, 0xD6, 0xF6} + {---} + {tcrm1000} + {\cite{Knappen:TB17-2-96}} + + The text symbol encoding offers access to symbolic glyphs that are + commonly used in text (for a variety of reasons), and whose style + should vary with the text that surrounds them. + + Unfortunately, the \Enc{TS1} encoding was developed without + reference to the glyphs available in existing commercial fonts. + As a result, only font families + explicitly developed for \TeX{} (i.e., typically originating with + \MF{}) actually contain all glyphs required by the \Enc{TS1} + encoding. Most other font families (whether free or commercial) + often only provide half of the set% +%% +%% don't show the comment if the tables are not generated +%% +\expandafter\ifx\csname r@fonttable:tcrm1000\endcsname\relax +\else + \expandafter\ifx\csname r@fonttable:ptmr8c\endcsname\relax + \else + \space (compare the two tables for \Enc{TS1} on + pages~\pageref{fonttable:tcrm1000} + and~\pageref{fonttable:ptmr8c})% + \fi +\fi. + To improve this situation somewhat, NFSS provides a way to define encoding + subsets on a per family basis in the \Pkg{textcomp} package (which + package offers support for the \Enc{TS1} encoding). +\end{encodinginfo} + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{TS3} + {IPA symbol encoding} + {FUKUI Rei, University of Tokyo} + {0x00--0x0A, 0x20--0x49, 0x50--0x56, 0x70--0x7B} + {---} + {tipx10} + {\cite{Rei:TB17-2-102}} + + The \Enc{TS3} encoding (together with the \Enc{T3} encoding) provides the + glyphs for typesetting phonetic transcriptions following the + guidelines of the International Phonetic Association \cite{ipa}. Support + is offered through the \Pkg{tipa} package. +\end{encodinginfo} + + + + +\subsection{256 glyph encodings (text extended)} +\label{sec:extendedenc} + +\begin{encodinginfo} + {X2} + {Cyrillic glyph container} + {The CyrTUG font team} + {0x00--0xFF} + {---} + {rxrm1000} + {\cite{Berdnikov:eurotex-98}} + + This encoding specifies the glyph container for Cyrillic characters, + which is used in specifying the \Enc{T2A}, \Enc{T2B} and \Enc{T2C} encodings. +\end{encodinginfo} + + + + +\subsection{128$^+$ glyph encodings (mathematics)} + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{OML} + {\TeX{} math italic} + {Donald Ervin Knuth} + {0x00--0x7F} + {---} + {cmmi10} + {\cite[p.430]{A-W:DKn86}} + + The \Enc{OML} encoding contains italic Latin and Greek letters for + use in mathematical formulas (typically used for variables) together + with some symbols. + +\end{encodinginfo} + +\begin{encodinginfo}{OMS} + {\TeX{} math symbol} + {Donald Ervin Knuth} + {0x00--0x7F} + {---} + {cmsy10} + {\cite[p.431]{A-W:DKn86}} + + The \Enc{OMS} encoding contains basic mathematical symbols, + together with an uppercase ``calligraphic'' Latin alphabet. +\end{encodinginfo} + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{OMX} + {\TeX{} math extension} + {Donald Ervin Knuth} + {0x00--0x7F} + {---} + {cmex10} + {\cite[p.432]{A-W:DKn86}} + + \Enc{OMS} encodes mathematical symbols with variable sizes, such as + the $\sum$ sign, which changes its size if used in displayed + formulas, and the construction parts for + brackets, braces and radicals, etc., which can stretch to accommodate + the thing they're enclosing. + +\end{encodinginfo} + + + + +\subsection{256 glyph encodings (mathematics)} + +So far there are no 256 glyph mathematical encodings. A proposal is +given in \cite{ziegler}. + + +\subsection{Other encodings} + +\begin{encodinginfo} + {C..} + {CJK encodings} + {Werner Lemberg} + {0x00--0xFF} + {---} + {} % no font, of course + {\cite{CJK}} + + The \Pkg{CJK} package defines a number of encodings which access Chinese, + Japanese and Korean fonts. + +\end{encodinginfo} + +\begin{encodinginfo} + {E..} + {Experimental encodings} + {---} + {0x00--0xFF} + {all} + {} + {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}} + + As the name indicates, encodings starting with the letter \Enc{E} are + intended for experimental encodings, that are still likely to change. +\end{encodinginfo} + +\begin{encodinginfo}{L..} + {Local encoding (site dependent)} + {---} + {0x00--0xFF} + {all} + {} + {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}} + + `Local' encodings provide the means to develop representation + techniques that are suited to a particular \TeX{} environment. While + the developer has freedom to specify their encoding as he or she + pleases, there is a strong incentive to obey the \LaTeX{} rules for + encodings, since it will otherwise be difficult to compose text using + the encoding. + + At least it was the intention that \Enc{L..} encodings are local and + site dependent. However, a number of such encodings became generally + used without ever getting a different name allocated. + +\end{encodinginfo} + + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{LY1} + {Y\&Y 256 glyph encoding} + {Berthold Horn} + {0x00--0x08, 0x0C, 0x10, 0x12--0xFF} + {\emph{believed none}} + {ptmr8y} + {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}} + + This is an alternative to the \Enc{T1} encoding developed by Y\&Y and + used in their commercial \TeX{} implementation. + +\end{encodinginfo} + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{LV1} + {MicroPress encoding} + {Michael Vulis} + {\emph{unknown}} + {\emph{unknown}} + {} + {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}} + + This is an encoding developed by MicroPress and used for some of their + fonts. + +\end{encodinginfo} + + +\begin{encodinginfo}{LGR} + {Greek 256 glyph encoding} + {\emph{unknown}} + {0x00--0xFF} + {\emph{believed none}} + {grmn1000} + {\cite[p.575]{A-W:MG2004}} + + Currently the main encoding in use for the Greek language. + + This encoding doesn't conform to the restrictions for + \Enc{T}-encodings described in section~\ref{sec:restrictions} on + page~\pageref{sec:restrictions} as it doesn't have \textsc{ascii} + glyphs at all. + +\end{encodinginfo} + + +\begin{encodinginfo} + {PD1} + {PDF DocEncoding} + {Adobe} + {0x08--0x0A, 0x0C, 0x0D, 0x18--0x7E, 0x80--0x9E, 0xA0--0xAE, 0xB0--0xFF} + {---} + {} + {\cite{Adobe:PDF-1.6}, \cite{hyperref}} + + The \Enc{PD1} encoding is a virtual encoding with 256 glyphs needed to + produce bookmarks and similar text in PDF document generated with pdf\LaTeX. + The encoding is ``virtual'' because by design there are no \TeX{} + fonts that cover \Enc{PD1}. Details can be found in appendix D.1 + of~\cite{Adobe:PDF-1.6}. +\end{encodinginfo} + +\begin{encodinginfo} + {PU} + {PDF Unicode Encoding} + {Adobe} + {---} + {---} + {} + {\cite{Adobe:PDF-1.6}, \cite{hyperref}} + + Another virtual encoding (with more than 600 characters) for + Unicode-encoded bookmarks in PDF documents. +\end{encodinginfo} + +\begin{encodinginfo}{U} + {Unknown encoding} + {---} + {potentially 0x00-0xFF} + {all} + {wasy10} + {\cite[p.416]{A-W:MG2004}} + + This encoding should be used for fonts that resist classification, + e.g., when it is clear that there will never be more than one font + using the same encoding. + +\end{encodinginfo} + + + +\section{Restrictions} +\label{sec:restrictions} + + +\subsection{Required glyphs for general text encodings} + +Encodings that are supposed to be used with \LaTeX{} for `general +purpose text fonts' need to have certain fixed glyphs in certain +encoding slots. A `general purpose text font' is one intended for +arbitrary natural language text and not just within special +environments (such as the phonetic alphabet) or just for typesetting +individual symbols (e.g., the text companion font with encoding +\Enc{TS1}). + +This is the case for the following glyphs that have to be in their +\textsc{ascii} positions for general purpose text encodings: +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}[t]{cc} + Glyph & Position \\ \hline + ! & \number`\! \\ + ' & \number`\' \\ + ( & \number`\( \\ + ) & \number`\) \\ + \relax* & \number`\* \\ + + & \number`\+ \\ + , & \number`\, \\ + - & \number`\- \\ + . & \number`\. \\ + / & \number`\/ \\ + 0 \ldots\ 9 & \number`\0\ to \number`\9 \\ + \end{tabular} + \quad + \begin{tabular}[t]{cc} + Glyph & Position \\ \hline + : & \number`\: \\ + ; & \number`\; \\ + = & \number`\= \\ + ? & \number`\? \\ + @ & \number`\@ \\ + A \ldots\ Z & \number`\A\ to \number`\Z \\ + \relax[ & \number`\[ \\ + ] & \number`\] \\ + ` & \number`\` \\ + a \ldots\ z & \number`\a\ to \number`\z \\ +\end{tabular} +\quad +\begin{tabular}[t]{cc} +Glyph\footnotemark & Position \\ \hline +< & \number`\< \\ +> & \number`\> \\ +\string| & \number`\| \\ +\end{tabular}\footnotetext{The requirement for these three glyphs is + violated in the Latin alphabet \Enc{OT} encodings.} +\end{center} +In addition the following glyphs have to be present +somewhere\footnote{The position in this case is not important as they +are generated from ligature programs.} in the encoding together with +corresponding ligature programs to generate them: +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}[t]{cc} +Glyph & Ligature program \\ \hline + `` & \texttt{`\/`} \\ + '' & \texttt{'\/'} \\ + -- & \texttt{-\/-} \\ + --- & \texttt{-\/-\/-} \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} + +This is $33 + 2 * 26 = 85$ positions ``required'', which leaves 171 +positions free. + +If there are free slots available then adding all or some of the +diacritics would be the best way to fill them. + +If there are insufficient slots for the characters needed, a possible +technique is to create a subsidiary encoding, and to move non-letter +characters to it. Since only ``letters'' take part in the hyphenation +algorithm, this technique doesn't affect the appearance of the typeset +result. + +\subsection{The constraints on upper/lower case tables} + +Due to some technical restrictions of \TeX{} related to hyphenation it +is not possible in \LaTeX{} to use more than one \verb=\lccode= or +\verb=\uccode= table. Therefore all encodings need to share these two +tables which are defined to be those of the \Enc{T1} encoding. + +The \Enc{T1} encoding has some nasty peculiarities which make certain slot +positions more or less unusable for other encodings if this +restriction is to be obeyed. This is unfortunate but since \Enc{T1} is well +established and the basis for a large number of languages it seemed +better to live with this situation instead of trying to replace \Enc{T1} with a +slightly better standard (with the result that for a long time +different \LaTeX{} installations would not be able to communicate with +each other because of incompatible font sets). + +The positions that are problematic are as follows. +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{lp{.8\linewidth}} +25 (\char 25) & uppercase maps strangely (same as for 105, \char 105)\\ +26 (\char 26) & uppercase maps strangely (same as for 106, \char 106)\\ +27 (\char 27) & lowercase maps to itself which makes this slot subject + to hyphenation (used to support \Enc{OT1} encoding) \\ +157 (\char 157) & lowercase maps strangely (same as for 73, \char 73) \\ +158 (\char 158) & uppercase maps strangely (same as for 240, \char 240) \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +One way to use such slots is to fill them with ligature glyphs as +\TeX{} will not consult these tables for glyphs constructed through +ligatures programs but instead uses the entries for the individual +glyphs used to produce the ligature. + +A complete listing of the uppercase/lowercase mapping tables is to be +found in section~\ref{sec:uclc-tab} (page \pageref{sec:uclc-tab}). + +\newcount\temp \newcount\tempL \newcount\tempU + +\def\nextstep{\global\tempL=\lccode\temp + \global\tempU=\uccode\temp + \lctablenumbersize\the\temp & + \the\tempL& + \the\tempU&\printlowerupper{\the\temp}{\the\tempL}{\the\tempU}\\ + \global\advance\temp by 1 + \stepprint} + +\def\printlowerupper#1#2#3{\char#1\relax + (\ifnum#2=0\relax--\else\char#2\fi + /\ifnum#3=0\relax--\else\char#3\fi)} + +\def\stepprint{\relax\ifnum\temp<\endval + \let\next=\nextstep + \else + \let\next=\relax + \fi + \next} + +\def\dolctable#1#2{{\temp=#1\relax +\def\endval{#2}% +\setlength\tabcolsep{1.5pt}% +\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}cccc@{}} +pos&lc&uc&glyphs\\\hline +\stepprint +\end{tabular}}} + +\iffalse +\begin{center} +\tiny\let\lctablenumbersize\tiny +\mbox{\dolctable{0}{52}\vrule +\dolctable{52}{104}\vrule +\dolctable{104}{156}\vrule +\dolctable{156}{208}\vrule +\dolctable{208}{256}} +\end{center} +\fi + +\iffalse +\begin{center}\tiny +\mbox{\dolctable{0}{65}\vrule +\dolctable{65}{128}\vrule +\dolctable{128}{193}\vrule +\dolctable{193}{256}} +\end{center} +\fi + + + +\section{Encoding specific commands} + +An encoding specific command is one that generates a glyph (or +glyphs), to produce a graphic effect that may be implemented +differently in different encodings. The encoding specific command +automatically changes its implementation when the encoding changes in +the course of the document. Encoding specific commands figure in +\LaTeX's internal character representation (\textsc{licr}) and are also +discussed in \cite[sec.~7.11.2, p.~442]{A-W:MG2004}. + +The following table only covers the encoding specific commands from +the \Enc{OT1} and \Enc{T1} encodings. Other encodings may specify +additional encoding specific commands. In the table, the first 15 +commands are `accent-like' and need as an argument the character to be +accented. For example, |\v{c}| is the \textsc{licr} for `\v{c}'. + +\begin{tabbing} +\ttverb\textvisiblespace\quad\=bbbbbbbbbbbbbb\=b'b'\=ccccccccccc\kill +\ttverb\`{} \>OT1,T1\> \a`{}\> (grave) \\ +\ttverb\'{} \>OT1,T1\> \a'{}\> (acute) \\ +\ttverb\^{} \>OT1,T1\> \^{}\> (circumflex) \\ +\ttverb\~{} \>OT1,T1\> \~{}\> (tilde) \\ +\ttverb\"{} \>OT1,T1\> \"{}\> (umlaut) \\ +\ttverb\H{} \>OT1,T1\> \H{}\> (Hungarian umlaut) \\ +\ttverb\r{} \>OT1,T1\> \r{}\> (ring) \\ +\ttverb\v{} \>OT1,T1\> \v{}\> (ha\v{c}ek) \\ +\ttverb\u{} \>OT1,T1\> \u{}\> (breve) \\ +\ttverb\t{} \>OT1,T1\> \t{}\> (tie) \\ +\ttverb\={} \>OT1,T1\> \a={}\> (macron) \\ +\ttverb\.{} \>OT1,T1\> \.{}\> (dot) \\ +\ttverb\b{} \>OT1,T1\> \b{}\> (underbar) \\ +\ttverb\c{} \>OT1,T1\> \c{}\> (cedilla) \\ +\ttverb\d{} \>OT1,T1\> \d{}\> (dot under) \\ +\ttverb\k{} \>T1 \> \k{}\> (ogonek) \\ +% \ttverb\AA \>OT1,T1\> \AA \> \\ % no longer +\ttverb\AE \>OT1,T1\> \AE \> \\ +\ttverb\DH \>T1 \> \DH \> \\ +\ttverb\DJ \>T1 \> \DJ \> \\ +\ttverb\L \>OT1,T1\> \L \> \\ +\ttverb\NG \>T1 \> \NG \> \\ +\ttverb\OE \>OT1,T1\> \OE \> \\ +\ttverb\O \>OT1,T1\> \O \> \\ +\ttverb\SS \>OT1,T1\> \SS \> \\ +\ttverb\TH \>T1 \> \TH \> \\ +% \ttverb\aa \>OT1,T1\> \aa \> \\ no-longer +\ttverb\ae \>OT1,T1\> \ae \> \\ +\ttverb\dh \>T1 \> \dh \> \\ +\ttverb\dj \>T1 \> \dj \> \\ +\ttverb\guillemotleft \>T1 \> \guillemotleft \> (guillemet) \\ +\ttverb\guillemotright \>T1 \> \guillemotright \> (guillemet) \\ +\ttverb\guilsinglleft \>T1 \> \guilsinglleft \> (guillemet) \\ +\ttverb\guilsinglright \>T1 \> \guilsinglright \> (guillemet) \\ +\ttverb\i \>OT1,T1\> \i \> \\ +\ttverb\j \>OT1,T1\> \j \> \\ +\ttverb\l \>OT1,T1\> \l \> \\ +\ttverb\ng \>T1 \> \ng \> \\ +\ttverb\oe \>OT1,T1\> \oe \> \\ +\ttverb\o \>OT1,T1\> \o \> \\ +\ttverb\quotedblbase \>T1 \> \quotedblbase \> \\ +\ttverb\quotesinglbase \>T1 \> \quotesinglbase \> \\ +\ttverb\ss \>OT1,T1\> \ss \> \\ +\ttverb\textasciicircum \>OT1,T1\> \textasciicircum \> \\ +\ttverb\textasciitilde \>OT1,T1\> \textasciitilde \> \\ +\ttverb\textbackslash \>OT1,T1\> \textbackslash \> \\ +\ttverb\textbar \>OT1,T1\> \textbar \> \\ +\ttverb\textbraceleft \>OT1,T1\> \textbraceleft \> \\ +\ttverb\textbraceright \>OT1,T1\> \textbraceright \> \\ +\ttverb\textcompwordmark \>OT1,T1\> \textcompwordmark\> (invisible) \\ +\ttverb\textdollar \>OT1,T1\> \textdollar \> \\ +\ttverb\textemdash \>OT1,T1\> \textemdash \> \\ +\ttverb\textendash \>OT1,T1\> \textendash \> \\ +\ttverb\textexclamdown \>OT1,T1\> \textexclamdown \> \\ +\ttverb\textgreater \>OT1,T1\> \textgreater \> \\ +\ttverb\textless \>OT1,T1\> \textless \> \\ +\ttverb\textquestiondown \>OT1,T1\> \textquestiondown\> \\ +\ttverb\textquotedbl \>T1 \> \textquotedbl \> \\ +\ttverb\textquotedblleft \>OT1,T1\> \textquotedblleft\> \\ +\ttverb\textquotedblright \>OT1,T1\> \textquotedblright\> \\ +\ttverb\textquoteleft \>OT1,T1\> \textquoteleft \> \\ +\ttverb\textquoteright \>OT1,T1\> \textquoteright \> \\ +\ttverb\textregistered \>OT1,T1\> \textregistered \> \\ +\ttverb\textsection \>OT1,T1\> \textsection \> \\ +\ttverb\textsterling \>OT1,T1\> \textsterling \> \\ +\ttverb\texttrademark \>OT1,T1\> \texttrademark \> \\ +\ttverb\textunderscore \>OT1,T1\> \textunderscore \> \\ +\ttverb\textvisiblespace \>OT1,T1\> \textvisiblespace\> \\ +\ttverb\th \>T1 \> \th \> +\end{tabbing} + +\section{Encodings for Unicode based \TeX\ systems} +\label{sec:unicode} + +The preceding text has assumed a classic TeX system that is +restricted to the use of fonts with at most 256 characters. In order +to accommodate all the characters needed for different languages and +mathematics it is necessary to have multiple encodings as described +above, and \LaTeX\ needs to be aware of the encoding used for each +font. + +Unicode aims to provide a single encoding that removes most of the +need to switch encodings, apart from very specialist use for non-standard characters. Rather than assign codes in the range 0--256 (hex +FF) Unicode codes are in the range 0--1,114,111 (hex 10FFFF), although +not all slots are available for distinct characters for technical +reasons. Unicode offers the possibility to use a single input encoding +(usually UTF-8) for all documents and to use essentially the same +Unicode encoding for all fonts, so removing the need to switch +encodings in different contexts. + +Omega was perhaps the first widely used \TeX\ extension that +supported Unicode. Currently the two actively supported systems that are +present in most modern \TeX\ distributions are Xe\TeX\ and Lua\TeX. + +When used with these extended \TeX\ engines, \LaTeX's font system can +refer to Unicode fonts (typically OpenType fonts installed system-wide +on your operating system rather than fonts specifically encoded/installed for +\TeX). Currently the usual method of accessing these fonts is through +the contributed \Pkg{fontspec} package. This uses as encoding \Enc{TU}: +``\TeX{} Unicode'' (historically two experimental encodings \Enc{EU1} +and \Enc{EU2} +were used, depending on the engine, but these are deprecated). +The exact rules for \LaTeX\ encodings +for Unicode engines have not yet been finalised in terms of the (usual) +requirement that each slot should be defined. (This is not realistic for +a Unicode font, as almost all fonts address subsets of the full range.) +It is rare to need to specify the \Enc{TU} encoding a document as the +\Pkg{fontspec} package sets up the correct encoding when loaded. + +The restrictions described in section \ref{sec:restrictions} do not +apply, or need to be modified in a Unicode based engine. Clearly the +lowercase table (and hyphenation patterns) can not be restricted to +the values used for \Enc{T1} and do only refer to the first 256 +characters. + +When the \LaTeX\ format is made \LaTeX\ sets up the lowercase table +and classifies characters as letter- or non-letter-based on \Enc{T1} if +a classic \TeX\ or pdf\TeX\ is being used. If a Unicode based \TeX\ is +detected, the values are instead based on the classification and +lower-case mappings provided by the Unicode Character Database +\cite{ucd}. The \LaTeX{} team have written a generic loader bundle, +\Pkg{unicode-data}, which provides the mechanism to load this information +directly from the Unicode Character Database data files and which is read +when a Unicode-compliant engine is detected during format-building. + +Similarly in the default configuration files used by modern \TeX\ +distribution, the hyphenation files for each supported language are +written in UTF-8 encoding, using Unicode code points for all letters, +then if a classic \TeX\ system is detected, some additional macros are +loaded to convert these files to 256-character encodings where +possible, and assuming the \Enc{T1} lowercase table. For Unicode engines +no conversion takes place. (The hyphenation patterns for a small number of +languages require that some punctuation characters have non-zero +c values. This are set during pattern reading, and may at some +stage in the future use the e-\TeX{} \verb=\savinghyphcodes= mechanism to +avoid any need to manipulate \verb=\lccode= in the document.) + + + + +\begin{thebibliography}{99} +\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\numberline{\relax}\refname} + + +\bibitem{Adobe:PDF-1.6} \emph{\textsc{PDF} reference}: + Adobe portable document format version~1.6. Adobe Systems + Incorporated, 2005. % why \textsuperscript{3}? + \url{http://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/pdf/PDFReference16.pdf}. + +\bibitem{Beeton:TB6-3-124} Barbara Beeton: + \emph{Mathematical symbols and cyrillic fonts ready for + distribution}. In: TUGBoat, 6\#3), 1985. + \url{http://tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb06-3/tb13beetcyr.pdf}. + +\bibitem{beeton} Barbara Beeton: \emph{Unicode + and math, a combination whose time has come -- Finally!}. In: + TUGBoat, 21\#3, 2000. + \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb21-3/tb68beet.pdf}. + + +\bibitem{Berdnikov:eurotex-98} A.\@ Berdnikov, O.\@ + Lapko, M.\@ Kolodin, A.\@ Janishevsky and + A.\@ Burykin: \emph{The Encoding Paradigm in + \LaTeXe{} and the Projected X2 Encoding for Cyrillic Texts}. + Euro\TeX~98. + \url{http://www.gutenberg.eu.org/pub/GUTenberg/publicationsPDF/28-29-berdnikova.pdf}. + +\bibitem{CJK} \emph{The \Pkg{CJK} package}: + \url{http://cjk.ffii.org}. + +\bibitem{clasen} Matthias Clasen: \emph{A new + implementation of \LaTeX{} math}, 1997-98. + \url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/papers/current/newmath.ps.gz}. + +\bibitem{clasen-vieth} Matthias Clasen and Ulrik + Vieth: \emph{Towards a new Math Font Encoding + for (La)\TeX}. March 1998, + \url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/papers/current/mfg-euro-all.ps.gz}. + +\bibitem{CorkGW:91} +Dean Guenther and Janene Winter. +\newblock An international phonetic alphabet. +\newblock In Guenther \cite{proc:MGu91}, pages 149--156. +\newblock Published as {TUG}boat 12\#1. + +\bibitem{proc:MGu91} +Mary Guenther, editor. +\newblock {\em {\TeX} 90 Conference Proceedings}, March 1991. +\newblock Published as {TUG}boat 12\#1. + +\bibitem{tub:MFe90} +Michael~J. Ferguson. +\newblock Report on multilingual activities. +\newblock {\em {TUG}boat}, 11(4):514--516, 1990. + +\bibitem{fontinst} \emph{The \Pkg{fontinst} package}: + \textlangle CTAN\textrangle\url{/fonts/utilities/fontinst}. + +\bibitem{Rei:TB17-2-102} Fukui Rei: + \emph{\textsl{TIPA}: A system for processing phonetic + symbols in \LaTeX}. In: TUGBoat, 17\#, 1996. + \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb17-2/tb51rei.pdf}. + +\bibitem{hyperref} \emph{The \Pkg{hyperref} package}: + \url{http://www.tug.org/applications/hyperref}. + +\bibitem{tub:JKn93} +J\"org Knappen. +\newblock Fonts for Africa: The fc Fonts. +\newblock {\em {TUG}boat}, 14(2):104, 1993. + +\bibitem{Knappen:TB17-2-96} J\"org Knappen: + \emph{The \Pkg{dc} fonts~1.3: Move towards stability + and completeness}. In: TUGBoat 17\#2, 1996. + \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb17-2/tb51knap.pdf}. + +\bibitem{A-W:DKn86} +Donald~E. Knuth. +\newblock {\em The {\TeX}book}. +\newblock Volume~A of {\em Computers \& {T}ypesetting\/}, + May 1989. +\newblock Eight printing. + +\bibitem{vnr} \emph{The \Pkg{vnr} font family}, developed by + the author of pdf\TeX, {H\`an Th\^e\protect\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{\relax}}} Th\`anh}. + \url{http://vntex.org/download/vntex}. + + \bibitem{ipa} Home page of the International Phonetic Association. + \url{http://www.arts.gla.ac.uk/IPA/ipa.html} + +\bibitem{A-W:LLa94} +Leslie Lamport. +\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994. + +\bibitem{LH-Fonts} \emph{The \Pkg{lh}-Fonts for Cyrillic}: + \textlangle CTAN\textrangle\url{/fonts/cyrillic/lh}. + +\bibitem{A-W:MG2004} +Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion second edition}. +\newblock With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2004. + +\bibitem{Unicode} \emph{The Unicode Standard}. + \url{http://unicode.org}. + +\bibitem{ucd} \emph{The Unicode Character Database}. + \url{http://unicode.org/ucd}. + +\bibitem{ziegler} Justin Ziegler, \emph{Technical + Report on Math Font Encodings}, June 1994, + \url{http://www.tug.org/twg/mfg/papers/ltx3pub/l3d007.ps.gz}. + +\end{thebibliography} + +\clearpage\appendix +\begin{center} + \Large\bfseries Appendices +\end{center} + +\section{Example code tables} + +This appendix contains a table of each font mentioned as an ``example'' +font above, providing that the font was available when the document +was processed with \LaTeX{}. (\LaTeX{} generates a warning message +for each font it fails to find.) + +\subsection{Text encodings} + +\ftable{cmr10}{OT1} + +\ftable{wnr10}{OT2} + +\ftable{wsuipa10}{OT3} + +\ftable{plr10}{OT4} + +%\ftable{artmr10}{OT6} + +\ftable{ecrm1000}{T1} + +\ftable{larm1000}{T2A} + +\ftable{lbrm1000}{T2B} + +\ftable{lcrm1000}{T2C} + +\ftable{tipa10}{T3} + +\ftable{fcr10}{T4} + +\ftable{vnr10}{T5} + + +\subsection{Text symbol encodings} + +The full table for \Enc{TS1} as provided by European Computer Modern family: +\ftable{tcrm1000}{TS1} + +\pagebreak + +In contrast typical PostScript fonts usually have incomplete implementations +of \Enc{TS1} sometimes missing more than half of the glyphs: + +\ftable{ptmr8c}{TS1} + +\ftable{tipx10}{TS3} + + + +\subsection{Extended text encodings} + +\ftable{rxrm1000}{X2} + + +\subsection{Mathematical encodings} + +\ftable{cmmi10}{OML} + +\ftable{cmsy10}{OMS} + +\ftable{cmex10}{OMX} + + +\subsection{Other encodings} + +\ftable{ptmr8y}{LY1} + +%%\ftable{????}{LV1} + +\ftable{grmn1000}{LGR} + +\ftable{wasy10}{U} +\ftable{logo10}{U} + +\clearpage +\section{Uppercase and lowercase tables} +\label{sec:uclc-tab} + +The following two sets of tables list the \verb"\uppercase" and +\verb"\lowercase" values for each position in the \LaTeX{} standard +256-character tables. + +Each row of each table lists: +\begin{quote} + \begin{tabular}{lp{0.7\textwidth}} + pos & The position in the table (0-255) \\ + lc & The value in the \verb"\lowercase" table at the position \\ + & (note that value 0 here means that \verb"\lowercase" is + ineffective for this character, and hyphenation does not apply + to it) \\ + uc & The value in the \verb"\uppercase" table at the position \\ + & (note that value 0 here means that \verb"\uppercase" is + ineffective for this character) \\ + glyphs & The glyphs specified for the T1 encoding for this + position, laid out as \meta{glyph}\textbf{(}\meta{lowercase + glyph}\textbf{/}\meta{uppercase glyph}\textbf{)} + \end{tabular} +\end{quote} + +\begin{center} + \let\lctablenumbersize\footnotesize + \makebox[\textwidth]{\hss + \dolctable{0}{32}\quad\dolctable{32}{64}\quad + \dolctable{64}{96}\quad\dolctable{96}{128}% + \hss} + + \makebox[\textwidth]{\hss + \dolctable{128}{160}\quad\dolctable{160}{192}\quad + \dolctable{192}{224}\quad\dolctable{224}{256}% + \hss} +\end{center} +\end{document} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/exscale.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/exscale.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d2f4ce540c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/exscale.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6011bf720aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fix-cm.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..99008de40bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..92dd6d1a848 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/fntguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1907 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993-2019 +% +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: fntguide.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] + +\title{\LaTeXe{} font selection} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2019, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{July 2019} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} + +This document describes the new font selection features of the \LaTeX{} +Document Preparation System. It is intended for package writers who +want to write font-loading packages similar to |times| or |latexsym|. + +This document is only a brief introduction to the new facilities and +is intended for package writers who are familiar with \TeX{} fonts and +\LaTeX{} packages. It is \emph{neither} a user-guide \emph{nor} a +reference manual for fonts in \LaTeXe. + +\subsection{\LaTeXe~fonts} + +The most important difference between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is the +way that fonts are selected. In \LaTeX~2.09, the Computer Modern fonts +were built into the \LaTeX~format, and so customizing \LaTeX{} to use +other fonts was a major effort. + +In \LaTeXe, very few fonts are built into the format, and there are +commands to load new text and math fonts. Packages such as |times| or +|latexsym| allow authors to access these fonts. +This document describes how to write similar font-loading packages. + +The \LaTeXe{} font selection system was first released as the `New Font +Selection Scheme' (NFSS) in 1989, and then in release~2 in 1993. +\LaTeXe{} includes NFSS release~2 as standard. + +\subsection{Overview} + +This document contains an overview of the new font commands +of \LaTeX. + +\begin{description} + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:text}] describes the commands for selecting fonts + in classes and packages. It lists the five \LaTeX{} font + attributes, and lists the commands for selecting fonts. It also + describes how to customize the author commands such as |\textrm| and + |\textit| to suit your document design. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:math}] explains the commands for controlling + \LaTeX{} math fonts. It describes how to specify new math fonts and + new math symbols. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:install}] explains how to install new fonts into + \LaTeX. It shows how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{} + font names, and how to specify your own fonts using font definition + files. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:encode}] discusses text font encodings. + It describes how to declare a new encoding and how to define + commands, such as |\AE| or |\"|, which have different definitions in + different encodings, depending on whether ligatures, etc.\ are + available in the encoding. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:misc}] covers font miscellanea. It describes how + \LaTeX{} performs font substitution, how to customize fonts that are + preloaded in the \LaTeX{} format, and the naming conventions used in + \LaTeX{} font selection. + +\end{description} + +\subsection{Further information} + +For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of +\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook}, +Leslie Lamport, Addison Wesley, 2nd~ed, 1994. + +A more detailed description of the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is to +be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}, 2nd~ed, by Mittelbach and Goossens, Addison +Wesley, 2004. + +The \LaTeX{} font selection scheme is based on \TeX, which is described +by its developer in \emph{The \TeX book}, Donald E.~Knuth, Addison +Wesley, 1986, revised in 1991 to include the features of \TeX~3. + +Sebastian Rahtz's |psnfss| software contains the software for using a +large number of Type~1 fonts (including the Adobe Laser Writer 35 and +the Monotype CD-ROM fonts) in \LaTeX. It should be available from the +same source as your copy of \LaTeX. + +The |psnfss| software uses fonts generated by Alan Jeffrey's +|fontinst| software. This can convert fonts from Adobe Font Metric +format into a format readable by \LaTeX, including the generation of +the font definition files described in Section~\ref{Sec:install}. The +|fontinst| software should be available from the same source as your +copy of \LaTeX. + +Whenever practical, \LaTeX{} uses the font naming scheme called +`fontname'; this was described in \emph{Filenames for fonts},% +\footnote{An up-to-date electronic version +of this document can be found on any CTAN server, in the directory +\texttt{info/fontname}.} +\emph{TUGboat}~11(4),~1990. + +The class-writer's guide \emph{\clsguide} describes +the new \LaTeX{} features for writers of document classes and packages +and is kept in |clsguide.tex|. Configuring +\LaTeX{} is covered by the guide \emph{\cfgguide} in +\texttt{cfgguide.tex} whilst the philosophy behind our policy on +modifying \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\modguide} in +\texttt{modguide.tex}. + +The documented source code (from the files used to produce +the kernel format via |latex.ltx|) is now available as +\emph{The \LaTeXe\ Sources}. +This very large document also includes an index of \LaTeX{} +commands. It can be typeset from the \LaTeX{} file |source2e.tex| +in the |base| directory; this uses the class file |ltxdoc.cls|. + +For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your +local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group. +Addresses and other details can be found at: +\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs} + \texttt{http://www.tug.org/lugs.html} +\end{quote} + + +\section{Text fonts} +\label{Sec:text} + +This section describes the commands available to class and package +writers for specifying and selecting fonts. + +\subsection{Text font attributes} + +Every text font in \LaTeX{} has five \emph{attributes}: +\begin{description} + +\item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the + font. The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are + Knuth's `\TeX{} text' encoding, and the `\TeX{} text extended' + encoding developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{} + Conference at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name `Cork encoding'). + +\item[family] The name for a collection of fonts, usually grouped under + a common name by the font foundry. For example, `Adobe Times', `ITC + Garamond', and Knuth's `Computer Modern Roman' are all font families. + +\item[series] How heavy and/or expanded a font is. For example, `medium + weight', `narrow' and `bold extended' are all series. + +\item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family. For + example, `italic', `oblique' and `upright' (sometimes called + `roman') are all font shapes. + +\item[size] The design size of the font, for example `10pt'. If no + dimension is specified, `pt' is assumed. + +\end{description} +The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by +\LaTeX. The most common values for the font encoding are: +\begin{center} +\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |OT1| & \TeX{} text \\ + |T1| & \TeX{} extended text \\ + |OML| & \TeX{} math italic \\ + |OMS| & \TeX{} math symbols \\ + |OMX| & \TeX{} math large symbols \\ + |U| & Unknown \\ + |L<xx>| & A local encoding + \end{tabular} +\end{minipage} +\end{center} +The `local' encodings are intended for font encodings which are only +locally available, for example a font containing an organization's +logo in various sizes. + +There are far too many font families to list them all, but some common +ones are: +\begin{center} +\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |cmr| & Computer Modern Roman \\ + |cmss| & Computer Modern Sans \\ + |cmtt| & Computer Modern Typewriter \\ + |cmm| & Computer Modern Math Italic \\ + |cmsy| & Computer Modern Math Symbols \\ + |cmex| & Computer Modern Math Extensions \\ + |ptm| & Adobe Times \\ + |phv| & Adobe Helvetica \\ + |pcr| & Adobe Courier + \end{tabular} +\end{minipage} +\end{center} +\NEWdescription{2019/07/10} +The font series is denoting a combination of the weight (boldness) and +the width (amount of expansion). The standard supported for weights +and widths are: +\begin{center} +%\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |ul| & Ultra Light \\ + |el| & Extra Light \\ + |l| & Light \\ + |sl| & Semi Light \\ + |m| & Medium (normal)\\ + |sb| & Semi Bold \\ + |b| & Bold \\ + |eb| & Extra Bold \\ + |ub| & Ultra Bold \\ + \end{tabular} +\qquad + \begin{tabular}{rlr} + |uc| & Ultra Condensed & 50\% \\ + |ec| & Extra Condensed & 62.5\% \\ + |c| & Condensed & 75\% \\ + |sc| & Semi Condensed & 87.5\% \\ + |m| & Medium & 100\% \\ + |sx| & Semi Expanded & 112.5\% \\ + |x| & Expanded & 125\% \\ + |ex| & Extra Expanded & 150\% \\ + |ux| & Ultra Expanded & 200\% \\ + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +These are concatenated to a single series value except that |m| is +dropped unless both weight and width are medium in which case a single +|m| is used. + +\newpage + +Examples for series values are then: +\begin{center} +\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |m| & Medium weight and width \\ + |b| & Bold weight, medium width \\ + |bx| & Bold extended \\ + |sb| & Semi-bold, medium width\\ + |sbx| & Semi-bold extended\\ + |c| & Medium weight, condensed width + \end{tabular} +\end{minipage} +\end{center} +\NEWdescription{2019/07/10} +Note, that there are a large variety of names floating around like +``regular'', ``black'', ``demi-bold'', ``thin'', ``heavy'' and many +more. If at all possible they should be matched into the standard +naming scheme to allow for sensible default substitutions if +necessary, e.g., ``demi-bold'' is normally just another name for +``semi-bold'', so should get |sb| assigned, etc. + +The most common values for the font shape are: +\begin{center} +\begin{minipage}{.7\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |n| & Normal (that is `upright' or `roman') \\ + |it| & Italic \\ + |sl| & Slanted (or `oblique') \\ + |sc| & Caps and small caps + \end{tabular} +\end{minipage} +\end{center} +The font size is specified as a dimension, for example |10pt| or +|1.5in| or |3mm|; if no unit is specified, |pt| is assumed. These five +parameters specify every \LaTeX{} font, for example: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{@{}r@{\,}l@{\,}c@{\,}c@{\,}cc@{}r@{}} + \multicolumn{5}{@{}c}{\emph{\LaTeX{} specification}} & + \emph{Font} & + \emph{\TeX{} font name} \\ + |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| & |10| & + Computer Modern Roman 10 point & + |cmr10| \\ + |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |sl| & |1pc| & + Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica & + |cmssi12| \\ + |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| & |10pt| & + Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point & + |cmmi10| \\ + |T1| & |ptm| & |b| & |it| & |1in| & + Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch & + |ptmb8t at 1in| + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +These five parameters are displayed whenever \LaTeX{} gives an overfull +box warning, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + Overfull \hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314--318 + []\OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal, +\end{verbatim} +The author commands for fonts set the five attributes: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{rcl} + \emph{Author command} & + \emph{Attribute} & + \emph{Value in} |article| \emph{class} \\ + |\textnormal{..}| or |\normalfont| & family & |cmr| \\ + |\textrm{..}| or |\rmfamily| & family & |cmr| \\ + |\textsf{..}| or |\sffamily| & family & |cmss| \\ + |\texttt{..}| or |\ttfamily| & family & |cmtt| \\ + |\textmd{..}| or |\mdseries| & series & |m| \\ + |\textbf{..}| or |\bfseries| & series & |bx| \\ + |\textup{..}| or |\upshape| & shape & |n| \\ + |\textit{..}| or |\itshape| & shape & |it| \\ + |\textsl{..}| or |\slshape| & shape & |sl| \\ + |\textsc{..}| or |\scshape| & shape & |sc| \\ + |\tiny| & size & |5pt| \\ + |\scriptsize| & size & |7pt| \\ + |\footnotesize| & size & |8pt| \\ + |\small| & size & |9pt| \\ + |\normalsize| & size & |10pt| \\ + |\large| & size & |12pt| \\ + |\Large| & size & |14.4pt| \\ + |\LARGE| & size & |17.28pt| \\ + |\huge| & size & |20.74pt| \\ + |\Huge| & size & |24.88pt| + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +The values used by these commands are determined by the document class, +using the parameters defined in Section~\ref{Sec:text.param}. + +Note that there are no author commands for selecting new encodings. +These should be provided by packages, such as the |fontenc| package. + +This section does not explain how \LaTeX{} font specifications are +turned into \TeX{} font names. This is described in +Section~\ref{Sec:install}. + +\subsection{Selection commands} + +The low-level commands used to select a text font are as follows. + +\begin{decl} +|\fontencoding| \arg{encoding} \\ +|\fontfamily| \arg{family}\\ +|\fontseries| \arg{series}\\ +|\fontshape| \arg{shape}\\ +|\fontsize| \arg{size} \arg{baselineskip}\\ +|\linespread| \arg{factor} +\end{decl} + +\NEWdescription{1998/12/01} +Each of the commands starting with |\font...| sets one of the font +attributes; |\fontsize| also sets |\baselineskip|. The |\linespread| +command prepares to multiply the current (or newly defined) +|\baselineskip| with \m{factor} (e.g., spreads the lines apart for +values greater one). + +The actual font in use is not altered by these commands, but the +current attributes are used to determine which font and baseline skip +to use after the next |\selectfont| command. + + +\begin{decl} +|\selectfont| +\end{decl} +Selects a text font, based on the current values of the font attributes. + +\emph{Warning}: There \emph{must} be a |\selectfont| command +immediately after any settings of the font parameters by (some of) +the six commands above, before any following text. +For example, it is legal to say: +\begin{verbatim} + \fontfamily{ptm}\fontseries{b}\selectfont Some text. +\end{verbatim} +but it is \emph{not} legal to say: +\begin{verbatim} + \fontfamily{ptm} Some \fontseries{b}\selectfont text. +\end{verbatim} +You may get unexpected results if you put text between a +|\font<parameter>| command (or |\linespread|) and a |\selectfont|. + +\begin{decl} +|\usefont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} +\end{decl} +A short hand for the equivalent |\font...| commands followed by a +call to |\selectfont|. + + +\subsection{Internals} + +The current values of the font attributes are held in internal macros. + +\begin{decl} + |\f@encoding| \\ + |\f@family| \\ + |\f@series| \\ + |\f@shape| \\ + |\f@size| \\ + |\f@baselineskip| \\ + |\tf@size| \\ + |\sf@size| \\ + |\ssf@size| +\end{decl} + +These hold the current values of the encoding, the family, the series, +the shape, the size, the baseline skip, the main math size, the +`script' math size and the `scriptscript' math size. The last three +are accessible only within a formula; outside of math they may contain +arbitrary values. + +For example, to set the size to 12 without +changing the baseline skip: +\begin{verbatim} + \fontsize{12}{\f@baselineskip} +\end{verbatim} +However, you should \emph{never} alter the values of the internal +commands directly; they must only be modified using the low-level +commands like |\fontfamily|, |\fontseries|, etc. If you disobey this +warning you might produce code that loops. + +\subsection{Parameters for author commands} +\label{Sec:text.param} + +The parameter values set by author commands such as |\textrm| and +|\rmfamily|, etc.\ are not hard-wired into \LaTeX; instead these +commands use the values of a number of parameters set by the document +class and packages. For example, |\rmdefault| is the name of the +default family selected by |\textrm| and |\rmfamily|. Thus to set a +document in Adobe Times, Helvetica and Courier, the document designer +specifies: +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} + \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} + \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\encodingdefault| \\ + |\familydefault| \\ + |\seriesdefault| \\ + |\shapedefault| +\end{decl} +The encoding, family, series and shape of the main body font. By +default these are |OT1|, |\rmdefault|, |m| and |n|. Note that since +the default family is |\rmdefault|, this means that changing +|\rmdefault| will change the main body font of the document. + +\begin{decl} + |\rmdefault| \\ + |\sfdefault| \\ + |\ttdefault| +\end{decl} +The families selected by |\textrm|, |\rmfamily|, |\textsf|, +|\sffamily|, |\texttt| and |\ttfamily|. By default these are |cmr|, +|cmss| and |cmtt|. + +\begin{decl} + |\bfdefault| \\ + |\mddefault| +\end{decl} +The series selected by |\textbf|, |\bfseries|, |\textmd| and +|\mdseries|. By default these are |bx| and |m|. +These values are suitable for the default families used. If other +fonts are used as standard document fonts (for example, certain +PostScript fonts) it might be necessary to adjust the value of +|\bfdefault| to |b| since only a few such families have a `bold +extended' series. An alternative (taken for the fonts provided by +|psnfss|) is to define silent substitutions from |bx| series to |b| +series with special |\DeclareFontShape| declarations and the |ssub| +size function, see Section~\ref{sec:sizefunct}. + + +\begin{decl} + |\itdefault| \\ + |\sldefault| \\ + |\scdefault| \\ + |\updefault| +\end{decl} +The shapes selected by |\textit|, |\itshape|, |\textsl|, |\slshape|, +|\textsc|, |\scshape|, |\textup| and |\upshape|. By default these are +|it|, |sl|, |sc| and |n|. + +Note that there are no parameters for the size commands. These should +be defined directly in class files, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\normalsize}{\fontsize{10}{12}\selectfont} +\end{verbatim} +More elaborate examples (setting additional parameters when the text +size is changed) can be found in |classes.dtx| the source +documentation for the classes |article|, |report|, and |book|. + + +\subsection{Special font declaration commands} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFixedFont| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} \arg{size} +\end{decl} + +Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch which selects the font +that is specified by the attributes \m{encoding}, \m{family}, +\m{series}, \m{shape}, and \m{size}. + +The font is selected without any adjustments to baselineskip and other +surrounding conditions. + +This example makes |{\picturechar .}| select a small dot very quickly: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFixedFont{\picturechar}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{5} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareTextFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{font-switches} +\end{decl} + +Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font command with one argument. +The current font attributes are locally modified by \m{font-switches} +and then the argument of \m{cmd} is typeset in the resulting new font. + +Commands defined by |\DeclareTextFontCommand| automatically take care +of any necessary italic correction (on either side). + +The following example shows how |\textrm| is defined by the kernel. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textrm}{\rmfamily} +\end{verbatim} + +To define a command that always typeset its argument in the italic +shape of the main document font you could declare: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextFontCommand{\normalit}{\normalfont\itshape} +\end{verbatim} + +This declaration can be used to change the meaning of a command; if +\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined +is put in the transcript file. + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareOldFontCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{text-switch} + \arg{math-switch} +\end{decl} + +Declares command \m{cmd} to be a font switch (i.e.~used with the +syntax |{<cmd>...}|) having the definition \m{text-switch} +when used in text and the definition \m{math-switch} when used in a +formula. +Math alphabet commands, like |\mathit|, when used within \m{math-switch} +should not have an argument. Their use in this argument causes their +semantics to change so that they here act as a font switch, as +required by the usage of the \m{cmd}. + +This declaration is useful for setting up commands like |\rm| to behave +as they did in \LaTeX~2.09. We strongly urge you \emph{not} to misuse +this declaration to invent new font commands. + +The following example defines |\it| to produce the italic shape of the +main document font if used in text and to switch to the font that would +normally be produced by the math alphabet |\mathit| if used in a +formula. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} +\end{verbatim} + +This declaration can be used to change the meaning of a command; if +\m{cmd} is already defined, a log that it has been redefined +is put in the transcript file. + + +\section{Math fonts} +\label{Sec:math} + +This section describes the commands available to class and package +writers for specifying math fonts and math commands. + +\subsection{Math font attributes} + +The selection of fonts within math mode is quite different to that of +text fonts. + +Some math fonts are selected explicitly by one-argument commands such +as |\mathsf{max}| or |\mathbf{vec}|; such fonts are called \emph{math +alphabets}. These math alphabet commands affect only the font used +for letters and symbols of type |\mathalpha| (see +Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands}); other symbols within the argument +will be left unchanged. The predefined math alphabets are: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + \emph{Alphabet} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\ + |\mathnormal| & default & $abcXYZ$ \\ + |\mathrm| & roman & $\mathrm{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathbf| & bold roman & $\mathbf{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathsf| & sans serif & $\mathsf{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathit| & text italic & $\mathit{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathtt| & typewriter & $\mathtt{abcXYZ}$ \\ + |\mathcal| & calligraphic & $\mathcal{XYZ}$ + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +Other math fonts are selected implicitly by \TeX{} for symbols, with +commands such as |\oplus| (producing $\oplus$) or with straight +characters like |>>| or |+|. Fonts containing such math symbols are +called \emph{math symbol fonts}. The predefined math symbol fonts +are: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + \emph{Symbol font} & \emph{Description} & \emph{Example} \\ + |operators| & symbols from |\mathrm| & $[\;+\;]$ \\ + |letters| & symbols from |\mathnormal| & $<<\star>>$ \\ + |symbols| & most \LaTeX{} symbols & $\leq*\geq$ \\ + |largesymbols| & large symbols & $\sum\prod\int$ + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +Some math fonts are both \emph{math alphabets} and \emph{math symbol +fonts}, for example |\mathrm| and |operators| are the same font, and +|\mathnormal| and |letters| are the same font. + +Math fonts in \LaTeX{} have the same five attributes as text fonts: +encoding, family, series, shape and size. However, there are no +commands that allow the attributes to be individually changed. +Instead, the conversion from math fonts to these five attributes is +controlled by the \emph{math version}. For example, the |normal| math +version maps: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{rlc@{ }c@{ }c@{ }c} + \multicolumn{2}{c}{\emph{Math font}} & + \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{External font}} \\ + \emph{Alphabets} & \emph{Symbol fonts} & + \multicolumn{4}{c}{\emph{Attributes}} \\ + |\mathnormal| & |letters| & |OML| & |cmm| & |m| & |it| \\ + |\mathrm| & |operators| & |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |n| \\ + |\mathcal| & |symbols| & |OMS| & |cmsy| & |m| & |n| \\ + & |largesymbols| & |OMX| & |cmex| & |m| & |n| \\ + |\mathbf| & & |OT1| & |cmr| & |bx| & |n| \\ + |\mathsf| & & |OT1| & |cmss| & |m| & |n| \\ + |\mathit| & & |OT1| & |cmr| & |m| & |it| \\ + |\mathtt| & & |OT1| & |cmtt| & |m| & |n| + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +The |bold| math version is similar except that it contains bold fonts. +The command |\boldmath| selects the |bold| math version. + +Math versions can only be changed outside of math mode. + +The two predefined math versions are: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{rl} + |normal| & the default math version \\ + |bold| & the bold math version + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +Packages may define new math alphabets, math symbol fonts, and math +versions. This section describes the commands for writing such +packages. + +\subsection{Selection commands} + +There are no commands for selecting symbol fonts. Instead, these are +selected indirectly through symbol commands like |\oplus|. +Section~\ref{Sec:math.commands} explains how to define symbol commands. + +\begin{decl} + |\mathnormal{<math>}|\\ + |\mathcal{<math>}|\\ + |\mathrm{<math>}|\\ + |\mathbf{<math>}|\\ + |\mathsf{<math>}|\\ + |\mathit{<math>}|\\ + |\mathtt{<math>}| +\end{decl} +Each math alphabet is a command which can only be used inside math +mode. For example, |$x + \mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$| produces $x + +\mathsf{y} + \mathcal{Z}$. + +\begin{decl} +|\mathversion{<version>}| +\end{decl} +This command selects a math version; it can only be used outside math +mode. For example, |\boldmath| is defined to be |\mathversion{bold}|. + +\subsection{Declaring math versions} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathVersion| \arg{version} +\end{decl} + +Defines \m{version} to be a math version. + +The newly declared version is initialized with the defaults for all +symbol fonts and math alphabets declared so far (see the commands +|\DeclareSymbolFont| and |\DeclareMathAlphabet|). + +If used on an already existing version, an information message is +written to the transcript file and all previous |\SetSymbolFont| or +|\SetMathAlphabet| declarations for this version are overwritten by +the math alphabet and symbol font defaults, i.e.~one ends up with a +virgin math version. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathVersion{normal} +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Declaring math alphabets} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} + \arg{series} \arg{shape} +\end{decl} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +If this is the first declaration for \m{math-alph} then a new math +alphabet with this as its command name is created. + +The arguments \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape} are used to +set, or reset, the default values for this math alphabet in all math +versions; if required, these must be further reset later for a +particular math version by a |\SetMathAlphabet| command. + +If \m{shape} is empty then this \m{math-alph} is declared to be invalid +in all versions, unless it is set by a later |\SetMathAlphabet| +command for a particular math version. + +Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math +alphabet command or is undefined; and that \m{encoding} is a known +encoding scheme, i.e., has been previously declared. + + +In these examples, |\foo| is defined for all math versions but |\baz|, +by default, is defined nowhere. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathAlphabet{\foo}{OT1}{cmtt}{m}{n} + \DeclareMathAlphabet{\baz}{OT1}{}{}{} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\SetMathAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{version}\\ + \null\hfill\arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} +\end{decl} + +Changes, or sets, the font for the math alphabet \m{math-alph} in math +version \m{version} to \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape}. + +Checks that \m{math-alph} has been declared as a math alphabet, +\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a known +encoding scheme. + + +This example defines |\baz| for the `normal' math version only: +\begin{verbatim} + \SetMathAlphabet{\baz}{normal}{OT1}{cmss}{m}{n} +\end{verbatim} + +Note that this declaration is not used for all math alphabets: +Section~\ref{sec:symalph} describes |\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet|, +which is used to set up math alphabets contained in fonts which have +been declared as symbol fonts. + + +\subsection{Declaring symbol fonts} +\label{sec:symalph} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{encoding} \arg{family} + \arg{series} \arg{shape} +\end{decl} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +If this is the first declaration for \m{sym-font} then a new +symbol font with this name is created (i.e.~this identifier is assigned +to a new \TeX{} math group). + +The arguments \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape} are used to +set, or reset. the default values for this symbol font in \emph{all} +math versions; if required, these must be further reset later for +a particular math version by a |\SetSymbolFont| command. + +Checks that \m{encoding} is a declared encoding scheme. + + +For example, the following sets up the first four standard math symbol +fonts: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareSymbolFont{operators}{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n} + \DeclareSymbolFont{letters}{OML}{cmm}{m}{it} + \DeclareSymbolFont{symbols}{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n} + \DeclareSymbolFont{largesymbols}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\SetSymbolFont| \arg{sym-font} \arg{version}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} \arg{shape} +\end{decl} + +Changes the symbol font \m{sym-font} for math version \m{version} +to \m{encoding} \m{family} \m{series} \m{shape}. + +Checks that \m{sym-font} has been declared as a symbol font, +\m{version} is a known math version and \m{encoding} is a +declared encoding scheme. + + +For example, the following come from the set up of the `bold' +math version: +\begin{verbatim} + \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n} + \SetSymbolFont{letters}{bold}{OML}{cmm}{b}{it} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet| \arg{math-alph} \arg{sym-font} +\end{decl} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +Allows the previously declared symbol font \m{sym-font} to be the +math alphabet with command \m{math-alph} in \emph{all} math versions. + +Checks that the command \m{math-alph} is either already a math alphabet +command or is undefined; and that \m{sym-font} is a symbol font. + + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathrm}{operators} + \DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet{\mathcal}{symbols} +\end{verbatim} + +This declaration should be used in preference to +|\DeclareMathAlphabet| and |\SetMathAlphabet| when a math alphabet is +the same as a symbol font; this is because it makes better use of the +limited number (only 16) of \TeX's math groups. + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +Note that, whereas a \TeX{} math group is allocated to each symbol font +when it is first declared, a math alphabet uses a \TeX{} math group +only when its command is used within a math formula. + + +\subsection{Declaring math symbols} +\label{Sec:math.commands} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathSymbol| \arg{symbol} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font} + \arg{slot} +\end{decl} + +The \m{symbol} can be either a single character such as `|>>|', or a +macro name, such as |\sum|. + +Defines the \m{symbol} to be a math symbol of type +\m{type} in slot \m{slot} of symbol font \m{sym-font}. The +\m{type} can be given as a number or as a command: +\begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{ccc} + \emph{Type} & \emph{Meaning} & \emph{Example} \\ + |0| or |\mathord | & Ordinary & $\alpha$ \\ + |1| or |\mathop | & Large operator & $\sum$ \\ + |2| or |\mathbin | & Binary operation & $\times$ \\ + |3| or |\mathrel | & Relation & $\leq$ \\ + |4| or |\mathopen | & Opening & $\langle$ \\ + |5| or |\mathclose| & Closing & $\rangle$ \\ + |6| or |\mathpunct| & Punctuation & $;$ \\ + |7| or |\mathalpha| & Alphabet character & $A$ + \end{tabular} +\end{center} +Only symbols of type |\mathalpha| will be affected by math alphabet +commands: within the argument of a math alphabet command they will +produce the character in slot \m{slot} of that math alphabet's font. +Symbols of other types will always produce the same symbol +(within one math version). + +|\DeclareMathSymbol| allows a macro \m{symbol} to be redefined only if +it was previously defined to be a math symbol. It also checks that +the \m{sym-font} is a declared symbol font. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathSymbol{\alpha}{0}{letters}{"0B} + \DeclareMathSymbol{\lessdot}{\mathbin}{AMSb}{"0C} + \DeclareMathSymbol{\alphld}{\mathalpha}{AMSb}{"0C} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareMathDelimiter| \arg{cmd} \arg{type} + \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2} +\end{decl} +Defines \m{cmd} to be a math delimiter where the small variant is in +slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the large +variant is in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font \m{sym-font-2}. +Both symbol fonts must have been declared previously. + +Checks that \m{sym-font-i} are both declared symbol fonts. + +If \TeX{} is not looking for a delimiter, \m{cmd} is treated just as +if it had been defined with |\DeclareMathSymbol| using +\m{type}, \m{sym-font-1} and \m{slot-1}. In other words, if a +command is defined as a delimiter then this automatically defines it +as a math symbol. + +\NEWdescription{1998/06/01} +In case \m{cmd} is a single character such as `|[|', the same syntax is +used. Previously the \arg{type} argument was not present (and thus the +corresponding math symbol declaration had to be provided separately). + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathDelimiter{\langle}{\mathopen}{symbols}{"68} + {largesymbols}{"0A} + \DeclareMathDelimiter{(} {\mathopen}{operators}{"28} + {largesymbols}{"00} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{type} \arg{sym-font} \arg{slot} +\end{decl} + +Defines \m{cmd} to act as a math accent. + +The accent character comes from slot \m{slot} in +\m{sym-font}. The \m{type} can be either +|\mathord| or |\mathalpha|; in the latter case the accent character +changes font when used in a math alphabet. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathAccent{\acute}{\mathalpha}{operators}{"13} + \DeclareMathAccent{\vec}{\mathord}{letters}{"7E} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathRadical| \arg{cmd} + \arg{sym-font-1} \arg{slot-1}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{sym-font-2} \arg{slot-2} +\end{decl} + +Defines \m{cmd} to be a radical where the small variant is in +slot \m{slot-1} of symbol font \m{sym-font-1} and the +large variant is in slot \m{slot-2} of symbol font +\m{sym-font-2}. Both symbol fonts must have been declared +previously. + +Example (probably the only use for it!): +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathRadical{\sqrt}{symbols}{"70}{largesymbols}{"70} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Declaring math sizes} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareMathSizes| \arg{t-size} \arg{mt-size} \arg{s-size} + \arg{ss-size} +\end{decl} + +Declares that \m{mt-size} is the (main) math text size, \m{s-size} is +the `script' size and \m{ss-size} the `scriptscript' size to be used +in math, when \m{t-size} is the current text size. For text sizes for +which no such declaration is given the `script' and `scriptscript' +size will be calculated and then fonts are loaded for the calculated +sizes or the best approximation (this may result in a warning +message). + +Normally, \m{t-size} and \m{mt-size} will be identical; however, if, +for example, PostScript text fonts are mixed with bit-map math fonts +then you may not have available a \m{mt-size} for every \m{t-size}. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareMathSizes{13.82}{14.4}{10}{7} +\end{verbatim} + +\section{Font installation} +\label{Sec:install} + +This section explains how \LaTeX's font attributes are turned into +\TeX{} font specifications. + +\subsection{Font definition files} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +The description of how \LaTeX{} font attributes are turned into \TeX{} +fonts is usually kept in a \emph{font definition file} (|.fd|). The +file for family \m{family} in encoding \m{ENC} must be +called |<enc><family>.fd|: for example, |ot1cmr.fd| for Computer +Modern Roman with encoding |OT1| or |t1ptm.fd| for Adobe Times with +encoding |T1|. Note that encoding names are converted to lowercase +when used as part of file names. + +Whenever \LaTeX{} encounters an encoding/family combination that it +does not know (e.g.~if the document designer says +|\fontfamily{ptm}\selectfont|) then \LaTeX{} attempts to load the +appropriate |.fd| file. ``Not known'' means: there was no +|\DeclareFontFamily| declaration issued for this encoding/family +combination. If the |.fd| file could not be found, a warning is +issued and font substitutions are made. + +The declarations in the font definition file are responsible for +telling \LaTeX{} how to load fonts for that encoding/family +combination. + +\subsection{Font definition file commands} + +\emph{Note}: A font definition file should contain only commands +from this subsection. + +Note that these commands can also be used outside a font definition +file: they can be put in package or class files, or even in the +preamble of a document. + +\begin{decl} + |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]| +\end{decl} +The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile| command, +as described in \emph{\clsguide}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProvidesFile{t1ptm.fd}[1994/06/01 Adobe Times font definitions] +\end{verbatim} + +Spaces within the arguments specific to font definition files are +ignored to avoid surplus spaces in the document. If a real space is +necessary use |\space|. +\NEWdescription{2004/02/10}However, note that this is only true if the +declaration is made at top level! If used within the definition of +another command, within |\AtBeginDocument|, option code or in similar +places, then spaces within the argument will remain and may result in +incorrect table entries. + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFontFamily| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{loading-settings} +\end{decl} + +Declares a font family \m{family} to be available in encoding scheme +\m{encoding}. + +The \m{loading-settings} are executed immediately after loading any +font with this encoding and family. + +Checks that \m{encoding} was previously declared. + +This example refers to the Computer Modern Typewriter font family in +the Cork encoding: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontFamily{T1}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font=-1} +\end{verbatim} + +Each |.fd| file should contain exactly one |\DeclareFontFamily| +command, and it should be for the appropriate encoding/family +combination. + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFontShape| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape}\\ + \null\hfill \arg{loading-info} \arg{loading-settings} +\end{decl} + +Declares a font shape combination; here \m{loading-info} contains the +information that combines sizes with external fonts. The syntax is +complex and is described in Section~\ref{sec:loadinfo} below. + +The \m{loading-settings} are executed after loading any font with this +font shape. They are executed immediately after the +`loading-settings' which were declared by |\DeclareFontFamily| and so +they can be used to overwrite the settings made at the family level. + +Checks that the combination \m{encoding}\m{family} was previously +declared via |\DeclareFontFamily|. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{% + <<5-8>> sub * cmr/m/n + <<8>> cmsl8 + <<9>> cmsl9 + <<10>> <<10.95>> cmsl10 + <<12>> <<14.4>> <<17.28>> <<20.74>> <<24.88>> cmsl12 + }{} +\end{verbatim} +The file can contain any number of |\DeclareFontShape| commands, +which should be for the appropriate \m{encoding} and \m{family}. + +\NEWfeature{1996/06/01} +The font family declarations for the |OT1|-encoded fonts now all +contain: +\begin{verbatim} + \hyphenchar\font=`\- +\end{verbatim} +This enables the use of an alternative |\hyphenchar| in other encodings +whilst maintaining the correct value for all fonts. + +\subsection{Font file loading information} +\label{sec:loadinfo} + +The information which tells \LaTeX{} exactly which font (\texttt{.tfm}) +files to load is contained in the \m{loading-info} part of a +|\DeclareFontShape| declaration. This part consists of one or more +\m{fontshape-decl}s, each of which has the following form: + +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{r@{ $::=$ }l} + \m{fontshape-decl} & \m{size-infos} \m{font-info} \\ + \m{size-infos} & \m{size-infos} \m{size-info} $\mid$ + \m{size-info} \\ + \m{size-info} & ``|<<|'' \m{number-or-range} ``|>>|'' \\ + \m{font-info} & $[$ \m{size-function} ``|*|'' $]$ + $[$ ``|[|'' \m{optarg} ``|]|'' $]$ \m{fontarg} \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +The \m{number-or-range} denotes the size or size-range +for which this entry applies. + +If it contains a hyphen it is a +range: lower bound on the left (if missing, zero implied), upper bound +on the right (if missing, $\infty$ implied). For ranges, the +upper bound is \emph{not} included in the range and the lower bound is. + +Examples: +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{lll} + |<<10>>| & simple size& 10pt only\\ + |<<-8>>| & range& all sizes less than 8pt\\ + |<<8-14.4>>| & range& all sizes greater than or equal to 8pt\\ + & & \ but less than 14.4pt\\ + |<<14.4->>| & range& all sizes greater than or equal 14.4pt +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +If more than one \m{size-info} entry follows without any +intervening \m{font-info}, they all share the next \m{font-info}. + +The \m{size-function}, if present, handles the use of \m{font-info}. +If not present, the `empty' \m{size-function} is assumed. + +All the \m{size-info}s are inspected in the order in which they appear +in the font shape declaration. If a \m{size-info} matches the +requested size, its \m{size-function} is executed. If |\external@font| +is non-empty afterwards this process stops, otherwise the next +\m{size-info} is inspected. (See also |\DeclareSizeFunction|.) + +If this process does not lead to a non-empty |\external@font|, +\LaTeX{} tries the nearest simple size. If the entry contains only +ranges an error is returned. + + +\subsection{Size functions} +\label{sec:sizefunct} + + +\LaTeX{} provides the following size functions, whose `inputs' are +\m{fontarg} and \m{optarg} (when present). + +\begin{description} +\item[`' (empty)] +Load the external font \m{fontarg} at the user-requested size. If +\m{optarg} is present, it is used as the scale-factor. + +\item[s] +Like the empty function but without terminal warnings, only +loggings. + +\item[gen] +Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by +the user-requested size, e.g.~|<<8>> <<9>> <<10>> gen * cmtt| + +\item[sgen] +Like the `gen' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings. + +\item[genb] +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +Generates the external font from \m{fontarg} followed by +the user-requested size, using the conventions of the `ec' fonts. +e.g.~|<<10.98>> genb * dctt| produces |dctt1098|. + +\item[sgenb] +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +Like the `genb' function but without terminal warnings, only loggings. + +\item[sub] +Tries to load a font from a different font shape declaration given by +\m{fontarg} in the form \m{family}|/|\m{series}|/|\m{shape}. + +\item[ssub] +Silent variant of `sub', only loggings. + +\item[subf] +Like the empty function but issues a warning that it has to substitute +the external font \m{fontarg} because the desired font shape was not +available in the requested size. + +\item[ssubf] +Silent variant of `subf', only loggings. + +\item[fixed] +Load font \m{fontarg} as is, disregarding the user-requested size. +If present, \m{optarg} gives the ``at \ldots pt'' size to be used. + +\item[sfixed] +Silent variant of `fixed', only loggings. + +\end{description} + +Examples for the use of most of the above size functions can be found +in the file |cmfonts.fdd|---the source for the standard |.fd| files +describing the Computer Modern fonts by Donald Knuth. + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareSizeFunction| \arg{name} \arg{code} +\end{decl} + +Declares a size-function \m{name} for use in |\DeclareFontShape| +commands. The interface is still under development but there should be +no real need to a define new size functions. + +The \m{code} is executed when the size or size-range in +|\DeclareFontShape| matches the user-requested size. + +The arguments of the size-function are automatically parsed and placed +into |\mandatory@arg| and |\optional@arg| for use in \m{code}. Also +available, of course, is |\f@size|, which is the user-requested size. + +To signal success \m{code} must define the command |\external@font| +to contain the external name and any scaling options (if present) for +the font to be loaded. + +This example sets up the `empty' size function (simplified): +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareSizeFunction{} + {\edef\external@font{\mandatory@arg\space at\f@size} +\end{verbatim} + + +\section{Encodings} +\label{Sec:encode} + +This section explains how to declare and use new font encodings and +how to declare commands for use with particular encodings. + +\subsection{The \textsf{fontenc} package} + +Users can select new font encodings using the |fontenc| package. The +|fontenc| package has options for encodings; the last option becomes +the default encoding. For example, to use the |OT2| (Washington +University Cyrillic encoding) and |T1| encodings, with |T1| as the +default, an author types: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[OT2,T1]{fontenc} +\end{verbatim} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +For each font encoding \m{ENC} given as an option, this package loads +the \emph{encoding definition} (|<enc>enc.def|, with an all +lower-case name) file; it also sets |\encodingdefault| to be the last +encoding in the option list. + +The declarations in the encoding definition file |<enc>enc.def| for +encoding \m{ENC} are responsible for declaring this encoding and +telling \LaTeX{} how to produce characters in this encoding; this file +should contain nothing else (see Section~\ref{Sec:encode.def}. + +The standard \LaTeX{} format declares the |OT1| and |T1| text +encodings by inputting the files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def|; it also +sets up various defaults which require that |OT1|-encoded fonts are +available. +Other encoding set-ups might be added to the distribution at a +later stage. + +Thus the example above loads the files |ot2enc.def| and |t1enc.def| +and sets |\encodingdefault| to |T1|. + +\emph{Warning}: If you wish to use |T1|-encoded fonts other than the `cmr' +family then you may need to load the package (e.g.~\texttt{times}) +that selects the fonts \emph{before} loading \texttt{fontenc} (this +prevents the system from attempting to load any |T1|-encoded fonts from +the `cmr' family). + + + +\subsection{Encoding definition file commands} +\label{Sec:encode.def} + +\emph{Note}: An encoding definition file should contain only commands +from this subsection. + +\NEWdescription{2019/07/10} +As an exception it may also contain a |\DeclareFontsubstitution| +declaration (described in \ref{sec:encoding-defaults}) to specify how +font substitution for this encoding should be handled. In that case +it is important that the values used point to a font that is guaranteed +to be available on all \LaTeX{} installations.\footnote{If the font + encoding file is made available as part of a CTAN bundle, that could + be a font that is provided together with that bundle, but it should + not point to font which requires further installation steps and + therefore may or may not be installed.} + + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +As with the font definition file commands, it is also possible +(although normally not necessary) to use these declarations directly +within a class or package file. + +\emph{Warning}: Some aspects of the contents of font definition files +are still under development. Therefore, the current versions of the +files |ot1enc.def| and |t1enc.def| are temporary versions and should +not be used as models for producing further such files. For further +information you should read the documentation in |ltoutenc.dtx|. + +\begin{decl} + |\ProvidesFile{<file-name>}[<release-info>]| +\end{decl} +The file should announce itself with a |\ProvidesFile| +command, described in \emph{\clsguide}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProvidesFile{ot2enc.def} + [1994/06/01 Washington University Cyrillic encoding] +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFontEncoding| \arg{encoding} \arg{text-settings} + \arg{math-settings} +\end{decl} + +Declares a new encoding scheme \m{encoding}. + +The \m{text-settings} are +declarations which are executed every time |\selectfont| changes the +encoding to be \m{encoding}. + +The \m{math-settings} are similar but are for math alphabets. They +are executed whenever a math alphabet with this encoding is +called. + +\NEWfeature{1998/12/01} +It also saves the value of \m{encoding} in the macro +|\LastDeclaredEncoding|. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontEncoding{OT1}{}{} +\end{verbatim} + +Some author commands need to change their definition depending on +which encoding is currently in use. For example, in the |OT1| +encoding, the letter `\AE' is in slot |"1D|, whereas in the |T1| +encoding it is in slot |"C6|. So the definition of |\AE| has to +change depending on whether the current encoding is |OT1| or |T1|. +The following commands allow this to happen. + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} + \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This command is like |\newcommand|, except that it defines a +command which is specific to one encoding. For example, the +definition of |\k| in the |T1| encoding is: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextCommand{\k}{T1}[1] + {\oalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\char12}} +\end{verbatim} +|\DeclareTextCommand| takes the same optional arguments as +|\newcommand|. + +The resulting command is +robust, even if the code in \m{definition} is fragile. + +It does not produce an error if the command has already +been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\ProvideTextCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} + \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommand|, except that +if \m{cmd} is already defined in encoding \m{encoding}, then the +definition is ignored. + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareTextSymbol| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot} +\end{decl} +This command defines a text symbol with slot \m{slot} in the +encoding. For example, the definition of |\ss| in the |OT1| encoding +is: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextSymbol{\ss}{OT1}{25} +\end{verbatim} +It does not produce an error if the command has already +been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file. + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareTextAccent| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{slot} +\end{decl} +This command declares a text accent, with the accent taken from slot +\m{slot} in the encoding. For example, the definition of |\"| in +the |OT1| encoding is: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextAccent{\"}{OT1}{127} +\end{verbatim} +It does not produce an error if the command has already +been defined but logs the redefinition in the transcript file. + +\begin{decl} + |\DeclareTextComposite| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter} + \arg{slot} +\end{decl} +This command declares that the composite letter formed from applying +\m{cmd} to \m{letter} is defined to be simply slot \m{slot} in the +encoding. The \m{letter} should be a single letter (such as |a|) or +a single command (such as |\i|). + + +For example, the definition of |\'{a}| +in the |T1| encoding could be declared like this: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextComposite{\'}{T1}{a}{225} +\end{verbatim} + +The \m{cmd} will normally have been previously declared +for this encoding, either by using +|\DeclareTextAccent|, or as a one-argument |\DeclareTextCommand|. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\DeclareTextCompositeCommand| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \arg{letter} + \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This is a more general form of |\DeclareTextComposite|, which allows +for an arbitrary \m{definition}, not just a \m{slot}. The main use +for this is to allow accents on |i| to act like accents on |\i|, for +example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\'\i} +\end{verbatim} +It has the same restrictions as |\DeclareTextComposite|. + + +\begin{decl}[1998/12/01] + |\LastDeclaredEncoding| +\end{decl} +This holds the name of the last encoding declared via +|\DeclareFontEncoding| (this should also be the currently most +efficient encoding). It can be used in the \m{encoding} argument +of the above declarations in place of explicitly mentioning the +encoding, e.g. +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{} + \DeclareTextAccent{\`}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{0} + \DeclareTextAccent{\'}{\LastDeclaredEncoding}{1} +\end{verbatim} +This can be useful in cases where encoding files sharing common code +are generated from one source. + + +\subsection{Default definitions} + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +The declarations used in encoding definition files define +encoding-specific commands but they do not allow those commands to be +used without explicitly changing the encoding. For some commands, +such as symbols, this is not enough. For example, the~|OMS| encoding +contains the symbol~`\S', but we need to be able to use the +command~|\S| whatever the current encoding may be, without explicitly +selecting the encoding~|OMS|. + +\NEWdescription{1997/12/01} +To allow this, \LaTeX{} has commands that declare default definitions +for commands; these defaults are used when the command is not defined +in the current encoding. For example, the default encoding for~|\S| +is~|OMS|, and so in an encoding (such as |OT1|) which does not +contain~|\S|, the~|OMS| encoding is selected in order to access this +glyph. But in an encoding (such as~|T1|) which does contain~|\S|, the +glyph in that encoding is used. The standard \LaTeXe{} format sets +up several such defaults using the following encodings: |OT1|,~|OMS| +and~|OML|. + +\emph{Warning}: These commands should \emph{not} occur in encoding +definition files, since those files should declare only commands for use +when that encoding has been selected. They should instead be placed +in packages; they must, of course, always refer to encodings that are +known to be available. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\DeclareTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This command allows an encoding-specific command to be given a default +definition. For example, the default definition for |\copyright| is +defined be be a circled `c' with: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\copyright}{\textcircled{c}} +\end{verbatim} +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} \\ + |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{encoding} +\end{decl} +These commands allow an encoding-specific command to be given a +default encoding. For example, the default encoding for |\"| and +|\ae| is set to be |OT1| by: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareTextAccentDefault{\"}{OT1} + \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\ae}{OT1} +\end{verbatim} +Note that |\DeclareTextAccentDefault| can be used on any one-argument +encoding-specific command, not just those defined with +|\DeclareTextAccent|. Similarly, |\DeclareTextSymbolDefault| can be +used on any encoding-specific command with no arguments, not just +those defined with |\DeclareTextSymbol|. + +For more examples of these definitions, see |ltoutenc.dtx|. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\ProvideTextCommandDefault| \arg{cmd} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} +This command is the same as |\DeclareTextCommandDefault|, except that +if the command already has a default definition, then the definition +is ignored. This is useful to give `faked' definitions of symbols +which may be given `real' definitions by other packages. For example, +a package might give a fake definition of |\textonequarter| by saying: +\begin{verbatim} + \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{$\m@th\frac14$} +\end{verbatim} + + \subsection{Encoding defaults} \label{sec:encoding-defaults} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults| \arg{text-settings} \arg{math-settings} +\end{decl} + +Declares \m{text-settings} and \m{math-settings} for all encoding +schemes. These are executed before the encoding scheme dependent ones +are executed so that one can use the defaults for the major cases and +overwrite them if necessary using |\DeclareFontEncoding|. + +If |\relax| is used as an argument, the current setting of this default +is left unchanged. + +This example is used by amsfonts.sty for accent positioning; it changes +only the math settings: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontEncodingDefaults{\relax}{\def\accentclass@{7}} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareFontSubstitution| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} +\end{decl} + +Declares the default values for font substitution which will be used +when a font with encoding \m{encoding} +should be loaded but no font can be found with the current +attributes. + +These substitutions are local to the encoding scheme because the +encoding scheme is never substituted! They are tried in the order +\m{shape} then \m{series} and finally \m{family}. + +\NEWdescription{2019/07/10} +This declaration is normally done in an encoding definition file +(see~\ref{Sec:encode.def}), but can also be used in a class file or +the document preamble to alter the default for a specific encoding. + +If no defaults are set up for an encoding, the values given by +|\DeclareErrorFont| are used. + +The font specification for +\m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} +must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape| +before the |\begin{document}| is reached. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{cmr}{m}{n} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Case changing} +\label{sec:case} + +\begin{decl} + |\MakeUppercase| \arg{text} \\ + |\MakeLowercase| \arg{text} +\end{decl} + +\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} +\TeX{} provides the two primitives |\uppercase| and |\lowercase| for +changing the case of text. Unfortunately, these \TeX{} primitives do +not change the case of characters accessed by commands like |\ae| or +|\aa|. To overcome this problem, \LaTeX{} provides these two commands. + +In the long run, we would like to use all-caps fonts rather than any +command like |\MakeUppercase| but this is not possible at the moment +because such fonts do not exist. + +For further details, see \texttt{clsguide.tex}. + +\NEWdescription{1999/04/23} +In order that upper/lower-casing will work reasonably well, and in +order to provide any correct hyphenation, \LaTeXe{} \emph{must} use, +throughout a document, the same fixed table for changing case. The +table used is designed for the font encoding |T1|; this works well +with the standard \TeX{} fonts for all Latin alphabets but will cause +problems when using other alphabets. As an experiment, it has now +been extended for use with some Cyrillic encodings. + + +\section{Miscellanea} +\label{Sec:misc} + +This section covers the remaining font commands in \LaTeX{} and some +other issues. + +\subsection{Font substitution} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareErrorFont| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} \arg{size} +\end{decl} + +Declares \m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} to be the font shape +used in cases where the standard substitution mechanism fails +(i.e.~would loop). For the standard mechanism see the command +|\DeclareFontSubstitution| above. + +The font specification for +\m{encoding}\m{family}\m{series}\m{shape} +must have been defined by |\DeclareFontShape| +before the |\begin{document}| is reached. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} +\end{verbatim} + +\NEWdescription{2019/07/10} +This declaration is a system wide fallback and it should normally not +be changed, in particular it does not belong into font encoding +definition files but rather into the \LaTeX{} format. It is normally +set up in \texttt{fonttext.cfg}. Adjustments on a per encoding base +should be made through |\DeclareFontSubstitution| instead! + + +\begin{decl} +|\fontsubfuzz| +\end{decl} + +This parameter is used to decide whether or not to produce a terminal +warning if a font size substitution takes place. If the difference +between the requested and the chosen size is less than |\fontsubfuzz| +the warning is only written to the transcript file. The default value +is |0.4pt|. This can be redefined with |\renewcommand|, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand{\fontsubfuzz}{0pt} % always warn +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Preloading} + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclarePreloadSizes| \arg{encoding} \arg{family} \arg{series} + \arg{shape} +\arg{size-list} +\end{decl} + + +Specifies the fonts that should be preloaded by the format. These +commands should be put in a |preload.cfg| file, which is read in when +the \LaTeX{} format is being built. +Read |preload.dtx| for more information on how to built such a +configuration file. + +Example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclarePreloadSizes{OT1}{cmr}{m}{sl}{10,10.95,12} +\end{verbatim} + +\NEWdescription{2019/07/10} +Preloading is really an artifact of the days when loading fonts while +processing a document contributed substantially to the processing +time. These days it is usually best not to use this mechanism any more. + +\subsection{Accented characters} + +\NEWdescription{1996/06/01} +Accented characters in \LaTeX{} can be produced using commands such as +|\"a| etc. The precise effect of such commands depends on the font +encoding being used. When using a font encoding that contains the +accented characters as individual glyphs (such as the |T1| encoding, +in the case of |\"a|) words that contain such accented characters can +be automatically hyphenated. For font encodings that do not contain +the requested individual glyph (such as the |OT1| encoding) such a +command invokes typesetting instructions that produce the accented +character as a combination of character glyphs and diacritical marks +in the font. In most cases this involves a call to the \TeX{} +primitive |\accent|. Glyphs constructed as composites in this way +inhibit hyphenation of the current word; this is one reason why the +|T1| encoding is preferable to the original \TeX{} font encoding +|OT1|. + +It is important to understand that commands like |\"a| in \LaTeXe{} +represent just a name for a single glyph (in this case `umlaut a') and +contain no information about how to typeset that glyph---thus it does +\emph{not} mean `put two dots on top of the character a'. The +decision as to what typesetting routine to use will depend on the +encoding of the current font and so this decision is taken at the last +minute. Indeed, it is possible that the same input will be typeset in +more than one way in the same document; for example, text in section +headings may also appear in table of contents and in running heads; and +each of these may use a font with a different encoding. + +For this reason the notation |\"a| is \emph{not} equivalent to: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand \chara {a} \"\chara +\end{verbatim} +In the latter case, \LaTeX{} does not expand the macro |\chara| but +simply compares the notation (the string |\"\chara|) to its list of +known composite notations in the current encoding; when it fails to +find |\"\chara| it does the best it can and invokes the typesetting +instructions that put the umlaut accent on top of the expansion of +|\chara|. Thus, even if the font actually contains `\"a' as an +individual glyph, it will not be used. + +The low-level accent commands in \LaTeX{} are defined in such a way +that it is possible to combine a diacritical mark from one font with a +glyph from another font; for example, |\"\textparagraph| will produce +\"\textparagraph. The umlaut here +is taken from the |OT1| encoded font |cmr10| whilst the paragraph sign +is from the |OMS| encoded font |cmsy10|. (This example may be +typographically silly but better ones would involve font encodings +like |OT2| (Cyrillic) that might not be available at every +site.) + +There are, however, restrictions on the font-changing commands that +will work within the argument to such an accent command. These are +\TeX{}nical in the sense that they follow from the way that \TeX{}'s +|\accent| primitive works, allowing only a special class of commands +between the accent and the accented character. + +The following are examples of commands that will not work correctly as +the accent will appear above a space: the font commands with text +arguments (|\textbf{...}| and friends); all the font size declarations +(|\fontsize| and |\Large|, etc.); |\usefont| and declarations that +depend on it, such as |\normalfont|; box commands (e.g.~|\mbox{...}|). + +The lower-level font declarations that set the attributes family, +series and shape (such as |\fontshape{sl}\selectfont|) will produce +correct typesetting, as will the default declarations such as +|\bfseries|. + + +\subsection{Naming conventions} + +\begin{itemize} +\item +Math alphabet commands all start with |\math...|: examples are +|\mathbf|, |\mathcal|, etc. + +\item +The text font changing commands with arguments all start with +|\text...|: e.g.~|\textbf| and |\textrm|. The exception to this is +|\emph|, since it occurs very commonly in author documents and so +deserves a shorter name. + +\item +Names for encoding schemes are strings of up to three letters (all +upper case) plus digits. + +The \LaTeX3 project reserves the use of encodings starting with the +following letters: |T| (standard 256-long text encodings), |TS| +(symbols that are designed to extend a corresponding |T| encoding), +|X| (text encodings that do not conform to the strict requirements for +|T| encodings), |M| (standard 256-long math encodings), |S| (other +symbol encodings), |A| (other special applications), |OT| (standard +128-long text encodings) and |OM| (standard 128-long math encodings). + +Please do not use the above starting letters for non-portable +encodings. If new standard encodings emerge then we shall add them in +a later release of \LaTeX. + +Encoding schemes which are local to a site or a system should start +with |L|, experimental encodings intended for wide distribution will +start with |E|, whilst |U| is for Unknown or Unclassified encodings. + +\item +Font family names should contain up to five lower case letters. +Where possible, these should conform to the \emph{Filenames for fonts} +font naming scheme. + +\item +Font series names should contain up to four lower case letters. + +\item +Font shapes should contain up to two letters lower case. + +\item +Names for symbol fonts are built from lower and upper case letters +with no restriction. +\end{itemize} + +Whenever possible, you should use the series and shape names suggested +in \emph{\LaTeXcomp} since this will make it easier to combine new +fonts with existing fonts. + +\NEWdescription{1994/12/01} + Where possible, text symbols should be named as |\text| followed by + the Adobe glyph name: for example |\textonequarter| or + |\textsterling|. Similarly, math symbols should be named as + |\math| followed by the glyph name, for example |\mathonequarter| + or |\mathsterling|. Commands which can be used in text or math can + then be defined using |\ifmmode|, for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareRobustCommand{\pounds}{% + \ifmmode \mathsterling \else \textsterling \fi + } +\end{verbatim} + Note that commands defined in this way must be robust, in case they + get put into a section title or other moving argument. + +\section{If you need to know more \ldots} + +\NEWdescription{1996/06/01} +The |tracefnt| package provides for tracing the actions concerned with +loading, substituting and using fonts. +The package accepts the following options: +\begin{description} +\item[errorshow] Write all information about font changes, etc.\ but + only to the transcript file unless an error occurs. This means that + information about font substitution will not be shown on the + terminal. + +\item[warningshow] Show all font warnings on the terminal. This + setting corresponds to the default behavior when this + \texttt{tracefnt} package is \emph{not} used! + +\item[infoshow] Show all font warnings and all font info messages + (that are normally only written to the transcript file) also on the + terminal. This is the default when this \texttt{tracefnt} package is + loaded. + +\item[debugshow] In addition to what is shown by \texttt{infoshow}, + show also changes of math fonts (as far as possible): beware, this + option can produce a large amount of output. + +\item[loading] Show the names of external font files when they are + loaded. This option shows only `newly loaded' fonts, not those + already preloaded in the format or the class file before this + \texttt{tracefnt} package becomes active. + +\item[pausing] + Turn all font warnings into errors so that \LaTeX{} will stop. +\end{description} + +\emph{Warning}: The actions of this package can change the layout of a +document and even, in rare cases, produce clearly wrong output, so +it should not be used in the final formatting of `real documents'. + +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{A-W:MG2004} +Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion second edition}. +\newblock With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2004. + +\bibitem{tub:DKn89} +Donald~E. Knuth. +\newblock Typesetting concrete mathematics. +\newblock {\em {TUG}boat}, 10(1):31--36, April 1989. + +\bibitem{A-W:LLa94} +Leslie Lamport. +\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994. + +\end{thebibliography} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/graphpap.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/graphpap.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..027789f06d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/graphpap.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ifthen.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ifthen.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b651c06508b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ifthen.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/inputenc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/inputenc.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c1f4263834c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/inputenc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-external-commands.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-external-commands.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e4b7c726dcf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-external-commands.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1356 @@ +%%% list of externally accessible commands defined or used by the +%%% kernel (not totally correct) --- these aren't necessarily +%%% interface commands as primitives also have accessible names. This +%%% is just a reference to help and was generated with some brute +%%% force methods +%%% +%%% 2019/02 + +\A +\AA +\AE +\Alph +\Arrowvert +\AtBeginDocument +\AtBeginDvi +\AtEndDocument +\AtEndOfClass +\AtEndOfPackage +\Big +\Bigg +\Biggl +\Biggm +\Biggr +\Bigl +\Bigm +\Bigr +\Box +\CheckCommand +\ClassError +\ClassInfo +\ClassWarning +\ClassWarningNoLine +\CountZero +\CurrentOption +\DH +\DJ +\DeclareCurrentRelease +\DeclareErrorFont +\DeclareFixedFont +\DeclareFontEncoding +\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults +\DeclareFontFamily +\DeclareFontShape +\DeclareFontSubstitution +\DeclareMathAccent +\DeclareMathAlphabet +\DeclareMathDelimiter +\DeclareMathRadical +\DeclareMathSizes +\DeclareMathSymbol +\DeclareMathVersion +\DeclareOldFontCommand +\DeclareOption +\DeclarePreloadSizes +\DeclareRelease +\DeclareRelease: +\DeclareRobustCommand +\DeclareRobustCommand* +\DeclareSizeFunction +\DeclareSymbolFont +\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet +\DeclareTextAccent +\DeclareTextAccentDefault +\DeclareTextCommand +\DeclareTextCommandDefault +\DeclareTextComposite +\DeclareTextCompositeCommand +\DeclareTextFontCommand +\DeclareTextSymbol +\DeclareTextSymbolDefault +\DeclareUnicodeCharacter +\Delta +\Diamond +\Downarrow +\E +\EndIncludeInRelease +\ExecuteOptions +\Gamma +\GenericError +\GenericInfo +\GenericWarning +\H +\I +\IJ +\IeC +\IfFileExists +\IfTargetDateBefore +\Im +\IncludeInRelease +\InputIfFileExists +\J +\Join +\L +\LaTeX +\LaTeX2e +\LaTeXe +\Lambda +\LastDeclaredEncoding +\Leftarrow +\Leftrightarrow +\LoadClass +\LoadClassWithOptions +\Longleftarrow +\Longleftrightarrow +\Longrightarrow +\MakeLowercase +\MakeRobust +\MakeUppercase +\MessageBreak +\NG +\NeedsTeXFormat +\O +\OE +\Omega +\OptionNotUsed +\P +\PackageError +\PackageInfo +\PackageWarning +\PackageWarningNoLine +\PassOptionsToClass +\PassOptionsToPackage +\Phi +\Pi +\Pr +\ProcessOptions +\ProcessOptions* +\ProvideTextCommand +\ProvideTextCommandDefault +\ProvidesClass +\ProvidesFile +\ProvidesPackage +\Psi +\Re +\Relbar +\RequirePackage +\RequirePackageWithOptions +\Rightarrow +\Roman +\S +\SS +\SetMathAlphabet +\SetSymbolFont +\Sigma +\T +\TH +\TeX +\TextOrMath +\TextSymbolUnavailable +\Theta +\Umathchar +\Umathcode +\UndeclareTextCommand +\Uparrow +\Updownarrow +\Upsilon +\UseRawInputEncoding +\UseTextAccent +\UseTextSymbol +\Vert +\XeTeXcharclass +\XeTeXdashbreakstate +\XeTeXmathcode +\XeTeXrevision +\XeTeXuseglyphmetrics +\XeTeXversion +\Xi +\Z +\_ +\` +\a +\aa +\abovedisplayshortskip +\abovedisplayskip +\accent +\active +\acute +\addcontentsline +\addpenalty +\addtocontents +\addtocounter +\addtolength +\addvspace +\adjdemerits +\advance +\ae +\afterassignment +\aftergroup +\aleph +\allocationnumber +\allowbreak +\alph +\alpha +\amalg +\and +\angle +\approx +\arabic +\arccos +\arcsin +\arctan +\arg +\array +\arraycolsep +\arrayrulewidth +\arraystretch +\arrowvert +\asciispace +\ast +\asymp +\atopwithdelims +\attribute +\attributedef +\attributezero +\author +\b +\backslash +\backslashH +\bar +\baselineskip +\baselineskip4 +\baselinestretch +\batchmode +\begin +\begingroup +\belowdisplayshortskip +\belowdisplayskip +\beta +\bezier +\bfdefault +\bfseries +\bgroup +\bibcite +\bibdata +\bibitem +\bibliography +\bibliographystyle +\bibstyle +\big +\bigbreak +\bigcap +\bigcirc +\bigcup +\bigg +\biggl +\biggm +\biggr +\bigl +\bigm +\bigodot +\bigoplus +\bigotimes +\bigr +\bigskip +\bigskipamount +\bigsqcup +\bigtriangledown +\bigtriangleup +\biguplus +\bigvee +\bigwedge +\binoppenalty +\bmod +\boldmath +\bordermatrix +\bot +\botfigrule +\botmark +\bottomfraction +\bowtie +\box +\boxmaxdepth +\brace +\braceld +\braceld$ +\bracelu +\bracerd +\braceru +\bracevert +\brack +\break +\breve +\brokenpenalty +\buildrel +\bullet +\c +\cap +\caption +\cases +\catcode +\catcodetable +\cdot +\cdotp +\cdots +\center +\centering +\centerline +\char +\chardef +\charsubdef +\charzero +\check +\chi +\choose +\circ +\circle +\citation +\cite +\cleaders +\cleardoublepage +\clearpage +\cline +\closein +\closeout +\clubpenalty +\clubsuit +\colon +\columnsep +\columnseprule +\columnwidth +\cong +\contentsline +\coprod +\copy +\copyright +\cos +\cosh +\cot +\coth +\count +\countdef +\counterwithin +\counterwithout +\cr +\crcr +\csc +\csname +\cup +\d +\dag +\dagger +\dashbox +\dashv +\date +\day +\dblfigrule +\dblfloatpagefraction +\dblfloatsep +\dbltextfloatsep +\dbltopfraction +\ddag +\ddagger +\ddot +\ddots +\deadcycles +\def +\defaulthyphenchar +\defaultscriptratio +\defaultscriptscriptratio +\defaultskewchar +\deg +\delcode +\delimiter +\delimiterfactor +\delimitershortfall +\delta +\depth +\det +\dh +\diamond +\diamondsuit +\dim +\dimen +\dimendef +\dimenzero +\directlua +\discretionary +\displaylines +\displaymath +\displaystyle +\displaywidowpenalty +\displaywidth +\div +\divide +\dj +\do +\document +\documentclass +\documentstyle +\dospecials +\dot +\doteq +\dotfill +\dots +\doublehyphendemerits +\doublerulesep +\downarrow +\downbracefill +\dp +\dump +\edef +\egroup +\eject +\ell +\else +\em +\emergencystretch +\eminnershape +\emph +\empty +\emptyset +\encodingdefault +\end +\endarray +\endcenter +\endcsname +\enddisplaymath +\enddocument +\endenumerate +\endeqnarray +\endequation +\endfilecontents +\endflushleft +\endflushright +\endgraf +\endgroup +\endinput +\enditemize +\endline +\endlinechar +\endlist +\endlrbox +\endmath +\endminipage +\endpicture +\endsloppypar +\endtabbing +\endtabular +\endtrivlist +\endverbatim +\enlargethispage +\enskip +\enspace +\ensuremath +\enumerate +\epsilon +\eqnarray +\eqno +\equation +\equiv +\errhelp +\errmessage +\errorcontextlines +\errorstopmode +\escapechar +\eta +\evensidemargin +\everycr +\everydisplay +\everyjob +\everymath +\everypar +\exhyphenpenalty +\exists +\exp +\expandafter +\extracolsep +\extrafloats +\fam +\familydefault +\fbox +\fboxrule +\fboxsep +\fi +\filbreak +\filecontents +\fill +\finalhyphendemerits +\firstmark +\flat +\floatingpenalty +\floatpagefraction +\floatsep +\flushbottom +\flushleft +\flushright +\fmtname +\fmtversion +\fnsymbol +\font +\fontdimen +\fontdimen8 +\fontencoding +\fontfamily +\fontname +\fontseries +\fontshape +\fontsize +\fontsize2 +\fontsubfuzz +\footins +\footnote +\footnotemark +\footnoterule +\footnotesep +\footnotesize +\footnotetext +\footskip +\forall +\frac +\frame +\framebox +\frenchspacing +\frown +\fussy +\futurelet +\gamma +\gcd +\gdef +\gdef_ +\ge +\geq +\gets +\gg +\global +\globaldefs +\glossary +\glossaryentry +\goodbreak +\grave +\halign +\hangindent +\hat +\hbadness +\hbar +\hbox +\headheight +\headsep +\heartsuit +\height +\hfil +\hfil$ +\hfill +\hfuzz +\hglue +\hideoutput +\hideskip +\hidewidth +\hline +\hom +\hookleftarrow +\hookrightarrow +\hphantom +\hrule +\hrulefill +\hsize +\hskip +\hskip2em +\hspace +\hss +\ht +\hyphenchar +\hyphenpenalty +\i +\ialign +\if +\ifb +\ifcase +\ifcsname +\ifdim +\ifeof +\iff +\iffalse +\ifhmode +\ifinner +\ifmmode +\ifnum +\ifnum0 +\ifnum7 +\ifodd +\iftrue +\ifvbox +\ifvmode +\ifvoid +\ifx +\ifx! +\ignorespaces +\ignorespacesafterend +\ij +\imath +\immediate +\in +\include +\includeonly +\indent +\index +\indexentry +\inf +\infty +\initcatcodetable +\input +\inputencodingname +\inputlineno +\insert +\int +\interdisplaylinepenalty +\interfootnotelinepenalty +\interlinepenalty +\intextsep +\intop +\iota +\itdefault +\item +\itemindent +\itemize +\itemsep +\iterate +\itshape +\j +\jmath +\jobname +\joinrel +\jot +\kappa +\ker +\kern +\kern- +\kern2 +\kern3 +\kern6 +\kern7 +\kill +\l +\label +\labelsep +\labelwidth +\lambda +\land +\langle +\language +\lastbox +\lastnamedcs +\lastnodetype +\lastpenalty +\lastskip +\lbrace +\lbrack +\lccode +\lccode` +\lceil +\ldotp +\ldots +\le +\leaders +\leadsto +\leavevmode +\left +\leftarrow +\leftarrowfill +\lefteqn +\leftharpoondown +\leftharpoondown$ +\leftharpoonup +\leftline +\leftmargin +\leftmargini +\leftmarginii +\leftmarginiii +\leftmarginiv +\leftmarginv +\leftmarginvi +\leftmark +\leftrightarrow +\leftskip +\leq +\let +\lfloor +\lg +\lgroup +\lhd +\lhook +\lim +\liminf +\limits +\limsup +\line +\linebreak +\linepenalty +\lineskip +\lineskip- +\lineskiplimit +\linespread +\linethickness +\linewidth +\list +\listfiles +\listparindent +\ll +\llap +\lmoustache +\ln +\lnot +\log +\loggingall +\loggingoutput +\long +\longleftarrow +\longleftrightarrow +\longmapsto +\longrightarrow +\loop +\lor +\lower +\lowercase +\lq +\lrbox +\luabytecode +\luachunk +\luafunction +\luatexversion +\magstep +\magstephalf +\makeatletter +\makeatother +\makebox +\makeglossary +\makeindex +\makelabel +\mapsto +\mapstochar +\marginpar +\marginparpush +\marginparsep +\marginparwidth +\mark +\markboth +\markright +\marks +\math +\mathaccent +\mathalpha +\mathbf +\mathbin +\mathcal +\mathchar +\mathchardef +\mathcharzero +\mathchoice +\mathclose +\mathcode +\mathdollar +\mathellipsis +\mathgroup +\mathhexbox +\mathinner +\mathit +\mathnormal +\mathop +\mathopen +\mathord +\mathpalette +\mathparagraph +\mathpunct +\mathrel +\mathring +\mathrm +\mathsection +\mathsf +\mathsterling +\mathstrut +\mathsurround +\mathtt +\mathunderscore +\mathversion +\matrix +\max +\maxdeadcycles +\maxdepth +\maxdimen +\mbox +\mddefault +\mdseries +\meaning +\medbreak +\medmuskip +\medskip +\medskipamount +\message +\mho +\mid +\min +\minipage +\mkern +\models +\month +\moveright +\mp +\mskip +\mu +\mubyte +\multicolumn +\multiply +\multiput +\multispan +\muskip +\muskipdef +\muskipzero +\nabla +\narrower +\natural +\ne +\nearrow +\neg +\negthinspace +\neq +\newXeTeXintercharclass +\newattribute +\newbox +\newcatcodetable +\newcommand +\newcount +\newcounter +\newdimen +\newenvironment +\newfam +\newfont +\newhelp +\newif +\newinsert +\newlabel +\newlanguage +\newlength +\newline +\newlinechar` +\newluabytecode +\newluachunkname +\newluafunction +\newmarks +\newmuskip +\newpage +\newread +\newsavebox +\newskip +\newtheorem +\newtoks +\newwhatsit +\newwrite +\ng +\ni +\noalign +\nobreak +\nobreakdashes +\nobreakspace +\nocite +\nocorr +\nocorrlist +\noexpand +\noexpandinvalid +\noexpandis +\noexpandnot +\nofiles +\noindent +\nointerlineskip +\nolimits +\nolinebreak +\nonfrenchspacing +\nonscript +\nonumber +\nopagebreak +\noprotrusion +\normalbaselines +\normalbaselineskip +\normalcolor +\normalfont +\normallineskip +\normallineskiplimit +\normalmarginpar +\normalsfcodes +\normalsize +\not +\notin +\nu +\null +\nulldelimiterspace +\nullfont +\number +\numberline +\numexpr +\nwarrow +\o +\oalign +\obeycr +\obeylines +\obeyspaces +\oddsidemargin +\odot +\oe +\of +\offinterlineskip +\oint +\ointop +\oldstylenums +\omega +\ominus +\omit +\onecolumn +\ooalign +\openin +\openout +\openup +\oplus +\or +\oslash +\otimes +\output +\outputpenalty +\oval +\over +\overbrace +\overfullrule +\overleftarrow +\overrightarrow +\owns +\pagebreak +\pagenumbering +\pageref +\pageshrink +\pagestyle +\pagetotal +\paperheight +\paperwidth +\par +\paragraphmark +\parallel +\parbox +\parfillskip +\parindent +\parsep +\parseunicodedataI +\parseunicodedataII +\parseunicodedataIII +\parseunicodedataIV +\parseunicodedataV +\parshape +\parskip +\partial +\partopsep +\penalty +\perp +\phantom +\phi +\pi +\picture +\pm +\pmatrix +\pmod +\poptabs +\postdisplaypenalty +\pounds +\prec +\preceq +\predisplaypenalty +\pretolerance +\prevdepth +\prime +\prod +\propto +\protect +\protected +\providecommand +\psi +\pushtabs +\put +\qbezier +\qbeziermax +\qquad +\quad +\r +\radical +\raggedbottom +\raggedleft +\raggedright +\raise +\raisebox +\rangle +\rbrace +\rbrack +\rceil +\read +\ref +\refstepcounter +\relax +\relaxs +\relbar +\relpenalty +\removelastskip +\renewcommand +\renewenvironment +\repeat +\requestedLaTeXdate +\requestedpatchdate +\restorecr +\reversemarginpar +\rfloor +\rgroup +\rhd +\rho +\rhook +\right +\rightarrow +\rightarrow$ +\rightarrowfill +\rightharpoondown +\rightharpoonup +\rightharpoonup$ +\rightleftharpoons +\rightline +\rightmargin +\rightmark +\rightskip +\rlap +\rmdefault +\rmfamily +\rmoustache +\roman +\romannumeral +\root +\rootbox +\rq +\rule +\samepage +\savebox +\savecatcodetable +\sb +\sbox +\scdefault +\scriptfont +\scriptscriptfont +\scriptscriptstyle +\scriptspace +\scriptstyle +\scshape +\searrow +\sec +\secdef +\sectionmark +\selectfont +\seriesdefault +\setattribute +\setbox +\setcounter +\setlength +\setminus +\setrangecatcode +\settodepth +\settoheight +\settowidth +\sfcode +\sfdefault +\sffamily +\shapedefault +\sharp +\shipout +\shortstack +\showboxbreadth +\showboxdepth +\showhyphens +\showoutput +\showoverfull +\sigma +\sim +\simeq +\sin +\sinh +\skew +\skip +\skipdef +\skipzero +\slash +\sldefault +\sloppy +\sloppypar +\slshape +\smallbreak +\smallint +\smallskip +\smallskipamount +\smash +\smash,because +\smile +\sp +\space +\spacefactor +\spaceskip +\spadesuit +\span +\splitfirstmark +\splitmaxdepth +\splittopskip +\sqcap +\sqcup +\sqrt +\sqrtsign +\sqsubset +\sqsubseteq +\sqsupset +\sqsupseteq +\ss +\stackrel +\star +\stepcounter +\stop +\storedpar +\stretch +\string +\stringallowed +\strut +\strutbox +\subparagraphmark +\subsectionmark +\subset +\subseteq +\subsubsectionmark +\succ +\succeq +\sum +\sup +\suppressfloats +\supset +\supseteq +\surd +\swarrow +\symbol +\symletters +\symoperators +\t +\tabbing +\tabbingsep +\tabcolsep +\tabskip +\tabular +\tabularnewline +\tan +\tanh +\tau +\tencirc +\tencircw +\tenln +\tenlnw +\textasciicircum +\textasciitilde +\textasteriskcentered +\textbackslash +\textbar +\textbardbl +\textbf +\textbraceleft +\textbraceright +\textbullet +\textcircled +\textcommaabove +\textcommabelow +\textcompwordmark +\textcopyright +\textdagger +\textdaggerdbl +\textdollar +\textellipsis +\textemdash +\textendash +\textexclamdown +\textfloatsep +\textfont +\textfont2 +\textfraction +\textgreater +\textheight +\textit +\textless +\textmd +\textnormal +\textordfeminine +\textordmasculine +\textparagraph +\textperiodcentered +\textquestiondown +\textquotedblleft +\textquotedblright +\textquoteleft +\textquoteright +\textregistered +\textrm +\textsc +\textsection +\textsf +\textsl +\textsterling +\textstyle +\textsubscript +\textsuperscript +\texttrademark +\texttt +\textunderscore +\textup +\textvisiblespace +\textwidth +\th +\thanks +\the +\theequation +\thefootnote +\thempfn +\thempfootnote +\thepage +\theta +\thicklines +\thickmuskip +\thinlines +\thinmuskip +\thinspace +\thispagestyle +\tilde +\time +\times +\title +\to +\today +\toks +\toksdef +\tokszero +\tolerance +\top +\topfigrule +\topfraction +\topmargin +\topmark +\topsep +\topskip +\totalheight +\tracingall +\tracingassigns +\tracingcommands +\tracingfonts +\tracinggroups +\tracingifs +\tracinglostchars +\tracingmacros +\tracingnesting +\tracingnone +\tracingonline +\tracingoutput +\tracingpages +\tracingparagraphs +\tracingrestores +\tracingscantokens +\tracingstats +\triangle +\triangleleft +\triangleright +\trivlist +\ttdefault +\ttfamily +\twocolumn +\typein +\typeout +\u +\uccode +\uchyph +\unboldmath +\undefinedpagestyle +\underbar +\underbrace +\underline +\unexpanded +\unhbox +\unhcopy +\unicodedataline +\unicoderead +\unitlength +\unkern +\unless +\unlhd +\unpenalty +\unrhd +\unsetattribute +\unskip +\unvbox +\unvcopy +\uparrow +\upbracefill +\updefault +\updownarrow +\uplus +\uppercase +\upshape +\upsilon +\usebox +\usecounter +\usefont +\usepackage +\v +\vadjust +\value +\varbigtriangledown +\varbigtriangleup +\varepsilon +\varphi +\varpi +\varrho +\varsigma +\vartheta +\vbadness +\vbox +\vcenter +\vdash +\vdots +\vec +\vector +\vee +\verb +\verbatim +\verbvisiblespace +\vert +\vfil +\vfilneg +\vfuzz +\vglue +\vline +\vphantom +\vrule +\vsize +\vskip +\vspace +\vsplit +\vss +\vtop +\wd +\wedge +\whatsit +\widehat +\widetilde +\widowpenalties +\widowpenalty +\width +\wlog +\wp +\wr +\write +\x +\xdef +\xi +\year +\z +\zeta +\| +\~ diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-internal-commands.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-internal-commands.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..acf20d96c5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/kernel-internal-commands.txt @@ -0,0 +1,1268 @@ +%%% list of internal commands defined by the kernel (not totally correct) +%%% 2019/02 + +\@ +\@@ +\@@enc@update +\@@end +\@@endpbox +\@@eqncr +\@@fileswith@pti@ns +\@@hyph +\@@if@newlist +\@@ifdefinable +\@@input +\@@italiccorr +\@@line +\@@math@bgroup +\@@math@egroup +\@@par +\@@protect +\@@startpbox +\@@underline +\@@unprocessedoptions +\@@warning +\@Alph +\@DeclareMathDelimiter +\@DeclareMathSizes +\@Esphack +\@IncludeInRele@se +\@IncludeInRelease +\@M +\@MM +\@Mi +\@Mii +\@Miii +\@Miv +\@Roman +\@TeXversion +\@acci +\@accii +\@acciii +\@acol +\@acolampacol +\@activechar@info +\@addamp +\@addfield +\@addmarginpar +\@addtobot +\@addtocurcol +\@addtodblcol +\@addtofilelist +\@addtonextcol +\@addtopreamble +\@addtoreset +\@addtotoporbot +\@afterheading +\@afterindentfalse +\@afterindenttrue +\@alph +\@ampacol +\@arabic +\@argarraycr +\@argdef +\@argtabularcr +\@array +\@arrayacol +\@arrayc +\@arrayclassiv +\@arrayclassz +\@arraycr +\@arrayparboxrestore +\@arrayrule +\@arstrut +\@arstrutbox +\@author +\@auxout +\@backslashchar +\@badend +\@badlinearg +\@badmath +\@badpoptabs +\@badrequireerror +\@badtab +\@begin@tempboxa +\@begindocumenthook +\@begindvi +\@begindvibox +\@beginparpenalty +\@begintheorem +\@bezier +\@bibitem +\@biblabel +\@bitor +\@botlist +\@botnum +\@botnum> +\@botroom +\@boxfpsbit +\@break@tfor +\@bsphack +\@caption +\@captype +\@car +\@carcube +\@cclv +\@cclvi +\@cdr +\@centercr +\@centering +\@cflb +\@cflt +\@changed@cmd +\@charlb +\@charrb +\@chclass +\@check@IncludeInRelease +\@check@c +\@check@eq +\@checkend +\@chnum +\@circ +\@circle +\@circlefnt +\@cite +\@cite@ofmt +\@citea +\@citeb +\@citex +\@classi +\@classii +\@classiii +\@classiv +\@classoptionslist +\@classv +\@classz +\@cline +\@clnht +\@clnwd +\@cls@pkg +\@clsextension +\@clubpenalty +\@colht +\@colnum +\@colroom +\@combinedblfloats +\@combinefloats +\@comdblflelt +\@comflelt +\@cons +\@contfield +\@ctrerr +\@curfield +\@curline +\@curr@enc +\@currbox +\@currdir +\@current@cmd +\@currentlabel +\@currenvir +\@currenvline +\@currext +\@currlist +\@currname +\@currnamestack +\@curroptions +\@currsize +\@currtype +\@curtab +\@curtabmar +\@dashbox +\@dashcnt +\@dashdim +\@date +\@dbflt +\@dblarg +\@dbldeferlist +\@dblfloat +\@dblfloatplacement +\@dblfpbot +\@dblfpsep +\@dblfptop +\@dbltoplist +\@dbltopnum +\@dbltoproom +\@dec@text@cmd +\@declaredoptions +\@declareoption +\@defaultsubs +\@defaultunits +\@defdefault@ds +\@deferlist +\@definecounter +\@depth +\@dischyph +\@doclearpage +\@documentclasshook +\@doendpe +\@dofilelist +\@donoparitem +\@dot +\@dotsep +\@dottedtocline +\@downline +\@downvector +\@eha +\@ehb +\@ehc +\@ehd +\@elt +\@empty +\@emptycol +\@end@check@IncludeInRelease +\@end@tempboxa +\@enddocumenthook +\@endfloatbox +\@endparenv +\@endparpenalty +\@endpbox +\@endpefalse +\@endpetrue +\@endtheorem +\@enlargepage +\@ensuredmath +\@enumctr +\@enumdepth +\@eqcnt +\@eqncr +\@eqnnum +\@eqnsel +\@eqnswfalse +\@eqnswtrue +\@eqpen +\@err@ +\@esphack +\@evenfoot +\@evenhead +\@expandtwoargs +\@expast +\@failedlist +\@fcolmadefalse +\@fcolmadetrue +\@filef@und +\@filelist +\@fileswfalse +\@fileswith@pti@ns +\@fileswith@ptions +\@fileswithoptions +\@fileswtrue +\@finalstrut +\@firstampfalse +\@firstamptrue +\@firstcolfirstmark +\@firstcoltopmark +\@firstcolumnfalse +\@firstcolumntrue +\@firstofone +\@firstoftwo +\@firsttab +\@flcheckspace +\@flfail +\@float +\@floatboxreset +\@floatpenalty +\@floatplacement +\@flsetnum +\@flsettextmin +\@flstop +\@flsucceed +\@fltovf +\@flupdates +\@flushglue +\@fnsymbol +\@font@info +\@font@warning +\@fontswitch +\@footnotemark +\@footnotetext +\@for +\@forloop +\@fornoop +\@fortmp +\@fpbot +\@fpmin +\@fps +\@fpsadddefault +\@fpsep +\@fpstype +\@fptop +\@frameb@x +\@framebox +\@framepicbox +\@freelist +\@getcirc +\@getfpsbit +\@getlarrow +\@getlinechar +\@getpen +\@getrarrow +\@glossaryfile +\@gnewline +\@gobble +\@gobble@IncludeInRelease +\@gobblecr +\@gobblefour +\@gobbletwo +\@gtempa +\@halfwidth +\@halignto +\@hangfrom +\@height +\@highpenalty +\@hightab +\@hline +\@holdpg +\@hspace +\@hspacer +\@hvector +\@icentercr +\@iden +\@if +\@if@pti@ns +\@if@ptions +\@ifatmargin +\@ifbothcounters +\@ifclasslater +\@ifclassloaded +\@ifclasswith +\@ifdefinable +\@iffileonpath +\@ifl@aded +\@ifl@t@r +\@ifl@ter +\@ifnch +\@ifnextchar +\@iforloop +\@ifpackagelater +\@ifpackageloaded +\@ifpackagewith +\@iframebox +\@iframeboxc +\@iframepicbox +\@ifstar +\@ifundefin@d@i +\@ifundefin@d@ii +\@ifundefined +\@ignorefalse +\@ignoretrue +\@iiiminipage +\@iiiparbox +\@iiminipage +\@iinput +\@iiparbox +\@iirsbox +\@imakebox +\@imakeboxc +\@imakepicbox +\@iminipage +\@include +\@includeinreleasefalse +\@includeinreleasetrue +\@index +\@indexfile +\@inlabelfalse +\@inlabeltrue +\@inmatherr +\@inmathwarn +\@inpenc@test +\@input +\@input@ +\@inputcheck +\@inputcheck0 +\@insertfalse +\@inserttrue +\@iparbox +\@irsbox +\@isavebox +\@isavepicbox +\@ishortstack +\@istackcr +\@itabcr +\@item +\@itemdepth +\@itemfudge +\@itemitem +\@itemlabel +\@itempenalty +\@iwhiledim +\@iwhilenum +\@iwhilesw +\@ixpt +\@ixstackcr +\@killglue +\@kludgeins +\@labels +\@largefloatcheck +\@lastchclass +\@latex@error +\@latex@info +\@latex@info@no@line +\@latex@warning +\@latex@warning@no@line +\@latexbug +\@latexerr +\@lbibitem +\@leftcolumn +\@leftmark +\@let@token +\@lign +\@linechar +\@linefnt +\@linelen +\@listctr +\@listdepth +\@listfiles +\@loadwithoptions +\@lowpenalty +\@ltab +\@m +\@mainaux +\@makebox +\@makecaption +\@makecol +\@makefcolumn +\@makefnmark +\@makefntext +\@makeother +\@makepicbox +\@makespecialcolbox +\@marbox +\@marginparreset +\@markright +\@maxdepth +\@maxtab +\@medpenalty +\@midlist +\@minipagefalse +\@minipagerestore +\@minipagetrue +\@minus +\@missingfileerror +\@mkboth +\@mklab +\@mkpream +\@mparbottom +\@mpargs +\@mparswitchfalse +\@mpfn +\@mpfootins +\@mpfootnotetext +\@mplistdepth +\@multicnt +\@multiplelabels +\@multiput +\@multispan +\@namedef +\@nameuse +\@nbitem +\@ne +\@needsf@rmat +\@needsformat +\@negargfalse +\@negargtrue +\@newcommand +\@newctr +\@newenv +\@newenva +\@newenvb +\@newl@bel +\@newline +\@newlistfalse +\@newlisttrue +\@next +\@nextchar +\@nil +\@nmbrlistfalse +\@nmbrlisttrue +\@nnil +\@no@lnbk +\@no@pgbk +\@nobreakfalse +\@nobreaktrue +\@nocnterr +\@nocounterr +\@nodocument +\@noitemargfalse +\@noitemargtrue +\@noitemerr +\@noligs +\@nolnerr +\@nomath +\@noparitemfalse +\@noparitemtrue +\@noparlistfalse +\@noparlisttrue +\@normalcr +\@normalsize +\@noskipsecfalse +\@noskipsectrue +\@notdefinable +\@notprerr +\@nthm +\@nxttabmar +\@obsoletefile +\@oddfoot +\@oddhead +\@onefilewithoptions +\@onelevel@sanitize +\@onlypreamble +\@opargbegintheorem +\@opcol +\@options +\@othm +\@outerparskip +\@outputbox +\@outputdblcol +\@outputpage +\@oval +\@ovbtrue +\@ovdx +\@ovdy +\@ovhlinefalse +\@ovhlinetrue +\@ovhorz +\@ovltrue +\@ovri +\@ovro +\@ovrtrue +\@ovttrue +\@ovvert +\@ovvert0 +\@ovvlinefalse +\@ovvlinetrue +\@ovxx +\@ovyy +\@p@pfilename +\@pagedp +\@pageht +\@par +\@parboxrestore +\@parboxto +\@parmoderr +\@parse@version +\@parse@version@ +\@parse@version@dash +\@partaux +\@partlist +\@partswfalse +\@partswtrue +\@pass@ptions +\@pboxswfalse +\@pboxswtrue +\@penup +\@percentchar +\@picbox +\@picht +\@picture +\@picture@warn +\@pkgextension +\@plus +\@pnumwidth +\@popfilename +\@pr@videpackage +\@preamble +\@preamblecmds +\@preamerr +\@process@pti@ns +\@process@ptions +\@protected@testopt +\@providesfile +\@ptionlist +\@pushfilename +\@put +\@qend +\@qrelax +\@rc@ifdefinable +\@reargdef +\@refundefined +\@reinserts +\@removeelement +\@removefromreset +\@reqcolroom +\@reset@ptions +\@resetactivechars +\@resethfps +\@restorepar +\@reversemarginfalse +\@reversemargintrue +\@rightmark +\@rightskip +\@rjfieldfalse +\@rjfieldtrue +\@roman +\@rsbox +\@rtab +\@rule +\@sanitize +\@savebox +\@savemarbox +\@savepicbox +\@savsf +\@savsk +\@scolelt +\@sdblcolelt +\@seccntformat +\@secondoftwo +\@secpenalty +\@sect +\@seqncr +\@setckpt +\@setfloattypecounts +\@setfontsize +\@setfpsbit +\@setmarks +\@setminipage +\@setnobreak +\@setpar +\@setref +\@setsize +\@settab +\@settodim +\@settopoint +\@setupverbvisiblespace +\@sharp +\@shortstack +\@shortstackc +\@sline +\@slowromancap +\@spaces +\@specialoutput +\@specialpagefalse +\@specialpagetrue +\@specialstyle +\@sptoken +\@sqrt +\@ssect +\@stackcr +\@star@or@long +\@startcolumn +\@startdblcolumn +\@startfield +\@startline +\@startpbox +\@startsection +\@starttoc +\@stopfield +\@stopline +\@stpelt +\@svector +\@sverb +\@svsec +\@svsechd +\@swaptwoargs +\@sxverbatim +\@tabacckludge +\@tabacol +\@tabarray +\@tabclassiv +\@tabclassz +\@tabcr +\@tabfbox +\@tablab +\@tabminus +\@tabplus +\@tabpush +\@tabrj +\@tabular +\@tabularcr +\@tempboxa +\@tempcnta +\@tempcntb +\@tempdima +\@tempdima& +\@tempdimb +\@tempdimc +\@tempskipa +\@tempskipb +\@tempswafalse +\@tempswatrue +\@temptokena +\@testdef +\@testfalse +\@testfp +\@testopt +\@testpach +\@testtrue +\@testwrongwidth +\@text@composite +\@text@composite@x +\@textbottom +\@textfloatsheight +\@textmin +\@textsubscript +\@textsuperscript +\@texttop +\@tf@r +\@tfor +\@tfor: +\@tforloop +\@thanks +\@thefnmark +\@thefoot +\@thehead +\@themargin +\@themark +\@thirdofthree +\@thm +\@thmcounter +\@thmcountersep +\@title +\@tocrmarg +\@toodeep +\@toplist +\@topnewpage +\@topnum +\@toproom +\@topsep +\@topsepadd +\@totalleftmargin +\@trivlist +\@tryfcolumn +\@trylist +\@twoclasseserror +\@twocolumnfalse +\@twocolumntrue +\@twoloadclasserror +\@twosidefalse +\@typein +\@typeset@protect +\@uclclist +\@undefined +\@unexpandable@protect +\@unknownoptionerror +\@unprocessedoptions +\@unused +\@unusedoptionlist +\@upline +\@upordown +\@upvector +\@use@ption +\@use@text@encoding +\@verb +\@verbatim +\@verbvisiblespacebox +\@vereq +\@viiipt +\@viipt +\@vipt +\@vline +\@vobeyspaces +\@vpt +\@vspace +\@vspacer +\@vtryfc +\@vvector +\@warning +\@wckptelt +\@whiledim +\@whilenum +\@whilesw +\@wholewidth +\@width +\@wrglossary +\@wrindex +\@writeckpt +\@writefile +\@wrong@font@char +\@wtryfc +\@x@protect +\@x@sf +\@xDeclareMathDelimiter +\@xaddvskip +\@xarg +\@xargarraycr +\@xargdef +\@xarraycr +\@xbitor +\@xcentercr +\@xdblarg +\@xdblfloat +\@xdim +\@xeqncr +\@xexnoop +\@xexpast +\@xexpast* +\@xfloat +\@xfootnote +\@xfootnotemark +\@xfootnotenext +\@xhline +\@xifnch +\@xiipt +\@xipt +\@xivpt +\@xmpar +\@xnewline +\@xnext +\@xnthm +\@xobeysp +\@xprocess@ptions +\@xpt +\@xsect +\@xtabcr +\@xtabularcr +\@xthm +\@xtryfc +\@xtypein +\@xverbatim +\@xviipt +\@xxDeclareMathDelimiter +\@xxpt +\@xxvpt +\@xxxii +\@xympar +\@yarg +\@yargarraycr +\@yargd@f +\@yargdef +\@ydim +\@yeqncr +\@ympar +\@ynthm +\@ythm +\@ytryfc +\@yyarg +\@ztryfc +\DeclareFontEncoding@ +\DeclareFontEncoding@saved +\DeclareFontShape@ +\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet@ +\G@refundefinedtrue +\SetMathAlphabet@ +\SetSymbolFont@ +\UTFviii@four@octets +\UTFviii@four@octets@@ +\UTFviii@invalid@err +\UTFviii@invalid@err@@ +\UTFviii@three@octets +\UTFviii@three@octets@@ +\UTFviii@two@octets +\UTFviii@two@octets@@ +\UTFviii@undefined@err +\UTFviii@undefined@err@@ +\accent@spacefactor +\active@math@prime +\add@accent +\add@percent@to@temptokena +\addto@hook +\alloc@ +\alpha@elt +\alpha@list +\best@size +\bm@b +\bm@c +\bm@l +\bm@r +\bm@s +\bm@t +\bx@A +\bx@AA +\bx@B +\bx@BB +\bx@C +\bx@CC +\bx@D +\bx@DD +\bx@E +\bx@EE +\bx@F +\bx@FF +\bx@G +\bx@GG +\bx@H +\bx@HH +\bx@I +\bx@II +\bx@J +\bx@JJ +\bx@K +\bx@KK +\bx@L +\bx@LL +\bx@M +\bx@MM +\bx@N +\bx@NN +\bx@O +\bx@OO +\bx@P +\bx@PP +\bx@Q +\bx@QQ +\bx@R +\bx@RR +\bx@S +\bx@SS +\bx@T +\bx@TT +\bx@U +\bx@UU +\bx@V +\bx@VV +\bx@W +\bx@WW +\bx@X +\bx@XX +\bx@Y +\bx@YY +\bx@Z +\bx@ZZ +\c@bottomnumber +\c@dbltopnumber +\c@equation +\c@errorcontextlines +\c@footnote +\c@mpfootnote +\c@ncel +\c@page +\c@secnumdepth +\c@tocdepth +\c@topnumber +\c@totalnumber +\calculate@math@sizes +\catcodetable@atletter +\catcodetable@initex +\catcodetable@latex +\catcodetable@string +\cdp@elt +\cdp@list +\cf@encoding +\ch@ck +\chardef@text@cmd +\check@command +\check@icl +\check@icr +\check@mathfonts +\check@nocorr@ +\check@range +\check@single +\cl@@ckpt +\cl@page +\col@number +\color@begingroup +\color@endbox +\color@endgroup +\color@hbox +\color@setgroup +\color@vbox +\count@ +\counterwithin@s +\counterwithin@x +\counterwithout@s +\counterwithout@x +\curr@fontshape +\curr@math@size +\declare@robustcommand +\default@M +\default@T +\default@ds +\default@family +\default@series +\default@shape +\define@newfont +\dimen@ +\dimen@i +\dimen@ii +\displ@y +\do@noligs +\do@subst@correction +\document@default@language +\document@select@group +\dorestore@version +\ds@ +\dt@pfalse +\dt@ptrue +\e@alloc +\e@alloc@attribute@count +\e@alloc@bytecode@count +\e@alloc@ccodetable@count +\e@alloc@chardef +\e@alloc@intercharclass@top +\e@alloc@luachunk@count +\e@alloc@luafunction@count +\e@alloc@top +\e@alloc@whatsit@count +\e@ch@ck +\e@insert@top +\e@mathgroup@top +\empty@sfcnt +\enc@update +\end@dblfloat +\end@float +\error@fontshape +\every@math@size +\execute@size@function +\external@font +\extract@alph@from@version +\extract@font +\extract@fontinfo +\extract@rangefontinfo +\extract@sizefn* +\f@baselineskip +\f@depth +\f@encoding +\f@family +\f@linespread +\f@series +\f@shape +\f@size +\f@user@size +\filec@ntents +\filename@area +\filename@base +\filename@dot +\filename@ext +\filename@parse +\filename@path +\filename@simple +\finph@nt +\finsm@sh +\fix@penalty +\fixed@sfcnt +\float@count +\font@info +\font@name +\font@submax +\frozen@everydisplay +\frozen@everymath +\g@addto@macro +\gen@sfcnt +\genb@sfcnt +\genb@x +\genb@y +\get@cdp +\get@external@font +\getanddefine@fonts +\glb@currsize +\glb@settings +\group@elt +\group@list +\h@false +\h@true +\hb@xt@ +\hexnumber@ +\hgl@ +\hmode@bgroup +\hmode@start@before@group +\if@afterindent +\if@compatibility +\if@endpe +\if@eqnsw +\if@fcolmade +\if@filesw +\if@firstamp +\if@firstcolumn +\if@ignore +\if@includeinrelease +\if@inlabel +\if@insert +\if@minipage +\if@mparswitch +\if@negarg +\if@newlist +\if@nmbrlist +\if@nobreak +\if@noitemarg +\if@noparitem +\if@noparlist +\if@noskipsec +\if@ovb +\if@ovhline +\if@ovl +\if@ovr +\if@ovt +\if@ovvline +\if@partsw +\if@pboxsw +\if@reversemargin +\if@rjfield +\if@specialpage +\if@tempswa +\if@test +\if@twocolumn +\if@twoside +\ifdt@p +\ifh@ +\ifin@ +\ifmath@fonts +\ifmaybe@ic +\ifnot@nil +\ifv@ +\in@ +\in@@ +\in@false +\in@true +\init@restore@glb@settings +\init@restore@version +\input@path +\input@path: +\insc@unt +\install@mathalphabet +\is@range +\kernel@ifnextchar +\l@ngrel@x +\l@nohyphenation +\last@fontshape +\leavevmode@ifvmode +\load@onefilewithoptions +\lower@bound +\lower@bound0 +\ltx@sh@ft +\m@ne +\m@th +\makeph@nt +\makesm@sh +\mandatory@arg +\math@bgroup +\math@egroup +\math@fonts +\math@fontsfalse +\math@fontstrue +\math@version +\mathchar@type +\mathph@nt +\mathsm@sh +\maybe@ic +\maybe@ic@ +\maybe@icfalse +\maybe@ictrue +\mb@b +\mb@l +\mb@r +\mb@t +\n@space +\new@command +\new@environment +\new@mathalphabet +\new@mathgroup +\new@mathversion +\new@symbolfont +\nfss@catcodes +\nfss@text +\no@alphabet@error +\noaccents@ +\non@alpherr +\not@base +\not@math@alphabet +\o@lign +\on@line +\operator@font +\optional@arg +\outer@nobreak +\p@ +\p@equation +\par@deathcycles +\patch@level +\ph@nt +\pickup@font +\pictur@ +\pkgcls@arg +\pkgcls@candidate +\pkgcls@debug +\pkgcls@innerdate +\pkgcls@mindate +\pkgcls@name +\pkgcls@parse@date@arg +\pkgcls@parse@date@arg@ +\pkgcls@parse@date@arg@version +\pkgcls@releasedate +\pkgcls@rollbackdate@error +\pkgcls@show@selection +\pkgcls@targetdate +\pkgcls@targetlabel +\pkgcls@use@this@release +\pr@@@s +\pr@@@t +\pr@m@s +\prim@s +\process@table +\protected@edef +\protected@file@percent +\protected@write +\protected@xdef +\provide@command +\ps@empty +\ps@plain +\r@@t +\rem@pt +\remove@angles +\remove@star +\remove@star* +\remove@to@nnil +\renew@command +\renew@environment +\reserved@a +\reserved@b +\reserved@c +\reserved@d +\reserved@e +\reserved@f +\reset@font +\restglb@settings +\restore@mathversion +\restore@protect +\rlh@ +\saved@space@catcode +\scriptfont@name +\select@group +\set@@mathdelimiter +\set@color +\set@display@protect +\set@fontsize +\set@mathaccent +\set@mathchar +\set@mathdelimiter +\set@mathsymbol +\set@simple@size@args +\set@size@funct@args +\set@size@funct@args@ +\set@typeset@protect +\sf@size +\sh@ft +\sixt@@n +\size@update +\sizefn@info +\skip@ +\sp@n +\split@name +\ssf@size +\strip@prefix +\strip@pt +\sub@sfcnt +\subf@sfcnt +\subst@correction +\sw@slant +\t@st@ic +\text@command +\textfont@name +\tf@size +\thr@@ +\toks@ +\try@load@fontshape +\try@simple@size +\try@simples +\try@size@range +\try@size@substitution +\tryif@simple +\tw@ +\two@digits +\unrestored@protected@xdef +\upper@bound +\use@mathgroup +\v@false +\v@true +\verb@balance@group +\verb@egroup +\verb@eol@error +\verbatim@font +\verbatim@nolig@list +\version@elt +\version@list +\vgl@ +\voidb@x +\wrong@fontshape +\x@protect +\xe@alloc@intercharclass +\z@ +\z@skip +\zap@space diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ec91b769404 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..59a8488c2f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexchanges.tex @@ -0,0 +1,756 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 2015-2019 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: latexchanges.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} + +\documentclass{ltxguide} + +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\title{Changes to the \LaTeXe{} format} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 2015--2019, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{2019-10-01} + +% a few commands from doc +\newcommand\Lpack[1]{\mbox{\textsf{#1}}} +\newcommand\DescribeMacro[1]{\texttt{\string#1}} + +\makeatletter % -- provide command introduced in new release + % so this typesets with an old format + +\DeclareTextCommandDefault\textcommabelow[1] + {\hmode@bgroup\ooalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\raise-.31ex + \hbox{\check@mathfonts\fontsize\ssf@size\z@ + \math@fontsfalse\selectfont,}\hidewidth}\egroup} +\makeatother + +\ifx\href\undefined + \newcommand\ghissue[1]{#1} + \newcommand\gnatsissue[1]{#1} + \newcommand\ltnewsissue[1]{\LaTeX\ News~#1} + \newcommand\sxanswer[1]{https://tex.stackexchange.com\slash a\slash #1} + \newcommand\sxquestion[1]{https://tex.stackexchange.com\slash q\slash #1} +\else + \newcommand\ghissue[1]{% + \href{https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues/#1}{#1}} + \newcommand\gnatsissue[1]{% + \href{https://www.latex-project.org/cgi-bin/ltxbugs2html?pr=latex/#1}{#1}} + \newcommand\ltnewsissue[1]{% + \href{https://www.latex-project.org/news/latex2e-news/ltnews#1.pdf}{\LaTeX\ News~#1}} + \newcommand\sxanswer[1]{% + \url{https://tex.stackexchange.com/a/#1}} + \newcommand\sxquestion[1]{% + \url{https://tex.stackexchange.com/q/#1}} +\fi + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\newpage + +\section{Introduction} + +This document describes changes that have been made to the +\LaTeX\ format since the 2014/05/01 \LaTeX\ release. + + +As announced in \ltnewsissue{22}, the 2015 \LaTeX{} release adopts a new +policy. Improvements and bug fixes will be made to the format sources, +with the \Lpack{latexrelease} package being available to revert +changes to use definitions from an earlier format. + + +\section{Changes introduced in 2019-10-01} + +\emph{to be added} + +\section{Changes introduced in 2018-12-01} + +Further additions to the characters supported by default in UTF-8. +\verb|\guillemetleft| and \verb|\guillemetright| provided as alias for +the names based on the Adobe font names (\ghissue{65}). + +The use of potrusion in tables of contents is suppressed by default, +see \sxquestion{172785}. + +The handling of visible space in verbation was adjusted for +\ghissue{69} and \ghissue{70}. + +Spaces are removed from the argument passed to BiBTeX, \ghissue{88}. + +New commands \verb\Hwithstroke| and \verb|\hwithstroke| added to T1 encoding support. + +The internal box structure for floats is adjusted to preserve box +levels of split hyperlinks, avoiding a fatal pdftex error. \ghissue{94}. + + +\section{Changes introduced in 2018-04-01 patch~5} +Improved support for non ASCII filenames on the commandline on +filesystems using legacy encodings. + +Adjusted the new package rollback code so that some edge cases where rollback +can not be guaranteed become a warning not an error. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2018-04-01 patch~4} +No changes to the format, but \texttt{docstrip} adjusted so that non-ASCII +\texttt{.ins} files work with the new UTF-8 defaults. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2018-04-01 patch~3} +Additional adjustments for GitHub issues \ghissue{34} and \ghissue{38}, adjustment to the +location of some documentation files, such as \texttt{source2e.tex} to +be installed in the documentation sources not the default \TeX\ input +tree. + + +\section{Changes introduced in 2018-04-01 patch~2} +Additional adjustments for GitHub issues \ghissue{32} and \ghissue{33}. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2018-04-01 patch~1} +Make \verb|\UseRawInputEncoding| and \Lpack{latexrelease} reset \verb|\inputencodingname| +when disabling the UTF-8 input handling. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2018-04-01} +Further details of changes at this release are given in \ltnewsissue{28}, but in brief +the main changes are as listed below. + +The default encoding for files has been changed to UTF-8. + +A new possibility to refer to older versions of packages has been added. + +New commands previously available in \Lpack{remreset} and +\Lpack{chngcntr} packages for controlling counters have been added. + +The definition of \verb|\@ifundefined| has been refined to use the e-\TeX \verb|\ifcsname| +primitive when available, and to avoid defining the command being tested to be \verb|\relax| +in the case that it was previously undefined. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2017-04-15} +Optionally, \LaTeX{} format and package dates may use ISO style dates with +\texttt{-} rather than \texttt{/}. + +For Unicode \TeX{}s, made further adjustments to the composite accent +code in \texttt{tuenc.def}, and further updates tracking changes in +Lua\TeX, now at 1.04. + +Previously defining an encoding-specific composite with an undeclared +accent (or an accent declared later) gave no error, but did nothing useful. +\LaTeX\ will now detect this and give the accent comamnd a default definition +as an error, allowing the declared composite to work as intended. + +The definition of \verb|\-| is adjusted to match the comments in +\gnatsissue{3855} to accomodate non standard settings of \verb|\hyphenchar|. + +In parboxes and similar settings, \verb|\lineskiplimit| is now +reset (to the existing default value, \verb|\normallineskiplimit|). +See \sxanswer{359934}. + + The code for verb|\newpage| has been adjusted to add a test on the value of +\verb|\prevdepth| so that the depth of the last line is preserved in +forced page breaks. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2017/01/01 patch~3} +Emergency patch to correct a typo in a change introduced in patch~2. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2017/01/01 patch~2} +More adjustments for TU encoding, allowing for characters missing in +common system fonts. Additional \texttt{fd} files +for Latin Modern variants are included in the documented sources. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2017/01/01 patch~1} +Fixes to TU encoding definitions for Lua\TeX\ and Xe\TeX. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2017/01/01} + +A new test is added during format making that e\TeX\ extensions are +available. As noted in \LaTeX\ news, e\TeX\ will now be required to +build \LaTeX. + +Further updates tracking changes for Lua\TeX~1.0. + +The definition of \verb|\showhyphens| is changed in formats built +with Xe\TeX, as the original version, inherited from plain \TeX\ does +not work with Xe-\TeX. + +Changes to the default encoding used by Lua\TeX\ and Xe\TeX\ formats to +be TU (Unicode) rather than OT1 (7 bit legacy \TeX\ encoding). + +\section{Changes introduced in 2016/03/31 patch~3} +Fixes to \verb|\newinsert| and \verb|\extrafloats|. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2016/03/31 patch~2} +Adjustments to \verb|\c{g}| in OT1 encoding. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2016/03/31 patch~1} +Adjust the upper limit for Character Class allocation in Xe-\TeX\ to +4096 to match a change in Xe-\TeX. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2016/03/31} +Modify picture mode as suggested in latex/4452 to avoid leaders of +almost zero length. + +Modify the checks in \verb|\DeclareMathSymbol| and related commands +so that they do not give errors with new Lua\TeX\ releases. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2016/02/01} +Adjustments to Lua\TeX\ support to match changes to the Lua\TeX\ engine, +and to the character class allocation in Xe\TeX. + +Load Unicode data from new generic \texttt{unicode-data} distribution. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2015/10/01 patch~2} + +This release fixes the behaviour of the allocation mechanism if the switch +from the standard to extended pool takes place within a group. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2015/10/01 patch~1} +This release allows \Lpack{latexrelease} to revert the +Lua\TeX{}-specific +changes, in particular fixing an incorrect date in part of the mechanism and +adding a method to disable callback management entirely. + +\section{Changes introduced in \LaTeX\ 2015/10/01} + +\subsection{LuaTeX allocation} +Almost all changes at this release relate to incorporating allocation macros for luatex into the format +as done for etex and xetex in 2015/01/01. For details see |ltluatex.dtx| or \ltnewsissue{22}. +|ltluatex.dtx| now forms a new chapter (N) in the documented sources, |source2e.tex|. + + +\subsection{Increased number of floats} +The default float list has been increased from 18 to 52 registers if +e\TeX\ is available. +The list can be increased further using |\extrafloats| however this +default allocation uses classic registers below 256 so the registers are +also available for |\newinsert| as described below. + +\subsection{Improved \texttt{\textbackslash newinsert}} +The command |\newinsert| has been extended to take registers from the lists of free float +registers once the classic register allocation is used up. This should make it highly unlikely +to get ``no room'' errors on register allocation assuming the format is used with +an e-\TeX\ based \TeX\ engine. + +\subsection{New accent, \texttt{\textbackslash textcommabelow} (pr/4414)} +The command |\textcommabelow| has been added. This is mainly intended for Romanian letters +\textcommabelow{S}\,\textcommabelow{s}\,\textcommabelow{T}\,\textcommabelow{t}. + +\subsection{Unicode 8} +The file |unicode-letters.def| used to initialise character data in +Unicode \TeX\ variants has been regenerated from data files updated +to Unicode~8. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2015/01/01 patch~2} +There were no changes to the format at this release, but the sources were fixed to fix bug latex/4434 +affecting bottom float positioning if the \Lpack{latexrelease} package was used. + +\section{Changes introduced in 2015/01/01 patch~1} +This release re-introduces the ``Patch Level'' scheme for identifying +releases between main ``dated'' releases. Early \LaTeXe\ releases +included a mechanism whereby updates could be provided by a +\emph{patch + file}. This was mainly intended to allow updates to be made without +downloading the full sources again, which was an important +consideration with download speeds and costs at the time. + +The new mechanism incorporates any changes directly into the sources, +but having the patch level identified in the banner allows the +\LaTeX\ release to be identified, even if (as in this case) most of the +changes do not affect the format but affect other base packages such +as \Lpack{latexrelease} and \Lpack{inputenc}. The patch level is shown +in the banner at the start of the job, but does not affect the date +handling of the |\IncludeInRelease| mechanism. + +Apart from re-arranging the version banner, the only change in the +format is that |\newtoks| was accidentally defined twice, using the +old and new allocation scheme described in Section \ref{e@alloc}. +The old definition is now only in the \Lpack{latexrelease} package, +for use when emulating old formats. + + + + +\section +[Changes between \LaTeX\ releases 2014/05/01 and 2015/01/01] +{Changes between \LaTeX\ releases 2014/05/01 and 2015/01/01\footnote{Much of this text +is taken from \Lpack{fixltx2e} package which was formerly used to make such changes available separately.}} + +\subsection{Support for \LaTeX\ version changes} +\DescribeMacro{\includeInRelease}\arg{date}\oarg{date}\arg{label}\arg{message}\arg{code} + +\smallskip + +The |\includeInRelease| command has been added to support backward and +forward compatibility for the \LaTeX\ format. It supports the +declaration of conditional code that can be loaded based on options +given to the \Lpack{latexrelease} package. Its use is described in +detail in the \Lpack{latexrelease} package documentation. + +\subsection{New Allocation Code\label{e@alloc}} +Previously |\newcount| and related commands were based on classic TeX +and only allocated in the range 0--255. This was extended (in +different ways) for e-\TeX\ in the |etex| package and in the +|xelatex.ini| and |lualatex.ini| files used in those formats. Related +to this the number of boxes allocated to store floats was +limited. This was extended to a certain extent in the |morefloats| +package (by Don Hosek and H.-Martin Muench) but the new allocation +incorporates float allocation directly and supports much larger float +lists using the extended registers. + +The new code allocates registers in the full extended range ( +$2^{15}-1$ for etex and xelatex, $2^{16}-1$ for lualatex. +In addition a new command |\extrafloats| is provided. + +\DescribeMacro{\extrafloats}\arg{number} +\smallskip + +This allocates additional registers for the \LaTeX\ float system to +hold figures and tables etc. Similar functionality has been +available via the \Lpack{morefloats} package but this is a different +implementation using extended e-\TeX\ registers when available so +allows many more registers to be reserved for floats as they are +allocated from a pool of 32 or 64 thousand rather than 256 registers, +depending on the engine in use. + +\DescribeMacro{\newmarks}\arg{command} +\smallskip + +e-\TeX\ only, previously available via the \Lpack{etex} package. +Allocates commands to use the extended e-\TeX\ mark mechanism. + +\DescribeMacro{\newXeTeXintercharclass}\arg{command} +\smallskip + +Xe-\TeX\ only, previously in the Xe-\LaTeX\ format, but added via +|xelatex.ini| not part of the core release. +Allocates commands to use the Xe-\TeX\ character class mechanism. + + +\subsection{e-\TeX\ tracing if available} +|\loggingall| (Usually used via |\tracingall|) is extended to enable +additional e-\TeX\ tracing if e-\TeX\ is available. (|\tracingall| +extension has been available as part of the |etex| package previously). + +Also based on code from the |etex| package, a command |\tracingnone| +is added to reverse the effects of |\tracingall| and turn off all primitive +\TeX\ tracing. A new command |\hideoutput| has been added which resets the +tracing parameters set by |\showoutput|. + + + + +\subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash textsubscript} not defined in + latex.ltx (pr/3492)} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 3492 +>>Category: latex +>>Synopsis: \textsubscript not defined in latex.ltx +>>Arrival-Date: Tue Jan 14 23:01:00 CET 2003 +>>Originator: Ionel Mugurel Ciobica + +I use \textsubscript much more often than \textsuperscript, and +\textsubscript it is not defined in latex.ltx. Could you please +consider including the definition of \textsubscript in the latex.ltx +for the next versions of LaTeX. Thank you. +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash @} discards spaces when moving + (pr/3039)} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 3039 +>>Category: latex +>>Synopsis: \@ discards spaces when moving +>>Arrival-Date: Sat May 22 09:01:06 1999 +>>Originator: Donald Arseneau +>>Description: +The \@ command expands to \spacefactor\@m in auxiliary files, +which then ignores following spaces when it is reprocessed. +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{1-col fig can come before earlier 2-col fig + (pr/2346)} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 2346 +>>Category: latex +>>Synopsis: 2-col: 1-col fig can come before earlier 2-col fig +>>Arrival-Date: Wed Dec 18 15:41:07 1996 +>>Originator: bil kleb +>>Description: +as documented in Lamport's book, p. 198, concerning figure +placement, "a figure will not be printed before an earlier +figure, and a table will not be printed before an earlier +table." however, there is a footnote stating, "However, +in two-column page style, a single-column figure can come before +an earlier double-column figure, and vice versa." + +This twocolumn behavior is undesirable---at least by me and +most professional organizations i publish in. ed snyzter developed +a hack fix for 2.09 several years ago which links the two +counters, but i have not run across a similar "fix" for 2e... +\end{verbatim} + +Originally fixed in package \Lpack{fix2col} which was merged into +this package. Documentation and code from this package have been +merged into this file. + +\subsubsection{Notes on the Implementation Strategy} + +The standard output routine maintains two lists of floats that have +been `deferred' for later consideration. One list for single column +floats, and one for double column floats (which are always +immediately put onto their deferred list). This mechanism means +that \LaTeX\ `knows' which type of float is contained in each box +by the list that it is processing, but having two lists means +that there is no mechanism for preserving the order between the +floats in each list. + +The solution to this problem consists of two small changes to +the output routine. + +Firstly, abandon the `double column float list' |\@dbldeferlist| +and change every command where it is used so that instead the +same |\@deferlist| is used as for single column floats. +That one change ensures that double and single column floats +stay in the same sequence, but as \LaTeX\ no longer `knows' +whether a float is double or single column, it will happily +insert a double float into a single column, overprinting the +other column, or the margin. + +The second change is to provide an alternative mechanism for +recording the two column floats. \LaTeX\ already has a compact +mechanism for recording float information, an integer count register +assigned to each float records information about the `type' of float +`figure', `table' and the position information `htp' etc. + +The type information is stored in the `high' bits, one bit position +(above `32') allocated to each float type. The `low' bits store +information about the allowed positions, one bit each allocated for +|h t b p|. In the \LaTeX2.09 system, the bit corresponding to `16' +formed a `boundary' between these two sets of information, and it +was never actually used by the system. Ed Sznyter's +\Lpack{fixfloats} package not unreasonably used this position to +store the double column information, setting the bit for double +column floats. Then at each point in the output routine at which a +float is committed to a certain region, an additional check must be +made to check that the float is (or is not) double column. If it +spans the wrong number of columns it is deferred rather than being +added. + +Unfortunately the bit `16' is not available in \LaTeXe. It is used +to encode the extra float position possibility `|!|' that was added +in that system. It would be possible to use position `32' and to +move the flags for `table', `figure',\ldots\ up one position, to +start at 64, but this would mean that in principle one less float +type would be supported, and more importantly is likely to break +any other packages that assume anything about the output routine +internals. So here I instead use another mechanism for flagging +double column floats: By default all floats have depth 0pt. +This package arranges that double column ones have depth 1sp. +This information may then be used in the same manner as in +the \Lpack{fixfloats} package, to defer any floats that are not of +the correct column spanning type. + + + +\subsection{Infinite glue found (pr/4023 and pr/2346)} + +The fix for pr/2346 did not work as intended when used in conjunction +with |\enlargethispage| as the latter introduced an infinite negative +glue at the bottom of the page. That in turn make a |\vsplit| +operation to get at the column marks invalid. + +\subsection{Wrong header for twocolumn (pr/2613)} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 2613 +>>Category: latex +>>Synopsis: wrong headline for twocolumn +>>Arrival-Date: Mon Sep 22 16:41:09 1997 +>>Originator: Daniel Reischert +>>Description: +When setting the document in two columns +the headline shows the top mark of the second column, +but it should show the top mark of the first column. +\end{verbatim} + +Originally fixed in package \Lpack{fix2col} which was merged into +this package. Documentation and code from this package have been +merged into this file. + +\subsubsection{Notes on the Implementation Strategy} + +The standard \LaTeX\ twocolumn system works internally by making +each column a separate `page' that is passed independently to \TeX's +page breaker. (Unlike say the \Lpack{multicol} package, where all +columns are gathered together and then split into columns later, +using |\vsplit|.) This means that the primitive \TeX\ marks that are +normally used for header information, are globally reset after the +first column. By default \LaTeX\ does nothing about this. +A good solution is provided by Piet van Oostrum (building on earlier +work of Joe Pallas) in his \Lpack{fixmarks} package. + +After the first column box has been collected the mark information +for that box is saved, so that any |\firstmark| can be +`artificially' used to set the page-level marks after the second +column has been collected. (The second column |\firstmark| is not +normally required.) Unfortunately \TeX\ does not provide a direct +way of knowing if any marks are in the page, |\firstmark| always has a +value from previous pages, even if there is no mark in this page. +The solution is to make a copy of the box and then |\vsplit| it +so that any marks show up as |\splitfirstmark|. + +The use of |\vsplit| does mean that the output routine will globally +change the value of |\splitfirstmark| and +|\splitbotmark|. The \Lpack{fixmarks} package goes to some trouble +to save and restore these values so that the output routine does +\emph{not} change the values. This part of \Lpack{fixmarks} is not +copied here as it is quite costly (having to be run on every page) and +there is no reason why anyone writing code using |\vsplit| should +allow the output routine to be triggered before the split marks have +been accessed. + + + +\subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash setlength} produces error if + used with registers like \texttt{\textbackslash dimen0} (pr/3066)} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 3066 +>>Category: latex +>>Synopsis: \setlength{\dimen0}{10pt} +>>Arrival-Date: Tue Jul 6 15:01:06 1999 +>>Originator: Heiko Oberdiek +>>Description: +The current implementation of \setlength causes an error, +because the length specification isn't terminated properly. +More safe: +\def\setlength#1#2{#1=#2\relax} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Fewer fragile commands} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 3816 +>>Category: latex +>>Synopsis: Argument of \@sect has an extra }. +>>Arrival-Date: Sat Oct 22 23:11:01 +0200 2005 +>>Originator: Susanne Wunsch + +Use of a \raisebox in \section{} produces the error message +mentioned in the subject. + +PR latex/1738 described a similar problem, which has been solved +10 years ago. Protecting the \raisebox with \protect solved my +problem as well, but wouldn't it make sense to have a similar fix +as in the PR? + +It is particularly confusing, that an unprotected \raisebox in a +\section*-environment works fine, while in a \section-environment +produces error. +\end{verbatim} + +While not technically a bug, in this day and age there are few +reasons why commands taking optional arguments should not be robust. + +\subsubsection{Notes on the implementation strategy} + +Rather than changing the kernel macros to be robust, we have decided +to add the macro \DescribeMacro{\MakeRobust}|\MakeRobust| in +\Lpack{fixltx2e} so that users can easily turn fragile macros into +robust ones. A macro |\foo| is made robust by doing the simple +|\MakeRobust{\foo}|. \Lpack{fixltx2e} makes the following kernel +macros robust: |\(|, |\)|, |\[|, |\]|, + |\makebox|, |\savebox|, +|\framebox|, |\parbox|, |\rule| and |\raisebox|. + +\ldots TODO \ldots fleqn vesion of |\[\]| + +\subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash addpenalty} ruins flush-bottom (pr/3073)} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 3073 +>>Category: latex +>>Synopsis: \addpenalty ruins flush-bottom +>>Arrival-Date: Sat Jul 17 05:11:05 1999 +>>Originator: Donald Arseneau +>>Description: +Just to keep in mind for further development eh? +A page break at an \addpenalty after \vspace does *not* +give a flush-bottom page. (The intent of \addpenalty is +apparently just to preserve the flush bottom by putting +the breakpoint `above' the skip.) +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Within counters only reset next level down (pr4393)} + +This is actually implicitly documented behavior in the \LaTeX{} +Manual that states that |\stepcounter| resets all counters marked +``within''. However it means that if, for example, theorems are +numbered within sections and you start a new chapter in a book, the +section counter is reset to zero but the theorem counter is not +until the first section appears. Thus a theorem directly within the +chapter body (without a new section) would show an incremented +number relative to the last theorem of the previous chapter. + + +For this reason we are now resetting all levels of within in one go +even if that means that some of these resets may happen several times +unnecessarily. + + +\subsection{Check the optional arguments of floats} + +By default LaTeX silently ignores unknown letters in the optional +arguments of floats. |\begin{figure}[tB]| the |B| is ignored so it +acts like |\begin{figure}[t]| However |\begin{figure}[B]| does +\emph{not} act like |\begin{figure}[]| as the check for an empty +argument, or unsupplied argument, is earlier. |[]| causes the +default float placement to be used, but |[B]| means that \emph{no} +float area is allowed and so the float will not be placed until the +next |\clearpage| or end of document, no warning is given. + +This package adds a check on each letter, and if it not one of +|!tbhp| then an error is given and the code acts as if |p| had been +used, so that the float may be placed somewhere. + +\subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash DeclareMathSizes} only take pts. + (pr/3693)} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 3693 +>>Category: latex +>>Synopsis: \DeclareMathSizes only take pts. +>>Arrival-Date: Fri Jun 11 16:21:00 CEST 2004 +>>Originator: Morten Hoegholm + +The last three arguments of \@DeclareMathSizes cannot take a dimension +as argument, making it inconsistent with the rest of the font changing +commands and itself, as the second argument can take a dimension +specification. +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{No hyphenation in first word after float environment (pr/3498)} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 3498 +>>Category: latex +>>Synopsis: No hyphenation in first word after float environment +>>Arrival-Date: Thu Jan 30 13:21:00 CET 2003 +>>Originator: Harald Harders + +If a float environment (figure, table) is written within a paragraph, +the first word after the environment is not hyphenated. +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash fnsymbol} should use text symbols + (pr/3400)} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 3400 +>>Category: latex +>>Synopsis: \fnsymbol should use text symbols if possible +>>Arrival-Date: Fri Jan 04 20:41:00 CET 2002 +>>Originator: Walter Schmidt + +The \fnsymbol command can be used in both text and math +mode. The symbols produced are, however, always taken from +the math fonts. As a result, they may not match the text +fonts, even if the symbols are actually available, for +instance from the TS1 encoding. Since \fnsymbol is +primarily used for footnotes in text, this should be fixed, +IMO. +\end{verbatim} + + + + + +\subsection{\texttt{\textbackslash footnotemark}[x] crashes with fixltx2e.sty + (pr/3752)} + +\begin{verbatim} +>>Number: 3752 +>>Category: tools +>>Synopsis: feature \footnotemark[x] crashes with fixltx2e.sty +>>Arrival-Date: Fri Dec 17 10:11:00 +0100 2004 +>>Originator: Stefan Pofahl + + If I use /fnsymbol together with fixltx2e.sty I can not use + optional parameter [num] + \footnotemark[1] is not showing the mark number 1 but + the mark \value{footnote}. +\end{verbatim} +This bug was related to pr/3400, where |\@fnsymbol| was made robust. + +\subsubsection{Notes on the implementation strategy} + +Pr/3400 made |\@fnsymbol| decide between text-mode and math-mode, +which requires a certain level of robustness somewhere as the +decision between text and math must be made at typesetting time and +not when inside |\protected@edef| or similar commands. One way of +dealing with this is to make sure the value seen by |\@fnsymbol| is +a fully expanded number, which could be handled by code such as +\begin{verbatim} +\def\fnsymbol#1{\expandafter\@fnsymbol + \expandafter{\the\csname c@#1\endcsname}} +\end{verbatim} +This would be a good solution if everybody used the high level +commands only by writing code like |\fnsymbol{footnote}|. Unfortunately +many classes (including the standard classes) and packages use the +internal forms directly as in |\@fnsymbol\c@footnote| so the easy +solution of changing |\fnsymbol| would break code that had worked for +the past 20~years. + +Therefore the implementation here makes |\@fnsymbol| itself a +non-robust command again and instead uses a new robust command +\DescribeMacro{\TextOrMath}|\TextOrMath|, which will take care of +typesetting either the math or the text symbol. In order to do so, +we face an age old problem and unsolvable problem in \TeX: A +reliable test for math mode that doesn't destroy +kerning. Fortunately this problem can be solved when using e\TeX\ so +if you use this as engine for your \LaTeX\ format, as recommended by +the \LaTeX3 Project, you will get a fully functioning |\TextOrMath| +command with no side effects. If you use regular \TeX\ as engine for +your \LaTeX\ format then we have to choose between the lesser of two +evils: 1)~breaking ligatures and preventing kerning or 2)~face the +risk of choosing text-mode at the beginning of an alignment cell, +which was supposed to be math-mode. We have decided upon 1) as is +customary for regular robust commands in \LaTeX. + + + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..44c83065ce5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexrelease.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexsym.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexsym.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..242cf1725cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/latexsym.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..fa8694c5e26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.err @@ -0,0 +1,1622 @@ +\newcommand\erratafiledate{2014-09-30} + +\def\comando#1{\texttt{\string#1}} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through +% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and +% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify +% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata +% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the +% .cfg file. +% +% The current version of this file can be found at: +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/guides/books.html +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls} +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007, 2014 Frank Mittelbach +%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version; +%% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl +% +% +% It sets up a few commands used to format the errata entries for books in the +% Addison-Wesley Series: +% +% Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting +% +% hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for +% errata files of other books. +% +% Changes: +% +% v1.0a - changed name from errata.cls to ttcterrata.cls + +\ProvidesClass{ttcterrata} + [2007/11/10 v1.0a Mini class for errata files; subject to change (FMi)] + +\LoadClass{article} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} +\addtolength\textwidth{5cm} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm} + +\addtolength\textheight{36pt} + +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + +\RequirePackage{array,longtable} +\RequirePackage{multicol} + + +\newcommand\erratagetnumber{} +\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3} + + +\newcommand\gobbleerrata{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup + \let\endgobble\egroup + \let\hideamp\relax + \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par} + +\newcommand*\hideamp{&} + +\let\endgobble\relax + + +\newcommand\erratastartdate{} +\newcommand\myprinting{1} + + +\newcommand\doweprint[2]{% + \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else \ifx s#2 1000\else#2 \fi\fi + \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber < + \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax + \@tempswatrue + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi +} + + + +\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate} +\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and} + +\newcommand\showallerrors{% + \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}% + \renewcommand\printedentries{up to} + \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}} + + +\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{% + \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi} + +\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{% + \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}} + +\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg} + { + \input{\jobname.cfg} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found } + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \AtEndDocument{ + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing} + \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision} + \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date} + \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Current settings are:} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting} + \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + }} + {} + +%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision> + +\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble + &\\[4pt]% + \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\} + +\newenvironment{erratalist} + {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}} + {\endgobble\end{longtable}} + +\newcommand\erratatitle[2] + {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries + Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt] + \small Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2\\ + (For other periods/print runs reprocess this document + with different config settings) + \end{center}% + \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \vspace{20pt}} + +\pagestyle{myheadings} + +\AtBeginDocument{\small} + +\setlength\parindent{0pt} +\setlength\parskip{2pt} + +\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par} + +% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: + +\let\u\underline +\renewcommand\>{$\to$} + +%%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of +%%% contributions by individuals (will work only if we do not get +%%% too many :-) + +\def\count@contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{ + \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}% +%%% also count secondary: +%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}% +} + +\renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% + \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{% + \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par} + +\end{filecontents} + + +\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} +% +% +% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% +% Der LaTeX-Begleiter 2 Auflage +% +% +% \erratastartdate +% +% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed. +% +% The format is YYYY/MM/DD. +% +% The default below ensures that all entries for a particular +% printing are typeset. +% + +\renewcommand\erratastartdate{2005/09/01} + + +% +% \myprinting +% +% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. For example, if you +% have the second printing set this to 2 so that errors already +% corrected in that printing will not appear in your errata +% listing. +% +% The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the second +% printing are typeset. +% +% + +\renewcommand\myprinting{2} + +% +% \norevisionnumbers +% +% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same +% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed +% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in +% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. + +% +% \showallerrors +% +% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are +% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and +% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by +% default. +% +% +\endinput +\end{filecontents} + + +\documentclass{ttcterrata}[2005/11/10] % we want new class + +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\let\u\underline % shortcut for this file + +\newcommand\meta[1]{$\langle$\textit{#1\/}$\rangle$} +\newcommand\BibTeX{\textsc{Bib}\TeX} + + +\usepackage{textcomp} + +\usepackage{url} + +\usepackage[ngerman]{babel} +\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} + + +\renewcommand\erratatitle[2] + {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries + Errataliste f\"ur #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ Druck)\\[10pt] + \small Enth\"alt alle Eintr\"age die \printedentries\space #2 + gemeldet wurden \\ + (F\"ur andere Zeitr\"aume/Druckausgaben \"andert man die \texttt{.cfg} + Datei und formatiert erneut.) + \end{center}% + \markright{Errata für #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \vspace{20pt}} + +\renewcommand\printedentries{zwischen \erratastartdate\space und} + + + +\begin{document} + +\erratatitle{Der \LaTeX{}-Begleiter, zweite Auf\/lage}{\erratafiledate} + + +\vspace*{-\baselineskip} + +Hardcover-Ausgabe: +\begin{verbatim} +@book(Pearson:MG05, + author = {Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens}, + title = {Der {\LaTeX}-Begleiter}, edition = 2, + note = {Unter Mitarbeit von Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, und Chris Rowley}, + publisher = {Pearson Studium}, address = {M\"unchen}, year = 2005, + pagenums = {1180}, bibliography = {yes}, index = {yes}, + isbn = {3-8273-7166-X}, +) +\end{verbatim} +Bafög-Ausgabe (Softcover) die inhaltlich identisch ist: +\begin{verbatim} +@book(Pearson:MG10, + author = {Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens}, + title = {Der {\LaTeX}-Begleiter Baf\"og-Ausgabe}, edition = 2, + note = {Unter Mitarbeit von Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, und Chris Rowley}, + publisher = {Pearson Studium}, address = {M\"unchen}, year = 2010, + pagenums = {1180}, bibliography = {yes}, index = {yes}, + isbn = {3-8689-4088-X}, +) +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{3cm}} +\item[] + +Diese Errata-Datei (\texttt{\jobname.err}) ist Teil der +\LaTeX-Distribution und die neuste Version findet man auf der \LaTeX{} +Project Webseite unter +\url{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/}\texttt{\jobname.err}. Dort +findet man auch einige Abschnitte des Buches als PDF-Dateien. + +Die erste Spalte der Tabelle zeigt die Seitennummer des +Errataeintrags. Hochgestellte Ziffern in der ersten Spalte verweisen +auf den Nachdruck, in dem der beschriebene Fehler korrigiert wurde +(ein \textit{s} zeigt, an, dass das Problem bisher nur in den +"`S"'ourcen korrigiert wurde). Die zweite Spalte beschreibt die genaue +Position (negative Zeilen- oder Absatznummern werden vom Fuß der Seite +gezählt). Die dritte Spalte zeigt die Initialen der Person die den +Fehler zuerst aufgespürt/gemeldet hat. + + +Mithilfe der Konfigurationsdatei \texttt{\jobname.cfg} ist es möglich die +Liste so anzupassen, dass nur Errataeinträge ab einem +speziellen Nachdruck oder ab einem gewünschten Datum angezeigt werden. + + +\begin{center} + \Large \bfseries Irren ist menschlich -- Fehlerwettbewerb +\end{center} + + +Jeder gefundene und mitgeteilte Fehler ist ein Gewinn für alle Leser +und Käufer unseres Buches. Aus diesem Grund schreiben wir, Pearson +Studium und die Autoren, einen Preis aus -- halbjährlich, später (mehr)jährlich -- den +die Person erhält, die die meisten Fehler innerhalb dieser Zeit findet +(im Falle einer Überschneidung wird das Los zwischen den "`besten"' +Fehlersuchern entscheiden). Eine Person kann nur einmal einen Preis +bekommen; Fehler die durch die Autoren gefunden werden, zählen nicht. +\begin{center} +Ihr Preis: Ein Lehrbuch Ihrer Wahl! +\end{center} +Auswählen können Sie dieses unter \url{http://www.pearson-studium.de}. +(Bundles und mehrbändige Bücher sind davon ausgenommen). + +Wie üblich behalten sich die Autoren und der Verlag das Recht vor, +selbst zu entscheiden ob ein Fehler tatsächlich als Fehler anzusehen +ist oder ob ein wiederholt vorkommender Fehler als ein oder mehrere Fehler +gezählt wird. + +- Viel Erfolg - + +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{clr@{ Eingaben}} +Ende der Wettbewerbsperiode & Gewinner \\[4pt] +2006/04 & Jens Mandavid & 121 \\ +2006/10 & Ralf Heckmann & 61 \\ +2008/04 & --- \\ +\ldots & Termin einer weiteren Verlosung offen +%2008/10 & \\ +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{list} + +\newpage + + +%<-------------------------- + +\begin{erratalist} + +\CHAPTER{Allgemein} + +\iffalse +\seriouserroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{} + + To help you in assessing this errata document we have placed + exclamation marks in front of each entry that we consider essential + for correctly understanding the book contents. + \fi + +\erroronpage{}{}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{} + Einzelne Teile mehrgliedriger Abkürzungen werden im deutschsprachigen + Satz normalerweise durch einen kleinen Zwischenraum (Spatium) getrennt; nur in + englischsprachigen Texten wird zwischen den Abkürzungsteilen kein + Zwischenraum gesetzt. + Beispiele: z.\,B., u.\,a.\ anstatt z.B., u.a. + + Dies wird im Buch \emph{vermutlich} nicht korrigiert werden. + + +\CHAPTER{Titelei} + + +\erroronpage{iii}{bottom}{MHo}{2005/10/10}{2} +LB2 mentions the fabled city of ``San Franciso'' which of course +should be ``Francis\u{c}o''. + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 1} + +\erroronpage{3}{Abs.4, Z.4}{JMa}{2005/12/26}{2} + Ersetze: (NFSS) \> (\textsf{NFSS}) + +\erroronpage{15}{Abs.5, Z.2}{ESt}{2006/03/11}{2} + \texttt{info/examples/lb2} wird nicht gefunden. Kein wirklicher Fehler im + Buch, sondern ein Versehen auf CTAN. + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 2} + +\erroronpage{24}{Abs.1, Z.1}{MLi}{2013/07/12}{} + Das Kommando lautet \verb=\AskOption= (ohne ``s'') + +\erroronpage{26}{Abs.-3, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} + Zur schließenden Klammer in Zeile 5 gibt es keine öffnende; es sollte wohl +heißen: (zum Beispiel \ldots{} + +\erroronpage{29}{Abs. nach 2-2-3, Z.7}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} + Es muss ``mit unterschiedliche\u{n} Definitionen'' heißen. + +\erroronpage{31}{Abs.3, Z.3}{FMi}{2006/02/28}{2} +Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''. + +\erroronpage{33}{Abs.2, Z.-2}{FMi}{2006/02/28}{2} +Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''. + +\erroronpage{37}{Abs.1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''. + +\erroronpage{39}{Abs.3, Z.4 und Z.7}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''. + +\erroronpage{42}{Absatz \textit{rechts}, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''. + +\erroronpage{56}{Abs.3, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +Hier fehlt ein Buchstabe: ``Das Beispiel zeigt, das\u{s} es +wahrscheinlich''. + +\erroronpage{59}{2.3.6 Abs.\ 4, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`Um das \textsf{minitoc}-System zu initialisieren, +muss ein \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{60}{Tab.2.3, rechte Spalte, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +Hier fehlt zu einer schließenden Klammer die öffnende. + +\erroronpage{61}{Abs.3, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +\LaTeX-Trennfehler: Kapitel-eintr"age statt Kapite-leintr"age. + +\erroronpage{64}{Abs.3, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +\LaTeX-Trennfehler: Abschnitts-eintrag statt Abschnitt-seintrag. + +\erroronpage{65}{Abs.1, Z.1-2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +Es muss ``Ein solcher Wechsel'' statt ``Eine solcher Wechsel'' heißen. + +\erroronpage{65}{Abs.-2, Z.1-2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +\LaTeX-Trennfehler: Verzeichnis-eintr"age statt Verzeichni-seintr"age. + +\erroronpage{70}{Abs.-1, Z.1-2}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +Hier fehlt ein Komma am Ende der ersten Zeile und ein Punkt am Ende des +ersten Satzes. + +\erroronpage{73}{Abs.2, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +Im Deutschen steht bei einer Aufzählung kein Komma vor ``oder''. + +\erroronpage{74}{Abs.2, Z.12}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +Hier fehlt ein Komma vor ``wenn sie durch''. + +\erroronpage{75}{Abs.3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/03}{2} +Es fehlen zwei Buchstaben: ``ohne daf"ur einen eigen\u{en} Abstand +einzuf"ugen''. + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 3} + +\erroronpage{94}{Abs.-3, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/01/06}{2} +Lösche s aus Grau\u{s}wertproblem + + +\erroronpage{101}{Abs.3, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Kein Komma vor und bei einer Aufzählung. + +\erroronpage{109}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} + Streiche Kommata: "`Möglich\_ und absolut nicht unwahrscheinlich\_ ist +beispielsweise, \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{114}{para 3}{FMi/CBe}{2005/09/02}{2} +Ersetze Absatz durch: "`Da es nicht empfehlenswert ist, die Einstellung von +|\baselineskip| +direkt zu ändern, verfügt \LaTeX{} über den Befehl |\lineskip|\,, mit +dem sich |\baselineskip| global für alle Größen ändern lässt. Nach +einer Anweisung wie etwa \verb!\linespread{1.5}\selectfont! tritt der neue +Wert sofort in Kraft. [Fußnote: Die veraltete \LaTeX~2.09 Lösung + \verb=\renewcommand\baselinestretch=\texttt{\textbraceleft + 1.5\textbraceright} benötigt dagegen einen nachfolgenden + Schriftgrößenwechsel (wie |\small| oder |\Large|), damit der neue + Wert in Kraft tritt.] + + + +\erroronpage{117}{3.2.1 Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 7}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} + Trennung der Hauptsätze: "`\dots{} der Zähler \texttt{footnote} wird +weiter hochgesetzt, und die Darstellung erfolgt \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{119}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} + Da die Beispiele unmittelbar folgen: "`\dots{} schematisch +dargestellt \u{und bedeuten}:"' + +%%Ebenfalls als Vorschlag zur Neuformulierung -- weil es um zwei +%%unterschiedliche Aspekte geht, sollte durch Punkt oder Semikolon +%%getrennt werden: +% +% -maybe differently +\erroronpage{121}{3.2.3 Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} + "`\u{Es wird ausreichend} Abstand zwischen +Fußnoten und Text gelassen +und die Fußnoten werden in einem kleineren Schriftgrad +gesetzt."' + + +\erroronpage{123}{2. Abs, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +\ldots \u{auf denen} die Auswirkung\u{en} von \textsf{perpage} deutlich zu sehen sind. + +\erroronpage{143}{3. Abs, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Am Ende der Zeile fehlt ein Komma. + +\erroronpage{144}{1. Abs, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Es muss \u{kein} statt keinen hei\ss{}en. + +\erroronpage{147}{Bsp.3-3-19}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Der \LaTeX{}-Begleiter sollte stets mit Bindestrich geschrieben werden. + +\erroronpage{149}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} + Streiche Anführungszeichen bei "`theoremähnliche"'. + + +\erroronpage{149}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe/FMi}{2006/06/10}{2} +Ersetze: "`Bei vielen dieser Argumente wird der unten aufgeführte, voreingestellte +Wert verwendet, wenn ein leeres Argument angegeben wird. +\> +"`Bei vielen dieser Argumente erhält man den unten aufgeführten voreingestellten +Wert, wenn ein leeres Argument angegeben wird."' + + + + +\erroronpage{149}{Argument \textit{kopf-nach-abstand}, Z.\ +2}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} + Streiche Anführungszeichen bei "`Interpunktion"'. + +\erroronpage{155}{Bsp. 3-3-25}{RHe/FMi}{2006/06/10}{2} + Benutze babel Paket und ersetze englische Anführungszeichen durch deutsche. + +\erroronpage{158}{Bsp.3-3-28}{FMi/JBez}{2005/09/02}{} + The vertical space above ``Return values'' is too small. + + Das ist ein ziemlich versteckter \LaTeX-Fehler, mit dem man wohl + leben muss. + +\erroronpage{159}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} + "`\dots{} unverändert, also "`wie über die Tastatur eingegeben"'\u{,} +darstellen."' + +\erroronpage{160}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} + Anstelle "`extensiv"': "`\dots{} in der Vergangenheit \emph{intensiv} +genutzt wurden, \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{163}{Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Ersetze: "`fontenc"' \> "`\textsf{fontenc}"' + +\erroronpage{174}{3. Abs, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Ersetze: "`diesen"' \> "`diesem"' + +\erroronpage{175}{Z. -4}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Streiche einmal das Wort "`sich"'. + +\erroronpage{182}{Abs -1, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Es geht um eine Untermenge \u{von} \ldots + +\erroronpage{184}{Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Streiche einmal das Wort "`Beispiel"'. + +\erroronpage{192}{3. Abs, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Es soll wohl "`von dieser \u{durch} das Resultat von \ldots"' hei\ss{}en. + +\erroronpage{195}{4. Abs, Z.5}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Ersetze: "`ausgeben"' \> "`aus\u{ge}geben"' + +\erroronpage{197}{2. Abs, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/14}{2} +Streiche das zweite t aus setz\u{t}en. + + + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 4} + +% - but also a national one, so could stay +% +% \erroronpage{204}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ -2}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{} +% Streiche "`DIN"' in "`DIN A4"', da A4 nationaler (DIN 476), +% europ\"{a}ischer (EN 20 216) und internationaler (ISO 216) Standard ist. + +\erroronpage{205}{Tab.\ 4.2}{YiL}{2012/05/07}{} + + Die in der Tabelle aufgelisteten Werte sind nur ann\"aherend korrekt + -- einige Werte h\"angen von der gew\"ahlten Papier-Option (etwa |a4paper|) ab. + + + +\erroronpage{205}{4.2, Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} nicht v\"{o}llig unm\"{o}glich ist\u, sie +\dots{} zu \"{a}ndern, \dots{}"'. + +\erroronpage{208}{Z. 1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`zwei Pakete\u, mit deren"' + +\erroronpage{210}{Abs.\ 5, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + Streiche Komma vor der Klammer: "`\dots{} von Listen Verwendung +finden\_ (\dots{})."' + +\erroronpage{210}{Abs.6, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`abliest), kann man"' + +\erroronpage{213}{Abs.\ 3, Z.\ -1}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} kann es angebracht sein, ihn +einzubeziehen."' + +\erroronpage{213}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\-1}{FMi}{2006/09/25}{2} + Ersetze "`muss die ein oder andere Einstellung"' \> + "` müssen die Einstellungen"' + +\erroronpage{215}{Z.1}{ChB}{2006/06/29}{2} + Es sollte wohl "`die ein\u{e} oder andere Einstellung"' hei"sen. + +\erroronpage{218}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 6}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} ist es jedoch besser, +\texttt{ignorehead} \dots{} zu verwenden."' + +% Über das nächste Infinitivproblem kann man sich durchaus streiten: +\erroronpage{218}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ -2}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} liegt es beim Anwender, +sicherzustellen, dass \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{218}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ -3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`Da diese Option Fonts skaliert, anstatt +Originalfonts \dots{} einzusetzen, \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{219}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ -4ff}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + F\"{u}ge "`werden"' ein und streiche Komma vor dem letzten Abschnitt +der Aufz\"{a}hlung: "`Zun\"{a}chst wird das Paket geladen, alle +R\"{a}nder \u{werden} auf einen Zoll gesetzt\_ und die Kolumnentitel \dots{} +festgelegt; \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{220}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + F\"{u}ge Komma zwischen den Haupts\"{a}tzen ein: "`\dots{} des +Paketes wieder her, und bei \verb"pass" wird das Paket deaktiviert."' + +\erroronpage{221}{Aufz. cam, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} welche die Ma{\ss}e der Nettoseite +anzeigen, ohne sie zu ber\"{u}hren (\dots{})."' + +\erroronpage{221}{para 4, l.4}{FMi}{2006/09/09}{2} + Option \texttt{b3} ist zweifach gelistet. + +\erroronpage{221}{Abs.\ -2, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + Entferne: + "`Die Beschreibungen \dots{} sollten deutlich machen, dass \u{das} +\textsf{crop} erst \dots{} geladen werden sollte."' + +\erroronpage{221}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} normalerweise ist es n\"{u}tzlich, ihn +beizubehalten."' + +\erroronpage{222}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2006/06/15}{2} + F\"{u}ge Komma ein: "`\dots{} versucht das Paket, den Druckertreiber +\dots{} zu bestimmen."' + +\erroronpage{223}{4.3, Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} sammelt genug Material, um gut eine Seite +\dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{224}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} entspricht dem Inhalt von \verb"\thepage", +wie er auf der \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{225}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} mithilfe von \verb"\AtEndDocument", um +sicherzugehen, dass \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{229}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 8,10,-1}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} + Füge Leerstellen nach der Ellipse ein: "`\dots{} geht weiter"' + +\erroronpage{229}{Bsp.\ 4-3-3}{FMi}{2006/06/17}{2} + Füge Leerstelle nach der Ellipse ein: \verb=\dots geht= + \> \verb=\dots{} geht= + + +\erroronpage{233}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} um Längenparameter, sondern um Befehle +\dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{234}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 7}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} + Ersetze Semikolon durch Komma und füge Wort ein: "Der Seitentyp wird mit `\dots{} +ausgewählt\u, der Bereich \u{dagegen} mit \dots{}"' + + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 5} + + +\erroronpage{247}{Abs.\ 3, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} dass sie fähig sein müssen, innerhalb des +Textes \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{249}{Abs.3 in 5.1.1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2} +Dieser Satz steht schon am Ende des ersten Absatzes dieses +Abschnitts. + +\erroronpage{251}{Abs.\ -1}{FMi/CBe}{2005/09/02}{2} + Ersetze Absatz: "`Dezimalwert, mit dem die voreingestellte Minimalhöhe von Tabellenzellen + multipliziert wird. Ein Wert von 1.5 würde z.B. normalgroße + Zeilen um 50\% weiter voneinander entfernen. Er wird mit + dem Befehl \verb=\renewcommand= eingestellt (Standardwert \texttt{1.0})."' + +% -check +\erroronpage{252}{Tabelle 5.2}{RHe}{2006/06/17}{2} + Ersetze alle amerikanischen Auslassungszeichen \{..\} durch deutsche +\{\dots{}\}. + +\erroronpage{253}{Z. -2}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2} +Kein Komma vor "`erzeugt wurden"' + +\erroronpage{267}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2} + "`Letztere"' ist klein zu schreiben + +\erroronpage{267}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} üblicher, Farben \dots{} einzusetzen"' + +\erroronpage{269}{Abs.5, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/01/27}{2} +\LaTeX-Trennfehler: Standar-dumgebung. \> Standard-umgebung + +\erroronpage{277}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2} + Ersetze Anfang durch: "`Eine der Schwierigkeiten, \LaTeX{}-Tabellen mit außergewöhnlich +großen Einträgen zu setzen, ist eine gute Raumverteilung um diese Einträge herum zu erreichen, + \dots"' + +\erroronpage{277}{Abs.\ -2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} optionales Argument, ähnlich dem von +\verb"\\"\u, erweitert."' + +\erroronpage{277}{Abs.\ -1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/06/20}{2} + Ersetze Anfang durch: "`Die vertikalen Linien in einer \texttt{tabular}-Umgebung + werden aus einer Reihe von Linienelementen gebildet, jeweils eines pro + Tabellenzelle."' + +\erroronpage{278}{editorial change}{FMi}{2006/06/20}{2} +Änderung auf Seite 277 erzeugt neuen Zeilenverlauf. + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 6} + + +\erroronpage{292}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{MSch}{2006/01/04}{2} + Füge hinzu: "`z.B. bedeutet \u{\texttt{0.2}}, dass 20\% von Gleitobjekten + belegt sein darf"' + +\erroronpage{298}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/08/07}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "Das \textsf{afterpage}-Paket ermöglicht +stattdessen\u{,} \verb"\afterpage{\clearpage}" zu verwenden."' + +\erroronpage{301}{Z.1}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`Hilfsdatei, in der"' + +\erroronpage{301}{Abs.-2,Z.3}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2} +Falsche Anf"uhrungszeichen bei "`eingerahmt"' + +\erroronpage{302}{exa 6-3-1}{FMi/CBe}{2005/09/02}{} +The Euler constant must be typeset in roman type according +to the ISO rules; $e$ is the charge of the electron. + +\erroronpage{304}{Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2} +Es muss "`in den Abschnitte\u{n} 6.2.1 bzw. 6.2.2"' hei\ss{}en. + +\erroronpage{304}{Z.-5}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2} +Es muss "`{}"uber ein zus"atzliche\u{s} obligatorisches Argument"' +hei\ss{}en. + +\erroronpage{306}{Abs.\ -2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/08/07}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "\dots{} manchmal günstiger\u{,} nur die Legende zu +drehen."' + +\erroronpage{315}{Abs.-3,Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2} +Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von "`Bed"urfnisse\u{n}"'. + +\erroronpage{315}{Abs.\ -2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/08/07}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "\dots{} die es ermöglichen\u{,} Gleitobjekte \dots{} +zu untergliedern."' + +\erroronpage{317}{6.5.1, Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 1}{RHe}{2006/08/07}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "\dots{} das Paket \textsf{caption}\u{,} um Legenden +\dots{} anzupassen."' + +\erroronpage{318}{Bsp.6-5-2, Abb.2}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`Eine Legende, die mehrere"' + +\erroronpage{319}{\texttt{font}}{RHe}{2006/06/11}{2} + "`Diese Option legt die Fontcharakteristika \dots{} fest, sofern sie +nicht \dots{} überschrieben \u{werden}."' + +\erroronpage{319}{Bsp.6-5-3, Tab.1}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`Eine Legende, die mehrere"' + +\erroronpage{321}{Option \texttt{position}}{FMi/JS}{2005/09/14}{2} + Beschreibe, dass der Schlüssel \texttt{bottom} die Voreinstellung ist. + +\erroronpage{322}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2} +Streiche ein "`es"'. + +\erroronpage{327}{Abs.-1, Z.3 und Z.5}{JMa}{2006/02/04}{2} +Ersetze: \textsl{typ} \> \textsl{klasse} + + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 7} + +\erroronpage{337}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} Erscheinung, nachdem \dots {}"' + +\erroronpage{338}{Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`(\dots{} sehr ähnlich, soweit es \dots {})"' + +\erroronpage{340}{Fußnote 2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`verwandelt, ist dabei"' + +\erroronpage{344}{Abs.3, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Schließende Klammer nach "`Abbildung 7.3"' fehlt. + +\erroronpage{348}{Abs.-1, Z.3-4}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Trennfehler: Es muss Pa-ketnamen statt Pak-etnamen hei\ss{}en. + +\erroronpage{349}{}{FMi}{2006/02/27}{2} +Änderung auf Seite 348 ändert Seitenumbruch. + +\erroronpage{352}{Abs.-1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`einnimmt, ist der"' + +% - no, would break the example spacing +%\erroronpage{356}{Bsp.7-3-7}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{} +%Ersetze: NFSS \> \textsf{NFSS} +% + +\erroronpage{358}{Abs.5, Z.6+7}{JS}{2006/11/08}{2} + Ersetze: + "`Die \u{Computer Modern Typewriter und} Computer Modern Sans Fonts + verfügen nicht über \u{breite} sondern nur über breitfette"' + \> + "`Die Computer Modern Sans Fonts + verfügen nicht über \u{fette} sondern nur über breitfette"' + +\erroronpage{361}{Tab 7.4}{AFV}{2008/08/08}{s} +Die Tabelle zeigt |\mathtt| als Sans Serif Typewriter Font. Dies ist +normalerweise nicht der Fall -- fast jede \LaTeX{} Installation verwendet +Computer Modern Typewriter. + +\erroronpage{362}{Abs.-1, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Streiche das mittlere s in Symbol\u{s}fonts. + +\erroronpage{364}{Abs.-2, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Ersetze: hinzu-f"ugt \> hinzu-\u{ge}f"ugt + +\erroronpage{367}{Ab.-2, Z.-1}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{2} + Der Abstand vor dem Punkt am Satzende ("`T1-Kodierung ."') ist zu + entfernen. + +\erroronpage{369}{Abs.-3, Z.-3}{PEb}{2006/05/12}{2} +Ersetze "`Oktette (von Zahlen)"' \> "`Oktette (acht Bits)"' + +\erroronpage{371}{Abs. \texttt{cp437de}}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Falsche Anführungszeichen beim \ss + +\erroronpage{371}{Abs \texttt{utf8}}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Das Leerzeichen vor dem Punkt ist zu entfernen. + +\erroronpage{394}{letzte Z.}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{2} + Der Abstand vor der schlie\ss enden Klammer "`(in Abschnitt 7.5.4\_)"' + ist zu entfernen. + +\erroronpage{399}{Abs.-3, Z.2+3}{FMi}{2006/06/14}{2} + Füge Bindestrich ein: "`AMS-Font"' + +\erroronpage{401}{Abs.-2, Z.4}{FMi}{2006/06/14}{2} + Füge Bindestrich ein: "`AMS-Mathematikfont"' + +\erroronpage{404}{Abs.-1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Streiche das n aus Name\u{n}. + +\erroronpage{406}{Abs.3, Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`werden, normalerweise ohnehin"' + +\erroronpage{407}{Bsp. 7-7-21, 7-7-22}{TNdz}{2006/01/20}{2} + Fehlendes Komma: "`\ldots ist ein Blindtext, an dem sich + verschiedene \ldots"´ + +\erroronpage{416}{Kapitel 7.8.6, Z.8}{RSi}{2005/12/07}{2} + Leerzeichen nach dem kleinen Omega (|\textscomega|) fehlt. + +\erroronpage{420}{Abs.3, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Ersetze: L"ander \> L"ander\u{n} + +\erroronpage{420}{Abs.4, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Streiche eines der beiden "`auf"'. + +\erroronpage{422}{Abs.3, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`zur Verf"ugung, um auf die"' + +\erroronpage{423}{Abs.1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Ersetze: zum \> zu + +\erroronpage{425}{Fu\ss note}{hv}{2008/10/30}{s} +Der Befehl hei\ss t |\pscharpath| [das s fehlt] und |pst-char| existiert zwar +noch, l\"adt aber gleich |pst-text|, dass die Funktionen von |pst-char| +integriert hat. + +\erroronpage{428}{Tabelle 7.27, Z.~1}{MSch}{2005/12/31}{2} + Ersetze: \dq`Cork\dq'-Kodierung durch "`Cork"'-Kodierung + +\erroronpage{428}{Abs1., Z.4-5}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Trennfehler: Es muss Pro-zent statt Proz-ent hei\ss{}en. + + +\erroronpage{435}{Abs.-2, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma vor "`werden"' + +\erroronpage{445}{Abs.-3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Streiche das s aus Namen\u{s} + +\erroronpage{445}{Abs.-3, Z.2}{RHe}{2006/06/11}{2} + Füge Bindestrich ein: "`AMS-Font"' + +\erroronpage{454}{Abs.4, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Ersetze: dass \> das + +\erroronpage{454}{Abs.5, Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Ersetze: dier \> die + +\erroronpage{456}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`Befehle, die"' + +\erroronpage{458}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`Zeichen, die in"' + +\erroronpage{458}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma: "`solchen, die in"' + +\erroronpage{458}{Abs.4, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Fehlendes Komma vor "`wurden"' + +\erroronpage{464}{Abs.1, Z.3-4}{JMa}{2006/02/27}{2} +Trennfehler: Es muss Ak-zentzeichen statt Akz-entzeichen hei\ss{}en. + +\erroronpage{468}{Tab.7.33}{FMi}{2006/05/12}{2} +Die "`Tabellen"uberschrift"' ist nicht im \textsf{sf}-Format. + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 8} + +\erroronpage{478}{Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 2}{FMi/RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} +Ersetze: "`gültigen US-Praxis"' \> "`vorherrschenden Praxis"' + +\erroronpage{494}{8.2.12 Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} + Füge Kommata ein: "`Die Schwierigkeit\u{,} eine abgesetzte Formel +korrekt zu gestalten\u{,} kann \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{496}{Abs.2, Z.1/2}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2} +Trennfehler: Mark-up sieht deutlich besser aus als Mar-kup. + +\erroronpage{496}{Abs.\ 3 (nach Bsp. 8-2-28), Z.\ 2}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} allerdings \emph{nur}\u{,} wenn sie \dots{} +verschoben wurde."' + +\erroronpage{503}{8.4.4 Abs.\ 1, Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} + Lösche Komma (Regel §~72.2 "`gleichrangige Wortgruppen oder Wörter in +Aufzählungen (entweder -- oder)"'): "`\dots{} können entweder \dots{} +positioniert werden\u{ } oder \dots{} rechts der Operatoren."' + +\erroronpage{504}{Abs.-2,Z.3}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2} +Kein Komma vor "`oder"' bei einer Aufz"ahlung. + + +\erroronpage{507}{Abs.-2, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2} +Streiche die beiden letzten Buchstaben von Paket\u{es}. + +\erroronpage{510}{Abs.-1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2} +Streiche einmal das Wort "`Tabelle"'. + +\erroronpage{512}{Z.1}{FMi}{2006/09/19}{2} +Füge folgenden Satz an: "`Im folgenden Beispiel wird |\sqrtsign| direkt +verwendet:"' + +\erroronpage{515}{Abs.-3, Z.2}{HjG}{2006/10/19}{2} +Ersetze: "`Bei den \u{Hauptversionen} ($D'$,~$T'$~usw.{})"' \> + "`Bei den \u{Versionen mit Strich} ($D'$,~$T'$~usw.{})"' + +\erroronpage{516}{Abs.-3, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/05}{2} +Streiche ein "`die"'. + +\erroronpage{518}{8.7.5 Abs.\ 3 , Z.\ 3}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} und verhält sich somit\u{,} als wären beide +Maße gleich null."' + +\erroronpage{535}{Abs. 1, Z. 5}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} +Ersetze: "`\ldots{} existierenden, neu belebten Mediävalschriften."' + \> "\ldots{} existierenden Renaissance-Antiqua-Schriften."' + +\erroronpage{544}{Tab. 8-10/11}{FMi}{2006/08/09}{2} + Fehlende Symbole aus amssymb hinzugef"ugt: |\circledR|, |\yen|, + |\checkmark| und |\maltese|. + +\erroronpage{544}{Tab. 8.11}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{s} + |\dag| und |\ddag| sind |\mathord|s und nicht |\mathbin| wie in Tabelle + 8.13 behauptet. + +\erroronpage{546}{Tab. 8.13}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{s} + |\dag| und |\ddag| sind keine |\mathbin|s. Sie geh"oren deshalb nicht in + diese Tabelle und sind auch nicht (wie behauptet) Synonyme f"ur |\dagger| + und |\ddagger|. + +\erroronpage{552}{8.9.6 Abs.\ 1 , Z.\ 4}{RHe}{2008/09/19}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} nicht der Symbolklasse Punctuation\u{,} +sondern Ordinary \dots{} zugeordnet sind."' + +\erroronpage{554}{Tab. 8-27}{DIs/FMi}{2006/08/09}{2} + Fehlende Symbole aus amssymb hinzugef"ugt: |\llcorner|, |\lrcorner|, + |\ulcorner| und |\urcorner|. Tabbellennotiz und Absatz unter der Tabelle + entsprechend ge"andert. + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 9} + +\erroronpage{556}{Nummer 1, Item 1}{RHe}{2008/09/20}{2} +Ersetze: "`Unterstützung für den Satz \ldots{}"' + \> "`Unterstützen des Setzens in` \ldots{}"' + +\erroronpage{560}{2. Snippet}{MSch/FMi}{2006/01/06}{2} + Der vertikale Abstand vor dem Codebeispiel ist im Verh"altnis zum + darauffolgenden Abstand erheblich zu gro\ss. + + Und zudem die Seite eine Zeile zu lang. + +\erroronpage{560}{Z.\ -5}{RHe/FMi}{2006/09/21}{2} +Ersetze: "`der Übersetzungen \u{für} Texte"' \> + "`der Übersetzungen generierter Texte"' + + +\erroronpage{563}{Abs.1, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2} +Die "offnende Klammer fehlt vor "`zum Beispiel"'. + +\erroronpage{565}{Abs.-2, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2} +Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von sprachspezifische\u{n}. + + +\erroronpage{567}{tab 9.3}{FMi/CBe}{2005/09/27}{} + I am surprised that in Russian there is no word for ``Glossary''. + + Frank: It most certainly exits :-), but right now Babel doesn't + know about it---so there is nothing we can do about it at the + moment. Actually the same problem exists with Polish, although here + I got a translation ``s\l ownik termin{\'o}w'' which will eventually + find its way into Babel. + + Tja, so gehts. Auch als das deutsche Buch gesetzt wurde, waren die Begriffe + auch noch nicht bekannt. + +\erroronpage{570}{Abs. -4("`Die Tilde"' , Z. 2}{RHe}{2006/09/20}{2} +Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} nicht für ein geschütztes Leerzeichen\u{,} +sondern für andere \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{570}{Abs. -4("`Die Tilde"' , Item 1}{RHe}{2006/09/20}{2} +Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} niedriger gesetzt werden\u{,} als dies +normalerweise \dots{}"' + +% "`Gemäß"' wird mit dem Dativ verwendet: +\erroronpage{571}{Abs. 2 ("`Doppelpunkt usw."' , Z. -2}{RHe}{2006/09/20}{2} +Ersetze: "`Gemäß der \ldots{} Konventionen \ldots{}"' + \> "`Gemäß den \ldots{} Konventionen \ldots{}"' + +\erroronpage{579}{Abs.3, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2} +Streiche die beiden letzten Buchstaben von ein\u{en}. + +\erroronpage{579}{Abs.2, Z.3}{RHe}{2006/06/11}{2} + Streiche Komma: "Wie der Befehl \verb"\nombre"\_ verfügt er \dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{590}{Abs.1, Z.5/6}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2} +Wenn "`rumakeindex"' getrennt werden muss, sieht "`rumake-index"' deutlich +besser aus. + +\erroronpage{599}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/14}{2} +Zu der schließenden Klammer gibt es keine "offnende. + + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 10} + +\erroronpage{612}{lfd. Nr. 1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2} +Ersetze: "`ASCII-Zeichnung"' + \> "`ASCII-Zeichnung\u{en}"' + +\erroronpage{628}{Abs.-3, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2} +Der Bruch $\displaystyle\frac{\pi}{2}$ ragt in die Zeile darunter. + +\erroronpage{633}{Tab.\ 10.1}{FMi}{2006/10/21}{2} +Es fehlt "`vtex"' als wichtiger Treiber; andererseits sind einige der +aufgelisteten Treiber nur von historischer Bedeutung. + +\erroronpage{634}{Abs. 1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2} +Füge Komma ein: "`\dots{} reelle Werte haben)\u{,} anstatt nach +\dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{637}{Abs. 1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2} +Füge Komma ein: "`Lässt \LaTeX{} nach \dots{} suchen\u{,} anstatt nach +\dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{637}{viewport}{BMo/FMi}{2007/10/20}{s} +Füge am Anfang ein: "` Definiert den Bereich der Graphik für den \LaTeX{} Platz reservieren + soll. Material außerhalb wird auch gedruckt (falls nicht \texttt{clip} + verwendet wird) und überdruckt dann gegebenenalls anderes Material auf der Seite."' + +\erroronpage{638}{}{FMi}{2007/10/20}{s} + Setzer-Kommentar: +Seite mu\ss{} neu gesetzt werden, da sich der Seitenumbruch ge\"andert hat. + +\erroronpage{638}{Abs.3, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2} +Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von ausf"uhrliche\u{n}. + +\erroronpage{647}{Abs.4, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2} +Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von vertikale\u{r}. + +\erroronpage{649}{Abs.2, Z.8}{FMi/HjG}{2006/10/22}{2} + Ersetze: "`\u{Dieser Punkt} ist in \ldots"' \> + "`\u{Dies} ist in \ldots"' + +\seriouserroronpage{651}{Beispielmatrix}{HjG}{2006/10/21}{2} + The first column shows incorrect output: instead of x=0mm it uses some + internal default. + +\erroronpage{651}{Abs. -1, Z. 1}{RHe}{2006/10/16}{2} +Ersetze: "`Die \dots{} Funktion ähnelt dem des \textsf{rotating}-Paketes +\dots{}"' + \>"`Die \dots{} Funktion ähnelt der des \textsf{rotating}-Paketes +\dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{652}{editorial change}{FMi}{2006/10/21}{2} + Fix on previous page will change page break. + + +\erroronpage{661}{Abs.-3, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2} +Ersetze: "`verf"ugt"' \> "`verf"ugen"' + +\erroronpage{661}{para -2, l.1}{FMi}{2005/11/11}{2} + Leider ist Th\`anhs Name falsch geschrieben. Die korrekte Schreibweise + ist "`H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh"'. + +\erroronpage{672}{letzte Zeile}{BvdW}{2014/02/19}{} +Ersetze ``wir'' durch ``wird''. + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 11} + +\erroronpage{686}{Abs.-2, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2} +Streiche das Komma vor "`und"'. + +\erroronpage{691}{Abs.4, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2} +Ersetze: "`eigene"' \> "`eigenen"' + +\erroronpage{697}{Abs. \texttt{-o} \textsl{ind}}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2} +Streiche die letzten Buchstaben von Verwendung\u{Index}. + +\erroronpage{703}{Z.2}{AFe}{2006/01/13}{2} + Extra Buchstabe: |\mark|\texttt{\u k}|both| \> + |\markboth| + +\erroronpage{704}{Abs.1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/23}{2} +Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von Teil\u{s}. + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 12} + +\erroronpage{709}{Abs.3, Z.-5}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Entferne das Komma vor l"asst. + +\erroronpage{711}{Abs.2, Z.3/4}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Trennfehler: Schreibe Layout-richtlinien statt Layou-trichtlinien. + +\erroronpage{717}{Abs.3, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`definieren"' ein. + +\erroronpage{719}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`mit dessen Hilfe"' ein. + +\erroronpage{721}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`die nicht unterst"utzt"' ein. + +\erroronpage{728}{Abs.2, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Es hei\ss{}t \u{der} Apostroph, nicht "`das"'. + +\erroronpage{734}{Abs.-3, Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +F"uge ein "offnende Klammer vor "`zum Beispiel"' ein. + +\erroronpage{735}{Abs.3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`wo im"' ein. + +\erroronpage{737}{Abs.-3, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`die normalerweise"' ein. + +\erroronpage{740}{Abs.-3, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Streiche den letzten Buchstaben von wurde\u{n}. + +\erroronpage{745}{Abs.-1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Ersetze: "`ein solche"' \> "`eine solche"' + +\erroronpage{746}{Abs.-4, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`wo im"' ein. + +\erroronpage{752}{Abs.1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Zur schlie\ss{}enden Klammer gibt es keine "offnende. + +\erroronpage{752}{Abs.3, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Streiche die letzten drei Buchstaben von "`aufauf"'. + +\erroronpage{755}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Ersetze: "`eine vollst"andigen"' \> "`einen vollst"andigen"' + +\erroronpage{763}{Abs.3, Z.6}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Streiche das Komma vor "`und"'. + +\erroronpage{767}{Abs.-3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Ersetze: "`L"adt"' \> "`l"adt"' + +\erroronpage{772}{Tab.12.2}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`die eine bestimmte Wahl"' ein. + +\erroronpage{777}{Abs.3, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Füge einen Punkt nach "`zeigt"' ein. + +\erroronpage{781}{Abs.1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/03/31}{2} +Ersetze: "`Diese"' \> "`Dieses"' + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 13} + +\erroronpage{791}{Tab.13.1, \texttt{inbook}}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +Streiche einmal das Wort "'oder"'. + +\erroronpage{792}{Tab13.2, \texttt{crossref}}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`auf den"' ein. + +\erroronpage{795/796}{mehrere Stellen}{FMi/DAl}{2005/09/12}{2} + Der Name "`Miguel Lopez Fernandez"' sollte durch "`Miguel Parra Benavides"' + ersetzt werden, da der bisher verwendete eigentlich Akzente besitzen würde, + die an der Stelle im Buch noch nicht diskutiert wurden. + +\erroronpage{796}{Abs.-5, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +F"uge einen Punkt nach "`erscheinen"' ein. + +\erroronpage{799}{Abs.-2, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +Streiche das Komma vor "'und"'. + +\erroronpage{802}{Abs.-1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +Streiche das Komma vor "'und"'. + +\erroronpage{819}{Abs.-1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +Ersetze: BibTexMng \> \textsf{BibTexMng} + +\erroronpage{820}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +Streiche das Komma nach \texttt{size}. + +\erroronpage{821}{Tab.13.4, Z.-4}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +F"uge ein Leerzeichen nach "`Fachzeitschriften"' ein. Ferner ist die +"'Tabellen"uberschrift"' nicht im \textsf{sf}-Format. + +\erroronpage{828}{Tab. 13.5, Z. 1-2}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{2} + Donald Ervin Knuths Name ist falsch geschrieben. Ersetze: "`Erwin"' \> + "`Ervin"' + +\erroronpage{830}{Tab.13.6}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +Ersetze: Italienische \> Italienisch + +\erroronpage{832}{Abs.1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +Ersetze: Abschnitte \> Abschnitten + +\erroronpage{839}{Tab.13.8, \texttt{substring}}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +F"uge ein Leerzeichen vor "`hat"' ein. + +\erroronpage{842}{Abs.1, Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/04/11}{2} +Entweder fehlt hier eine "offnende Klammer -- oder die schlie\ss{}ende ist +zu viel. + + +\CHAPTER{Kapitel 14} + +\erroronpage{853}{Tab.14.1}{FMi}{2006/05/12}{2} +Die "`Tabellen"uberschrift"' ist nicht im \textsf{sf}-Format. + +\erroronpage{858}{Abs.4, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2} +F"uge ein "`zu"' zwischen "`Kommentare"' und "`entfernen"' ein. + +\erroronpage{865}{1. Snippet, Z. 2}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{2} + Ersetze: |text/latex/base| \> |tex/latex/base| + +\erroronpage{867}{Abs.5}{FMi}{2007/11/13}{s} + Explain that |\cmd| can't be used with conditionals, e.g., those produced + with |\newif| . + +\erroronpage{865}{l.-7}{FMi/HjG}{2005/09/02}{2} + Underline, as it is command line input. + +\erroronpage{871}{Abs.2, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2} +Ersetze entg"ultig \> endg"ultig + +\erroronpage{870-872}{}{FMi}{2007/01/08}{} + Setzer-Kommentar: + Beispiele m"ussen neu kompiliert werden und + Seiten m"ussen immer dann neu gedruckt werden, wenn etwas am Kapitel ge"andert + wird --- genauer auf \emph{einer} der drei Seiten (da sich das CVS-Tag in + den Beispielen und im "`code"' auf + Seite 871/Mitte "andert). + + +\CHAPTER{Anhang A} + + +\erroronpage{880}{Abs.1, Z.6}{VVo}{2008/09/02}{s} +Ersetze: "`so wird eine Fehlermeldung ausgegeben."' +\> "`so wird eine Warnung ausgegeben."' + + +\erroronpage{882}{Abs.1, Z.2}{FMi}{2006/05/12}{2} +Ersetze: Abschnitte \> Abschnitten + +\erroronpage{888}{fig A.1, l.4}{FMi/JAn}{2005/09/09}{2} + ``Did\^ot'' \> ``Didot'' und entferne Komma nach "`Zoll"' + +\erroronpage{891}{Tab.A.3, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`der eine feste oder"' ein. + +\erroronpage{899}{A.2.3 Abs.\ 2, Z.\ 5}{RHe}{2006/06/10}{2} + Füge Komma ein: "`Diese Struts sind sehr nützlich, um die Höhe oder +\dots{}"' + +\erroronpage{903}{Abs.-2, Z.1}{FMi}{2006/06/14}{2} +Füge Wort ein: "`nach der \u{letzten} Klammer \verb=}= und\ldots"' + +\erroronpage{906}{Abs.1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2} +Ersetze \textsl{text} \> \textsl{test} + +\erroronpage{909}{Abs.2, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`ob"' ein. + +\erroronpage{918}{Abs.-1, Z.3}{JMa}{2006/05/03}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`wird"' ein. + + +\erroronpage{918}{Abs.-1, Z.4}{FMi}{2006/09/23}{2} +Ersetze: "`und alle Prozesse angehalten. "' +\> "`und \u{die Verarbeitung} angehalten."' + + + +\CHAPTER{Anhang B} + +\erroronpage{925}{Abs.-2, Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`\textit{geben Sie}"' ein. + +\erroronpage{960}{Abs.-2, Z.-1}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Der Punkt am Ende des Absatzes fehlt. + +\erroronpage{969}{Abs.-3, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Ersetze das \> dass + +\erroronpage{971}{Abs.1, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Ersetze einen \> ein + +\erroronpage{973}{Abs.1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Ersetze Seite 973 \> dieser Seite + +\erroronpage{973}{Abs.5, Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Ersetze \TeX{}war \> \TeX\ war + +\erroronpage{977}{Z.3}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Entferne das Komma vor "`\textit{wurde}"'. + +\erroronpage{977}{Z.5}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Entferne das Komma vor "`als"'. + +\erroronpage{980}{Abs.1, Z.2}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +F"uge ein Komma nach "`wird"' ein. + +\erroronpage{987}{Abs.-2, Z.5}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`wobei"' ein. + +\erroronpage{988}{Abs.-1, Z.-3}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`gilt"' ein. + + +\CHAPTER{Anhang C} + +\erroronpage{998}{Abs.2, Z.5}{FMi}{2006/09/12}{2} +Ersetze: Abbildung C.\u{2} \> Abbildung C.\u{1} + +\erroronpage{998}{Abs.-1, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Streiche das Komma vor "`ausgew"ahlt"'. + +\erroronpage{1001}{Bsp.1, Z.1}{SNe}{2009/05/10}{s} +Ersetze "\texttt{wgetftp}"' \> "`\texttt{wget ftp}"' + +\erroronpage{1003}{Abs.-1, Z.5/6}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Streiche eines der beiden Worte "`eingeblendet"'. + +\erroronpage{1004}{\textbf{esc:}}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Ersetze Kalanien \> Katalonien + +\erroronpage{1005}{\textbf{fra:}}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Ersetze Orleans \> Orl\'{e}ans + + +\CHAPTER{Bibliographie} + +\erroronpage{1017}{[57]}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2} +Ersetzte Erl\"auterung durch: "`Die +\u{englische} erste Ausgabe dieses Buches."' + +\erroronpage{1017/1018}{[58]}{FMi}{2009/08/01}{s} +Eintrag sollte auf die zweite (aktuelle) Ausgabe verweisen. +(Ab dem korrigierten Nachdruck von 2010 befindet sich [58] ganz auf seite 1018.) + +\erroronpage{1019}{[67], Z.-2}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Schreibe "`Sprachengetrennt"' getrennt. + +\erroronpage{1019}{[71]}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2} + streiche "`international"; ISO ist per se international + +\erroronpage{1020}{[74]}{FMi}{2006/09/18}{2} + Füge ``Lars Hellstr\"om'' als Autor hinzu. Datum ``Dezember 2004'' + +\erroronpage{1025}{[116, Z.\ 2]}{RHe}{2006/06/07}{2} + Vergleich mit "`(eben)so \dots{} setzen kann, wie sonst \dots{}"' +erfordert Komma + +\erroronpage{1026}{[127], Z.1}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`welche"' ein. + +\erroronpage{1026}{[128]}{FMi}{2005/11/07}{2} + Der Titel lautet: ``E-\TeX: Guidelines for Future \TeX{} Extensions''. + +\erroronpage{1028}{[140], Z.2}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +F"uge ein Komma vor "`die auf"' ein. + +\erroronpage{1028}{[140], Z.-5}{JMa}{2006/05/28}{2} +Ersetze Tinagh \> Tifinagh + + +\erroronpage{1030}{[162]-[163]}{FMi/RKo}{2005/11/11}{2} + + Leider ist Th\`anhs Name falsch geschrieben (Akzente) . Die + korrekte Schreibweise ist "`H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} + Th\`anh"'. + +\erroronpage{1030}{[159]-[163]}{FMi/RKo}{2005/11/11}{} + + "`Han"' ist der Familienname, müsste also korrekterweise unter H + einsortiert werden (letzteres lässt sich aber nur schwer korrigieren, da + wegen der gänderten Nummerierung dann nahezu das gesamte Buch neu gesetzt + werden müsste). + + +\CHAPTER{Index} + + +\erroronpage{1033}{2. Absatz, Z.4}{JMa}{2006/01/05}{2} +Die Abkürzung NFSS sollte \textsf{NFSS} geschrieben werden. + + +\erroronpage{1040}{rechte Spalte, Zeile 8}{BvdW}{2014/02/19}{} +\verb=\AskOption= (ohne das ``s'' am Ende, siehe Errata Seite 2 zu Kapitel 2) + + + +\iffalse Nicht wirklich, aber auch nicht schoen so ... mal sehen + +\erroronpage{1068}{"`Gleichheits- und Relationszeichen"'}{MSch}{2005/12/31}{} + Die beiden Einträge zu Gleichheits- und Relationszeichen sind durch + die Verwendung unterschiedlicher Trennzeichen falsch sortiert; + vertausche "`negierte, mathematische Symbole"' und "`mathematische + Symbole"'. +\fi + + + + + +\CHAPTER{Biographien} + +\erroronpage{1129}{Abs. 2, Z.3}{SZi}{2005/11/24}{2} + l"osche g aus Dok\u{g}umente + +\end{erratalist} + + +\setcounter{collectmore}{3} + +\begin{multicols}{3}[Dank an alle die Fehler oder Auslassungen + gemeldet haben. Gelistet sind jeweils die Personen die ein Problem + zuerst entdeckt haben. Einige Fehler wurden im englischen Original + gefunden, weshalb auch ein paar Namen ohne Fehlerzahl auftauchen.] +\contributor{AFe}{Alfonso Fernandez-Vazquez} +\contributor{BvdW}{Berend G. van der Wall} +\contributor{CBe}{Claudio Beccari} +\contributor{ChB}{Christof B\"ockler} +\contributor{DAl}{Daniel Alonso i Alemany} +\contributor{DIs}{Daniel Isaacson} +\contributor{ESt}{Eckhard Stein} +\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach} +\contributor{HjG}{Hubert G\"a\ss lein} +\contributor{JAn}{Jacques Andr\'e} +\contributor{JBez}{Javier Bezos} +\contributor{JMa}{Jens Mandavid} +\contributor{JS}{Joachim Schrod} +\contributor{LHe}{Lars Hellstr\"om} +\contributor{MHo}{Morten H\o gholm} +\contributor{MLi}{Martin Liebmann} +\contributor{MSch}{Michael Schutte} +\contributor{PEb}{Paul Ebermann} +\contributor{RHe}{Ralf Heckmann} +\contributor{RKo}{Reinhard Kotucha} +\contributor{RSi}{Roman Sigg} +\contributor{SNe}{Stefan Neuhaus} +\contributor{SZi}{Stefan Ziesemer} +\contributor{TNdz}{Timo Niedenzu} +\contributor{VVo}{Vladimir Volovich} +\contributor{YiL}{Yiannis Lazarides} +\end{multicols} + + +Sollten Sie einen weiteren Fehler entdecken, melden Sie diesen bitte an +\begin{quote}\ttfamily + frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org +\end{quote} +wenn möglich gleich in der für diese Datei benötigte Form, d.h. +\begin{flushleft} +|\erroronpage{|\textit{Seitennummr}|}{|\textit{Zeilenidentifikation}|}{|% + \textit{Initialen}|}{|\textit{JJJJ/MM/DD}|}{}| \\ + \hspace*{2em}\textit{Beschreibung des Fehlers} +\end{flushleft} +Hier ist ein Beispiel: +\begin{verbatim} +\erroronpage{5}{Abs.3, Z.1}{MOs}{2005/09/01}{} + Ersetze: "`LaTeX"' \> "`\LaTeX{}"' +\end{verbatim} +Die Verwendung von Babelkommandos (etwa |"`|) ist möglich, aber Umlaute +sollten möglichst nicht als 8-bit Zeichen eingegeben werden (also besser |"a| +oder |\"a|) um Probleme mit der Kodierung zu verhindern. + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d6e8b8771e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lb2.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/legal.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/legal.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a82b14877d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/legal.txt @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + LaTeX Copyright, Warranty and Distribution Restrictions + + 31 March 2016 + + +COPYRIGHT +========= + +This distribution is +Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 + 2006 2007 2008 2009 2011 2014 2015 2016 +The LaTeX3 Project and the individual authors: + + Leslie Lamport + Johannes Braams + David Carlisle + Morten Hoegholm + Alan Jeffrey + Frank Mittelbach + Chris Rowley + Rainer Schoepf + +License +======= + +LaTeX is free software that can be redistributed and/or modified +under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License as specified +in the file lppl.txt. +The latest version of this license is in + https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +version 2005/12/01 or later. + +The use of LaTeX is unrestricted. + +This Work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". + +The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution +is given in the file `manifest.txt'. + +Files generated by means of unpacking the distribution (using, for +example, the docstrip program) may be distributed at the distributor's +discretion. However if they are distributed then a copy of the base +system must be distributed together with them. + +The list of all derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +and covered by LPPL is given in the file unpacked.txt. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/letter.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/letter.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..72c038d77bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/letter.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..043c56d7528 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.err @@ -0,0 +1,697 @@ +\newcommand\erratafiledate{2008-06-13} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through +% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and +% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify +% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata +% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the +% .cfg file. +% +% The current version of this file can be found at: +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/guides/books.html +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls} +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007 Frank Mittelbach +%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version; +%% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl +% +% +% It sets up a few commands used to format the errata entries for books in the +% Addison-Wesley Series: +% +% Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting +% +% hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for +% errata files of other books. +% +% Changes: +% +% v1.0a - changed name from errata.cls to ttcterrata.cls + +\ProvidesClass{ttcterrata} + [2007/11/10 v1.0a Mini class for errata files; subject to change (FMi)] + +\LoadClass{article} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} +\addtolength\textwidth{5cm} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm} + +\addtolength\textheight{36pt} + +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + +\RequirePackage{array,longtable} +\RequirePackage{multicol} + + +\newcommand\erratagetnumber{} +\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3} + + +\newcommand\gobbleerrata{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup + \let\endgobble\egroup + \let\hideamp\relax + \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par} + +\newcommand*\hideamp{&} + +\let\endgobble\relax + + +\newcommand\erratastartdate{} +\newcommand\myprinting{1} + + +\newcommand\doweprint[2]{% + \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else \ifx s#2 1000\else#2 \fi\fi + \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber < + \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax + \@tempswatrue + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi +} + + + +\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate} +\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and} + +\newcommand\showallerrors{% + \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}% + \renewcommand\printedentries{up to} + \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}} + + +\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{% + \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi} + +\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{% + \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}} + +\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg} + { + \input{\jobname.cfg} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found } + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \AtEndDocument{ + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing} + \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision} + \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date} + \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Current settings are:} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting} + \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + }} + {} + +%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision> + +\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble + &\\[4pt]% + \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\} + +\newenvironment{erratalist} + {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}} + {\endgobble\end{longtable}} + +\newcommand\erratatitle[2] + {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries + Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt] + \small Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2\\ + (For other periods/print runs reprocess this document + with different config settings) + \end{center}% + \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \vspace{20pt}} + +\pagestyle{myheadings} + +\AtBeginDocument{\small} + +\setlength\parindent{0pt} +\setlength\parskip{2pt} + +\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par} + +% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: + +\let\u\underline +\renewcommand\>{$\to$} + +%%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of +%%% contributions by individuals (will work only if we do not get +%%% too many :-) + +\def\count@contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{ + \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}% +%%% also count secondary: +%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}% +} + +\renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% + \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{% + \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par} + +\end{filecontents} + + +\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} +% +% +% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% +% The LaTeX Graphics Companion, Second Edition +% +% +% \erratastartdate +% +% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed. +% +% The format is YYYY/MM/DD. +% +% The default below ensures that all entries for a particular +% printing are typeset. +% + +\renewcommand\erratastartdate{2007/06/30} + + +% +% \myprinting +% +% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. For example, if you +% have the second printing set this to 2 so that errors already +% corrected in that printing will not appear in your errata +% listing. +% +% The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the x-th +% printing are typeset. +% +% + +\renewcommand\myprinting{2} + +% +% \norevisionnumbers +% +% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same +% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed +% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in +% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. + +% +% \showallerrors +% +% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are +% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and +% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by +% default. +% +% +\endinput +\end{filecontents} + + +\documentclass{ttcterrata}[2005/11/10] % we want new class + +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\let\u\underline % shortcut for this file +\newcommand\meta[1]{$\langle$\textit{#1\/}$\rangle$} + +\usepackage{textcomp} + +\usepackage{url} + +\begin{document} + +\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion, Second Edition}{\erratafiledate} + + +\begin{verbatim} +@book(A-W:GMRRV07, + author = {Michel Goossens and Frank Mittelbach and Sebastian Rahtz + and Denis Roegel and Herbert Vo{\ss}}, + title = {The {\LaTeX} Graphics Companion}, + edition = 2, + series = {Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting}, + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, + address = {Boston, Massachusetts}, + year = 2007, + pagenums = {976}, + bibliography = {yes}, + index = {yes}, + isbn = {978-0-321-50892-8}, +) +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{3cm}} +\item[] + +This file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found as part of the \LaTeX{} +distribution and its latest version is maintained on the \LaTeX{} +project site at \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/\jobname.err} +where you will also find extracts of the book. + +The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata +entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed +revision in which this entry was corrected (\textit{s} indicates a +correction in the sources only). The second +column gives the precise location (negative line or paragraph numbers +are counted from the bottom of the page). The third column shows the +first finder of the problem. + +You can customize this list to only show errata related to the printing +you own by changing the configuration in the file \texttt{\jobname.cfg}. + +\begin{center} + \Large \bfseries To Err is Human --- Bug Contest +\end{center} + +Any mistake found and reported is a gain for all readers of our book. +For this reason Addison-Wesley and the authors offer a prize (for 6 +periods) to the eligible person who finds the largest +number of bugs during that period (in case of a draw a random choice +will be made between all those with the largest number of findings). +A person can receive at most one prize, ever; errors found by any of +the authors do not count. + +Each prize is a free choice of any single computing book found on the +AW Professional web site \texttt{http://www.awprofessional.com} (that +is, no boxed sets or multiple volume offers). + + +As usual, the authors and publisher reserve the right to make various +decisions such as whether a reported feature is an error for +competitive purposes or whether similar features count as a single or +multiple errors. --- +Good luck! + +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{clr} +Contest period ends & Winner \\[4pt] +2008/05 & Milan Vujtek & 16 suggestions\\ +2010/05 & & \\ +\ldots +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{list} + +\newpage + + +%<-------------------------- + +\newcommand\BibTeX{\textsc{Bib}\TeX} + +\begin{erratalist} + +\CHAPTER{General } + +\seriouserroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2007/07/01}{} + + To help you in assessing this errata document we have placed + exclamation marks in front of each entry that we consider essential + for correctly understanding the book contents. + +\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2007/07/01}{} + + Due to the printing process there may be small alignment problems + between blue and black text on some pages. These can vary from book + to book depending on how the paper was handled between print + runs---such is the analog nature of printing on a press. + +\CHAPTER{Front matter} + +\erroronpage{xxix}{para 4, l.1}{FMi/hv}{2007/08/23}{2} +Add ``In case of \textsf{PSTricks} \u{and, for example, the \textsf{beamer} +class} the syntax \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{xxix}{para 5, code}{FMi}{2007/08/24}{2} +There should be a bit more space in front of the code block + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 1} + +\erroronpage{2}{para 3, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} + ``First.'' \> ``First,'' + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 2} + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 3} + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 4} + +\seriouserroronpage{152}{exa 4-1-15}{HjG}{2007/08/17}{2} + Output of example is missing! Oops \ldots\ it was there honest + +\erroronpage{177}{para 2, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +Missing interword space: ``Flowcharts\u{ }are'' + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 5} + + +\erroronpage{221}{last line}{RSh}{2008/02/13}{2} +``down'' should be ``up''. + +\erroronpage{223}{}{hv}{2008/02/22}{2} +Changed explanation for example 5-4-1 slightly (since example changed). + +\erroronpage{224}{exa. 5-4-1}{hv}{2008/02/22}{2} +Coding changed to: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{pspicture}(-1,-1)(2,2) + \psaxes{->}(0,0)(-1,-1)(2,2) + \parabola[linewidth=1.5pt](1,2)(-0.5,-0.5) + \parabola[origin={0.25,-0.5}, + linestyle=dashed](1,2)(-0.5,-0.5) + \psaxes[origin={0.25,-0.5},linestyle=dashed, + linewidth=0.2pt]{->}(0,0)(-1,-1)(2,2) +\end{pspicture} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{240}{para 4, l.8}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +Remove backslash in: + ``keyword setting \verb/\showpoints=true/'' + +\erroronpage{254}{Ex 5-9-1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{} +The blue circle shouldn't be visible behind the black circle. This is a +problem due to the printing process used for the book---it does not show up on +all books. + +\erroronpage{290}{Ex 5-13-22}{MSh}{2008/06/11}{2} +Inside |\pscustom| the |\psbezier| macro needs four arguments in case +there exists no current point (always for the first macro) and three +arguments if the bezier curve connects to an existing line +or curve (path). + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 6} + +\erroronpage{335}{para 5, l.4}{JMi}{2008/06/23}{2} +``\ldots{} summarized in \u{Table} 5.2 \ldots" \> ``\ldots{} summarized in +\u{Figure} 5.2 \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{406}{margin}{hv}{2007/08/20}{2} + Missing interword space: + ``The\u{ }plotpoints \ldots''. + +\erroronpage{416}{exa 6-6-34}{hv}{2007/08/20}{2} + The filling (crosshatch) of the example isn't quite correct. + +\erroronpage{458}{para 2, l.1}{HjG}{2007/08/17}{2} + Missing interword space: + ``The\u{ }\textsf{pst-pdf} package \dots'' + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 7} + +\erroronpage{491}{2nd line}{yhj}{2008/01/06}{2} +The name of author of xytree package should be ``Koaunghi Un'' +but not ``Koaungli Un''. Sorry for the mistake. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 8} + +\erroronpage{514}{tab. 8.3}{FMi}{2008/012/21}{2} +Slightly increase spacing after hline. + +\erroronpage{515}{tab. 8.4}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +There should be vertical spacing in the first line (superscript $10^{24}$ +touches top line) + +\seriouserroronpage{579}{para 2, l.3}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} + \verb=\ln= \> \verb=\nl= (this will also change the index entry) + +\erroronpage{583}{para 4, l.9}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +Replace: ``of the voltage $V_C$'' \> ``of the voltage $v_C$'' + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 9} + +\erroronpage{598/599}{several}{FMi}{2007/08/19}{2} + The text and the displayed logs talk about example 7-2-6 but afterwards two + more chapters got added (without the logs being regenerated), i.e., this + should now be 9-2-6. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 10} + +\seriouserroronpage{683}{exa. 10-1-22}{FMi}{2007/08/26}{2} +The example unfortunately highlights a bug in the current texmate package: a +linebreak (in contrast to a space) is not recognized as a move separator +resulting in all moves getting scrambled in the output, e.g., you see +\texttt{dxe5 Bxf3 Qxf5} put together under move 4. + +Fix: use \texttt{;} to separate moves on linebreaks or wait for the next +release of the package. + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 11} + +\erroronpage{720}{6th item}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +Replace: ``documentwide'' \> ``\u{D}ocumentwide'' + +\erroronpage{726}{para 2, l.2}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +Extra space after +parenthesis: ``( in practice'' + +\erroronpage{740}{para 2, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +Replace: ``given +by \textit{start\u{ row}}'' \> ``given by \textit{start} row'' + +\seriouserroronpage{741}{Ex 11-3-5}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +Usage of +\verb=\cellcolor= might introduce extra space in the output (as one can see in +the example). + +This can be argued as being a bug in the \texttt{colortbl} package. Given that the +basic \verb=\color= command ignores spaces after it, \verb=\cellcolor= should +behave similarly. + +\seriouserroronpage{744}{line after Ex 11-3-9}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +Replace: ``This does \u{not}, of course, affect'' \> +``This does, of course, \u{also} affect'' + +\erroronpage{758}{para 3, l.2}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +Add small space between values and units in frame dimension + +\erroronpage{760}{fig. 11.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} + +why differs section names (``Introduction to encoding'' vs. ``Introduction'' +etc.)? + +Frank: because the author of this section used a real live example where he had +used an optional argument to |\section| to make the toc have special text for +some reason (should be mentioned in the source though). + +\erroronpage{774}{2nd snytax box}{hv}{2009/05/8}{2} +The |\transduration| command takes ``time in seconds'' as mandatory argument +(and not ``key/vals'') + +\erroronpage{779}{para 3, l.1}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +``in not shown''\> +``\u{is} not shown'' + +\erroronpage{794}{exa 11--4-36}{hv}{2009/05/12}{2} +Replace ``pic2e'' \> ``pic\u{t}2e'' in output, corresponding input not +displayed in the book. + + +\CHAPTER{Appendix A} + + +\CHAPTER{Appendix B} + +\erroronpage{809}{para -1, l.-1}{HjG}{2007/08/17}{2} + Missing interword space before opening parenthesis: + ``\dots \texttt{faq}\u{ }(or \dots'' + + +Frank: actually there is nothing missing in the source. It is a deficiency of +the fonts. + +\CHAPTER{Appendix C} + + +\CHAPTER{Bibliography} + +\erroronpage{822}{entry [32]}{MiV}{2008/05/22}{2} +Use capital C in ``Lecture Notes in computer Science'' + +\erroronpage{823}{entry [35]}{JPFD}{2007/09/05}{2} + The author name ``Eitan M. Gurai'' should be ``Eitan M. Gurari''. + +\erroronpage{824}{entry [47]}{GTa}{2010/02/10}{} + An updated version of the manual can be downloaded from + \url{https://www.tug.org/docs/metapost/mpman.pdf} + +\erroronpage{825}{entry [50]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} +Use capital C in ``Lecture Notes in computer Science'' + +\erroronpage{826}{entry [59]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + Add web url: \url{http://archiv.dante.de/DTK/PDF/komoedie_2002_1.pdf} + +\erroronpage{826}{entry [60]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + Add web url: \url{http://archiv.dante.de/DTK/PDF/komoedie_2002_2.pdf} + + \erroronpage{828}{entry [60]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + Add web url: ``Sample chapter + at: \url{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/}'' + + \erroronpage{829/830}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + Page breaks changed due to other changes + +\erroronpage{833}{entry [128]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + Url changed to: \url{obsolete/graphics/pstricks/doc/code/pst-code.pdf} + + +\erroronpage{833}{entry [129]}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + Url changed to: \url{macros/generic/multido/} + + +\erroronpage{833}{entry [135]}{ADo}{2008/01/02}{2} +An ``s'' is missing in ``using'' (end of the first line of comment) + + +\CHAPTER{Index} + + \erroronpage{856/860/866}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + changed index entries due to changes above + +\erroronpage{886}{col.2, l.-7}{GTa}{2010/02/10}{} + image(METAPOST) should also reference example on p.145 + + \erroronpage{891}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + changed index entries due to changes above + + \erroronpage{910/911}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + changed index entries due to changes above + + \erroronpage{925}{editorial change}{FMi}{2008/12/21}{2} + changed index entries due to changes above + +\end{erratalist} + + +\setcounter{collectmore}{3} + +\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or + omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.] +\contributor{ADo}{Alain Dondelinger} +\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach} +\contributor{GTa}{Gr\'egoire Taviot} +\contributor{HjG}{Hubert G\"a\ss lein} +\contributor{JPFD}{Jean-Pierre Drucbert} +\contributor{JMi}{John Middlekauff} +\contributor{MSh}{Michael Sharpe} +\contributor{MiV}{Milan Vujtek} +\contributor{RSh}{Richard Shepard} +\contributor{hv}{Herbert Vo\ss} +\contributor{yhj}{You Hyun Jo} +\end{multicols} + + +Other people have sent us corrections for errors already found. +Thanks to all of you! + +If you find +further +errors please report them to one of the authors, e.g., +\begin{quote}\ttfamily + frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org +\end{quote} +preferably in a form usable directly in this file, i.e., +\begin{flushleft} +|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|% + \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\ + \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the erratum} +\end{flushleft} +Here is an example: +\begin{verbatim} +\erroronpage{5}{para 3, l.1}{MOs}{2007/07/01}{} + ``LaTeX'' should be typeset ``\LaTeX''. +\end{verbatim} + +\end{document} + + +> > In addition, with regards to content of Section 8.1 it would be nice +> > to use Roman ``d'' in integrands in examples 3-2-3, 3-5-83, 3-5-84, +> > 5-12-21, 6-5-6 and 6-5-11. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e96d0d47a68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lgc2.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl-1-0.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl-1-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9425aab83cd --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl-1-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +LaTeX Project Public License +============================ + +LPPL Version 1.0 1999-03-01 + +Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but modification is not allowed. + + +Preamble +======== + +The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the +base LaTeX distribution is distributed. As described below you may use +this licence for any software that you wish to distribute. + +It may be particularly suitable if your software is TeX related (such +as a LaTeX package file) but it may be used for any software, even if +it is unrelated to TeX. + +To use this license, the files of your distribution should have an +explicit copyright notice giving your name and the year, together +with a reference to this license. + +A typical example would be + + %% pig.sty + %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name + + % This program can redistributed and/or modified under the terms + % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN + % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either + % version 1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. + +Given such a notice in the file, the conditions of this document would +apply, with: + +`The Program' referring to the software `pig.sty' and +`The Copyright Holder' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'. + +To see a real example, see the file legal.txt which carries the +copyright notice for the base latex distribution. + +This license gives terms under which files of The Program may be +distributed and modified. Individual files may have specific further +constraints on modification, but no file should have restrictions on +distribution other than those specified below. +This is to ensure that a distributor wishing to distribute a complete +unmodified copy of The Program need only check the conditions in this +file, and does not need to check every file in The Program for extra +restrictions. If you do need to modify the distribution terms of some +files, do not refer to this license, instead distribute The Program +under a different license. You may use the parts of the text of LPPL as +a model for your own license, but your license should not directly refer +to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that The Program is +distributed under the LPPL. + + + +The LaTeX Project Public License +================================ +Terms And Conditions For Copying, Distribution And Modification +=============================================================== + + +WARRANTY +======== + +There is no warranty for The Program, to the extent permitted by +applicable law. Except when otherwise stated in writing, The +Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is' without warranty of any +kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not limited to, the +implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular +purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the +program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you assume +the cost of all necessary servicing, repair or correction. + +In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing +will The Copyright Holder, or any of the individual authors named in +the source for The Program, be liable to you for damages, including +any general, special, incidental or consequential damages arising out +of any use of The Program or out of inability to use The Program +(including but not limited to loss of data or data being rendered +inaccurate or losses sustained by you or by third parties as a result +of a failure of The Program to operate with any other programs), even +if such holder or other party has been advised of the possibility of +such damages. + + +DISTRIBUTION +============ + +Redistribution of unchanged files is allowed provided that all files +that make up the distribution of The Program are distributed. +In particular this means that The Program has to be distributed +including its documentation if documentation was part of the original +distribution. + +The distribution of The Program will contain a prominent file +listing all the files covered by this license. + +If you receive only some of these files from someone, complain! + +The distribution of changed versions of certain files included in the +The Program, and the reuse of code from The Program, are allowed +under the following restrictions: + + * It is allowed only if the legal notice in the file does not + expressly forbid it. + See note below, under "Conditions on individual files". + + * You rename the file before you make any changes to it, unless the + file explicitly says that renaming is not required. Any such changed + files must be distributed under a license that forbids distribution + of those files, and any files derived from them, under the names used + by the original files in the distribution of The Program. + + * You change any `identification string' in The Program to clearly + indicate that the file is not part of the standard system. + + * If The Program includes an `error report address' so that errors + may be reported to The Copyright Holder, or other specified + addresses, this address must be changed in any modified versions of + The Program, so that reports for files not maintained by the + original program maintainers are directed to the maintainers of the + changed files. + + * You acknowledge the source and authorship of the original version + in the modified file. + + * You also distribute the unmodified version of the file or + alternatively provide sufficient information so that the + user of your modified file can be reasonably expected to be + able to obtain an original, unmodified copy of The Program. + For example, you may specify a URL to a site that you expect + will freely provide the user with a copy of The Program (either + the version on which your modification is based, or perhaps a + later version). + + * If The Program is intended to be used with, or is based on, LaTeX, + then files with the following file extensions which have special + meaning in LaTeX Software, have special modification rules under the + license: + + - Files with extension `.ins' (installation files): these files may + not be modified at all because they contain the legal notices + that are placed in the generated files. + + - Files with extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definitions files): these + files are allowed to be modified without changing the name, but + only to enable use of all available fonts and to prevent attempts + to access unavailable fonts. However, modified files are not + allowed to be distributed in place of original files. + + - Files with extension `.cfg' (configuration files): these files + can be created or modified to enable easy configuration of the + system. The documentation in cfgguide.tex in the base LaTeX + distribution describes when it makes sense to modify or generate + such files. + + +The above restrictions are not intended to prohibit, and hence do +not apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it +becomes identical to the latest version of that file in The Program. + +======================================================================== + +NOTES +===== + +We believe that these requirements give you the freedom you to make +modifications that conform with whatever technical specifications you +wish, whilst maintaining the availability, integrity and reliability of +The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal whilst +adhering to these requirements then read the document cfgguide.tex +in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. + +Because of the portability and exchangeability aspects of systems +like LaTeX, The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of +non-standard versions of components of LaTeX or of generally available +contributed code for them but such distributions are permitted under the +above restrictions. + +The document modguide.tex in the base LaTeX distribution details +the reasons for the legal requirements detailed above. +Even if The Program is unrelated to LaTeX, the argument in +modguide.tex may still apply, and should be read before +a modified version of The Program is distributed. + + +Conditions on individual files +============================== + +The individual files may bear additional conditions which supersede +the general conditions on distribution and modification contained in +this file. If there are any such files, the distribution of The +Program will contain a prominent file that lists all the exceptional +files. + +Typical examples of files with more restrictive modification +conditions would be files that contain the text of copyright notices. + + * The conditions on individual files differ only in the + extent of *modification* that is allowed. + + * The conditions on *distribution* are the same for all the files. + Thus a (re)distributor of a complete, unchanged copy of The Program + need meet only the conditions in this file; it is not necessary to + check the header of every file in the distribution to check that a + distribution meets these requirements. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl-1-1.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl-1-1.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..09cfcc9dd44 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl-1-1.txt @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ + +The LaTeX Project Public License +=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=- + +LPPL Version 1.1 1999-07-10 + +Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project + Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this + license document, but modification of it is not allowed. + + +PREAMBLE +======== + +The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the +base LaTeX distribution is distributed. + +You may use this license for any program that you have written and wish +to distribute. This license may be particularly suitable if your +program is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but you may use it +even if your program is unrelated to TeX. The section `WHETHER AND HOW +TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE', below, gives instructions, +examples, and recommendations for authors who are considering +distributing their programs under this license. + +In this license document, `The Program' refers to any program +distributed under this license. + +This license gives conditions under which The Program may be distributed +and conditions under which modified versions of The Program may be +distributed. Individual files of The Program may bear supplementary +and/or superseding conditions on modification of themselves and on the +distribution of modified versions of themselves, but *no* file of The +Program may bear supplementary or superseding conditions on the +distribution of an unmodified copy of the file. A distributor wishing +to distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program therefore +needs to check the conditions only in this license and nowhere else. + +Activities other than distribution and/or modification of The Program +are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In +particular, the act of running The Program is not restricted. + +We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you +the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of The Program +that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while +maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of +The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while +meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' +in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. + + +CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +=========================================== + +You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program. +Distribution of only part of The Program is not allowed. + +You may not modify in any way a file of The Program that bears a legal +notice forbidding modification of that file. + +You may distribute a modified file of The Program if, and only if, the +following eight conditions are met: + + 1. You must meet any additional conditions borne by the file on the + distribution of a modified version of the file as described below + in the subsection `Additional Conditions on Individual Files of + The Program'. + + 2. If the file is a LaTeX software file, then you must meet any + applicable additional conditions on the distribution of a modified + version of the file that are described below in the subsection + `Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files'. + + 3. You must not distribute the modified file with the filename of the + original file. + + 4. In the modified file, you must acknowledge the authorship and + name of the original file, and the name (if any) of the program + which contains it. + + 5. You must change any identification string in the file to indicate + clearly that the modified file is not part of The Program. + + 6. You must change any addresses in the modified file for the + reporting of errors in the file or in The Program generally to + ensure that reports for files no longer maintained by the original + maintainers will be directed to the maintainers of the modified + files. + + 7. You must distribute the modified file under a license that forbids + distribution both of the modified file and of any files derived + from the modified file with the filename of the original file. + + 8. You must do either (A) or (B): + + (A) distribute a copy of The Program (that is, a complete, + unmodified copy of The Program) together with the modified + file; if your distribution of the modified file is made by + offering access to copy the modified file from a designated + place, then offering equivalent access to copy The Program + from the same place meets this condition, even though third + parties are not compelled to copy The Program along with the + modified file; + + (B) provide to those who receive the modified file information + that is sufficient for them to obtain a copy of The Program; + for example, you may provide a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) + for a site that you expect will provide them with a copy of + The Program free of charge (either the version from which + your modification is derived, or perhaps a later version). + +Note that in the above, `distribution' of a file means making the +file available to others by any means. This includes, for instance, +installing the file on any machine in such a way that the file is +accessible by users other than yourself. `Modification' of a file +means any procedure that produces a derivative file under any +applicable law -- that is, a file containing the original file or +a significant portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications +and/or translated into another language. + +Changing the name of a file is considered to be a modification of +the file. + +The distribution conditions in this license do not have to be +applied to files that have been modified in accordance with the +above conditions. Note, however, that Condition 7. does apply to +any such modified file. + +The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not +apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it becomes +identical to the latest version of that file of The Program. + + + +A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution +----------------------------------------------------- + +It is wise never to modify a file of The Program, even for your own +personal use, without also meeting the above eight conditions for +distributing the modified file. While you might intend that such +modified files will never be distributed, often this will happen by +accident -- you may forget that you have modified the file; or it may +not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified file +that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions of +this license. It is usually in your best interest to keep your copy +of The Program identical with the public one. Many programs provide +ways to control the behavior of that program without altering its +licensed files. + + +Additional Conditions on Individual Files of The Program +-------------------------------------------------------- + +An individual file of The Program may bear additional conditions that +supplement and/or supersede the conditions in this license if, and only +if, such additional conditions exclusively concern modification of the +file or distribution of a modified version of the file. The conditions +on individual files of The Program therefore may differ only with +respect to the kind and extent of modification of those files that +is allowed, and with respect to the distribution of modified versions +of those files. + + +Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files +--------------------------------------------- + +If a file of The Program is intended to be used with LaTeX (that is, +if it is a LaTeX software file), then the following additional +conditions, which supplement and/or supersede the conditions +above, apply to the file according to its filename extension: + + - You may not modify any file with filename extension `.ins' since + these are installation files containing the legal notices that are + placed in the files they generate. + + - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename + extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definition files) under the standard + conditions of the LPPL as described above. You may also distribute + such modified LaTeX font definition files with their original names + provided that: + (1) the only changes to the original files either enable use of + available fonts or prevent attempts to access unavailable fonts; + (2) you also distribute the original, unmodified files (TeX input + paths can be used to control which set of LaTeX font definition + files is actually used by TeX). + + - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename + extension `.cfg' (configuration files) with their original names. + The Program may (and usually will) specify the range of commands + that are allowed in a particular configuration file. + +Because of portability and exchangeability issues in LaTeX software, +The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of modified versions of +components of LaTeX or of generally available contributed code for them, +but such distribution can meet the conditions of this license. + + +NO WARRANTY +=========== + +There is no warranty for The Program. Except when otherwise stated in +writing, The Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is', without +warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not +limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for +a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance +of The Program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you +assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. + +In no event unless agreed to in writing will The Copyright Holder, or +any author named in the files of The Program, or any other party who may +distribute and/or modify The Program as permitted below, be liable to +you for damages, including any general, special, incidental or +consequential damages arising out of any use of The Program or out of +inability to use The Program (including, but not limited to, loss of +data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by anyone as +a result of any failure of The Program to operate with any other +programs), even if The Copyright Holder or said author or said other +party has been advised of the possibility of such damages. + + +WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE +========================================================= + +This section contains important instructions, examples, and +recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their +programs under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in +this section. + + +Choosing This License or Another License +---------------------------------------- + +If for any part of your program you want or need to use *distribution* +conditions that differ from those in this license, then do not refer to +this license anywhere in your program but instead distribute your +program under a different license. You may use the text of this license +as a model for your own license, but your license should not refer to +the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that your program is +distributed under the LPPL. + +The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains +the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains, +for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public +License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your program is +unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be +relevant, and authors intending to distribute their programs under any +license are encouraged to read it. + + +How to Use This License +----------------------- + +To use this license, place in each of the files of your program both +an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year and also +a statement that the distribution and/or modification of the file is +constrained by the conditions in this license. + +Here is an example of such a notice and statement: + + %% pig.dtx + %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name + % + % This program may be distributed and/or modified under the + % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.1 + % of this license or (at your option) any later version. + % The latest version of this license is in + % https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + % and version 1.1 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % version 1999/06/01 or later. + % + % This program consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins + +Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions given in +this license document would apply, with `The Program' referring to the +two files `pig.dtx' and `pig.ins', and `The Copyright Holder' referring +to the person `M. Y. Name'. + + +Important Recommendations +------------------------- + + Defining What Constitutes The Program + + The LPPL requires that distributions of The Program contain all the + files of The Program. It is therefore important that you provide a + way for the licensee to determine which files constitute The Program. + This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the + files of The Program near the copyright notice of each file or by + using a line like + + % This program consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. + + in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be + impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you + to comprise The Program. + + Noting Exceptional Files + + If The Program contains any files bearing additional conditions on + modification, or on distribution of modified versions, of those + files (other than those listed in `Additional Conditions on LaTeX + Software Files'), then it is recommended that The Program contain a + prominent file that defines the exceptional conditions, and either + lists the exceptional files or defines one or more categories of + exceptional files. + + Files containing the text of a license (such as this file) are + often examples of files bearing more restrictive conditions on + modification. LaTeX configuration files (with filename extension + `.cfg') are examples of files bearing less restrictive conditions + on the distribution of a modified version of the file. The + additional conditions on LaTeX software given above are examples + of declaring a category of files bearing exceptional additional + conditions. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl-1-2.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl-1-2.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..afee9416afa --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl-1-2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,318 @@ + +The LaTeX Project Public License +=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=- + +LPPL Version 1.2 1999-09-03 + +Copyright 1999 LaTeX3 Project + Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this + license document, but modification of it is not allowed. + + +PREAMBLE +======== + +The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the license under which the +base LaTeX distribution is distributed. + +You may use this license for any program that you have written and wish +to distribute. This license may be particularly suitable if your +program is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but you may use it +even if your program is unrelated to TeX. The section `WHETHER AND HOW +TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE', below, gives instructions, +examples, and recommendations for authors who are considering +distributing their programs under this license. + +In this license document, `The Program' refers to any program +distributed under this license. + +This license gives conditions under which The Program may be distributed +and conditions under which modified versions of The Program may be +distributed. Individual files of The Program may bear supplementary +and/or superseding conditions on modification of themselves and on the +distribution of modified versions of themselves, but *no* file of The +Program may bear supplementary or superseding conditions on the +distribution of an unmodified copy of the file. A distributor wishing +to distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program therefore +needs to check the conditions only in this license and nowhere else. + +Activities other than distribution and/or modification of The Program +are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In +particular, the act of running The Program is not restricted. + +We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you +the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of The Program +that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while +maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of +The Program. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while +meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' +in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. + + +CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +=========================================== + +You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of The Program. +Distribution of only part of The Program is not allowed. + +You may not modify in any way a file of The Program that bears a legal +notice forbidding modification of that file. + +You may distribute a modified file of The Program if, and only if, the +following eight conditions are met: + + 1. You must meet any additional conditions borne by the file on the + distribution of a modified version of the file as described below + in the subsection `Additional Conditions on Individual Files of + The Program'. + + 2. If the file is a LaTeX software file, then you must meet any + applicable additional conditions on the distribution of a modified + version of the file that are described below in the subsection + `Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files'. + + 3. You must not distribute the modified file with the filename of the + original file. + + 4. In the modified file, you must acknowledge the authorship and + name of the original file, and the name (if any) of the program + which contains it. + + 5. You must change any identification string in the file to indicate + clearly that the modified file is not part of The Program. + + 6. You must change any addresses in the modified file for the + reporting of errors in the file or in The Program generally to + ensure that reports for files no longer maintained by the original + maintainers will be directed to the maintainers of the modified + files. + + 7. You must distribute the modified file under a license that forbids + distribution both of the modified file and of any files derived + from the modified file with the filename of the original file. + + 8. You must do either (A) or (B): + + (A) distribute a copy of The Program (that is, a complete, + unmodified copy of The Program) together with the modified + file; if your distribution of the modified file is made by + offering access to copy the modified file from a designated + place, then offering equivalent access to copy The Program + from the same place meets this condition, even though third + parties are not compelled to copy The Program along with the + modified file; + + (B) provide to those who receive the modified file information + that is sufficient for them to obtain a copy of The Program; + for example, you may provide a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) + for a site that you expect will provide them with a copy of + The Program free of charge (either the version from which + your modification is derived, or perhaps a later version). + +Note that in the above, `distribution' of a file means making the +file available to others by any means. This includes, for instance, +installing the file on any machine in such a way that the file is +accessible by users other than yourself. `Modification' of a file +means any procedure that produces a derivative file under any +applicable law -- that is, a file containing the original file or +a significant portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications +and/or translated into another language. + +Changing the name of a file (other than as necessitated by the file +conventions of the target file systems) is considered to be a +modification of the file. + +The distribution conditions in this license do not have to be +applied to files that have been modified in accordance with the +above conditions. Note, however, that Condition 7. does apply to +any such modified file. + +The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not +apply to, the updating, by any method, of a file so that it becomes +identical to the latest version of that file of The Program. + + + +A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution +----------------------------------------------------- + +It is wise never to modify a file of The Program, even for your own +personal use, without also meeting the above eight conditions for +distributing the modified file. While you might intend that such +modified files will never be distributed, often this will happen by +accident -- you may forget that you have modified the file; or it may +not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified file +that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions of +this license. It is usually in your best interest to keep your copy +of The Program identical with the public one. Many programs provide +ways to control the behavior of that program without altering its +licensed files. + + +Additional Conditions on Individual Files of The Program +-------------------------------------------------------- + +An individual file of The Program may bear additional conditions that +supplement and/or supersede the conditions in this license if, and only +if, such additional conditions exclusively concern modification of the +file or distribution of a modified version of the file. The conditions +on individual files of The Program therefore may differ only with +respect to the kind and extent of modification of those files that +is allowed, and with respect to the distribution of modified versions +of those files. + + +Additional Conditions on LaTeX Software Files +--------------------------------------------- + +If a file of The Program is intended to be used with LaTeX (that is, +if it is a LaTeX software file), then the following additional +conditions, which supplement and/or supersede the conditions +above, apply to the file according to its filename extension: + + - You may not modify any file with filename extension `.ins' since + these are installation files containing the legal notices that are + placed in the files they generate. + + - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename + extension `.fd' (LaTeX font definition files) under the standard + conditions of the LPPL as described above. You may also distribute + such modified LaTeX font definition files with their original names + provided that: + (1) the only changes to the original files either enable use of + available fonts or prevent attempts to access unavailable fonts; + (2) you also distribute the original, unmodified files (TeX input + paths can be used to control which set of LaTeX font definition + files is actually used by TeX). + + - You may distribute modified versions of files with filename + extension `.cfg' (configuration files) with their original names. + The Program may (and usually will) specify the range of commands + that are allowed in a particular configuration file. + +Because of portability and exchangeability issues in LaTeX software, +The LaTeX3 Project deprecates the distribution of modified versions of +components of LaTeX or of generally available contributed code for them, +but such distribution can meet the conditions of this license. + + +NO WARRANTY +=========== + +There is no warranty for The Program. Except when otherwise stated in +writing, The Copyright Holder provides The Program `as is', without +warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not +limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for +a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance +of The Program is with you. Should The Program prove defective, you +assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. + +In no event unless agreed to in writing will The Copyright Holder, or +any author named in the files of The Program, or any other party who may +distribute and/or modify The Program as permitted above, be liable to +you for damages, including any general, special, incidental or +consequential damages arising out of any use of The Program or out of +inability to use The Program (including, but not limited to, loss of +data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by anyone as +a result of any failure of The Program to operate with any other +programs), even if The Copyright Holder or said author or said other +party has been advised of the possibility of such damages. + + +WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE PROGRAMS UNDER THIS LICENSE +========================================================= + +This section contains important instructions, examples, and +recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their +programs under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in +this section. + + +Choosing This License or Another License +---------------------------------------- + +If for any part of your program you want or need to use *distribution* +conditions that differ from those in this license, then do not refer to +this license anywhere in your program but instead distribute your +program under a different license. You may use the text of this license +as a model for your own license, but your license should not refer to +the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that your program is +distributed under the LPPL. + +The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains +the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains, +for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public +License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your program is +unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be +relevant, and authors intending to distribute their programs under any +license are encouraged to read it. + + +How to Use This License +----------------------- + +To use this license, place in each of the files of your program both +an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year and also +a statement that the distribution and/or modification of the file is +constrained by the conditions in this license. + +Here is an example of such a notice and statement: + + %% pig.dtx + %% Copyright 2001 M. Y. Name + % + % This program may be distributed and/or modified under the + % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.2 + % of this license or (at your option) any later version. + % The latest version of this license is in + % https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + % and version 1.2 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % version 1999/12/01 or later. + % + % This program consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins + +Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions given in +this license document would apply, with `The Program' referring to the +two files `pig.dtx' and `pig.ins', and `The Copyright Holder' referring +to the person `M. Y. Name'. + + +Important Recommendations +------------------------- + + Defining What Constitutes The Program + + The LPPL requires that distributions of The Program contain all the + files of The Program. It is therefore important that you provide a + way for the licensee to determine which files constitute The Program. + This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the + files of The Program near the copyright notice of each file or by + using a line like + + % This program consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. + + in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be + impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you + to comprise The Program. + + Noting Exceptional Files + + If The Program contains any files bearing additional conditions on + modification, or on distribution of modified versions, of those + files (other than those listed in `Additional Conditions on LaTeX + Software Files'), then it is recommended that The Program contain a + prominent file that defines the exceptional conditions, and either + lists the exceptional files or defines one or more categories of + exceptional files. + + Files containing the text of a license (such as this file) are + often examples of files bearing more restrictive conditions on + modification. LaTeX configuration files (with filename extension + `.cfg') are examples of files bearing less restrictive conditions + on the distribution of a modified version of the file. The + additional conditions on LaTeX software given above are examples + of declaring a category of files bearing exceptional additional + conditions. + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..dd5905ebfbc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bf0da5c7bb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.tex @@ -0,0 +1,511 @@ +% +% Copyright 1999 2002-2011 LaTeX3 Project +% Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this +% license document, but modification of it is not allowed. +% +% +% If you wish to load it as part of a ``doc'' source, you have to +% ensure that a) % is a comment character and b) that short verb +% characters are being turned off, i.e., +% +% \DeleteShortVerb{\'} % or whatever was made a shorthand +% \MakePercentComment +% \input{lppl} +% \MakePercentIgnore +% \MakeShortVerb{\'} % turn it on again if necessary +% +% +% By default the license is produced with \section* as the highest +% heading level. If this is not appropriate for the document in which +% it is included define the commands listed below before loading this +% document, e.g., for inclusion as a separate chapter define: +% +% \providecommand{\LPPLsection}{\chapter*} +% \providecommand{\LPPLsubsection}{\section*} +% \providecommand{\LPPLsubsubsection}{\subsection*} +% \providecommand{\LPPLparagraph}{\subsubsection*} +% +% +% To allow cross-referencing the headings \label's have been attached +% to them, all starting with ``LPPL:''. As by default headings without +% numbers are produced, this will only allow page references. +% However, you can use the titleref package to produce textual +% references or you change the definitions of \LPPLsection, and +% friends to generated numbered headings. +% +% +% We want it to be possible that this file can be processed by +% (pdf)LaTeX on its own, or that this file can be included in another +% LaTeX document without any modification whatsoever. +% Hence the little test below. +% +% +\makeatletter +\ifx\@preamblecmds\@notprerr + % In this case the preamble has already been processed so this file + % is loaded as part of another document; just enclose everything in + % a group + \let\LPPLicense\bgroup + \let\endLPPLicense\egroup +\else + % In this case the preamble has not been processed yet so this file + % is processed by itself. + \documentclass{article} + \let\LPPLicense\document + \let\endLPPLicense\enddocument +\fi +\makeatother + + +\begin{LPPLicense} + \providecommand{\LPPLsection}{\section*} + \providecommand{\LPPLsubsection}{\subsection*} + \providecommand{\LPPLsubsubsection}{\subsubsection*} + \providecommand{\LPPLparagraph}{\paragraph*} + \providecommand*{\LPPLfile}[1]{\texttt{#1}} + \providecommand*{\LPPLdocfile}[1]{`\LPPLfile{#1.tex}'} + \providecommand*{\LPPL}{\textsc{lppl}} + + \LPPLsection{The \LaTeX\ Project Public License} + \label{LPPL:LPPL} + + \emph{LPPL Version 1.3c 2008-05-04} + + \textbf{Copyright 1999, 2002--2008 \LaTeX3 Project} + \begin{quotation} + Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this + license document, but modification of it is not allowed. + \end{quotation} + + \LPPLsubsection{Preamble} + \label{LPPL:Preamble} + + The \LaTeX\ Project Public License (\LPPL) is the primary license + under which the \LaTeX\ kernel and the base \LaTeX\ packages are + distributed. + + You may use this license for any work of which you hold the + copyright and which you wish to distribute. This license may be + particularly suitable if your work is \TeX-related (such as a + \LaTeX\ package), but it is written in such a way that you can use + it even if your work is unrelated to \TeX. + + The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS + LICENSE', below, gives instructions, examples, and recommendations + for authors who are considering distributing their works under this + license. + + This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed + and modified, as well as conditions under which modified versions of + that work may be distributed. + + We, the \LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you + the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of your work + that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while + maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of that + work. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while meeting + these conditions, then read the document \LPPLdocfile{cfgguide} and + \LPPLdocfile{modguide} in the base \LaTeX\ distribution for suggestions. + + + \LPPLsubsection{Definitions} + \label{LPPL:Definitions} + + In this license document the following terms are used: + + \begin{description} + \item[Work] Any work being distributed under this License. + + \item[Derived Work] Any work that under any applicable law is + derived from the Work. + + \item[Modification] Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under + any applicable law -- for example, the production of a file + containing an original file associated with the Work or a + significant portion of such a file, either verbatim or with + modifications and/or translated into another language. + + \item[Modify] To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work + under any applicable law. + + \item[Distribution] Making copies of the Work available from one + person to another, in whole or in part. Distribution includes + (but is not limited to) making any electronic components of the + Work accessible by file transfer protocols such as \textsc{ftp} or + \textsc{http} or by shared file systems such as Sun's Network File + System (\textsc{nfs}). + + \item[Compiled Work] A version of the Work that has been processed + into a form where it is directly usable on a computer system. + This processing may include using installation facilities provided + by the Work, transformations of the Work, copying of components of + the Work, or other activities. Note that modification of any + installation facilities provided by the Work constitutes + modification of the Work. + + \item[Current Maintainer] A person or persons nominated as such + within the Work. If there is no such explicit nomination then it + is the `Copyright Holder' under any applicable law. + + \item[Base Interpreter] A program or process that is normally needed + for running or interpreting a part or the whole of the Work. + + A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these are + not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each + external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used + interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the + license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a + `\LaTeX-Format' or in the case of files belonging to the + `\LaTeX-format' a program implementing the `\TeX{} language'. + \end{description} + + \LPPLsubsection{Conditions on Distribution and Modification} + \label{LPPL:Conditions} + + \begin{enumerate} + \item Activities other than distribution and/or modification of the + Work are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. + In particular, the act of running the Work is not restricted and + no requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the + Work. + + \item\label{LPPL:item:distribute} You may distribute a complete, unmodified + copy of the Work as you received it. Distribution of only part of + the Work is considered modification of the Work, and no right to + distribute such a Derived Work may be assumed under the terms of + this clause. + + \item You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated + from a complete, unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under + Clause~\ref{LPPL:item:distribute} above, as long as that Compiled Work is + distributed in such a way that the recipients may install the + Compiled Work on their system exactly as it would have been + installed if they generated a Compiled Work directly from the + Work. + + \item\label{LPPL:item:currmaint} If you are the Current Maintainer of the + Work, you may, without restriction, modify the Work, thus creating + a Derived Work. You may also distribute the Derived Work without + restriction, including Compiled Works generated from the Derived + Work. Derived Works distributed in this manner by the Current + Maintainer are considered to be updated versions of the Work. + + \item If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may + modify your copy of the Work, thus creating a Derived Work based + on the Work, and compile this Derived Work, thus creating a + Compiled Work based on the Derived Work. + + \item\label{LPPL:item:conditions} If you are not the Current Maintainer + of the + Work, you may distribute a Derived Work provided the following + conditions are met for every component of the Work unless that + component clearly states in the copyright notice that it is exempt + from that condition. Only the Current Maintainer is allowed to + add such statements of exemption to a component of the Work. + \begin{enumerate} + \item If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct + replacement for a component of the Work when that component is + used with the Base Interpreter, then, wherever this component of + the Work identifies itself to the user when used interactively + with that Base Interpreter, the replacement component of this + Derived Work clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a + modified version of this component to the user when used + interactively with that Base Interpreter. + + \item\label{LPPL:item:changelog} Every component of the Derived Work + contains prominent + notices detailing the nature of the changes to that component, + or a prominent reference to another file that is distributed as + part of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and + accurate log of the changes. + + \item No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons, + including (but not limited to) the authors of the original + version of the Work, provide any support, including (but not + limited to) the reporting and handling of errors, to recipients + of the Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly + that they do provide such support for the Derived Work. + + \item\label{LPPL:item:unmodifiedcopy} You distribute at least one of + the following with the Derived Work: + \begin{enumerate} + \item A complete, unmodified copy of the Work; if your + distribution of a modified component is made by offering + access to copy the modified component from a designated place, + then offering equivalent access to copy the Work from the same + or some similar place meets this condition, even though third + parties are not compelled to copy the Work along with the + modified component; + + \item Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete, + unmodified copy of the Work. + \end{enumerate} + \end{enumerate} + \item If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may + distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work, as long + as the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the + Compiled Work, and as long as the conditions of + Clause~\ref{LPPL:item:conditions}, above, are met with regard to the + Derived Work. + + \item The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence + do not apply to, the modification, by any method, of any component + so that it becomes identical to an updated version of that + component of the Work as it is distributed by the Current + Maintainer under Clause~\ref{LPPL:item:currmaint}, above. + + \item Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative + format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part) + is then produced by applying some process to that format, does not + relax or nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to + the results of applying that process. + + \item + \begin{enumerate} + \item A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license + provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in + Clause~\ref{LPPL:item:conditions} above, in regard to the Work, though it + does not have to honor the rest of the conditions in this + license. + + \item If a Derived Work is distributed under a different license, + that Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part + of itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor + the restrictions in Clause~\ref{LPPL:item:conditions} above, concerning + changes from the Work. + \end{enumerate} + \item This license places no restrictions on works that are + unrelated to the Work, nor does this license place any + restrictions on aggregating such works with the Work by any means. + + \item Nothing in this license is intended to, or may be used to, + prevent complete compliance by all parties with all applicable + laws. + \end{enumerate} + + \LPPLsubsection{No Warranty} + \label{LPPL:Warranty} + + There is no warranty for the Work. Except when otherwise stated in + writing, the Copyright Holder provides the Work `as is', without + warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but + not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and + fitness for a particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality + and performance of the Work is with you. Should the Work prove + defective, you assume the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, + or correction. + + In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in + writing will The Copyright Holder, or any author named in the + components of the Work, or any other party who may distribute and/or + modify the Work as permitted above, be liable to you for damages, + including any general, special, incidental or consequential damages + arising out of any use of the Work or out of inability to use the + Work (including, but not limited to, loss of data, data being + rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by anyone as a result of + any failure of the Work to operate with any other programs), even if + the Copyright Holder or said author or said other party has been + advised of the possibility of such damages. + + \LPPLsubsection{Maintenance of The Work} + \label{LPPL:Maintenance} + + The Work has the status `author-maintained' if the Copyright Holder + explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice + in the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright + Holder or simply that it is `author-maintained'. + + The Work has the status `maintained' if there is a Current + Maintainer who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to + receive error reports for the Work (for example, by supplying a + valid e-mail address). It is not required for the Current Maintainer + to acknowledge or act upon these error reports. + + The Work changes from status `maintained' to `unmaintained' if there + is no Current Maintainer, or the person stated to be Current + Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means + of communication for a period of six months, and there are no other + significant signs of active maintenance. + + You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with + any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role. + + If the Work is unmaintained, you can become the Current Maintainer + of the Work through the following steps: + \begin{enumerate} + \item Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer (and + the Copyright Holder, if the two differ) through the means of an + Internet or similar search. + \item If this search is successful, then enquire whether the Work is + still maintained. + \begin{enumerate} + \item If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer + to update their communication data within one month. + + \item\label{LPPL:item:intention} If the search is unsuccessful or + no action to resume active maintenance is taken by the Current + Maintainer, then announce within the pertinent community your + intention to take over maintenance. (If the Work is a \LaTeX{} + work, this could be done, for example, by posting to + \texttt{comp.text.tex}.) + \end{enumerate} + \item {} + \begin{enumerate} + \item If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass + maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect + immediately upon announcement. + + \item\label{LPPL:item:announce} If the Current Maintainer is not + reachable and the Copyright Holder agrees that maintenance of + the Work be passed to you, then this takes effect immediately + upon announcement. + \end{enumerate} + \item\label{LPPL:item:change} If you make an `intention + announcement' as described in~\ref{LPPL:item:intention} above and + after three months your intention is challenged neither by the + Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other + people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as to + name you as the (new) Current Maintainer. + + \item If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes + reachable once more within three months of a change completed + under the terms of~\ref{LPPL:item:announce} + or~\ref{LPPL:item:change}, then that Current Maintainer must + become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided they + then update their communication data within one month. + \end{enumerate} + A change in the Current Maintainer does not, of itself, alter the + fact that the Work is distributed under the \LPPL\ license. + + If you become the Current Maintainer of the Work, you should + immediately provide, within the Work, a prominent and unambiguous + statement of your status as Current Maintainer. You should also + announce your new status to the same pertinent community as + in~\ref{LPPL:item:intention} above. + + \LPPLsubsection{Whether and How to Distribute Works under This License} + \label{LPPL:Distribute} + + This section contains important instructions, examples, and + recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their + works under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in + this section. + + \LPPLsubsubsection{Choosing This License or Another License} + \label{LPPL:Choosing} + + If for any part of your work you want or need to use + \emph{distribution} conditions that differ significantly from those + in this license, then do not refer to this license anywhere in your + work but, instead, distribute your work under a different license. + You may use the text of this license as a model for your own + license, but your license should not refer to the \LPPL\ or + otherwise give the impression that your work is distributed under + the \LPPL. + + The document \LPPLdocfile{modguide} in the base \LaTeX\ distribution + explains the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It + explains, for example, why distributing \LaTeX\ under the + \textsc{gnu} General Public License (\textsc{gpl}) was considered + inappropriate. Even if your work is unrelated to \LaTeX, the + discussion in \LPPLdocfile{modguide} may still be relevant, and authors + intending to distribute their works under any license are encouraged + to read it. + + \LPPLsubsubsection{A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution} + \label{LPPL:WithoutDistribution} + + It is wise never to modify a component of the Work, even for your + own personal use, without also meeting the above conditions for + distributing the modified component. While you might intend that + such modifications will never be distributed, often this will happen + by accident -- you may forget that you have modified that component; + or it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the + modified version that you are thus distributing it and violating the + conditions of this license in ways that could have legal + implications and, worse, cause problems for the community. It is + therefore usually in your best interest to keep your copy of the + Work identical with the public one. Many works provide ways to + control the behavior of that work without altering any of its + licensed components. + + \LPPLsubsubsection{How to Use This License} + \label{LPPL:HowTo} + + To use this license, place in each of the components of your work + both an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year + the work was authored and/or last substantially modified. Include + also a statement that the distribution and/or modification of that + component is constrained by the conditions in this license. + + Here is an example of such a notice and statement: +\begin{verbatim} + %% pig.dtx + %% Copyright 2005 M. Y. Name + % + % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the + % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 + % of this license or (at your option) any later version. + % The latest version of this license is in + % https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + % and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % version 2005/12/01 or later. + % + % This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. + % + % The Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name. + % + % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins + % and the derived file pig.sty. +\end{verbatim} + + Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions given in + this license document would apply, with the `Work' referring to the + three files `\LPPLfile{pig.dtx}', `\LPPLfile{pig.ins}', and + `\LPPLfile{pig.sty}' (the last being generated from + `\LPPLfile{pig.dtx}' using `\LPPLfile{pig.ins}'), the `Base + Interpreter' referring to any `\LaTeX-Format', and both `Copyright + Holder' and `Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y. + Name'. + + If you do not want the Maintenance section of \LPPL\ to apply to + your Work, change `maintained' above into `author-maintained'. + However, we recommend that you use `maintained' as the Maintenance + section was added in order to ensure that your Work remains useful + to the community even when you can no longer maintain and support it + yourself. + + \LPPLsubsubsection{Derived Works That Are Not Replacements} + \label{LPPL:NotReplacements} + + Several clauses of the \LPPL\ specify means to provide reliability + and stability for the user community. They therefore concern + themselves with the case that a Derived Work is intended to be used + as a (compatible or incompatible) replacement of the original + Work. If this is not the case (e.g., if a few lines of code are + reused for a completely different task), then clauses + \ref{LPPL:item:changelog} and \ref{LPPL:item:unmodifiedcopy} + shall not apply. + + \LPPLsubsubsection{Important Recommendations} + \label{LPPL:Recommendations} + + \LPPLparagraph{Defining What Constitutes the Work} + + The \LPPL\ requires that distributions of the Work contain all the + files of the Work. It is therefore important that you provide a way + for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work. This + could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the files + of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by using a + line such as: +\begin{verbatim} + % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +\end{verbatim} + in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be + impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you + to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be + entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise + the Work. + +\end{LPPLicense} +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e8ad0953dc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/lppl.txt @@ -0,0 +1,416 @@ +The LaTeX Project Public License +=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=- + +LPPL Version 1.3c 2008-05-04 + +Copyright 1999 2002-2008 LaTeX3 Project + Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this + license document, but modification of it is not allowed. + + +PREAMBLE +======== + +The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the primary license under +which the LaTeX kernel and the base LaTeX packages are distributed. + +You may use this license for any work of which you hold the copyright +and which you wish to distribute. This license may be particularly +suitable if your work is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but +it is written in such a way that you can use it even if your work is +unrelated to TeX. + +The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE', +below, gives instructions, examples, and recommendations for authors +who are considering distributing their works under this license. + +This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed +and modified, as well as conditions under which modified versions of +that work may be distributed. + +We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you +the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of your work +that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while +maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of +that work. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while +meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex' +and `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions. + + +DEFINITIONS +=========== + +In this license document the following terms are used: + + `Work' + Any work being distributed under this License. + + `Derived Work' + Any work that under any applicable law is derived from the Work. + + `Modification' + Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable + law -- for example, the production of a file containing an + original file associated with the Work or a significant portion of + such a file, either verbatim or with modifications and/or + translated into another language. + + `Modify' + To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any + applicable law. + + `Distribution' + Making copies of the Work available from one person to another, in + whole or in part. Distribution includes (but is not limited to) + making any electronic components of the Work accessible by + file transfer protocols such as FTP or HTTP or by shared file + systems such as Sun's Network File System (NFS). + + `Compiled Work' + A version of the Work that has been processed into a form where it + is directly usable on a computer system. This processing may + include using installation facilities provided by the Work, + transformations of the Work, copying of components of the Work, or + other activities. Note that modification of any installation + facilities provided by the Work constitutes modification of the Work. + + `Current Maintainer' + A person or persons nominated as such within the Work. If there is + no such explicit nomination then it is the `Copyright Holder' under + any applicable law. + + `Base Interpreter' + A program or process that is normally needed for running or + interpreting a part or the whole of the Work. + + A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these + are not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each + external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used + interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the + license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a + `LaTeX-Format' or in the case of files belonging to the + `LaTeX-format' a program implementing the `TeX language'. + + + +CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION +=========================================== + +1. Activities other than distribution and/or modification of the Work +are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In +particular, the act of running the Work is not restricted and no +requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the Work. + +2. You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of the Work as you +received it. Distribution of only part of the Work is considered +modification of the Work, and no right to distribute such a Derived +Work may be assumed under the terms of this clause. + +3. You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated from a +complete, unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under Clause 2 +above, as long as that Compiled Work is distributed in such a way that +the recipients may install the Compiled Work on their system exactly +as it would have been installed if they generated a Compiled Work +directly from the Work. + +4. If you are the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may, without +restriction, modify the Work, thus creating a Derived Work. You may +also distribute the Derived Work without restriction, including +Compiled Works generated from the Derived Work. Derived Works +distributed in this manner by the Current Maintainer are considered to +be updated versions of the Work. + +5. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may modify +your copy of the Work, thus creating a Derived Work based on the Work, +and compile this Derived Work, thus creating a Compiled Work based on +the Derived Work. + +6. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may +distribute a Derived Work provided the following conditions are met +for every component of the Work unless that component clearly states +in the copyright notice that it is exempt from that condition. Only +the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption +to a component of the Work. + + a. If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct replacement + for a component of the Work when that component is used with the + Base Interpreter, then, wherever this component of the Work + identifies itself to the user when used interactively with that + Base Interpreter, the replacement component of this Derived Work + clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a modified version + of this component to the user when used interactively with that + Base Interpreter. + + b. Every component of the Derived Work contains prominent notices + detailing the nature of the changes to that component, or a + prominent reference to another file that is distributed as part + of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and accurate log + of the changes. + + c. No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons, + including (but not limited to) the authors of the original version + of the Work, provide any support, including (but not limited to) + the reporting and handling of errors, to recipients of the + Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly that + they do provide such support for the Derived Work. + + d. You distribute at least one of the following with the Derived Work: + + 1. A complete, unmodified copy of the Work; + if your distribution of a modified component is made by + offering access to copy the modified component from a + designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy + the Work from the same or some similar place meets this + condition, even though third parties are not compelled to + copy the Work along with the modified component; + + 2. Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete, + unmodified copy of the Work. + +7. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may +distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work, as long as +the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the Compiled +Work, and as long as the conditions of Clause 6, above, are met with +regard to the Derived Work. + +8. The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not +apply to, the modification, by any method, of any component so that it +becomes identical to an updated version of that component of the Work as +it is distributed by the Current Maintainer under Clause 4, above. + +9. Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative +format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part) is +then produced by applying some process to that format, does not relax or +nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to the results of +applying that process. + +10. a. A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license + provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in + Clause 6 above, in regard to the Work, though it does not have + to honor the rest of the conditions in this license. + + b. If a Derived Work is distributed under a different license, that + Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part of + itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the + restrictions in Clause 6 above, concerning changes from the Work. + +11. This license places no restrictions on works that are unrelated to +the Work, nor does this license place any restrictions on aggregating +such works with the Work by any means. + +12. Nothing in this license is intended to, or may be used to, prevent +complete compliance by all parties with all applicable laws. + + +NO WARRANTY +=========== + +There is no warranty for the Work. Except when otherwise stated in +writing, the Copyright Holder provides the Work `as is', without +warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not +limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a +particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance +of the Work is with you. Should the Work prove defective, you assume +the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction. + +In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing +will The Copyright Holder, or any author named in the components of the +Work, or any other party who may distribute and/or modify the Work as +permitted above, be liable to you for damages, including any general, +special, incidental or consequential damages arising out of any use of +the Work or out of inability to use the Work (including, but not limited +to, loss of data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by +anyone as a result of any failure of the Work to operate with any other +programs), even if the Copyright Holder or said author or said other +party has been advised of the possibility of such damages. + + +MAINTENANCE OF THE WORK +======================= + +The Work has the status `author-maintained' if the Copyright Holder +explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice in +the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright Holder +or simply that it is `author-maintained'. + +The Work has the status `maintained' if there is a Current Maintainer +who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to receive error +reports for the Work (for example, by supplying a valid e-mail +address). It is not required for the Current Maintainer to acknowledge +or act upon these error reports. + +The Work changes from status `maintained' to `unmaintained' if there +is no Current Maintainer, or the person stated to be Current +Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means +of communication for a period of six months, and there are no other +significant signs of active maintenance. + +You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with +any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role. + +If the Work is unmaintained, you can become the Current Maintainer of +the Work through the following steps: + + 1. Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer (and + the Copyright Holder, if the two differ) through the means of + an Internet or similar search. + + 2. If this search is successful, then enquire whether the Work + is still maintained. + + a. If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer + to update their communication data within one month. + + b. If the search is unsuccessful or no action to resume active + maintenance is taken by the Current Maintainer, then announce + within the pertinent community your intention to take over + maintenance. (If the Work is a LaTeX work, this could be + done, for example, by posting to comp.text.tex.) + + 3a. If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass + maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect + immediately upon announcement. + + b. If the Current Maintainer is not reachable and the Copyright + Holder agrees that maintenance of the Work be passed to you, + then this takes effect immediately upon announcement. + + 4. If you make an `intention announcement' as described in 2b. above + and after three months your intention is challenged neither by + the Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other + people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as + to name you as the (new) Current Maintainer. + + 5. If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes + reachable once more within three months of a change completed + under the terms of 3b) or 4), then that Current Maintainer must + become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided + they then update their communication data within one month. + +A change in the Current Maintainer does not, of itself, alter the fact +that the Work is distributed under the LPPL license. + +If you become the Current Maintainer of the Work, you should +immediately provide, within the Work, a prominent and unambiguous +statement of your status as Current Maintainer. You should also +announce your new status to the same pertinent community as +in 2b) above. + + +WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE +====================================================== + +This section contains important instructions, examples, and +recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their +works under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in +this section. + +Choosing This License or Another License +---------------------------------------- + +If for any part of your work you want or need to use *distribution* +conditions that differ significantly from those in this license, then +do not refer to this license anywhere in your work but, instead, +distribute your work under a different license. You may use the text +of this license as a model for your own license, but your license +should not refer to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that +your work is distributed under the LPPL. + +The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains +the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains, +for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public +License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your work is +unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be +relevant, and authors intending to distribute their works under any +license are encouraged to read it. + +A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution +----------------------------------------------------- + +It is wise never to modify a component of the Work, even for your own +personal use, without also meeting the above conditions for +distributing the modified component. While you might intend that such +modifications will never be distributed, often this will happen by +accident -- you may forget that you have modified that component; or +it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified +version that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions +of this license in ways that could have legal implications and, worse, +cause problems for the community. It is therefore usually in your +best interest to keep your copy of the Work identical with the public +one. Many works provide ways to control the behavior of that work +without altering any of its licensed components. + +How to Use This License +----------------------- + +To use this license, place in each of the components of your work both +an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year the work +was authored and/or last substantially modified. Include also a +statement that the distribution and/or modification of that +component is constrained by the conditions in this license. + +Here is an example of such a notice and statement: + + %% pig.dtx + %% Copyright 2005 M. Y. Name + % + % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the + % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3 + % of this license or (at your option) any later version. + % The latest version of this license is in + % https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt + % and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX + % version 2005/12/01 or later. + % + % This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'. + % + % The Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name. + % + % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins + % and the derived file pig.sty. + +Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions +given in this license document would apply, with the `Work' referring +to the three files `pig.dtx', `pig.ins', and `pig.sty' (the last being +generated from `pig.dtx' using `pig.ins'), the `Base Interpreter' +referring to any `LaTeX-Format', and both `Copyright Holder' and +`Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'. + +If you do not want the Maintenance section of LPPL to apply to your +Work, change `maintained' above into `author-maintained'. +However, we recommend that you use `maintained', as the Maintenance +section was added in order to ensure that your Work remains useful to +the community even when you can no longer maintain and support it +yourself. + +Derived Works That Are Not Replacements +--------------------------------------- + +Several clauses of the LPPL specify means to provide reliability and +stability for the user community. They therefore concern themselves +with the case that a Derived Work is intended to be used as a +(compatible or incompatible) replacement of the original Work. If +this is not the case (e.g., if a few lines of code are reused for a +completely different task), then clauses 6b and 6d shall not apply. + + +Important Recommendations +------------------------- + + Defining What Constitutes the Work + + The LPPL requires that distributions of the Work contain all the + files of the Work. It is therefore important that you provide a + way for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work. + This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the + files of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by + using a line such as: + + % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. + + in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be + impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you + to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be + entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise + the Work. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..85bb4aec908 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltluatex.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4b8a3bcbed2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d989ff8c424 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltnews.tex @@ -0,0 +1,276 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 2006, 2009, 2011, 2014 Heiko Oberdiek +% Copyright 2014-2018 The LaTeX3 Project +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% 2006/06/02 v1.0: First version. +% 2009/09/25 v1.1: \usepackage disabled. +% 2011/07/01 v1.2: Fixes. +% 2014/02/30 v1.3: +% * Update for LaTeX 2014/05/01. +% * Fix for anchor positions of issue titles. +% 2014/05/15 v1.4: +% * Updates for ltnews21.tex. +% 2014/11/14 v1.4a: +% * LaTeX Project version +% 2015/02/16 v1.4b: +% * Fix TOC issue +% \fi + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} +\ProvidesFile{ltnews.tex}% + [2015/02/16 v1.4b Master file for ltnews*.tex (LaTeX Project)] +\providecommand*{\lastissue}{30} +\InputIfFileExists{ltnews-lastissue.cfg}{}{} + + +\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined +\let\pdfoutput\outputmode +\protected\def\pdfinfo{\pdfextension info } +\fi + +\RequirePackage{ifpdf} +\ifpdf + % overwrite nasty stuff of ltnews.cfg + % (use of hyperref for this would also support other drivers) + \pdfinfo{% + /Title(LaTeX News)% + /Subject(Issues 1--\lastissue)% + /Author(The LaTeX Project)% + /Creator(LaTeX)% + } + \newtoks\pdfinfo +\else + \AtBeginDocument{% + \hypersetup{% + pdftitle={LaTeX News},% + pdfsubject={Issues 1\textendash\lastissue},% + pdfauthor={The LaTeX Project},% + pdfcreator={LaTeX}% + }% + }% +\fi + +\RequirePackage{lmodern} +\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc} +\RequirePackage{hologo} +\RequirePackage{graphicx} + + +\documentclass{ltnews} + +\RequirePackage{url,csquotes} + +\expandafter +\DeclareRobustCommand\expandafter*\expandafter\small\expandafter{\small} + +\RequirePackage{hyperref} +\hypersetup{colorlinks} +\RequirePackage{bookmark} + +\makeatletter + +\newcounter{issue} +\renewcommand*{\theissue}{% + \ifnum\value{issue}<10 0\fi + \number\value{issue}% +} + +\newcommand*{\MonthJanuary}{01} +\newcommand*{\MonthFebruary}{02} +\newcommand*{\MonthMarch}{03} +\newcommand*{\MonthApril}{04} +\newcommand*{\MonthMay}{05} +\newcommand*{\MonthJune}{06} +\newcommand*{\MonthJuly}{07} +\newcommand*{\MonthAugust}{08} +\newcommand*{\MonthSeptember}{09} +\newcommand*{\MonthOctober}{10} +\newcommand*{\MonthNovember}{11} +\newcommand*{\MonthDecember}{12} +\newcommand*{\printissue}{% + Issue % + \texorpdfstring{\number\value{issue}}{\theissue}, % + \texorpdfstring{\@month\space\@year}{\@year/\@nameuse{Month\@month}}% +} +\let\l@part\l@section +\let\l@section\l@subsection +\let\l@subsection\l@subsubsection +\let\l@subsubsection\l@paragraph +\let\l@paragraph\l@subparagraph + +\newcommand*{\makefirsttitle}{% + \twocolumn[{% + \parbox[t][4\baselineskip]{\textwidth}{% + \@titlefont\@title, Issues 1--\lastissue + }% + }]% +} + +% table of contents with underlined links +\iffalse % disable if option colorlinks is used +\@ifpackagelater{hyperref}{2006/06/01}{% + \newcommand*{\saved@tableofcontents}{}% + \let\saved@tableofcontents\tableofcontents + \renewcommand*{\tableofcontents}{% + \begingroup + \hypersetup{pdfborderstyle={/S/U/W 1}}% + \saved@tableofcontents + \endgroup + }% +}{} +\fi + +% -- provide command introduced in new release +% so this typesets with an old format +\DeclareTextCommandDefault\textcommabelow[1] + {\hmode@bgroup\ooalign{\null#1\crcr\hidewidth\raise-.31ex + \hbox{\check@mathfonts\fontsize\ssf@size\z@ + \math@fontsfalse\selectfont,}\hidewidth}\egroup} +\DeclareTextCommandDefault\textcommaabove[1]{% + \hmode@bgroup + \ooalign{% + \hidewidth + \raise.7ex\hbox{% + \check@mathfonts\fontsize\ssf@size\z@\math@fontsfalse\selectfont`% + }% + \hidewidth\crcr + \null#1\crcr + }% + \egroup + } + +\makeatother + +\begin{document} + +%%% Title and Table of Contents + +\makefirsttitle +\pdfbookmark[0]{\contentsname}{toc} +\tableofcontents +\clearpage + +%%% Issues + +\begingroup + \makeatletter + \renewcommand*{\usepackage}[2][]{% + \begingroup + \def\x{#1|#2}% + \def\y{T1|fontenc}% + \ifx\x\y + \else + \def\y{|lmodern,url}% + \ifx\x\y + \else + \def\y{|lmodern,url,hologo}% + \ifx\x\y + \else + \def\y{|csquotes}% + \ifx\x\y + \else + \def\y{|graphicx}% + \ifx\x\y + \else + \@latex@error{ltnews.tex: \string\usepackage[#1]{#2} found}\@ehc + \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi + \fi + \endgroup + }% + \renewcommand*{\documentclass}[2][]{% + \setcounter{footnote}{0}% + \gobbleopt + }% + \newcommand*{\gobbleopt}[1][]{}% + \let\org@twocolumn\twocolumn + \renewenvironment{document}{% + \clearpage + \ifnum\@issue=20 % + \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{5}}% + \addtocontents{toc}{% + \protect\makeatletter + }% + \addtocontents{toc}{% + \let\protect\saved@l@paragraph\protect\l@paragraph + }% + \addtocontents{toc}{% + \let\protect\l@paragraph\protect\l@subsection + }% + \fi + \ifnum\@issue=\lastissue\space + \addtocontents{toc}{% + \let\protect\l@paragraph\protect\saved@l@paragraph + }% + \def\toclevel@subsection{1}% + \def\toclevel@subsubsection{2}% + \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{4}}% + \renewcommand*{\tableofcontents}{% + \section*{\contentsname}% + \@starttoc{toc\lastissue}% + }% + \let\saved@addtocontents\addtocontents + \renewcommand*{\addtocontents}[2]{% + \saved@addtocontents{##1}{##2}% + \def\temp@toc{toc}% + \def\temp@param{##1}% + \ifx\temp@toc\temp@param + \saved@addtocontents{toc\lastissue}{##2}% + \fi + }% + \let\l@subsubsection\l@subsection + \let\l@subsection\l@section + \let\l@section\l@part + \let\l@part\@gobbletwo + \fi + \def\twocolumn[{% + \let\twocolumn\org@twocolumn + \org@twocolumn[% + {% because of optional argument of \twocolumn + \pdfbookmark[0]{\printissue}{issue\theissue}% + }% + \begingroup + \let\WriteBookmarks\relax + \@firstofone{% inside opt. arg. of \twocolumn: protect "]" + \renewcommand*{\Hy@writebookmark}[5]{}% + }% + \phantomsection + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\printissue}% + \endgroup + }% + }{% + \clearpage + }% + \makeatother + \loop + \ifnum\value{issue}<\lastissue + \stepcounter{issue}% + \input{ltnews\theissue}% + \repeat + \stepcounter{issue}% + \makeatletter + \IfFileExists{ltnews\theissue}{% + \@latex@error{\jobname.tex is out of date,\MessageBreak + there is `ltnews\theissue.tex'% + }\@ehc + }{}% + \makeatother +\endgroup + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2f80af97475 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e0aabafba49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltx3info.tex @@ -0,0 +1,474 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +\documentclass[a4paper]{article} + +% Commands and environments: + +\newcommand{\eg}{e.g.~} +\newcommand{\ie}{i.e.~} + + +\newenvironment{citations}{% + \list{}{% + \renewcommand{\makelabel}[1]{\normalfont\itshape ##1}% + }% +}{% + \endlist +} + +% Some logos: + +\newcommand{\NFSS}{NFSS} + +\newcommand{\LaTeXNews}{\LaTeX~News} + +\newcommand{\AW}{Addison Wesley} + +\newcommand{\SGML}{{\sc SGML}} +\newcommand{\DSSSL}{{\sc DSSSL}} +\newcommand{\HTML}{{\sc HTML}} +\newcommand{\XML}{{\sc XML}} +\newcommand{\PDF}{{\sc PDF}} + +\newcommand{\PS}{{\sc Post\-Script}} + +\newcommand{\AmSTeX}{$\mathcal A$\lower.4ex\hbox{$\!\mathcal + M\!$}$\mathcal S$-\TeX} +\newcommand{\AmSLaTeX}{$\mathcal A$\lower.4ex\hbox{$\!\mathcal + M\!$}$\mathcal S$-\LaTeX} +\newcommand{\MF}{{\sc Meta\-font}} + +% sections + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-2} + +% Front matter: + +\title{\Large The \LaTeX3 Project} + +\author{\copyright 1995--1999 \ +Frank Mittelbach and +Chris Rowley} + +\date{12 January 1999} + +\begin{document} + +\thispagestyle{empty} + +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} + This article describes the motivation, achievements and future of + the \LaTeX3 Project, which was established to produce a new version + of \LaTeX{}, the widely-used and highly-acclaimed document + preparation system. It also describes how you can help us to + achieve our aims.\\[2pt] + \textbf{For Archive maintainers, Authors, Publishers and + Distributors:}\\ + The project team request that, whenever possible, you include this + article in any of the following: + \begin{itemize} + \item Books about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}. + \item Instructions for authors on using \LaTeX{}. + \item The printed documentation of CD-ROM collections that contain + \LaTeX. + \item On-line collections that include a significant proportion of + documents encoded in \LaTeX. +\end{itemize} +\end{abstract} + +\section{Outline} + +The purposes of the \LaTeX3 system can be summarized thus: it will +greatly increase the range of documents which can be processed; and it +will provide a flexible interface for typographic designers to easily +specify the formatting of a class of documents. + +The \LaTeX3 Project Team is a small group of volunteers whose aim is +to produce this major new document processing system based on the +principles pioneered by Leslie Lamport in the current \LaTeX. + +The major visible work of the team before 1997 was the development of +the current \emph{standard} version of \LaTeX{}. This was first +released in 1994 and has since then been actively maintained and +enhanced by extensions to that core system. They will continue to +develop and maintain this system, releasing updated versions every six +months and recording these activities in the \LaTeX{} bugs database +(see below). + +Although \LaTeX{} may be distributed freely, the production and +maintenance of the system does require expenditure of reasonably large +sums of money. The \LaTeX3 Project Fund has therefore been set up to +channel money into this work. We know that some users are +aware of this fund as they have already contributed to it---many +thanks to all of them! If you want to know more about how you can +help the project, see Page \pageref{fund}---and thanks in advance for +your generosity in the future. + + +\section{Background} + +With \TeX{}, Knuth designed a formatting system that is able to +produce a large range of documents typeset to extremely high quality +standards. For various reasons (\eg quality, portability, stability +and availability) \TeX{} spread very rapidly and can nowadays be best +described as a world-wide de facto standard for high quality +typesetting. Its use is particularly common in specialized areas, such +as technical documents of various kinds, and for multi-lingual +requirements. + +The \TeX{} system is fully programmable. This allows the development +of high-level user interfaces whose input is processed by \TeX{}'s +interpreter to produce low-level typesetting instructions; these are +input to \TeX{}'s typesetting engine which outputs the format of each +page in a device-independent page-description language. The \LaTeX{} +system is such an interface; it was designed to support the needs of +long documents such as textbooks and manuals. It separates content and +form as much as possible by providing the user with a generic (\ie +logical rather than visual) mark-up interface; this is combined with +style sheets which specify the formatting. + +Recent years have shown that the concepts and approach of \LaTeX{} are +now widely accepted. Indeed, \LaTeX{} has become the standard method +of communicating and publishing documents in many academic +disciplines. This has led to many publishers accepting \LaTeX{} +source for articles and books; and the American Mathematical Society +now provides a \LaTeX{} package making the features of \AmSTeX{} +available to all users of \LaTeX{}. Its use has also spread into many +other commercial and industrial environments, where the technical +qualities of \TeX{} together with the concepts of \LaTeX{} are +considered a powerful combination of great importance to such areas as +corporate documentation and publishing. This has also extended to +on-line publishing using, for example, \PDF{} output incorporating +hypertext and other active areas. + +With the spreading use of \SGML{}-compliant systems (\eg Web-based +publishing using \HTML{} or \XML{}) \TeX{} again is a common choice as +the formatting engine for high quality typeset output: a widely used +such system is {\em The Publisher\/} from ArborText, whilst a more +recent development is the object-oriented document editor Grif. The +latter is used for document processing in a wide range of industrial +applications; it has also been adopted by the Euromath consortium as +the basis of their mathematician's workbench, one of the most advanced +of the emerging project-oriented user environments. Typeset output +from \SGML{}-coded documents in these systems is obtained by +translation into \LaTeX{}, which will therefore soon also be a natural +choice for the output of \DSSSL-compliant systems. + +Because a typical \SGML{} Document Type Definition (DTD) uses concepts +similar to those of \LaTeX{}, the formatting is often implemented by +simply mapping document elements to \LaTeX{} constructs rather than +directly to `raw \TeX'. +This enables the +sophisticated analytical techniques built into the \LaTeX{} +software to be exploited; and it avoids the need to program in \TeX{}. + +\section{Motivation} + +This increase in the range of applications of \LaTeX{} has highlighted +certain limitations of the current system, both for authors of +documents and for designers of formatting styles. + +In addition to the need to extend the variety of classes of document +which can be processed by \LaTeX{}, substantial enhancements are +necessary in, at least, the following areas: + \begin{itemize} + \item + the command syntax (attributes, short references, etc); + \item + the layout specification interface (style design); + \item + the level of robustness (error recovery, omitted tags); + \item + the extendibility (package interface); + \item + the layout specification of tabular material; + \item + the specification and inclusion of graphical material; + \item + the positioning of floating material, and other aspects of page + layout; + \item + the requirements of hypertext systems. + \end{itemize} + + Further analysis of these deficiencies has shown that some of the + problems are to be found in \LaTeX{}'s internal concepts and design. + This project to produce a new version therefore involves thorough + research into the challenges posed by new applications and by the use + of \LaTeX{} as a formatter for a wide range of documents, \eg \SGML{} + documents; on-line \PDF{} documents with hypertext links. + + This will result in a major re-implementation of large parts of the + system. Some of the results of such rethinking of the fundamentals + are already available in Standard \LaTeX{}, notably in the following + areas: + +\begin{itemize} +\item Font declaration and selection; +\item Font and glyph handling within mathematical formulas; +\item Handling multiple font glyph encodings within a document; +\item Allowing multiple input character encodings within a document; +\item A uniform interface for graphics inclusion; +\item Support for coloured text; +\item Building and interfacing new classes and extension packages. +\end{itemize} + + +\section{Description} + +The strengths of the present version of \LaTeX{} are +as follows: + \begin{itemize} + \item excellent standard of typesetting for text, technical +formulas\\ +and tabular material; + \item separation of generic mark-up from visual formatting; + \item ease of use for authors; + \item portability of documents over a wide range of platforms; + \item adaptability to many languages; + \item widespread and free availability; + \item reliable support and maintenance by the \LaTeX3 project team. + \end{itemize} + These will be preserved and in many cases greatly enhanced by the new + version which is being developed to fulfill the following requirements. + \begin{itemize} + \item + It will provide a syntax that allows highly automated translation + from popular \SGML{} DTDs into \LaTeX{} document classes (these + will be provided as standard with the new version). + + The syntax of the new \LaTeX{} user-interface will, for example, + support the \SGML{} concepts of `entity', `attribute' and `short + reference' in such a way that these can be directly linked to the + corresponding \SGML{} features. + + \item + It will support hypertext links and other features required for + on-line structured documents using, for example, \HTML{} and \XML{}. + +\item + It will provide a straightforward style-designer interface to support + both the specification of a wide variety of typographic requirements + and the linking of entities in the generic mark-up of a document to + the desired formatting. These two parts of the design process will + be clearly separated so that it is possible to specify different + layouts for the same DTD. + + The language and syntax of this interface will be as natural as + possible for a typographic designer. As a result, this language + could easily be interfaced to a visually-oriented, menu-driven + specification system. + + This interface will also support \DSSSL{} specifications and + style-sheet concepts such as those used with \HTML{} and \XML{}. + + \item + It will provide an enhanced user-interface that allows expression of + the typesetting requirements from a large range of subject areas. Some + examples are listed here. + + \begin{itemize} + \item The requirements of technical documentation (\eg offset layout,\\ + change bars, etc). + \item The requirements of academic publishing in the humanities\\ + (critical text editions, etc). + \item The requirements of structural formulas in chemistry. + \item Advanced use of the mathematical-typesetting features of \TeX{}. + \item The integration of graphical features, such as shading, + within text. + \item the integration of hypertext and other links in on-line + documents using systems such as \HTML{}, \XML{} and \PDF{}. + + \end{itemize} + + Special care will be taken to ensure that this interface is + extensible: this will be achieved by use of modular designs. + + + \item + It will provide a more robust author-interface. For example, + artificial restrictions on the nesting of commands will be removed. + Error handling will be improved by adding + a more effective, interactive help system. + + \item + It will provide access to arbitrary fonts from any family (such as + the \PS{} and TrueType fonts) including a wide range of fonts for + multi-lingual documents and the specialist glyphs required by + documents in various technical and academic areas. + + \item + The new interfaces will be documented in detail and the + system will provide extensive catalogues of examples, carefully + designed to make the learning time for new users (both designers and + authors) as short as possible. + + \item + The code itself will be thoroughly documented and it will be + designed on modular principles. Thus the system will be easy to + maintain and to enhance. +\end{itemize} + +The resulting new \LaTeX{} will, like the present version, be usable +with any standard \TeX{} system (or whatever replaces it) and so will +be freely available on a wide range of platforms. + + +\section{\LaTeX{} documentation} + +\begingroup +\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} + +A complete description of Standard \LaTeX{} can be found in: +\begin{citations} +\item[\LaTeX: A Document Preparation System] + Leslie Lamport,\\ \AW, 2nd ed, 1994. +\item[The \LaTeX{} Companion] + Mittelbach, Goossens with Braams, Carlisle and Rowley,\\ \AW, 2nd ed, 2004. +\end{citations} + +A recent addition to the publications closely associated with the +project is: +\begin{citations} +\item[The \LaTeX{} Graphics Companion] + Goossens, Mittelbach and Rahtz,\\ \AW, 1997. +\end{citations} + +This \LaTeX{} distribution comes with documentation on several aspects +of of the system. The newer features of the system are described in +the following documents: +\begin{citations} +\item[\LaTeXe{} for authors] + describes the new features of \LaTeX{} documents, + in the file \texttt{usrguide.tex}; +\item[\LaTeXe{} for class and package writers] + describes how to produce \LaTeX{} classes and packages, + in the file \texttt{clsguide.tex}; +\item[\LaTeXe{} font selection] + describes the new features of \LaTeX{} fonts for + class and package writers, + in the file \texttt{fntguide.tex}. +\end{citations} + +For further contacts and sources of information on \TeX{} and +\LaTeX{}, see the addresses on Page~\pageref{contacts}. + +\endgroup +\pagebreak + + +\section{The \LaTeX3 Project Fund} +\label{fund} + +Although \LaTeX{} may be distributed freely, the production and +maintenance of the system does require expenditure of reasonably large +sums of money. There are many necessities that need substantial +financing: examples are new or enhanced computing equipment and travel +to team meetings (the volunteers come from many different countries, +so getting together occasionally is a non-trivial exercise). + +This is why we are appealing to you for contributions to the fund. +Any sum will be much appreciated; the amount need not be large as +small contributions add up to very useful amounts. Contributions of +suitable equipment and software will also be of great value. This +appeal is both to you as an individual author and to you as a member +of a group or as an employee: please encourage your department or your +employer to contribute towards sustaining our work. + +We should like to see funded projects that make considerable use of +\LaTeX{} (\eg conferences and research teams who use it to publish +their work, and electronic research archives using it) include +contributions to this fund in their budgets. %% e-print systems + +We are also asking commercial organisations to assess the benefits +they gain from using, or distributing, a well-supported \LaTeX{} and +to make appropriate contributions to the fund in order that we can +continue to maintain and improve the product. If you work for, or do +business with, such an organisation, please bring to the attention of +the relevant people the existence and needs of the project. + +In particular, we ask that all the large number of organisations and +businesses that distribute \LaTeX{}, within other software or as part +of a CD-ROM collection, should consider pricing all products containing +\LaTeX{} at a level that enables them to make regular donations to the +fund from the profit on these items. We also ask all authors and +publishers of books about \LaTeX{} to consider donating part of the +royalties to the fund. + +Contributions should be sent to one of the following addresses: +\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs} + \TeX{} Users Group, P.O. Box 2311, Portland, OR~97208-2311 USA\\ + Fax:~+1~503~223~3960 \ Email: \texttt{tug@tug.org} + + \noindent + UK TUG, 1 Eymore Close, Selly Oak, Birmingham B29~4LB UK\\ + Fax: +44 121 476 2159 \ Email: \texttt{uktug-enquiries@tex.ac.uk} +\end{quote} + +Cheques should be payable to the user group (TUG or UKTUG) and be +clearly marked as contributions to the \LaTeX3 fund. +Many thanks to all of you who have contributed in the past and thanks +in advance for your generosity in the future. + +\section{Contacts and information} +\label{contacts} + +In addition to the sources mentioned above, \LaTeX{} has its home page +on the World Wide Web at: +\begin{verbatim} + http://www.latex-project.org/ +\end{verbatim} +This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains +pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the +\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database. + +More general information, including contacts for local User Groups, +can be accessed via: +\begin{verbatim} + http://www.tug.org/ +\end{verbatim} + +The electronic home of anything \TeX-related is the Comprehensive +\TeX{} Archive Network (CTAN). This is a network of cooperating ftp +sites, with over a gigabyte of \TeX{} material: +\begin{verbatim} + ftp://cam.ctan.org/tex-archive/ + ftp://dante.ctan.org/tex-archive/ + ftp://tug.ctan.org/tex-archive/ +\end{verbatim} + +For more information, see the \LaTeX{} home page. + + +\end{document} + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..caff39f7545 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/ltxdoc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/makeindx.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/makeindx.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2b9c8061ec7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/makeindx.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manifest.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manifest.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ec747100572 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manifest.txt @@ -0,0 +1,225 @@ +% +% The following files form the LaTeX2e distribution of 2017-04-15 +% +% +% CONTENTS OF THE LaTeX DISTRIBUTION +% ================================== +% +% Documentation: +% -------------- +% +% README.txt -- The distribution guide. START BY READING THIS FILE +% manifest.txt -- This file. +% +% tex2.txt -- Extras for installing LaTeX on TeX2. +% +% texpert.txt -- Documentation for TeX experts. +% patches.txt -- Explains the patch mechanism. +% +% legal.txt -- Copyright notice; warranty; copying conditions. +% lppl.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (current version). +% lppl-1-0.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.0). +% lppl-1-1.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.1). +% lppl-1-2.txt -- The LaTeX Project Public License (version 1.2). +% lppl.tex -- The LaTeX Project Public License (current as .tex). +% +% bugs.txt -- How to submit a bug report for LaTeX. +% +% source2e.tex -- File to produce kernel documentation. +% changes.txt -- List of changes in reverse chronological order. +% +% sample2e.tex -- Sample LaTeX input file. +% small2e.tex -- Small sample LaTeX input file. +% +% clsguide.tex -- How to write class files. +% cfgguide.tex -- Guide to using `.cfg' files to configure LaTeX. +% cyrguide.tex -- Guide to using cyrillic languages in LaTeX. +% encguide.tex -- Guide to font encodings. +% fntguide.tex -- Guide to font selection. +% modguide.tex -- Guide to modifying and distributing LaTeX. +% usrguide.tex -- User guide for this release. +% +% ltnews01.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1994/06. +% ltnews02.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1994/12. +% ltnews03.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1995/06. +% ltnews04.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1995/12. +% ltnews05.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1996/06. +% ltnews06.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1996/12. +% ltnews07.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1997/06. +% ltnews08.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1997/12. +% ltnews09.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1998/06. +% ltnews10.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1998/12. +% ltnews11.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1999/06. +% ltnews12.tex -- What was new in the release dated 1999/12. +% ltnews13.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2000/06. +% ltnews14.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2001/06. +% ltnews15.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2003/12. +% ltnews16.tex -- What may happen in 2004 and beyond. +% ltnews17.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2005/12. +% ltnews18.tex -- (empty) +% ltnews19.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2009/09. +% ltnews20.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2011/06. +% ltnews21.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2014/05. +% ltnews22.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2015/01. +% ltnews23.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2015/10. +% ltnews24.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2016/02. +% ltnews25.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2016/03. +% ltnews26.tex -- What was new in the release dated 2017/01. + +% +% ltx3info.tex -- Information about the LaTeX3 project. +% +% manual.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Manual. +% tlc2.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Companion, second edition. +% lb2.err -- Errata for the LaTeX-Begleiter, 2te erw. Auflage (German). +% lgc2.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Graphics Companion, second edition. +% webcomp.err -- Errata for the LaTeX Web Companion. +% +% +% Kernel files: +% ------------- +% +% cmfonts.fdd -- Font definitions for Computer modern fonts. +% fontdef.dtx -- Code for font definitions. +% lthyphen.dtx -- Hyphenation support. +% ltboxes.dtx -- Code for making boxes. +% ltclass.dtx -- Class and option handling. +% ltcounts.dtx -- Counters. +% ltpageno.dtx -- Page numbering. +% ltxref.dtx -- Cross referencing. +% ltlength.dtx -- Lengths. +% ltdirchk.dtx -- Support for search in current directory. +% ltfiles.dtx -- File handling. +% ltfinal.dtx -- Code for debugging and final initialisations. +% ltfloat.dtx -- Float handling. +% ltfntcmd.dtx -- Various font switching commands. +% ltfssbas.dtx -- NFSS Base macros +% ltfsstrc.dtx -- NFSS Tracing (and tracefnt.sty) +% ltfssdcl.dtx -- NFSS Declarative interface +% ltfssini.dtx -- NFSS Initialisation +% ltfsscmp.dtx -- NFSS1 compatibility +% ltidxglo.dtx -- Index and glossary. +% ltbibl.dtx -- Bibliography commands. +% ltalloc.dtx -- Allocation of counters and others. +% ltdefns.dtx -- Initial definitions. +% ltcntrl.dtx -- Program control macros. +% lterror.dtx -- Error handling. +% ltpar.dtx -- Paragraphs. +% ltspace.dtx -- Spacing, line and page breaking. +% ltlogos.dtx -- Logos. +% ltlists.dtx -- Code for lists and related environments. +% ltmath.dtx -- Code for math. +% ltmiscen.dtx -- Code for miscellaneous environments. +% ltoutenc.dtx -- Code for output encoding commands. +% ltoutput.dtx -- LaTeX page makeup (output routine). +% ltpictur.dtx -- The picture environment. +% ltpage.dtx -- Page styles and related commands. +% ltplain.dtx -- Things borrowed from the plain format. +% lttab.dtx -- The tabbing, tabular and array environments. +% ltthm.dtx -- The theorem-like environments. +% ltsect.dtx -- Sectioning and title commands. +% ltvers.dtx -- Version identification code. +% preload.dtx -- Code for preloading fonts. +% tulm.fdd -- Font definitions for TU latin modern fonts. +% +% +% Standard Classes: +% ----------------- +% +% classes.dtx -- Standard document classes article/book/report. +% letter.dtx -- Standard document class letter. +% proc.dtx -- Proc class: modifies the article class. +% slides.dtx -- Slides class, etc based on SLiTeX. +% slifonts.fdd -- Font declarations for slides class. +% +% +% LaTeX2.09 compatibility: +% ------------------------ +% +% latex209.dtx -- Implements LaTeX 2.09 compatibility mode. +% +% +% Standard packages: +% ------------------ +% +% alltt.dtx -- Implements the alltt environment. +% fix-cm.dtx -- Implements modified font choices for cm fonts. +% latexrelease.dtx -- Controls fixes to LaTeX. +% graphpap.dtx -- Implements programming \graphpaper command.. +% inputenc.dtx -- Implements eight-bit input. +% utf8ienc.dtx -- Supplement for inputenc to implement UTF8 encoding. +% ifthen.dtx -- Implements programming control structures. +% makeindx.dtx -- Implements support for generating an index. +% +% +% Font selection files: +% --------------------- +% +% exscale.dtx -- Scaling the math extension font. +% latexsym.dtx -- Definitions for LaTeX symbol fonts. +% newlfont.dtx -- New semantics of font switching commands. +% nfssfont.dtx -- program for testing a font and generating glyph tables. +% oldlfont.dtx -- Old semantics of font switching commands. +% syntonly.dtx -- Syntonly package for running in syntax check mode. +% +% +% The doc package: +% ---------------- +% +% doc.dtx -- Package for self documenting code. +% docstrip.dtx -- Module for removing comments. +% ltxdoc.dtx -- Class file for printing documentation. +% +% +% Installation scripts for the various parts: +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% unpack.ins -- LaTeX main installation script (see below). +% +% +% Installation scripts used by unpack.ins: +% ------------------------------------------ +% +% alltt.ins -- Installation script for the alltt package. +% classes.ins -- Installation script for standard classes. +% cmfonts.ins -- Installation script for OT* Computer Modern fonts. +% newdc.ins -- Installation script for T* Computer Modern fonts. +% docstrip.ins -- Installation script for docstrip. +% exscale.ins -- Installation script for scaling the cmex font. +% fixltx2e.ins -- Installation script for the fixltx2e package. +% format.ins -- Installation script for latex.ltx. +% graphpap.ins -- Installation script for graphpap.dtx. +% inputenc.ins -- Installation script for inputenc.dtx. +% ifthen.ins -- Installation script for ifthen.dtx. +% latex209.ins -- Installation script for compatibility mode. +% latexsym.ins -- Installation script for latexsym.dtx. +% letter.ins -- Installation script for document class letter. +% ltoutenc.ins -- Installation script for output encoding files. +% makeindx.ins -- Installation script for makeindx.dtx. +% nfssfont.ins -- Installation script for nfssfont.dtx. +% proc.ins -- Installation script for the proc package. +% slides.ins -- Installation script for SLiTeX. +% syntonly.ins -- Installation script for the syntonly package. +% tulm.ins -- Installation script for TU Latin Modern fonts. +% +% Installation scripts to be used by themselves: +% ---------------------------------------------- +% +% cmextra.ins -- Installation script for additional CM fonts. +% ec.ins -- Installation script for T1 and TS1 EC fonts. +% olddc.ins -- Installation script for obsolete dc fonts (v1.1). +% +% +% Support files: +% -------------- +% +% ltxguide.cls -- Document class used by the guides. +% ltnews.cls -- Document class for `news' document. +% minimal.cls -- Minimal document class for debugging and testing. +% idx.tex -- Print out index entries in your document. +% lablst.tex -- Generate list of labels used in a document. +% testpage.tex -- Test file for checking the accuracy of a printer. +% ltxcheck.tex -- Test file for checking the LaTeX installation. +% +% +% ====================================================================== diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e78b18de9f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.err @@ -0,0 +1,365 @@ +\documentclass{article} + +\newcommand{\reportedby}[2]{{\small [First reported by #1 on \mbox{#2}.]}} +\newcommand{\erratum}[1]{\subsubsection*{#1}} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% MODIFICATION DATE % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% % +% Defines \moddate to expand to modification date such as % +% % +% 5 Aug 1991 % +% % +% and \prdate to print it in a large box. Assumes editor % +% updates modification date in standard SRC Gnu Emacs style. % +% (should work for any user name). % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\def\ypmd{% % +% % +% % + Last modified on Sat 13 October 2018 at 12:56:41 PST by lamport % + endypmd} % +% % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newcommand{\moddate}{\expandafter\xpmd\ypmd} % +\def\xpmd Last modified % +on #1 #2 #3 #4 at #5:#6:#7 #8 by #9 endypmd{#2 #3 #4} % +\newcommand{\prdate}{\noindent\fbox{\Large\moddate}} % +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +\newcommand{\mytt}{\normalfont\ttfamily} +\newcommand{\cindex}{\index} +\newcommand\bs{\char '134 } % A backslash character for \tt font + +\title{Errata to the Second Edition of the \LaTeX\ Manual} +\author{Leslie Lamport} +\date{\moddate} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\noindent These are all the errors and omissions to the manual, +\LaTeX: {\em A Document Preparation System}, second edition, published +by Addison-Wesley, reported as of \moddate. Positions in the book are +indicated by page and line number, where the top line of a page is +number 1 and the bottom line is number $-1$. A running head and a +page number are not considered to be lines, but all other lines are. +Please report any additional errors to The \LaTeX\ Project at +\texttt{www.latex-project.org/bugs/}\,. + + +\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the First Printing} + +\erratum{page 25, example of \texttt{verse} environment} +Replace \verb|{\em all\/}| by \verb|\emph{all}|. + \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 28, first paragraph} +Not an error, but it would be +helpful to add the following sentence to the end of that paragraph: + ``(If a declaration has arguments, they become additional +arguments of the corresponding environment's \verb|\begin| command.)'' + + +\erratum{page 33, line 10} +Add \verb|\]| to the list of fragile commands. + \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 43, table 3.5} +Add an entry for \verb|\notin| ($\notin$). + \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 72, two examples} +Change \verb|{\em ...}| to \verb|\emph{...}| + \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 101} +This is not an error, but some readers will find it helpful if, in the +descriptions of \verb|\setlength| and \verb|\addtolength|, +\verb|\gnat| were replaced by \verb|\parskip|. + \reportedby{Ellen Gilkerson}{9 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 108, lines 7 and 10} +This is not an error, but it might be easier to understand +the example if \verb|\len| were replaced by something like \verb|\saved|. + \reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{29 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 139, lines $-8$ and $-9$} + +The funny break between these two lines should be eliminated. +\reportedby{Malcolm Clark}{9 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 177, line $-12$} + +The \verb|twocolumn| option cannot be used with the \verb|letters| +class. + +\erratum{page 197, lines 7 and 9} + +The \verb|figure*| environment is ended by \verb|\end{figure*}|, and +the \verb|table*| environment is ended by \verb|\end{table*}|. +\reportedby{Malcolm Clark}{9 Aug 1994} + +\erratum{page 228} + +Add a note that, before running a LaTeX2.09 file in compatibility mode +in LaTeX2e, you should delete the old versions of the auxiliary files. + +\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the Second Printing} + +\erratum{page xv, line 10} +``Chris Rowley'' should come after ``Sebastian Rahtz''. +\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{24 April 1995} + + + +\erratum{page 29, line $-10$} +Change ``error indicator line'' to ``error locator line''. +\reportedby{Xavier Perramon}{2 Jan 1995} + +\erratum{page 37, lines 26--28} +Change the two sentences ``None of these \ldots formula.'' to: +\begin{quote} +These text-producing commands can be used in math mode to put ordinary +text in a formula. (When the command is used in math mode, its +argument is processed in LR mode.) The declarations cannot be used in +math mode. Section 3.3.8 explains how to change the type style of a +formula's math-mode symbols. +\end{quote} +\reportedby{Mike Piff}{7 Mar 1995} + +\erratum{page 39, line 6} +Replace ``any mode'' with ``paragraph and LR mode''. Also, +after line 8, add: +\begin{quote} +The commands \verb|\dag|, \verb|\ddag|, \verb|\S|, and \verb|\P| +can also be used in math mode. +\end{quote} + +\erratum{page 53, line 24} +Change ``are needed in the'' to ``are used in the'' +\reportedby{Mike Piff}{21 Oct 1994} + +\erratum{page 80, line 1} +The section heading should not be outdented. +\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{23 Jan 1995} + +\erratum{page 83, line $-8$} +Change ``\verb|\resettime|'' to ``\verb|\settime|''. + +\erratum{page 84, after line $11$} Add the following sentence: ``The +\hbox{\verb|\onlyslides|} and \hbox{\verb|\onlynotes|} commands may +not work right if a \texttt{slide}, \texttt{overlay}, or \texttt{note} +environment appears in the argument of any command.'' +\reportedby{Eike Ritter}{May 1996} + +\erratum{page 153, line 1} +Add ``or subentry'' after ``entry''. +\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{22 Feb 1995} + +\erratum{page 171} +Add the following before line $-4$: +\begin{description} +\item[\mytt \bs columnwidth] +Normal width + \cindex{columnwidth}% +of a column; +% \index{column!width}% + \index{width!of column}% +equals \verb|\textwidth| except for multiple-column styles. +Its value should not be changed with the length-setting commands. +\end{description} +Also, in line $-4$, change \verb|\textwidth| to \verb|\columnwidth|. +%\reportedby{Volker Kuhlmav}{20 Jan 1995} +\reportedby{Rosemary Bailey}{9 Sep 1994} + +\erratum{page 180, lines 15--19} +% +Replace these five lines (which begin ``These commands are overridden'') +with: +\begin{itemize} \item[] +To override a heading on a right-hand page (any page for one-sided +printing), put a \verb|\markright| after the sectioning command and in +its mandatory argument, and add an optional argument without the +\verb|markright|, as in +\begin{itemize} +\item[] + \verb|\chapter[Gnu Scents]{Gnu Scents\markright{|\textit{right\_head}\verb|}}|\\ + \verb|\markright{|\textit{right\_head}\verb|}| +\end{itemize} +To change the heading on a left-hand page, put a \verb|\markboth| +command immediately after the sectioning command. +\end{itemize} +\reportedby{Jerome Breitenbach}{14 Dec 1995} + +\erratum{page 182} +The dimensions +\verb|\pageheight| and \verb|\pagewidth| +should be \verb|\paperheight| and \verb|\paperwidth|, +respectively. (The index entries on page 260 should also be changed.) +\reportedby{Alan Jeffrey, on behalf of a user}{12 Sep 1995} +\erratum{page 192, line 19} +Change ``\emph{cmd}'' to ``\emph{def}''. +\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{9 Mar 1995} + + +\erratum{page 195, line 14} +Change ``numbered `within' it'' to ``numbered directly `within' it''. +\reportedby{Martin Schr\"{o}der}{5 Dec 1994} + +\erratum{page 197, line 14} +After ``\verb|\textwidth|'' add ``or \verb|\columnwidth|'' +\reportedby{Volker Kuhlmann}{22 Jan 1995} + +\erratum{page 226} + +After line 7, add +\begin{quote} +These declarations may not be used in math mode. +\end{quote} +Replace lines 16-19 (beginning ``None of these commands'') with +\begin{quote} +When these commands are used in math mode, the \emph{text} +argument is processed in LR mode. + +These commands and declarations are robust. Words typeset in +typewriter style are not hyphenated except where permitted by \verb|\-| +commands. +\end{quote} +\reportedby{Marc Lavine}{22 Aug 1995} + +\erratum{page 228} +To the section ``Type Styles and Sizes'', add the following sentence: +A few mathematical symbols now require the \texttt{latexsym} package---see +Tables 3.4--3.7. + +\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the Sixteenth Printing} + +\erratum{page 42, line 14} +Change ``through a symbol'' by ``through a relation symbol''. +\reportedby{Frank Mittelbach}{15 Nov 1996} + +\erratum{page 42, Table 3.4} +\verb|\land| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\wedge|, and +\verb|\lor| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\vee|. +\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{28 Oct 1998} + +\erratum{page 43, Table 3.7} +\verb|\lnot| should be listed as a synonym for \verb|\neg|. +\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{15 Oct 1998} + +\erratum{page 137} This is not an error, but it would be better to +change lines 23 and 24 to: +\begin{quote} +\LaTeX\ + \index{file!not found error}% + \index{file!nonexistent}% +is trying to read a file that apparently doesn't exist. If the missing +file has the extension \texttt{tex}, then \LaTeX\ is trying to + \index{input)@\verb+\input+!of nonexistent file}% + \index{include)@\verb+\include+!of nonexistent file}% +\verb|\input| or \verb|\include| it; if it +\end{quote} + +\erratum{page 171, line 19} +Change the description of \verb|\indent| to: +\begin{description} +\item[\mytt \bs indent] +Produces a +% \cindex{indent}% +% \index{paragraph!indentation}% +horizontal space whose width equals the width of the +paragraph indentation. It can be used to add a paragraph indentation +where one would otherwise be suppressed. (If it doesn't work, +try typing \verb|\indent\indent|.) Robust. +\end{description} +\reportedby{Chris Rowley}{15 Oct 1998} + +\erratum{page 179, line 19} +% +Change to: +\begin{quote} +page style for the \texttt{article} and \texttt{report} document classes. +\end{quote} +\reportedby{Stephen J. Alter}{17 Sep 1997} + +\erratum{page 195, line 28} +Replace ``\textit{num}$_1$ and \textit{num}$_1$ are numbers'' +with ``\textit{num}$_1$ and \textit{num}$_2$ are numbers''. +\reportedby{Magnus Lewis-Smith}{14 Jan 1999} + +\erratum{page 196, line $-5$} +Change \verb|\newboolean{|\emph{name}\verb|}| to +\verb|\newboolean{|\emph{nam}\verb|}|. +\reportedby{Christopher von B\"{u}low}{28 Aug 2000} + + +\erratum{page 198, line 14} +Change ``it will not be printed'' to ``it will usually not be printed''. + +\erratum{page 218, line $-14$} +Change ``\texttt{tabular}'' to ``\texttt{tabbing}''. +\reportedby{Carlos Pita}{27 Aug 2001} + +\erratum{foldout, column 3, line 3} +Replace \emph{style} with \emph{class}. \reportedby{Christopher von B\"{u}low}{28 Aug 2000} + +\subsection*{Errors Corrected in the Seventeenth Printing} + +\erratum{page 51, line 8} +Change ``The \verb|\,| command'' to ``The \verb|\,| and \verb*|\ | commands''. +\reportedby{Phillip J Shelton}{2 Jul 1999} + +\erratum{page 61, second example (middle of page)} +Remove the \verb|\mbox{}| following the \texttt{tabbing} environment. +\reportedby{Marcin Wolinski}{17 Sep 2003} + +\erratum{page 210, line 20} +Add a space after ``bibliography''. +\reportedby{Marcin Wolinski}{17 Sep 2003} + +\subsection*{Error Corrected in the Twenty-First Printing} +\erratum{page 198, line $-11$} +The sentence beginning ``The last three rules'' is hard to read. Better +would be: +\begin{quote} +\noindent The last three rules are suspended when a + \verb|\clearpage|,\linebreak + \verb|\cleardoublepage|, or + \verb|\end{document}| command occurs, +at which point all unprocessed figures and tables are allowed a +\hbox{\mytt p} option and printed. +\end{quote} +\reportedby{Paul Stanford}{9 Oct 2004} + +\subsection*{Error Corrected in the Twenty-Second Printing} + +\erratum{page 253, column 2, lines $-5$ and $-6$} + +The two index entries for \verb|\ldots| should be combined. + + +\reportedby{Christopher Dutchyn}{22 July 2005} + + +\subsection*{Uncorrected Errors} + +\erratum{page 206, line 17 (\texttt{\string\multicolumn} explanation)} + +Insert the following text right after ``\texttt{l}, and \texttt{r}.'' +\begin{quote} +If the part of the environment's \emph{cols} argument being replaced +immediately follows an \texttt{@} expression, then the \emph{item} +will be preceded by a normal intercolumn space unless the +\verb|\multicolumn| command's \emph{col} argument begins with an +\texttt{@} expression. In particular, beginning the \emph{col} +argument with \verb|@{}| will suppress that space. +\end{quote} +\reportedby{Ulrike Fischer, Frank Mittelbach}{23 Sep 2018} + +\end{document} + +%try +%try diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..24a4b96b1ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/manual.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4079173f4de --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..147fec78781 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/modguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,412 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: modguide.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[1995/11/28] + +\newcommand{\reasonsection}[1]{\subsubsection*{\it #1}} + +\newcommand{\nstex}{\textsf{NS-TeX}} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} + +\title{Modifying \LaTeX} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{12 December 1995} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\begin{abstract} + This document was produced in response to suggestions that the + modification and distribution conditions for the files constituting + the New Standard \LaTeX{} system should be similar to those implied + by Version~2 of the \textsc{GNU} General Public Licence, as + published by the Free Software Foundation. +\end{abstract} + +\section{Introduction} +\label{sec:intro} + +This article describes the principles underlying our policy on +distribution and modification of the files comprising the \LaTeX{} +system. It has been produced as a result of detailed discussions of +the issues involved in the support and maintenance of a widely +distributed document processing system used by diverse people for many +applications. These discussions have involved users, maintainers of +installations that support \LaTeX{} and various types of organisations +that distribute it. The discussions are continuing and we hope that +the ideas in this article will make a useful contribution to the +debate. + +Our aim is that \LaTeX{} should be a system which can be trusted by +users of all types to fulfill their needs. Such a system must be +stable and well-maintained. This implies that it must be reasonably +easy to maintain (otherwise it will simply not get maintained at +all). So here is a summary of our basic philosophy: +\begin{quote} + We believe that the freedom to rely on a widely-used standard for + document interchange and formatting is as important as the freedom to + experiment with the contents of files. + + We are therefore adopting a policy similar to that which Donald + Knuth applies to modifications of the underlying \TeX{} system: that + certain files, together with their names, are part of the system and + therefore the contents of these files should not be changed unless + the following conditions are met: + \begin{itemize} + \item they are clearly marked as being no longer part of the + standard system; + \item the name of the file is changed. + \end{itemize} +\end{quote} + + +\section{The system} +\label{sec:sys} + +In developing this philosophy, and the consequent limitations on how +modifications of the system should be carried out, we were heavily +influenced by the following facts concerning the current widespread +and wide-ranging uses of the \LaTeX{} system. +\begin{enumerate} +\item \LaTeX{} is not just a document processing system; + it also defines a language for document exchange. + +\item The standard document class files, and some other files, also + define a particular formatting of a document. + +\item The packages that we maintain define a particular document + interface and, in some cases, particular formatting of parts of a + document. + +\item The interfaces between different parts of the \LaTeX{} system + are very complex and it is therefore very difficult to check that a + change to one file does not affect the functionality of both that + file and also other parts of the system not obviously connected to + the file that has been changed. +\end{enumerate} + +This leads us to the general principle that: +\begin{quote} + with certain special exceptions, if you change the contents of a + file then the changed version should have a different file name. +\end{quote} + +We certainly do not wish to prevent people from experimenting with the +code in different ways and adapting it to their purposes. However, we +are concerned that any distribution of modifications to the code +should be very clearly identified as not being a part of the standard +distribution. The exact wording and form of the distribution +conditions is thus something that is flexible, but only within the +constraint of keeping \LaTeX{} as a standardised, reliable product for +the purposes described above: the exchange and formatting of +documents. + + +\section{Some examples} +\label{sec:expl} + +Here we elaborate the arguments that have led us to the above +conclusion. + + +\reasonsection{Separate development considered harmful!} +\label{sec:ja} + +In many fields, the use of \LaTeX{} as a language for communication +is just as important as its capacity for fine typesetting; this is a +very important consideration for a large population of authors, +journal editors, archivists, etc. + +Related to this issue of portability is the fact that the file names +are part of the end-user syntax. + +As a real example, the \LaTeX{} `tools' collection contains the +package `array.sty'. A new user-level feature was added to this file +at the end of 1994 and a document using this feature can contain the +line: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage{array}[1994/10/16] +\end{verbatim} + +By supplying the optional argument, the document author is indicating +that a version of the file \texttt{array.sty} dated no earlier than +that date is required to run this document without error. + +This feature would be totally worthless if we were to allow an +alternative version of the array package to be distributed under the +same name since it would mean that there would be in circulation files +of a later date, but without the new feature. If the document +were processed using this `alternative array' then it would certainly +produce `undefined command' errors and would probably not be +processable at all. + + +\reasonsection{What's in a file-name?} +\label{sec:jb} + +In a pure markup language, such as SGML, it is reasonably clear that +control over the final presentation lies with the receiver of a +document and not with the author. + +However, the way that \LaTeX{} is often used in practice means that +most people (at least when using the standard classes and packages) +expect the formatting to be preserved when they send the document to +another site. + +For example, suppose, as is still the most common use of \LaTeX{} in +publishing, you produce a document for `camera-ready-copy' using the +class `article' and that you carefully tune the formatting by, for +example, adding some explicit line breaks etc, to ensure that it fits +the 8 page limit set by the editor a journal or proceedings. + +It then gets sent to the editor or a referee who, without anyone +knowing, has a non-standard version of the class file `article' and so +it then runs to 9 pages. The consequence of this will, at the least, +be a lot of wasted time whilst everyone involved works out what has +gone wrong; it will probably also lead to everyone blaming each other +for something which was in fact caused by a misguided distribution +policy. + +It should also be noted that, for most people, the version of the +class file `article' that gets used is decided by a site maintainer +or the compilers of a CD-ROM distribution. To most users, +the symbols \texttt{a\,r\,t\,i\,c\,l\,e} in: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass{article} +\end{verbatim} +are just as much part of \LaTeX{}'s syntax as are the symbols +\texttt{1\,2\,p\,t} in: +\begin{verbatim} + \hspace{12pt} +\end{verbatim} +Thus they should both define a standard formatting rather than +sometimes producing 1 more page or a 5pt larger space. + +Users rely on the fact that the command (or menu item) `LaTeX' +produces a completely standard \LaTeX, including the fact that +`article' is the `standard article'. They would not be at all happy +if the person who installed and maintains \LaTeX{} for them were +allowed to customise `article' every second day so as (in her or his +opinion) to improve the layout; or because another user wanted to write +a document in a different language or typeset one with different fonts. + +\reasonsection{\TeX{} itself} +\label{sec:tex} + +We have modelled our policies on those of the \TeX{} system since this +has for some time now been widely acknowledged as a very stable and +high quality typesetting system. + +The distribution policy set up by Donald Knuth for \TeX{} has the +following features: +\begin{itemize} +\item There is a clearly specified method for changing parts of the + software by the use of `change files'. +\item Although arbitrary changes are allowed, the resulting program + can be called \TeX{} only if its functionality is precisely the same + as that of \TeX{} (i.e.~neither less nor more) in all important + areas. +\item There are many files in the system that cannot be changed at all + (without changing the name): examples are the file + \texttt{plain.tex} and the files associated with fonts, including + the Metafont source files. +\end{itemize} + + +\reasonsection{Maintaining complexity} +\label{sec:compl} + +Our experience of maintaining \LaTeX{} has shown us just how complex +are the interactions between different parts of the system. + +We have therefore, with lots of help from the bug reports you send in, +developed a large suite of test files which we run to check the +effects of every change we make. A non-negligible percentage of these +test runs give unexpected results and hence show up some unexpected +dependency in the system. + + +\section{Some assurances} +\label{sec:conc} + +We are certainly not attempting to stop people reformatting \LaTeX{} +documents in any way they wish. There are many ways of customising +incoming documents to your personal style that do not involve changing +the contents of \LaTeX{}'s standard files; indeed, this freedom is one +of the system's many advantages. +The simplest way to achieve this is to replace +\begin{quote} +\verb|\documentclass{article}|\quad by\quad +\verb|\documentclass{myart}| +\end{quote} + +Nor do we wish to discourage the production of new packages improving +on the functionality or implementation of those we distribute. All we +ask is that, in the best interests of all \LaTeX{} users, you give +your superbly improved class or package file some other name. + +\section{Configuration possibilities} +\label{sec:conposs} + +The standard \LaTeX{} system format can be configured in several ways +to suit the needs and resources of an installation. For example, the +loading of fonts and font tables can be customised to match the font +shapes, families and encodings normally used in text mode. Also, by +producing the appropriate font definition files, the font tables +themselves can be set up to take advantage of the available fonts and +sizes. The loading of hyphenation patterns can be adjusted to cover +the languages used; this has to be done as part of making the format +since this is the only stage at which patterns can be loaded. + +A complete list of these configuration possibilities can be found in +the distributed guide \emph{Configuration options for} \LaTeXe{} +(\texttt{cfgguide.tex}). However, as it says there, the number of +configuration possibilities is strictly limited; we hope that having +read this far you will appreciate the reasons for this decision. One +consequence of this is that there is no provision for a general +purpose configuration file, or for adding extra code just before the +|\dump| of the format file. + +This was a deliberate decision and we hope that everyone (yes, that +includes you!) will support its intent. Otherwise there will be a +rapid return to the very situation, of several incompatible versions +of \LaTeX~2.09, that originally prompted us to produce \LaTeXe{}: the +new, and \emph{only}, `Standard \LaTeX'. This will make \LaTeX{} +unmaintainable and, hence, unmaintained (by us, at least). + +\begin{quote} + Therefore you should not misuse the configuration files or other + parts of the distribution to produce non-standard versions of + \LaTeX{}. +\end{quote} + +Some of the allowed configurations can result in a system that can produce +documents that are no longer `formatting compatible'; for example, the +use of different default fonts will most likely produce different line +and page breaks. If you do produce a system that is configured in +such a way that it is not `formatting compatible' then you should +consider carefully the needs of users who need to create portable +documents. A good way to provide for their needs is to make +available, in addition, a standard form of \LaTeX{} without any +`formatting incompatible' customisations. + + +\section{Modification conditions} +\label{sec:modcon} + +It is possible that you need to produce a document processing system +based on standard \LaTeX{} but with functionality that cannot be +implemented by using the approved configuration files and complying +with the restriction on the code that is allowed in them. In other +words, you may need a system which is sufficiently distinct from +Standard \LaTeX{} that it is not feasible to do this simply by using +the configuration options we provide or by producing new classes and +packages. + +If you do produce such a system then, for the reasons described +above, you should ensure that your system is clearly distinguished +from Standard \LaTeX{} in every possible way, including the following. + + +\begin{enumerate} +\item + Give your system a distinguished name, such as \nstex, which clearly + distinguishes it from \LaTeX{}. + +\item + Ensure that it contains no file with a name the same as that of + a file in the standard distribution but with different contents. + (If this is not possible then you must: + \begin{itemize} + \item + ensure that files from the non-\LaTeX{} system cannot be + accidentally accessed whilst using a standard \LaTeX{}; + \item ensure that each file from the non-\LaTeX{} system clearly + identifies itself as a non-\LaTeX{} file on the terminal and in the + log file.) + \end{itemize} + +\item + Ensure that the method used to run your system is clearly +\label{mcon:command} + distinct from that used to run Standard \LaTeX; e.g.~by using a + command name or menu entry that is clearly not \texttt{latex} + (or \texttt{LaTeX} etc). + +\item + Ensure that, when a file is being processed by your system, the + use of non-standard \LaTeX{} is clearly proclaimed to the user by + whatever means is appropriate. + +\item Ensure that what is written at the beginning of the log file + clearly shows that your system has been used, and that it is + not Standard \LaTeX{}. + See the file \texttt{cfgguide.tex} for how to achieve this. + +\item + Clearly explain to users that bug reports concerning your + system should not be sent to the maintainers of Standard + \LaTeX{}. +\end{enumerate} + +\subsection*{Note to system administrators} + +If you install a non-standard (modified) version of \LaTeX{} on a +multi-user site then please, in addition, install Standard \LaTeX{} +and observe the conditions enumerated above, particularly +\ref{mcon:command}. + + +\section{What do you think?} +\label{sec:you} + +We are interested in your views on the issues raised in this document. +The best way to let us know what you think, and to discuss your ideas +with others, is to join the \texttt{LaTeX-L} mailing list and send your +comments there. +To subscribe to this list, mail to: +\begin{verbatim} + listserv@urz.uni-heidelberg.de +\end{verbatim} +the following one line message: +\begin{verbatim} + subscribe LATEX-L <your-first-name> <your-second-name> +\end{verbatim} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f05b4735a24 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/nfssfont.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/proc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/proc.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6c567d7861e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/proc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/slides.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/slides.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..83876c46014 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/slides.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/slifonts.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/slifonts.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..17385d8b1cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/slifonts.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..97cf72361c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..79b9a7f5db9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/source2e.tex @@ -0,0 +1,503 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993-2016 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% https://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi + +% This document will typeset the LaTeX sources as a single document. +% This will produce quite a large file (roughly 555 pages) and may +% take a long time. +% +% Some notes on processing this document are contained at the end +% of this document, after \end{document} +% +% DPC 1997/11/17 +% +% First a special index style for makeindex +% + +\begin{filecontents}{source2e.ist} +actual '=' +quote '!' +level '>' +preamble +"\n \\begin{theindex} \n \\makeatletter\\scan@allowedfalse\n" +postamble +"\n\n \\end{theindex}\n" +item_x1 "\\efill \n \\subitem " +item_x2 "\\efill \n \\subsubitem " +delim_0 "\\pfill " +delim_1 "\\pfill " +delim_2 "\\pfill " +% The next lines will produce some warnings when +% running Makeindex as they try to cover two different +% versions of the program: +lethead_prefix "{\\bfseries\\hfil " +lethead_suffix "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n" +lethead_flag 1 +heading_prefix "{\\bfseries\\hfil " +heading_suffix "\\hfil}\\nopagebreak\n" +headings_flag 1 + +% and just for source2e: +% Remove R so I is treated in sequence I J K not I II III +page_precedence "rnaA" +\end{filecontents} + + + +\documentclass{ltxdoc} + +\listfiles + +% Do not index some TeX primitives, and some common plain TeX commands. + +\DoNotIndex{\def,\long,\edef,\xdef,\gdef,\let,\global} +\DoNotIndex{\if,\ifnum,\ifdim,\ifcat,\ifmmode,\ifvmode,\ifhmode,% + \iftrue,\iffalse,\ifvoid,\ifx,\ifeof,\ifcase,\else,\or,\fi} +\DoNotIndex{\box,\copy,\setbox,\unvbox,\unhbox,\hbox,% + \vbox,\vtop,\vcenter} +\DoNotIndex{\@empty,\immediate,\write} +\DoNotIndex{\egroup,\bgroup,\expandafter,\begingroup,\endgroup} +\DoNotIndex{\divide,\advance,\multiply,\count,\dimen} +\DoNotIndex{\relax,\space,\string} +\DoNotIndex{\csname,\endcsname,\@spaces,\openin,\openout,% + \closein,\closeout} +\DoNotIndex{\catcode,\endinput} +\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\message,\read,\the,\m@ne,\noexpand} +\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\vsize,\hskip,\vskip,\kern,\hfil,\hfill,\hss} +\DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\z@,\z@skip,\@ne,\tw@,\p@} +\DoNotIndex{\dp,\wd,\ht,\vss,\unskip} + +% Set up the Index and Change History to use \part +\IndexPrologue{\part*{Index}% + \markboth{Index}{Index}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Index}% + The italic numbers denote the pages where the + corresponding entry is described, + numbers underlined point to the definition, + all others indicate the places where it is used.} + +\GlossaryPrologue{\part*{Change History}% +% Allow control names to be hyphenated here... + {\GlossaryParms\ttfamily\hyphenchar\font=`\-}% + \markboth{Change History}{Change History}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Change History}} + +% The standard \changes command modified slightly to better cope with +% this multiple file document. +\makeatletter +\def\@changes@iso@date#1/#2/#3/#4\space{#1\if\relax#2\relax\else-#2-#3\fi\space} +\def\changes@#1#2#3{% + \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect + \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\glossary{\@changes@iso@date#2///\space + \currentfile\space#1\levelchar + \ifx\saved@macroname\@empty + \space + \actualchar + \generalname + \else + \expandafter\@gobble + \saved@macroname + \actualchar + \string\verb\quotechar*% + \verbatimchar\saved@macroname + \verbatimchar + \fi + :\levelchar #3}}% + \@tempa\endgroup\@esphack} + +% Move whole block up so that the file key is not so close +% to bottom of US letter page. +\addtolength\topmargin{-2\baselineskip} + + +% Codelines are allowed to run over a bit without showing up as overfull +% +\renewcommand*\MacroFont{\fontencoding\encodingdefault + \fontfamily\ttdefault + \fontseries\mddefault + \fontshape\updefault + \small + \hfuzz 6pt\relax} + +% Section numbers now reach eg 74.17.2 which need more space +\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.5em}{2.8em}} +\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{3.8em}{3.4em}} +\makeatother + +% Produce a Change Log and (2 column) Index. +\RecordChanges +\CodelineIndex +\EnableCrossrefs +\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} + +% Needed for documentation in ltoutenc.dtx +\usepackage{textcomp} + +\begin{document} + \title{The \LaTeXe\ Sources} + \author{% + Johannes Braams\\ + David Carlisle\\ + Alan Jeffrey\\ + Leslie Lamport\\ + Frank Mittelbach\\ + Chris Rowley\\ + Rainer Sch\"opf} + +% This command will be used to input the patch file +% if that file exists. +\newcommand{\includeltpatch}{% + \def\currentfile{ltpatch.ltx} + \part{ltpatch} + {\let\ttfamily\relax + \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}% + Things we did wrong\ldots + \IndexInput{ltpatch.ltx}} + + + +% Get the date and patch level from ltvers.dtx +\makeatletter +\let\patchdate=\@empty +\begingroup + \def\ProvidesFile#1\fmtversion#2#3\patch@level#4{% + \date{#2}\xdef\patchdate{#4}\endinput} + \input{ltvers.dtx} +\global\let\X@date=\@date + +% Add the patch version if available. + \long\def\Xdef#1#2#3\def#4#5{% + \xdef\X@date{#2}% + \xdef\patchdate{#5}% + \endinput}% + \InputIfFileExists{ltpatch.ltx} + {\let\def\Xdef}{\global\let\includeltpatch\relax} +\endgroup + +\ifx\@date\X@date + \def\Xpatch{0} + \ifx\patchdate\Xpatch\else + \edef\@date{\@date\space Patch level \patchdate} + \fi +\else + \@warning{ltpatch.ltx does not match ltvers.dtx!} + \let\includeltpatch\relax +\fi +\makeatother + + \pagenumbering{roman} + + \MaintainedByLaTeXTeam{latex} + \maketitle + \renewcommand\maketitle{} + + \tableofcontents + + \clearpage + + \pagenumbering{arabic} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +% Each of the following \DocInclude lines includes a file with extension +% .dtx. Each of these files may be typeset separately. For instance +% latex ltboxes.dtx +% will typeset the source of the LaTeX box commands. +% +% If this file is processed, each of these separate dtx files will be +% contained as a part of a single document. Using ltxdoc.cfg you can +% then optionally produce a combined index and/or change history for +% the entire source of the format file. Note that such a document will +% be quite large (about 555 pages). +% + + \DocInclude{ltdirchk} % System dependent initialisation + + \DocInclude{ltplain} % LaTeX version of Knuth's plain.tex + + \DocInclude{ltvers} % Current version date + + \DocInclude{ltdefns} % Initial definitions. + + \DocInclude{ltalloc} % Allocation of counters and others. + + \DocInclude{ltcntrl} % Program control macros. + + \DocInclude{lterror} % Error handling. + + \DocInclude{ltpar} % Paragraphs. + + \DocInclude{ltspace} % Spacing, line and page breaking. + + \DocInclude{ltlogos} % Logos. + + \DocInclude{ltfiles} % \input files and related commands + + \DocInclude{ltoutenc} % Output encoding interface + + \DocInclude{ltcounts} % Counters + + \DocInclude{ltlength} % Lengths + + \DocInclude{ltfssbas} % NFSS Base macros + + \DocInclude{ltfsstrc} % NFSS Tracing (and tracefnt.sty) + + \DocInclude{ltfsscmp} % NFSS1 Compatibility + + \DocInclude{ltfssdcl} % NFSS Declarative interface + + \DocInclude{ltfssini} % NFSS Initialisation + + \DocInclude{fontdef} % fonttext.ltx/fontmath.ltx + + \DocInclude{preload} % preload.ltx + + \DocInclude{ltfntcmd} % \textrm etc + + \DocInclude{ltpageno} % Page numbering + + \DocInclude{ltxref} % Cross referencing + + \DocInclude{ltmiscen} % Miscellaneous environment definitions. + + \DocInclude{ltmath} % Mathematics set up. + + \DocInclude{ltlists} % List and related environments + + \DocInclude{ltboxes} % Parbox and friends + + \DocInclude{lttab} % Tabbing tabular and array + + \DocInclude{ltpictur} % Picture mode + + \DocInclude{ltthm} % Theorem environments + + \DocInclude{ltsect} % Sectioning + + \DocInclude{ltfloat} % Floats + + \DocInclude{ltidxglo} % Index and Glossary + + \DocInclude{ltbibl} % Bibliography + + \DocInclude{ltpage} % \pagestyle \raggedbottom \sloppy + + \DocInclude{ltoutput} % Output routine + + \DocInclude{ltclass} % Package & Class interface + + \DocInclude{lthyphen} % Hyphenation (hyphen.ltx). + + \DocInclude{ltluatex} % Luatex support + + \DocInclude{ltfinal} % Last minute initialisations and dump + + \includeltpatch % Corrections distributed after the full release + +% Stop here if ltxdoc.cfg says \AtEndOfClass{\OnlyDescription} +\StopEventually{\end{document}} + +\clearpage +\pagestyle{headings} + +% Make TeX shut up. +\hbadness=10000 +\newcount\hbadness +\hfuzz=\maxdimen + +\typeout{% + \string # Produce change log with^^J% + makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo} + + +\PrintChanges + +\clearpage + +% makeindex needs a symbol between the parts of composite page numbers +% but we dont want one, so: +\typeout{% + \string # Produce index with^^J% + makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx} + +\begingroup +\def\endash{--} +\catcode`\-\active +\def-{\futurelet\temp\indexdash} +\def\indexdash{\ifx\temp-\endash\fi} + +\PrintIndex +\endgroup + +% Make sure that the index is not printed twice +% (ltxdoc.cfg might have a second \PrintIndex command) +\let\PrintChanges\relax +\let\PrintIndex\relax + +\end{document} + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +To use this file to produce a fully indexed source code +you need to execute the following (or equivalent) commands: + + latex source2e.tex + + makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx + makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo + + latex source2e.tex + latex source2e.tex + + +The makeindex style source2e.ist is used in place of the usual +doc gind.ist to ensure that I is used in the sequence I J K +not I II II, which would be the default makeindex behaviour. + +The third run with latex is only required to get the table of +contents entries for the change log and index. You may speed things up +by using the \includeonly mechanism so as not to typeset the source +files on the second run. This involves changing the file +ltxdoc.cfg +between the latex runs. + +The following unix script automates this. + (It could easily be ported to scripts for DOS or VMS, + rm is ReMove a file, and echo "..." > file writes ... to "file".) + + +After this script (after the second ==============) is a similar script +that will produce the documentation for all the files in the base +distribution that are *not* included in source2e.dvi. This second script +was requested, but before using it, beware it will take a long time! +It may however be modified as required, eg to not typeset the fdd files +or whatever... + +============== +#!/bin/sh + +rm -f source2e.gls source2e.ind source2e.toc + +# First run: +# Create new standard ltxdoc.cfg file +# Pass the (possibly empty) list of arguments supplied on the +# command line to article class. +# +# If you use A4 paper, running this script with argument +# a4paper +# may save about 30 pages. +# +echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg + + +# Now LaTeX the file with this cfg file. +# +pdflatex source2e.tex + + +# Make the Change log and Glossary. +# +makeindex -s source2e.ist source2e.idx +makeindex -s gglo.ist -o source2e.gls source2e.glo + + +# Second run: append \includeonly{} to ltxdoc.cfg to speed up things +# (this run needed only to get changes and index listed in .toc file) +# +# Note that the index will not be made incorrect by the insertion +# of the table of contents as the front matter uses a different page +# numbering scheme. +# +echo "\includeonly{}" >> ltxdoc.cfg + +pdflatex source2e.tex + + +# Third and final run, to put everything together. +# First restore the cfg file: +# +echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg +pdflatex source2e.tex + + +============== +#!/bin/sh + +# Running this script will process all the dtx fdd and *guide.tex +# and ltnews*.tex files in the LaTeX distribution, except the dtx +# files included in source2e.tex. +# (The shell first script in the comments of source2e.tex will +# process those.) + +# Any command line arguments (eg a4paper) are taken as options to the +# article class. + +# This script is likely to take ages! + +echo "\PassOptionsToClass{$*}{article}" > ltxdoc.cfg +echo "\batchmode" >> ltxdoc.cfg + +# The next four lines produce full indexes and change logs +# you may not want those. +echo "\AtBeginDocument{\RecordChanges}" >> ltxdoc.cfg +echo "\AtEndDocument{\PrintChanges}" >> ltxdoc.cfg +echo "\AtBeginDocument{\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs}" >> ltxdoc.cfg +echo "\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex}" >> ltxdoc.cfg + +# If you do not want any code listings, just documentation, then instead +# of the above four lines, uncomment the following: +# echo "\AtBeginDocument{\OnlyDescription}" >> ltxdoc.cfg + + +for i in *dtx *fdd +do +B=`basename $i .dtx` + +if (grep "Include{$B}" source2e.tex >/dev/null ; ) +then +echo In source2e: $i +else +echo pdflatex $i + if (pdflatex $i > /dev/null) + then + echo pdflatex $i + pdflatex $i > /dev/null + echo makeindex -s gind.ist $B.idx + makeindex -s gind.ist $B.idx > /dev/null 2> /dev/null + echo makeindex -s gglo.ist -o $B.gls $B.glo + makeindex -s gglo.ist -o $B.gls $B.glo > /dev/null 2> /dev/null + echo pdflatex $i + pdflatex $i > /dev/null + else + echo "!!! LaTeX ERROR: $i. (See $B.log.)" + fi +fi + +done diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/syntonly.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/syntonly.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7f8dc926e9c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/syntonly.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tex2.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tex2.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..09cd388cde5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tex2.txt @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + LaTeX installation TeX2 information + + 16 September 1995 + + +In order to make a LaTeX format and use it you need, in addition to +the LaTeX source files, a TeX implementation. + +If your TeX is very old, prior to version TeX3, then certain features +will be missing from your system. In particular, you will probably +have no support for `8-bit' input and hyphenation of words with +accented characters. + +Most (perhaps all) TeX implementations are available in versions that +are at least as recent as TeX3 (released in 1989) so the best course +of action is to update your TeX installation before building LaTeX. + +However, if you must for some reason make the LaTeX format by running +the old TeX2 then it is necessary to have a `configuration file' named +fonttext.cfg. The existence of this file will prevent LaTeX trying to +access 8-bit characters, which is not allowed in the old TeX2 version +of TeX. + +If you fail to use such a configuration file, LaTeX will detect that it +is running under TeX2 and stop with the following message (without +making a format file): + +************************************* +* +* You MUST use a fonttext.cfg file! +* As you are still using TeX2!!!!!! +* +* See the documentation file tex2.txt +* +************************************* + + +There is more information about the file fonttext.cfg in the file +cfgguide.tex; but for a minimal configuration that allows LaTeX to +be built on TeX2, just do the following: + + * Copy the standard fonttext.ltx file to fonttext.cfg + * Then edit the file fonttext.cfg as follows: + -- Change the \ProvidesFile call (see below). + -- Comment out all the lines referring to the `T1' encoding (but not + those referring to the `OT1' encoding). + +Thus the resulting file will look something like the following. + +%%% File: fonttext.cfg +\ProvidesFile{fonttext.cfg} + [1995/06/05 v1.0 TeX2 text font setup] + +\input {OMLenc.def} +%%%%% NOT FOR TeX2 \input {T1enc.def} +\input {OT1enc.def} % <- should come after T1 for speed +\input {OMSenc.def} +\fontencoding{OT1} +\DeclareFontEncodingDefaults{}{} +%%%%% NOT FOR TeX2 \DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{cmr}{m}{n} +\DeclareFontSubstitution{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n} +%%%%% NOT FOR TeX2 \input {T1cmr.fd} +\input {OT1cmr.fd} +\input {OT1cmss.fd} +\input {OT1cmtt.fd} +\DeclareErrorFont{OT1}{cmr}{m}{n}{10} +\newcommand\rmdefault{cmr} +\newcommand\sfdefault{cmss} +\newcommand\ttdefault{cmtt} + +\newcommand\bfdefault{bx} +\newcommand\mddefault{m} + +\newcommand\itdefault{it} +\newcommand\sldefault{sl} +\newcommand\scdefault{sc} +\newcommand\updefault{n} + +\newcommand\encodingdefault{OT1} +\newcommand\familydefault{\rmdefault} +\newcommand\seriesdefault{\mddefault} +\newcommand\shapedefault{\updefault} +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/texpert.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/texpert.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7e2860d09de --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/texpert.txt @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ + LaTeX installation TeX expert information + + 1 June 1997 + + +SUMMARY +======= + +This document contains information about the LaTeX installation for +TeX experts. In particular it describes: + + * The checks performed by ltxcheck.tex + + * How to print the LaTeX source. + +For more general information, see install.txt. + +For information on configuring LaTeX see cfgguide.tex. + + +THE LTXCHECK.TEX CHECKS +======================= + +Here is a description of the checks run by ltxcheck. + +1) The \@currdir check. + + It is useful for LaTeX to know the syntax for the `current directory + (or folder)', or `default directory', if the operating system has + such a concept. + + For example, file abc.tex in this directory, or folder, is specified + by: + ./abc.tex on Unix and most DOS/OS2 TeX's, + []abc.tex on VMS + :abc.tex on a Macintosh. + The above possibilities will be found automatically during the + installation. However, if none of these syntaxes works on your + system then the internal macro \@currdir will be set to be empty + and ltxcheck will report this. + + If your system does have a notion of a current directory, you can + define \@currdir in the file texsys.cfg. + + You could also report this to the latex-bug address, so that + later releases can automatically cope with your system. + +2) The file name parser check. + \filename@parse may be defined in texsys.cfg if the default + installation does not define a suitable parser. (In fact no widely + used TeX system should need such a re-definition as the standard + installation should correctly define this command for unix, dos, + atari, VMS, and Macintosh, at least.) + Because of differences in directory syntax, most features of this + command can not be checked in a portable way, however ltxcheck does + check that at least {article.cls} is correctly parsed as base name + article and extension cls. + +3) The \input@path check. + + On some systems TeX cannot check whether a file exists before + trying to input it, unless the filename is expressed as a full path + name, including the directory. On these systems LaTeX needs to be + given a list of directories in which to look for files; the + internal macro \input@path holds this information. + + When run, ltxcheck will try to locate the file article.cls. + If it fails to find this file (and you have placed it in the + `standard input directory') then you must define \input@path in + the file texsys.cfg. + + The files texsys.cfg and ltdirchk.dtx contain examples of how to do + this but only you know the directories and syntax that should be used + for your installation. + + We hope to build up a better collection of examples in future + releases of LaTeX, as it is tested on more TeX systems. + +4) TeX version check. + + The next check tests that you are running a recent version of TeX. + If ltxcheck reports that you have TeX2, then you should try to + upgrade TeX (and rebuild LaTeX) as soon as possible. LaTeX may be + used with TeX2, but certain features will be missing and you will + not be able to use the new (8-bit) font families that are now + available. If you must stick with TeX2, please read the extra + information in the file tex2.txt. + + If ltxcheck reports that your TeX version is older than 3.141, you + will see some strange messages during the installation. This is + because earlier versions of TeX printed certain line-breaks in + messages on the terminal as `^^J' rather than starting a new line. + + LaTeX will work round this bug and thus avoid `^^J' appearing in + error messages, but you should upgrade your TeX as soon as + possible, as other bugs have been fixed, not just line breaks in + messages. + + At the present time (2005) the current TeX version is 3.141592. + +5) Fonts check. + + Finally ltxcheck.tex tests to see if it can find a `representative + sample' of the fonts used by LaTeX. + + Fonts that may cause problems are: + a) The circle fonts. These were renamed some years ago from circle* + to lcircle*, although some sites still have them under the old + name. Also the names are longer than 8 letters which may cause + some problems. + b) The `extra Computer Modern' fonts. The American Mathematical + Society has extended the range of sizes available in the + Computer Modern fonts. LaTeX now assumes that these extra cm + fonts are available. + The fonts are available from a CTAN archive, in the directory + ctan:macros/latex/fonts or alternatively as part of the + AMS fonts collection, which also includes many useful + mathematical fonts. + c) The `T1 encoded Computer Modern' fonts. This is the ec or dc font + collection. The new (1995) release 1.2 of the dc fonts changed + most of the file names. For this reason the fd files such as + t1cmr.fd cannot be written to work with the dc fonts of different + releases. LaTeX by default unpacks the fd files for the ec + dc fonts. + If you have an older release of the dc fonts and do not wish to + upgrade then you should unpack the necessary fd files by running + LaTeX on the file olddc.ins (dc older than version 1.2) or + newdc.ins (version 1.2 and 1.3). + As the T1 fd files will have been used when making the format, + you must re-run initex latex.ltx to remake the format if you + update the fd files in this way. + Running ltxcheck will produce a ! BAD LaTeX2e system!! error + message if it detects that the `new' fd files are loaded into + the format, but only the old dc fonts are available, and vice + versa. + If the old fonts are detected, and the `old' fd files are loaded + then no error is generated, but a message suggesting that you + upgrade is produced. + The ec fonts are available from a CTAN archive, in the directory + ctan:fonts/ec . + + +6) Files check. + + Finally ltxcheck checks that the main TeX input files that LaTeX + will use when running documents (such as the article class file, + fd files, and main packages such as fontenc) are all available. + + +DOCUMENTATION OF THE CODE +========================= + +Most of the documentation is nowadays available as precomplied PDF +files. This section describes how to produce typeset code +documentation yourself from the source. + +To typeset a documented code file (a .dtx file) you simply run LaTeX +on it. The file source2e.tex is a master file which produces the +documented code for the whole LaTeX kernel (but not the standard +packages, classes, or compatibility mode). You need to have LaTeX2e +installed before doing this. + +To configure the appearance of this documentation, you can use a +ltxdoc.cfg file. For example, putting the following line into this +file will format the documentation for A4 paper: + + \PassOptionsToClass{a4paper}{article} + +The doc package, which is used by the documentation files, writes +index files and change-history files that can be processed by the +program MakeIndex. If this program is part of your TeX installation, +you can get an index and history listing for a documentation file +by running the .idx and .glo files through this program. + +For example, in Unix MakeIndex, you should say: + + makeindex -s gind.ist FILENAME + makeindex -s gglo.ist -o FILENAME.gls FILENAME.glo + +source2e.tex needs a special source2e.ist file (in place of gind.ist). +Running makeindex will produce some warning messages about ignored +style specifiers; these can be safely ignored. + +See the comments at the end of source2e.tex for more information. + + +CONFIGURING LaTeX +================= + +In addition to the system-dependent customisation in texsys.cfg, +various other parts of LaTeX can be configured to suit local needs. +Further details can be found in the document cfgguide.tex. We +recommend that you install the standard system before attempting any +further customisation. + +If you are thinking of making other changes to LaTeX, please read the +document modguide.tex as it describes the precautions you need to take +when making modifications in order to ensure that standard LaTeX +remains a stable, maintainable system. + + +FURTHER INFORMATION +=================== + +You will find further information about various aspects of LaTeX in +the distributed files with names <*>guide.tex. You will need +to install the new version before you can typeset these files. + + +--- Copyright 1995-2016 the LaTeX3 project. All rights reserved --- diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..57b3c857153 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.err @@ -0,0 +1,4630 @@ +\newcommand\erratafiledate{2014-09-30} + +\def\comando#1{\texttt{\string#1}} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through +% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and +% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify +% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata +% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the +% .cfg file. +% +% The current version of this file can be found at: +% +% https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/ +% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls} +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007, 2014 Frank Mittelbach +%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version; +%% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl +% +% +% It sets up a few commands used to format the errata entries for books in the +% Addison-Wesley Series: +% +% Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting +% +% hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for +% errata files of other books. +% +% Changes: +% +% v1.0a - changed name from errata.cls to ttcterrata.cls + +\ProvidesClass{ttcterrata} + [2007/11/10 v1.0a Mini class for errata files; subject to change (FMi)] + +\LoadClass{article} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} +\addtolength\textwidth{5cm} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm} + +\addtolength\textheight{36pt} + +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + +\RequirePackage{array,longtable} +\RequirePackage{multicol} + + +\newcommand\erratagetnumber{} +\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3} + + +\newcommand\gobbleerrata{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup + \let\endgobble\egroup + \let\hideamp\relax + \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par} + +\newcommand*\hideamp{&} + +\let\endgobble\relax + + +\newcommand\erratastartdate{} +\newcommand\myprinting{1} + + +\newcommand\doweprint[2]{% + \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else \ifx s#2 1000\else#2 \fi\fi + \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber < + \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax + \@tempswatrue + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi +} + + + +\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate} +\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and} + +\newcommand\showallerrors{% + \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}% + \renewcommand\printedentries{up to} + \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}} + + +\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{% + \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi} + +\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{% + \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}} + +\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg} + { + \input{\jobname.cfg} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found } + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \AtEndDocument{ + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing} + \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision} + \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date} + \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Current settings are:} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting} + \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + }} + {} + +%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision> + +\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble + &\\[4pt]% + \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\} + +\newenvironment{erratalist} + {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}} + {\endgobble\end{longtable}} + +\newcommand\erratatitle[2] + {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries + Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt] + \small Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2\\ + (For other periods/print runs reprocess this document + with different config settings) + \end{center}% + \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \vspace{20pt}} + +\pagestyle{myheadings} + +\AtBeginDocument{\small} + +\setlength\parindent{0pt} +\setlength\parskip{2pt} + +\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par} + +% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: + +\let\u\underline +\renewcommand\>{$\to$} + +%%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of +%%% contributions by individuals (will work only if we do not get +%%% too many :-) + +\def\count@contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{ + \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}% +%%% also count secondary: +%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}% +} + +\renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% + \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{% + \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par} + +\end{filecontents} + + +\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} +% +% +% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% +% The LaTeX Companion, Second Edition +% +% +% \erratastartdate +% +% Specifies the date from which on errata entries should be listed. +% +% The format is YYYY/MM/DD. +% +% The default below ensures that all entries for a particular +% printing are typeset. +% + +\renewcommand\erratastartdate{2004/04/22} + + +% +% \myprinting +% +% Specifies which (revised) printing you own. For example, if you +% have the second printing set this to 2 so that errors already +% corrected in that printing will not appear in your errata +% listing. +% +% The default below ensures that all entries relevant to the x-th +% printing are typeset. +% +% + +\renewcommand\myprinting{1} +\renewcommand\myprinting{2} % 3rd printing was without corrections +\renewcommand\myprinting{4} % September 2005 + +% +% \norevisionnumbers +% +% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same +% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed +% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in +% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. + +% +% \showallerrors +% +% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are +% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and +% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by +% default. +% +% +\endinput +\end{filecontents} + + +\documentclass{ttcterrata}[2005/11/10] % we want new class + +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\let\u\underline % shortcut for this file +\newcommand\meta[1]{$\langle$\textit{#1\/}$\rangle$} + +\usepackage{textcomp} + +\usepackage{url} + +\begin{document} + +\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Companion, Second Edition}{\erratafiledate} + + +\begin{verbatim} +@book(A-W:MG04, + author = {Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens}, + title = {The {\LaTeX} Companion}, + edition = 2, + note = {With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley}, + series = {Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting}, + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, + address = {Boston, Massachusetts}, + year = 2004, + pagenums = {1120}, + bibliography = {yes}, + index = {yes}, + isbn = {0-201-36299-6}, +) +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{3cm}} +\item[] + +This file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found as part of the \LaTeX{} +distribution and its latest version is maintained on the \LaTeX{} +project site at \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/\jobname.err} +where you will also find extracts of the book. + +The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata +entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed +revision in which this entry was corrected (\textit{s} indicates a +correction in the sources only). The second +column gives the precise location (negative line or paragraph numbers +are counted from the bottom of the page). The third column shows the +first finder of the problem. + +You can customize this list to only show errata related to the printing +you own by changing the configuration in the file \texttt{\jobname.cfg}. + +\begin{center} + \Large \bfseries To Err is Human --- Bug Contest +\end{center} + +Any mistake found and reported is a gain for all readers of our book. +For this reason Addison-Wesley and the authors offer a prize (for 6 +periods) to the eligible person who finds the largest +number of bugs during that period (in case of a draw a random choice +will be made between all those with the largest number of findings). +A person can receive at most one prize, ever; errors found by any of +the authors do not count. + +Each prize is a free choice of any single computing book found on the +AW Professional web site \texttt{http://www.awprofessional.com} (that +is, no boxed sets or multiple volume offers). + + +As usual, the authors and publisher reserve the right to make various +decisions such as whether a reported feature is an error for +competitive purposes or whether similar features count as a single or +multiple errors. --- +Good luck! + +\begin{center} +\begin{tabular}{clr} +Contest period ends & Winner \\[4pt] +2004/10 & Hubert G\"a\ss lein & 287 suggestions\\ +2005/04 & Ulrich Dirr & 11 suggestions\\ +2005/10 & Daniel Alonso i Alemany & 13 suggestions\\ +2006/04 & Michael Schutte & 2 suggestions\\ +2008/05 & Brooks Moses & 1 suggestion \\ +\ldots & -- final draw eventually -- +\end{tabular} +\end{center} +\end{list} + +\newpage + + +%<-------------------------- + +\newcommand\BibTeX{\textsc{Bib}\TeX} + +\begin{erratalist} + +\CHAPTER{General } + +\seriouserroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{} + + To help you in assessing this errata document we have placed + exclamation marks in front of each entry that we consider essential + for correctly understanding the book contents. + +\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/05/14}{} + + Due to the printing process there may be small alignment problems + between blue and black text on some pages. These can vary from book + to book depending on how the paper was handled between print + runs---such is the analog nature of printing on a press. + + + +\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/07/28}{} + Slightly updated examples matching the second printing will be made + available at CTAN: \texttt{info/examples/tlc2}. The book CD will + have the original examples from the first printing. + + + +\CHAPTER{Front matter} + +\erroronpage{iv}{bottom}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Some updates indicating second printing (with corrections) + +\erroronpage{v}{l.7}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} + For the record: the term ``for ever'' is the British spelling and a + conscious decision. + +\erroronpage{xiii}{\S 8.6.2}{FMi}{2004/06/21}{2} + Change section heading: ``Operator \u{and function} names'' + +\erroronpage{xxiii}{11.2}{FMi}{2004/07/26}{2} + Change table caption: ``Languages supported by \u{\texttt{texindy}}'' + +\erroronpage{xxvii}{para 1, l.1+6+7}{CAR}{2004/05/20}{2} + Each time a space is missing between package names in parentheses. + +\erroronpage{xxvii}{para 1, l.-2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} + Add: ``Thorsten Hansen (\textsf{bibunits}\u{, \textsf{multibib}}) + +\erroronpage{xxvii}{para 4, l.2}{NBe}{2004/04/23}{2} + Replace ``Wai Wing'' with ``Wai Wong'' (very sorry for this typo). + +\erroronpage{xxvii}{para 4, l.2}{MHCL/CAR}{2004/06/09}{2} + Kai Tek airport is correctly named Kai Tak airport but the photo + was actually taken at Hong Kong International Airport + +\erroronpage{xxvii}{after para 4}{FMi}{2004/06/09}{2} + Add following paragraph: +``Any mistake found and reported is a gain for all readers of our +book. We would therefore like to thank those readers who reported +any of the mistakes which had been overlooked so far. +The latest version of the errata file can +be found on the \LaTeX{} project site at +\texttt{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/tlc2.err} where you will also +find an on-line version of the index and other extracts from the book.'' + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 1} + +\erroronpage{2}{para 5, l.1}{MSc}{2004/06/03}{2} + Replace: LaTeX \> \LaTeX{} + +\erroronpage{7}{para 5, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Missing word and wrong designation of acronym: + ``\ldots\ + languages such \u{as} the \u{Portable Document} Format (PDF) + \ldots'' + + +\erroronpage{7}{para 5, l.-2}{MSc/CAR}{2004/06/06}{2} +Replace: ``\ldots produce other device-independent + output forms in proprietary languages such as the Portable Document + Format~(PDF) (extension~\texttt{.pdf}).'' \> \\ + ``\ldots produce device-independent + file formats including the Portable Document Format~(PDF) + (extension~\texttt{.pdf}), which is the native file format of Adobe + Acrobat.'' + + +\erroronpage{13}{para -2, l.5}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Replace ``writes'' with ``write''. + +%\erroronpage{13}{last para, l.1}{MSc}{2004/06/08}{} +% ``blue notes`` vertically misaligned + +\erroronpage{14}{para 2, l.2}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{2} + Bug in \texttt{url.sty} generated extra space. + +\erroronpage{14}{para 2, l.6}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Printing problem: ``or'' only half visible. + +\erroronpage{14}{para 3, l.3}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Printing problem: ``d'' in ``document'' only half visible. + +\erroronpage{14}{exa 1-3-5, l.6}{DHL}{2004/05/14}{2} + Printing problem: ``i'' in ``\verb=\section='' not visible. + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 2} + +\erroronpage{16}{para 4,ll.2--4}{HjG}{2005/04/03}{4} + Nitpicking? Code for class options will not be in a package file!\\ + ``Code for \u{class} options is sometimes stored in files + (in \u{this case} with the extension \texttt{.clo}) but is normally + directly specified in the class or package file (\dots).'' + \>\\ + ``Code for options is sometimes stored in files + (in \u{the case of classes} with the extension \texttt{.clo}) but + is normally + directly specified in the class or package file (\dots).'' + +\erroronpage{16}{para 4, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/10/10}{4} + Although not wrong, better: + ``For example, + the option \texttt{11pt} \u{might be} related to + \u{\texttt{art11.clo}} when\ldots'' + \> + ``For example, + the option \texttt{11pt} \u{is} related to + \u{\texttt{size11.clo}} when\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{20}{para 1, l.-2}{BMo}{2004/05/14}{2} + Words need to be swapped: ``\ldots can achieve \u{this effect} by + \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{20}{footnote, l.2}{MSc/FMi}{2004/06/10}{2} + Replace ``e.g.,'' with ``i.e.,'' + +\erroronpage{21}{para 1 of 2.1.4, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Words need to be swapped: + ``\ldots package \u{created by} Donald Arseneau.'' + +\erroronpage{21}{para -2, l.2}{MLi}{2013/07/12}{} + The command is called \verb=\AskOption= (without ``s'') + +\erroronpage{24}{para -2,ll.-3\slash -2}{HjG}{2005/04/03}{4} + \LaTeX{}nically not correct:\\ + ``\u{all} lower-level counter\u{s} (i.e., \u{those} with + higher-level number\u{s}) \u{are} reset.''\>\\ + ``\u{the next} lower-level counter (i.e., \u{that} with \u{the next} + higher-level number) \u{is} reset.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{26}{footnote}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Misplaced closing brace (see example 2-2-3):\\ + \verb=\fbox{\csname thesection\endcsname\hspace{0.5em}=% + \u{\texttt{\textbraceright}} + \> + \verb=\fbox{\csname thesection\endcsname=% + \u{\texttt{\textbraceright}}\verb=\hspace{0.5em}= + +\erroronpage{27}{exa 2-2-4}{MBr}{2004/08/01}{2} + Rewrite example text to avoid overfull hbox. + +\erroronpage{27}{para -2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Missing italic correction: + \verb=\=\emph{name}\verb=mark= + + +\seriouserroronpage{28}{afterskip item, ll.3--4}{HjG}{2005/04/03}{4} + \LaTeX{}nically not correct (cf.\ latex/3463):\\ + ``\dots\ whether a display heading (\textit{afterskip}${}\geq0$) or a + run-in heading (\textit{afterskip}${}<0$) is produced.''\>\\ + ``\dots\ whether a display heading (\textit{afterskip}${}>0$) or a + run-in heading (\textit{afterskip}${}\leq0$) is produced.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{32}{para -1,l.4--7}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/20}{2} + Replace: ``The modified |\section| command +also starts a new page, which is typeset with a special page style +(see Chapter~4) and with +top floats suppressed. +The indentation of the first paragraph in a +section is also suppressed by using the low-level kernel command + |\@afterheading| and setting +the Boolean switch \texttt{@afterindent} to \texttt{false}. +For details on the use of these commands see the |\chapter| implementation in +the standard classes (file \texttt{classes.dtx}).'' + +\seriouserroronpage{33}{code}{FMi}{2004/05/20}{2} + Replace code as follows to make statement on p.32 true:\\ +\hspace{0pt minus\linewidth}\begin{minipage}{1.35\linewidth} +\begin{verbatim} +\makeatletter + \renewcommand\appendix{% + \renewcommand\section{% % Redefinition of \section... + \newpage\thispagestyle{plain}% % new page, folio bottom + \suppressfloats[t]\@afterindentfalse % no top floats, no indent + \secdef\Appendix\sAppendix}% % call \Appendix or \sAppendix + \setcounter{section}{0}\renewcommand\thesection{\Alph{section}}} + + \newcommand\Appendix[2][?]{% % Complex form: + \refstepcounter{section}% % step counter/ set label + \addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}% % generate toc entry + {\protect\numberline{\appendixname~\thesection}#1}% + {\raggedleft\large\bfseries \appendixname\ % typeset the title + \thesection\par \centering#2\par}% % and number + \@afterheading % prepare indentation handling + \sectionmark{#1}% % add to running header + \addvspace{\baselineskip}} % space after heading + + \newcommand\sAppendix[1]{% % Simplified (starred) form + {\raggedleft\large\bfseries\appendixname\par \centering#1\par}% + \@afterheading\addvspace{\baselineskip}} +\makeatother +\end{verbatim} +\end{minipage} + +\erroronpage{30}{para-3, l.-2}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4} + ``page 426'' should be ``page 428'' + +\seriouserroronpage{33}{code}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Definitions of \verb=\Appendix= and \verb=\sAppendix= use + \verb=\flushright= instead of \verb=\raggedleft=! + + Editorial note: already addressed in previous major change. + +\erroronpage{33}{exa 2-2-11}{MBr}{2004/08/01}{2} + Text contains two spaces after period (not wrong but unnecessary). + +\erroronpage{33}{exa 2-2-11}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Comment only needs one \% not two. + +% not really a bug but ... +\erroronpage{35}{para 1}{hajk}{2005/09/29}{} + Package fncychap also makes unwanted ``Chapter 0'' heading for + |\chapter{Preface}| in |\frontmatter| of book. + + Comment: I don't really consider this a bug (as it is not surprising + with such designs) but will see if it can be explicitly mentioned. + +\seriouserroronpage{45}{para 2, l.13}{DHL}{2004/05/27}{2} + In the displayed code, the second occurrence of + ``\verb=\renewcommand\theBhead=\dots'' \> + ``\verb=\renewcommand\theChead=\dots'' + +\erroronpage{37}{para 3, l.-2}{FMi}{2004/10/21}{4} + Replace: ``\ldots title in lowercase'' \> + ``\ldots title in \u{small capitals}'' + +\erroronpage{46}{para -2,l.3}{HjG}{2005/04/03}{4} + Delete: ``need\u{ed}'' \> ``need'' + +\erroronpage{48}{para 2, l.5}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Delete doubled word: + ``(\ldots\ to the \u{the} table of contents)'' + +\erroronpage{49}{para 3, l.2}{DHL/CAR}{2004/05/27}{2} + Replace: ``Thereby, the result of'' \> + ``The exact effect of'' + +\erroronpage{50}{para -4, l.3}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Add remark: + ``\ldots, so that the standard document classes have definitions + for \verb=\l@part= and \verb=\l@chapter= + \u{(or \texttt{\char`\\l@section} with \textsf{article})} + that do not use \verb=\@dottedtocline=.'' + +\erroronpage{50}{para --1}{FMi}{2004/10/22}{4} + Replace para with: + The nesting level of the entry. + With the help of the counter \texttt{tocdepth} the user can + control how many nesting levels will be displayed. + Levels greater than the value of this counter + will not appear in the table of contents. + + +\erroronpage{51}{fig.~2.3}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + The lines of the ``heading text'' are wrapped at a place different + from that indicated by the \verb=|<- \@tocrmarg ->|=. + +\seriouserroronpage{51}{descr. of + \texttt{\textbackslash + @pnumwidth}}{CBa}{2005/04/04}{4} + Needs changing with |\renewcommand|! + +\seriouserroronpage{51}{descr. of + \texttt{\textbackslash @tocrmarg}}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/20}{2} + Add additional sentence: + ``It can be set to a rubber length, which results in the TOC being set + unjustified.'' + +\erroronpage{51}{footnote}{FMi}{2004/09/19}{4} + Add: ``\ldots See Section 7.10.3 \u{on page 428} for more\ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{52}{para 2, exa}{CBa}{2005/04/04}{4} + As |\@pnumwidth| is actually a macro the assignment using + |\settowidth| unfortunately doesn't work at all. + Instead a value needs to be assigned via |\renewcommand|. + +\erroronpage{52}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Printing problem: ``w'' in ``down'' only half visible. + +\erroronpage{52}{middle}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2} + Add after code line: + ``When adjusting \verb=\@pnumwidth= this way it is likely that the + value of \verb=\@tocrmarg= needs to be changed as well to keep the + layout of the table of contents consistent.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{52}{para 3, l.-1}{JJN}{2004/08/17}{4} + Replace ``and section'' with ``section, and subsection''. + (or replace code above to use |\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}| and speak + of "first" level) + +\erroronpage{55}{ll.-8/-7}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2} + Missing word: ``\ldots\ is defined by \u{the} second argument.'' + +\erroronpage{56}{footnote}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} +Remove: ``\ldots are limited to three characters, like MS-DOS \u{or Windows}.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{57}{tab.~2.3}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2} + \verb=\mtcPSfont= \> \verb=\mtcSPfont=\\ + \verb=\nomtcrules= \> \verb=\nomtcrule=\\ + \verb=\mtcrules= \> \verb=\mtcrule= + +\seriouserroronpage{57}{para-2, l.-3}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2} + \verb=\partoc= \> \verb=\parttoc= + + \erroronpage{58}{exa 2-3-8}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} + km2 appears two times in the code and in the printed output; + it should be \verb=km\textsuperscript={2} in the code + and km\textsuperscript{2} in the output. + +\erroronpage{62}{l.-11}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2} + ``recourse'' \> ``recur'' + +\erroronpage{63}{para 1, l.1}{FMi}{2004/11/11}{4} + Typo: ``This artific\u{i}al example shows how'' + +\erroronpage{65}{para 2, l.-1}{CKr}{2004/10/15}{4} + Correct: ``formated'' \> ``format\u{t}ed'' + +\erroronpage{66}{marginal note}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Restrictions on keys deserve a dangerous bend sign. + +\erroronpage{68}{exa 2-4-3}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2} + The box in the margin ``\fbox{2-4-3}'' is shifted right + (with respect to other such boxes). + +\erroronpage{72}{para 3, l.-3}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/21}{2} + Change/add: + ``\ldots by comparing \u{the number of the chapter} in which the +|\label| \u{occurred} with the current\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{75}{para -1, l.2}{CKr}{2004/10/17}{4} + Change: ``provided the \textit{keys}'' \> + ``provided the \textit{key}\u{s}'' + +\seriouserroronpage{76}{para -2, l.5--8}{DAr/FMi}{2004/07/24}{2} +Change marginal to ``{\itshape Unnumbered sections get moving +arguments}'' + +Change text to: ``As a consequence, \u{the +arguments of unnumbered sectioning commands} are turned into +moving arguments, \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{77}{para -1, l.-4}{DAr}{2004/07/24}{2} + Add: ``In addition, no \u{unrelated} |\addcontentsline| command is +allowed to intervene between heading and label.'' + +\erroronpage{78}{\S 2.4.5, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2} + Add: ``Sebastian + Rahtz \u{(with contributions by Heiko Oberdiek and + David Carlisle)} has developed\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{78}{para 3, l.3}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2} + Program name changed: ``Acrobat Reader'' \> ``Adobe Reader'' + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 3} + +\erroronpage{84}{}{DAr}{2004/07/23}{2} +Change: ``For example, if the current size is \u{\ttfamily\textbackslash Large} then +\verb=\relsize{-2}= would change to \u{\ttfamily\textbackslash normalsize}\,. + +\seriouserroronpage{84}{exa 3-1-7}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + To avoid extra space in the output, second line should read:\\ + \verb*= {\relsize{-2}small words} inside.= + +\erroronpage{85}{para -1, l.5}{WaS/FMi}{2004/06/16}{2} + Change: ``ON 28TH \u{OF} JULY 2003'' \> ``ON 2ND AUGUST 2004'' + (no OF generated) + +\seriouserroronpage{87}{para 3, l.1}{DAr}{2004/07/24}{2} + Replace: |\uuline| \> |\uline| + +\erroronpage{87}{exa. 3-1-15}{V-Li}{2004/08/14}{} + \verb+\-+ should be used on a word that is actually hyphenated. + + Well, would be nice but not easy to find one. + +\erroronpage{87}{exa. 3-1-16}{DHL}{2004/06/07}{2} + The solid band produced by |\xout| is actually supposed to come + out as a series of separated ``/'' symbols. With the + \texttt{ulem} package used for the first printing that works well + for most text fonts, but + with Times Roman (used in the example) you get the result shown. + The new package version fixes this defect. + +\erroronpage{92}{para 3, l.1+4}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2} +Change: ``The position and the \u{height} of the line +produced by the |\ul| command can be customized using either +|\setul| or |\setuldepth|\,. The command |\setul| takes two +dimensions as arguments: the position of the line in relation to the +baseline and the \u{height} of the line. + +\erroronpage{92}{para -1}{FMi}{2004/07/31}{2} +Add: ``\ldots can use colored rules instead and, if desired, modify the +highlighting color\u{ as demonstrated below}: + +\erroronpage{95}{exa 3-1-33}{MHo/FMi}{2004/05/17}{2} + Replace: ``setup'' by ``set-up'' for consistency. + +\erroronpage{102}{para 1, l.-3}{CBC}{2004/05/18}{2} + Replace: ``in great \u{of} detail'' with ``in great detail''. + +\erroronpage{103}{l.8}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2} + Replace: ``arbitrary bad lines'' \> ``arbitrar\u{il}y bad lines'' + +\erroronpage{105}{para -3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2} + Replace: ``typesetting'' \> ``typing'' + + + +\erroronpage{107}{l.3--7}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{4} + |\linespread| is the \LaTeXe\ command for + setting up the value of \comando{\baselinestretch}; it is not necessary + to use |\renewcommand| and in particular it is not necessary to + activate the new interline spacing by changing font; it suffices the command + |\selectfont|; the procedure described in this paragraph, + although still possible, was the one to use with \LaTeX\,209 and with the + early versions of \LaTeXe, and it was the only way when the First Edition was + published. The command |\linespread| is introduced the first + time on page~204, but section 3.1.13 was the right place to do it. + + +\erroronpage{107}{para 4, l.3}{HjG}{2004/05/25}{2} + Delete word: ``\ldots\ single\u{ (default)}, \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{107}{para -1, l.3--5}{DHL/FMi}{2004/06/07}{2} + Add/change: + ``\ldots leading is increased twice---once by |\baselineskip| (where + \LaTeX{} already adds about 20\% space between baselines)\ldots'' \> +``\ldots leading is \u{effectively} increased twice---once by |\baselineskip| (\u{which + \LaTeX{} already sets to about 20\% above the font size})\ldots'' + + +\erroronpage{116}{Footnote 1, line 1}{CBC}{2004/05/18}{2} + Replace: ``I managed to confuse'' with ``we managed to confuse''. + +\erroronpage{117}{para 2, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/25}{2} + Missing letter: ``It take\u{s} two \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{117}{para 3, l.3}{CBC}{2004/05/18}{2} + Tense correction: ``\ldots they did not change when the text font + \u{was} modified''. + +\erroronpage{117}{para 3,l.-3}{FMi}{2004/05/31}{2} + Change: ``your list consist of'' \> ``your list\u{s} consist of''. + +\erroronpage{117}{para 3,l.-2}{CBC}{2004/05/18}{2} + Change: ``lists consist\u{s} of'' \> ``lists consist of''. + +\erroronpage{117}{footnote}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + Missing word: ``See, \ldots, the \textsf{ledmac} package [171] + \u{for} the kinds of \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{119}{para 2, l.1}{DHL}{2004/06/07}{2} + Replace word: ``By default, the footnote text is \u{justified}\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{121}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/05/25}{2} + Missing word: ``the \texttt{symbol*} \u{option}'' + +\erroronpage{124}{middle para, ll. -3/-2}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + Missing word: ``It is even possible \u{to} use \ldots'' + +\iffalse +%% only do if real error on page +\erroronpage{125}{para 3 of \S 3.2.7, ll.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{} + Word position: ``\ldots\ whenever |\endnote| or |\endnotemark| + \u{is used} without an optional argument.'' +\fi + +\erroronpage{127}{para 3, l.last}{PYu}{2004/07/01}{2} + Replace: ``ragged left'' \> ``ragged right''. + +\erroronpage{131}{footnote, l.1}{CBC}{2004/05/19}{2} + Change: ``is not producing'' \> ``does not produce''. + +\seriouserroronpage{141}{syntax box}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + Replace: + \emph{body-font} \> \emph{body-style}\\ + \emph{head-font} \> \emph{head-style}\\ + \emph{head-after-format} \> \emph{head-after-space} + +\erroronpage{142}{exa 3-3-21/22}{UZi}{2005/03/15}{} + With the newest version of \texttt{amsthm} the font setting for the headline + is ignored for the optional description of the theorem (looks like a + bug in amsthm). + +\erroronpage{142}{exa 3-3-21}{FMi}{2005/08/15}{4} + There is an incompatibility between \texttt{amsthm} and + \texttt{ragged2e}. If the latter is used then the use of |\newline| + in a theorem declaration doesn't work. + +\erroronpage{142}{para -2, l.1}{DHL}{2004/06/07}{2} + Missing word: ``make'' \> ``\u{to} make''. + +\seriouserroronpage{148}{exa 3-3-26}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + In the example, |\hfil| is used; the text immediately before says: + ``By using |\hfill| \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{150}{exa 3-3-28}{HjG}{2004/05/27}{2} + Nit-picking :-)\\ + Comment should read: ``|%|\quad\texttt{term <\u{=} labelwidth}''\\ + And in ll.2/3 of the text following the example: + ``If the label is \u{smaller} than |\labelwidth|, \ldots'' \> + ``\ldots\ \u{not wider} \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{150}{Example 3-3-28, line 7}{UF}{2004/06/27}{2} +In the code of the parbox there should be a |\mbox{}| or something +similar after the |\\| to prevent an underfull hbox-warning. + +\erroronpage{150}{exa 3-3-28}{JBez}{2004/07/20}{} + The vertical space above "Return values" is too small. + +\erroronpage{151}{para 3, l.2}{DHL}{2004/06/07}{2} + Wrong word: to match the example, + ``\textsc{Notes}'' should be ``\textsc{Note}'' + +\erroronpage{152}{l.-1 before exa 3-4-2}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2} + Replace: ``(see page 167)'' \> ``(see page 168)'' + +\erroronpage{155}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2} + Replace: ``behaves similarly to'' + \> ``is much like'' + +\erroronpage{155}{para -2, l.5}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2} + Replace: ``behave in similar fashion to'' + \> ``\ldots in \u{a fashion similar} to'' + +\erroronpage{156}{para -1, l.4}{CBC}{2004/05/20}{2} + Change: ``There is also the possibility to operate'' \> ``It is also + possible to operate''. + +\erroronpage{157}{para 2, l.-4}{CBC}{2004/05/20}{2} + Change: ``\ldots discussed below) are potentially'' \> ``\ldots + discussed below) \u{is} potentially''. + +\erroronpage{158}{para3, l.3}{DHL/FMi}{2004/06/07}{2} + Change word: ``tiny white rules \u{behind} the lines'' \> ``tiny white + rules \u{between} the lines''. + +\erroronpage{166}{syntax box}{CAR}{2004/06/02}{2} + Remove extra space: ``\ldots\verb*/}=/\u{~}\emph{data}\texttt='' + +\erroronpage{167}{para 1, l.2}{DAl}{2005/01/11}{4} + Missing letter: ``\ldots bold italic face exi\u{s}ts.'' + +\erroronpage{168}{para 3, l.2}{MLa}{2004/05/10}{2} + Letter missing: ``While on\u{e} can successfully deploy a + package\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{169}{tab.~3.7}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + Spurious space: ``Pascal (\u{ \strut}Borland, \ldots)'' + +\erroronpage{169}{tab.~3.7}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/21}{2} + Move the information about blue entries to a separate table note. + +\erroronpage{173}{para 2, l.2}{FMi}{2004/11/11}{4} + Typo: ``to indicate that the line was artific\u{i}ally broken'' + +\erroronpage{175}{para 1, l.6}{FMi}{2005/02/22}{4} + Replace: \textsf{inputenclistings} \> \textsf{inputenc} + +\erroronpage{177}{exa 3-5-1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/31}{2} + In the first paragraph, the ``\ldots \verb*=.\para='' yields a + single (sentence ending) interword space; but in the following + three, ``\ldots \verb*=. \para='' yields doubled space. + (Due to the leading space in the definition of |\para|.) + The same problem is in exa 3-5-2 except that there is does not show + in the output due to a linebreak. + +\seriouserroronpage{177/178}{ll.-2/-1/1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/01}{2} + Missing word and references to wrong paragraphs of exa 3-5-2:\\ + ``The line numbers in the second |\marginpar| continue the + numbering on the main vertical list (the last line of \u{first} + paragraph was~5) and the \u{second} paragraph then continues with + line number~9.'' + \\ \> + ``\ldots\ (the last line of \u{the} \u{preceding} paragraph was~5) and + the \u{third} paragraph \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{179}{exa 3-5-5}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2} + In the first paragraph, the two instances of + ``|\linelabel{|\ldots|}|\verb*= \sample='' + yield double (sentence ending) interword space. + (Due to the leading space in the definition of |\sample|.) + +\erroronpage{179}{Example 3-5-5, l.-2}{CBC}{2004/05/20}{2} + Change: ``we see to refer to'' \> ``we see references to''. + +\erroronpage{182}{para 2, l.-2}{CBC}{2004/05/20}{2} + Change: ``of an \verb=\Parallel..Text='' \> ``of \u{a} + \verb=\Parallel..Text=. + +\erroronpage{182}{para 3, l.1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/31}{2} + ``computer \u{lingua}'' \> ``computer \u{jargon}'' + +\erroronpage{182}{exa 3-5-11}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/31}{2} + Small improvement:\\ + |\setlength\parindent{|\u{\texttt{-10pt}}|}| \> + \ldots \u{\texttt{\char`\{-\char`\\leftskip\char`\}}} + +\iffalse only on some books +\erroronpage{183}{exa 3-5-13}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{} + Printing problem: + ``|[|'' in ``|\begin{Parallel}[v]{}{}|'' only half visible. +\fi + +\erroronpage{184}{footnote 1, l.1--2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} + Rewrite beginning: ``Although the \textsf{multicol} package is + distributed under LPPL (\LaTeX{} Project Public License)~[111], for + historical reasons its copyright contains an additional ``moral + obligation'' clause\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{189}{para 3, l.2}{MHo}{2004/05/08}{2} + Spurious extra letter: ``If this is a + possibility, \texttt{multicols}\u{t} produces a warning.'' + +\erroronpage{189}{para -2, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2} + Extra word: ``bars in the margin, \u{the} known as \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{189}{par -1, l.4/5}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2} + Add comma: ``However, if \ldots\ another\u{,} the \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{190}{}{FMi}{2004/06/13}{2} + Editorial comment: changes for page 189 affect page break position + so 190 has to be retypeset for second printing. + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 4} + +\erroronpage{196}{table 4.2}{YiL}{2012/05/07}{} + The values shown in the table aren't any quite correct. These days + some of them are calculated depending on the chosen paper size option + and so have slightly different values from what is listed in the table. + The values listed are those that have been used in 2.09 (i.e., they + would be fully correct in compatibility mode, that is for documents + starting with |\documentstyle|). + +\erroronpage{199}{code block}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2} + Change: + \texttt{\u{1in}+}|\oddsidemargin+\textwidth+\evensidemargin|\texttt{\u{+1in}} + + +\erroronpage{202}{para 3, l.4}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2} + Change: ``list-related parameter'' \> ``list-related parameters''. + +\erroronpage{202}{para 3, l.4}{PYu}{2004/07/07}{2} + Remove surplus word: ``in \u{in} figure 3.3'' + +\erroronpage{203}{para 3, l.3}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2} + ``one or the other criteri\u{a}'' + \> ``\ldots\ criteri\u{on}'' (singular) + +\seriouserroronpage{205}{para 2, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2} + Delete backslash: ``an option of the type + \u{\texttt{\char`\\}}\emph{num}|headlines|'' + +\erroronpage{205}{para 3, l.1}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2} + Swap words: ``header \u{is size} enlarged'' \> ``header \u{size is} + enlarged''. + +\erroronpage{205}{para 4, l.4}{CAR}{2004/06/06}{2} + Delete word: ``\ldots taken up by the binding\u{ method}. For + example,\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{205}{para 5, l.2}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2} +Omitted word: ``one can \u{perform} the parameter calculations''. + +\seriouserroronpage{205}{para 5}{FMi}{2004/06/06}{2} +Append: For details see the KOMA-Script documentation. + +\seriouserroronpage{205}{Example 4-2-6, 1.3}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2} +Add a comment line: ``\verb=% syntax: \typearea[<binding corr.>]{<slices>}='' + +\erroronpage{206}{para 2, l.6}{FMi}{2004/06/06}{2} + + Replace: ``\ldots shows a layout \u{identical} to the one + produced\ldots'' \> + ``\ldots shows a layout \u{very similar} to the one produced\ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{206}{para 2, l.6}{HjG}{2004/05/31}{2} + Wrong references:\\ + ``Example \u{4-2-4} on page \u{204}'' \> + ``Example \u{4-2-5} on page \u{205}'' + +\erroronpage{209}{para 1, l.1--2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} + Replace: + ``\ldots and does not leave sufficient space for marginal notes + that fall outside the page.'' + \> + ``\ldots but does not adjust the size of the marginal boxes to fit + in the remaining margin.'' + + +\erroronpage{210}{para -1, l.3}{CBC}{2004/05/21}{2} + Omitted word: ``allow you \u{to} set several values''. + +\erroronpage{211}{para 4, l.6}{FMi}{2004/08/30}{4} + Add: ``\ldots be called multiple times \u{in the preamble}, + each time overwriting the previous settings.'' + +\erroronpage{212}{para -1, l.2}{CKr}{2004/11/11}{4} + Remove surplus: ``the \emph{logical} page + \u{you} you want to produce.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{213}{para 1, l.2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} + Option \texttt{executive} is listed twice, replace once with + \texttt{letter}. + +\erroronpage{213}{para 2, l.1}{CKr}{2004/11/11}{4} + Typo: ``The following example sets up an artific\u{i}ally small logical page'' + +\erroronpage{213}{para 1, l.1--2}{FMi}{2006/09/09}{4} + Option \texttt{b3} is listed twice. + +\erroronpage{213/214}{exa 4-2-11/13}{FMi}{2004/06/05}{2} + The picture (|rosette.ps|) is clipped a tiny bit at the left side. + That's actually an error in the |.ps| file itself and can be seen + in all other examples where the file is used. + +\seriouserroronpage{214}{para 1, l.6}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} + ``\ldots\ \texttt{notext} \ldots'' should be ``\ldots\ + \texttt{nographics} \ldots''. + +\erroronpage{217}{para -2, l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/08}{4} + Replace (since the package's default is different):\\ + Finally the \u{en dash} between the prefix and the page number \dots\ \>\\ + Finally the \u{separator} between the prefix and the page number \dots + +\erroronpage{219}{l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2} + Missing italic correction: + \verb=\=\emph{name}\verb=mark= + +\erroronpage{219}{para -1,l.2}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4} + Reference to wrong section:\\ + ``Table~9.2 on page~547 in Section~\u{9.1.3}'' \>\\ + ``Table~9.2 on page~547 in Section~\u{9.2.1}'' + (or omit section refence completely) + +\erroronpage{223}{tab 4.3}{THa}{2004/06/22}{2} + Spurious space after superscript \textsuperscript{a} in footnote. + +\erroronpage{226}{para. 5, l.2}{PYu}{2004/07/05}{2} + Change to plural: ``The headers and footers are typeset \u{in boxes} + that, by default, \u{have} the same width as |\textwidth|\,. The + \u{boxes} can be made wider (or narrower)\ldots'' + + +\erroronpage{227}{para 2,l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4} + Replace: + ``running \u{heading}'' \> + ``running \u{header}'' + +\erroronpage{227}{para 3,l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4} + Replace: + ``the \u{heading} is extended'' \> + ``the \u{header} is extended'' \> + +\erroronpage{229}{2.-1}{CBC}{2004/05/24}{2} + Change: ``if the first B-head\ldots would have already been'' \> ``if + the first B-head\ldots had already been''. + +\erroronpage{229}{para -2,l.-2}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4} + Replace: + ``the \u{heading}'' \> + ``the \u{header}'' + +\erroronpage{230}{exa 4-4-3}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4} + Add |%| character: + ``|\fancyfoot[R]{\scriptsize\today}|\texttt{\u{\char`\%}}'' + +% not a bug, but heh ho +\erroronpage{232}{ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2} + Add words: ``With a similar mechanism we prepared \u{the running + headers of} the index for this book.'' + +\erroronpage{232}{ll.1/2}{CKr}{2004/11/17}{4} + Remove surplus: ``With a similar mechanism we prepared \u{the} the running\ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{234}{First boxed command}{CBC}{2004/05/24}{2} + Change: ``\verb=\enlargethispage*{=size\verb=}='' \> + ``\verb=\enlargethispage{=size\verb=}=''. + +\erroronpage{237}{para 1, l.3}{MKo}{2004/08/06}{2} + Change: ``\textsf{scrpage}'' \> ``\textsf{scrpage2}'' + +\erroronpage{237}{para 4, l.3}{DAl}{2005/01/11}{4} + Change: ``also works as \u{an} replacement'' \> ``also works as + \u{a} replacement'' + +\erroronpage{237}{para 5, l.2}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} + Change: ``14pt'' \> ``17pt'' + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 5} + +\erroronpage{239}{para -1, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2} + Extra word: ``After \u{a} taking a quick look \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{241}{Example 5-1-1}{CBC}{2004/05/24}{2} + + Change: ``esprit trouble'' \> ``esprit troubl\'e''. + +The whole example has been changed to better demonstrate +the \verb|\kill| command. + +\erroronpage{242}{para -2}{DSch/FMi}{2005/09/19}{4} + Replace para with: +``The \texttt{tabular*} environment has an additional width argument that +specifies the required total width of the table. +It needs stretchable spaces between columns, that have to be added using +|\extracolsep| (see page~246).'' + +\iffalse +%% check, maybe (if other error +\erroronpage{243}{para 1, l.3/4}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{} + Change: ``Their scope can be \u{general} or local.'' + \> ``\u{global}'' +\fi + +\erroronpage{243}{}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{4} + The explanation of the command \comando{\arraystretch} is + wrong; in fact it does not multiply the inter-row space by the specified + factor, so that a factor of 1.5 would move the rows 50\% farther apart. + \comando{\arraystretch} scales by the specified factor the height and depth of + the invisible strut that is in the first cell of every row of tabular and array + environments. If all the cells of the row are smaller than the strut the effect + is more or less similar to an enlargement of the inter-row space, while if at + least one cell in the row is larger than the strut no spreading apart takes + place other than that required by the largest cell. + + + +\erroronpage{243/244}{tab.~5.1/5.2}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2} + In the left columns of these tables, typewriter font should be used + for the braces, to better match the appearance in the syntax boxes. + +\erroronpage{244}{tab.~5.2}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2} + 1. In the |m| row, the braces in |\parbox|\u{\{}\emph{width}\u{\}} + are not from the typewriter font, as they are in the |b| row.\\ + 2. In the |>| and |<| rows, the |p|, |m|, and |b| options are + listed once without and once with their |{..}| arguments. + +\seriouserroronpage{244}{para -1, l.3--4}{FMi/DCa}{2005/02/05}{4} + Replace: ``the sum of its value, + added to the product + |\baselineskip|${}\times{}$|\arraystretch}|'' + \> + `` $|\arraystretch| \times (|\extrarowheight| + 0.7 |\baselineskip|)$'' + + +\erroronpage{246}{para 3}{FMi}{2005/09/19}{4} + Add blue marginal note: ``Making \texttt{tabular*} stretch to the + required width'' + +\erroronpage{246}{para 3, l.3/4}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2} + Change: + ``The use \ldots\ is subject\u{ed} to two restrictions: \ldots'' + \> ``\ldots~subject \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{247}{exa 5-2-9}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} + Add hyphenation points for |Possibi\-li\-t\'es| + +\erroronpage{248}{para 1}{FMi}{2005/09/19}{4} + Replace para with: ``A + common use of |@{}| is to remove the space equal to +the value of |\tabcolsep| (for \texttt{tabular}) that, by default, +appears on each side of the table, +except when the column specification starts or ends in a \verb=|=.'' + + +\erroronpage{249}{exa 5-2-11}{FMi}{2004/07/27}{2} + Add hyphenation points for |Possibi\-li\-t\'es| + +\seriouserroronpage{249}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2} + Change: + ``\ldots\ the \textsf{array} package \texttt{m} and \u{\texttt{t}} + types, \ldots'' + \> ``\ldots\ \u{\texttt{b}} \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{252}{para 2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2} + Missing word: ``\ldots\ the last entry in \u{a} row \ldots''\\ + Missing word: ``This specification may \u{be} saved \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{252}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2} + Either add: ``The |X| columns are set using the |p| column + \u{type}, \ldots''\\ + or change (cf.~l.2: an |m| column): ``\ldots\ using \u{a} |p| + column \ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{257}{syntax box~2}{HjG}{2004/06/03}{2} + Typo: ``\texttt{\char`\\botto\u{m}caption}'' + +\erroronpage{261}{para 3, l.3}{HPB/FMi}{2004/07/16}{2} +Add: ``\ldots may be typeset using + \u{the packages \textsf{array} and} \textsf{longtable} \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{262}{para -1, l.2}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/04}{2} + Missing characters: + ``in standard \LaTeX{}\u{'s} \textsf{article} class'' + +\erroronpage{270}{exa 5-6-7}{DCa}{2004/07/22}{2} + Spurious `` d'' after ``Beef'' should be deleted. + +\seriouserroronpage{270}{para 3 l.1}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2} + Change: |\botrule| \> |\bottomrule| + +\seriouserroronpage{271}{para 3}{FMi}{2004/12/17}{4} + Replace para by: ``By default, the rule extends all the way to the left, but is + ``trimmed'' from the rightmost column by the length specified in the + length parameter |\cmidrulekern|. The optional (\emph{trim}) + \u{argument may contain the characters + \texttt{l} and \texttt{r}, + indicating that the rule} + \u{is to be trimmed from the left or right, respectively.} + Each \texttt{l} and \texttt{r} may optionally be followed by a width + argument \u{specified using \texttt{\{}\emph{widths}\texttt{\}}}, + in which case the rule is trimmed by this amount rather than by the default + |\cmidrulekern|. + + +\seriouserroronpage{271}{syntax box~1}{HjG}{2004/06/04}{2} + Argument is optional, not mandatory: + |\addlinespace|\texttt{\u[}\emph{width}\texttt{\u]} + +\erroronpage{273}{para 3, l.3}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + Missing word: ``not accounted for \u{by} |\multirow|'' + +\seriouserroronpage{278}{para 2, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + Replace: ``Section 6-3-4'' \> ``Example 6-3-4'' + +\erroronpage{279}{list, item 1}{CKr}{2004/11/30}{4} + Correct typo: ``forced line b\u{r}eaks.'' + + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 6} + +\erroronpage{283}{para 2, l.5--8}{FMi}{2005/01/15}{4} +Replace with: ``We then continue by + explaining how you can define and use your own floating environments (Section~6.3.1), + or, conversely, how captioning commands can be used to enter + information into the list of figures and tables for nonfloating + material (Section~6.3.2). + Then methods for rotating the content of a float are described + (Section~6.3.3). + +\erroronpage{284}{}{FMi}{2005/01/15}{4} + Editorial comment: needs reprinting since one line moved from + 283 to the current page. + +\erroronpage{285}{item 3, l.3}{FMi}{2005/02/13}{4} + Use typewriter: ``the default is \texttt{12pt} + \texttt{plus} \texttt{2pt} \u{\texttt{minus}} + \texttt{2pt} for 10\,pt'' + +\erroronpage{285}{item 3, l.3}{HjG}{2005/02/06}{4} + Default for 12pt document size is given wrong:\\ + ``\texttt{\u{14pt} plus 2pt minus 4pt}'' \> + ``\texttt{\u{12pt} plus 2pt minus 4pt}'' + +\erroronpage{285}{item 3, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/05}{2} + Should be singular: ``for 12pt document size\u{s}).'' + +\erroronpage{285}{item 7, l.3}{HjG/FMi}{2005/02/06}{4} + Replace (as it is rubbish): + ``(the default is like |\textfloatsep| on a text page, + but is |8pt plus 2fil| on a page that contains only floats)'' \>\\ + ``(the default is like |\textfloatsep|)'' + +\erroronpage{288}{para -1, l.4--7}{DAr/FMi}{2004/07/23}{2} + Replace part with: +``However, by itself this option +forces all floats to appear \emph{before} the next section material is +typeset, since the |\FloatBarrier| prevents a float from a current + section from appearing below +the start of the new section, even if some material of the current +section is present on the same page. '' + +\erroronpage{292}{para 4, ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/05}{2} + Replace: ``combination \u{to}'' \> ``combination \u{of}'' + +\seriouserroronpage{292}{para -1, l-2}{FMi}{2005/01/08}{4} +Add sentence: + ``Because the float styles define the placement of the caption, +floats can contain only a single \verb=\caption= command which is a +restriction compared to standard \LaTeX's behavior.'' + +Also add marginal warning: ``Only one \verb=\caption= supported'' + + +\erroronpage{293}{para 1, l.3}{J-CCh}{2005/06/01}{4} +Remove surplus char: ``package documentation in +\texttt{float\u{s}.dtx}.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{293}{exa 6-3-1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/05}{2} + Wrong command used (or misplaced opening brace) in preamble code:\\ + |\newcommand\xmlcode[1]{\|\u{\ttfamily ttfamily}|{#1}}| + \>\\ + |\newcommand\xmlcode[1]{\|\u{\ttfamily texttt}|{#1}}| \\ + only by chance this doesn't do any harm in the example! + +\erroronpage{293}{exa 6-3-1}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{4} +The Euler constant must be typeset in roman type according +to the ISO rules; $e$ is the charge of the electron. + +\erroronpage{294}{exa 6-3-3}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/05}{2} + The picture (|rosette.ps|) is clipped a tiny bit at the left side. + That's actually an error in the |.ps| file itself and can be seen + in all other examples where the file is used. + +\erroronpage{295}{para -2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/05}{2} + Missing word: ``The |[H]| \u{float} is \ldots'' + + +\erroronpage{298}{para 1, l.4}{AMa}{2005/01/13}{4} + The word ``caption'' should be should typeset in sans serif. + +\seriouserroronpage{298}{para 3, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2} + Missing argument: ``|\newfloat{XMLexa}|% + \u{\texttt{\textbraceleft\meta{placement}\textbraceright}}|{lox}|'' + +\erroronpage{299}{para 2, ll.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2} + Missing word: ``so that it \u{is} not worth'' + +\erroronpage{301}{exa 6-4-2}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2} + Misspelled word (both in source and output):\\ + ``\texttt{ex-\u{s}ample}'' \> ``\texttt{ex-ample}'' + +\seriouserroronpage{302}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2} + Missing argument: ``|\newfloat{XML}|% + \u{\texttt{\textbraceleft\meta{placement}\textbraceright}}|{lox}|'' + +\erroronpage{304/305}{exa 6-4-4}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2} + The |\FIG| command is different from the one from + exa 6-4-3 (p.303). + Add a line:\\ + |\newcommand\FIG{\includegraphics[width=10mm]{elephant}}|\\ + in the preamble part of the example's source.\\ + (But that will probably spoil your hand-optimized page breaks. --- + Actually it will improve them: by getting the example larger on + line will carry over from 304 to 305 avoiding the widow there + without changing that page otherwise) + +\erroronpage{307}{l.-4}{HjG}{2005/02/12}{4} + Surplus closing brace:\\ + ``|\makebox[\linewidth][c]{\usebox\@tempboxa}|% + |\par|\texttt{\u\textbraceright}|% single line|'' + +\iffalse +\erroronpage{307}{l.3--4}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{} +The Runaway error may be explained in a better way: the + \emph{short-text} cannot exceed one paragraph; the \emph{long-text} may be + several paragraphs long; if the optional argument \emph{short-text} is missing + the \emph{long-text} replaces it, therefore the macros that should process the + single paragraph \emph{short-text} get terribly shaken and produce the Runaway + argument error. A reference to Appendix~B and the long\slash short definition + of commands should be helpful. +\fi + +\erroronpage{309}{para 4, l.3}{DAl}{2005/06/29}{4} + Missing comma: ``\ldots you will get a typical ``standard \LaTeX'' + format\u{,} that is, \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{312}{\texttt{position} option}{JS/FMi}{2005/09/14}{4} + State that key \texttt{bottom} is the default. + +\erroronpage{312}{para 2, l.2}{DAl}{2005/06/29}{4} + Word in wrong position: ``for example, ``above'' the caption if + caption is \u{the} placed at the bottom.'' + \> + ``for example, ``above'' the caption if \u{the} caption is \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{317}{para -4, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/06}{2} + Extra letter: ``The \textsf{subfig} package\u{s} \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{319}{para 1, l.5}{C-JCh}{2005/06/10}{4} + Incorrect right quote: ``numbers like ``11.3\u{''}\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{319}{para 2, l.3}{C-JCh}{2005/06/10}{4} + Incorrect right quote: ``such as ``Figure 1(a-c)\u{''}.'' + +\erroronpage{321}{exa 6-5-13, l.2}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/06}{2} + Change value: + ``|listofindent=4em|'' \> ``|listofindent=5em|''.\\ + Looks better and also makes description on page 320 correct. + +\erroronpage{321}{para 3, l.2}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2} +Remove: ``approach is to \u{to} specify\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{326}{para -1, l.4}{DAl}{2005/07/14}{4} + Missing letter: ``floats appear to\u{o} close to each other\ldots'' + + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 7} + +\erroronpage{332}{para -2,l.2}{THa}{2004/07/21}{2} + SinCE SEriFS arE noT alwayS horizonTaL: ``Serifs are the tiny + horizontal strokes\dots'' \> ``Serifs are the tiny strokes\dots'' + +\erroronpage{338}{para -1, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2} + Missing word: ``command \u{and} declarative forms'' + +\erroronpage{341}{para -2, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2} + Missing comma: ``such as |\OE|\u, to lowercase).'' + +\erroronpage{342}{tab 7.1}{CBe/FMi}{2004/07/27}{2} + Add footnote: ``\textit{The actual sizes shown above are those specially + tailored for use in this book}'' + +\erroronpage{347}{para 2, l.5+6}{JS/FMi}{2006/11/08}{s} +Replace: ``\u{Computer Modern Typewriter and} +Computer Modern Sans \u{have} only bold extended variants.'' +\> + ``\u{In contrast} Computer Modern Sans \u{has} only bold extended variants.'' + +\erroronpage{349}{Table 7.4}{AFV}{2008/08/08}{} +The font associated with the command |\mathtt| is a sans typewriter font. This +differs from nearly all TeX set ups where the math typewriter font is Computer +Modern Typewriter. + +\erroronpage{349}{para -1, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2} + Missing comma: + ``\ldots\ where commands, such as |\rm|\u, would cause \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{351}{para -2, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2} + Surplus word: + ``\ldots\ belongs to the text \u{the} surrounding the formula.'' + +\erroronpage{353}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2} + Replace: + ``\u{Extended} Computer Modern'' \> + ``\u{European} Computer Modern'' + +\erroronpage{354/355}{marginal 3}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Should be on top of page 355. + +\erroronpage{354}{table caption}{AFV/FMi}{2009/01/5}{} + Replace: ``Classification of the Computer Modern font families'' \> + ``Classification of \u{most} Computer Modern font families'' + as not all fonts are listed. + +\erroronpage{355}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/29}{2} + Missing character: ``on\u{e} can simply exchange'' + +\erroronpage{356}{para 2, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/30}{2} + Correct: ``\u{ZE}-fonts'' \> ``\u{EZ}-fonts'' + (Index entry is OK!) + +\erroronpage{357}{exa 7-5-5, last line}{RSt}{2004/05/26}{2} + Reference [174] instead of [175]. + +\erroronpage{357}{exa 7-5-5}{HjG}{2004/06/30}{2} + Add page entries for ``Clasen, Matthias'', ``Vieth, Ulrik'', and + ``Ziegler, Justin'' to ``People'' index (pp.1080+1082) + +\erroronpage{357}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/30}{2} + Add word: + ``Clearly, no one wants to type \u{text} like this \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{358}{para -1, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/30}{2} + Change word order:\\ + ``The list of \u{currently} \u{supported encodings} by + \textsf{inputenc} \ldots'' \>\\ + ``The list of \u{encodings} \u{currently supported} by + \textsf{inputenc} \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{359}{several places}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} + Replace: ISO-8859 \> ISO 8859 + +\erroronpage{360}{item 8}{CKr}{2004/12/30}{4} + Replace: Next Computer encoding \> Ne\u{XT} Computer encoding + +\erroronpage{360}{item 9}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} + Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 + +\erroronpage{360}{para -1}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} + Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 (several times) + +\erroronpage{361}{para 2+3}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} + Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 (several times) + +\erroronpage{361}{l.-14}{CBe/FMi}{2004/07/27}{2} + Replace: ``preamble or the document class'' \> + ``document class, a package, or in the preamble'' + + +\erroronpage{362}{l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/30}{2} + Swap phrases:\\ + ``\ldots\ the user \u{in the preamble} \u{to load still + more encodings}.'' \\\>\\ + ``\ldots\ the user \u{to load still more encodings} + \u{in the preamble}.'' + +\erroronpage{362}{para 1, l.1}{SCo}{2004/05/17}{2} + Printing problem in some books: ``still'', second `l' only half visible. + +\erroronpage{367}{para 2, l.3}{CKr}{2005/01/03}{4} + Wrong font: ``old-style numerals by simply switching to the \u{\texttt{TS1}}'' + +\erroronpage{368}{para -4, l.3}{HjG}{2004/07/01}{2} + Change:\\ + ``\ldots\ only. \u{Only} real errors will be shown.'' \>\\ + ``\ldots\ only. \u{However,} real errors will be shown + \u{on the terminal}.'' + +\erroronpage{370}{para 2, l.-1}{RSt}{2004/05/26}{2} + Replace: ``ran run'' with ``\u{you ran}''. + +\erroronpage{370}{para 4, l.5}{HjG}{2004/07/06}{2} + Add: ``\ldots\ in one of the three \u{text font} categories.'' + +\erroronpage{371}{para 1, l.4}{HjG}{2004/07/06}{2} + Add: ``\ldots, such as via a call to |\usefont|\u{ (see Example + 7-6-1 below)}.'' + +\erroronpage{373}{first line of 7.6.1}{UFi}{2004/07/31}{2} + Remove ``the \u{the} fonts'' + +\erroronpage{373}{first para, l.-1}{BeB}{2004/06/28}{2} + ``collection'' is (at least seems to me) singular:\\ + Typo: ``appear'' \> ``appears'' + +\erroronpage{374}{`Bookman', l.1}{HjG}{2004/07/08}{2} + Typo: ``Bookman was originally design\u{ed} \ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{380}{para 1, l.4--5}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} + Better show octal numbers: ``\ldots starting positions like + \texttt{'254}, \texttt{'266}, \texttt{'300}, and \texttt{'312} + (i.e., in octal notation) in\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{380}{exa. 7-6-10}{J-CCh}{2005/07/06}{4} + Replace: AGEWMET\u{P}HTOS \> AGEWMET\u{R}HTOS + +\erroronpage{386}{para -1, l.2}{RWa}{2004/05/31}{2} + Replace ``the X Window\u{s} system'' with ``the X Window \u{S}ystem''. + +\erroronpage{387}{para -1, ll.3/4}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{2} + Missing word: ``\texttt{0.87478} should \u{be} used''\\ + +\iffalse +% no idea if we can fit that in: +\erroronpage{387}{para -1, ll.3/4}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{} + Value for 12\,pt? +\fi + +\erroronpage{388}{tab. 7.14}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{2} + Row~1: Thickness of vertical line between first two columns too + wide (printing problem). + +\erroronpage{388}{tab 7.14, l.-2}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4} + Missing space between ``m,'' and ``bx'' in the middle column. + +\erroronpage{391}{tab. 7.15}{FMi}{2004/07/09}{2} + Row~1: Thickness of vertical line between first two columns too + wide (printing problem). + +\erroronpage{391}{tab 7.15, l.-2}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4} + Missing space between ``m,'' and ``bx'' in the middle column. + +\erroronpage{392}{tab 7.16, l.3}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4} + ``(bx)'' should be moved to the second column. + +\erroronpage{393}{tab 7.17, l.3}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4} + Missing space between ``(it),'' and ``sc'' in the third column. + +\erroronpage{395}{exa 7-7-20}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2} + Commands need to be swapped to match text:\\ + ``|\gothfamily| Swab'' \> ``|\swabfamily| Swab''\\ + ``|\swabfamily| Gothic'' \> ``|\gothfamily| Gothic'' + +\erroronpage{395}{exa 7-7-21}{TSS}{2004/05/25}{2} + The ``s'' in word ``dies'' should be the ``short s'' (ligature + ``s:'') since it occurs in a syllable-final position. +% others wrong??? +%According to page 765 of "The World's Writing Systems" (edited by P.T. +%Daniels and W. Bright, ISBN 0-19-507993-0, Oxford University Press, +%1996), a syllable-final "s" in fraktur text should be the "short s". + +\erroronpage{396}{para 3, l.5}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Should be: ``\ldots on the \u{third} line.'' + +\erroronpage{396}{exa 7-7-22}{TSS}{2004/05/25}{2} + The ``s'' in word ``dies'' should be the ``short s'' (ligature + ``s:'') since it occurs in a syllable-final position. + +\erroronpage{403}{para 1, ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{2} + Change: ``by using \u{G}lyph \u{C}hart'' + \> ``by using \u{the} \u{g}lyph \u{c}hart''\\ + (cf.\ para 3, l.1) + +\erroronpage{405}{para 3, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2} + Missing word: + ``of \u{the} International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA)'' + +\erroronpage{405/406}{ll.-1/1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2} + Move closing parenthesis:\\ + ``\ldots (based on \ldots\ by Donald Knuth, \ldots \u).'' \> \\ + ``\ldots (based on \ldots\ by Donald Knuth\u), \ldots \,.'' + +\erroronpage{406}{exa 7-8-11}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{2} + Add comma (?): ``|k\ae{}t|\texttt{\u,}'' + +\erroronpage{407}{para -2, l.1}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} + Missing word: ``With popular fonts designed for use with \TeX{}, + the euro symbol \u{is} usually available\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{413}{para -2, l-1}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{4} + ``local guide''; I believe this is an obsolete concept, dating back to + the times when \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ were used on multitasking mainframes; + commercial distributions might still have a ``local guide'', but I have never + seen one. + + +\erroronpage{414}{footnote}{hv}{2008/10/30}{} +Replace: |\pcharpath| \> |\pscharpath|. + +These days the package |pst-char| has been integrated into |pst-text|. + +\erroronpage{416}{tab. 7.27}{HjG}{2004/07/09}{2} + Uppercase vs.\ lowercase in entries for \texttt{T3} and + \texttt{TS3}:\\ + ``\LaTeX{} \u{P}honetic \u{A}lphabet encoding'' $\leftrightarrow$\\ + ``\LaTeX{} \u{p}honetic \u{a}lphabet encoding'' + +\erroronpage{417}{para 4, l.6}{HjG}{2004/07/10}{2} + Correct case: + ``\ldots\ in front of it. \u For example,'' + +\erroronpage{418}{para 2, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/07/10}{2} + Add: + ``a typewriter font \u{in medium series} with italic shape'' + +\erroronpage{420}{table 7.28}{CKr}{2005/04/08}{4} + For consistency: ``narrow'' \> ``\u{N}arrow'' + +\erroronpage{420}{para 1, l.6}{FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} + Replace: ISO-9660 \> ISO 9660 + +\erroronpage{426}{para 1, l.-2}{CKr}{2005/01/17}{4} + Remove surplus: ``\ldots---other declarations that use this \u{the} + font will benefit automatically.'' + +\erroronpage{426}{para 1, last sentence}{CAR}{2005/01/22}{4} + Replace with following sentence: + ``This may seem like a strange usage but it has the advantage that when + such additional + fonts become available you will need to change + only one font shape group declaration---all declarations that + refer indirectly to these fonts will then benefit automatically.'' + + +\erroronpage{426}{para 5}{HjG}{2004/07/10}{2} + Surplus word: ``\ldots, this function \u{it} writes \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{426}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/07/10}{2} + Add word: ``The \u{third} argument'' + +\erroronpage{428}{item 6}{CKr}{2005/01/18}{4} + Replace: ``Specified the quad width'' \> ``Specifie\u{s} the quad + width'' + +\erroronpage{432}{para 4, l.9}{HjG}{2004/07/11}{2} + Not plural: ``\ldots: the outer text size\u{s} and the three math + sizes for this text size.'' + +\erroronpage{433}{l.-10}{HjG}{2004/07/11}{2} + Not start of a sentence, hence \> lowercase: + ``\u{a}nd are usually placed in an \texttt{.fd} file.'' + +\erroronpage{441}{para 5, l.1}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} + Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 + +\erroronpage{442}{footnote, l.2}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + Sentence begins with lowercase 's'. + +\erroronpage{443}{para 1, l.1--2}{FMi}{2005/06/10}{4} +Replace the parentheses with: ``(for the latter people sometimes use +the single character \verb="=\,, but this is incorrect as it may +produce a straight double quote, i.e., ")'' + +\erroronpage{443}{para 3, l.4}{CKr}{2005/01/21}{4} + Correct order: ``Instead, these commands have been implemented in + \u{such a} way that \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{444}{para 2, l.4}{DAl}{2005/08/01}{4} + Missing word: ``\ldots associates the number 224 \u{with} the +command |\alpha|.'' + +\erroronpage{445}{para 4, ll.3--5}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2} + Move closing parenthesis:\\ + ``\ldots, which normally denote certain accents (i.e., + are encoding-specific commands, but \ldots\ environment\u).'' + \\ \> \\ + ``\ldots, which normally denote certain accents (i.e., + are encoding-specific commands\u), but \ldots\ environment.'' + +\erroronpage{446}{footnote, l.1}{CKr}{2005/01/21}{4} + Correct order: \ldots ``\textthreesuperior'' \u{was a} + math glyph---comprehensible? + +\erroronpage{447}{Heading}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} + Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 + +\erroronpage{451}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2} + Wrong number: + ``\texttt{\u{'240}} octal'' \> ``\texttt{\u{'344}} octal'' + +\erroronpage{453}{para 2, l.2}{DAl}{2005/08/01}{4} + Missing word : ``\ldots an \emph{LICR-object} that is \u{to} be +used whenever\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{455}{para 3, l.-1}{JCh}{2004/07/17}{2} + Typo (characters need to be swapped): + ``L\u{CI}R'' \> ``L\u{IC}R'' + +\erroronpage{457}{tab. 7.33}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2} + Wrong sort order (table rows need to be swapped):\\ + |\OE| $\leftrightarrow$ |\O| -- cf.\ |\o| and |\oe| on p.459 + +\erroronpage{457}{tab. 7.33}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2} + Entry |\`i|: ``(\u{avail})'' \> ``(\u{alias})'' + +\erroronpage{458}{\texttt{\string\copyright}}{FMi/usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + Natively available in LY1 encoding + +\seriouserroronpage{458}{l. 27--30}{JLV}{2005/05/31}{4} + Unfortunately |\guillemotleft|, |\guillemotright|, |\guilsinglleft|, and + |\guilsinglright| have no ``default'' and only function in |OT1| if + \textsf{babel} is loaded + + +\erroronpage{458}{\texttt{\string\k} entries}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + All |\k| entries should be |<constr.>| in LY1 encoding + +\erroronpage{459}{\texttt{\string\r A}}{FMi}{2005/04/09}{4} + |\r A| is |<constr.>| in OT1 encoding + +\erroronpage{459}{\texttt{\string\r} entries}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + All |\r| entries should be |<constr.>| in LY1 encoding + +\erroronpage{459}{\texttt{\string\textcelsius}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + Default from |constr./TS1|. + +\erroronpage{460}{\texttt{\string\textcopyright}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + Natively available in LY1 encoding + +\erroronpage{460}{\texttt{\string\textdiv}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + Natively available in LY1 encoding + +\erroronpage{460}{\texttt{\string\texteuro}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + Defined in the newer versions of the encoding (but not available in + all fonts!) + +\erroronpage{460}{tab. 7.33}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2} + Wrong sort order (table rows need to be swapped):\\ + |\textdblhyphenchar| $\leftrightarrow$ |\textdblhyphen| + +\erroronpage{461}{\texttt{\string\textlnot}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + Natively available in LY1 encoding + +\erroronpage{461}{\texttt{\string\textpertenthousand}}{DAl}{2005/08/01}{4} + Constructed in T1 encoding + +\erroronpage{461}{\texttt{\string\textperthousand}}{DAl}{2005/08/01}{4} + Constructed in T1 encoding + +\erroronpage{461}{\texttt{\string\textpm}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + Natively available in LY1 encoding + +\erroronpage{461}{table, l. -12}{usw}{2004/05/24}{2} + ``\verb=\textquotedblleft=" is indented by accident. + +\erroronpage{462}{\texttt{\string\texttimes}}{usw}{2005/01/11}{4} + Natively available in LY1 encoding + +\erroronpage{462}{tab. 7.33}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2} + Wrong sort order (table rows need to be swapped):\\ + |\textthreequartersemdash| $\leftrightarrow$ |\textthreequarters| + +\erroronpage{463}{para 1, ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/28}{2} + Add: ``prior \u{to} 1990'' + +\erroronpage{463}{para 1, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/28}{2} + Change: + ``\ldots integrated in \u{1993})'' \> + ``\ldots integrated in \u{1994})'' + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 8} + +\erroronpage{465}{para 4, ll.2+4}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2} + Add page entry for ``Swanson, Ellen'' to ``People'' index + (p.1082). \\ + Add page entry for ``Knuth, Donald'' to ``People'' index + (p.1081). + + Editorial comment: no need for reprinting this page. + + +\erroronpage{466}{para 2, ll.3+6}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2} + Add page entry for ``Spivak, Michael'' to ``People'' index + (p.1082).\\ + Add page entry for ``Jones, David'' to ``People'' index + (p.1081). + +\erroronpage{466}{para 3 l.1}{UFi}{2004/06/04}{2} + Remove comma: ``Michael\u, would have been\ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{468}{para 3, ll.10+11}{JTa}{2004/08/31}4{} + Extra closing brace after the second argument of + \texttt{\textbackslash newenvironment} on both lines. + +\erroronpage{471}{para 2, l.4}{VPe}{2004/06/02}{2} + Extra word: ``\ldots this change \u{can} are discussed\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{478}{exa 8-2-19}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} +Poor Maxwell's equations! No doubt there are mathematical + physicists or physical mathematicians that write Maxwell's equations that way. + This is a good example for showing some capabilities of the + \textsf{amsmath} package and its possible extensions by means of the + \comando{\newenvironment} command, but it is an example where all possible ISO + rules are violated! Physical equations deal with quantities, not with + mathematical variables; and quantities have dimensions; as such they have to + comply with the rules established by the Sisth\`{e}me International (SI) and the + various obsolete ``cgm'' systems are officially deprecated; the partial + derivative sign $\partial$ has exactly that meaning and it cannot substitute + the ``nabla'' $\nabla$ sign; finally the $j$ symbol probably indicates the + current density, but in an equation that does not comply with the ISO rules it + might indicate the imaginary unit (which, on the opposite, is prescribed to be + typeset in roman or upright shape as well as $\pi$); treating with vectorial + quantities these should be well marked either with a vector math accent or + must be set in bold italic; with variables depending from four quantities the + apex for indicating the derivative is not univocal for specifying the quantity + with respect to which the derivative is taken. I repeat: the example is good + for describing the math extension capabilities but it could induce the casual + reader to believe that this is the correct form for writing down the Maxwell's + equations; unfortunately it is not. + +\erroronpage{480}{para -2, ll.8/9}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2} + ``(there must be no space before the \texttt[)'' --- why?\\ + (Would be ignored by \TeX{} as the end of the cs-name!) + + Deleted this text. + +\erroronpage{484}{para 3, ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2} + Add word: ``\ldots\ the \texttt{equation} \u{environment} is +\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{488}{para 1, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2} + Add word: ``\ldots\ as a subscript \u{or} superscript.'' + +\erroronpage{488}{para 1, l.1}{FMi}{2005/04/23}{4} + Replace word: ``Note that both \u{environments} \ldots'' + \> ``Note that both \u{structures} \ldots'' (as one is a command) + +\erroronpage{489}{para -2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/20}{2} + Missing closing parenthesis: ``(see Section 8.5.3\u)'' + +\erroronpage{489}{exa. 8-3-9.1}{DAl}{2005/08/21}{4} + The third array actually only needs \texttt{c} as preamble even + though \texttt{cc} is not wrong. as empty columns on the right are ignored + +\erroronpage{491}{para -2, l.3}{BMo}{2004/05/21}{2} + Replace: ``aside'' \> ``at the side'' + +\erroronpage{493--95}{ll.-1/-2}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2} + Perhaps a note regarding the defaults should be added:\\ + ``The first two parameters, \emph{ldelim} and \emph{rdelim}, are + the left and right delimiters, respectively. + \u{They must be either both empty or both non-empty;} + \u{to place a single delimiter, use a period ``\texttt.'' on the + ``empty'' side.}'' + + Editorial comment: affects pagebreaks for 494/95 as well + +\iffalse % more blue align stuff +\erroronpage{498}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} + Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. +\fi + +\erroronpage{499}{\S 8.6.2}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2} + Change section heading: ``Operator \u{and function} names'' + +\iffalse % more blue align stuff +\erroronpage{500}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} + Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. +\fi + +\erroronpage{501}{exa 8-6-4}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2} + Surplus word (in source comment):\\ + ``\texttt{\% the old \u{the} definition of \textbackslash csc}'' + +\erroronpage{507}{footnote}{CKr}{2005/02/16}{4} + Good try but wrong word: ``Technically this is due to the denominator being + wider than the \u{numerator} in this case\ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{508}{table 8.6, col.5}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + The bad alignment (in some books) of the blue color probably makes + the illustrations in this column useless. + +\iffalse % more blue align stuff +\erroronpage{510}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} + Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. +\fi + +\erroronpage{511}{marginal note}{MHe}{2004/05/22}{2} + Swap words: ``\ldots change \u{the existing} math font + set-up'' + +\erroronpage{512}{para 3, l.6}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2} + Surplus closing brace: + ``|\bm{\alpha}|\texttt{\u\textbraceright}'' + +\seriouserroronpage{513}{Figure 8.1}{LSchu}{2004/05/22}{2} + Text font is Times, but should be Computer Modern (rather + embarrassing that). + +\erroronpage{513}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2} + Change: ``In this section show a sample text'' \>\\ + ``In this section \u{we} show a sample text'' + +\iffalse % more blue align stuff +\erroronpage{513}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} + Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. +\fi + +\erroronpage{515}{para 1, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2} + Wrong reference: ``Figure~8.3'' \> ``Figure~8.2'' + +\erroronpage{515}{para -1, l.1}{BMo/CAR}{2004/05/21}{2} + Replace: ``The Metafont versions of Concrete Roman and Math\ldots'' + \> ``The Metafont versions of Concrete, both Roman and Math,\ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{516}{fig.~8.6}{CKr/FMi}{2005/02/18}{4} + The txfonts have the symbols |\succapprox| and |\precapprox| in the + wrong position in the fonts. + Until the fonts are corrected one can manually fix the problem by + redeclaring them after loading the \texttt{txfonts} package, i.e., +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage{txfonts} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\succapprox}{\mathrel}{AMSb}{119} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\precapprox}{\mathrel}{AMSb}{118} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{517}{footnote}{FMi}{2005/06/03}{4} + Y\&Y has unfortunately folded and their domain was taking over by a + seller for ``latex'' clothing (interesting isnt it?). + Some information about Y\&Y can be found at + \texttt{https://www.tug.org/yandy}. + +\seriouserroronpage{518}{fig.~8.9}{CKr/FMi}{2005/02/18}{4} + The pxfonts have the symbols |\succapprox| and |\precapprox| in the + wrong position in the fonts. + Until the fonts are corrected one can manually fix the problem by + redeclaring them after loading the \texttt{pxfonts} package, i.e., +\begin{verbatim} +\usepackage{pxfonts} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\succapprox}{\mathrel}{AMSb}{119} +\DeclareMathSymbol{\precapprox}{\mathrel}{AMSb}{118} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{521}{para 2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/26}{2} + Missing interword space: ``Section\u~7.6.1'' + +\erroronpage{521}{footnote}{FMi}{2005/06/03}{4} + Y\&Y has unfortunately folded and their domain was taking over by a + seller for ``latex'' clothing (interesting isnt it?). + Some information about Y\&Y can be found at + \texttt{https://www.tug.org/yandy}. + +\seriouserroronpage{523}{figure 8.16}{MHe}{2004/05/22}{2} + The symbols to the left and right of ``Q(t)'' in the middle of + the figure are wrong (this is + actually a bug in the informal math set-up which has now been + corrected). + +\erroronpage{523}{figure 8.16, caption}{BMo}{2004/05/21}{2} + Replace: ``Info Math fonts'' with ``Informal Math fonts''. + +\erroronpage{523}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/26}{2} + Change:\\ + ``The HV math fonts \u{are} designed at MicroPress'' \>\\ + ``The HV math fonts \u{have been} designed at MicroPress'' + +\erroronpage{524}{para 1, ll.4--6}{HjG}{2004/06/27}{2} + Change:\\ + ``This \u{package} extends the \ldots\ font collections\u{ and} + should normally be loaded \ldots'' \>\\ + ``This \u{font} extends the \ldots\ font collections\u{; the + corresponding \textsf{stmaryrd} package} should normally be loaded + \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{524}{para 2, l.7}{HjG}{2004/06/27}{2} + The text states: ``\u{\raisebox{1ex}{\scriptsize(\emph{kernel})}} + identifies symbols \ldots''. However, later on only + ``\u{\raisebox{1ex}{\scriptsize(\emph{ker})}}'' is used. + [E.g., Table~8.10 on page~527 (|\hbar|) + and Table~8.11 on page~528 (|\angle|).] + +\erroronpage{524}{para 2, l.-3}{HjG}{2004/06/27}{2} + The text speaks of ``Alphabetic symbols'' -- but the referenced + Table~7.30 on page~435 calls it ``Alphabet character''~!? + +\erroronpage{524}{exa 8-9-1}{HjG}{2004/06/27}{2} + The |fleqn| option is used, but in the output, the two equations + seem to be right aligned rather than left aligned!\\ + Indeed true: this is because in \textsf{amsmath} the |\mathindent| + added on the left is + actually a rubber length (see page 471) that is automatically + shortend if there is not enough space. + +\iffalse % more blue align stuff +\erroronpage{524}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} + Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. + +\erroronpage{525}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} + Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. +\fi + + +\erroronpage{526}{para -1, l.1}{CKr/FMi}{2005/02/20}{4} +Change: ``The unaccented ASCII Latin letters and Arabic + numeral digits (see Table~8.8) \u{all} referred to\ldots'' + \> ``\ldots \u{are} referred to\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{527}{para 2, l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/21}{4} + Replace:\\ + ``in the first \u{columns} of Table~8.9'' \> + ``in the first \u{rows} of Table~8.9'' + +\erroronpage{527}{para 2, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/27}{2} + Change: + ``Similarly, the list of lowercase Greek letters \u{there is} + no omicron'' \>\\ + ``Similarly, the list of lowercase Greek letters \u{contains} + no omicron'' + +\iffalse % more blue align stuff +\erroronpage{528}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} + Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. +\fi + + \erroronpage{527}{table 8.10}{BMo/CAR}{2004/05/21}{2} + This table would be + better if reordered, in particular so that the first row + contains: \verb=\aleph \beth \gimmel \daleth=. This would + make the this text correct: ``The first four [entries in + table 8.10] are Hebrew letters.'' + + +\erroronpage{527,528}{table 8-10/11}{FMi}{2006/08/09}{s} + Added the missing symbol from amssymb: |\circledR|, |\yen|, + |\checkmark|, and |\maltese|. + + The general distribution of symbols between the two tables is a bit + questionable, but this will stay as it is. + +\erroronpage{528}{table 8-11}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2} + Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table + entries. + +\erroronpage{528}{table 8.11}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{} + |\dag| and |\ddag| are |\mathord|s not |\mathbin| as claimed in table + 8.13. + + +\seriouserroronpage{529}{table 8.12, l.3}{JGr}{2004/06/10}{2} + \verb=\mathring{x}= is missing its accent. + +\erroronpage{529}{para 1, l.2}{CKr}{2005/04/24}{4} + Replace: ``looked up |\neq|'' \> ``looked up |\ne|\u{\texttt{g}}'' + +\erroronpage{530}{table 8-13}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2} + Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table + entries. + +\erroronpage{530}{table 8.13}{LHe}{2008/02/08}{} + |\dag| and |\ddag| are not |\mathbin|s, hence don't belong in this table + and they + aren't (as claimed in legend) synonyms of |\dagger| + and |\ddagger| respectively. + +\erroronpage{531}{table 8.15}{BMo/FMi}{2004/05/21}{2} + The commands starting with |\var...| are only partially in blue to + indicate their relationship with those commands missing the ``var'' in their + names. But this is more confusing than helpful, so they are now made + fully blue. + +\seriouserroronpage{531}{table 8.15}{CAR/FMi}{2004/06/05}{2} + |\obar| is listed twice while |\obslash| (also from stmaryrd) is missing + +\erroronpage{531}{table 8-15}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2} + Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table + entries. + +\seriouserroronpage{532}{tables 8-16, 8-17}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2} + Since |\precsim| is not a negated symbol, it should be moved from + Table~8-17 to Table~8-16, where its sibling |\succsim| already + lives. + +\erroronpage{532}{tables 8-16/17}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2} + Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table + entries. + +\erroronpage{532}{table 8.17}{CKr}{2005/02/22}{4} + Add: ``\ldots or, \u{if} flagged\ldots'' + +\iffalse % more blue align stuff +\erroronpage{533}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} + Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. +\fi + +\erroronpage{533}{tables 8-18/19}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2} + Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table + entries. + +\iffalse % more blue align stuff +\erroronpage{534}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} + Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned (horizontally). +\fi + +\erroronpage{534}{table 8-20}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2} + Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table + entries. + +\erroronpage{534}{tab. 8.20}{HjG}{2004/06/28}{2} + 1. |\hookleftarrow| is listed twice.\\ + 2. Some ``compound'' symbols have different line widths in their + ``head'' and ``tail'' parts: + |\Longleftarrow|, |\Longmapsfrom|, |\Longmapsto|, |\Longrightarrow|. + + +\erroronpage{534}{table 8-21}{MBr}{2004/08/02}{2} + Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table + entries. + +\erroronpage{535}{table 8-22/23}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2} + Various deviations from alphabetical sort order of the table + entries. + +\erroronpage{537}{table 8-27}{DIs/FMi}{2006/08/09}{s} + Added the four missing delimiters from amssymb: |\llcorner|, |\lrcorner|, + |\ulcorner|, and |\urcorner|. Updated the table note and galley text accordingly. + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 9} + +\erroronpage{540}{para -2, l.6}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} + Replace: ISO-8859-x \> ISO 8859-x + +\erroronpage{540}{para -1, l.4}{FMi}{2004/07/20}{2} +Plural: ``Clearly, 8 bits \u{are} not sufficient\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{541}{para 1, l.-2}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} + Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 + +\seriouserroronpage{543}{table 9.1}{MHe/JBr}{2004/06/10}{} + The Babel implementation on the CD is missing the australian and + newzealand + options. If you need them, download a new version of Babel. + +\erroronpage{543}{table 9.1}{JBr/WaS}{2004/07/31}{2} + Replace: ``\texttt{english}, \texttt{USenglish} + (\texttt{\itshape american}, \texttt{\itshape canadian}), \texttt{UKenglish} + (\texttt{\itshape british}), \texttt{australian} (\texttt{\itshape + newzealand})'' + + Add footnote: ``\textit{The option \texttt{\upshape english} + combines American hyphenation patterns + with a British date format.}'' + + +\erroronpage{545}{exa 9-2-1}{JAn}{2005/09/09}{4} + The quotes surrounding R\'ef\'erences and Chapitre + should be the french ones: use |\og| and |\fg{}|. And similar those + around German words should use |"`| and |"'|. + + +\erroronpage{546}{para 3, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2} + Typo: ``pattern\u{s}'' + +\seriouserroronpage{548}{para 2, l.4}{UFi}{2004/06/03}{2} + Replace: |\aliasshorthand{"}{/}| should be \verb=\aliasshorthand{"}{|}= + +\erroronpage{549}{para 1, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2} + Characters should be in `typewriter font' (as in l.2):\\ + ``\,``;'' and ``?''\,'' \> ``\,``|;|'' and ``|?|''\,'' + +\erroronpage{550}{para -2, l.1--2}{CKr}{2005/02/28}{4} + Correct: ``Some are + meant to ease typing, wher\u{e}as others\ldots'' + + +\erroronpage{551}{tab 9.3}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{} + I am surprised that in Russian there is no word for ``Glossary''. + + Frank: It most certainly exits :-), but right now Babel doesn't + know about it---so there is nothing we can do about it at the + moment. Actually the same problem exists with Polish, although here + I got a translation ``s\l{}ownik termin\'ow'' which will eventually + find its way into Babel. + +\erroronpage{552}{exa 9-3-4}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} + The words \texttt{i"lusio} and il$\cdot$lusio in the example are + incorrect. They should be \texttt{i"lusi\string\'o} and il$\cdot$lusi\'{o} + respectively %(ref: TB 14-3-252-259) + + +\seriouserroronpage{553}{para 4}{UFi}{2004/06/03}{2} + + Replace with: ``Another popular shorthand is |"-|, which indicates a + hyphenation point (like |\-|), but without supressing + hyphenation in the remainder of the word:'' + +\erroronpage{553}{exa 9-3-8}{FMi}{2004/06/03}{2} + Replace the example body with: +\begin{verbatim} +\fbox{\parbox[t]{1cm}{minister"-president}} \quad +\fbox{\parbox[t]{1cm}{minister\-president}} \quad +\fbox{\parbox[t]{1cm}{ministerpresident}} +\end{verbatim} +to show the differences between |"-|, |\-|, and no hyphen. + +\erroronpage{553}{exa 9-3-9}{FMi}{2004/06/03}{2} + Replace the example body with: +\begin{verbatim} +1. \present{Gutenberg-Universit"at} +2. \present{Gutenberg"-Universit"at} +3. \present{Gutenberg""Universit"at} +4. \present{Gutenberg"=Universit"at} +5. \present{Gutenberg"~Universit"at} +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{554}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2} + Replace: ``|~n~|\meta{letter}'' \> ``|~n|'' + and ``|~N~|\meta{letter}'' \> ``|~N|'' + +\erroronpage{554}{exa 9-3-11}{UFi/MGo}{2004/06/03}{2} + Replace body with: + ``|En fran\c{c}ais on doit mettre un \fg petit espace\fg\| + |devant la ponctuation double: comme cela!| + \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{556}{item 2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2} + Remove: + ``\ldots\u{, with the addition that also \texttt{'u} and + \texttt{'U} are made available}.'' +\iffalse +auf s.556 unten (1. item) steht, dass der ' fuer Catalan mit allen +vokalen verwendet werden kann; das gilt auch fuer Galician (2. item); +deswegen macht der u.g. nebensatz wenig sinn, denn U gehoert ja zu den +vokalen! -- war vielleicht 'N gemeint? (aber auch das wird bei +Galician schon erwaehnt!) +\fi + +\erroronpage{556}{para 4, l.2}{UFi}{2004/06/03}{2} + Correct spelling: ``\ldots optional \u{because} the acute accent has\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{557}{exa 9-3-19}{FMi/JBe}{2005/03/20}{4} + Replaced the example text with a spanish example showing 3 levels of + quotations. + +\erroronpage{558}{para -1, l.2}{UFi}{2004/06/03}{2} + Add comma: ``day, month\u, year'' + +\iffalse % alternative (but needs to change two pages) + Replace: + ``\ldots |\hebdate| to translate any Gregorian date, given \u{the three + arguments \emph{day}, \emph{month}, + and \emph{year},} + into a Gregorian date in Hebrew.'' +\fi + +\erroronpage{561--562}{para 2, l.-1; para 2, l.1}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} + The number 999999 (and 1000, in the second instance) should not + be written with a period as thousands-separator as this is + confusing for readers used to a different convention. + +\erroronpage{562}{para 2, l.1+2}{FMi/DPa}{2004/07/24}{2} + Change: ``digits \u{before the decimal point} are expressed'' \> + ``digits \u{denoting multiples of a thousand} are expressed'' + +\erroronpage{563}{l -18/-17}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{4} +The non zero \texttt{lccode} for the apostrophe is not + a speciality of the Italian language; this non null assignment is made at least + also for Catalan and for French; it should be done for all languages that use + the apostrophe for replacing an elided vowel. + +\seriouserroronpage{564}{table 9.5}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Add a note that the definition of \verb=\th= conflicts with its standard + definition as the LICR object ``\th{}'' (thorn). + +\erroronpage{564}{tab. 9.5}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/18}{2} + In the `Serbian' column, ``|\sh| sh'' is listed twice; + replace the second instance with ``|\arsh| arsh''. + +\erroronpage{564}{para -1, l.5}{ERy}{2004/08/06}{2} + Change: ``helpfull'' \> ``helpful'' + +\erroronpage{565}{line 1}{JGr}{2004/06/16}{2} + Missing space in: Anotherlayout + +\erroronpage{569}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Misspelled name: + ``Andrew Janishe\u{w}sky'' \> ``Andrew Janishe\u{v}sky'' + (This affects p.1081, too!) + +\erroronpage{571}{l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Replace: ``UNIX-like'' \> ``UN*X-like'' + (to match spelling elsewhere in the book) + +\erroronpage{571}{ll.3+4}{MKu/FMi}{2004/08/03}{2} + Change: ``ISO-IR-111'' \> ``ISO-IR~111'' \\ + and ``ISO-IR-144'' \> ``ISO-IR~144'' + +\erroronpage{571}{para 4}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Code page ``|mnk|'' listed twice. + +%\erroronpage{572}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} +% Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. + +\erroronpage{573}{descr. env.}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Items \texttt{T2B:} and \texttt{T2C:} ``Crimean~Tatar'' \> ``Crimean-Tatar'' + +\erroronpage{573}{para 3, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Typo: ``pac\u{ak}ge'' \> ``pac\u{ka}ge'' + +\erroronpage{574}{para 6, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Replace: ``The |cb| font use\u{s} \ldots'' + \> ``The |cb| font\u{s} use \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{574}{para 7, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Replace: ``translation'' \> ``transliteration'' + +\erroronpage{575}{tab 9.7}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} + I do not recognize my \texttt{grmn1000} font table; at least + it is incomplete compared with the one that has been uploaded on CTAN in 2002, + well ahead of the publication of this Second Edition. + + (Unfortunately an older tfm file was used so that some glyphs do not + show up in the table) + +\erroronpage{576}{tab. 9.9}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Replace: ``Diaresis'' \> ``Dia\u{e}resis'' + +\erroronpage{576}{tab 9.9}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} +|<'otan| does not produce the Greek word on its right, + which was by mistake obtained with |<'o|\texttt{\'otan} + +\erroronpage{576}{tab 9.10}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} + In the first line all the examples with upper case letters + are wrong in the sence that these glyphs cannot appear in real text, + hence they are removed. + The last two lines are wrong with both lower and upper case + letters. The former error implies a hiatus between an initial capital letter + and a preceding vowel that by definition of ``initial'' is missing. The latter + error is related to the fact that spirit and accent are separated, the former + to the left of the vowel, the latter over the vowel. + + Part of the problems are due to a missing |\languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}|. + +\erroronpage{579}{table 9.12, l.7}{HjG}{2005/06/02}{4} + Remove extra right brace: ``|\fontfamily{fr}|\u{\texttt{\textbraceright}}'' + +\seriouserroronpage{580}{example file \texttt{language.dat}}{WaS}{2004/06/14}{2} + \u{\texttt{us}}\texttt{english} \> \texttt{\u{US}english}\\ + \u{\texttt{uk}}\texttt{english} \> \texttt{\u{UK}english} + +\seriouserroronpage{580}{\texttt{language.dat} on CD}{WaS}{2004/06/14}{} +The language name problem, i.e., + + \u{\texttt{us}}\texttt{english} \> \texttt{\u{US}english}\\ + \u{\texttt{uk}}\texttt{english} \> \texttt{\u{UK}english} + +is also present in the language.dat file on +the book CD. + +\erroronpage{581}{para 2, l.2}{UFi}{2004/06/04}{2} + Six "languages" are loaded ...: seven? + +\erroronpage{581}{para 1, l.2}{WaS/FMi}{2004/06/14}{2} + Change: ``\ldots loaded first by INI\TeX{}; English in the example + above).'' + \> ``\ldots loaded first by INI\TeX{}); for compatibility reasons this language + should contain US-English hyphenation patterns.'' + +\erroronpage{581}{para 2, l.2}{WaS}{2004/06/14}{2} + Language names are to be corrected according to p.580. + +\iffalse +% no space. do what? probably nothing right now +\erroronpage{581}{para 2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{} + Add a footnote to explain the meaning of the term + ``hyphenation trie''? +\fi + +\erroronpage{583}{para 1, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Wrong number: ``(line 32)'' \> ``(line 34)'' + +\erroronpage{583}{para 1, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Replace: ``\texttt{welsh.\u{sty}}'' \> ``\texttt{welsh.\u{ldf}}'' + +\seriouserroronpage{585}{}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} +The line:\\ + \comando{\adddialect\{austrian\}\{german\}}\\ + and the following one correspond neither to lines 102\textendash 103 of the language + skeleton, nor to the grammar of the \comando{\adddialect} on page 584; this + description as well as the skeleton file apparently require that the language + name be preceded by \comando{\l@}; in facts, for example, + the \texttt{germanb.ldf} contains the line:\\ + \comando{\adddialect}\comando{\l@austrian}\comando{\l@german} + +\seriouserroronpage{586}{code line 2}{TSS}{2004/05/26}{2} + Extra closing brace after \verb|\def\germanhyphenmins|. + +\seriouserroronpage{589}{syntax box}{UFi}{2004/06/04}{2} + Change: |\addto\csname[code]| \> |\addto\csname{code}| (wrong braces) + +\erroronpage{591}{para 1, l.5}{UFi}{2004/06/04}{2} + Extra character: ``The third argument, \emph{ex\u{c}ec}, contains\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{592}{para 3, l.2+4}{PPN}{2004/05/25}{2} + Replace: ``Panday'' \> ``Pand\u{e}y'' (sorry) + +\seriouserroronpage{592}{para 3, l.3}{PPN}{2004/05/25}{2} + Replace ``\textsf{bang}'' with ``\textsf{bengali}''. This + package is available on CTAN in the \textsf{languages/bengali/pandey}. + +\seriouserroronpage{592}{para 3, l.4 }{PPN}{2004/05/25}{2} + Replace ``\textsf{denag}'' with ``\textsf{devnag}''. + This package is on CTAN \texttt{languages/devanagari/velthuis}. + +\erroronpage{592}{para 5, l.1}{CKr}{2004/10/15}{4} + Replace: ``E\u{hit}opian'' \> ``E\u{thi}opian'' + +\erroronpage{592}{general remarks}{PPn}{2004/05/25}{} +Additional remarks not for inclusion in the book: For \TeX{}, \LaTeX{} +in languages of India, +there are several nice packages. An overview can be found in the +following {\sc TUGboat} Articles; + +\begin{enumerate} +\item Anshuman Pandey, \textsl{An overview of Indic Fonts for \TeX{}}, +{\sc TUGboat} Volume 19, Number 2 / June 1998 115---119 +\item Anshuman Pandey, \textsl {Typesetting Bengali in \TeX{}}, {\sc +TUGboat} Volume 20, Number 2, June 1999 119---126 +\item C. V. Radhakrishnan, \textsl{A case for \TeX{} in India}, {\sc +TUGboat} Volume 19, Number 1, March 1998, 6---9. +\item Karel P\'{\i}\v{s}ka, \textsl{A conversion of public Indic fonts +from METAFONT into Type I format with} {\sc TeX{}TRACE}, Volume +23, Number 1, 2002, 70---73 +\item +Yannis Haralambous and John Plaice, \textsl{Low-level Devan\=agari +support for Omega-- Adapting {\sf devnag}}, i +Volume 23, Number 1, 2002, 50---56 +\end{enumerate} + +In addition to these articles, TUGIndia has uploaded two +\LaTeXe{} packages (i) Malayalam for \LaTeXe{}, and (ii) Kannada +\LaTeX{}, both available from www.sarovar.org. + +A remark on {\sf devnag} package:-- Originally developed by Frans +Velthuis in 1991, it was upgraded for use with \LaTeXe{} (made +NFSS-complaint), and maintained by a team consisting of Dominik +Wujastyk, John Smith, Anshuman Pandey, Fran\c{c}ois Patte, and +Zden\v{e}k Wagner. Very recently, the project has +been handed over to TUGIndia, for further development, +and as of May 2004, it has moved from sourceforge.net to +sarovar.org. + + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 10} + +\erroronpage{chap.10}{boxed texts}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + In addition to what has been reported elsewhere, here's an overview + of some more inconsistencies in (some of) the ``syntax boxes'' of + this chapter. \\ + With parenthesized arguments, commas are part of the syntax; + hence they should be set in `typewriter font' (???). \\ + The space after these commas should also be uniform. + \\ \vspace{.5\baselineskip} + % + \begin{tabular}{@{}rrllp{44mm}@{}} \hline + page(s) & box(es) & comma & space & remark \\ \hline + 599 & & |\rm| & no & asterisk should be in |\tt| \\ + 602/3 & all & |\rm| & yes & ``...'' vs.\ ``\ldots'' \\ + 606 & 1 & |\rm| & no & ``...'' vs.\ ``\ldots'' \\ + 606 & 2 & |\it| & no & \\ + 607 & & |\rm| & yes & \\ + 608 & all & |\it| & no & \\ + 610 & 1--2 & |\rm| & yes & ``...'' vs.\ ``\ldots'' \\ + 616 & & |\it| & no & \raggedright + also in text after box! \\ + (ll.1+5 in first para) + \tabularnewline + 639 & & |\it| & no & \\ + 641 & 1--2 & $^*$ & no & \raggedright + $^*$various flaws; \\ + see separate error entry. + \tabularnewline \hline + \end{tabular} + + +\erroronpage{596}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Replace: ``is the same as \u{those} produced'' + \> ``\ldots \u{that} \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{597}{para -1, l.-4/-3}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Replace: ``\ldots, in case \u{they are} changed'' + \> ``\ldots, in case \u{it is} changed'' + +\erroronpage{597/598}{para -1, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Delete word: ``which again \u{that} expects one argument.'' + +\erroronpage{599}{boxed text}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2} + The asterisk after |\fancyput| should be centred and the `(' and `)' + should be in typewriter. + +\seriouserroronpage{599}{boxed text}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + Replace brackets by braces. (The \emph{horizontal-material} + argument is not an optional, but a mandatory one.) + +\erroronpage{600}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Replace: ``\u{don't} work'' \> ``\u{does not} work'' + +\erroronpage{600}{exa 10-1-12}{GBa}{2004/07/28}{2} + The optional parameter ``[t]'' in the second example is printed as text +in line (1). + + Remove in code: ``\texttt{[t]}'' + + Append to previous paragraph: ``An optional position argument is not supported.'' + +\erroronpage{601}{l.-17}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} +Add word: Calculating the horizontal and vertical \u{distance} + +\erroronpage{602--603}{all boxed texts}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2} + All the parentheses `(' and `)' (9 pairs in total) + should be in `typewriter font'. + +\erroronpage{604,605,609}{}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + On p.604 (l. -2) and p.605 (ll. 1, 2) we have ``|join| + environment(s)''.\\ + On p.605 (ll. -6, -1) these are called ``|..join| environments''.\\ + On p.609 (para 3, l.5) it's ``|join| environments'' again. + +\erroronpage{606}{para 2, l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/16}{4} + ``The \textsf{epic} \ldots'' \> + either: ``\textsf{epic} \ldots'' + or: ``The \textsf{epic} package \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{606}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Delete comma and move word:\\ + ``This command\u{, which} is a variant \ldots\ command, allows + \ldots'' \>\\ + ``This command is a variant \ldots\ command, \u{which} allows + \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{606}{second boxed text}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2} + Brackets should also be in `typerwriter font'. + +\erroronpage{606}{para -1}{HjG/FMi}{2005/05/19}{4} + The arguments ``\textit{$\Delta$width}'' and + ``\textit{$\Delta$height}'' are mistakenly used in math mode. In + the book that means a different font and different kerning. + +\erroronpage{606--608}{all boxed texts}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2} + All the parentheses `(' and `)' (9 pairs in total) + should be in `typewriter font'. + +\erroronpage{609}{}{FMi}{2004/06/07}{2} + Editorial comment: reprinted see earlier summary entries. + +\erroronpage{610}{first two boxed texts}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2} + All the parentheses `(' and `)' (6 pairs in total) + should be in `typewriter font'. + +\erroronpage{612}{exa 10-1-25}{PYu/FMi}{2004/07/05}{2} + The |\protect| in front of |\footnotesize| (twice) is not necessary. + +\erroronpage{613}{para 1, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2} + Citations disrupt sentence!\\ + ``\ldots\ bundle [48,49] or [57, Chapter~6] for \ldots'' \> \\ + ``\ldots\ bundle \u{(see }[48,49] or [57, Chapter~6]\u)''\\ + and move the parenthesised citations to the end of the sentence. + +\erroronpage{614}{para 1, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Missing closing quotes: + ``the ``extended\u{\strut''} or ``enhanced'' \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{615}{Tab.\ 10.1}{FMi}{2006/10/21}{s} +The important driver ``vtex'' is missing. On the other hand +some of the listed drivers are only of historical interest. + +\erroronpage{616}{boxed texts}{FMi}{2004/05/26}{2} + Corrections as outlined in summary entry above. + +\erroronpage{618}{boxed text}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2} + Replace: ``\textit{key val list}'' \> ``\textit{key/val-list}'' + (also in following text). + +\erroronpage{619}{viewport}{BMo/FMi}{2007/10/20}{s} + Explanation of \texttt{viewport} key changed to better explain that it only + changes the space reserved but doesn't prevent printing the whole graphic + (unless \texttt{clip} is used additionally) + +\erroronpage{620}{editorial change}{FMi}{2007/10/20}{s} + Text changes on previous page results in different page break. + +\erroronpage{620}{para 1, l.1; para 2, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Replace: + ``the first \u{seven} keys'' \> ``the first \u{eight} keys''\\ + ``The first \u{nine} keys'' \> ``The first \u{ten} keys'' + +\erroronpage{620}{para 5, l.2}{FMi}{2005/04/27}{4} + Replace: + ``\ldots in the \u{optional arguments}.'' \> + ``\ldots in the \textit{key/val-list}.'' + +%\erroronpage{621}{page}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{} +% Printing problem: blue color not properly aligned. + +\erroronpage{623}{para 1, l.7}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Delete word: ``some \u{of} key combinations'' + +\erroronpage{623}{boxed text}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2} + Replace: ``\textit{key val list}'' \> ``\textit{key/val-list}'' + (also in following text). + +\erroronpage{630}{para 3, l.3}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2} + Replace: ``the next |\parbox| examples'' \> ``the next + \u{\texttt{tabular}} examples'' + +\erroronpage{631}{para.2, l.6}{FMi/HjG}{2006/10/22}{s} + Ersetze: "`\u{This point} is shown \ldots"' \> + "`\u{This} is shown \ldots"' + +\erroronpage{631}{para -1, l.-1}{JBr}{2004/08/02}{2} + Replace: ``\textit{key val}'' \> ``\textit{key/val}'' + +\erroronpage{632}{fig. 10.2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + The horizontal extent of the box is called ``|length|'' \> + probably better: ``|width|''.\\ + Missing standalone horizontal specs: + ``|[l]|'' $\equiv$ ``|[lc]|''; + ``|[r]|'' $\equiv$ ``|[rc]|''. + +\erroronpage{632}{boxed text}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2} + Replace: ``\textit{key val list}'' \> ``\textit{key/val-list}'' + +\erroronpage{633}{para 1, ll.4/5}{HjG}{2005/05/16}{4} + Add character: ``A matrix \ldots\ appear\u{s} below.'' + +\erroronpage{633}{l.-2}{HjG/DPa}{2004/06/07}{2} + Replace: ``The material in the section can be compared to + Sebastian\ldots'' \> + ``The material in this section is similar to that of Sebastian\ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{633}{example}{HjG}{2006/10/21}{s} + The first column shows incorrect output: instead of x=0mm it uses some + internal default. + +\erroronpage{634}{editorial change}{FMi}{2006/10/21}{s} + Fix on previous page will change page break. + + +\erroronpage{637}{footnote 2}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{2} + Bug in \texttt{url.sty} generated extra space. + +\erroronpage{639}{boxed text}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + The parentheses `(' and `)' should be in `typewriter font'. + +\erroronpage{640}{para -1, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + ``the second |\vector| is truncated'' \> + ``the second |\vector| is not rendered correctly'' + +\erroronpage{641}{first two boxed texts}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + The parentheses `(' and `)' around ``x1,y1'' (3 pairs in total) + should be in `typewriter font'.\\ + All coordinates should be in (math) italic with subscripts + (cf., e.g., pp.607/610): $x_1$, $y_1$, $x_2$, $y_2$. + +\seriouserroronpage{641}{para 2 l.1}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2} + Replace: ``between points (x1,y2)'' \> ``between points (x1,\u{y1})'' + +\erroronpage{641}{syntax boxes}{FMi}{2004/06/01}{2} + The variable parts do not show the right fonts. + +\erroronpage{641}{para 3, l.1}{ReSt}{2005/04/17}{4} + Remove: ``The |\Curve| command\u{s} is similar\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{641}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Second occurrence of mandatory argument should use the same font as + the first one, i.e., ``\textit{m}'' instead of ``\texttt{m}''. + +\seriouserroronpage{641}{para 4, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Change sentence:\\ + ``Like |\linethickness|, it is an absolute value \u{in points} + (i.e., not affected by |\unitlength|)\u{ with the unit omitted}.'' + \>\\ + ``Like |\linethickness|, it is an absolute value (i.e., not + affected by |\unitlength|)\u{, given in any of \LaTeX's units}.'' + +\erroronpage{642}{item 6, l.2}{ReSt}{2005/04/28}{4} + Remove: ``font information \u{information} to allow\ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{643}{para 4, l.3}{MSc}{2004/06/04}{2} + delete ``,and .gif'' + +\erroronpage{643}{para 3, l.1}{FMi}{2005/11/11}{s} + Unfortunately Th\`anh's name is misspelled. The correct spelling + is ``H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh''. + +\erroronpage{643}{para 4, l.5}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{2} +Add: ``\ldots can be converted to PDF by +ImageMagick's \texttt{convert} utility\u{, \texttt{eps2pdf}} (\u{both +of} which call \texttt{ghostscript} +internally), \texttt{Acrobat Distiller}, or\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{646}{l.1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/08}{2} +Add: + ``(If the \texttt{dvi} file contains more than one +page several output files are generated.)'' + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 11} + +\erroronpage{651}{1st example}{PYu}{2004/07/01}{2} + ``Page 9 :'' should be typeset ``Page 9:''. + +\erroronpage{652}{2nd example}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2} + Missing colon: ``Page 22\u{\strut:}'' + +\erroronpage{652}{l.-3}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2} + Surplus words: ``The latter case \u{is for} allows for \ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{654}{para 2 l.7}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2} + Missing |}|: ``like + |\index{\texttt{|\emph{key}|}|\u{\texttt{\textbraceright}} and'' + + + +%That's a nice one: somehow the copy-editor has but the output is one +%of the few remaining graphics in the book, sigh + +\seriouserroronpage{656}{figs. 11.3+4}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2} + The text on p.649, l.1 claims: + ``Figures 11.3 and 11.4 on page 656 show the input and generated + output of a small \LaTeX{} document, \ldots, together with the + result of including the \textsf{showidx} package \ldots'' + This does not quite hold: There are some differences in the text + and the output of \textsf{showidx} contains some index entries not + present in the source. + +\vspace{.5\baselineskip} + % +\hspace*{-100pt}\begin{minipage}[b]{\linewidth} + \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}} \hline + \multicolumn{3}{c}{Differences in the text} \\ \hline + & source (fig. 11.3) & output (fig. 11.4) \\ \hline + \S1 & \ldots actually written into that file \u{only} \ldots + & \ldots actually \u{only} written into that file \ldots \\ + \S2 & \u{To} prepare the index \ldots + & \u{In order to} prepare the index \ldots\\ + \S2 & \ldots, \u {such as} \ldots + & \ldots, \u{like} \ldots \\ + \S3 & \ldots by \u{the index processor} \ldots + & \ldots by \u{\texttt{makeindex}} \ldots \\ \hline + \multicolumn{3}{c}{Missing index entries} \\ \hline + & \multicolumn{2}{l}{include index} \\ + & \multicolumn{2}{l}{Final production run} \\ + & \multicolumn{2}{l}{makeindex@\texttt{makeindex} program + \emph{(2nd instance)}} \\ \hline + \end{tabular} +\end{minipage} + +\vspace{.5\baselineskip} +The source has now been edited to match the printed output. + + +\erroronpage{656}{}{CBe}{2004/07/27}{s} + How horrible the page rotated counterclockwise! + +\erroronpage{657}{\texttt{-p} item, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2} + Add word: ``\ldots the three \u{special} cases \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{660}{tab 11.1, note}{JMH}{2005/08/06}{4} + Swap the words ``single'' and ``double'' + +\iffalse +% not a bug make it look nicer +\erroronpage{661}{tab. 11.2, right col.}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{} + Inter-line spacing in multiple-line entries ???\\(Keywords: + |headings_flag|, |item_x1|, |delim_0|, |page_precedence|) +\fi + +\erroronpage{661}{tab. 11.2, l.12}{JMH}{2005/08/06}{4} + The identifier referred is ``\texttt{heading\_flag}'', but the + description uses the word ``\texttt{flag}''. + + +\erroronpage{662}{l.6}{RPa}{2004/09/14}{4} + The |-p| option is described on page 657. + + +% in short rnaRA is correct +\seriouserroronpage{664/665}{para -2/-1}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2} + Confusion: default value of |page_precedence|:\\ + In para~\mbox{-2}, l.\mbox{-1}: + ``\ldots; the default is |rRnaA|, as noted in Table~11.2 on + page~661.'' + But in that table, ``|"rnaRA"|'' is given!\\ + In para~\mbox{-1}, l.\mbox{-2}: + ``\ldots\ default |page_precedence| of |rnaRA| \ldots''!\\ + (Also note that the remarks on p.666, para~2, suggest |rRnaA|, + referring to the same table as above.) + +Changed to consistently refer to rnaRA. + +page 666 changed to reflect rnaRA:\\ +`` \ldots\ assumes that pages numbered with lowercase Roman +numerals precede those numbered with Arabic numerals, which in turn +precede those numbered with the lowercase alphabet, uppercase Roman +numerals and finally the uppercase alphabet. + + +\seriouserroronpage{661/664-5}{}{FMi}{2005/08/14}{4} + + Confusion: the changes made in the second printing were wrong! The + default for |page_precedence| is |rRnaA| after all. (Or more + precisely: the program code shows |rnaRA| as the default but that + value is never used and the program logic implements |rRnaA| -- what + a mess.) + + Most of that section rewriten to better explain the limitations of + MakeIndex in the area of ``funny'' page numbers. + + +\seriouserroronpage{666}{para 4 l.5 and l.6}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2} + Add extra visual space in second index: ``Likewise, + \verb*=\index{a space}= and + \verb*=\index{a space}= produce\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{668}{boxed text}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2} + Slight inconsistency (also in subsequent text: para~\mbox{-2}): + File arguments named ``\emph{idx1 idx2 \ldots}'' -- as opposed to + pp.~655 and~674, where they're named ``\emph{idx0 idx1 \ldots}''. + +\erroronpage{669}{para 3}{JS}{2004/07/24}{2} + Since xindy ignores all macros, it has no problems at all with + formatting macros, but more problems with macros producing text. + Substituted this paragraph with: + + ``\texttt{texindy} ignores unknown + \TeX{} commands by default under the assumption that they do not + produce text. It also knows about typical text-producing commands + like \verb=\LaTeX= and \verb=\BibTeX= and handles them correctly. + If you have your own command definition that produces text, or if you + use one supplied by a package, then the entry is sorted + incorrectly. You will either need to specify an explicit sort key + in your index entry, as in \verb=\index{prog@\Prog}=, or write a + \texttt{xindy} style file with a merge rule, as explained in + Section~11.3.4. + + Be aware that producing index entries in arguments of commands has + its own pitfalls, e.g., in + \verb=\command{Properties of \Prog\index{\Prog}}=. + Then \LaTeX{} commands might be expanded + before they are written to the \texttt{idx} file and the placement + in the index will depend on the expansion of \verb=\Prog=.'' + +\erroronpage{669}{para -2, l.3}{MKu/FMi}{2004/07/01}{2}% already done by fmi + Add: ``\ldots \verb|\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}| to all her + documents \u{(or on recent Linux distributions the + option \texttt{utf8})}, while\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{669}{section 11.3.2, para 2, L.3}{JMH}{2005/08/06}{4} +"*her* documents": why a female *her*? + +\erroronpage{670}{table 11.3}{TMW/JS}{2004/06/07}{2} + texindy can only work with Latin scripts out of the box. Removed + all other languages, and checked list of supported languages with + current xindy ``\LaTeX{} Companion Release''. + +\erroronpage{671}{para 2}{JS}{2004/06/07}{2} +Replace with: ``There are about 50 predefined languages available, 35 of them are +readily usable with \texttt{texindy}. They are listed in +Table~11.3 on the facing page; you select one of them with the +\texttt{texindy} option~\texttt{-L}. The other predefined +languages have non-Latin scripts, their usage is described in the +\texttt{xindy} documentation. + + +\erroronpage{672}{table 11.4}{TSS/JS/CAR}{2004/05/26}{2} + The \verb|word-order| module has two essentially equivalent + descriptions. The |letter-order| module doesn't mention that + it's turned on by texindy option \texttt{-l}. Use ``so-called'' as + an example for |ignore-hyphen|. Add table footnote ``When two + entries are identical except for ignored characters, those + characters are not ignored any more.'' + +\erroronpage{673}{para 5, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/10}{2} + Words need to be swapped: + ``multiple \u{characters may} form a unit'' + +\erroronpage{674}{para 1 l.1}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2} + Extra word: ``those \u{of} available'' + +\erroronpage{674/675}{boxed text and item list below}{JS}{2004/07/24}{2} + Add option |[-C codepage]|. Add explanation between option |-L| + and |-q|: ``Use \textit{codepage} as internal base + encoding for sorting. This is used for fine-grained control of language + module selection, needed only for non-Latin scripts.'' + +\erroronpage{675}{example code}{JS}{2004/07/24}{2} + Exchange xindy example style file with one that works. (Half of the + lines were problematic in subtle ways.) + +\erroronpage{679}{example 3, para after the source}{JMH}{2005/08/06}{4} + \texttt{:define-attributes} \> \texttt{define-attributes} + +\seriouserroronpage{679}{descr of theindex}{DSch}{2005/05/23}{4} + Comparing the code in TLC2 with \texttt{book.cls} made me realize +that the |\columnsep| command must come \emph{before} |\twocolumn| in +order to have the desired effect. + +\seriouserroronpage{680}{descr of theindex}{DSch}{2005/05/23}{4} + Comparing the code in TLC2 with \texttt{book.cls} made me realize +that the |\columnsep| command must come \emph{before} |\twocolumn| in +order to have the desired effect. + +\erroronpage{680}{First code block}{AFV}{2006/01/13}{s} + Correct: |\mark|\texttt{\u k}|both| \> + |\markboth| + +\erroronpage{681}{para 1 of \S 11.4.3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + Extra word: ``augments \u{the} \LaTeX's indexing mechanism'' + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 12} + +\erroronpage{general}{several pages}{HVo/FMi}{2004/05/21}{} + The German word ``Schuldrecht'' is incorrectly hyphenated as + ``Schul\-drecht'' in several examples due to the fact that English + hyphenation patterns are used unless the language is + explicitly marked. This is a deliberate effect, see pages 719 and + 733--734. + +\erroronpage{683}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/12}{2} + Missing word: + ``The chapter begins \u{with} a short introduction \ldots'' + + +\erroronpage{684/685}{exa 12-1-2, l.-2 of source}{BMo/FMi}{2004/05/16}{2} + ``But then it might not'' should be ``But then they might not'' + for parallelism with the ``Multiple authors'' to which it is + referring. + + Also changed: ``Multiple authors'' \> ``Entries with multiple + authors'' + so that it is clear that not the authors are a problem (though + come to think of it: given the example's authors\ldots) + +\erroronpage{685}{exa 12-1-1/2}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2} + Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data + base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change + slightly in a reprint. + + +\erroronpage{687}{para 1}{FMi}{2004/08/03}{2} +Add: ``Depending on the layout produced by the class, +it may result in \u{a normal space,} some extra space\u, or in starting a new line.'' + +\erroronpage{688}{figure 12.1}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4} + Replace in first item: |\cite| \> |\citation| + +\erroronpage{690}{entry test97}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/18}{2} + Add ``\texttt{and others}'' to the author field. Otherwise the + example explanations in chapter 13 (pages 793--797) are + partially wrong. + + Editorial comment: This change will affect the output of a + number of examples in chapter 12 as well. + +\erroronpage{691}{syntax box}{HjG}{2004/06/13}{2} + Set commas in `typewriter font' + +\erroronpage{694}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/13}{2} + Missing comma: `\,``see [2--3,7\u,13]''\,' + +\erroronpage{696}{para 1, l.1}{DAl}{2005/08/21}{4} + Missing word: ``\ldots option \u{is} shown in Example 12-2-9\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{697}{para 3, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/13}{2} + Move period: `\,``Ref\u{''.}\,' \> `\,``Ref\u{.''}\,' + +%%\erroronpage{702}{para 2, l.2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{} +%% ``Evidently'' does not seem to me to be quite the right word here. +% +% not convinced yet /FMi + +\erroronpage{705}{exa 12-3-17/18}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2} + Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data + base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change + slightly in a reprint. + +\erroronpage{705}{para 3, l.5}{TMi}{2004/08/27}{4} + Replace ``Geophysics'' with ``Geophysical''. + +\erroronpage{707}{exa 12-3-22}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2} + Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data + base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change + slightly in a reprint. + +\erroronpage{707}{exa 12-3-22, l.-2 of source}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} + ``But then it might not'' should be ``But then they might not'' + for parallelism with the ``Multiple authors'' to which it is + referring. + + Also changed: ``Multiple authors'' \> ``Entries with multiple + authors'' + + +\erroronpage{708}{para 3, l.6}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2} + Replace: ``situati\u{ui}n'' \> ``situation'' + +\erroronpage{708}{para 4, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/14}{2} + Add: ``when using \u{the} \texttt{chicago} \u{\BibTeX\ style}.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{710}{para 4, l.2}{BMo}{2004/05/16}{2} + Replace: + ``locate the printed version.'' \> ``locate the + article within the journal.'' + +\erroronpage{713}{para 1, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/14}{2} + Replace: ``|\citep|'' \> ``|\citealp|'' + +\erroronpage{717}{para 1, l.4}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4} +Add word: ``If you \u{only} want to specify an \textit{annotator}, +\ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{719}{para 4, l.-2/-1}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2} + Extra word: ``the \u{the} journal'' \\ + Correct explanation: ``\ldots the journal name\u{, volume number,} + and year of publication, which is why we got ``TUGboat \u{10 + [}1989\u]''.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{719}{syntax box}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/14}{2} + Order of optional arguments are like |\cite| (i.e., swapped):\\ + |\citetitle[|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}| or + |\citetitle[|\emph{annotator}|][|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}|\\ + |\cite*[|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}| or + |\cite*[|\emph{annotator}|][|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}| + +\seriouserroronpage{722}{para 2, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/14}{2} + Correct explanation: ``\ldots is always ``author name, journal, + \u{volume,} and year''.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{723}{syntax box}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/14}{2} + Order of optional arguments are like with |\cite|:\\ + |\fullcite[|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}| or + |\fullcite[|\emph{annotator}|][|\emph{post-note}|]{|\emph{key(s)}|}| + +\erroronpage{726}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/14}{2} + Delete comma: + ``\ldots\ when used together\u, with \ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{727}{para 3, l.-3}{JBe}{2004/06/01}{2} + Replace: \texttt{\textbackslash jbnovarioref} \> + \texttt{\textbackslash jbignorevarioref} + +\erroronpage{727}{examples 12-5-21/22}{FMi}{2004/06/03}{2} + Not wrong, but it looks funny: due to the chosen example height the + footnote from the previous page (not shown) is partially carried + over so we get ``43311-7'' as the first item in the footnote. That + is the last part of the ISBN number see example 12-5-20. + + Previous page enlarged by one line to avoid this. + \verb|\AtBeginDocument{\enlargethispage*{\baselineskip}}| + added to (hidden) preamble commands. + +\erroronpage{729}{para 1, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/14}{2} + Correct: ``to ``Ibid.\u{, \S\,3}''.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{730}{example 12-5-28}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2} + Citation 7 and 8 are similar, but the description above says + something else... + + To correct this mistake and to better show what happens, the example + was changed to contain a slightly different set of citations (same + change was made to example 12-5-27): +\begin{verbatim} + Full citations: \cite{aschur} \cite{bschur} + not shown on the left! +\newpage + text \cite[\S\,7]{aschur} text + \cite[\S\,8]{aschur} \cite[\S\,16]{zpo} + text \cite[\S\,7]{bschur} \cite{aschur} + text \cite[\S\,3]{zpo} +\end{verbatim} +And the text above the example was changed as follows: + + ``If \texttt{name\&title\&auto} was selected (either implicitly or +explicitly), then the following happens: the first citation of a +publication automatically displays the full entry (citation~5 in the +next example). In case of repeated citations to unambiguous works +only the name of the author(s) are shown (citation~8). For ambiguous citations +this will be done only for immediately following citations +(citation~4). However, if there are +intervening citations, then the name(s) and short titles are shown +(citations~3, 6, and~7).'' + +\erroronpage{731}{para 1, l.4}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/15}{2} + Correct/change to: ``that \u{two} + citation\u{s} \ldots\ \u{are} actually wrong:'' + +\erroronpage{732}{para 3. l.2}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4} +Replace: ``in which case \u{the first} cross-reference \ldots'' +\> ``in which case \u{a} cross-reference \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{734}{para 1, l.2}{CKr}{2005/05/7}{4} + Correct: |\bibgerman| \> |\bib|\u{\texttt s}|german| + +\erroronpage{734}{para 2, l.-1}{CKr}{2005/03/24}{4} + Remove surplus letters: ``get the correct\u{ion} hyphenation.'' + +\seriouserroronpage{741}{l.-5}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2} + Missing closing brace: + |\renewcommand\opcit{\textit{supra}|\u{\texttt{\textbraceright}} + +\seriouserroronpage{743}{item 3}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2} + Equal sign missing: \texttt{sortkey\u{ = }"Bismarck, Otto von"}. + +\erroronpage{744}{exa 12-5-48/49}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{} + There's a spurious space before all occurrences of + ``\textsc{D. E. Knuth}''! \\ This is (partly, ie in the footnote) + due to a missing percent in the definition of |\@realcite| and + |\@printbibliography| in the camel package. Seems that a problem + with the volume parsing in camel is the reason for the surplus + spaces showing up in the bibliography output. Reported to the + author. + +\erroronpage{745}{ll.3/4}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2} + Missing metaness:\\ + ``\ldots\ \texttt{jobname.tts}'' \> + ``\ldots\ \meta{jobname}\texttt{.tts}''\\ + ``\ldots\ \texttt{jobname.lts}'' \> + ``\ldots\ \meta{jobname}\texttt{.lts}'' + +\erroronpage{746}{tab 12.2}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2} + Replace (`bibtopic' column, row 4; `multibib' column, row 7):\\ + ``no'' \> ``No'' + +\erroronpage{746}{Tab. 12.2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} + Change ``Requires tailored .bib files'' \> ``Works with standard + .bib files'' + (and change matching row entries) + +\erroronpage{746}{Tab. 12.2}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} + Change: ``Above typeset together somewhere'' \> + ``Group bibliographies together'' + +\erroronpage{749}{para -1, l.1}{THa}{2004/06/22}{2} + Missing accents: ``Jose Alberto Fernandez'' \> ``Jos\'e Alberto + Fern\'andez'' + +\erroronpage{750}{para -3, l.-2}{CKr}{2005/03/31}{4} + Delete surplus word: ``\ldots as \u{the} the auxiliary files would be + overwritten.'' + +\erroronpage{752}{para 1, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2} + Delete backslash: + ``\ldots in an \texttt{\u\textbackslash article} class).'' + +\erroronpage{753}{para 4, l.5}{HjG}{2004/06/15}{2} + Replace: ``|\bibliography|'' \> ``|\bibliographystyle|'' + +\seriouserroronpage{755/756}{}{THa}{2004/06/21}{2} + Wrong limitation of multibib: The whole passage from ``A final + difference'' up to ``|nocite|.'' should be replaced with something + like: ``The multibib package (since version 2.3 of 2004/01/24) is + compatible with most other packages that provide extensions to the + cite mechanisms, including \textsf{cite}, \textsf{natbib}, and + {jurabib}. Moreover, the package provides a general interface which + allows to add arbitrary extensions of cite commands to be recognized + by \textsf{multibib}.'' + + Editorial comment: change affects pagebreak position. + +\erroronpage{756}{Ex. 12-6-10}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/21}{2} + Replace source text with: + |\LaTeX{} offers an interface to include|\\ + |graphics \citelatex{LGC97}. \LaTeX's|\\ + |default citation scheme is| \\ + |number-only \cite{vLeunen:92}.|\\ + i.e., move/remove the sentence periods. This should not affect the + output as the superscript is moved and double periods are removed. + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 13} + +% perhaps +\erroronpage{758}{para 3, ll.1/2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Delete word: ``\ldots\ to look for + \u{management} tools that help in managing such databases.'' + +\erroronpage{758}{para 4}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/16}{2} + Add+change: ``Once everything is under control, we return in + \u{Section~13.5} to the task of typesetting +and look at how different \BibTeX{} styles can be used to produce +different bibliography layouts from the same input. As there may not +be a suitable style for a particular set of layout requirements +available, Section~\u{13.5.2} discusses how to +generate\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{763}{tab. 13.1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/06/16}{2} + In the explanation for \texttt{misc}, replace:\\ + ``(i.e., the entire field is empty)'' \> + ``(i.e., the entire entry is empty or has only ignored fields).'' + +\erroronpage{764}{para -3, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Add: ``following a field \u{name (and \texttt= sign)}'' + +\erroronpage{765}{tab. 13.2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + In the explanation for \texttt{type}:\\ + l.2: Add word: + ``For the \u{entry} type \texttt{phdthesis} \ldots''\\ + l.3: Punctuation is not part of string: + ``|type = "{Ph.D.} dissertation|\texttt{\u.}|"|'' \> + ``|type = "{Ph.D.} dissertation"|\u.''\\ + l.5: Punctuation is not part of strings:\\ + ``\texttt{chapter = "1.2\u," type = "Section\u."}'' \> \\ + ``\texttt{chapter = "1.2"}\u{ and} \texttt{type = "Section"}\u.'' + +\erroronpage{765}{`key's description, l.1}{JMH}{2005/06/29}{4} +Remove ``cross-referencing'': cross-referencing just uses key appearing in +|\cite| commands. + +\erroronpage{766/767}{several places}{DAl}{2005/09/12}{4} + Replaced ``Miguel Lopez Fernandez'' by ``Miguel Parra Benavides'' + as the original name would really require accents that are not yet + discussed at this point. + +\erroronpage{766}{para 6, l.1 }{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2} + Move comma: Fernandez\u{,''} should be Fernandez\u{'',} + +\erroronpage{767}{l.7}{SPe}{2007/05/21}{s} +``Miguel Parra Benavides'' is missing closing quotes. + +\erroronpage{767}{l.10}{SPe}{2007/05/21}{s} +``Parra'' and ``Benavides'' are missing closing quotes. + +\erroronpage{768}{para 4, l.4}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2} + Replace: ``(see Section 13.2.2)'' \> ``(see below)'' \\ + After all we are in 13.2.2 :-) + +\erroronpage{770}{para 1, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Replace: ``text \u{field} of \BibTeX\ \u{entries}'' \> + ``text \u{part} of \BibTeX\ \u{fields}'' + +\seriouserroronpage{771}{verb. text}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Surplus closing brace: + ``|"\providecommand\url[1]{\texttt{#1}}|\texttt{\u\textbraceright}|"|'' + +\erroronpage{771}{l.-3}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Change: ``different sorting rules from English'' \> + ``sorting rules different from those of English'' + +\erroronpage{772}{l.-5}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Shell command line should be underlined (as on pp.~775--778). + +\erroronpage{773}{para 3, ll.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Change: ``put \u{from \BibTeX}\ into the \texttt{.bbl} file'' \> + ``put into the \texttt{.bbl} file \u{by \BibTeX}'' + +\seriouserroronpage{773}{para 3, ll.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Change: ``and \u{an} additional \LaTeX\ run'' \> + ``and \u{two} additional \LaTeX\ run\u{s}'' + +\erroronpage{773}{para -2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Add: ``articles and book\u{s}'' + +\erroronpage{775}{para -2, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Change font: ``in the \texttt{\u{string}} parameter'' \> + ``in the \emph{\u{string}} parameter'' + +\erroronpage{777}{program output}{FMi}{2004/08/03}{2} +After changing the bib file this line comes out as: +\begin{verbatim} +%% "EX/tex.bib", line 92: Unexpected value in ``year = "1980ff"''. +\end{verbatim} + +\erroronpage{777}{para -1, l.-3}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Change: ``all \u{entries} are examined'' \> + ``all \u{fields of an entry} are examined'' + +\erroronpage{777}{para -1, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Change: ``value part of the \u{entries}'' \> + ``value part of the \u{fields}'' + +\erroronpage{778}{para 4,l.2}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4} + Replace: ``\texttt{year=1980ff}'' \> ``|year={1980ff}|'' + +\erroronpage{779--784}{throughout}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Shell command lines should be underlined (as on pp.~775--778). + +\erroronpage{779}{para 3, l.2/3}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Add: ``one ore more \BibTeX\ databases as its argument\u{(s)}'' + +\erroronpage{779}{footnote 2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Add second hyphen: ``after the \texttt{-} option.'' + \> ``after the \texttt{-\u-} option.'' + +\erroronpage{780}{top}{FMi}{2004/08/03}{2} + Spurious space on top of page. + +\erroronpage{784}{para 1, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Typo (forgotten backslash!?): + ``Progpybliographer'' \> ``\textsf{pybliographer}'' + +\erroronpage{787}{l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Shell command line should be underlined (as on pp.~775--778). + +\erroronpage{787}{para -2, l.1}{CKr}{2005/04/20}{4} + Remove surplus letter: ``The \textsf{JBibtexManager} program + develop\u{p}ed by Nizar Batada'' + +\erroronpage{788}{fig. caption}{FMi}{2004/05/14}{2} + Add: The \textsf{JBibtexManager} workspace with the \u{(German locale)} + +\erroronpage{788}{footnote}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Replace: ``Most of these restrictions have been lifted in the + new version of JBibtexManager.'' + +\erroronpage{789}{para 2, l.1}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Replace: ``\ldots are kept unchanged but they are + neither visible nor modifiable from within the program.'' \\ + \> + ``\ldots are neither visible nor modifiable + except when using the ``raw \BibTeX'' mode in the newest version of + the program. '' + + +\erroronpage{789}{para 3}{FMi}{2005/06/02}{4} +Replace whole paragraph with: +``The program is not available on CTAN. Its current home is +\texttt{https://www.jabref.org}, where it was merged +with a similar project called \textsf{BibKeeper} +under the new name \textsf{JabRef}.'' + +\erroronpage{789}{para 5, l.3}{FMi}{2004/05/14}{2} + Small rewrite: + The only ``foreign'' export formats supported are \texttt{.bbl} files + \u{and \texttt{.htm} files} (i.e., processing a selection of entries with + \BibTeX{} or \BibTeX8 from within the program and producing HTML + from a selection of entries\u{)}. + +\erroronpage{791--793}{tab 13.4}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + \texttt{apa.bst} -- add: + ``American Psychology Association \u{\BibTeX\ style}'' \\ + \texttt{jmb.bst} -- add: + ``\emph{Journal of Molecular Biology} \u{\BibTeX}\ style''\\ + Some journal names are written in italic, other's aren't: + Astronomy; Behavioral and Brain Sciences; Human Biology. + + +\erroronpage{793}{para 1, l.2}{SN}{2004/06/11}{2} + Remove surplus word: ``using another \u{the} \BibTeX{} style''. + +\erroronpage{793}{para 2,l.5}{DAl}{2005/09/03}{4} + Remove comma: ``\ldots wich will show us\u{,} how different\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{794}{exa 13-5-1/2}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2} + Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data + base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change + slightly in a reprint. + +\erroronpage{795}{exa 13-5-3/4}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2} + Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data + base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change + slightly in a reprint. + +\erroronpage{795}{para 2, l.2}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4} + Replace: ``author's name'' \> ``authors' names'' + +\seriouserroronpage{795}{para 2, ll.4/5}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + The text states: ``Also note the interesting label produced for the + reference with more than three authors.'' \\ + However, example 13-5-4 cannot show this, as there are only three + authors (item~[GUD97]). + +\erroronpage{796}{exa 13-5-5/6}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2} + Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data + base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change + slightly in a reprint. + +\seriouserroronpage{796}{para 1, ll.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + The text states: ``Note that the entry with more than three authors + has now been collapsed, showing only the first one.'' \\ + Again, example 13-5-5 does not show this, as there are only three + authors, and all three are shown (item~[5]). + +\seriouserroronpage{797}{para 3, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Replace: + ``\ldots; as a result, we get an incomplete \u{first} entry.'' \> + ``\ldots; as a result, we get an incomplete \u{second} entry.'' \\ + (Obviously, the citation of \texttt{LGC97} has been added to + example 13-5-7 \emph{after} this text was written.) + +\erroronpage{797}{exa 13-5-7}{FMi}{2004/06/20}{2} + Editorial comment: due to the modification of the \BibTeX{} data + base \texttt{tex.bib} on page 690 the example output will change + slightly in a reprint. + +\erroronpage{798}{tab 13.5, l. 1-2}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{s} + Replace: ``Erwin'' \> + '`Ervin'' + +\erroronpage{798}{para 1, l.3}{CKr}{2005/04/23}{4} + Remove surplus word: ``\ldots, then it is all that \u{it} is necessary.'' + +\erroronpage{800}{Citation scheme,l.2}{DAl}{2005/09/03}{4} + Replace letter: ``\ldots different questions th\u{a}n if you + choose\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{802}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2} + Replace: ``derivation'' \> ``deviation'' + +\erroronpage{802}{para -1, l.3}{FMi}{2005/06/02}{4} + Replace wrong braces: + ``|\urlprefix\url[|\textit{field-value}|]|'' \> + ``|\urlprefix\url{|\textit{field-value}|}|'' + +\erroronpage{803}{para -2, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2} + Replace: ``in the second phase of the \u{formatting}'' \> + ``in the second phase of the \u{processing}'' + + +\erroronpage{806}{list, item 3}{UFi}{2004/06/01}{2} + Extra character: ``Printed in the order in which the\u{e} + references\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{806}{para -3}{FMi}{2005/06/02}{4} + Move this paragraph to the bottom of the page since it is really an + explanation about the functions defined for each publication type. + +\erroronpage{808}{table 13.8}{JMH}{2005/07/18}{4} + Replace description for |int.to.chr$| with: + ``Translates integers into a characters using the ASCII mapping'' + +\erroronpage{810}{\texttt{fin.entry} example}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2} + Replace in ``\emph{After Modification}'' part (2~times): + ``|\sc|'' \> ``|\scshape|'' + +\erroronpage{811}{para 2, l.3}{HjG}{2004/06/17}{2} + Replace: ``at the beginning of this section'' \> + ``on the facing page'' + + + +\CHAPTER{Chapter 14} + +\erroronpage{814}{para 6, l.1}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + Delete doubled word: + ``The most important \u{important} commands \ldots'' + +%% not really a bug but inconsistent +\erroronpage{814}{para -1, l.-2}{HOb}{2004/05/28}{2} + Explicitly show spaces: \verb*=% \iffalse= \ldots\ \verb*=% \fi= + +\erroronpage{815}{syntax boxes 2+3}{HOb}{2004/05/28}{2} + For clarification the argument of |\DescribeMacro| and that of + |\begin{macro}| should both start with a |\|. + +\erroronpage{816}{para -3, l.4+}{HOb}{2004/05/28}{2} + Change sentence: + Note that \u{such short forms for \texttt{\textbackslash verb}, + just} like \texttt{\textbackslash verb} itself, + cannot appear in the argument of another command, but + \u{the characters} may be used + freely inside \texttt{verbatim} and \texttt{macrocode} environments. + +\seriouserroronpage{820}{para 2, last line}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2} + Change to: ``lines 1, 2, and \u{4} if \texttt{Bname} is also +asked for, and lines 1, \u{3}, and 4 otherwise.'' + +\erroronpage{820}{para 3, l.5}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} + Remove surplus space: ``behind \%\u{~} signs\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{820}{table 14.1}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} + Entries not sorted correctly: swap |\CheckSum| and |\CheckModules| + +\seriouserroronpage{821}{descr.\ of + \ttfamily\textbackslash DeleteShortVerb}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + \verb=\MakeshortVerb= should be \verb=\Make=\u{S}\texttt{hortVerb}\\ + \verb=\MakeshortVerb*= should be \verb=\Make=\u{S}\texttt{hortVerb*} + +\erroronpage{821}{table 14.1}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + As suggested by HOb (p.815): + ``|\DescribeMacro{\|\emph{cmd}|}|'' and + ``|\begin{macro}{\|\emph{cmd}|}|''. + +\erroronpage{822}{table 14.1, entry 2}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + |\meta{|\emph{arg}|}| ``Print \u{the} argument \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{822}{table 14.1, entry 3}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} + Replace with: \verb=\SpecialEscapechar{\=\emph{char\/}\verb=}= + +\seriouserroronpage{822}{table 14.1, entry -2}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} + Wrong default: ``(default |*|)'' \> ``(default |!|)'' + +\erroronpage{823}{table 14.1}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + As suggested by HOb (p.815): + ``|\SpecialIndex{\|\emph{cmd}|}|'', + ``|\SpecialMainIndex{\|\emph{cmd}|}|'', and + ``|\SpecialUsageIndex{\|\emph{cmd}|}|''. + +\seriouserroronpage{824}{table 14.1, entry 6}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} + Typo: |\MakePercentCommand| \> |\MakePercentComment| + +\erroronpage{825}{para 3, l.1}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2} + ``\% sign'' \> ``|%| sign'' + +\erroronpage{825}{para 5, l.1}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2} + ``target'' \> ``target machine'' + +% making the syntax box bigger affects next page as well: +\seriouserroronpage{826/827}{code box}{UFi/FMi}{2004/05/24}{2} + Closing brace of \verb=\generate{...}= is missing. Also it would be + better if the box shows that several |\file| commands can be used. + +\erroronpage{826/827}{para -1\slash para 2}{HjG}{2005/05/15}{4} + The descriptions referring to the syntax box do not characterize + the changed contents of that box (due to a previous error report). + + Not only a single \textit{result-file} is possible:\\ + ``Within the argument to |\generate| you specify the + \textit{result-file} you want to produce by using a |\file| + declaration.'' + + The text ``as given above'' does no longer hold:\\ + ``With the syntax specification for |\generate| as given above, + you can produce one \textit{result-file} from one or more + \textit{source-files}.'' + +\erroronpage{826}{l.2}{HjG}{2005/02/26}{4} + Replace: LaTeX \> \LaTeX{} + +\erroronpage{826}{para -2, l.-3}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + Add: ``only the code piece\u{s}'' + +\erroronpage{827}{para 2, l.-1}{HjG}{2005/05/15}{4} + ``source files'' \> ``\emph{source-files}'' + +\erroronpage{827}{}{FMi}{2004/06/08}{2} + Editorial comment: reprinted because of pagebreak changes. + +\erroronpage{828}{para 3, l.2}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2} + Extra word: ``If so, \u{case}'' \> ``If so,'' + +\seriouserroronpage{829}{syntax box}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} + |\preamble|, |\endpreamble|, |\postamble|, and |\endpostamble| all + have to be on lines by themselves, so the displayed syntax is a bit + misleading (to say it nicely). + +\erroronpage{829}{para -2, l.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + Add word: ``in \u{the} \textsc{docstrip} package documentation'' + +\erroronpage{830}{para 4, ll.5/6}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + Change: + ``In addition, the user \u{has configured} the \textsc{docstrip} + program \ldots'' \> + ``\ldots\ \u{has to configure} \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{830}{para 5, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/08}{2} + Add: ``in the \textsc{docstrip} \u{script}'' + +\erroronpage{831}{ll. 4 to 15}{UFi/FMi}{2004/05/27}{2} + The |\usedir| declarations in the example are not in accordance + with the TDS set-up. They show what \textsf{jurabib} + currently implements in its \texttt{.ins} files. + However, the correct set-up would be: +\begin{verbatim} + \usedir{tex/latex/jurabib} + \file{jurabib.sty}{\from{jurabib.dtx}{package}} + \file{dejbbib.ldf}{\from{jurabib.dtx}{german}} + ... + \usedir{bibtex/bst/jurabib} + \file{jurabib.bst}{\from{jurabib.dtx}{jurabst}} + ... + \usedir{doc/latex/jurabib} + \file{jbtest.tex}{\from{jurabib.dtx}{test}} + ... +\end{verbatim} + This also requires to change the text following. + +\erroronpage{831}{ll.16/17}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2} + Double interword space? + (if so: 2x visible, 1x vanished in line break)\\ + ``in \ |tex/...|'' \qquad yes, bug in \texttt{url}. + +\seriouserroronpage{831/832}{general}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2} + Replace throughout: |\DeclareDirectory| \> |\DeclareDir|.\\ + Unfortunately, \texttt{docstrip} is not consistent in its command names. + +\seriouserroronpage{832}{l. 5}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2} + Missing \texttt{*}: |\DeclareDir|\u{\texttt{*}}|{tex/bibtex/...| + +\erroronpage{832}{code blocks}{DPa}{2004/08/04}{2} + Three instances of |tex/bibtex| in |\DeclareDir| should lose the |tex/| to + conform to TDS and change made on page 831 + +\erroronpage{832}{2. code block}{MSch}{2006/01/06}{s} + Replace: |text/latex/base| \> |tex/latex/base| + +\erroronpage{832}{para 4, l.-2}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} + Change: ``\ldots a single |\UseTDS| in\ldots'' \> + ``a |\UseTDS| and a |\BaseDirectory| declaration in\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{832}{para 5, l. -3}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + The ``\TeX{} Live CD'' is spelled incorrectly as + ``\TeX{} live'' or ``\TeX live'' + +\erroronpage{832}{l.-2}{HjG}{2005/05/15}{4} + Underline, as it is command line input. + +\erroronpage{833}{para -1, l.1}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{4} + Spurious extra blank between ``Another potential''. + + +\erroronpage{834}{para 4, l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2} + Change: ``These command\u{s}'' + +\erroronpage{834}{para 5, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2} + Closing parenthesis should not be in `typewriter font':\\ + ``(after |\begin{document}|\u)'' + +\erroronpage{834}{para 5}{FMi}{2007/11/13}{} + Explain that |\cmd| can't be used with conditionals, e.g., those produced + with |\newif| . + +\erroronpage{835}{para 6, l.2}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2} +Missing letter: ``the source files into a +``user'' documentation and a\u{n} ``implementation'' part.'' + +\erroronpage{835}{para 6, l.5}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2} +Missing word: ``as the \textsf{doc} package \u{is} loaded'' + +\erroronpage{835}{ll.-6/-4}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2} + Replace: + ``\ldots\ \u{and no} configuration file.'' \> + ``\ldots\ \u{without a} configuration file.'' + +\erroronpage{837}{exa 14-4-1}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{} + Editorial comment: example has to be reprocessed whenever this + chapter is modified to show correct rcs checkin (otherwise input + and output will not match). + +\erroronpage{837}{para 2,l.3}{DAl}{2005/09/03}{4} + Replace: + ``running \u{heading}'' \> + ``running \u{header}'' + +\erroronpage{838}{code box}{UFi}{2004/05/27}{2} + \texttt{\$Id\$}: first |$| uses wrong font (2 times) + +\erroronpage{839}{exa 14-4-2}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{} + Editorial comment: example has to be reprocessed whenever this chapter is modified to + show correct rcs checkin (otherwise input and output will not match). + +\seriouserroronpage{839}{item 1, l.1 and l.3}{AHo}{2004/09/02}{4} + Replace: \texttt{nottoday} \> \texttt{notoday} + +\seriouserroronpage{839}{item 2, l.4}{HjG}{2004/06/09}{2} + Replace brackets with braces: ``\texttt{% + \char`\\pagestyle\u\textbraceleft fancy\u\textbraceright}'' + + +\CHAPTER{Appendix A} + +\erroronpage{842}{para 2, l.5}{PYu/FMi}{2004/07/03}{2} + Remove: ``\ldots + \texttt{A}\ldots\texttt{Z})\u{ in case of command names prefixed with a + backslash}.'' + +\erroronpage{842}{para 3, marginal}{FMi}{2004/08/01}{2} + Change: ``Environments and command names'' \> ``Environments'' + +\erroronpage{842}{para 3}{PYu/FMi}{2004/08/01}{2} + Remove: ``On + the other hand, names of environments \u{and counters} + are different.'' + +Add: ``In this case the +\texttt{*} is part of the name \u{and spaces preceding it are not ignored}. Thus, when writing +\verb*=\begin{figure *}=, the space would become part of the name \u{and +is not recognized as the start of a \texttt{figure*} environment}.'' + + +\erroronpage{843}{para 3, l.2}{YvH}{2004/05/28}{2} + Missing word: ``and |\z@| contain |@| \u{in} their name'' + +\erroronpage{843}{para 4, l.3}{PYu}{2004/07/03}{2} + Change: ``to do: the difficult'' \> ``to do\u; the difficult'' + +\erroronpage{844}{para 4, l.4}{PYu/FMi}{2004/07/04}{2} + Replace: ``Thus, the above example could be shortened to'' \> + ``Thus, the definition in the above example should be + replaced as follows:'' + +\erroronpage{846}{para 1, l.2}{ARi}{2004/07/02}{2} + A period should follow the right parenthesis and ``without'' + should be capitalized. + +\iffalse +% maybe +\erroronpage{845/846/847}{syntax boxes and text}{FMi}{2004/07/04}{} + Replace: ``\textit{command definition}'' \> + ``\textit{command-definition}'' +\fi + +\erroronpage{847}{para. 5, ll. 2-3}{PYu}{2004/07/04}{2} + For consistency replace \meta{cmd}with \textit{cmd} +and \meta{command definition} with \textit{command definition}. + + +\erroronpage{847}{para -2, l.3}{VVo}{2008/09/02}{} +Replace: ``An error is raised if the definitions differ, ldots'' +\> ``A warning is shown if the definitions differ, \ldots'' + + +\erroronpage{851}{para 5, l.-2}{FMi}{2004/07/20}{2} + Add + change font: ``It also defines \u{the command} + |\the|\u{\textit{newctr}} to\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{852}{code block 1, l.2}{JGr}{2004/06/10}{2} + Second \verb=\makeatletter= should be \verb=\makeatother= + +\erroronpage{852}{para 3, l.-3}{FMi}{2004/06/23}{2} + ``\u{For that reason} the next example'' \> ``\u{As a result} the next example'' + +\erroronpage{852}{para -1, l.3}{FMi}{2004/07/24}{2} +Move word: ``|\setcounter| or |\addtocounter| \u{command} or when\ldots'' \> + ``\u{command} |\setcounter| or |\addtocounter| or when\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{852}{para -1, l.-3}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/23}{2} +Change: + ``It is \emph{not} suitable to print that number! For that reason a + set\ldots'' \> + ``However, the command cannot be used to typeset the value of the + counter! For that purpose a set\ldots'' + + +\erroronpage{853}{l.6}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/23}{2} + Missing space: ``c,\u{~}\dots, z'' + +\erroronpage{853}{para 4,ll.2+3}{HjG}{2004/05/25}{2} + Add word: ``\ldots definitions for sectioning \u{counters}'' + +\erroronpage{853}{counter code block}{FMi}{2005/06/09}{4} +The order of declarations of the counters is incorrect; they have to be +\begin{verbatim} +\newcounter{part} +\newcounter{section} +\newcounter{subsection}[section] +\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] +\end{verbatim} +or you will receive a ``counter not defined'' error. + +\iffalse +\erroronpage{853}{general}{THa/FMi}{2004/06/23}{} + Perhaps ``|\the|\meta{ctr}'' should be written without the meta + braces to match the form used on p.~852. \\ + Then again, perhaps not. +\fi + +\erroronpage{854}{ll. 1+2}{FMi}{2004/05/25}{2} + Add word and commata: ``Only the representation\u{, prefix,} and + label field commands + are defined \ldots'' + +\seriouserroronpage{854}{code block 1}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/25}{2} +Replace with approx:\\[6pt] +\hspace*{-140pt}\begin{minipage}[b]{\linewidth} +\begin{verbatim} +\renewcommand\theenumi {\arabic{enumi}} \renewcommand\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} +\renewcommand\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} \renewcommand\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} +\end{verbatim} +\begin{verbatim} + \renewcommand\p@enumii{\theenumi} +\renewcommand\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} \renewcommand\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} +\end{verbatim} +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand\labelenumi {\theenumi.} \newcommand\labelenumii{(\theenumii)} +\newcommand\labelenumiii{\theenumiii.} \newcommand\labelenumiv{\theenumiv.} +\end{verbatim} +\end{minipage} + + +\erroronpage{855}{fig A.1, l.4}{JAn}{2005/09/09}{4} + Change ``Did\^ot'' \> ``Didot'' (no caret); and delete the +comma after inch + + +\erroronpage{855}{fig A.1}{CBe/FMi}{2004/07/27}{2} +Add: \texttt{ex} \quad Height of a small ``x'' in the current font \u{(approximately)} +\\ +Add: \texttt{em} \quad Width + of capital ``M'' in current font \u{(approximately)} + + + +\erroronpage{856}{tab A.2, ll.1-3}{YvH}{2004/05/28}{2} + Correct: ``horizonal'' \> ``horizon\u{t}al'' (three times) + +\erroronpage{856}{tab A.2, l.6}{PYu}{2004/07/05}{2} + Add: ``a \u{solid} horizontal line'' + +\erroronpage{857}{table A.3}{V-Li}{2004/09/14}{4} + |\vspace{len}| is missing + +\erroronpage{858}{l.-8}{HjG/FMi}{2004/05/26}{2} + Add: ``\u{missing or} misplaced |\item|'' + +\erroronpage{858}{syntax box}{PYu}{2004/07/03}{2} + |\addvspace{|\textit{space}|}| should be typeset in a smaller font. + +\erroronpage{859}{para -4, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Typo: ``ar\u{r}ises'' \> ``arises'' + +\erroronpage{860}{para 1 of \S A.2, l.5}{CAR}{2004/05/26}{2} + Replace: ``that behaves similarly to a\ldots'' + \> ``that behaves \u{much like} a\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{861}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + The \(\Longleftrightarrow\) in the margin seems to sport a tiny + gap in the middle (seems to be a lucida set-up problem). + +\erroronpage{866}{para 2 of \S A.2.3, l.5}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + Words need to be swapped: ``height of a \u{box framed} with + |\fbox| or |\framebox|'' + +\seriouserroronpage{867}{ll.1/2 after exa A-2-17}{HjG}{2004/05/26}{2} + \(2 \times 5.3\,\mathrm{pt} + 0.4\,\mathrm{pt} = 11\,\mathrm{pt} + \ne 12\,\mathrm{pt}\) so skip should be $5.8\,\mathrm{pt}$. + +\seriouserroronpage{868}{Table A4.}{UFi}{2004/05/22}{2} + Default value of depth of \verb=\hrule= should be 0.0pt (not 0.4pt). + +\seriouserroronpage{871}{para 2, l.2}{UFi}{2004/05/21}{2} + ``binary operators (, , , )'' should be typeset + ``binary operators (\texttt{+}, \texttt{-}, \texttt{*}, \texttt{/})''. + + +\erroronpage{875/876}{tab. A.5}{FMi}{2004/07/28}{2} + Add: ``\TeX{} switches \u{(can only be queried)}'' \\ + Add: ``\LaTeX{} switches \u{(last two can be set)}'' \\ \qquad (these are + |@afterindent| and |@tempswa|)\\ + Add row:\\ + |@afterindent| \quad \parbox[t]{7cm}{Switch checked by command + |\@afterheading| (usually used in headings) to + prevent (if |false|) indentation of next + paragraph.} + + Editorial comment: change moves pagebreak. + +\seriouserroronpage{878}{codeline 4 (?)}{UFi}{2004/05/22}{2} + |\usepackage[german]{varioref}[2001/09/0]:| day number is missing + (test for version doesn't work then anymore!) + +\erroronpage{886}{fig.~A.1}{HjG}{2004/05/21}{2} + Add: \verb=\ProcessOptions= \u{\texttt{\char`\\relax}} + (cf. hint on p.~882!) + + +\CHAPTER{Appendix B} + +\erroronpage{891}{para 1, l.7}{DHL}{2004/05/16}{2} +Missing letter: ``\verb=l.167 \par=\u{\texttt{t}}\verb={Text}='' + +\seriouserroronpage{892}{para 1, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} + ``\verb=\romen= (lines 1 and~2)'' + \> + ``\verb=\romen= (lines 2 and~3)'' + +\erroronpage{892}{para -1, ll.2--4}{HOb/FMi}{2004/05/22}{2} + Add: ``Technically, a moving argument is an argument + that is internally expanded by \LaTeX{} without typesetting it + directly\u{ (e.g.}, by using the internal \LaTeX{} construct + |\protected@edef|\textsuperscript{1}\u).'' + +\erroronpage{893}{para 2, l.8}{MHo/FMi}{2004/10/05}{4} + Replace: + ``On the other hand, |\cong| is fragile\ldots'' + \> + ``On the other hand, |\[...\]| is fragile\ldots'' + + +\erroronpage{894}{l.-7}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Add word: \ldots still open) \u{or} will be swallowed\ldots + +\erroronpage{896}{item 1}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Not in alphabetical order: move one item down. + +\erroronpage{896}{item 4}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Not in alphabetical order: move four items down. + +\erroronpage{896}{item -1}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} + Whether or not the image size can be automatically determined + depends on the graphics driver. Last sentence rewritten as follows:\\ + ``It usually does this automatically, for example, for +\texttt{.eps} files by reading the bounding box +information. However, depending on the graphics driver, it may be +unable to extract this information from binary +bitmap images such as \texttt{.jpg}, \texttt{.gif}, and \texttt{.png} files.'' + +\erroronpage{897}{item 5}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Not in alphabetical order: move one item down. + +\erroronpage{899}{item 1}{JGr}{2004/06/10}{2} + The extra \verb=\or= could result from bad use of \verb=\ifthenelse= + +\erroronpage{899}{item 5}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + The ``\TeX{} Live CD'' is spelled incorrectly as + ``\TeX{} live'' or ``\TeX live'' + +\erroronpage{901}{item 3}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + The ``\TeX{} Live CD'' is spelled incorrectly as + ``\TeX{} live'' or ``\TeX live'' + +\seriouserroronpage{902}{l.5}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} + Missing letter: ``\texttt{\char`\\dis\u{c}retionary}'' + +\erroronpage{907}{item 5, l.2}{CKr}{2005/05/30}{4} + Add missing word: ``\ldots or \texttt{figure}, \u{is} encountered\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{907--909}{item 2}{UFi/FMi}{2004/07/31}{2} + \TeX{} error message missing: ``\texttt{No room for a new ...}'' + + The packages loaded in your document require more internal registers +(|\count|, |\dimen|, \ldots) than there are available in \TeX. Try +processing your document with e\TeX{} and additionally load the +\textsf{etex} package. + + Editorial comment: affects pagebreaks for 908/909 as well. + + + +\erroronpage{909}{middle}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} + In the sample output, the lines ``\texttt{<*> samplefile.tex}'' and + ``\texttt{? }'' should be indented by the same amount as the first + four lines. + +\erroronpage{909}{l.-2}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} + Missing interword space: ``an\u{ }\verb=\addvspace= command'' + +%%check (that's me) +\iffalse +\erroronpage{911}{item 5}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{} + ``To the author's knowledge, \ldots'' + \> + ``To the authors' knowledge, \ldots'' +\fi + +\erroronpage{913}{item 1}{MKu/FMi}{2004/06/24}{2} + Replace: UTF8 \> UTF-8 + +\erroronpage{913}{item 1}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Not in alphabetical order: move four items down. + +\erroronpage{913}{item -3, l.-3/-1}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} + Replace word: ``\ldots commands \u{and}, if necessary, masking a line + break in the source with a \verb=%= sign.'' + +\erroronpage{914}{l.8}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} + Missing interword space: ``\verb=\spacefactor=\u{ }only'' + +\erroronpage{917}{footnote}{HOb}{2004/05/29}{2} + Replace footnote with: ``In modern distributions \LaTeX{} is automatically + using the e\TeX{} program. On older installations you may have to + call a different program (e.g., \texttt{elatex} instead of + \texttt{latex}) when processing a + document.'' + + +\erroronpage{918}{l.-13}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} + Misplaced comma:\\ + ``\ldots\ arguments thereby, using up \ldots'' + \>\\ + ``\ldots\ arguments, thereby using up \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{920}{item 2}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Not in alphabetical order: move one item down. + +\erroronpage{921}{item -2}{MBr}{2004/08/03}{2} + Not in alphabetical order: move item to top. + +\erroronpage{923}{item 1}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Not in alphabetical order: move one item down. + +\erroronpage{924}{item 2, para 2, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} + Typo: ``th\u{r}ough'' \> ``though'' + +\erroronpage{925}{l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} + Missing interword space: ``the command\u{ }\verb=\symbol='' + +\erroronpage{925}{item -2, l.-2}{HjG}{2004/05/22}{2} + Extra word: ``are \u{the} those'' \> ``are those''\\ + Surplus space: `` register~\u~0'' \> ``register~0'' + +\erroronpage{925}{item -2}{MBr}{2004/08/03}{2} + Not in alphabetical order: move item one up. + +\seriouserroronpage{926}{item 4, title}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + ``\verb=Overfull \hbox (badness= \meta{number}\texttt)'' should be + ``\verb=Overfull \hbox (=\meta{number}\texttt{pt too wide)}'' + +\erroronpage{926}{item 5, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2} + Typo: ``built'' \> ``build'' + +\seriouserroronpage{926}{item 5, title}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + ``\verb=Overfull \vbox (badness= \meta{number}\texttt)'' should be + ``\verb=Overfull \vbox (=\meta{number}\texttt{pt too wide)}'' + +\seriouserroronpage{928}{item 6, title}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + ``\verb=Tight \hbox='' should be ``\verb=Tight \vbox='' + +\erroronpage{930}{item 1, l.1}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2} + Omit paragraph indentation! + +\erroronpage{930}{item 4, l.2}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Typo: ``i\u{t}entify'' \> ``identify'' + +\erroronpage{931}{item 4, l.-1}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2} + Add: ``\ldots\ package \u{or class} in question.'' + +\erroronpage{931}{item 4}{JGr}{2004/06/10}{2} + The warning also happens if you give absolute or relative + pathnames like \verb=\documentclass{base/article}= + +\erroronpage{931}{item 6}{MBr/FMi}{2004/08/03}{2} + Order here is debatable but a ``,'' may not be good for visual + sorting, so move this item one up (placeholder are always sorted to + top so it doesn't pass ``package-or-class''. + +\erroronpage{932}{para 4, l.1}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Typo: ``\u{t}which \> ``which'' + +\seriouserroronpage{935}{ll.3--5}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2} + The text claims:\\ + ``The output is slightly different: the name \u{and the type} of a + token are not shown by |\meaning|; instead, only its ``meaning'' is + presented.''\\ + However, as example B-3-1 depicts, the type \emph{is} shown; hence, + the sentence should be changed to:\\ + ``The output is slightly different: the name + of the token \u{is} not shown by + |\meaning|; instead, only \u{its type and} its ``meaning'' + \u{are} presented.'' + +\erroronpage{936}{para 1, l.3}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Closing brace should be after ``19'' and not at end of line. + +\erroronpage{938}{para -1, l.3}{UFi/FMi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Difficult to understand; replace: + ``\ldots a large \u{increase in} \texttt{t=} between'' + +\erroronpage{939}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2} + Words need to be swapped: + ``\ldots\ \TeX{} indicates \u{this fact} with \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{941}{l.19/20}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2} + Add: ``so-called demerits \u{(\texttt{d=})}'' + +\erroronpage{942}{l.22}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2} + Change: ``several ways to reach \u{\texttt{@@2}};'' + \> ``several ways to reach \u{\texttt{@@6}};'' + +\erroronpage{943}{para -1 of \S B.3.3, l.-6}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2} + Typo: ``shinkability'' \> ``shrinkability'' + + + +\CHAPTER{Appendix C} + +\erroronpage{general}{several pages}{FMi}{2005/07/01}{4} + Appendix was partially rewritten to reflect changes in the layout + of the web sites. More importantly: CTAN changed their ftp + software and stopped supporting the generation of directory + archives on the fly. Instead they now offer precompiled + \texttt{zip} files that can be downloaded. + +\erroronpage{947}{ll.-2/-1}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2} + Missing word: ``it is best \u{to} access'' + +\erroronpage{947}{para -1, l.5}{FMi}{2004/06/12}{2} + Bug in \texttt{url.sty} generated extra space. + +\erroronpage{948}{para -1, l.5}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Show short name: ``\ldots\ \TeX{} Users Group (\u{TUG}, United States)'' + +\erroronpage{950}{para 1, l.2}{FMi}{2006/09/12}{s} + Replace: Figure C.\u{2} \> Figure C.\u{1} + +\erroronpage{950}{para 3, l.2}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2} + Typo: ``a site that i\u{s} not too distant'' + +\seriouserroronpage{953}{l.11}{HjG}{2004/05/24}{2} + Replace line: ``\verb=>>>>>>> 1.6='' \> + ``\texttt{200-index graphicx}'' + (probably due to an incomplete merge with CVS) + +\erroronpage{954}{para 3, l.1}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4} + ``\TeX live'' \> ``\TeX{} Live'' + +\erroronpage{955}{para 2, l.4}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4} + Remove surplus word: + ``in \u{the} Thomas Esser's \texttt{tetex} distribution'' + +\erroronpage{955}{para -2, l.-4}{MHe}{2004/05/22}{2} + Letters need to be swapped: ``eig\u{ht}eenth'' + +\erroronpage{956}{cn: entry}{HjG}{2005/05/09}{4} + Replace: + ``\u{name}: Hong Feng'' \> ``\u{contact}: Hong Feng'' + +\erroronpage{957}{col. 2, l.15}{TMW}{2004/06/07}{2} + This should read ``Lietuvos \TeX'o Vartotoj\k{u} Grup\.{e}''. + +\erroronpage{958}{col. 1, l.19}{TMW}{2004/06/07}{2} + An acute accent should be added: ``Toru\'n'' + + + +\CHAPTER{Bibliography} + +\erroronpage{963}{[1]}{CKr}{2005/06/20}{4} + Url changed: \url{https://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/font/T1_SPEC.PDF} + 2017: url no longer valid; maybe \url{https://www-cdf.fnal.gov/offline/PostScript/T1_SPEC.PDF} + +\erroronpage{963}{[2]}{CKr}{2005/06/20}{4} + Url changed: \url{https://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/ps/5001.DSC_Spec.pdf} + 2017: url no longer valid; maybe \url{https://www-cdf.fnal.gov/offline/PostScript/5001.PDF} + +\erroronpage{963}{[3]}{CKr}{2005/06/20}{4} + Url changed: + \url{https://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/ps/5002.EPSF_Spec.pdf} + 2017: url no longer valid; maybe \url{https://archive.org/details/5002.EPSFSpec} + +\erroronpage{964}{[5]}{CKr}{2005/06/20}{4} + Url changed: + \url{https://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/pdf/PDFReference.pdf} + 2017: url no longer valid; maybe \url{http://www.adobe.com/content/dam/acom/en/devnet/pdf/pdfs/PDF32000_2008.pdf} + + +\erroronpage{965}{[17], l.-1}{HjG}{2004/06/18}{2} + Delete character: ``in a\u{n} multi-language setting'' + +\erroronpage{966}{[25]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + First line of online resources is not flush right but centered. + +\erroronpage{971}{[74]}{FMi}{2006/09/18}{s} + Add ``Lars Hellstr\"om'' as author. Change date to December 2004. + Change comment to ``Documentation for + the fontinst utility package that supports \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{973}{[88]}{TSS}{2004/05/26}{2} + The bibliography entry for "The Art of Computer Programming" lacks + ISBN numbers: 0-201-89683-4, 0-201-03822-6, and 0-201-03803-X. + +\erroronpage{973}{[90], l.2}{HjG}{2004/06/07}{2} + Words need to be swapped: + ``\ldots do not look as \u{beautiful now} as they did in the past.'' + +\erroronpage{973}{[91]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + First line of online resources is not flush right but centered. + +\erroronpage{975}{[107], [109], [110], [111]}{HjG}{2004/06/21}{2} + Incomplete URLs:\\ + \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org\u{/news/latex2e-news/}}\\ + \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org\u{/help/documentation/fntguide.pdf}}\\ + \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org\u{/help/documentation/cfgguide.pdf}}\\ + \texttt{https://www.latex-project.org\u{/lppl/}} + +\erroronpage{976}{[117]}{FMi}{2005/11/07}{s} + The title is ``E-\TeX: Guidelines for Future \TeX{} Extensions''. + +\erroronpage{977}{[124]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + First line of online resources is not flush right but centered. + +\erroronpage{977}{[124]}{FMi}{2005/07/09}{4} + Link is missing a period: + \url{https://www.latex-project.org/publications/tug99}\texttt{\u.pdf} + +\erroronpage{978}{[138]}{FMi}{2005/06/25}{4} + Now has appeared: 24\#1, pp.~105--114, 2004. URL: + \url{https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb24-1/plaice.pdf} + +\erroronpage{979}{[143]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Missing period: Robert M\u. Ritter + +\erroronpage{979}{entry 146, l.3}{RWa}{2004/06/01}{2} + Missing word: ``for \LaTeX\ \u{and} a possible'' + +\erroronpage{980}{[151]}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2} + Remove: ``\LaTeX\u{Joachim Schrod}.'' + +\erroronpage{980}{[153]}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2} + Swap words: ``often are'' \> ``are often'' + +\erroronpage{980}{[155]}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2} + Missing word: ``For \u{the} \textsf{kuvio} system\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{980}{[157]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + First line of online resources is not flush right (stray space?). + +\erroronpage{981}{[158]-[162]}{RKo}{2005/11/11}{s} + Unfortunately Th\`anh's name is misspelled (accents in [161/2]). The correct spelling + is ``H\`an Th\^e\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}} Th\`anh''. + + Furthermore, the surename is H\`an so the entries should have been sorted + under H (something that can't be corrected easily). + +\erroronpage{981}{[161]}{CKr}{2005/07/06}{4} + Remove surplus name in text: ``User\u{Sebastian Rahtz} manual \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{981}{[162/3], title}{THa}{2004/06/25}{2} + Change: ``Makeindex'' \> ``makeindex'' + +\erroronpage{982}{[168]}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + First line of online resources should be:\\ + \texttt{https://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/\u{tb11-3/tb29vulis.pdf}} + + +\CHAPTER{Index} + +\erroronpage{983--1082}{index}{FMi}{2004/06/11}{} + I do not list changes to the index that are results of other errata + entries as they are too difficult to track. Instead I will put an + updated index on the web at + \url{https://www.latex-project.org/help/books/tlc2-ap4.pdf} once in a while. + +\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/06/08}{2} + Editorial comment: the whole index has been reprinted. + +\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2005/09/08}{4} + Editorial comment: the whole index has been reprinted. + +\erroronpage{general}{}{FMi}{2004/06/08}{2} + Add index entries into production notes, e.g., for example setup, + hanging punctuation, \ldots + +\erroronpage{983}{para 1, l.3}{UFi}{2004/05/23}{2} + Remove surplus word: ``\ldots one of \u{the} the following'' + +\seriouserroronpage{983}{para -2}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + The text explains the meaning of bold and blue page numbers, + but fails to point out the significance of slanted (italic) + ones---there is none: blue italic indicates normal example blue bold + indicates example and also important info. + +\erroronpage{988,1009}{}{CKr}{2004/10/10}{4} + Replace: ``alphabetical document headings'' + \> ``alphabetically numbered document headings'' + +and + + ``document headings / alphabetical'' + \> + ``document headings / alphabetically numbered'' + +\erroronpage{990}{}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{s} + Correct range: author-date citations / history of (699, 700) + +\erroronpage{992}{}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{s} + Correct: ``B\u{\'e}zier'' + +\erroronpage{993}{}{SEg}{2005/04/26}{4} + bibliographies/authors/name,formatting shows 798--1092 but should be + just 798 + +\erroronpage{1000}{}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{s} + Correct range: Citation systems / + author-date / + history of (699, 700) + +\erroronpage{1007}{}{HjG}{2004/07/12}{2} + Add page entry for |\DeclareFontSubstitution| + back to 431 (para~2). + + +\erroronpage{1014}{secound col., l.8}{MSc}{2004/06/04}{2} + missing index entry for ``eTeX, TeX extension'' + +\erroronpage{1017}{}{FHa}{2004/10/05}{4} + The index entry for "floats / placement control" lists pages 286-983 + for information. I think that is a bit too much. It should probably + end at page 291. + + +\erroronpage{1019}{}{J-CCh}{2005/07/17}{s} + Correct range: fonts / + oblique (333) + +\erroronpage{1020}{}{CKr}{2005/01/09}{4} + Replace ``fonts / URW Antigua'' \> ``fonts / URW Anti\u{q}ua'' + +\erroronpage{1034}{first col.}{FMi}{2004/05/15}{2} + Add entry: ``lists / enumerated / user-defined, 151'' + +\erroronpage{1035}{}{THa}{2004/07/02}{2} + ``\textsf{makeindex}'' \> ``\textsl{MakeIndex}'' + +\erroronpage{1041}{}{FMi}{2004/08/02}{2} + ``\texttt{NACRO} \BibTeX{} command'' \> + ``\texttt{MACRO} \BibTeX{} command'' + +\erroronpage{1051}{secound col., l.14}{MSc}{2004/06/04}{2} + missing index entries for ``pdftex'' on p.7 and p.643 + +\erroronpage{1069}{}{FMi}{2004/11/07}{4} + Replace: ``text symbols / setting-up'' \> + ``\u{math} symbols / setting-up'' + + +\erroronpage{1076}{}{CKr}{2005/01/09}{4} + Replace ``URW Antigua'' \> ``URW Anti\u{q}ua'' + + +\CHAPTER{People} + +\erroronpage{1080}{page}{FMi}{2004/07/26}{4} + Editorial comment: Needs manual breaking in index output file for + second and fourth printing. + +\erroronpage{1081}{col 1}{FMi}{2004/06/22}{2} + Missing accents: ``Fernandez, Jose Alberto '' \> `Fern\'andez, Jos\'e Alberto'' + +\erroronpage{1081}{col 1}{HjG}{2004/06/22}{2} + Change page number in entry: + ``Fukui, Rei, xxvii, 405, \u{969}'' \> ``\ldots, \u{968}'' + +\erroronpage{1081}{col 1}{LMa}{2004/05/14}{2} + The name ``M\o ller Neergaard, Peter'' should be sorted as + ``Neergaard, Peter M\o ller''. + +\erroronpage{1081}{col 2}{HjG}{2004/06/16}{2} + Change page number in entry: + ``Hufflen, Jean-Michel, 761, \u{971}'' \> ``\ldots, \u{970}'' + +\erroronpage{1081}{}{HjG}{2004/07/08}{2} + Add page entries for ``Kettler, Howard'' and ``Frutiger, Adrian'' + to ``People'' index back to 374. + +\erroronpage{1082}{}{HjG}{2004/07/08}{2} + Add page entry for ``Smith, Ralph'' to ``People'' index back to 376. + + +\erroronpage{1082}{col 1, l.19 }{PPn}{2004/05/25}{2} + Replace ``Panday'' with ``Pandey'' (very sorry for the typo). + +\erroronpage{1082}{col 1}{FMi}{2004/04/23}{2} + Replace ``Wing, Wai'' with ``Wong, Wai'' (very sorry for the typo). + +\erroronpage{1082}{col 1}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2} + Change page numbers in entry: + ``Mittelbach, Frank, \ldots, 976--\u{978, 980}, \ldots'' + \> ``\ldots, 976--\u{979}, \ldots'' + +\erroronpage{1082}{}{HjG}{2004/07/13}{2} + Add page entry for ``Rahtz, Sebastian'' + back to 981 (bib-item [161]). + + + + + + +\CHAPTER{Biographies} + +\erroronpage{1084}{Goossens image}{THa}{2004/06/23}{2} + Spurious gray square in upper right corner of framed image of Michel + Goossens. + +\erroronpage{1085}{para 3, l.6}{MSc}{2004/05/19}{2} + Replace ``TeX'' with ``\TeX''. + + +\CHAPTER{Production Notes} + +\erroronpage{1089}{para 4, l.4}{FMi}{2004/07/21}{2} + Add: ``\ldots this typographical icing \u{(package + \textsf{pdfcprot})} was\ldots'' + +\erroronpage{1089}{l.-5}{HjG}{2004/05/20}{2} + Missing period: \ldots files\u. It \ldots + +\erroronpage{1090}{para -3, l.-4}{HjG}{2004/05/23}{2} + Change/add: ``paragraphs ending \u{with a} single word \u{line}'' + +\erroronpage{1091}{top}{WAd}{2004/05/08}{2} + The series title in the box does not use a real caps and small caps + font but a faked one (compare with the front cover where + the font \emph{Christiana} designed by Gudrun Zapf-von Hesse is used). + +\end{erratalist} + + +\setcounter{collectmore}{3} + +\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or + omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.] +\contributor{AFV}{Alfonso Fernandez-Vazquez} +\contributor{AHo}{Antti Honkela} +\contributor{AMa}{Arni Magnusson} +\contributor{ARi}{Alan Ristow} +\contributor{BMo}{Brooks Moses} +\contributor{BeB}{Bernd Burghardt} +\contributor{CAR}{Chris A. Rowley} +\contributor{CBC}{Charles B. Cameron} +\contributor{CBa}{Cristian Battaglia} +\contributor{CBe}{Claudio Beccari} +\contributor{CKr}{Claudia Krysztofiak} +\contributor{DAl}{Daniel Alonso i Alemany} +\contributor{DAr}{Donald Arseneau} +\contributor{DCa}{David Carlisle} +\contributor{DHL}{Dan Luecking} +\contributor{DIs}{Daniel Isaacson} +\contributor{DSch}{Dirk Schlimm} +\contributor{ERy}{Elizabeth Ryan} +\contributor{FHa}{Ferdy Hanssen} +\contributor{FMi}{Frank Mittelbach} +\contributor{GBa}{Gerhard Bachmaier} +\contributor{HOb}{Heiko Oberdiek} +\contributor{HPB}{Harold P. Boas} +\contributor{HVo}{Herbert Voss} +\contributor{HjG}{Hubert G\"a\ss lein} +\contributor{J-CCh}{Jean-C\^ome Charpentier} +\contributor{JAn}{Jacques Andr\'e} +\contributor{JBez}{Javier Bezos} +\contributor{JBe}{Jens Berger} +\contributor{JBr}{Johannes Braams} +\contributor{JCh}{Joel Chan} +\contributor{JGr}{Jose Grimm} +\contributor{JJN}{Jarmo Niemel\"a} +\contributor{JLV}{Juan Luis Varona} +\contributor{JMH}{Jean-Michel Hufflen} +\contributor{JS}{Joachim Schrod} +\contributor{JTa}{Juhani Takkinen} +\contributor{LHe}{Lars Hellstr\"om} +\contributor{LMa}{Lars Madsen} +\contributor{LSchu}{Lothar Schumacher} +\contributor{MBr}{Marion Braams} +\contributor{MGo}{Michel Goossens} +\contributor{MHCL}{Martin Hiu Chung Law} +\contributor{MHe}{Martin Hensel} +\contributor{MHo}{Morten H\o gholm} +\contributor{MKo}{Markus Kohm} +\contributor{MKu}{Markus Kuhn} +\contributor{MLa}{Mark Laplante} +\contributor{MLi}{Martin Liebmann} +\contributor{MSc}{Martin Schr\"oder} +\contributor{MSch}{Michael Schutte} +\contributor{NBe}{Nelson Beebe} +\contributor{PPN}{P.P. Narayanaswami} +\contributor{PYu}{Peng Yu} +\contributor{RKo}{Reinhard Kotucha} +\contributor{RPa}{Reimo Palm} +\contributor{RSt}{Ralf Stubner} +\contributor{RWa}{Richard Walker} +\contributor{ReSt}{Rebecca Stiels} +\contributor{SCo}{Steven Douglas Cochran} +\contributor{SEg}{Stephen Eglen} +\contributor{SPe}{Sa\v sa Petrovi\' c} +\contributor{THa}{Thorsten Hansen} +\contributor{TMW}{Thomas Widmann} +\contributor{TMi}{Tom Micevski} +\contributor{TSS}{Tommi Syrj\"anen} +\contributor{UFi}{Ulrike Fischer} +\contributor{UZi}{Uwe Ziegenhagen} +\contributor{V-Li}{Christian Faulhammer} +\contributor{VPe}{Vivi Petersen} +\contributor{VVo}{Vladimir Volovich} +\contributor{WAd}{William Adams} +\contributor{WaS}{Walter Schmidt} +\contributor{YiL}{Yiannis Lazarides} +\contributor{YvH}{Yvon Henel} +\contributor{hajk}{Henk Koster} +\contributor{usw}{Ulrich Dirr} +\end{multicols} + + +Other people have sent us corrections for errors already found. +Thanks to all of you! + +If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors, e.g., +\begin{quote}\ttfamily + frank.mittelbach@latex-project.org +\end{quote} +preferably in a form usable directly in this file, i.e., +\begin{flushleft} +|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|% + \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\ + \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the erratum} +\end{flushleft} +Here is an example: +\begin{verbatim} +\erroronpage{5}{para 3, l.1}{MOs}{1997/06/01}{} + ``LaTeX'' should be typeset ``\LaTeX''. +\end{verbatim} + +\end{document} + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c79d0723d31 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tlc2.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tulm.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tulm.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2e0609184be --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/tulm.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d19c69139e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..df02c202931 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/usrguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1817 @@ +% \iffalse meta-comment +% +% Copyright 1993-2019 +% The LaTeX3 Project and any individual authors listed elsewhere +% in this file. +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX base system. +% ------------------------------------------- +% +% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". +% +% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is +% given in the file `manifest.txt'. See also `legal.txt' for additional +% information. +% +% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution +% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with +% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution. +% +% \fi +% Filename: usrguide.tex + +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] + +\documentclass{ltxguide}[2001/05/28] + +\title{\LaTeXe~for authors} + +\author{\copyright~Copyright 1995--2019, \LaTeX3 Project Team.\\ + All rights reserved.} + +\date{27 January 2019} + + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} + +Welcome to \LaTeXe, the new standard version of the \LaTeX{} Document +Preparation System. + +This document describes how to take advantage of the new features of +\LaTeX, and how to process your old \LaTeX{} documents with +\LaTeXe. However, this document is only a brief introduction to the +new facilities and is intended for authors who are already familiar +with the old version of \LaTeX{}. It is \emph{not} a reference manual +for \LaTeXe{} nor is it a complete introduction to \LaTeX. + +It is somewhat of an historical document now, since \LaTeXe{} came into +existence in 1994. + +\subsection[\LaTeXe---The new \LaTeX~release] + {\LaTeXe---The new \LaTeX~release\\ (well, for more than 10 years now)} + +The previous version of \LaTeX{} was known as \LaTeX~2.09. Over the +years many extensions have been developed for \LaTeX. This is, of +course, a sure sign of its continuing popularity but it has had one +unfortunate result: incompatible \LaTeX{} formats came into use at +different sites. This included `standard \LaTeX~2.09', \LaTeX{} built +with the \emph{New Font Selection Scheme}~(\NFSS), \SLiTeX, \AmSLaTeX, +and so on. Thus, to process documents from various places, a site +maintainer was forced to keep multiple versions of the \LaTeX{} +program. In addition, when looking at a source file it was not always +clear for which format the document was written. + +To put an end to this unsatisfactory situation, \LaTeXe{} has been +produced; it brings all such extensions back under a single format and +thus prevents the proliferation of mutually incompatible dialects of +\LaTeX~2.09. With \LaTeXe{} the `new font selection scheme' is +standard and, for example, \textsf{amsmath} (formerly the \AmSLaTeX{} +format) or \textsf{slides} (formerly the \SLiTeX{} format) are simply +extensions, which may be loaded by documents using the same base format. + +The introduction of a new release also made it possible to add a small +number of often-requested features and to make the task of writing +packages and classes simpler. + +\subsection{\LaTeX3---The long-term future of \LaTeX} +\label{Sec:ltx3} + +\LaTeXe{} is the consolidation step in a comprehensive +reimplementation of the \LaTeX{} system. The next major release of +\LaTeX{} will be \LaTeX3, which will include a radical overhaul of the +document designers' and package writers' interface to \LaTeX. + +\LaTeX3 is a long-term research project but, until it is completed, +the project team are committed to the active maintenance of \LaTeXe{}. +Thus the experience gained from the production and maintenance of +\LaTeXe{} will be a major influence on the design of \LaTeX3. +A brief description of the project can be found in the document +|ltx3info.tex|. + +If you would like to support the project then you are welcome to send +donations to the \LaTeX3 Project Fund; this has been set up to help +the research team by financing various expenses associated with this +voluntary work of maintaining the current \LaTeX{} and developing +\LaTeX3. + +The fund is administered by The \TeX{} Users Group and by various +local user groups. Information about making donations and joining +these groups is available from: +\begin{quote}\small\label{addrs} + \texttt{http://www.tug.org/lugs.html} +\end{quote} + +The \LaTeX3{} project has its home page +on the World Wide Web at: +\begin{verbatim} + http://www.latex-project.org/ +\end{verbatim} +This page describes \LaTeX{} and the \LaTeX3 project, and contains +pointers to other \LaTeX{} resources, such as the user guides, the +\TeX{} Frequently Asked Questions, and the \LaTeX{} bugs database. + +Older articles covering aspects of the \LaTeX3 project are also +available for anonymous ftp from the Comprehensive \TeX{} Archive, in +the directory: +\begin{verbatim} + ctan:info/ltx3pub +\end{verbatim} +The file |ltx3pub.bib| in that directory contains an abstract of each +of the files. + +\subsection{Overview} + +This document contains an overview of the new structure and features +of \LaTeX. It is \emph{not} a self-contained document, as it contains +only the features of \LaTeX{} which have changed since version 2.09. +You should read this document in conjunction with an introduction to +\LaTeX{}. + +\begin{description} + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:class+packages}] + contains an overview of the new structure of + \LaTeX{} documents. It describes how classes and packages work and + how class and package options can be used. It lists the standard + packages and classes which come with \LaTeX. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:commands}] describes the new commands available + to authors in \LaTeXe. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:209}] shows how to process old \LaTeX{} + documents with \LaTeXe. + +\item[Section~\ref{Sec:problems}] contains advice on dealing with + problems you may encounter in running \LaTeXe. + It lists some error messages which are new in \LaTeXe{} and + it describes some of the more common problems and how to cure them, + or where to find further information. + +\end{description} + +\subsection{Further information} + +For a general introduction to \LaTeX, including the new features of +\LaTeXe, you should read \emph{\LaTeXbook} +by Leslie Lamport~\cite{A-W:LLa94}. + +A more detailed description of the new features of \LaTeX, including an +overview of more than 200 packages and nearly 1000 ready to run examples, is +to be found in \emph{\LaTeXcomp second edition} by Frank Mittelbach and +Michel Goossens~\cite{A-W:MG2004}. + +Packages and programs for producing and manipulating graphics are +discussed at length in \emph{\LaTeXGcomp} by Michel Goossens, +Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach~\cite{A-W:GRM97}. + +Solutions for publishing with \LaTeX{} on the World Wide Web are given +in \emph{\LaTeXWcomp} by Michel Goossens and Sebastian +Rahtz~\cite{A-W:GR99}. + +For more information about the many new \LaTeX{} packages you should +read the package documentation, which should be available from the +same source as your copy of \LaTeX. + +There are a number of documentation files which accompany every copy +of \LaTeX. A copy of \emph{\LaTeX{} News} will come out with each +six-monthly release of \LaTeX; it will be found in the files +|ltnews*.tex|. The class- and package-writer's guide \emph{\clsguide} +describes the new \LaTeX{} features for writers of document classes +and packages; it is in |clsguide.tex|. The guide \emph{\fntguide} +describes the \LaTeX{} font selection scheme for class- and +package-writers; it is in |fntguide.tex|. Support for Cyrillic languages +in \LaTeX{} is described in \emph{\cyrguide}. + +The documented source code (from the files used to produce the kernel +format via |latex.ltx|) is now available as +\emph{The \LaTeXe\ Sources}. ] +This very large document also includes an index of +\LaTeX{} commands. It can be typeset from the \LaTeX{} file +|source2e.tex| in the |base| directory, using the source files and +the class file |ltxdoc.cls| from this directory. + +For more information about \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}, please contact your +local \TeX{} Users Group, or the international \TeX{} Users Group (see +page \pageref{addrs}). + + +\section{Classes and packages} +\label{Sec:class+packages} + +This section describes the new structure of \LaTeX{} documents and the +new types of file: \emph{classes} and \emph{packages}. + +\subsection{What are classes and packages?} + +The main difference between \LaTeX~2.09 and \LaTeXe{} is in the +commands before |\begin{document}|. + +In \LaTeX~2.09, documents had \emph{styles}, +such as \textsf{article} or \textsf{book}, and \emph{options}, +such as \textsf{twoside} or \textsf{epsfig}. +These were indicated by the |\documentstyle| command: +\begin{quote} + |\documentstyle|\oarg{options}\arg{style} +\end{quote} +For example, to specify a two-sided article with encapsulated +PostScript figures, you said: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentstyle[twoside,epsfig]{article} +\end{verbatim} +However, there were two different types of document style option: +\emph{built-in options} such as |twoside|; and \emph{packages} such as +|epsfig.sty|. These were very different, since any \LaTeX{} document +style could use the \textsf{epsfig} package but only document styles +which declared the \textsf{twoside} option could use that option. + +To avoid this confusion, \LaTeXe{} differentiates between built-in +options and packages. These are given by the new |\documentclass| and +|\usepackage| commands: +\begin{quote} + |\documentclass|\oarg{options}\arg{class} \\ + |\usepackage|\oarg{options}\arg{packages} +\end{quote} +For example, to specify a two-sided article with encapsulated +PostScript figures, you now write: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twoside]{article} + \usepackage{epsfig} +\end{verbatim} +You can load more than one package with a single |\usepackage| +command; for example, rather than writing: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage{epsfig} + \usepackage{multicol} +\end{verbatim} +you can specify: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage{epsfig,multicol} +\end{verbatim} +Note that \LaTeXe{} still understands the \LaTeX~2.09 |\documentstyle| +command. This command causes \LaTeXe{} to enter \emph{\LaTeX~2.09 +compatibility mode}, which is described in Section~\ref{Sec:209}. + +You should not, however, use the |\documentstyle| command for new +documents because this compatibility mode is very slow and the new +features of \LaTeXe{} are not available in this mode. + +To help differentiate between classes and packages, document classes +now end with |.cls| rather than |.sty|. Packages still end with +|.sty|, since most \LaTeX~2.09 packages work well with \LaTeXe. + +\subsection{Class and package options} + +In \LaTeX~2.09, only document styles could have options such as +|twoside| or |draft|. In \LaTeXe{}, both classes and packages are +allowed to have options. For example, to specify a two-sided article +with graphics using the |dvips| driver, you write: + +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twoside]{article} + \usepackage[dvips]{graphics} +\end{verbatim} +It is possible for packages to share common options. For example, +you could, in addition, load the \textsf{color} package by specifying: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twoside]{article} + \usepackage[dvips]{graphics} + \usepackage[dvips]{color} +\end{verbatim} +But because |\usepackage| allows more than one package to be listed, +this can be shortened to: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twoside]{article} + \usepackage[dvips]{graphics,color} +\end{verbatim} +In addition, packages will also use each option given to +the |\documentclass| command (if they know what to do with it), so you +could also write: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twoside,dvips]{article} + \usepackage{graphics,color} +\end{verbatim} +Class and package options are covered in more detail in +\emph{\LaTeXcomp} and in \emph{\clsguide}. + +\subsection{Standard classes} + +The following classes are distributed with \LaTeX: +\begin{description} + +\item[article] The |article| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[book] The |book| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[report] The |report| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[letter] The |letter| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[slides] The |slides| class described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}, + formerly \SLiTeX. +\item[proc] A document class for proceedings, based on |article|. + Formerly the |proc| package. +\item[ltxdoc] The document class for documenting the \LaTeX{} + program, based on |article|. +\item[ltxguide] The document class for \emph{\usrguide} and + \emph{\clsguide}, based on |article|. The document you are reading + now uses the |ltxguide| class. The layout for this class is likely + to change in future releases of \LaTeX. +\item[ltnews] The document class for the \emph{\LaTeX{} News} + information sheet, based on |article|. The layout for this class + is likely to change in future releases of \LaTeX. +\item[minimal] +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} + This class is the bare minimum (3 lines) that is needed in a + \LaTeX\ class file. It just sets the text width and height, and + defines |\normalsize|. It is principally intended for debugging + and testing \LaTeX\ code in situations where you do not need to + load a `full' class such as |article|. If, however, you are + designing a completely new class that is aimed for documents with + structure radically different from the structure supplied by the + article class, then it may make sense to use this as a base and add + to it code implementing the required structure, rather than + starting from |article| and modifying the code there. +\end{description} + +\subsection{Standard packages} +\label{Sec:st-pack} + +The following packages are distributed with \LaTeX: +\begin{description} +\item[alltt] +\NEWfeature{1994/12/01} + This package provides the |alltt| environment, which is like + the |verbatim| environment except that |\|, |{|, and |}| + have their usual meanings. It is described in |alltt.dtx| and + \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[doc] This is the basic package for typesetting the documentation + of \LaTeX{} programs. It is described in |doc.dtx| and in + \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. +\item[exscale] This provides scaled versions of the math extension + font. It is described in |exscale.dtx| and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + \item[fontenc] This is used to specify which font encoding \LaTeX{} + should use. It is described in |ltoutenc.dtx|. +\item[graphpap] +\NEWfeature{1994/12/01} + This package defines the |\graphpaper| command; this + can be used in a |picture| environment. +\item[ifthen] Provides commands of the form `if\dots then do\dots + otherwise do\dots'. + It is described in |ifthen.dtx| and \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. +\item[inputenc] +\NEWfeature{1994/12/01} + This is used to specify which input encoding \LaTeX{} should use. + It is described in |inputenc.dtx|. +\item[latexsym] \LaTeXe{} no longer loads the \LaTeX{} symbol font by + default. To access it, you should use the |latexsym| package. It + is described in |latexsym.dtx| and in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}; see also + Section~\ref{Sec:problems}. + \item[makeidx] This provides commands for producing indexes. It is + described in \emph{\LaTeXbook} and in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + \item[newlfont] This is used to emulate the font commands of + \LaTeX~2.09 with the New Font Selection Scheme. It is described in + \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + \item[oldlfont] This is used to emulate the font commands of + \LaTeX~2.09. It is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + \item[showidx] + This causes the argument of each |\index| command to + be printed on the page where it occurs. + It is described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. + \item[syntonly] This is used to process a document without + typesetting it. It is described in |syntonly.dtx| and in + \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + \item[tracefnt] This allows you to control how much information about + \LaTeX's font loading is displayed. It is described in + \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. +\end{description} + +\subsection{Related software} + +\NEWdescription{1998/12/01} +The following software should be available from the same distributor +as your copy of \LaTeXe. You should obtain at least the +\textsf{graphics} and \textsf{tools} collections in order to have all +the files described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. The |amsmath| package (part +of \textsf{amslatex} and formerly known as |amstex|) +and \textsf{babel} are also mentioned in the list +of `standard packages' in section C.5.2 of that book. +\begin{description} +\item[amslatex] Advanced mathematical typesetting from the American + Mathematical Society. This includes the |amsmath| package; it + provides many commands for typesetting mathematical formulas of + higher complexity. It is produced and supported by the American + Mathematical Society and it is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. +\item[babel] This package and related files support typesetting in + many languages. It is described in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. +\item[cyrillic] +\NEWfeature{1998/12/01} + Everything you need (except the fonts themselves) for + typesetting with Cyrillic fonts. +\item[graphics] This includes the |graphics| package which + provides support for the inclusion and transformation of graphics, + including files produced by other software. Also included, is the + |color| package which provides support for typesetting in colour. + Both these packages are described in \emph{\LaTeXbook}. +\item[psnfss] Everything you need (except the fonts themselves) for + typesetting with a large range of Type~1 (PostScript) fonts. +\item[tools] Miscellaneous packages written by the \LaTeX3 + project team. +\end{description} +These packages come with documentation and each of them is also +described in at least one of the books \emph{\LaTeXcomp} and +\emph{\LaTeXbook}. + +\subsubsection{Tools} + +This collection of packages includes, at least, the following (some +files may have slightly different names on certain systems): + +\begin{description} +\item[array] + Extended versions of the environments |array|, |tabular| + and |tabular*|, with many extra features. +\item[calc] +\NEWfeature{1996/12/01} + Enables the use of certain algebraic notation when specifying + values for lengths and counters. +\item[dcolumn] + Alignment on `decimal points' in tabular entries. Requires the + |array| package. +\item[delarray] + Adds `large delimiters' around arrays. Requires |array|. +\item[hhline] + Finer control over horizontal rules in tables. Requires |array|. +\item[longtable] + Multi-page tables. (Does not require |array|, but it uses the + extended features if both are loaded.) +\item[tabularx] + Defines a |tabularx| environment that is similar to |tabular*| + but it modifies the column widths, rather than the inter-column + space, to achieve the desired table width. +\item[afterpage] + Place text after the current page. +\item[bm] + Access bold math symbols. +\item[enumerate] + Extended version of the |enumerate| environment. +\item[fontsmpl] + Package and test file for producing `font samples'. +\item[ftnright] + Place all footnotes in the right-hand column in two-column mode. +\item[indentfirst] + Indent the first paragraph of sections, etc. +\item[layout] + Show the page layout defined by the current document class. +\item[multicol] + Typeset text in columns, with the length of the columns + `balanced'. +\item[rawfonts] + Preload fonts using the old internal font names of \LaTeX~2.09. + See Section~\ref{Sec:oldinternals}. +\item[somedefs] + Selective handling of package options. (Used by the rawfonts + package.) +\item[showkeys] + Prints the `keys' used by |\label|, |\ref|, |\cite| etc.; useful + whilst drafting. +\item[theorem] + Flexible declaration of `theorem-like' environments. +\item[varioref] + `Smart' handling of page references. +\item[verbatim] + Flexible extension of the verbatim environment. +\item[xr] + Cross reference other `external' documents. +\item[xspace] + `Smart space' command that helps you to avoid the common mistake + of missing spaces after command names. +\end{description} + + +\section{Commands} +\label{Sec:commands} + +This section describes the new commands available in \LaTeXe. +They are covered in more detail in \emph{\LaTeXbook} and in +\emph{\LaTeXcomp}. + +\subsection{Initial commands} + +Initial commands can appear only before the |\documentclass| +line. + +\begin{decl} +|\begin{filecontents}| \arg{file-name} \\ + \m{file-contents} \\ +|\end{filecontents}| +\end{decl} + +The |filecontents| environment is intended for bundling within a +single document file the contents of packages, options, or other +files. When the document file is run through \LaTeXe{} the body of +this environment is written verbatim (preceded by a comment line) to a +file whose name is given as the environment's only argument. However, +if that file already exists then nothing happens except for an +information message. + +Only normal ASCII text characters (7-bit visible text) should be +included in a |filecontents| environment. Anything else, such as tab +characters, form-feeds or 8-bit characters, should not be included in a +|filecontents| environment. + +Tabs and form feeds produce a warning, explaining that they are turned +into spaces or blank lines, respectively. +What happens to 8-bit characters depends on the \TeX{} installation and +is in general unpredictable. + +The |filecontents| environment is used for including \LaTeX{} files. +For other plain text files (such as Encapsulated PostScript files), +you should use the |filecontents*| environment which does not add a +comment line. + +These environments are allowed only before |\documentclass|. This +ensures that any packages that have been bundled in the document are +present when needed. + +\subsection{Preamble commands} +\label{Sec:pre} + +The changes to the preamble commands are intentionally designed to make +\LaTeXe{} documents look clearly different from old documents. The +commands should be used only before |\begin{document}|. + +\begin{decl} +|\documentclass| \oarg{option-list} \arg{class-name} + \oarg{release-date} +\end{decl} + +This command replaces the +\LaTeX~2.09 command |\documentstyle|. + +There must be exactly one |\documentclass| command in a document; and +it must come after the |filecontents| environments, if any, but before +any other commands. + +The \m{option-list} is a list of options, each of which may modify the +formatting of elements which are defined in the \m{class-name} file, +as well as those in all following |\usepackage| commands (see +below). + +The optional argument \m{release-date} can be used to specify the +earliest desired release date of the class file; it should contain a +date in the format \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}. If a version of the class +older than this date is found, a warning is issued. + +For example, to specify a two-column article, using a version of +|article.cls| released after June 1994, you specify: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[twocolumn]{article}[1994/06/01] +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{decl} +|\documentstyle| \oarg{option-list} \arg{class-name} +\end{decl} + +This command is still supported for compatibility with old files. It +is essentially the same as |\documentclass| except that it invokes +\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}. It also causes any options in +the \m{option-list} that are not processed by the class file to be +loaded as packages after the class has been loaded. See +Section~\ref{Sec:209} for more details on \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility +mode. + +\begin{decl} +|\usepackage| \oarg{option-list} \arg{package-name} \oarg{release-date} +\end{decl} + +Any number of |\usepackage| commands is allowed. Each package file +(as denoted by \m{package-name}) defines new elements (or modifies +those defined in the class file loaded by the \m{class-name} argument +of the |\documentclass| command). A package file thus extends the +range of documents which can be processed. + +The \m{option-list} argument can contain a list of options, each of +which can modify the formatting of elements which are defined in this +\m{package-name} file. + +As above, \m{release-date} can contain the earliest desired release +date of the package file in the format \textsc{yyyy/mm/dd}; if an +older version of the package is found, a warning is issued. + +For example, to load the |graphics| package for the |dvips| driver, +using a version of |graphics.sty| released after June 1994, you write: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[dvips]{graphics}[1994/06/01] +\end{verbatim} +Each package is loaded only once. If the same package is requested +more than once, nothing happens in the second or following attempt +unless the package has been requested with options that were not given +in the original |\usepackage|. If such extra options are specified +then an error message is produced. See Section~\ref{Sec:problems} how +to resolve this problem. + +As well as processing the options given in the \m{option-list} of the +|\usepackage| command, each package processes the +\m{option-list} of the |\documentclass| command as well. This +means that any option which should be processed by every package (to +be precise, by every package that specifies an action for it) can be +specified just once, in the |\documentclass| command, rather than +being repeated for each package that needs it. + +\begin{decl} +|\listfiles| +\end{decl} + +If this command is placed in the preamble then a list of the files +read in (as a result of processing the document) will be displayed +on the terminal (and in the log file) at the end of the run. Where +possible, a short description will also be produced. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +\emph{Warning}: this command will list only files which were read +using \LaTeX{} commands such as |\input|\arg{file} or +|\include|\arg{file}. If the file was read using the primitive \TeX{} +syntax |\input |\emph{file} (without |{ }| braces around the file name) +then it will not be listed; failure to use the \LaTeX{} form with the +braces can cause more severe problems, possibly leading to overwriting +important files, so \textbf{always put in the braces}. + + +\begin{decl} +|\setcounter{errorcontextlines}| \arg{num} +\end{decl} + +\TeX~3 introduced a new primitive |\errorcontextlines| which controls +the format of error messages. \LaTeXe\ provides an interface to this +through the standard |\setcounter| command. As most \LaTeX\ users do +not want to see the internal definitions of \LaTeX\ commands each time +they make an error, \LaTeXe{} sets this to $-1$ by default. + +\subsection{Document structure} + +The |book| document class introduces new commands to indicate +document structure. +\begin{decl} +|\frontmatter| \\ |\mainmatter| \\ |\backmatter| +\end{decl} +These commands indicate the beginning of the front matter (title page, +table of contents and prefaces), main matter (main text) and back +matter (bibliography, indexes and colophon). + +\subsection{Definitions} + +In \LaTeX, commands can have both mandatory and optional arguments, +for example in: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[11pt]{article} +\end{verbatim} +the |11pt| argument is optional, whereas the |article| class name is +mandatory. + +In \LaTeX~2.09 users could define commands with arguments, but these +had to be mandatory arguments. With \LaTeXe, users can now define +commands and environments which also have one optional argument. + +\begin{decl} +|\newcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\ +|\newcommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\ +|\renewcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\ +|\renewcommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} + +These commands have a new, second, optional argument; this is used for +defining commands which themselves take one optional argument. This +new argument is best introduced by means of a simple (and hence not +very practical) example: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\example}[2][YYY]{Mandatory arg: #2; + Optional arg: #1.} +\end{verbatim} +This defines |\example| to be a command with two arguments, referred +to as |#1| and |#2| in the \arg{definition}---nothing new so far. But +by adding a second optional argument to this |\newcommand| (the +|[YYY]|) the first argument (|#1|) of the newly defined command +|\example| is made optional with its default value being |YYY|. + +Thus the usage of |\example| is either: +\begin{verbatim} + \example{BBB} +\end{verbatim} +which prints: +\begin{quote} + Mandatory arg: BBB; + Optional arg: YYY. +\end{quote} +or: +\begin{verbatim} + \example[XXX]{AAA} +\end{verbatim} +which prints: +\begin{quote} + Mandatory arg: AAA; + Optional arg: XXX. +\end{quote} + +The default value of the optional argument is \texttt{YYY}. +This value is specified as the \oarg{default} argument of the +|\newcommand| that created |\example|. + +As another more useful example, the definition: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\seq}[2][n]{\lbrace #2_{0},\ldots,\,#2_{#1} \rbrace} +\end{verbatim} +means that the input |$\seq{a}$| produces +the formula $\lbrace a_{0},\ldots,\,a_{n} \rbrace$, +whereas the input |$\seq[k]{x}$| produces the formula +$\lbrace x_{0},\ldots,\,x_{k} \rbrace$. + +In summary, the command: +\begin{quote} + |\newcommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} +\end{quote} +defines \m{cmd} to be a command with \m{num} arguments, the first of +which is optional and has default value \m{default}. + +Note that there can only be one optional argument but, as before, +there can be up to nine arguments in total. + +\begin{decl} +|\newenvironment| + \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\ +|\newenvironment*| + \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\ +|\renewenvironment| + \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} \\ +|\renewenvironment*| + \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{beg-def} \arg{end-def} +\end{decl} + +\LaTeXe\ also supports the creation of environments that have one +optional argument. Thus the syntax of these two commands has +been extended in the same way as that of |\newcommand|. + +\begin{decl} +|\providecommand| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} \\ +|\providecommand*| \arg{cmd} \oarg{num} \oarg{default} \arg{definition} +\end{decl} + +This takes the same arguments as |\newcommand|. If \m{cmd} is already +defined then the existing definition is kept; but if it is currently +undefined then the effect of |\providecommand| is to define \m{cmd} +just as if |\newcommand| had been used. + +\NEWfeature{1994/12/01} + All the above five `defining commands' now have \texttt{*}-forms that + are usually the better form to use when defining commands with + arguments, unless any of these arguments is intended to contain + whole paragraphs of text. Moreover, if you ever do find yourself + needing to use the non-star form then you should ask whether + that argument would not better be treated as the contents of a + suitably defined environment. + +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} + The commands produced by the above five `defining commands' are + now robust. + +\subsection{Boxes} + +These next three commands for making LR-boxes all existed in +\LaTeX~2.09. They have been enhanced in two ways. + +\begin{decl} +|\makebox| \oarg{width} \oarg{pos} \arg{text} \\ +|\framebox| \oarg{width} \oarg{pos} \arg{text} \\ +|\savebox| \arg{cmd} \oarg{width} \oarg{pos} \arg{text} +\end{decl} + +One small but far-reaching change for \LaTeXe\ is that, within the +\m{width} argument only, four special lengths can be used. These are +all dimensions of the box that would be produced by using simply +|\mbox|\arg{text}: +\begin{itemize} +\item [] |\height|\quad its height above the baseline; +\item [] |\depth|\quad its depth below the baseline; +\item [] |\totalheight|\quad the sum of |\height| and |\depth|; +\item [] |\width|\quad its width. +\end{itemize} +Thus, to put `hello' in the centre of a box of twice its natural +width, you would use: +\begin{verbatim} + \makebox[2\width]{hello} +\end{verbatim} +Or you could put \textit{f} into a square box, like +this: + \framebox{\makebox[\totalheight]{\itshape f\/}} +\begin{verbatim} + \framebox{\makebox[\totalheight]{\itshape f\/}} +\end{verbatim} +Note that it is the total width of the framed box, including the +frame, which is set to |\totalheight|. + +The other change is a new possibility for \m{pos}: |s| has been added +to |l| and |r|. If \m{pos} is |s| then the text is stretched the full +length of the box, making use of any `rubber lengths' (including any +inter-word spaces) in the contents of the box. If no such `rubber +length' is present, an `underfull box' will probably be produced. + +\begin{decl} +|\parbox| \oarg{pos} \oarg{height} \oarg{inner-pos} \arg{width} + \arg{text} \\ +|\begin{minipage}| + \oarg{pos} \oarg{height} \oarg{inner-pos} \arg{width}\\ +\m{text}\\ +|\end{minipage}| +\end{decl} + +As for the box commands above, |\height|, |\width|, etc.~may be used +in the \oarg{height} argument to denote the natural dimensions of the +box. + +The \m{inner-pos} argument is new in \LaTeXe. It is the vertical +equivalent to the \m{pos} argument for |\makebox|, etc, determining +the position of \m{text} within the box. The \m{inner-pos} may be any +one of |t|, |b|, |c|, or |s|, denoting top, bottom, centered, or +`stretched' alignment respectively. When the \m{inner-pos} argument +is not specified, \LaTeX\ gives it same value as \m{pos} (this could be +the latter's default value). + + +\begin{decl} +|\begin{lrbox}| \arg{cmd}\\ +\m{text}\\ +|\end{lrbox}| +\end{decl} + +This is an environment which does not directly print anything. +Its effect is to save the typeset \m{text} in the bin \m{cmd}. Thus +it is like |\sbox| \arg{cmd} \arg{text}, except that any white space +before or after the contents \m{text} is ignored. + +This is very useful as it enables both the |\verb| command and the +\texttt{verbatim} environment to be used within \m{text}. + +It also makes it possible to define, for example, a `framed box' +environment. This is done by first using this environment to save +some text in a bin \m{cmd} and then calling +|\fbox{\usebox{|\m{cmd}|}}|. + +The following example defines an environment, called |fmpage|, that is +a framed version of |minipage|. +\begin{verbatim} + \newsavebox{\fmbox} + \newenvironment{fmpage}[1] + {\begin{lrbox}{\fmbox}\begin{minipage}{#1}} + {\end{minipage}\end{lrbox}\fbox{\usebox{\fmbox}}} +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Measuring things} + +The first of these next commands was in \LaTeX~2.09. The two new +commands are the obvious analogues. + +\begin{decl} +|\settowidth| \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text} \\ +|\settoheight| \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text} \\ +|\settodepth| \arg{length-cmd} \arg{lr text} +\end{decl} + +\subsection{Line endings} + +\NEWdescription{1994/12/01} +The command |\\|, which is used to indicate a line-end in various +places, is now a robust command when used within arguments such as +section titles. + +Also, because it is often necessary to distinguish which type of line +is to be ended, we have introduced the following new command; it +has the same argument syntax as that of |\\|. +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] +|\tabularnewline| \oarg{vertical-space} +\end{decl} +One example of its use is when the text in the last +column of a |tabular| environment is set with |\raggedright|; then +|\tabularnewline| can be used to indicate the end of a row of the +|tabular|, whilst |\\| will indicate the end of a line of text in a +paragraph within the column. This command can be used in the |array| +environment as well as |tabular|, and also the extended versions of +these environments offered by the \textsf{array} and \textsf{longtable} +packages in the tools collection. + +\subsection{Controlling page breaks} + +Sometimes it is necessary, for a final version of a document, to +`help' \LaTeX\ break the pages in the best way. \LaTeX~2.09 had a +variety of commands for this situation: |\clearpage|, |\pagebreak| +etc. \LaTeXe\ provides, in addition, commands which can produce +longer pages as well as shorter ones. + + +\begin{decl} +|\enlargethispage| \arg{size} \\ +|\enlargethispage*| \arg{size} +\end{decl} + +These commands increase the height of a page (from its normal value of +|\textheight|) by the specified amount \m{size}, a rigid length. This +change affects \emph{only} the current page. + +This can be used, for example, to allow an extra line to be fitted +onto the page or, with a negative length, to produce a page +shorter than normal. + +The star form also shrinks any vertical white space on the page as +much as possible, so as to fit the maximum amount of text on the +page. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +These commands do not change the position of the footer text; thus, if +a page is lengthened too far, the main text may overprint the footer. + +\subsection{Floats} + +There is a new command, |\suppressfloats|, and a new `float +specifier'. These will enable people to gain better +control of \LaTeX's float placement algorithm. + +\begin{decl} +|\suppressfloats| \oarg{placement} +\end{decl} + +This command stops any further floating environments from being placed +on the current page. With an optional argument, which should be either +|t| or |b| (not both), this restriction applies only to putting +further floats at the top or at the bottom. Any floats which would +normally be placed on this page are placed on the next page instead. + +\begin{decl} +The extra float location specifier: \ \texttt{!} +\end{decl} + +This can be used, along with at least one of \texttt{h}, \texttt{t}, +\texttt{b} and \texttt{p}, in the location optional argument of a +float. + +If a \texttt{!} is present then, just for this particular float, +whenever it is processed by the float mechanism the following are +ignored: +\begin{itemize} +\item all restrictions on the number of floats which can appear; +\item all explicit restrictions on the amount of space on a text page +which may be occupied by floats or must be occupied by text. +\end{itemize} +The mechanism will, however, still attempt to ensure that pages are +not overfull and that floats of the same type are printed in the +correct order. + +Note that its presence has no effect on the production of float pages. + +A \texttt{!} specifier overrides the effect of any |\suppressfloats| +command for this particular float. + +\subsection{Font changing: text} + +The font selection scheme used in \LaTeXe{} differs a lot from that +used in \LaTeX~2.09. In this section, we give a brief description of +the new commands. A more detailed description with examples is given +in \emph{\LaTeXcomp}, and the interface for class- and package-writers +is described in \emph{\fntguide}. + +\begin{decl} +|\normalfont|\\ +|\rmfamily|\\ +|\sffamily|\\ +|\ttfamily|\\ +|\mdseries|\\ +|\bfseries|\\ +|\upshape|\\ +|\itshape|\\ +|\slshape|\\ +|\scshape| +\end{decl} + +These are font commands whose use is the same as the commands |\rm|, +|\bf|, etc. The difference is that each command changes just one +attribute of the font (the attribute changed is part of the name). +One result of this is that, for example, |\bfseries\itshape| produces +both a change of series and a change of shape, to give a bold italic +font. + +\begin{decl} +|\textnormal|\arg{text}\\ +|\textrm|\arg{text}\\ +|\textsf|\arg{text}\\ +|\texttt|\arg{text}\\ +|\textmd|\arg{text}\\ +|\textbf|\arg{text}\\ +|\textup|\arg{text}\\ +|\textit|\arg{text}\\ +|\textsl|\arg{text}\\ +|\textsc|\arg{text}\\ +|\emph|\arg{text} +\end{decl} + +These are one-argument commands; they take as an argument the +text which is to be typeset in the particular font. They also +automatically insert italic corrections where appropriate; if you do +not like the result, you can add an italic correction with |\/| or +remove it with |\nocorr|. The |\nocorr| should always be the first or +last thing within the \arg{text} argument. + +\subsection{Font changing: math} + +Most of the fonts used within math mode do not need to be explicitly +invoked; but to use letters from a range of fonts, the following +class of commands is provided. + +\begin{decl} +|\mathrm| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathnormal| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathcal| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathbf| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathsf| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathtt| \arg{letters}\\ +|\mathit| \arg{letters} +\end{decl} + +These are also one-argument commands which take as an argument the +letters which are to be typeset in the particular font. The argument +is processed in math mode so spaces within it will be ignored. Only +letters, digits and accents have their font changed, for example +|$\mathbf{\tilde A \times 1}$| produces $\mathbf{\tilde A \times 1}$. + +\subsection{Ensuring math mode} + +\begin{decl} +|\ensuremath| \arg{math commands} +\end{decl} + +In \LaTeX~2.09, if you wanted a command to work both in math mode and +in text mode, the suggested method was to define something like: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\Gp}{\mbox{$G_p$}} +\end{verbatim} +Unfortunately, the |\mbox| stops |\Gp| changing size correctly in (for +instance) subscripts or a fraction. + +In \LaTeXe{} you can define it thus: +\begin{verbatim} + \newcommand{\Gp}{\ensuremath{G_p}} +\end{verbatim} +Now |\Gp| will work correctly in all contexts. + +This is because the |\ensuremath| does nothing, producing simply +|G_p|, when |\Gp| is used within math mode; but it ensures that math +mode is entered (and exited) as required when |\Gp| is used in text +mode. + + +\subsection{Setting text superscripts} + +\begin{decl} +|\textsuperscript| \arg{text} +\end{decl} + +\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} In \LaTeX~2.09 textual superscripts such as +footnote markers were produced by internally entering math mode and +typesetting the number as a math superscript. This normally looked +fine since the digits in math fonts are the same as those in text +fonts when Computer Modern fonts are used. But when a different +document font (such as Times) is selected, the results look rather +strange. For this reason the command |\textsuperscript| has been +introduced which typesets its argument in the current text font, in a +superscript position and in the correct size. + +\subsection{Text commands: all encodings} + +\NEWdescription{1994/12/01} + One of the main differences between \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX~2.09 is + that \LaTeXe{} can deal with fonts in arbitrary \emph{encodings}. + (A font encoding is the sequence of characters in the font---for + example a Cyrillic font would have a different encoding from a Greek + font.) + + The two major font encodings that are used for Latin languages such + as English or German are |OT1| (Donald Knuth's 7-bit encoding, which + has been used during most of \TeX's lifetime) and |T1| (the new + 8-bit `Cork' encoding). + + \LaTeX~2.09 only supported the |OT1| encoding, whereas \LaTeXe{} has + support for both |OT1| and |T1| built-in. The next section will + cover the new commands which are available if you have |T1|-encoded + fonts. This section describes new commands which are available in + all encodings. + + Most of these commands provide characters which were available in + \LaTeX~2.09 already. For example |\textemdash| gives an `em dash', + which was available in \LaTeX~2.09 by typing |---|. However, some + fonts (for example a Greek font) may not have the |---| ligature, + but you will still be able to access an em dash by typing + |\textemdash|. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\r{<text>}| +\end{decl} + This command gives a `ring' accent, for example `\r{o}' can be typed + |\r{o}|. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\SS| +\end{decl} + This command produces a German `SS', that is a capital `\ss'. This + letter can hyphenate differently from `SS', so is needed for entering + all-caps German. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\textcircled{<text>}| +\end{decl} + This command is used to build `circled characters' such as + |\copyright|. For example |\textcircled{a}| produces + \textcircled{a}. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\textcompwordmark| +\end{decl} + This command is used to separate letters which would normally + ligature. For example `f\textcompwordmark i' is produced with + |f\textcompwordmark i|. Note that the `f' and `i' have not + ligatured to produce `fi'. This is rarely useful in English + (`shelf\textcompwordmark ful' is a rare example of where it might be + used) but is used in languages such as German. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\textvisiblespace| +\end{decl} + This command produces a `visible space' character + `\textvisiblespace'. This is sometimes used in computer listings, + for example `type \textsf{hello\textvisiblespace world}'. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\textemdash| + |\textendash| + |\textexclamdown| + |\textquestiondown| \\ + |\textquotedblleft| + |\textquotedblright| + |\textquoteleft| + |\textquoteright| +\end{decl} + These commands produce characters which would otherwise be + accessed via ligatures: + \begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{ccl} + \emph{ligature} & \emph{character} & \emph{command} \\ + |---| & --- & |\textemdash| \\ + |--| & -- & |\textendash| \\ + |!`| & !` & |\textexclamdown| \\ + |?`| & ?` & |\textquestiondown| \\ + |``| & `` & |\textquotedblleft| \\ + |''| & '' & |\textquotedblright| \\ + |`| & ` & |\textquoteleft| \\ + |'| & ' & |\textquoteright| + \end{tabular} + \end{center} + The reason for making these characters directly accessible is so + that they will work in encodings which do not have these characters. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\textbullet| + |\textperiodcentered| +\end{decl} + These commands allow access to characters which were previously only + available in math mode: + \begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{lcl} + \emph{math command} & \emph{character} & \emph{text command} \\ + |\bullet| & $\bullet$ & |\textbullet| \\ + |\cdot| & $\cdot$ & |\textperiodcentered| + \end{tabular} + \end{center} + +\begin{decl}[1995/12/01] + |\textbackslash| + |\textbar| + |\textless| + |\textgreater| +\end{decl} + These commands allow access to ASCII characters which were + only available in verbatim or math mode: + \begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{lcl} + \emph{math command} & \emph{character} & \emph{text command} \\ + |\backslash| & $\backslash$ & |\textbackslash| \\ + |\mid| & $\mid$ & |\textbar| \\ + |<<| & $<$ & |\textless| \\ + |>>| & $>$ & |\textgreater| + \end{tabular} + \end{center} + +\begin{decl}[1995/12/01] + |\textasciicircum| + |\textasciitilde| +\end{decl} + These commands allow access to ASCII characters which were + previously only available in verbatim: + \begin{center} + \begin{tabular}{cl} + \emph{verbatim} & \emph{text command} \\ + |^| & |\textasciicircum| \\ + |~| & |\textasciitilde| + \end{tabular} + \end{center} + +\begin{decl}[1995/12/01] + |\textregistered| + |\texttrademark| +\end{decl} + These commands provide the `registered trademark' (R) and + `trademark' (TM) symbols. + +\subsection{Text commands: the T1 encoding} + +\NEWdescription{1994/12/01} + The |OT1| font encoding is fine for typesetting in English, but has + problems when typesetting other languages. The |T1| encoding solves + some of these problems, by providing extra characters (such as `eth' + and `thorn'), and it allows words containing accented letters to be + hyphenated (as long as you have a package like |babel| which allows + for non-American hyphenation). + + This section describes the commands you can use if you have the |T1| + fonts. To use them, you need to get the `ec fonts', or the + |T1|-encoded PostScript fonts, as used by \textsf{psnfss}. + All these fonts are + available by anonymous ftp in the Comprehensive \TeX{} Archive, and + are also available on the CD-ROMs \emph{4all \TeX} and + \emph{\TeX{} Live} (both available from the \TeX{} Users Group). + + You can then select the |T1| fonts by saying: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\end{verbatim} + This will allow you to use the commands in this section. + + \emph{Note:} Since this document must be processable on any site + running an up-to-date \LaTeX, it does not contain any characters + that are present only in |T1|-encoded fonts. This means that this + document cannot show you what these glyphs look like! If you want + to see them then run \LaTeX{} on the document |fontsmpl| and + respond `|cmr|' when it prompts you for a family name. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\k{<text>}| +\end{decl} + This command produces an `ogonek' accent. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\DH| + |\DJ| + |\NG| + |\TH| + |\dh| + |\dj| + |\ng| + |\th| +\end{decl} + These commands produce characters `eth', `dbar', `eng', and `thorn'. + +\begin{decl}[1994/12/01] + |\guillemotleft| + |\guillemotright| + |\guilsinglleft| + |\guilsinglright| \\ + |\quotedblbase| + |\quotesinglbase| + |\textquotedbl| +\end{decl} + % A local hack (could be improved): + \newcommand{\fauxguillemet}[1]{$\vcenter{\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle#1$}}$} + These commands produce various sorts of quotation mark. + Rough representations of them are: + \fauxguillemet\ll a\fauxguillemet\gg{} + \fauxguillemet<a\fauxguillemet> + ,\kern -0.1em,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em`` + ,\kern 0.05em a\kern -0.05em` and |"|a|"|. + +\NEWdescription{2001/06/01} + There are therefore some extra short-form ligatures available for + use in documents that will only be used with |T1|-encoded fonts. + + The guillemets |\guillemotleft| and |\guillemotright|% + \footnote{We apologise once again for maintaining Adobe's + enormous solipsism~(sic) of confusing a diving bird with + punctuation marks!} + can be obtained by typing |<<<<| and |>>>>| and |\quotedblbase| + by typing |,,|\,. + + Also, unlike the unexpected results with + |OT1|-encoded fonts, |<<| and |>>| will produce \textless{} and + \textgreater{}. + + Note also that the single character |"| will no longer produce '' + but rather |\textquotedbl|. + +\subsection{Logos} + +\begin{decl} +|\LaTeX|\\ +|\LaTeXe| +\end{decl} + +|\LaTeX| (producing `\LaTeX') is still the `main' logo command, +but if you need to refer to the new features, you can write +|\LaTeXe| (producing `\LaTeXe'). + +\subsection{Picture commands} + +\begin{decl} + |\qbezier[<N>](<AX>,<AY>)(<BX>,<BY>)(<CX>,<CY>)| \\ + | \bezier{<N>}(<AX>,<AY>)(<BX>,<BY>)(<CX>,<CY>)| +\end{decl} +The |\qbezier| command can be used in |picture| mode to draw a +quadratic Bezier curve from position |(<AX>,<AY>)| to |(<CX>,<CY>)| with +control point |(<BX>,<BY>)|. The optional argument \m{N} gives the +number of points on the curve. + +For example, the diagram: +\begin{center} + \begin{picture}(50,50) + \thicklines + \qbezier(0,0)(0,50)(50,50) + \qbezier[20](0,0)(50,0)(50,50) + \thinlines + \put(0,0){\line(1,1){50}} + \end{picture} +\end{center} +is drawn with: +\begin{verbatim} + \begin{picture}(50,50) + \thicklines + \qbezier(0,0)(0,50)(50,50) + \qbezier[20](0,0)(50,0)(50,50) + \thinlines + \put(0,0){\line(1,1){50}} + \end{picture} +\end{verbatim} +The |\bezier| command is the same, except that the argument \m{N} is not +optional. It is provided for compatibility with the \LaTeX~2.09 +|bezier| document style option. + +\subsection{Old commands} + +\begin{decl} +|\samepage| +\end{decl} + +The |\samepage| command still exists but is no longer being +maintained. +This is because it only ever worked erratically; it does not +guarantee that there will be no page-breaks within its scope; and +it can cause footnotes and marginals to be wrongly placed. + +We recommend using |\enlargethispage| in conjunction with page-break +commands such as |\newpage| and |\pagebreak| to help control page +breaks. + +\begin{decl} + |\SLiTeX| +\end{decl} +Since \SLiTeX{} no longer exists, the logo is no longer defined in the +\LaTeX{} kernel. A suitable replacement is |\textsc{Sli\TeX}|. The +\SLiTeX{} logo is defined in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. + +\begin{decl} +|\mho| |\Join| |\Box| |\Diamond| |\leadsto| \\ +|\sqsubset| |\sqsupset| |\lhd| |\unlhd| |\rhd| |\unrhd| +\end{decl} + +These symbols are contained in the \LaTeX{} symbol font, which was +automatically loaded by \LaTeX~2.09. However, \TeX{} has room for +only sixteen math font families; thus many users discovered that they +ran out. Because of this, \LaTeX{} does not load the \LaTeX{} symbol +font unless you use the \textsf{latexsym} package. + +These symbols are also made available, using different fonts, by the +\textsf{amsfonts} package, which also defines a large number of other +symbols. It is supplied by the American Mathematical Society. + +The \textsf{latexsym} package is loaded automatically in \LaTeX~2.09 +compatibility mode. + +\section{\LaTeX~2.09 documents} +\label{Sec:209} + +\LaTeXe{} can process (almost) any \LaTeX~2.09 document, by entering +\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}. Nothing has changed, you run +\LaTeX{} in the same way you always did, and you will get much the +same results. + +The reason for the `almost' is that some \LaTeX~2.09 packages made use +of low-level unsupported features of \LaTeX. If you discover such a +package, you should find out if it has been updated to work with +\LaTeXe. Most packages will still work with \LaTeXe---the easiest way +to find out whether a package still works is to try it! + +\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode is a comprehensive emulation of +\LaTeX~2.09, but at the cost of time. Documents can run up to 50\% +slower in compatibility mode than they did under \LaTeX~2.09. +In addition, many of the new features of \LaTeXe{} are not available in +\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. + +\subsection{Warning} + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +This \emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode} is provided solely to allow +you to process 2.09 documents, i.e.~documents that were written (we +hope, a long time ago) for a very old system and therefore could be +processed by using a genuine antique \LaTeX~2.09 system. + +This mode is therefore \emph{not} intended to provide access to the +enhanced features of \LaTeXe{}. Thus it must not be used to process +new documents which masquerade as 2.09 documents (i.e.~they begin with +|\documentstyle|) but which could not be processed using that genuine +antique \LaTeX~2.09 system because they contain some new, +\LaTeXe{}-only, commands or environments. + +To prevent such misuse of the system, and the consequent trouble it +causes when such misleadingly encoded documents are distributed, the +\emph{\LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode} turns off most of these new +features and commands. Any attempt to use them will give you an error +message and, moreover, many of them simply will not work, whilst +others will produce unpredictable results. +So don't bother sending us any bug reports about such occurrences since +they are intentional. + + +\subsection{Font selection problems} +\label{Sec:fsprob} + +When using compatibility mode, it is possible that you will find +problems with font-changing commands in some old documents. These +problems are of two types: + +\begin{itemize} +\item producing error messages; +\item not producing the font changes you expected. +\end{itemize} + +In case of error messages it is possible that the document (or an old +style file used therein) contains references to old internal commands +which are no longer defined, see Section~\ref{Sec:oldinternals} for +more information if this is the case. + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +One example of the unexpected is if you use one of the new style of +math-mode font changing command as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +$ \mathbf{xy} A $ +\end{verbatim} +You may well find that this behaves as if you had put: +\begin{verbatim} +$ \bf {xy} A $ +\end{verbatim} +everything including the $A$ coming out bold. + +\LaTeX~2.09 allowed sites to customize their \LaTeX{} installation, +which resulted in documents producing different results on different +\LaTeX{} installations. \LaTeXe{} no longer allows so much +customization but, for compatibility with old documents, the local +configuration file |latex209.cfg| is loaded every time \LaTeXe{} +enters \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode. + +For example, if your site was customized to use the New Font +Selection Scheme (\NFSS) with the |oldlfont| option, then you can +make \LaTeXe{} emulate this by creating a |latex209.cfg| file +containing the commands: +\begin{verbatim} +\ExecuteOptions{oldlfont}\RequirePackage{oldlfont} +\end{verbatim} +Similarly, to emulate \NFSS{} with the |newlfont| option, you can +create a |latex209.cfg| file containing: +\begin{verbatim} +\ExecuteOptions{newlfont}\RequirePackage{newlfont} +\end{verbatim} + + +\subsection{Native mode} +\label{Sec:native} + +To run an old document faster, and use the new features of +\LaTeXe, you should try using \emph{\LaTeXe{} native mode}. +This is done by replacing the command: +\begin{quote} + |\documentstyle[|\m{options}|,|\m{packages}|]|\arg{class} +\end{quote} +with: +\begin{quote} + |\documentclass|\oarg{options}\arg{class} \\ + |\usepackage{latexsym,|\m{packages}|}| +\end{quote} +However, some documents which can be processed in \LaTeX~2.09 +compatibility mode may not work in native mode. Some \LaTeX~2.09 +packages will only work with \LaTeXe{} in 2.09 compatibility mode. +Some documents will cause errors because of \LaTeXe's improved error +detection abilities. + +But most \LaTeX~2.09 documents can be processed by \LaTeXe{}'s native +mode with the above change. Again, the easiest way to find out +whether your documents can be processed in native mode is to try it! + + +\section{Local modifications} +\label{sec:loc} + +\NEWdescription{1995/12/01} +There are two common types of local modifications that can be done +very simply. Do not forget that documents produced using such +modifications will not be usable at other places (such documents are +called `non-portable'). + +One type of modification is the use of personal commands for commonly +used symbols or constructions. These should be put into a package +file (for example, one called \texttt{mymacros.sty}) and loaded by +putting |\usepackage{mymacros}| in the document preamble. + +Another type is a local document class that is very similar to one of +the standard classes but contains some straightforward modifications +such as extra environments, different values for some parameters, etc. +These should be put into a class file; here we shall describe a simple +method of constructing such a file using, as an example, a class +called \textsf{larticle} that is very similar to the \textsf{article} +class. + +\NEWfeature{1995/12/01} +The class file called \texttt{larticle.cls} should (after the +preliminary identification commands) start as follows: +\begin{verbatim} + \LoadClassWithOptions{article} +\end{verbatim} +This command should be followed by whatever additions and changes you +wish to make to the results of reading in the file +\texttt{article.sty}. + +The effect of using the above |\LoadClassWithOptions| command is to +load the standard class file \textsf{article} with whatever options +are asked for by the document. Thus a document using your +\textsf{larticle} class can specify any option that could be specified +when using the standard \textsf{article} class; for example: +\begin{verbatim} + \documentclass[a4paper,twocolumn,dvips]{larticle} +\end{verbatim} + + +\section{Problems} +\label{Sec:problems} + +This section describes some of the things which may go wrong when +using \LaTeXe, and what you can do about it. + +\subsection{New error messages} + +\LaTeXe{} has a number of new error messages. +Please also note that many error messages now produce further helpful +information if you press |h| in response to the error prompt. + +\begin{decl} +|Option clash for package |\m{package}|.| +\end{decl} +The named package has been loaded twice with different options. If +you enter |h| you will be told what the options were, for example, if +your document contained: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[foo]{fred} + \usepackage[baz]{fred} +\end{verbatim} +then you will get the error message: +\begin{verbatim} + Option clash for package fred. +\end{verbatim} +and typing |h| at the |?| prompt will give you: +\begin{verbatim} + The package fred has already been loaded with options: + [foo] + There has now been an attempt to load it with options: + [baz] + Adding the line: + \usepackage[foo,baz]{fred} + to your document may fix this. + Try typing <<return>> to proceed. +\end{verbatim} +The cure is, as suggested, to load the package with both sets of +options. Note that since \LaTeX{} packages can call other packages, +it is possible to get a package option clash without explicitly +requesting the same package twice. + +\begin{decl} + |Command |\m{command}| not provided in base NFSS.| +\end{decl} +The \m{command} is not provided by default in \LaTeXe. This error is +generated by using one of the commands: +\begin{verbatim} + \mho \Join \Box \Diamond \leadsto + \sqsubset \sqsupset \lhd \unlhd \rhd \unrhd +\end{verbatim} +which are now part of the \textsf{latexsym} package. +The cure is to add: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage{latexsym} +\end{verbatim} +in the preamble of your document. + +\begin{decl} + |LaTeX2e command <command> in LaTeX 2.09 document.| +\end{decl} +The \m{command} is a \LaTeXe{} command but this is a \LaTeX~2.09 +document. The cure is to replace the command by a \LaTeX~2.09 +command, or to run document in native mode, as described in +Section~\ref{Sec:native}. + +\begin{decl} + |NFSS release 1 command \newmathalphabet found.| +\end{decl} +The command |\newmathalphabet| was used by the New Font Selection +Scheme Release 1 but it has now been replaced by +|\DeclareMathAlphabet|, the use of which is described in +\emph{\fntguide}. + +The best cure is to update the package which contained the +|\newmathalphabet| command. Find out if there is a new release of +the package, or (if you wrote the package yourself) consult +\emph{\fntguide} for the new syntax of font commands. + +If there is no updated version of the package then you can cure this +error by using the \textsf{newlfont} or \textsf{oldlfont} package, +which tells \LaTeX{} which version of |\newmathalphabet| should be +emulated. + +You should use \textsf{oldlfont} if the document selects math fonts with +syntax such as this: +\begin{quote} + |{\cal A}|, etc. +\end{quote} +Use \textsf{newlfont} if the document's syntax is like this: +\begin{quote} + |\cal{A}|, etc. +\end{quote} + + +\begin{decl} + |Text for \verb command ended by end of line.| +\end{decl} +The |\verb| command has been begun but not ended on that line. This +usually means that you have forgotten to put in the end-character of +the |\verb| command. + +\begin{decl} + |Illegal use of \verb command.| +\end{decl} +The |\verb| command has been used inside the argument of another +command. This has never been allowed in \LaTeX{}---often producing +incorrect output without any warning---and so \LaTeXe{} produces +an error message. + +\subsection{Old internal commands} +\label{Sec:oldinternals} + +A number of \LaTeX~2.09 internal commands have been removed, since +their functionality is now provided in a different way. See +\emph{\clsguide} for more details of the new, supported interface for +class and package writers. + +\begin{decl} + |\tenrm| |\elvrm| |\twlrm| \dots\\ + |\tenbf| |\elvbf| |\twlbf| \dots\\ + |\tensf| |\elvsf| |\twlsf| \dots\\ + $\vdots$ +\end{decl} +These commands provided access to the seventy fonts preloaded by +\LaTeX~2.09. In contrast, \LaTeXe{} normally preloads at most +fourteen fonts, which saves a lot of font memory; but a consequence is +that any \LaTeX{} file which used the above commands to directly +access fonts will no longer work. + +Their use will usually produce an error message such as: +\begin{verbatim} + ! Undefined control sequence. + l.5 \tenrm +\end{verbatim} +The cure for this is to update the document to use the new +font-changing commands provided by \LaTeXe; these are described in +\emph{\fntguide}. + +If this is not possible then, as a last resort, you can +use the \textsf{rawfonts} package, which loads the +seventy \LaTeX~2.09 fonts and provides direct access to them using the +old commands. This takes both time and memory. If you do not +wish to load all seventy fonts, you can select some of them by using the +|only| option to \textsf{rawfonts}. For example, to load only |tenrm| +and |tenbf| you write: +\begin{verbatim} + \usepackage[only,tenrm,tenbf]{rawfonts} +\end{verbatim} + +The \textsf{rawfonts} package is distributed as part of the \LaTeX{} +tools software, see Section~\ref{Sec:st-pack}. + +\subsection{Old files} + +One of the more common mistakes in running \LaTeX{} is to read in old +versions of packages instead of the new versions. If you get an +incomprehensible error message from a standard package, make sure you +are loading the most recent version of the package. You can find out +which version of the package has been loaded by looking in the log +file for a line like: +\begin{verbatim} + Package: fred 1994/06/01 v0.01 Fred's package. +\end{verbatim} +You can use the \m{release-date} options to |\documentclass| and +|\usepackage| to make sure that you are getting a suitably recent copy +of the document class or package. This is useful when sending a +document to another site, which may have out-of-date software. + +\subsection{Where to go for more help} + +If you can't find the answer for your problem here, try looking in +\emph{\LaTeXbook} or \emph{\LaTeXcomp}. If you have a problem with +installing \LaTeX, look in the installation guide files which come with +the distribution. + +If this doesn't help, contact your local \LaTeX{} guru or local +\LaTeX{} mailing list. + +If you think you've discovered a bug then please report it! First, +you should find out if the problem is with a third-party package or +class. If the problem is caused by a package or class other than +those listed in Section~\ref{Sec:class+packages} then please report +the problem to the author of the package or class, not to the \LaTeX3 +project team. + +If the bug really is with core \LaTeX{} then you should create a +\emph{short}, \emph{self-contained} document which exhibits the +problem. You should run a \emph{recent} (less than a year old) +version of \LaTeX{} on the file and then run \LaTeX{} on +|latexbug.tex|. This will create an error report which you should +send, together with the sample document and log file, to the +\LaTeX{} bugs address which can be found in the file +|latexbug.tex| or |bugs.txt|. + + +\section{Enjoy!} +\label{Sec:enjoy} + +We certainly hope you will enjoy using the new standard \LaTeX{} but, +if this is not possible, we hope that you will enjoy success and +fulfillment as a result of the documents which it will help you to +create. + +If you find that the contribution of \LaTeX{} to your life is such +that you would like to support the work of the project team, then +please read Section~\ref{Sec:ltx3} and discover practical ways to do +this. + +\begin{thebibliography}{1} + +\bibitem{A-W:GRM97} +Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz and Frank Mittelbach. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Graphics Companion}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1997. + + +\bibitem{A-W:GR99} +Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Web Companion}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1999. + + +\bibitem{A-W:DEK91} +Donald~E. Knuth. +\newblock {\em The \TeX book}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 1986. +\newblock Revised to cover \TeX3, 1991. + + +\bibitem{A-W:LLa94} +Leslie Lamport. +\newblock {\em {\LaTeX:} A Document Preparation System}. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 1994. + +\bibitem{A-W:MG2004} +Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens. +\newblock {\em The {\LaTeX} Companion second edition}. +\newblock With Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, and Chris Rowley. +\newblock Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2004. + + +\end{thebibliography} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..62c50c5f0ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/utf8ienc.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.err b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.err new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f604d8ef35a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.err @@ -0,0 +1,381 @@ +\newcommand\erratafiledate{1999/06/05} + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% To produce a printed version of this errata file run this file through +% LaTeX. It will unpack a small class file (if not already present) and +% a configuration file with the extension .cfg. You might want to modify +% the setting in this configuration file to print only a partial errata +% suitable for your printed revision of this book, see details in the +% .cfg file. +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\begin{filecontents}{ttcterrata.cls} +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1997,2004,2005,2007 Frank Mittelbach +%% This class file is licenced under LPPL latest version; +%% see https://www.latex-project.org/lppl +% +% +% It sets up a few commands used to format the errata entries for books in the +% Addison-Wesley Series: +% +% Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting +% +% hence the name. However, anybody who likes to use it is free to apply it for +% errata files of other books. +% +% Changes: +% +% v1.0a - changed name from errata.cls to ttcterrata.cls + +\ProvidesClass{ttcterrata} + [2007/11/10 v1.0a Mini class for errata files; subject to change (FMi)] + +\LoadClass{article} + +\setcounter{secnumdepth}{-1} +\addtolength\textwidth{5cm} +\addtolength\oddsidemargin{-3cm} + +\addtolength\textheight{36pt} + +\RequirePackage{shortvrb} +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + +\RequirePackage{array,longtable} +\RequirePackage{multicol} + + +\newcommand\erratagetnumber{} +\def\erratagetnumber#1/#2/#3\erratagetnumber{#1#2#3} + + +\newcommand\gobbleerrata{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup + \let\endgobble\egroup + \let\hideamp\relax + \let\\\relax\let\par\@@par} + +\newcommand*\hideamp{&} + +\let\endgobble\relax + + +\newcommand\erratastartdate{} +\newcommand\myprinting{1} + + +\newcommand\doweprint[2]{% + \ifnum \myprinting < \if!#2!1000 \else \ifx s#2 1000\else#2 \fi\fi + \ifnum \expandafter\erratagetnumber\erratastartdate\erratagetnumber < + \erratagetnumber#1\erratagetnumber \relax + \@tempswatrue + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi + \else + \@tempswafalse + \fi +} + + + +\newcommand\includedentries{entries after = \erratastartdate} +\newcommand\printedentries{between \erratastartdate\space and} + +\newcommand\showallerrors{% + \renewcommand\includedentries{all errata entries}% + \renewcommand\printedentries{up to} + \renewcommand\doweprint[2]{\@tempswatrue}} + + +\newcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{% + \if!#2!\textbf{#1}\else\textit{#1}\rlap{\textsuperscript{#2}}\fi} + +\newcommand\norevisionnumbers{% + \renewcommand\displayrevisionfix[2]{\textbf{##1}}} + +\IfFileExists{\jobname.cfg} + { + \input{\jobname.cfg} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Configuration file for \jobname.err found } + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + \AtEndDocument{ + \typeout{***************************************************} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* If you wish to generate an errata listing} + \typeout{* containing only errors found after a certain revision} + \typeout{* and/or only errors found after a certain date} + \typeout{* modify the information stored in \jobname.cfg} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* Current settings are:} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{* \@spaces printing of your book = \myprinting} + \typeout{* \@spaces include \includedentries} + \typeout{*} + \typeout{***************************************************} + }} + {} + +%% \erroronpage <page> <line info> <contributor> <date> <fixed in revision> + +\newcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\newcommand\CHAPTER[1]{\endgobble + &\\[4pt]% + \multicolumn{4}{l}{\framebox[10cm][l]{\textbf{\normalsize\strut#1}}} \\} + +\newenvironment{erratalist} + {\begin{longtable}{r>{\raggedright}p{2cm}l>{\raggedright}p{10cm}l}} + {\endgobble\end{longtable}} + +\newcommand\erratatitle[2] + {\begin{center}\LARGE\bfseries + Errata list for #1\\[5pt](\myprinting.\ printing)\\[10pt] + \small Includes all entries found \printedentries\space #2\\ + (For other periods/print runs reprocess this document + with different config settings) + \end{center}% + \markright{Errata for #1 (\printedentries\space #2)}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \vspace{20pt}} + +\pagestyle{myheadings} + +\AtBeginDocument{\small} + +\setlength\parindent{0pt} +\setlength\parskip{2pt} + +\newcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{\sffamily#1} #2\par} + +% some special shortcuts overwriting existing commands: + +\let\u\underline +\renewcommand\>{$\to$} + +%%% some code suggested by Thorsten Hansen to count the number of +%%% contributions by individuals (will work only if we do not get +%%% too many :-) + +\def\count@contributors#1/#2/#3\@nil{ + \@ifundefined{c@#1}{\newcounter{#1}}{}\stepcounter{#1}% +%%% also count secondary: +%%% \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\newcounter{#2}}{}\stepcounter{#2}% +} + +\renewcommand\erroronpage[5]{% + \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\renewcommand\seriouserroronpage[5]{% + \count@contributors#3/secondary/\@nil + \endgobble + \doweprint{#4}{#5}% + \if@tempswa + \typeout{Typesetting entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \else + \typeout{Ignoring entry #1 #2 #3 #4}% + \expandafter\gobbleerrata + \fi + \hideamp \\% + \fbox{\bfseries !!}\hfill + \displayrevisionfix{#1}{#5} + \hideamp #2 \hideamp (\textsf{#3}) \hideamp +} + +\renewcommand\contributor[2]{\makebox[1cm][l]{% + \sffamily#1} #2\@ifundefined{c@#1}{}{ (\arabic{#1})}\par} + +\end{filecontents} + + +\begin{filecontents}{\jobname.cfg} +% +% +% Configuration file for the errata listing of +% +% The LaTeX Web Companion +% +% +% \erratastartdate +% +% Specifies the date from which on +% errata entries should be listed. +% +% The format is YYYY/MM/DD. +% +% The default below ensures that all +% entries are typeset. +% +\renewcommand\erratastartdate{1999/05/01} + +% +% \myprinting +% +% Specifies which (revised) printing you +% own. For example, if you have the second +% printing set this to 2 so that errors +% already corrected in that printing will not +% appear in your errata listing. +% +% The default below ensures that all +% entries are typeset. +% +\renewcommand\myprinting{1} +% +% +% \norevisionnumbers +% +% Specifies that all page numbers in the errata are shown in the same +% format (bold face) irregardless of whether or not they are fixed +% in some revision. The default is to print corrected errors in +% italic and add the revision number as a superscript. +% +% +% \showallerrors +% +% With this command you tell the program that all errata entries are +% supposed to be generated. This makes \myprinting and +% \erratastartdate basically obsolete so this isn't turned on by +% default. +% +% +\endinput +\end{filecontents} + + + +\documentclass{ttcterrata} + + +\begin{document} + +\erratatitle{The \LaTeX{} Web Companion}{\erratafiledate} + + +\begin{verbatim} +@book(A-W:GR99, + author = {Michel Goossens and Sebastian Rahtz}, + title = {The {\LaTeX} Web Companion}, + substitle = {Integrating {\TeX}, HTML, and XML}, + series = "Tools and Techniques for Computer Typesetting", + publisher = {Addison-Wesley}, + address = {Reading, Massachusetts}, + year = 1999, + ISBN = "0-201-43311-7", + LCCN = "QA76.76.H94G66 1999", + pagenums = {xxii + 522}, + source-infos = {yes}, + bibliography = {yes}, + index = {yes}, + price = "US\$39.95", + note = "With Eitan M. Gurari and Ross Moore and Robert S. + Sutor.", +) +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{list}{}{\setlength\leftmargin{0cm}\setlength\rightmargin{5cm}} +\item[] +The latest version of this file (\texttt{\jobname.err}) can be found +as part of the \LaTeX{} distribution. + +The first column in the table shows the page number of the errata +entry. Superscript numbers in the first column refer to the printed +revision in which this entry was corrected. The second column gives +the precise location, negative line numbers are counted from the +bottom of the page. The third column shows the first finder of the +problem. + +\end{list} + + +\begin{erratalist} + +%======================================================================= +\CHAPTER{Chapter 6} + +\erroronpage{247}{3 para l.5}{MGo}{1999/06/05}{} + GenCod \> GenCode + +\CHAPTER{Appendix B} + +\erroronpage{418}{3 para}{MGo}{1999/06/05}{} + The \texttt{book} element types (lines 10--\u{15}) + +\end{erratalist} + + + +%========================================================================== + +\bigskip + + +\begin{multicols}{3}[Thanks to all who have found errors or + omissions. Listed are the people who found an errata entry first.] +\contributor{MGo}{Michel Goossens} +\end{multicols} + + +If you find further errors please report them to one of the authors +\begin{quote}\ttfamily + sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk\\ + goossens@cern.ch +\end{quote} +preferable in a form usable for this file, i.e., +\begin{flushleft} +|\erroronpage{|\textit{page-number}|}{|\textit{line-identification}|}{|% + \textit{your-initials}|}{|\textit{date}|}{}| \\ + \hspace*{2em}\textit{description of the the errata} +\end{flushleft} +Here is an example: +\begin{verbatim} +\erroronpage{4}{l.-7}{PMcJ}{1998/06/11}{} + surprisingly \> surprising +\end{verbatim} + + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..063e429db7b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/base/webcomp.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/README.md b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/README.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..81f39d1d7b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +The LaTeX `graphics` bundle +=========================== + +Release 2019-10-01 pre-release 2 + +Overview +-------- + +This bundle consists of packages supporting basic color, graphics and text +manipulation operations in LaTeX. The packages provided here are + +- `color`: Core color support +- `graphics`: The original LaTeX graphics inclusion interface +- `graphicx`: Extended interface for graphics inclusion +- `lscape`: Production of landscape pages +- `keyval`: Core key-value support for LaTeX +- `rotating`: Support for rotating material +- `trig`: Support for fast trigonometric calculations in TeX + +plus the legacy stub `epsfig` (now subsumed into `graphics`). + +Installation +------------ + +We no longer distribute installation instructions for the various TeX +implementations. All modern TeX systems include `graphics` as-standard, and end +users should in general use the release versions supplied in this way. + +Release distribution is carried out only through the CTAN archives. + +Reporting Bugs +-------------- + +If you wish to report a problem or bug in the `graphics` bundle +please use the [Issue Tracker for LaTeX2e on +GitHub](https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/issues) +and follow the guidelines that pop up if you press the "New issue" button. + +In particular, to check that you are really seeing a bug, please write +a short, self-contained document that shows the problem. This should +include the `latexbug` package, which will warn if your test file is +not suitable for one or the other reason. See the [CONTRIBUTING +guide](https://github.com/latex3/latex2e/blob/master/CONTRIBUTING.md) +for further details, or if you need to obtain the `latexbug` package. + +If the bug turns out to be with third-party software then please +contact the developer, and not us! + +License +------- + +The contents of this bundle are distributed under the [LaTeX Project +Public License](https://www.latex-project.org/lppl/lppl-1-3c/), +version 1.3c or later. + +Copyright +--------- + +Copyright is maintained on each of these packages by the author(s) +of the package. + +----- + +<p>Copyright (C) 1993-2019 The LaTeX Project <br /> diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/cat.eps b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/cat.eps new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0042ea088fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/cat.eps @@ -0,0 +1,305 @@ +%!PS-Adobe-2.0 EPSF-2.0 +%%BoundingBox: 44 527 80 559 +%%Creator: COREL DRAW +%%Title: CAT.TMP +%%CreationDate: Sat Jan 18 17:29:05 1992 + +%%DocumentFonts: +%%EndComments +%%BeginProlog +% -------------- POSTSCRIPT PROLOG FOR CORELDRAW 2.X ------ +% Copyright Corel Systems Corporation 1990 +/AutoFlatness 0 def/wCorelDict 300 dict def +wCorelDict begin/bd{bind def}bind def/ld{load def}bd +/xd{exch def}bd/_ null def/$c 0 def/$m 0 def +/$y 0 def/$k 0 def/$t 1 def/$n _ def/$o 0 def +/$fil 0 def/$C 0 def/$M 0 def/$Y 0 def/$K 0 def +/$T 1 def/$N _ def/$O 0 def/$PF false def +/$pan 0 def/$h false def/$al 0 def/$tr 0 def +/$le 0 def/$lx 0 def/$ly 0 def/$ctm matrix currentmatrix def +/$ptm matrix def/$ttm matrix def/$stm matrix def +/$skm matrix def/$fst 128 def/$pad 0 def/$rox 0 def +/$roy 0 def currentscreen/@dsp xd/$dsp/@dsp def +/$dsa xd/$dsf xd/$sdf false def/$SDF false def +/$Scra 0.0 def statusdict/pageparams known{statusdict begin +pageparams end 1 ne{/$Scra -90.0 def}if pop pop pop}if +/$sv 0 def/@cp/closepath ld/@gs/gsave ld/@gr/grestore ld +/@np/newpath ld/@sv{/$sv save def}bd/@rs{$sv restore}bd +/@ss{load setscreen}bd AutoFlatness 1 eq{/$cpx ([Error: PathTooComplex; OffendingCommand: AnyPaintingOperator;\n) def +/@err1{$cpx print flush newpath}bd/@ifl{currentflat dup 10 gt{pop @err1 exit}if 2 add setflat}bd +/@fill/fill ld/fill{currentflat{{@fill}stopped{@ifl}{exit}ifelse}bind loop setflat}bd +/@eofill/eofill ld/eofill{currentflat{{@eofill}stopped{@ifl}{exit}ifelse}bind loop setflat}bd +/@clip/clip ld/clip{currentflat{{@clip}stopped{initclip @ifl}{exit}ifelse}bind loop setflat}bd +/@eoclip/eoclip ld/eoclip{currentflat{{@eoclip}stopped{initclip @ifl}{exit}ifelse}bind loop setflat}bd +/@stroke/stroke ld/stroke{currentflat{{@stroke}stopped{@ifl}{exit}ifelse}bind loop setflat}bd +}if/InRange{3 -1 roll 2 copy le{pop}{exch pop}ifelse +2 copy ge{pop}{exch pop}ifelse}bd/wDstChck{2 1 roll dup 3 -1 roll +eq{1 add}if}bd/@dot{dup mul exch dup mul add 1 exch sub 2 div}bd +/@lin{exch pop abs 1 exch sub}bd/@MN{2 copy le{pop}{exch pop}ifelse}bd +/setcmykcolor where{pop}{/setcmykcolor{4 1 roll +3{3 index add 1 @MN 1 exch sub 3 1 roll}repeat +setrgbcolor pop}bd}ifelse/colorimage where{pop}{/colorimage{/$ncl xd +pop pop pop pop{currentfile $dat readhexstring pop}repeat +pop}bd}ifelse/@tc{dup 1 ge{pop}{4{dup 6 -1 roll +mul exch}repeat pop}ifelse}bd/@spc{7 2 roll +ColorSeparationMode 1 eq{6 index @tc 0 4 $ink sub index +exch pop}{5 index dup _ eq{pop 0 4 $ink sub index +exch pop}{CurrentInkName eq{6 index}{0}ifelse}ifelse}ifelse +5 1 roll 8 -2 roll 6{pop}repeat 1 exch sub dup setgray +1 eq exch 1 eq and not}bd/@scc{$ink -1 eq +{$c $m $y $k $t @tc setcmykcolor true}{$o $c $m $y $k $t $n @spc +}ifelse}bd/@SCC{$ink -1 eq{$C $M $Y $K $T @tc setcmykcolor true}{ +$O $C $M $Y $K $T $N @spc}ifelse}bd/@sft{ +/$tx $tllx $pxf add dup $tllx gt{$pwid sub}if def +/$ty $tury $pyf sub dup $tury lt{$phei add}if def}bd +/@stb{pathbbox/$ury xd/$urx xd/$lly xd/$llx xd}bd +/@ep{{cvx exec}forall}bd/@tp{@sv/$in true def +2 copy dup $lly le{/$in false def}if $phei sub $ury ge{/$in false def}if +dup $urx ge{/$in false def}if $pwid add $llx le{/$in false def}if +$in{@np 2 copy moveto $pwid 0 rlineto 0 $phei neg rlineto +$pwid neg 0 rlineto 0 $phei rlineto clip @np +$pn cvlit load aload pop 7 -1 roll 5 index sub +7 -1 roll 3 index sub translate/$ctm matrix currentmatrix def +@ep pop pop pop pop}{pop pop}ifelse @rs}bd/@th{@sft +0 1 $tly 1 sub{dup $psx mul $tx add{dup $llx gt{$pwid sub}{exit}ifelse +}loop exch $phei mul $ty exch sub 0 1 $tlx 1 sub{$pwid mul +3 copy 3 -1 roll add exch @tp pop}for pop pop}for}bd +/@tv{@sft 0 1 $tlx 1 sub{dup $pwid mul $tx add +exch $psy mul $ty exch sub{dup $ury lt{$phei add}{exit}ifelse}loop +0 1 $tly 1 sub{$phei mul 3 copy sub @tp pop}for +pop pop}for}bd/@pf{@gs $ctm setmatrix $pm concat +@stb @gs ColorSeparationMode 0 eq{1 setgray eofill}{ +$o 0 0 0 0 0 (Black) @spc{eofill}if}ifelse +@gr eoclip Bburx Bbury $pm itransform/$tury xd/$turx xd +Bbllx Bblly $pm itransform/$tlly xd/$tllx xd +/$wid $turx $tllx sub def/$hei $tury $tlly sub def +$wid 0 gt $hei 0 gt and{$pn cvlit load aload pop +/$pd xd 3 -1 roll sub/$phei xd exch sub/$pwid xd +/$tlx $wid $pwid div ceiling 1 add def/$tly $hei $phei div ceiling 1 add def +$psx 0 eq{@tv}{@th}ifelse}if @gr @np}bd/@dlt{ColorSeparationMode 0 eq{ +/$dc $toc $tot mul $frc $frt mul dup/$c xd sub $fst 1 sub div def +/$dm $tom $tot mul $frm $frt mul dup/$m xd sub $fst 1 sub div def +/$dy $toy $tot mul $fry $frt mul dup/$y xd sub $fst 1 sub div def +/$dk $tok $tot mul $frk $frt mul dup/$k xd sub $fst 1 sub div def +true}{$o $frc $frm $fry $frk $frt $frn @spc +dup{/$frk 1 currentgray sub def}{/$frk 0 def}ifelse +$o $toc $tom $toy $tok $tot $ton @spc dup{/$tok 1 currentgray sub def} +{/$tok 0 def}ifelse or dup{/$c 0 def/$m 0 def/$y 0 def/$k $frk def +/$dc 0 def/$dm 0 def/$dy 0 def/$dk $tok $frk sub $fst 1 sub div def}if +}ifelse}bd/@ftl{1 index 4 index sub dup $pad mul dup/$pdw xd +2 mul sub $fst div/$wid xd 2 index sub/$hei xd +pop translate $c $m $y $k 4 copy ColorSeparationMode 0 ne +{1 exch sub setgray pop pop pop}{setcmykcolor}ifelse +0 0 moveto 0 $hei lineto $pdw $hei lineto $pdw 0 lineto 0 0 lineto fill +$pdw 0 translate $fst{4 copy ColorSeparationMode 0 ne +{1 exch sub setgray pop pop pop}{setcmykcolor}ifelse +0 0 moveto 0 $hei lineto $wid $hei lineto $wid 0 lineto 0 0 lineto fill +$wid 0 translate $dk add 4 1 roll $dy add 4 1 roll +$dm add 4 1 roll $dc add 4 1 roll}repeat $dk sub 4 1 roll +$dy sub 4 1 roll $dm sub 4 1 roll $dc sub 4 1 roll +ColorSeparationMode 0 ne{1 exch sub setgray pop pop pop} +{setcmykcolor}ifelse 0 0 moveto 0 $hei lineto $pdw $hei lineto $pdw 0 lineto 0 0 lineto fill +}bd/@ftr{1 index 4 index sub dup $rox mul/$row xd +2 div 1 index 4 index sub dup $roy mul/$roh xd +2 div 2 copy dup mul exch dup mul add sqrt +$row dup mul $roh dup mul add sqrt add dup/$hei xd $fst div/$wid xd +4 index add $roh add exch 5 index add $row add +exch translate pop pop pop pop currentflat 5 mul setflat +$c $m $y $k 4 copy ColorSeparationMode 0 ne +{1 exch sub setgray pop pop pop}{setcmykcolor}ifelse +$wid 0 moveto 0 0 $hei 0 360 arc fill 1.0 $pad 2 mul sub dup scale +$fst{4 copy ColorSeparationMode 0 ne{1 exch sub setgray pop pop pop} +{setcmykcolor}ifelse $wid 0 moveto 0 0 $hei 0 360 arc fill +/$hei $hei $wid sub def $dk add 4 1 roll $dy add 4 1 roll +$dm add 4 1 roll $dc add 4 1 roll}repeat pop pop pop pop}bd +/@ff{@gs @dlt{$ctm setmatrix eoclip newpath Bbllx Bblly moveto +Bbllx Bbury lineto Bburx Bbury lineto Bburx Bblly lineto +$fan rotate pathbbox newpath $fty 1 eq{@ftr}{@ftl}ifelse}if +@gr @np}bd/@Pf{@sv ColorSeparationMode 0 eq $ink 3 eq or{$ctm setmatrix +72 1000 div dup matrix scale dup concat dup Bburx exch Bbury exch itransform +ceiling cvi/Bbury xd ceiling cvi/Bburx xd Bbllx exch Bblly exch itransform +floor cvi/Bblly xd floor cvi/Bbllx xd $Prm aload pop +$Psn load exec}{1 setgray eofill}ifelse @rs +@np}bd/@ftx{{(0) dup 3 -1 roll 0 exch put +@gs true charpath currentpoint $ctm setmatrix +@@txt @gr @np moveto $tr 0 rmoveto}forall pop}bd +/@sm{/$ctm $ctm currentmatrix def}bd/@lorg{$lx $ly moveto +/$ly $ly $le sub def}bd/@ft{matrix currentmatrix 3 1 roll +$sdf{$scf $sca $scp @ss}if $fil 1 eq{/@@txt/@pf ld @ftx}{$fil 2 eq +{/@@txt/@ff ld @ftx}{$fil 3 eq{/@@txt/@Pf ld @ftx}{@scc +{dup $tr exch 0 exch ashow}if pop pop}ifelse}ifelse}ifelse +$sdf{$dsf $dsa $dsp @ss}if setmatrix}bd/@st{ +matrix currentmatrix 3 1 roll $SDF{$SCF $SCA $SCP @ss}if +@SCC{{(0) dup 3 -1 roll 0 exch put @gs true charpath currentpoint +$ctm setmatrix $ptm concat stroke @gr moveto $tr 0 rmoveto}forall +pop}{pop pop}ifelse $SDF{$dsf $dsa $dsp @ss}if +setmatrix}bd/@pt{dup length exch}bd/@te{@pt +@lorg @ft cleartomark [}bd/@tr{@pt @lorg @st cleartomark [}bd +/@ta{@pt @lorg 2 copy @gs @ft @gr @st cleartomark [}bd +/@t@a{@pt @lorg 2 copy @gs @st @gr @ft cleartomark [}bd +/g{1 exch sub/$k xd/$c 0 def/$m 0 def/$y 0 def/$t 1 def/$n _ def/$fil 0 def +}bd/G{1 exch sub/$K xd/$C 0 def/$M 0 def/$Y 0 def/$T 1 def/$N _ def}bd +/k{/$k xd/$y xd/$m xd/$c xd/$t 1 def/$n _ def/$fil 0 def}bd +/K{/$K xd/$Y xd/$M xd/$C xd/$T 1 def/$N _ def}bd +/x{1 exch sub/$t xd/$n xd/$k xd/$y xd/$m xd/$c xd/$fil 0 def}bd +/X{1 exch sub/$T xd/$N xd/$K xd/$Y xd/$M xd/$C xd}bd +/d/setdash ld/i{dup 0 ne{setflat}{pop}ifelse}bd +/j/setlinejoin ld/J/setlinecap ld/M/setmiterlimit ld +/w/setlinewidth ld/O{/$o xd}bd/R{/$O xd}bd +/c/curveto ld/C/c ld/v{4 -2 roll 2 copy 6 -2 roll curveto}bd +/V/v ld/y{2 copy curveto}bd/Y/y ld/l/lineto ld +/L/l ld/m/moveto ld/n/newpath ld/N/newpath ld +/F{matrix currentmatrix $sdf{$scf $sca $scp @ss}if +$fil 1 eq{@pf}{$fil 2 eq{@ff}{$fil 3 eq{@Pf}{@scc{eofill}{@np}ifelse +}ifelse}ifelse}ifelse $sdf{$dsf $dsa $dsp @ss}if +setmatrix}bd/f{@cp F}bd/S{matrix currentmatrix +$ctm setmatrix $SDF{$SCF $SCA $SCP @ss}if @SCC{$skm currentmatrix +$ptm concat stroke setmatrix}{@np}ifelse $SDF{$dsf $dsa $dsp @ss}if +setmatrix}bd/s{@cp S}bd/B{@gs F @gr S}bd/b{@cp B}bd +/W{eoclip}bd/p{/$pm xd 7{pop}repeat/$pyf xd/$pxf xd +/$pn xd/$fil 1 def}bd/P{11{pop}repeat}bd/z{/$al xd +/$tr xd/$le xd exch findfont exch scalefont setfont}bd +/Z{dup type 0 type eq{/$bDir xd}if findfont +dup maxlength 1 add dict exch dup{1 index/FID ne{3 index +3 1 roll put}{pop pop}ifelse}forall pop dup dup/Encoding get +256 array copy dup/$fe xd/Encoding exch put +dup/Fontname 3 index put 3 -1 roll dup length 0 ne{0 exch{ +dup type 0 type eq{exch pop}{$fe exch 2 index exch put +1 add}ifelse}forall pop}if definefont pop}bd +/e{@sm concat [/t{@te}def}bd/r{@sm concat [/t{@tr}def}bd +/o{@sm concat [/t{pop}def}bd/a{@sm concat [/t{@ta}def}bd +/t{@te}def/T{cleartomark @np/$lx 0 def/$ly 0 def +$ctm setmatrix/$ttm matrix def}bd/u{}bd/U{}bd +/A{pop}bd/H{/$h true def}bd/h{@cp H}bd/q/@gs ld +/Q/@gr ld/E{5 array astore exch cvlit exch def}bd +/`{}bd/~{}bd/@{}bd/&{}bd/CorelDrawRencodeVect [ +16#80/grave/circumflex/tilde/dotlessi/florin/quotedblleft/quotedblright/guilsinglleft +16#88/guilsinglright/fi/fl/dagger/daggerdbl/endash/periodcentered/breve +16#90/quotedblbase/ellipsis/perthousand/trademark/Pt/fractionbar +16#98/divide 16#a1/exclamdown/cent/sterling/currency/yen/bar/section +16#a8/dieresis/copyright/ordfeminine/guillemotleft/logicalnot/emdash/registered/overbar +16#b0/ring/plusminus/twosuperior/threesuperior/acute/mu/paragraph/bullet +16#b8/cedilla/onesuperior/ordmasculine/guillemotright/onequarter/onehalf/threequarters/questiondown +16#c0/Agrave/Aacute/Acircumflex/Atilde/Adieresis/Aring/AE/Ccedilla +16#c8/Egrave/Eacute/Ecircumflex/Edieresis/Igrave/Iacute/Icircumflex/Idieresis +16#d0/Eth/Ntilde/Ograve/Oacute/Ocircumflex/Otilde/Odieresis/OE +16#d8/Oslash/Ugrave/Uacute/Ucircumflex/Udieresis/Yacute/Thorn/germandbls +16#e0/agrave/aacute/acircumflex/atilde/adieresis/aring/ae/ccedilla +16#e8/egrave/eacute/ecircumflex/edieresis/igrave/iacute/icircumflex/idieresis +16#f0/eth/ntilde/ograve/oacute/ocircumflex/otilde/odieresis/oe +16#f8/oslash/ugrave/uacute/ucircumflex/udieresis/yacute/thorn/ydieresis +] def/@cc{currentfile $dat readhexstring pop}bd +/@ii{concat 3 index 3 index m 3 index 1 index l +2 copy l 1 index 3 index l 3 index 3 index l +clip pop pop pop pop}bd/@E{/Bbury xd/Bburx xd +/Bblly xd/Bbllx xd}bd/@c{@cp}bd/@p{/$fil 1 def +/$pm xd/$psy xd/$psx xd/$pyf xd/$pxf xd/$pn xd}bd +/@P{/$fil 3 def/$Psn xd array astore/$Prm xd}bd +/@k{/$fil 2 def/$roy xd/$rox xd/$pad xd/$fty xd/$fan xd +$fty 1 eq{/$fan 0 def}if/$tok xd/$toy xd/$tom xd/$toc xd +/$frk xd/$fry xd/$frm xd/$frc xd/$frn _ def/$frt 1 def/$ton _ def/$tot 1 def +}bd/@x{/$fil 2 def/$roy xd/$rox xd/$pad xd +/$fty xd/$fan xd 1 exch sub/$tot xd/$ton xd/$tok xd/$toy xd/$tom xd/$toc xd +1 exch sub/$frt xd/$frn xd/$frk xd/$fry xd/$frm xd/$frc xd}bd +/@i{@sm @gs @ii 5 index 1 ne{@gs 1 g F @gr}if +1 eq 5 index 1 eq and{@gs $ctm setmatrix F @gr}if +@np/$ury xd/$urx xd/$lly xd/$llx xd/$bts xd +/$hei xd/$wid xd/$dat $wid $bts mul 8 div ceiling cvi string def +$bts 1 eq{@SCC/$frg xd}{1 G @SCC/$frg xd}ifelse +$frg{$SDF{$SCF $SCA $SCP @ss}if $llx $lly translate +$urx $llx sub $ury $lly sub scale $wid $hei abs +$bts 1 eq{false}{$bts}ifelse [ $wid 0 0 $hei neg 0 +$hei 0 gt{$hei}{0}ifelse]/@cc load $bts 1 eq{imagemask}{image}ifelse +$SDF{$dsf $dsa $dsp @ss}if}{$hei{@cc pop}repeat}ifelse +@gr $ctm setmatrix}def/@M {@sv}bd/@N{/@cc{}def +12 -1 roll neg 12 1 roll @i @rs}bd/@I{@sm @gs +@ii @np/$ury xd/$urx xd/$lly xd/$llx xd/$ncl xd +/$bts xd/$hei xd/$wid xd/$dat $wid $bts mul $ncl mul 8 div ceiling cvi string def +$llx $lly translate $urx $llx sub $ury $lly sub scale +$wid $hei $bts [ $wid 0 0 $hei neg 0 $hei]/@cc load +false $ncl colorimage @gr $ctm setmatrix}bd +/@t{/$lx 0 def/$ly 0 def/$stm $stm currentmatrix def +3 1 roll translate $ttm concat 1 exch t $stm setmatrix}def +/@n{/$ttm exch matrix rotate def}bd/@z{ exch findfont exch scalefont setfont +}bd/@s{}bd/@l{}bd/@B{@gs S @gr F}bd/@b{@cp @B}bd +/@a{@sm concat [/t{@t@a}def}bd/@w{5 2 roll dup/$pan xd +matrix rotate/$ptm xd matrix scale $ptm dup concatmatrix/$ptm xd +1 eq{$ptm exch dup concatmatrix/$ptm xd}{pop}ifelse +1 w}bd/@g{1 eq dup/$sdf xd{/$scp xd/$sca xd +/$scf xd}if}bd/@G{1 eq dup/$SDF xd{/$SCP xd +/$SCA xd/$SCF xd}if}bd/@D{3 copy @ss/$dsp xd +/$dsa xd/$dsf xd}bd/@j{@sv @np}bind def/@J{@rs}bind def +/@sep{/ColorSeparationMode where{pop}{/ColorSeparationMode 0 def +/CurrentInkName (Composite) def}ifelse ColorSeparationMode 0 eq +{/CurrentInkName (Composite) def}if/CurrentInkName where{pop}{ +/CurrentInkName (Composite) def}ifelse CurrentInkName (Composite) eq{/$ink -1 def} +{CurrentInkName (Cyan) eq{/$ink 0 def} {CurrentInkName (Magenta) eq{/$ink 1 def} +{CurrentInkName (Yellow) eq{/$ink 2 def} {CurrentInkName (Black) eq{/$ink 3 def} +{/$ink 4 def}ifelse}ifelse}ifelse}ifelse}ifelse}bd +@sep/@whi{@gs -72000 dup moveto -72000 72000 lineto +72000 dup lineto 72000 -72000 lineto closepath 1 setgray fill +@gr}bd/@neg{ [{1 exch sub}/exec cvx currenttransfer/exec cvx] cvx settransfer +@whi}bd/@reg{[] 0 d 0 setgray .3 setlinewidth +2 copy 5.4 0 360 arc closepath 2 copy moveto 9 0 rlineto +2 copy moveto -9 0 rlineto 2 copy moveto 0 9 rlineto +moveto 0 -9 rlineto stroke}bd/leftbracket{(\050)}def +/rightbracket{(\051)}def + +%%EndProlog +%%BeginSetup +11.4737 setmiterlimit +1.00 setflat +/$fst 128 def + +%%EndSetup +@sv +/$ctm matrix currentmatrix def +u +%%Note: Object +45.22 528.19 78.98 558.14 @E +0 J 0 j [] 0 d 0 R 0 @G +0.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 K +1.01 1.01 0.00 [1.00000 0.00000 0.00000 1.00000 0.00000 0.00000] 0 @w +%%CURV 106 +73.30 539.78 m +73.08 538.42 72.22 537.26 71.78 536.33 C +72.79 534.67 73.73 531.43 74.81 530.64 C +74.59 530.64 77.04 528.84 73.87 529.06 C +73.08 529.34 73.08 530.93 70.20 533.81 C +69.70 533.74 70.56 530.57 71.50 529.63 c +73.15 528.19 70.27 528.55 70.13 528.62 C +68.98 529.34 68.62 534.60 67.03 536.26 c +66.24 537.19 65.16 536.98 64.30 536.90 C +63.22 536.62 60.62 537.19 60.55 534.02 C +60.62 532.66 62.14 530.21 62.86 529.78 c +65.30 528.41 62.06 528.34 61.70 528.77 C +61.13 529.34 60.19 530.64 59.26 531.65 C +57.74 532.44 56.38 533.66 56.02 534.96 C +54.94 534.74 53.86 534.17 53.64 533.23 C +53.42 532.22 53.86 531.58 54.86 530.14 C +56.02 529.85 56.38 529.27 56.02 528.98 c +55.87 528.84 53.71 528.62 53.57 528.91 C +52.70 529.49 51.70 531.86 51.19 533.16 c +50.90 533.88 49.97 535.82 51.55 537.77 C +51.98 538.49 51.91 539.86 51.77 540.65 c +51.55 541.94 51.55 542.74 52.42 544.46 C +49.75 546.77 45.22 551.23 49.61 557.14 C +50.11 557.64 51.55 558.14 50.76 556.27 C +49.82 553.68 46.66 551.45 53.42 546.19 C +54.50 546.91 58.97 546.48 60.48 546.19 c +64.66 545.33 65.52 545.33 68.40 546.05 C +68.76 546.19 68.83 547.99 70.34 549.22 C +70.06 550.15 72.00 551.45 72.22 552.53 C +72.65 553.39 73.66 550.73 73.66 550.66 C +73.58 551.23 74.66 552.31 74.81 552.96 C +75.74 553.25 75.10 550.94 75.89 549.50 c +76.32 548.93 76.68 549.07 77.11 547.70 C +77.47 546.34 78.98 545.18 76.54 543.89 c +75.17 543.17 74.59 543.31 73.58 542.88 C +73.58 542.23 73.51 540.79 73.30 539.78 c +@c +S +U +@rs +%%Trailer + end diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/changes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/changes.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d059d7958a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/changes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,951 @@ +This file lists changes to the LaTeX2e files in reverse chronological order. +It is provided for convenience only. It therefore makes no claims to +completeness or accuracy and it contains some references to files that +are not part of the distribution. +======================================================================= + +2019-07-01 Frank Mittelbach <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx (subsection{Graphics Inclusion}): + Support UTF-8 and space in graphic files. + +2017-06-25 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * New decodearray key, adopted from older pdftex.def + +2017-05-31 David Carlisle, Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: Generalize bounding box reader for use in other formats than EPS + * graphicsx.dtx: Additional options, moved from pdftex.def + + +2017-04-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: modify \Gscale@box for math mode usage + https://github.com/latex3/graphics-def/issues/6 + +2017-03-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: add \leavevmode to \includegraphics + so that \everypar is cleared. (The \leavevmode in \Gin@setfile is + too late for this use, but has been left for compatibility.) + +2016-12-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.tex: fix the a.ps example file to match the Bounding box + change from 2014 (Rolf Niepraschk) + +2016-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.tex: Updates to drivers section, and add a note about xcolor. + +2016-10-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: Avoid arithmetic overflow on very small lengths + eg 5sp/2sp https://tex.stackexchange.com/q/328825 + +2016-08-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * rotating.dtx: Fix name of examples file reference in the + documentation (rotex.tex not examples.tex) + +2016-07-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics-drivers.ins: stop generating dvips.def + (moved to graphics-def) + +2016-06-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: guards for contributed packages and plain TeX. + +2016-06-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx, color.dtx, drivers.dtx: add pagesize special support to dvips + option to match pdftex behaviour and add setpagesize and + nosetpagesize options to color and graphics packages to enable or + disable this feature for all drivers. + +2016-05-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * rotating.dtx: add from rotating distribution + * rotex.tex: add from rotating distribution (was example.tex} + * cat.eps: add from rotating distribution + * grfguide.tex: list the rotating package. + +2016-05-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx, color.dtx: add dvisvgm option (Till Tantau) + +2016-01-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: dvips can deal natively with compressed eps + (was in texlive's graphics.cfg) + +2016-01-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx, color.dtx: add luatex option. (luatex.def to be + distributed separately.) + + * trig.dtx: make pre-calculated trig values expand to digits + rather than use \chardef + +2015-12-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: dvips can deal natively with compressed eps + (was in texlive's graphics.cfg) + +2015-04-02 Joseph Wright <latex-team@latex-project.org> + + * Update CTAN link in README + +2015-03-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@@latex-project.org> + + * Updating copyright notices etc + +2014-11-07 Joseph Wright <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Rename 00readme.txt to README (named README.txt in the development + repository) + +2014-10-28 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx, graphics.dtx, graphicx.dtx, keyval.dtx, trig.dtx: + Fixed typos in documentation found by Karl Berry. + +2014-10-14 <Frank.Mittelbach@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: Fixed typo in error message. + +2014-05-08 David Carlisle <david.carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * keyval.dtx: Revert change to {} parsing. + + +2014-04-26 David Carlisle <david.carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.tex: Changes to allow generation of grfguide.pdf via + pdflatex: include a.pdf in a filecontents environment and adjust + examples to use a modified bounding box starting at 0 0 rather + than 100 100. + + +2014-04-25 David Carlisle <david.carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * showkeys.dtx: \leavemode and \long added for + graphics/1521, graphics/4296 + + * keyval.dtx: add \long on internal parsing macros to allow \par + in values, Only strip one {} group not two from values. + graphics/3446 + +2014-04-23 David Carlisle <david.carlisle@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Add \nopagecolor, graphics/3873 + + * drivers.dtx: Add \nopagecolor, graphics/3873 + +2006-02-20 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: Added demo option in graphics. + +2005-11-14 Morten Hoegholm <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * 00readme.txt: Updated to reflect the changes. + + * color.dtx: Added support for dvipdfmx and XeTeX. + + * Makefile: Remove pstcol and add graphics-drivers.ins. + + * graphics-drivers.ins: New file for installation of driver files. + + * grfguide.tex: Updated documentation to reflect changes in the + distribution of driver files. Added dvipdfmx and XeTeX to list of + options. + + * graphics.ins: Removed pstcol (pr/3735) and driver files + installation. + + * graphics.dtx: Added support for dvipdfmx and XeTeX. + +2004-10-21 Rainer Schoepf <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.pdf: Added creation of this file, from grfguide.ps. + +2001-07-07 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: + + Made \rotatebox long (not previously done for graphics/2908) + +2001-06-20 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pstcol.dtx: + + Added redefinitions for PSTricks (graphics/3233) + +2001-06-07 Chris Rowley <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: + + Extended documentation of \DeclareGraphicsExtensions + (graphics/3228} + +1999-02-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * dvipdfm.def: lppl (Agreed with Mark Wicks) + +1999-02-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.tex: lppl + + * graphics.ins: lppl + + * epsfig.dtx: lppl + + * textures.def: lppl (Agreed with Art Ogawa) + + * drivers.dtx: lppl + + * lscape.dtx: lppl + + * pstcol.dtx: lppl + + * color.dtx: lppl + + * graphicx.dtx: lppl + + * 00readme.txt: lppl + + * graphics.dtx: lppl + +1999-01-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.tex: dvipdfm and unknownkeysallowed options. + + * drivers.dtx: documentation corrections. + + * color.dtx: dvipdfm option + + * graphics.dtx: dvipdfm option + + * dvipdfm.def: (from Sebastian) For dvipdfm dvi->pdf driver. + +1999-01-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.ins: don't generate .def files for unsupported + drivers + + * graphicx.dtx: new option (passed to graphicx) + + * keyval.dtx: new options to not generate error on unknown + keys. + +1999-01-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pdftex.def: new version (from https://www.tug.org) + +1999-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: \Gscale@box@dd(dd) made long. graphics/2908 + \@makeother\- added. graphics/2846 + +1999-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: \Gscale@box@dd(dd) made long. graphics/2908 + \@makeother\- added. graphics/2846 + +1999-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: \Gscale@box@dd(dd) made long. graphics/2908 + \@makeother\- added. graphics/2846 + +1998-10-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * vtex.def: new version from micropress + +1998-06-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pdftex.def: update for more recent pdftex (from Sebastian). + + * keyval.dtx: make keyval safe if \@tempc is an \if (As + happens if you load amsmath and color packages, in that order) + +1998-05-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.tex: vtex option + + * color.dtx: vtex option + + * graphics.dtx: vtex option + + * vtex.def: Add file (supplied by MicroPress, Inc). + +1998-05-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: update of dvipsone.def from Berthold Horn. + +1997-11-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * trig.dtx: Remove an ancient email address of mine. + + * keyval.dtx: CHANGE so that # may appear in <value>s without + needing to be doubled. NOTE This will require a change if + anybody has used the comand= key in graphicx, the only key + currently distributed likely to require # in its argument. A + setting such as `command = uncompress ##1' now will need + changing to just use one #. Also fix brace handling so a + value of {abc}{xyz} is correctly handled. (Old version passed + abc{xyz}). Remove an ancient email address of mine. + +1997-09-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.ins: Comment out generation of oztex.def. + + * graphics.dtx: [oztex] == [dvips] + + * color.dtx: [oztex] == [dvips] + + * drivers.dtx: merge oztex and dvips support (for oztex 3.x). + +1997-09-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: allow TAB in BoundingBox + comments. graphics/2587 + +1997-06-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * textures.def: New one from Arthur Ogawa. + +1997-06-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphicx.dtx: Initialise ext= key to empty, so type= may be + used without specifying ext, for Sebastian. + +1997-06-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * Makefile: pdftex.def + + * grfguide.tex: pdftex option + + * 00readme.txt: pdftex.tex driver file + + * color.dtx: pdftex option + + * graphics.dtx: pdftex option + + * pdftex.def: add this file for Han The Thanh's TeX variant. + +1997-02-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.ins: dvipdf missed out. graphics/2420 + +1997-01-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Make errors just info messages to the log in the + monocrome option. graphics/2350 + +1996-12-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: new dvipsone eps code (Code from Berthold Horn) + +1996-12-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * 00readme.txt: Remove grfguide.ps (it's in latex/doc on ctan) + + * Makefile: Remove grfguide.ps (it's in latex/doc on ctan) + + * grfguide.tex: Assorted improvements. + +1996-11-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Minor changes to dvipdf.def (Sergey Lesenko). + +1996-11-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * epsfig.dtx: Support active ! for graphics/2302 + +1996-11-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * 00readme.txt: add old docstrip warning. + +1996-10-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * textures.def: add pstricks compatibity code from original + textures.def + + * drivers.dtx: tcidvi code supporting viewport/trim/clip. + + * graphicx.dtx: viewport/trim code now saves original bb + coords. + + * color.dtx: add dvipdf + + * graphics.dtx: add dvipdf + + * drivers.dtx: add dvipdf (after code from Sergey Lesenko). + +1996-10-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: add truetex and tcidvi drivers. Add literal + postscript specials to drivers that support it. Add RGB + (0-255 integer rgb) model to all drivers. + + * graphics.ins: add truetex (Kinch) and tcidvi (Scientific + Word) drivers. + +1996-10-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.ins: new style for docstrip 2.4. + + * grfguide.tex: Describe new options, improve descriptions of + \graphicspath (for graphics/2294) and \DeclareGraphicsRule. + Describe how to add new driver options in a cfg file. + + * graphicx.dtx: Add hiresbb key to \includegraphics. + + * graphics.dtx: Add tcidvi and truetex options, comment out + some old drivers. Add hiresbb package option for + %%HiResBoundingBox. + + * color.dtx: add missing \colors@false to monochrome option. + Add tcidvi and truetex drivers. Comment out some old drivers. + +1996-10-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pstcol.dtx: clean up documentation a bit. + + * Makefile: Add SCRIPTDIR + +1996-09-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: add debugshow option, mainly so I can go + \usepackage[debugshow]{graphics,color} without color + complaining + + * graphics.dtx: stop infinite loop if requested size is zero + graphics/2259. + +1996-08-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphicx.dtx: Missing % for /2244 + +1996-06-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.ins: pctex32 + +1996-06-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: use \@gtempa not \g@tempa graphics/2090 + + * graphicx.dtx: Fix misplaced = in changes + entry. graphics/2034 + +1996-05-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * 00readme.txt: Tidy up. + + * graphicx.dtx: Declare it version 1 (no other change). + + * graphics.dtx: Declare it version 1 (no other change). + + * color.dtx: Declare it version 1 (no other change). + + * drivers.dtx: Change arithmetic in dvips' \Ginclude@eps (and + the identical code for pctex32) to avoid overflow on very + large posters. (Andreas Schott) + +1996-04-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Add pctex32 driver file based on code from pti. + Add support for wmf in Y&Y's dviwindo. + + * epsfig.dtx: allow space after [ in \epsfbox bb argument. + add `silent' key to \epsfig (ignored). + +1996-02-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.ps: Bad dvips configuration forcing A4 paper fixed. + + * textures.def: \gread -> \gread@ typo fixed. + + * graphics.dtx: \gread -> \gread@ typo fixed. + + * graphics.ins: dvi2ps dvitops dvilaser dvialw added back to + the .ins file, so the code gets extracted + +1995-12-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Remove \showhyphens and \underbar Now all + commands are colour safe already in the kernel. CHANGE Add + \leavevmode to \textcolor so that it works out right at the + start of a \parbox[t] (and other places) + + * grfguide.tex: Bring up to date. + +1995-12-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphicx.dtx: Use \Gin@exclamation to save active ! + problems. Rename key to keepaspectratio. + + * graphics.dtx: Add \Gin@exclamation for French graphicx + mainly + +1995-12-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: New dviwin code after correspondence with + Hippocrates Sendoukas. + + * graphics.ins: remove textures.def generation + + * textures.def: New version, not generated from drivers.dtx. + Code supplied by Arthur Ogawa. + +1995-11-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.ins: New version for concurrent docstrip + + * graphicx.dtx: Support height= and width= better for bitmap + formats where natural size not known to LaTeX, but known to + the driver. + + * graphics.dtx: Support height= and width= better for bitmap + formats where natural size not known to LaTeX, but known to + the driver. + +1995-10-31 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lscape.dtx: \StopEventually{\end{landscape}} for + graphics/1744 + +1995-09-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: Support isoscale code in \Gscale@box@dddd + + * graphicx.dtx: Support new isoscale key for \includegraphics. + +1995-09-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphicx.dtx: Add origin key for \includegraphics rotation. + +1995-09-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphicx.dtx: Modify \Gin@esetsize to support calc package + + * graphics.dtx: Modify \Gscale@div to support calc package + +1995-09-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphicx.dtx: Fix typo in natheight and natwidth keys. + + * drivers.dtx: Fix bitmap support in dvips for graphics/1879 + +1995-09-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * keyval.dtx: Documentation changes for graphics/1698 + +1995-09-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: (Berthold Horn) Fix up clipping code in Y&Y + drivers. + +1995-09-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Fix up named colour support for dvipsone. + +1995-09-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Merge dvipsone and dviwindo options. + + * grfguide.tex: Document the totalheight key which got omitted + before. + + * graphics.ins: Remove generation of dviwindo.def + + * drivers.dtx: Fix bounding box spec in dvipsone (should be in + sp) Remove generation of dviwindo.def: dviwindo option now + uses dvipsone.def + + * graphicx.dtx: Arithmetic in viewport was wrong. (Michel + Goossens) + + * graphics.dtx: Merge the two Y&Y options together making + dviwindo.def obsolete. + +1995-08-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.tex (section{Colour}): Refer to X Window system in + the approved manner. + +1995-06-26 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphicx.dtx: Typos fixed in bb.... keys for graphics/1685 + +1995-06-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * epsfig.dtx: oops. \ifGin@viewport renamed to \ifGin@bbox + +1995-06-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Add \Gin@PS@raw and \Gin@PS@restored for + literal PostScript \specials. (cf \pstVerb and \pstverb) + +1995-06-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.ins: Modify docstrip options for Y&Y drivers. + + * epsfig.dtx: Remove forcing of dvips option (use graphics.cfg + to force the default driver for your site). Modify + \ProvidesPackage usage + + * drivers.dtx: Add \AtBeginDvi around `color2' color define + \special. Make Y&Y drivers dvipsone and dviwindo use `color2' + colour support following mail message from Berthold Horn. + + * color.dtx: Use #1 not ##1 in \DeclareOption, for latex/1557 + +1995-04-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Move \leavevmode earlier in box commands for + graphics/1512 + +1995-04-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.ins: Add template generation (commented out). + + * drivers.dtx: Remove \Gin@tobp, not needed now. + +1995-04-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.tex: Fix mention of obsolete syntax, as reported in + latex/1295 + +1995-04-11 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphicx.dtx: Bounding box changes to match graphics.sty. + Add trim viewport and totalheight keys to \includegraphics. + + * graphics.dtx: Start v0.7: \leavevmode positioning. Bounding + box cordinates stored as macros (so can use bp) Make more + catcodes safe, for binary headers of eps files. + +1995-01-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: (Chris Hamlin) Spurious #2 deleted in + dviwindo.def: \def\c@lor@cmyk@#1#2,#2,#3,#4,#5\@@{% + +1994-12-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: (Denis Roegel) Extra group to keep bb settings + local. (Piet van Oostrum) include `.' in \Gin@ext. + +1994-12-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Add ln (ln03, ln05 etc) support (untested). + + * graphics.dtx: Add ln (ln03, ln05 etc) support (untested). + +1994-11-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.tex: New \DeclareGraphicsExtensions description. + + * graphicx.dtx: Modify the type and read keys to work with new + graphics.sty. + + * drivers.dtx: Explicitly mention `.' in all file extensions, + to work with graphics v0.6. + + * graphics.dtx: Remove Optional argument to + \DeclareGraphicsExtensions Remove the notion of a + `separator' and now specify extensions as (eg) .eps rather + than eps this makes it easier to work with files without + extension. + +1994-11-22 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: add color@vbox, remove a load of stuff now in the + kernel. + +1994-11-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * keyval.dtx: Move the <% plain> docstrip commands which were + being typeset by mistake (reported by Martin Schroeder) + + * trig.dtx: Move the <% plain> docstrip commands which were + being typeset by mistake (reported by Martin Schroeder) + +1994-11-08 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Add \color@hbox and \color@endbox + +1994-11-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.ins: add psprint.def (accidentally omitted) + +1994-11-02 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: fix catcodes of ctrl-D and \endlinechar when + reading eps files. + +1994-10-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pstcol.dtx: add gradbegin and gradend colours. + +1994-10-24 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: Modify support for ! in \resizebox (Old code + added to support active ! broke \width etc) + \DeclareGraphicsRule Check #3 (not #2) is * (Reported by + Arthur Ogawa). Missing \expandafter in \Gin@setfile + (Reported by Arthur Ogawa). + + * drivers.dtx: Missing \the in dvitops \special. Reported by + Arthur Ogawa. + +1994-10-17 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: removed xdvi.def: xdvi now calls + dvips,monochrome + +1994-10-16 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * trig.dtx: Changed \@xc to \nin@ty (old name clashed with + some other package) + +1994-10-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * grfguide.tex: Minor improvements to my English. + +1994-10-07 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Removed out of date table. Added new code for + pctex drivers submitted by PTI. + +1994-10-05 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * lscape.dtx: converted the old 209 style to dtx form and base + on graphics package. + + * drivers.dtx: added hsb colour to drivers that support it. + +1994-10-04 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Make \definecolor and \DefineNamedColor give an + Info message if the colour was previously defined. + + * drivers.dtx: Add support for bounding box to pctex drivers, + remove support for scaling which did not work anyway. + +1994-10-03 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Add usenames option. + + * graphics.dtx: Error if no driver specified. + +1994-09-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Modifications to fit in \DefineNamedColor. + textures code redone based on mail from Constantin Kahn (Who + owns a Mac which is and advantage when writing code for + textures:-) + + * color.dtx (section{Defining Colours}): \DefineNamedColor Add + this system, after conversations with Constantin Kahn about + the textures support. + +1994-09-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx (section{Generic PostScript Colour}): Modify + textures code, to force trailing .0. + +1994-09-19 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: small changes to \pagecolor. + +1994-09-15 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Add in pctex drivers from Sebastian. + +1994-09-14 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Add fix for footnote bug (should really be in + ltfloat/ltoutput) + +1994-09-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx (subsection{Coloured Boxes} New implementation of + \fcolorbox and \colorbox. Now share code. + +1994-09-12 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * trig.dtx: Improve docstrip handling. + + * keyval.dtx: Improve docstrip handling. + + * color.dtx: Re-organise options, as for graphics package. + + * graphics.dtx (subsection{Options}): Re-organise, so that it + is more efficient to specify a default option in + graphics.cfg. + + * graphicx.dtx: Make \includegraphics check for 2nd optional + arg. Use standard `graphics.sty' form if 2nd arg is there. + +1994-07-27 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: Add missing 3rd argument to \InputIfFileExists + +1994-07-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: documentation changes. + +1994-07-20 Sebastian Rahtz <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Fix textures graphics inclusion. + +1994-07-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * pstcol.sty: Package modifying pstrics colour interface to + work with LaTeX colours. + + * graphics.dtx (subsection{Stretching and Scaling}): Support + active ! for French. + + * drivers.dtx: extensive changes to cope with the new code in + graphics.dtx and color.dtx. + + * graphics.dtx: Add default rule possibility, so eg a PS + driver can handle any unknown extension as eps, rather than + generate an error. + + * color.dtx: Completely new implementation of the internal + colour commands. Conversion from `user syntax' to `special + syntax' is now in a separate (driver dependant) command, + distinct from the commands to define or use colours. + +1994-06-10 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: minor change to error texts. (dated 1994/05/14:-) + + * drivers.dtx: (From Sebastian) fix for dviwin. + +1994-05-30 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: Rename egraphics to graphicx. + + * testx.tex: new name to match graphicx. + + * graphicx.dtx: Rename from egraphics (8+3). + + * epsfig.dtx: (From Sebastian) Make epsfig default to [dvips] + RequirePackage{graphicx} not egraphics. Remove \wlog as now + done by \ProvidesPackage. + +1994-05-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Remove all support for the test release of + LaTeX2e. Add optional argument to \NeedsTeXFormat to show + this. Define new versions of the `kernel' colour commands, + \color@{begin|end|set}group and \normalcolor. Remove + redefinition of tabbing commands, now colour-safe in the + kernel. + +1994-05-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * test.tex: Remove `times' package from test.tex. (Not part of + `base' distribution of LaTeX2e.) + + * color.dtx: improve wording of error messages. + + * drivers.dtx: patch to oztex support from Andrew + Trevorrow. (via Sebastian) + +1994-05-06 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx (subsection{Options}): notdraft renamed again + to final. + + * drivers.dtx: Replace grot@ by Grot@ throughout. + + * egraphics.dtx: Removed weird and incorrect setting of + \let\Gin@scalex\@empty and \let\Gin@scaley\@empty that I + must have added while asleep:-) Now the earlier correct + settings actually take effect. + + * graphics.dtx: Changed the handling of `missing file' errors. + If no extension is supplied, each extension in the list is + tried until a file is found. A File not found error is + generated if this search fails. If an extension is + supplied, only a warning is given if the file does not + exist. This allows the file to be created `on the fly' eg by + extracting the file from a tar or zip archive. + +1994-04-29 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Removed rotation from drivers.dtx + documentation, so it can be processed at any site. + +1994-04-28 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: added PS rules for Mac drivers + + * graphics.dtx: Improve the wording of error messages. + +1994-04-21 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * drivers.dtx: Added missing \ProvidesFile for xdvi and + dvitops + +1994-04-20 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * graphics.dtx: initialise \Gin@extensions with + \providecommand so that definitions in the .def file are not + zapped. + +1994-04-18 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * color.dtx: Stop \normalfont resetting the + colour. (\reset@font does still reset the colour. This + allows \rm to work as expected. Fix marginpar, so the + baseline is correctly aligned. + + * README Create initial change log from comments in the README + +1994-04-13 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * notdraft renamed to nodraft + + * zaprotate zapscale renamed to hiderotate hidescale + + * kludges for graphics and colour to work with Feb 1994 + release now automatically included (so colfix.sty gone) + +1994-03-23 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * rotatebox now correctly rotates about the left hand side. + + * spurious spaces in \resizebox removed + + * no BoundingBox error message improved + + * zaprotate and zapscale options added (probably bad names) + + * notdraft option added to cancel a global draft option. + + * Graphics files now listed by \listfiles + + * PS drivers now support \current@ps@color + + * colfix.sty put back until next release of LaTeX2e. + +1994-03-09 David Carlisle <latex-bugs@latex-project.org> + + * \reflectbox added. + + * \rotatebox* removed + + * The order of the arguments of \includegraphics corrected + + * \includegraphics[lower-l,lower-r][upper-l,upper-r]{file} + + * \definecolor not \newcolor to define colours + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/color.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/color.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..efdebda3189 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/color.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/drivers.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/drivers.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ef6a372bf58 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/drivers.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/epsfig.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/epsfig.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3aa7fcff62e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/epsfig.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/graphics.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/graphics.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..63a2ed999c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/graphics.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/graphicx.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/graphicx.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..6137b786f80 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/graphicx.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cd6d72046e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b00a86d307c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/grfguide.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1031 @@ +%% grfguide.tex Copyright (C) 1994 1995 1996 1998 1999 David Carlisle +%% Copyright (C) 2005 2014 2016 2017 David Carlisle, LaTeX3 Project +%% +%% This file is part of the Standard LaTeX `Graphics Bundle'. +%% It may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public +%% License, as described in lppl.txt in the base LaTeX distribution. +%% Either version 1.3c or, at your option, any later version. +%% +%% This file has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained". + +\begin{filecontents*}{a.ps} +%! +%%BoundingBox:0 0 72 72 +0 0 moveto +72 72 rlineto +72 neg 0 rlineto +72 72 neg rlineto +stroke +0 0 moveto +/Times-Roman findfont +72 scalefont +setfont +(A) show +showpage +\end{filecontents*} +\begin{filecontents*}{a.pdf} +%PDF-1.4 +%%%%% +1 0 obj +<< +/Pages 2 0 R +/Type /Catalog +>> + endobj +2 0 obj +<< +/Kids [3 0 R] +/Type /Pages +/Count 1 +>> + endobj +3 0 obj +<< +/Rotate 0 +/Parent 2 0 R +/MediaBox [0 0 72 72] + /Resources +<< +/ExtGState 4 0 R +/Font 5 0 R +/ProcSet [/PDF /Text] +>> +/pdftk_PageNum 1 +/Type /Page +/Contents 6 0 R +>> + endobj +4 0 obj +<< +/R7 7 0 R +>> + endobj +5 0 obj +<< +/R8 8 0 R +>> + endobj +6 0 obj +<< +/Length 135 +>> +stream +q 0.1 0 0 0.1 0 0 cm +/R7 gs +10 w +0 G +0 0 m +720 720 l +0 720 l +720 0 l +S +0 g +q +10 0 0 10 0 0 cm BT +/R8 72 Tf +1 0 0 1 0 0 Tm +(A)Tj +ET +Q +Q + + endstream + endobj +7 0 obj +<< +/Type /ExtGState +/OPM 1 +>> + endobj +8 0 obj +<< +/BaseFont /Times-Roman +/LastChar 65 +/Subtype /Type1 +/FontDescriptor 9 0 R +/Widths [722] +/Type /Font +/Encoding /WinAnsiEncoding +/FirstChar 65 +>> + endobj +9 0 obj +<< +/FontName /Times-Roman +/StemV 105 +/CharSet (/A) +/Ascent 674 +/Flags 65568 +/Descent 0 +/ItalicAngle 0 +/MissingWidth 250 +/FontBBox [0 0 706 674] +/Type /FontDescriptor +/CapHeight 674 +>> + endobj +10 0 obj +<< +/Producer (GPL Ghostscript 9.06) +/ModDate (D:20140426202438+01'00') +/CreationDate (D:20140426202438+01'00') +>> +endobj xref +0 11 +0000000000 65535 f +0000000015 00000 n +0000000066 00000 n +0000000125 00000 n +0000000308 00000 n +0000000341 00000 n +0000000374 00000 n +0000000563 00000 n +0000000610 00000 n +0000000774 00000 n +0000000975 00000 n +trailer + +<< +/Info 10 0 R +/Root 1 0 R +/Size 11 +/ID [<4ca1370d594acd28b9d948a5e8b925c3> <4ca1370d594acd28b9d948a5e8b925c3>] +>> +startxref +1106 +%%EOF +\end{filecontents*} +\documentclass{ltxguide} + +%%% No driver option specified +%%% set up the files color.cfg and graphics.cfg for your site. +%%% for example: +%%% +%%% \ExecuteOptions{dvips} +%%% +\usepackage{color,graphicx,shortvrb} + +%% Just as an example, and to make sure, in case some +%% driver option has not declared a default rule for +%% .ps files: +%\DeclareGraphicsRule{.ps}{eps}{.ps}{} +%\DeclareGraphicsExtensions{.pdf,.ps} +%% Which means: +%% .ps files are (to be treated as) EncapsulatedPostScript +%% files. The .ps file is to be read for the BoundingBox. +%% No `special' commands need to be applied by the driver. + + +\renewcommand\star{{\ttfamily*}} + +\let\package\textsf + +\newlength{\gxlen} +\settowidth{\gxlen}{\package{graphicx}: } +\newcommand\gs{\makebox[\gxlen][l]{\package{graphics}:}} +\newcommand\gx{\makebox[\gxlen][l]{\package{graphicx}:}} + +\MakeShortVerb{\|} + +\begin{document} +\title{Packages in the `graphics' bundle} +\author{D. P. Carlisle \and The \LaTeX3 Project} +\date{2017-06-01} + +\maketitle + +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} +This document serves as a user-manual for the packages \package{color}, +\package{graphics}, and \package{graphicx}. Further documentation may be +obtained by processing the source (|dtx|) files of the individual +packages. + +\section{Driver support}\label{drivers} +All these packages rely on features that are not in \TeX\ itself. +These features must be supplied by the `driver' used to print the +|dvi| file. Unfortunately not all drivers support the same features, and +even the internal method of accessing these extensions varies between +drivers. Consequently all these packages take options such as +`|dvips|' to specify which driver is being used. + +Normally you should \emph{not} specify the driver option explicitly +in the document, but allow it to be defaulted automatically. +This allows the document to be portable between different systems. + +Your \TeX\ distribution should have included |graphics.cfg| and +|color.cfg| configuration files to specify these defaults. +Standard versions of the configuration files are maintained by the +\LaTeX\ Project and distributed in the CTAN |graphics-cfg| collection. + +For special requirements you may edit a copy of these |cfg| files +to set up a site default for these options. Suppose that you wish +the \package{color} package to always default to use specials for the +PostScript driver, |dvisvgm|. In that case, create a file |color.cfg| +containing the line:\\ +|\ExecuteOptions{dvisvgm}|\\ +Normally you will want an identical file |graphics.cfg| to set a similar +default for the graphics packages. + +The following driver options are declared in the packages. +The matching definition files (\emph{driver}|.def|) +are now also maintained by the \LaTeX\ project, +but distributed separately, in the CTAN |graphics-def| collection. +\begin{quote}\raggedright + |dvipdfmx|, |dvips|, |dvisvgm|, |luatex|, |pdftex|, |xetex| +\end{quote} + + +The following two options are also supported, they do not correspond +to separate definition files, but are essentially aliases for the +|dvips| option (and |monochrome| in the case of |xdvi|). +\begin{quote}\raggedright + |xdvi|, |oztex| +\end{quote} + +The following set of options are supported by these packages +with associated driver files extracted from the |drivers.dtx| +documented source in this bundle. These are now, mainly of historic +interest but the documented sources do contain some useful code +and advice if you need to produce a new definition file for a new +driver or \TeX\ system. |drivers.dtx| also contains documented +sources for older driver files that are no longer extracted. +\begin{quote}\raggedright + |dvipdf|, |dvipdfm|, |dviwin|, |dvipsone|, + |emtex|, |pctexps|, |pctexwin|, |pctexhp|, |pctex32|, + |truetex|, |tcidvi|, |vtex| +\end{quote} + +The final driver option is an alias for |dvipsone|. +\begin{quote}\raggedright + |dviwindo| +\end{quote} + + +\section[Colour]{Colour\footnote{% +The basic \package{color} package functionality described here +will be enough for many uses, however a much extended version +is available in the contributed \package{xcolor} package, distributed +and maintained separately. All the color commands described here are +also available if you specify \package{xcolor} in your document.}% +} +The colour support is built around the idea of a system of +\emph{Colour Models}. The Colour models supported by a driver vary, +but typically include +\begin{description} +\item[rgb] Red Green Blue: A comma separated list of three numbers + between~0 and~1, giving the components of the colour. +\item[cmyk] Cyan Magenta Yellow [K]Black: A comma separated list of + four numbers between~0 and~1, giving the components of the colour + according to the additive model used in most printers. +\item[gray] Grey scale: a single number between~0 and~1. +\item[named] Colours accessed by name, e.g.\ `JungleGreen'. Not all + drivers support this model. The names must either be `known' to the + driver or added using commands described in |color.dtx|. Some drivers + support an extended form of the named model in which an `intensity' of + the colour may also be specified, so `\mbox{JungleGreen, 0.5}' would + denote that colour at half strength. +\end{description} +Note that the \textbf{named} model is really just given as an example +of a colour model that takes names rather than a numeric specification. +Other options may be provided locally that provide different colour +models, eg \textbf{pantone} (An industry standard set of colours), +\textbf{x11} (Colour names from the X Window System), etc. The +standard distribution does not currently have such models, but the +\textbf{named} model could be used as an example of how to define a new +colour model. The names used in the \textbf{named} model are those +suggested by Jim Hafner in his \textsf{colordvi} and \textsf{foiltex} +packages, and implemented originally in the |color.pro| header file for +the \texttt{dvips} driver. + +\subsection{Package Options} +Most of the options to the \package{color} package just specify a +driver, e.g., \ |dvips|, as discussed in section~\ref{drivers}. + +One special option for the \package{color} package +that is of interest is |monochrome.| +If this option is selected the colour commands are all +disabled so that they do not generate errors, but do not generate colour +either. This is useful if previewing with a previewer that can not +produce colour. + +Three other package options control the use of the \textbf{named} model. +The |dvips| driver (by default) pre-defines 68 colour names. The |dvips| +option normally makes these names available in the \textbf{named} colour +model. If you do not want these names to be declared in this model +(Saving \TeX\ some memory) you may give the |nodvipsnames| +option. Conversely, if you are using another driver, you may wish to +add these names to the named model for that driver (especially if you +are processing a document originally produced on |dvips|). In this case +you could use the |dvipsnames| option. Lastly the |usenames| option +makes all names in the \textbf{named} model directly available, as +described below. + +\subsection{Defining Colours} + +The colours |black|, |white|, |red|, |green|, |blue|, |cyan|, +|magenta|, |yellow| should be predefined, but should you wish to mix +your own colours use the |\definecolor| command. + +\begin{decl} +|\definecolor|\arg{name}\arg{model}\arg{colour specification} +\end{decl} + + +This defines \m{name} as a colour which can be used in later colour +commands. For example +\begin{verbatim} +\definecolor{light-blue}{rgb}{0.8,0.85,1} +\definecolor{mygrey}{gray}{0.75} +\end{verbatim} +\definecolor{light-blue}{rgb}{0.8,0.85,1} +\definecolor{mygrey}{gray}{0.75} + +Now |light-blue| and |mygrey| may be used in addition to the +predefined colours above. + +\subsection{Using Colours} + +\subsubsection{Using predefined colours} +The syntax for colour changes is designed to mimic font changes. +The basic syntax is: + +\begin{decl} +|\color|\arg{name} +\end{decl} + +This is a \emph{declaration}, like |\bfseries| It changes the current +colour to \m{name} until the end of the current group or +environment. + +An alternative command syntax is to use a \emph{command} form that +takes the text to be coloured as an \emph{argument}. This is similar +to the font commands such as |\textbf|: + +\begin{decl} +|\textcolor|\arg{name}\arg{text} +\end{decl} + + +So the above is essentially equivalent to +|{\color|\arg{name}\emph{text}|}|. + +\subsubsection{Using colour specifications directly} + + +\begin{decl} +|\color|\oarg{model}\arg{specification}\\ +|\textcolor|\oarg{model}\arg{specification}\arg{text} +\end{decl} + +Normally one would predeclare all the colours used in a package, or in +the document preamble, but sometimes it is convenient to directly use +a colour without naming it first. To achieve this |\color| (and all +the other colour commands) take an optional argument specifying the +model. If this is used then the mandatory argument takes a +\m{colour specification} instead of a \m{name}. For example:\\ +|\color[rgb]{1,0.2,0.3}|\\ +would directly select that colour. + +This is particularly useful for accessing the \textbf{named} model:\\ +|\color[named]{BrickRed}| selects the |dvips| colour BrickRed. + +Rather than repeatedly use |[named]| you may use |\definecolor| to +provide convenient aliases:\\ +|\definecolor{myred}{named}{WildStrawberry}| + \ldots\ |\color{myred}|\ \ldots + +Alternatively if you are happy to use the existing names from the +\textbf{named} model, you may use the |usenames| package option, which +effectively calls |\definecolor| on every colour in the \textbf{named} +model, thus allowing |\color{WildStrawberry}| in addition to +|\color[named]{WildStrawbery}|. + +\subsection{Named Colours} +Using the \textbf{named} colour model has certain advantages over +using other colour models. + +Firstly as the |dvi| file contains a request +for a colour by \emph{name}, the actual mix of primary colours used to +obtain the requested colour can be tuned to the characteristics of a +particular printer. In the |dvips| driver the meanings of the colour +names are defined in the header file |color.pro|. Users are encouraged +to produce different versions of this file for any printers they use. By +this means the same dvi file should produce colours of similar +appearance when printed on printers with different colour +characteristics. + +Secondly, apart from the so called `process colours' that are produced +by mixing primary colours during the print process, one may want to use +`spot' or `custom' colours. Here a particular colour name does not +refer to a mix of primaries, but to a particular ink. The parts of the +document using this colour will be printed separately using this named +ink colour. + +\subsection{Page Colour} + + +\begin{decl} +|\pagecolor|\arg{name}\\ +|\pagecolor|\oarg{model}\arg{specification}\\ +|\nopagecolor| +\end{decl} + +The background colour of the whole page can be set using +|\pagecolor|. This takes the same argument forms as |\color| but sets +the background colour for the current and all subsequent pages. It is +a global declaration, so you need to use +|\nopagecolor|\NEWfeature{2014/04/23}\ to `get back to normal'. +If that is not supported, you may use |\pagecolor{white}| although that +will make a white background rather than the default transparent background. + +\subsection{Box Backgrounds} +Two commands similar to |\fbox| produce boxes with the backgrounds +shaded an appropriate colour. + +\begin{decl} +|\colorbox|\arg{name}\arg{text}\\ +|\colorbox|\oarg{model}\arg{specification}\arg{text}\\ +|\fcolorbox|\arg{name1}\arg{name2}\arg{text}\\ +|\fcolorbox|\oarg{model}% + \arg{specification1}\arg{specification2}\arg{text} +\end{decl} + + +The former produces a box coloured with \emph{name} +\colorbox{mygrey}{like this}. The latter is similar but puts a frame of +colour \emph{name1} around the box coloured \emph{name2}. + +These commands use the |\fbox| parameters |\fboxrule| and |\fboxsep| +to determine the thickness of the rule, and the size of the shaded area. + +\subsection{Possible Problems} + +\TeX\ was not designed with colour in mind, and producing colours +requires a lot of help from the driver program. Thus, depending on the +driver, some or all features of the \package{color} package may not be +available. + +Some drivers do not maintain a special `colour stack'. These drivers are +likely to get confused if you nest colour changes, or use colours in +floating environments. + +Some drivers do not maintain colours over a page break, so that if the +page breaks in the middle of a coloured paragraph, the last part of the +text will incorrectly be printed in black. + +There is a different type of problem that will occur for all drivers. +Due to certain technical difficulties\footnote{At least two causes: +1) The presence of a \texttt{\char`\\special} \m{whatsit} prevents +\texttt{\char`\\addvspace} `seeing' space on the current vertical list, +so causing it to incorrectly add extra vertical space. 2) A +\m{whatsit} as the first item in a \texttt{\char`\\vtop} moves the +reference point of the box.}% +, it is possible that at points +where the colour changes, the \emph{spacing} is affected. For this +reason the |monochrome| option does not completely disable the colour +commands, it redefines them to write to the log file. This will have the +same effects on spacing, so you can produce monochrome drafts of your +document, at least knowing that the final spacing is being shown. +\section{The Graphics packages} +There are two graphics packages: +\begin{description} +\item[\package{graphics}] The `standard' graphics package. +\item[\package{graphicx}] The `extended' or `enhanced' graphics + package. +\end{description} +The two differ only in the format of optional arguments for the +commands defined. The command names, and the mandatory arguments are +the same for the two packages. + +\subsection{Package Options} +As discussed in section~\ref{drivers}, the graphics packages share the +same `driver' options as the \package{color} package. As for colour +you should set up a site-default in a file, +|graphics.cfg|, containing the line (for |dvips|):\\ +|\ExecuteOptions{dvips}| + +The graphics packages have some other options for controlling how many +of the features to enable: +\begin{description} +\item[draft] suppress all the `special' features. In particular + graphics files are not included (but they are still read for size + info) just the filename is printed in a box of the correct size. +\item[final] The opposite of |draft|. Useful to over-ride a global + |draft| option specified in the |\documentclass| command. +\item[hiderotate] Do not show rotated text (presumably because the + previewer can not rotate). +\item[hidescale] Do not show scaled text (presumably because the + previewer can not scale). +\item[hiresbb] Look for size specifications in |%%HiResBoundingBox| + lines rather than standard |%%BoundingBox| lines.% + \NEWfeature{1996/10/29} +\item[demo] Instead of inserting an image file |\includegraphics| + draws a 150\,pt by 100\,pt rectangle unless other dimensions are + specified manually.\NEWfeature{2006/02/20} +\end{description} +\subsection{Rotation} + +\begin{decl} +\gs |\rotatebox|\arg{angle}\arg{text}\\ +\gx |\rotatebox|\oarg{key val list}\arg{angle}\arg{text} +\end{decl} + +This puts \emph{text} in a box, like |\mbox|, but rotates the box +through \emph{angle} degrees, \rotatebox{15}{like this}. + +The standard version always rotates around the reference point of the +box, but the \package{keyval} version takes the following keys: + +\begin{decl} +|origin|=\m{label}\\ +|x|=\m{dimen}\\ +|y|=\m{dimen}\\ +|units|=\m{number} +\end{decl} + +So you may specify both |x| and |y|, which give the coordinate of +the centre of rotation relative to the reference point of the box, eg +|[x=2mm, y=5mm]|. Alternatively, for the most common points, one may use +|origin| with a \emph{label} containing one or two of the following: +|lrctbB| (|B| denotes the baseline, as for \package{PSTricks}). For +example, compare a default rotation of $180^\circ$ +\ldots\rotatebox{180}{Like This}\ldots\ to the effects gained by using +the |origin| key:\\ +|[origin = c]| rotates about the centre of the box,\ldots + \rotatebox[origin=c]{180}{Like This}\ldots\\ +|[origin = tr]| rotates about the top right hand corner\ldots + \rotatebox[origin=tr]{180}{Like This}\ldots + +The |units| key allows a change from the default units of degrees +anti-clockwise. Give the number of units in one full anti-clockwise +rotation. For example:\\ +|[units = -360]| specifies degrees clockwise.\\ +|[units= 6.283185]| specifies radians. + +\subsection{Scaling} + +\subsubsection{Scaling by scale factor} + +\begin{decl} +|\scalebox|\arg{h-scale}\oarg{v-scale}\arg{text} +\end{decl} + +Again this is basically like |\mbox| but scales the \emph{text}. +If \emph{v-scale} is not specified it defaults to \emph{h-scale}. +If it is specified the text is distorted as the horizontal and +vertical stretches are different, \scalebox{3}[.7]{Like This}. + + +\begin{decl} +|\reflectbox|\arg{text} +\end{decl} + +An abbreviation for |\scalebox{-1}[1]|\arg{text}. + +\subsubsection{Scaling to a requested size} + +\begin{decl} +|\resizebox|\star\arg{h-length}\arg{v-length}\arg{text} +\end{decl} + + Scale \emph{text} so that the width is \emph{h-length}. + If |!| is used as either length argument, the other argument is used + to determine a scale factor that is used in both directions. + Normally \emph{v-length} refers to the height of the box, but in the + star form, it refers to the `height + depth'. + As normal for \LaTeXe\ box length arguments, |\height|, + |\width|, |\totalheight|, |\depth| may be used to refer to the + original size of the box. + +|\resizebox{1in}{\height}{Some text}|: +\resizebox{1in}{\height}{Some text} + +|\resizebox{1in}{!}{Some text}|: +\resizebox{1in}{!}{Some text} + +\subsection{Including Graphics Files} +The functions for graphics inclusion try to give the same user syntax +for including any kind of graphics file that can be understood by the +driver. This relies on the file having an extension that identifies +the file type. The `driver options' will define a collection of file +extensions that the driver can handle, although this list may be +extended using the declarations described below. + +If the file's extension is unknown to the driver, the system may try a +default file type. The PostScript driver files set this default to be +|eps| (PostScript), but this behaviour may be customised if other +defaults are required. + +\begin{decl} +\gs |\includegraphics|\star\oarg{llx,lly}\oarg{urx,ury}\arg{file}\\ +\gx |\includegraphics|\star\oarg{key val list}\arg{file} +\end{decl} + Include a graphics file. + + If \star\ is present, then the graphic is `clipped' to the size + specified. If \star\ is omitted, then any part of the graphic that is + outside the specified `bounding box' will over-print the surrounding + text. + + If the optional arguments are omitted, then the size of the graphic + will be determined by reading an external file as described below. + +\paragraph{\package{graphics} version} + If \oarg{urx,ury} is present, then it should specify the coordinates + of the top right corner of the image, as a pair of \TeX\ dimensions. + If the units are omitted they default to |bp|. So |[1in,1in]| and + |[72,72]| are equivalent. If only one optional argument appears, the + lower left corner of the image is assumed to be at |[0,0]|. Otherwise + \oarg{llx,lly} may be used to specify the coordinates of this point. + +\paragraph{\package{graphicx} version} +Here the star form is just for compatibility with the standard +version. It just adds |clip| to the list of keys specified. +(Also, for increased compatibility, if \emph{two} optional arguments are +used, the `standard' version of |\includegraphics| is always used, even +if the \package{graphicx} package is loaded.) + +The allowed keys are listed below. +\begin{description} +\item[bb] The argument should be four dimensions, separated by spaces. + These denote the `Bounding Box' of the printed region within + the file. +\item[bbllx,bblly,bburx,bbury] Set the bounding box. Mainly for + compatibility with older packages. + Specifying |bbllx=a,bblly=b,bburx=c,bbury=d| + is equivalent to specifying |bb = a b c d|. +\item[natwidth,natheight] Again an alternative to |bb|. + |natheight=h,natwidth=w| is equivalent to |bb = 0 0 h w|. +\item[hiresbb]\NEWfeature{1996/10/29} + Boolean valued key. If set to |true| (just specifying |hiresbb| + is equivalent to |hiresbb=true|) then \TeX\ will look for + |%%HiResBoundingBox| lines rather than |%%BoundingBox|. It may be set + to |false| to overrule a default setting of |true| set by the + |hiresbb| package option. +\item[pagebox]\NEWfeature{2017/06/01} +PDF files do not have BoundingBox but may specify up to four predefined +rectangles. + +|MediaBox|: the boundaries of the physical medium. +|CropBox|: the region to which the contents of the page are to be + clipped when displayed. +|BleedBox|: the region to which the contents of the + page should be clipped in production. +|TrimBox|: the intended dimensions of the finished page. +|ArtBox|: the extent of the page's meaningful content. + +The driver will set the image size based on |CropBox| if present, +otherwise it will not use one of the others, +with a driver-defined order of preference. +|MediaBox| is always present. + +The |pagebox| key may be used to specify which bounding box specification to use, +The value should be one of +|mediabox|, |cropbox|, |bleedbox|, |trimbox|, |artbox|. +\item[viewport]\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} + The |viewport| key takes four arguments, just like + |bb|. However in this case the values are taken relative to the + origin specified by the bounding box in the file. So to `view' the + 1in square in the bottom left hand corner of the area specified by + the bounding box, use the argument |viewport=0 0 72 72|. +\item[trim]\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} + Similar to viewport, but here the four lengths specify the + amount to remove or add to each side. |trim= 1 2 3 4| `crops' the + picture by 1bp at the left, 2bp at the bottom, 3bp on the right and + 4bp at the top. +\item[angle] Rotation angle. +\item[origin]\NEWfeature{1995/09/28} + Origin for rotation. See the documentation of |\rotatebox|. +\item[width] Required width. The + graphic is scaled to this width. +\item[height] Required height. The + graphic is scaled to this height. +\item[totalheight]\NEWfeature{1995/06/01} + Specify the total height (height $+$ depth) of the figure. + This will differ from the `height' if rotation has occurred. + In particular if the figure has been rotated by $-90^\circ$ + then it will have zero height but large depth. +\item[keepaspectratio]\NEWfeature{1995/09/27} + Boolean valued key like `clip'. + If set to true then specifying both `width' and `height' (or + `totalheight') does not distort the figure but scales such that + neither of the specified dimensions is \emph{exceeded}. +\item[scale] Scale factor. +\item[clip] Either `true' or `false' (or no value, which is equivalent + to `true'). Clip the graphic to the bounding box. +\item[draft] a boolean valued key, like `clip'. Locally switches to + draft mode. +\item[type] Specify the graphics type. +\item[ext] Specify the file extension. This should \emph{only} be + used in conjunction with |type|. +\item[read] Specify the file extension of the `read file'. This + should \emph{only} be used in conjunction with |type|. +\item[command] Specify any command to be applied to the file. This + should \emph{only} be used in conjunction with |type|. +\item[quiet]\NEWfeature{2017/06/01} + Skip writing information to the log. +\item[page]\NEWfeature{2017/06/01} +Page of a multi-page PDF file. (by default the first page will be used.) +\item[interpolate]\NEWfeature{2017/06/01} +Enable/disable interpolation of bitmap images by the viewer. +\end{description} + +For the keys specifying the original size (i.e,, the bounding box, +trim and viewport keys) the units can be omitted, in +which case bp (i.e., PostScript points) are assumed. + +The first seven keys specify the original size of the image. This size +needs to be specified in the case that the file can not be read by +\TeX, or it contains an incorrect size `BoundingBox' specification. + +|bbllx|\ldots\ |\bbury| are mainly for compatibility for older +packages.\\ +|bbllx=a, bblly=b, bburx=c, bbury=d|\\ +is equivalent to\\ +|bb = a b c d|. + +|natheight| and |natwidth| are just shorthands for setting the lower +left coordinate to 0 0 and the upper right coordinate to the specified +width and height. + +The next few keys specify any scaling or rotation to be applied to the +image. To get these effects using the standard package, the +|\includegraphics| call must be placed inside the argument of a +|\rotatebox| or |\scalebox| command. + +The keys are read left-to-right, so |[angle=90, height=1in]| means +rotate by 90 degrees, and then scale to a height of 1in. +|[height=1in, angle=90]| would result in a final \emph{width} of 1in. + +If the \textsf{calc} package is also loaded the lengths may use +\textsf{calc} syntax, for instance to specify a width of 2\,cm +less than the text width: |[width=\textwidth-2cm]|. + +\TeX\ leaves the space specified either in the file, or in +the optional arguments. If any part of the image is actually outside +this area, it will by default overprint the surrounding text. +If the star form is used, or |clip| specified, any part of the image +outside this area will not be printed. + +The last four keys suppress the parsing of the filename. If they are +used, the main \emph{file} argument should not have the file +extension. They correspond to the arguments of |\DeclareGraphicsRule| +described below. + +To see the effect that the various options have consider the file +|a.ps|. This file contains the bounding box specification +\begin{verbatim} +%%BoundingBox:0 0 72 72 +\end{verbatim} +That is, the printed region consists of a one-inch square, in +the bottom left hand corner of the paper. + +In all the following examples the input will be of the form +\begin{verbatim} +left---\fbox{\includegraphics{a}}---right +\end{verbatim} +With different options supplied to |\includegraphics|. + +No optional argument.\\ +left---\fbox{\includegraphics{a}}---right + +\gs |\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{a}}|\\ +\gx |\includegraphics[scale=.5]{a}|\\ +left---\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=.5]{a}}---right + +\gs |\includegraphics[15,10][35,45]{a}}|\\ +\gx |\includegraphics[viewport= 15 10 35 45]{a}|\\ +left---\fbox{\includegraphics[viewport= 15 10 35 45]{a}}---right + +\gs |\includegraphics*[15,10][35,45]{a}}|\\ +\gx |\includegraphics[viewport= 15 10 35 45,clip]{a}|\\ +left---\fbox{\includegraphics[viewport= 15 10 35 45,clip]{a}}---right + +\gs |\scalebox{0.5}{\includegraphics{a}}| + and |draft| option.\\ +\gx |\includegraphics[scale=.5, draft]{a}|\\ +left---\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=.5, draft]{a}}---right + +\subsection{Other commands in the \package{graphics} package} + +\begin{decl} +|\graphicspath|\arg{dir-list} +\end{decl} +This optional declaration may be used to specify a list of directories +in which to search for graphics files. The format is the same as for +the \LaTeXe\ primitive |\input@path|. A list of directories, each in a +|{}| group (even if there is only one in the list). For example:\\ + |\graphicspath{{eps/}{tiff/}}|\\ + would cause the system to look in the subdirectories |eps| and |tiff| + of the current directory. (All modern \TeX{} systems use |/| + as the directory separator, even on Windows.) + + The default setting of this path is + |\input@path| that is: graphics files will be found wherever \TeX\ + files are found. + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareGraphicsExtensions|\arg{ext-list} +\end{decl} + \NEWdescription{1994/12/01} + This specifies the behaviour of the system when no file extension + is specified in the argument to |\includegraphics|. + \arg{ext-list} should be a comma separated list of file extensions. + (White space is ignored between the entries.) + A file name is produced by appending one extension from the list. + If a file is found, the system acts as if that extension had been + specified. If not, the next extension in \emph{ext-list} is tried. + + +Note that if the extension is not specified in the |\includegraphics| +command, the graphics file must exist at the time \LaTeX\ is run, as +the existence of the file is used to determine which extension from +the list to choose. However if a file extension \emph{is} specified, +e.g.\ |\includegraphics{a.ps}| instead of |\includegraphics{a}|, then +the graphics file need not exist at the time \LaTeX\ is used. (In +particular it may be created on the fly by the \m{command} +specified in the |\DeclareGraphicsRule| command described below.) +\LaTeX\ does however need to be able to determine the size of the +image so this size must be specified in arguments, or the `read file' +must exist at the time \LaTeX\ is used. + +\begin{decl} +|\DeclareGraphicsRule|\arg{ext}\arg{type}\arg{read-file}\arg{command} +\end{decl} + Any number of these declarations can be made. They determine how the + system behaves when a file with extension \emph{ext} is specified. + (The extension may be specified explicitly or, if the argument to + |\includegraphics| does not have an extension, it may be a default + extension from the \emph{ext-list} specified with + |\DeclareGraphicsExtensions|.) + +\emph{ext} the file extension for which this rule applies. As a special +case, \emph{ext} may be given as |*| to denote the default behaviour for +all undeclared extensions (see the example below). + +\emph{type} is the `type' of file involved. All files of the same type +will be input with the same internal command (which must be defined in +a `driver file'). For example files with extensions |ps|, |eps|, +|ps.gz| may all be classed as type |eps|. + +\emph{read-file} determines the extension of the file that should be +read to determine size information. It may be the same as \emph{ext} +but it may be different, for example |.ps.gz| files are not readable +easily by \TeX, so you may want to put the bounding box information in +a separate file with extension |.ps.bb|. If \emph{read-file} is empty, +|{}|, then the system will not try to locate an external file for size +info, and the size must be specified in the arguments of +|\includegraphics|. If the driver file specifies a procedure for +reading size files for \emph{type}, that will be used, otherwise the +procedure for reading |eps| files will be used. Thus the size of +bitmap files may be specified in a file with a PostScript style +|%%BoundingBox| line, if no other specific format is available. + +As a special case |*| may be used to denote the +same extension as the graphic file. This is mainly of use in +conjunction with using |*| as the extension, as in that case the +particular graphic extension is not known. For example +\begin{verbatim} + \DeclareGraphicsRule{*}{eps}{*}{} +\end{verbatim} +This would declare a default rule, such that all unknown extensions +would be treated as EPS files, and the graphic file would be read for +a BoundingBox comment. + +\emph{command} is usually empty, but if non empty it is used in place +of the filename in the |\special|. Within this argument, |#1| may be +used to denote the filename. Thus using the dvips driver, one may +use\\ +|\DeclareGraphicsRule{.ps.gz}{eps}{.ps.bb}{`zcat #1}|\\ +the final argument causes dvips to use the |zcat| command to unzip the +file before inserting it into the PostScript output. + +Note that \LaTeX\ will find the graphics file by searching along +TEXINPUTS (and possibly other places, as specified with +|\graphicspath|) however it may be that the command you specify +in this argument can not find such files unless they are in the +current directory. On some systems it may be possible to modify +the command so that it will find any files that \LaTeX\ can find. +For example on newer web2c \TeX\ releases on unix, one may modify the +above command so that the last argument is:\\ +|{`zcat `kpsewhich -n latex tex #1`}|\\ +which incantation causes the |kpsewhich| program to find the +file, by searching along \LaTeX's path, and then pass the full path +name to the |zcat| program so that it can uncompress the file. +Any such uses are very system dependent, and would best be placed in +a |graphics.cfg| file, thus keeping the document itself portable. + +\subsection{Global setting of keys} + +Most of the \package{keyval} keys used in the \package{graphicx} package +may also be set using the command |\setkeys| provided by the +\package{keyval} package.% +\footnote{\texttt{clip}, \texttt{scale} and \texttt{angle} may not be set via +\texttt{\string\setkeys} prior to calling +\texttt{\string\includegraphics}.} + +For instance, suppose you wanted all the files to be included in the +current document to be scaled to 75\% of the width of the lines of text, +then one could issue the following command:\\ +|\setkeys{Gin}{width=0.75\textwidth}|\\ +Here `|Gin|' is the name used for the \package{keyval} keys associated +with `Graphics inclusion'. All following +|\includegraphics| commands (within the same group or environment) will +act as if |[width=0.75\textwidth]| had been specified, in addition to +any other key settings actually given in the optional argument. + +Similarly to make all |\rotatebox| arguments take an argument in +radians, one just needs to specify:\\ +|\setkeys{Grot}{units=6.28318}| + +\subsection{Compatibility between \package{graphics} and + \package{graphicx}} + +For a document author, there are not really any problems of +compatibility between the two packages. You just choose the interface +that you personally prefer, and then use the appropriate package. + +For a package or class writer the situation is slightly +different. Suppose that you are writing a letter class that needs to +print a company logo as part of the letterhead. + +As the author of the class you may want to give the users the +possibility of using either interface in their letters (should they +need to include any further graphics into the letter body). +In this case the class should load the \package{graphics} package (not +\package{graphicx}, as this would commit any users of the class to the +\package{keyval} interface). The logo should be included with +|\includegraphics| either with \emph{no} optional argument (if the +correct size information is in the file) or \emph{both} optional +arguments otherwise. +Do not use the \emph{one} optional argument form, as the meaning of this +argument would change (and generate errors) if the user were to load +\package{graphicx} as well as your class. + +\section{Remaining packages in the graphics bundle} + +\subsection{Epsfig} +This is a small package essentially a `wrapper' around the +\package{graphicx} package, defining a command |\psfig| which has the +syntax\\ +|\psfig{file=xxx,...}| rather than |\includegraphics[...]{xxx}|.\\ +It also has a few more commands to make it slightly more compatible with +the old \LaTeX~2.09 style of the same name. + +\subsection{Rotating} +An extension package to \package{graphicx}, mainly used for providing +rotated float environments. + +\subsection{Trig} +The trig package is not intended to be used directly in documents. It +calculates sine, cosine and tangent trigonometric functions. These +are used to calculate the space taken up by a rotated box. This +package is also used by the |fontinst| program which converts +PostScript files to a form usable by \TeX. + +As well as being used as a \LaTeX\ package, the macros may be extracted +with the \package{docstrip} options \texttt{plain,package}. In this case +the \LaTeX\ package declarations are omitted from the file, and the +macros may be directly used as part of another macro file (they work +with any format based on plain \TeX.) + +\subsection{Keyval} +The \package{keyval} package is intended to be used by other +packages. It provides a generic way of setting `keys' as used by the +\package{graphicx} package, and splitting up the comma separated lists +of \m{key}~=~\m{value} pairs. + +Like the \package{trig} package, these macros may be extracted and used +as part of another macro file, based on plain \TeX, as well as the +standard use as a \LaTeX\ package. + +By default an undeclared key will generate an error. +If however the option \texttt{unknownkeysallowed} is used, then +unknown keys will be silently ignored (leaving a message in the log +file). This option is also accepted by the \textsf{graphicx} package. + +\iffalse + +\subsection{Pstcol} +\package{PSTricks}, by Timothy Van Zandt is an immensely powerful +package that enables a very full featured interface between PostScript +and \TeX. Unfortunately the colour support in \package{PSTricks} is +slightly incompatible with the colour mechanism defined in the +\package{color} package. The \package{pstcol} package is a (hopefully +temporary) package that modifies a very small number of internal +PSTricks functions, to remove this incompatibility. If +\package{pstricks} is loaded via this package, you may use any colours +defined by \package{color} package commands within \package{pstricks} +commands, and vice versa. + +\fi + +\subsection{Lscape} +The \package{lscape} package requires and takes the same options +as the \package{graphics} package. It defines a |landscape| environment +within which page bodies are rotated through 90 degrees. The page head +and foot are not affected, they appear in the standard (portrait) +position. +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/keyval.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/keyval.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8790611726b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/keyval.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/lscape.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/lscape.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bf3d93a04cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/lscape.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotating.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotating.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..bfaa34d0abd --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotating.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotex.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotex.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..15647844757 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotex.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotex.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotex.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9dabfd37f74 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/rotex.tex @@ -0,0 +1,500 @@ +\errorcontextlines32 +\documentclass[twoside]{report} +\usepackage[chatter]{rotating} +\usepackage{fancyvrb} +\makeatletter +\newsavebox{\@display} +\newcommand\@@Display[1]{% + \sbox\@display{% + \begin{minipage}[b]{.45\textwidth}% + #1\end{minipage}% + }\raisebox{\depth}{\usebox{\@display}}% +} + +\newcommand\@@VDisplay[1]{% + \sbox\@display{% + \begin{minipage}[b]{.45\textwidth}% + \BVerbatimInput[fontsize=\small]{#1}% + \end{minipage}}% + \usebox{\@display}% +} +\newcommand\SideBySide[2]{% +\bgroup\def\baselinestretch{1}% + \trivlist\item[]% + \leavevmode + \makebox[\textwidth][l]{\@@Display{#1}\hspace{1em}% + \@@VDisplay{#2}}% + \endtrivlist + \egroup +} +\newcommand\BeginExample{% + \nobreak + \VerbatimEnvironment + \catcode`\<=12 + \begin{VerbatimOut}{\jobname.ex}% +} +\newcommand{\EndExample}{\end{VerbatimOut}} + +\newenvironment{example} + {\nobreak + \VerbatimEnvironment + \catcode`\<=12 + \begin{VerbatimOut}{\jobname.ex}% + } + {\end{VerbatimOut} + \SideBySide {\input{\jobname.ex}}% + {\jobname.ex}} +\makeatother +%------------------------------------------------------- +\def\degrees{{\small$^{\mathrm{o}}$}} +%------------------------------------------------------- + +\begin{document} + +\title{Test of `rotating' package} +\author{Sebastian Rahtz and Leonor Barroca\thanks{Now maintained as part of the \LaTeX\ graphics bundle.}} +\date{November 19th 1994\thanks{Updated for graphics bundle 2016/05/22}} +\maketitle + +`Rotating' provides a generalised rotation environment, where the text +will be rotated (anti-clockwise) by the number of degrees specified as +a parameter to the environment, but no special arrangement is made to +find space for the result. + +\begin{example} +Start here +\begin{rotate}{-56} +Save whales +\end{rotate} +End here +\end{example} + +A complete example of rotating text without leaving space +would the `Save the whale' text +written at 10 degree intervals round the compass. We use +`rlap' to ensure that all the texts are printed at the same point. +Just to show that \TeX\ can handle PostScript muckings-about +properly\ldots +\begin{example} +\newcount\wang +\newsavebox{\wangtext} +\newdimen\wangspace +\def\wheel#1{\savebox{\wangtext}{#1}% +\wangspace\wd\wangtext +\advance\wangspace by 1cm% +\centerline{% +\rule{0pt}{\wangspace}% +\rule[-\wangspace]{0pt}{\wangspace}% +\wang=-180\loop\ifnum\wang<180 +\rlap{\begin{rotate}{\the\wang}% +\rule{1cm}{0pt}#1\end{rotate}}% +\advance\wang by 10\repeat}} +\wheel{Save the whale} +\end{example} + +If the user +desires \LaTeX\ to leave space for the rotated box, then `turn' is used: +\begin{example} + Start here \begin{turn}{56}% + Save the whale + \end{turn} end here +\end{example} +The environment `Sideways' is a special case, setting the rotation to $-90$, +and leaving the correct space for the rotated box. +\begin{example} +Start here +\begin{sideways}% +Save the whale +\end{sideways} +End here +\end{example} + +If you deal with whole paragraphs of text, you realize that \TeX\ +boxes are not as simple as they sometimes look: they have a height +{\em and} a depth. So when you rotate, you rotate about the point on +the left-hand edge of the box that meets the baseline. The results can +be unexpected, as shown in the full set of paragraph rotations in +Figures \ref{angles1} and \ref{angles2}. If you really want to turn a +paragraph so that it appears to rotate about the {\em real} bottom of +the \TeX\ box, +you have to adjust the box in the normal \LaTeX\ way: +\begin{example} +\newsavebox{\foo} +\savebox{\foo}{\parbox{1in}{Save +the whales Save the whale +Save the whale +Save the whale}}% +Start +\begin{turn}{45}\usebox{\foo}\end{turn} +End +\end{example} +\begin{example} +\savebox{\foo}{\parbox[b]{1in}{Save +the whales Save the whale +Save the whale +Save the whale}}% +Start +\begin{turn}{45}\usebox{\foo}\end{turn} +End +\end{example} + +\def\testrot#1{% +\savebox{\foo}{\parbox{1in}{Save +the whales Save the whale Save the whale Save the whale}}% +\framebox{---\begin{turn}{#1}\framebox{\usebox{\foo}}\end{turn}---}}% + +\begin{figure*} +\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|} +\hline +\testrot{0} &\testrot{-40}&\testrot{-80}\\ +0\degrees & -40\degrees & -80\degrees \\ +\hline +\testrot{-120}&\testrot{-160}&\testrot{-200}\\ +120\degrees & -160\degrees & -200\degrees \\ +\hline +\testrot{-240}&\testrot{-280}&\testrot{-320}\\ +-240\degrees & -280\degrees & -320\degrees \\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\caption{Rotation of paragraphs between 0 and -320 degrees \label{angles1}} +\end{figure*} + +\begin{figure*} +\begin{tabular}{|c|c|c|} +\hline +\testrot{-180} &\testrot{40}&\testrot{80}\\ +-180\degrees & 40\degrees & 80\degrees \\ +\hline +\testrot{120}&\testrot{160}&\testrot{200}\\ +120\degrees & 160\degrees & 200\degrees \\ +\hline +\testrot{240}&\testrot{280}&\testrot{320}\\ +240\degrees & 280\degrees & 320\degrees \\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\caption{Rotation of paragraphs between 0 and 320 degrees\label{angles2}} +\end{figure*} + + +We can set tabular material in this way; at the same time, we +demonstrate that the rotation can be nested: +\begin{example} +\begin{sideways} +\rule{1in}{0pt} +\begin{tabular}{|lr|} +\em Word & \begin{rotate}{90}% +Occurrences\end{rotate} +\\ +\hline +hello & 33\\ +goodbye & 34\\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\end{sideways} +\end{example} + +\begin{example} +\begin{quote} +\rule{0pt}{1.5in}\begin{tabular}{rrr} +\begin{rotate}{45}Column 1\end{rotate}& +\begin{rotate}{45}Column 2\end{rotate}& +\begin{rotate}{45}Column 3\end{rotate}\\ +\hline +1& 2& 3\\ +4& 5& 6\\ +7& 8& 9\\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\end{quote} +\end{example} + +\begin{example} +\begin{quote} +\begin{tabular}{rrr} +\begin{turn}{45}Column 1\end{turn}& +\begin{turn}{45}Column 2\end{turn}& +\begin{turn}{45}Column 3\end{turn}\\ +\hline +1& 2& 3\\ +4& 5& 6\\ +7& 8& 9\\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\end{quote} +\end{example} + +\begin{example} +\begin{quote} +\rule{0pt}{1.5in}\begin{tabular}{rrr} +\begin{rotate}{45}Column 1\end{rotate} +\rule{.5cm}{0pt}& +\begin{rotate}{45}Column 2\end{rotate} +\rule{.5cm}{0pt}& +\begin{rotate}{45}Column 3\end{rotate} +\rule{.5cm}{0pt}\\ +\hline +1& 2& 3\\ +4& 5& 6\\ +7& 8& 9\\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\end{quote} +\end{example} + +\begin{example} +\begin{sideways} +\begin{tabular}{|l|c|c|c|c|c|p{1in}|} +\hline +&&\multicolumn{4}{c}{NUMBER OF SITES}\vline &ACCEPT or\\ +\cline{3-6} &STUDY AREA&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{% +IN BOUNDARY ZONE}\vline&REJECT\\ +\cline{4-6}&&&&\multicolumn{2}{c}{EXPECTED} +\vline&NULL\\ +\cline{5-6}&&TOT&OBS&FROM&TO&HYPOTH\\ +\cline{2-7} +&FULL SAMPLE&41&31&10.3&27.0&REJECT\\ +&SAMPLE AREA 1&23&16&4.3&16.7&ACCEPT\\ +&SAMPLE AREA 2&18&15&2.8&13.7&REJECT\\ +&RUSHEN&13&9&1.2&10.4&ACCEPT\\ +&ARBORY&10&7&0.6&8.8&ACCEPT\\ +&MAROWN&10&8&0.4&8.6&ACCEPT\\ +\rule{0.5cm}{0pt} +\begin{rotate}{90}PRIMARY UNITS% +\end{rotate}\rule{0.5cm}{0pt} +&SANTON&8&7&0.0&7.3&ACCEPT\\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\end{sideways} +\end{example} + +If you are interested in setting rotated material in tables or +figures, this presents no problem. Figure \ref{fig1} shows how +PostScript files which are being incorporated using can be +rotated at will, while Figure \ref{fig2} shows, in contrast, how +`includegraphics' itself handles rotation. It is also possible to rotate the +whole of the figure environment, including caption, +by using the `sidewaysfigure' ands `sidewaystable' environments +in place of `figure' and `table'. + +Sideways figures and tables always take up the whole page. They can be +rotated so that the bottom ot the figures is on the left or the right; +the default is to always turn to the right. If the `twoside' option +has been given to the main document class, this package then starts +rotating sideways figures according to the page number (this requires +two passes through \LaTeX{} at least). If you want the `twoside' +option, but want the figures always in one direction, use the +`figuresright' or `riguresleft' options to `rotating'. + +The code used to produce figures +\ref{rotfloat1}--\ref{rotfloat4} is as follows: +\begin{description} + +\item[Figure \ref{rotfloat1}] +{\small\begin{verbatim} +\begin{sidewaystable} +\centering +\caption{This is a narrow table, which should be centred vertically +on the final page.\label{rotfloat1}} + \begin{tabular}{|ll|} +\hline + a & b \\ + c & d \\ + e & f \\ + g & h \\ + i & j \\ +\hline + \end{tabular} +\end{sidewaystable} +\end{verbatim} +} + +\item[Figure \ref{rotfloat2}] +{\scriptsize\begin{verbatim} +\begin{sidewaystable} +\centering +\begin{tabular}{|llllllllp{1in}lp{1in}|} +\hline +Context &Length &Breadth/ &Depth &Profile &Pottery &Flint &Animal &Stone &Other &C14 Dates \\ + & &Diameter & & & & & +Bones&&&\\ +\hline +&&&&&&&&&&\\ +\multicolumn{10}{|l}{\bf Grooved Ware}&\\ +784 &--- &0.9m &0.18m &Sloping U &P1 &$\times$46 & $\times$8 && $\times$2 bone& 2150$\pm$ 100 BC\\ +785 &--- &1.00m &0.12 &Sloping U &P2--4 &$\times$23 & $\times$21 & Hammerstone &---&---\\ +962 &--- &1.37m &0.20m &Sloping U &P5--6 &$\times$48 & $\times$57* & ---& ---&1990 $\pm$ 80 BC (Layer 4) 1870 $\pm$90 BC (Layer 1)\\ +983 &0.83m &0.73m &0.25m &Stepped U &--- &$\times$18 & $\times$8 & ---& Fired clay&---\\ +&&&&&&&&&&\\ +\multicolumn{10}{|l}{\bf Beaker}&\\ +552 &--- &0.68m &0.12m &Saucer &P7--14 &--- & --- & --- &--- &---\\ +790 &--- &0.60m &0.25m &U &P15 &$\times$12 & --- & Quartzite-lump&--- &---\\ +794 &2.89m &0.75m &0.25m &Irreg. &P16 &$\times$3 & --- & --- &--- &---\\ +\hline +\end{tabular} + +\caption[Grooved Ware and Beaker Features, their Finds and +Radiocarbon Dates]{Grooved Ware and Beaker Features, their +Finds and Radiocarbon Dates; For a breakdown of the Pottery +Assemblages see Tables I and III; for +the Flints see Tables II and IV; for the +Animal Bones see Table V.}\label{rotfloat2} +\end{sidewaystable} +\end{verbatim} +} + +\item[Figure \ref{rotfloat3}] +{\small\begin{verbatim} +\begin{table} +\centering +\rotcaption{Minimum number of individuals; effect of rotating table +and caption separately}\label{rotfloat3}% +\begin{sideways} +\begin{tabular}[b]{cccccccccp{1cm}} +\hline +Phase&Total&Cattle&Sheep&Pig&Red Deer&Horse&Dog&Goat&Other\\ +\hline +&1121&54&12&32&1&1&1&1&1 polecat\\ +3&8255&58&6&35&1&1&1&1&1 roe deer, 1 hare, 1 cat, 1 otter\\ +4&543&45&6&45&4&1&1&---&---\\ +\hline +&9919&157&24&112&6&3&3&2&5\\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\end{sideways} +\end{table} +\end{verbatim} +} + +\item[Figure \ref{rotfloat4}] +{\small\begin{verbatim} +\begin{sidewaysfigure} + \centering + \includegraphics[width=.8\textheight,height=.4\textwidth]{cat} +\caption{A pathetically squashed rotated pussycat}\label{rotfloat4} +\end{sidewaysfigure} +\end{verbatim} +} +\end{description} + +\begin{figure} +\begin{example} +---\begin{turn}{156} +\includegraphics[width=1in]{cat} +\end{turn}--- +\end{example} + +\begin{example} +---\begin{sideways} +\includegraphics[width=1in]{cat} +\end{sideways}--- +\end{example} + +\begin{example} +---\includegraphics[width=1in]{cat}--- +\end{example} +\caption{A normal, and sideways, pictures within a figure\label{fig1}} +\end{figure} + +\begin{figure} +\begin{example} +\includegraphics[width=1in,% +angle=-56]{cat} +\end{example} + +\caption{Figures rotated with `includegraphics'\label{fig2}} +\end{figure} +\begin{sidewaystable} +\centering +\caption{This is a narrow table, which should be centred vertically +on the final page.\label{rotfloat1}} + \begin{tabular}{|ll|} +\hline + a & b \\ + c & d \\ + e & f \\ + g & h \\ + i & j \\ +\hline + \end{tabular} +\end{sidewaystable} + + + +\begin{sidewaystable} +\centering +\begin{tabular}{|llllllllp{1in}lp{1in}|} +\hline +Context &Length &Breadth/ &Depth &Profile &Pottery &Flint &Animal &Stone &Other &C14 Dates \\ + & &Diameter & & & & & +Bones&&&\\ +\hline +&&&&&&&&&&\\ +\multicolumn{10}{|l}{\bf Grooved Ware}&\\ +784 &--- &0.9m &0.18m &Sloping U &P1 &$\times$46 & $\times$8 && $\times$2 bone& 2150$\pm$ 100 BC\\ +785 &--- &1.00m &0.12 &Sloping U &P2--4 &$\times$23 & $\times$21 & Hammerstone &---&---\\ +962 &--- &1.37m &0.20m &Sloping U &P5--6 &$\times$48 & $\times$57* & ---& ---&1990 $\pm$ 80 BC (Layer 4) 1870 $\pm$90 BC (Layer 1)\\ +983 &0.83m &0.73m &0.25m &Stepped U &--- &$\times$18 & $\times$8 & ---& Fired clay&---\\ +&&&&&&&&&&\\ +\multicolumn{10}{|l}{\bf Beaker}&\\ +552 &--- &0.68m &0.12m &Saucer &P7--14 &--- & --- & --- &--- &---\\ +790 &--- &0.60m &0.25m &U &P15 &$\times$12 & --- & Quartzite-lump&--- &---\\ +794 &2.89m &0.75m &0.25m &Irreg. &P16 &$\times$3 & --- & --- &--- &---\\ +\hline +\end{tabular} + +\caption[Grooved Ware and Beaker Features, their Finds and +Radiocarbon Dates]{Grooved Ware and Beaker Features, their +Finds and Radiocarbon Dates; For a breakdown of the Pottery +Assemblages see Tables I and III; for +the Flints see Tables II and IV; for the +Animal Bones see Table V.}\label{rotfloat2} +\end{sidewaystable} + +\begin{table} +\centering +\hbox{ +\rotcaption{Minimum number of individuals; effect of rotating table +and caption separately}\label{rotfloat3}% +\begin{sideways} +\begin{tabular}[t]{cccccccccp{1cm}} +\hline +Phase&Total&Cattle&Sheep&Pig&Red Deer&Horse&Dog&Goat&Other\\ +\hline +&1121&54&12&32&1&1&1&1&1 polecat\\ +3&8255&58&6&35&1&1&1&1&1 roe deer, 1 hare, 1 cat, 1 otter\\ +4&543&45&6&45&4&1&1&---&---\\ +\hline +&9919&157&24&112&6&3&3&2&5\\ +\hline +\end{tabular} +\end{sideways} +} +\end{table} + + +\begin{sidewaysfigure} + \centerline{\includegraphics[width=.8\textheight,height=.4\textwidth]{cat}} +\caption{A pathetically squashed rotated pussycat (1)} +\end{sidewaysfigure} + +\begin{sidewaysfigure} + \centerline{\includegraphics[width=.8\textheight,height=.4\textwidth]{cat}} +\caption{A pathetically squashed rotated pussycat (2)} +\end{sidewaysfigure} + +\begin{sidewaysfigure} + \centerline{\includegraphics[width=.8\textheight,height=.4\textwidth]{cat}} +\caption{A pathetically squashed rotated pussycat (3)} +\end{sidewaysfigure} + +\begin{sidewaysfigure} + \centerline{\includegraphics[width=.8\textheight,height=.4\textwidth]{cat}} +\caption{A pathetically squashed rotated pussycat (4)} +\end{sidewaysfigure} + +\begin{sidewaysfigure} + \centerline{\includegraphics[width=.8\textheight,height=.4\textwidth]{cat}} +\caption{A pathetically squashed rotated pussycat}\label{rotfloat4} +\end{sidewaysfigure} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/trig.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/trig.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2ad8cb7b53b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex-dev/graphics/trig.pdf |